Loading...
The URL can be used to link to this page
Your browser does not support the video tag.
Home
My WebLink
About
C2025-232 - 10/21/2025 - Approved
CONTRACT DOCUMENTS C-s FOR CONSTRUCTION OF COMMODORE PARK IMPROVEMENTS, PHASE 1 [Bond 2022] PROJECT NUMBER: 23173 0 CORPOR 11 1852 TURNER � RAMIREZ A R C H I T E C T S 3751 South Alameda Street Corpus Christi, Texas 78411 TRA PROJECT NO. 2023-24 July 3, 2025 Record Drawing Number: CP-301 [Addendum 02 — August 27, 2025] DATE(MM/DD/YYYY) ACOR" CERTIFICATE OF LIABILITY INSURANCE F10/24/2025 THIS CERTIFICATE IS ISSUED AS A MATTER OF INFORMATION ONLY AND CONFERS NO RIGHTS UPON THE CERTIFICATE HOLDER. THIS CERTIFICATE DOES NOT AFFIRMATIVELY OR NEGATIVELY AMEND, EXTEND OR ALTER THE COVERAGE AFFORDED BY THE POLICIES BELOW. THIS CERTIFICATE OF INSURANCE DOES NOT CONSTITUTE A CONTRACT BETWEEN THE ISSUING INSURER(S), AUTHORIZED REPRESENTATIVE OR PRODUCER,AND THE CERTIFICATE HOLDER. IMPORTANT: If the certificate holder is an ADDITIONAL INSURED,the policy(ies) must have ADDITIONAL INSURED provisions or be endorsed. If SUBROGATION IS WAIVED, subject to the terms and conditions of the policy, certain policies may require an endorsement. A statement on this certificate does not confer rights to the certificate holder in lieu of such endorsement(s). PRODUCER CONTACT NAME: Nlchelle Alger Acrisure South Insurance Services, LLC PHONE FAX 5057 Keller Springs Rd. A/c No Ext: 972-201-0109 A/c No):972-201-0123 Suite 200 ADDRESS: NAlger@acrisure.com Addison TX 75001 INSURER(S)AFFORDING COVERAGE NAIC# INSURERA:Amerisure Insurance Company 19488 INSURED WEAV&JA-02 INSURER B:Amerisure Mutual Insurance Company 23396 Weaver&Jacobs Constructors, Inc. 301 Cooperative Way INSURER C:Westchester Fire Insurance Company 10030 Cuero TX 77954 INSURERD: Indian Harbor Insurance Company 36940 INSURER E: INSURER F: COVERAGES CERTIFICATE NUMBER:1720460629 REVISION NUMBER: THIS IS TO CERTIFY THAT THE POLICIES OF INSURANCE LISTED BELOW HAVE BEEN ISSUED TO THE INSURED NAMED ABOVE FOR THE POLICY PERIOD INDICATED. NOTWITHSTANDING ANY REQUIREMENT, TERM OR CONDITION OF ANY CONTRACT OR OTHER DOCUMENT WITH RESPECT TO WHICH THIS CERTIFICATE MAY BE ISSUED OR MAY PERTAIN, THE INSURANCE AFFORDED BY THE POLICIES DESCRIBED HEREIN IS SUBJECT TO ALL THE TERMS, EXCLUSIONS AND CONDITIONS OF SUCH POLICIES.LIMITS SHOWN MAY HAVE BEEN REDUCED BY PAID CLAIMS. INSR TYPE OF INSURANCE ADDL SUBR POLICY EFF POLICY EXP LIMITS LTR I POLICY NUMBER MM/DD/YYYY MM/DD/YYYY A X COMMERCIAL GENERAL LIABILITY CPP20357111902 3/15/2025 3/15/2026 EACH OCCURRENCE $1,000,000 CLAIMS-MADE OCCUR DAMAGE TO RENTED PREMISES Ea occurrence $1,000,000 MED EXP(Any one person) $10,000 PERSONAL&ADV INJURY $1,000,000 GEN'L AGGREGATE LIMIT APPLIES PER: GENERAL AGGREGATE $2,000,000 POLICY L/'-1 PRO LOC PRODUCTS-COMP/OP AGG $2,000,000 OTHER: $ B AUTOMOBILE LIABILITY CA20357101902 3/15/2025 3/15/2026 COMBINidED SINGLE LIMIT $1,000,000 Ea accent X ANY AUTO BODILY INJURY(Per person) $ OWNED SCHEDULED BODILY INJURY(Per accident) $ AUTOS ONLY AUTOS X HIRED X NON-OWNED PROPERTY DAMAGE $ AUTOS ONLY AUTOS ONLY Per accident A X UMBRELLALIAB X OCCUR CU20357121901 3/15/2025 3/15/2026 EACH OCCURRENCE $5,000,000 EXCESS LIAB CLAIMS-MADE AGGREGATE $5,000,000 DED X RETENTION$n $ B WORKERS COMPENSATION WC20357131902 3/15/2025 3/15/2026 X PER OTH- AND EMPLOYERS'LIABILITY Y/N STATUTE ER ANYPROPRIETOR/PARTNER/EXECUTIVE E.L.EACH ACCIDENT $1,000,000 OFFICER/MEMBER EXCLUDED? N/A (Mandatory in NH) E.L.DISEASE-EA EMPLOYEE $1,000,000 If yes,describe under DESCRIPTION OF OPERATIONS below E.L.DISEASE-POLICY LIMIT $1,000,000 D Pollution/Professional CE0742133602 3/15/2025 3/15/2026 Occurrence/Aggregate 5,000,000 C Builders Risk 123667502 001 3/15/2025 3/15/2026 See Limits Below DESCRIPTION OF OPERATIONS/LOCATIONS/VEHICLES (ACORD 101,Additional Remarks Schedule,may be attached if more space is required) The General Liability,Auto,and Umbrella policies include a blanket additional insured endorsement that provides additional insured status to the certificate holder only when there is a written contract between the named insured and the certificate holder that requires such status. The General Liability policy includes a blanket additional insured endorsement that provides additional insured status to the certificate holder for ongoing and completed operations only when there is written contract between the named insured and the certificate holder that requires such status. The General Liability,Auto,and Umbrella policies contain an endorsement with primary and noncontributory wording that may apply only when there is a written contract between the named insured and the certificate holder that may require such status. See Attached... CERTIFICATE HOLDER CANCELLATION SHOULD ANY OF THE ABOVE DESCRIBED POLICIES BE CANCELLED BEFORE THE EXPIRATION DATE THEREOF, NOTICE WILL BE DELIVERED IN ACCORDANCE WITH THE POLICY PROVISIONS. City of Corpus Christi, Texas 1201 Leopard Street AUTHORIZED REPRESENTATIVE Corpus Christi TX 78401 — -- �1-i- @ 1988-2015 ACORD CORPORATION. All rights reserved. ACORD 25(2016/03) The ACORD name and logo are registered marks of ACORD AGENCY CUSTOMER ID: WEAV&JA-02 LOC#: ACC o ADDITIONAL REMARKS SCHEDULE Page 1 of 1 AGENCY NAMED INSURED Acrisure South Insurance Services, LLC Weaver&Jacobs Constructors, Inc. 301 Cooperative Way POLICY NUMBER Cuero TX 77954 CARRIER NAIC CODE EFFECTIVE DATE: ADDITIONAL REMARKS THIS ADDITIONAL REMARKS FORM IS A SCHEDULE TO ACORD FORM, FORM NUMBER: 25 FORM TITLE: CERTIFICATE OF LIABILITY INSURANCE The General Liability,Auto, Umbrella,and Workers Compensation policies include a blanket waiver of subrogation endorsement that provides this feature only when there is a written contract between the named insured and the certificate holder that requires this. The Contractors Equipment policy includes a blanket Loss Payee endorsement that provides loss payee status to the certificate holder as their interest may appear. The Automobile policy includes a Loss Payee endorsement that provides loss payee status to the certificate holder as their interest may appear. The Property policy includes a Loss Payee endorsement that provides loss payee status to the certificate holder as their interest may appear. Limits: $40,000,000 Joisted Masonry Construction-Per Occurrence $2,500,000 Wood Frame-Per Occurrence $10,000,000 Named Windstorm-Per Occurrence $5,000,000 Flood-Per Occurrence/Annual Aggregate $5,000,000 Earth Movement-Per Occurrence/Annual Aggregate $500,000 Soft Costs/Additional Expenses $1,000,000 Property In Transit $1,000,000 Temporary Off-Site Storage Includes coverage for these counties: Aransas, Brazoria, Calhoun,Cameron,Chambers,Galveston, Harris,Jackson,Jefferson, Kennedy, Kleberg,Matagorda, Nueces,Orange, Refugio,San Patricio,Willacy RE:Commodore Park Improvements, Phase 1, 14202 Commodores Dr,Corpus Christi,Texas 78418/Contract Amount:$3,448,147.00 Certificate Holder includes City of Corpus Christi,Texas. ACORD 101 (2008/01) ©2008 ACORD CORPORATION. All rights reserved. The ACORD name and logo are registered marks of ACORD City of Corpus Christi 00 61 13 PERFORMANCE BOND BOND NO. 8056405 2025/10/29 11:21:18 Contractor as Principal Surety Name:Weaver&Jacobs Constructors, Inc. Name: Mailing address (principal place of business): Mailing address(principal place of business): 437 Opportunity Dr. Amerisure Mutual Insurance Company Corpus Christi,TX 78405 P. 0. BOX 9098, Farmington Hills, MI 48333 Physical address(principal place of business): Owner 26777 Halsted Raod Name: City of Corpus Christi,Texas Farmington Hills, MI 48331 Mailing address (principal place of business): Engineering Services Surety is a corporation organized and existing 1201 Leopard Street under the laws of the state of: Michigan Corpus Christi,Texas 78401 By submitting this Bond,Surety affirms its authority to do business in the State of Texas and Contract its license to execute bonds in the State of Texas. Project name and number: Telephone(main number): COMMODORE PARK IMPROVEMENTS, PHASE 1 (248) 615-9000 Project Number. 23171 Telephone(for notice of claim): Local Agent for Surety Name: Acrisure, LLC Award Date of the Contract:October 21, 2024 Address: 5057 Keller Springs Rd, Ste 200 Contract Price: 3,448,147.00 Addison, TX 75001 Telephone: (972) 201-0100 Bond Email Address: 'newb acrisure.com Date of Bond: October 24 2025 The address of the surety company to which any notice of claim should be sent may be obtained (Date of Bond cannot be earlier than Award Date from the Texas Dept. of Insurance by calling the of the Contract) following toll free number.1-800-252-3439 Performance Bond 00 61 13-1 Rev 5/2025 COMMODORE PARK IMPROVEMENTS, PHASE 1 Project Number. 23171 Surety and Contractor,intending to be legally bound and obligated to Owner do each cause this Performance Bond to be duly executed on its behalf by its authorized officer, agent or representative. The Principal and Surety bind themselves, and their heirs, administrators, executors,successors and assigns,jointly and severally to this bond. The condition of this obligation is such that if the Contractor as Principal faithfully performs the Work through the Warranty Period required by the Contract Documents then this obligation shall be null and void;otherwise the obligation is to remain in full force and effect. The Contract Documents between Owner and Contractor is incorporated by reference into this Statutory Performance Bond,pursuant to Chapter 2253 of the Texas Government Code. Provisions of the bond shall be pursuant to the terms and provisions of Chapter 2253 and Chapter 2269 of the Texas Government Code,as amended,and all liabilities on this bond shall be determined in accordance with the provisions of said Chapter to the same extent as if it were copied at length herein. Venue shall lie exclusively in Nueces County, Texas. Surety agrees to be bound by the mediation clause in Article 22 of the Contract Documents between Owner and Contractor,said Contract Documents are incorporated by reference in this Bond. ContractoasPP cipa Surety Signature. Signature. �Q Name: Name: Debra Lee Moon Title: Title: Attorney-in-Fact Email Address: bV �(�(' j N ei( fan ess: dmoon(@acrisure.com (Attach Power of Attorney and place surety seal below) END OF SECTION Performance Bond 00 61 13-2 Rev 5/2025 COMMODORE PARK IMPROVEMENTS, PHASE 1 Project Number. 23171 00 61 16 PAYMENT BOND BOND NO. 8056405 Contractor as Principal Surety Name: Weaver&Jacobs Constructors, Inc. Name: Mailing address(principal place of business): Mailing address(principal place of business): 437 Opportunity Dr. Amerisure Mutual Insurance Company Corpus Christi, TX 78405 P. 0. BOX 9098, Farmington Hills, MI 48333 Physical address(principal place of business): Owner 26777 Halsted Raod Name: City of Corpus Christi,Texas Farmington Hills, MI 48331 Mailing address(principal place of business): Engineering Services Surety is a corporation organized and existing 1201 Leopard Street under the laws of the state of: Michigan Corpus Christi,Texas 78401 By submitting this Bond,Surety affirms its authority to do business in the State of Texas and Contract its license to execute bonds in the State of Texas. Project name and number: Telephone(main number): COMMODORE PARK IMPROVEMENTS, PHASE 1 (248)615-9000 Project Number. 23171 Telephone (for notice of claim): Local Agent for Surety Name: Acrisure, LLC Award Date of the Contract: October 21, 2024 Address: 5057 Keller Springs Rd, Ste 200 Contract Price:3,448,147.00 Addison, TX 75001 Bond Telephone: (972) 201-0100 Email Address: jnewby@acrisure.com Date of Bond: October 24, 2025 The address of the surety company to which any (Date of Bond cannot be earlier than Award Date notice of claim should be sent may be obtained of Contract) from the Texas Dept. of Insurance by calling the following toll free number.1-800-252-3439 Payment Bond Form 00 61 16-1 5/2024 COMMODORE PARK IMPROVEMENTS, PHASE 1 Project Number. 23171 Surety and Contractor,intending to be legally bound and obligated to Owner do each cause this Payment Bond to be duly executed on its behalf by its authorized officer, agent or representative. The Principal and Surety bind themselves, and their heirs,administrators,executors,successors and assigns,jointly and severally to this bond. The condition of this obligation is such that if the Contractor as Principal pays all claimants providing labor or materials to him or to a Subcontractor in the prosecution of the Work required by the Contract Documents then this obligation shall be null and void;otherwise the obligation is to remain in full force and effect. Provisions of the bond shall be pursuant to the terms and provisions of Chapter 2253 and Chapter 2269 of the Texas Government Code as amended and all liabilities on this bond shall be determined in accordance with the provisions of said Chapter to the same extent as if it were copied at length herein. Venue shall lie exclusively in Nueces County, Texas for any legal action. Contract as Pri Surety Signature: nature: �� Name: ((�f�� _ (�}� Name: Debra Lee Moon Title: pS��Q�-`- Title: Attorney-in-Fact Email Address: ObZ_k'd �k)t�,�e ,CMMW Address: dmoon@acrisure.com (Attach Power of Attorney and place surety seal below) END OF SECTION Payment Bond Form 00 61 16-2 5/2024 COMMODORE PARK IMPROVEMENTS, PHASE 1 Project Number. 23171 AMERISURE AMERISURE MUTUAL INSURANCE COMPANY SURETY AMERISURE INSURANCE COMPANY AMERISURE PARTNERS INSURANCE COMPANY POWER OF ATTORNEY KNOW ALL MEN BY THESE PRESENTS:That Amerisure Mutual Insurance Company,Amerisure Insurance Company and Amerisure Partners Insurance Company are corporations duly organized under the laws of the State of Michigan(herein collectively the"Companies"),and that the Companies do hereby make,constitute and appoint: DEBRA LEE MOON, ANDREA ROSE CRAWFORD, SANDRA LEE RONEY, FAITH ANN HILTY, TROY RUSSELL KEY, COLIN E. CONLY,ALLYSON W. DEAN,ANDREW PATRICK CLARK, and JOHN WILLIAM NEWBY AcAsure,LLC dba Mullis Newby Hurst Of its true and lawful Attomey(s)-in Fact,each in their separate capacity if more than one is named above,to sign,execute, seal and acknowledge,for and on its behalf and as its act and deed,bonds or others writings obligatory in the nature of a bond on behalfofeach ofsaid Companies, as surety,on contracts or suretyship as are or may be required or permitted by law,regulation,contract or otherwise,provided that no bond or undertaking or contract or suretyship executed under this authority shall exceed the amount of: ONE HUNDRED MILLION ($100,000,000.00) DOLLARS 'Phis Power of Attorney is granted and signed by facsimile under and by the authority of the following Resolutions adopted by the Boards of Directors of Amerisure Mutual Insurance Company,Amerisure Insurance Company and Amerisure Partners Insurance Company at meetings duly called and held on February 17,2022. "RESOLVED,that any two of the President& Chief Executive Officer,the Chief Financial Officer&Treasurer,the Senior Vice President Surety,the Vice President Surety,or the General Counsel&Corporate Secretary be,and each or any of them hereby is authorized to execute,a Power of Attorney qualifying the attorney-in-fact named in the given Power of Attorney to execute on behalf of the Company bonds, undertakings and all contracts of surety,and that President&Chief Executive Officer,Chief Financial Officer&"Treasurer or General Counsel&Corporate Secretary each or any of them hereby is authorized to attest to the execution of any such Power of Attorney and to attach therein the seal of the Company; FURTHER RESOLVED,that the signature of such officers and the seal of the Company may be affixed to any such Power of Attorney or to anycertificate relating thereto electronically/digitally or by facsimile,and any such Power of Attorney or certificate bearing such electronic/digital or facsimile signatures or electronic/digital or facsimile seal shall be binding upon the Company when so affixed and in the fiuure with regard to any bond,undertaking or contract of surety to which it is attached; FURTHER RESOLVED,that any work carried out by the attornev-in-fact nin-snant to this resolution shall be valid and binding upon the Company." � Rp1 IN .... Q SURq INSU �� ... By : poa I0o O y Michael A.Ito,Senior Vice President Surety <2;`o F.•n; Po" SEAL m= `�_ SEAL SEAL •,� ern•. 2000 �; -d 196E3 o; //+� p. 2000 0. ?`aa o' `'�!!ctnOP�'•`�a By �y......... � b �s Aaron Green,Vice President Surety IN WITNESS WHEREOF,Amerisure Mutual Insurance Company,Amerisure Insurance Company and Amerisure Partners Insurance Company have caused their official seals to be hereunto affixed,and these presents to be signed by their authorized officers this 26th day of April 2023. Amerisure Mutual Insurance Company Amerisure Insurance Company Amerisure Partners Insurance Company State of Illinois County of Kane On this 26th day of April 20 23 before me,a Notary Public personally appeared Michael A.Ito,of Amerisure Mutual Insurance Company,Amerisure Insurance Company and Amerisure Partners Insurance Company and Aaron Green of Amerisure Mutual Insurance Company,Amerisure Insurance Company and Amerisure Partners Insurance Company,personally known to me,who being by me duly sworn,acknowledged that they signed the above Power of Attorney as officers of and acknowledged said instrument to be the voluntary act and deed of their respective companies. OFFICIAL SEAL /I1 ) M KENNY NOTARY PUBLIC,STATE OF IWNOIS M.Kenny,Notary Public MY COMMISSION SOIREE 14/042026 I,Christopher M.Spaude,the duly elected Chief Financial Officer&Treasurer of Amerisure Mutual Insurance Company,Amerisure Insurance Company and Amerisure Partners Insurance Company,do hereby certify and attest that the above and foregoing is a true and correct copy of a Power ofAttomey executed by said Companies,which remains in full force and effect. IN WITNESS WHEREOF,I have set my hand and affixed the seals of the Companies this 24tth7 day of October 2025 Christopher M.Spaude,Chief Financial Officer&Treasurer A M E R I S U R E Amerisure Mutual Insurance Company ,SURETY Amerisure Insurance Company P.O.Box 9098 Farmington Hills,MI 48333-9098 Texas Important Notice AVISO IMPORTANTE IMPORTANT NOTICE Para obtener informacion o para presentar una queja: To obtain information or make a complaint: Usted puede llamar al numero de telefono gratuito de You may call Amerisure Surety's toll-free telephone Amerisure Surety's para obtener informacio'n o para number for information or to make a complaint at: presentar una queja al: 1-800-257-1900 1-800-257-1900 You may contact the Texas Department of Insurance to Usted puede comunicarse con el Departamento de Se-guros obtain information on companies,coverages,rights,or de Texas para obtener informacion sobre com-panias, complaints at: coberturas,derechos,o quejas al: 1-800-252-3439 1-800-252-3439 You may write the Texas Department of Insurance: Usted puede escribir al Departamento P.O. Box 12030 de Seguros de Texas a: Austin,TX 78711-2030 P.O. Box 12030 Fax: (512)490-1007 Austin,TX 78711-2030 Web: www.tdi.texas.gov Fax: (512)490-1007 E-mail:ConsumerProtection@tdi.texas.gov Sitio web: www.tdi.texas.gov E-mail: ConsumerProtection@tdi.texas.gov PREMIUM OR CLAIM DISPUTES: Should you have a dispute concerning your premium or DISPUTAS POR PRIMAS DE SEGUROS O about a claim,you should contact the company first. If the RECLAMACIONES: dispute is not resolved,you may contact the Texas Si tiene una disputa relacionada con su prima de seguro Department of Insurance. 0 con una reclamacion,usted debe comunicarse con la compania primero. Si]a disputa no es resuelta,usted ATTACH THIS NOTICE TO YOUR POLICY: puede comunicarse con el Departamento de Seguros de This notice is for information only and does not become a Texas. part or condition of the attached document. ADJUNTE ESTE AVISO A SU POLIZA: Este aviso es solamente para propositos infornativos y no se con-vierte en parte o en condicion del documento adjunto. gYUS O v �N�OgPORPtE� 1852 00 52 23 AGREEMENT This Agreement, for the Project awarded on October 21, 2025, is between the City of Corpus Christi (Owner) and Weaver and JacobsConstructors Inc. (Contractor). Owner and Contractor agree as follows: ARTICLE 1—WORK 1.01 Contractor shall complete all Work as specified or indicated in the Contract Documents. The Work is generally described as: City of Corpus Christi Commodore Park Improvements, Phase 1 Project No. 23173 ARTICLE 2—DESIGNER AND OWNER'S AUTHORIZED REPRESENTATIVE 2.01 The Project has been designed by: ARCHITECT OF RECORD Turner I Ramirez Architects 3751 South Alameda Street Corpus Christi,Texas 78411 Contact:Jay Porterfield,AIA I jay@trarch.com 2.02 The Owner's Authorized Representative for this Project is: Joseph Johnson,Assistant Director Construction Management 4917 Holly Road, Building 5 Corpus Christi,Texas 78411 JosephJ@cctexas.com ARTICLE 3—CONTRACT TIMES 3.01 Contract Times A. The Work is required to be substantially completed within Three Hundred(300) calendar days after the date when the Contract Times commence to run as provided in the Notice to Proceed and is to be completed and ready for final payment in accordance with Paragraph 17.16 of the General Conditions within Three Hundred Thirty(330) calendar days after the date when the Contract Times commence to run. Agreement 00 52 23- 1 Commodore Park Improvements, Phase 1-#23173 Rev 12/2021 B. Performance of the Work is required as shown in Paragraph 7.02 of the General Conditions. C. Milestones, and the dates for completion of each,are as defined in Section 0135 00 SPECIAL PROCEDURES. 3.02 Liquidated Damages A. Owner and Contractor recognize that time limits for specified Milestones, Substantial Completion, and completion and readiness for Final Payment as stated in the Contract Documents are of the essence of the Contract. Owner and Contractor recognize that the Owner will suffer financial loss if the Work is not completed within the times specified in Paragraph 3.01 and as adjusted in accordance with Paragraph 11.05 of the General Conditions. Owner and Contractor also recognize the delays, expense, and difficulties involved in proving in a legal or arbitration proceeding the actual loss suffered by Owner if the Work is not completed on time. Accordingly, instead of requiring any such proof,Owner and Contractor agree that as liquidated damages for delay(but not as a penalty): 1. Substantial Completion: Contractor shall pay Owner $400.00 for each day that expires after the time specified in Paragraph 3.01 for Substantial Completion until the Work is substantially complete. 2. Completion of the Remaining Work: Contractor agrees to pay Owner$400.00 for each day that expires after the time specified in Paragraph 3.01 for completion and readiness for final payment until the Work is completed and ready for final payment in accordance with Paragraph 17.16 of the General Conditions. 3. Liquidated damages for failing to timely attain Substantial Completion and Final Completion are not additive and will not be imposed concurrently. 4. Milestones: Contractor agrees to pay Owner liquidated damages as stipulated in SECTION 0135 00 SPECIAL PROCEDURES for failure to meet Milestone completions. 5. The Owner will determine whether the Work has been completed within the Contract Times. B. Owner is not required to only assess liquidated damages, and Owner may elect to pursue its actual damages resulting from the failure of Contractor to complete the Work in accordance with the requirements of the Contract Documents. ARTICLE 4—CONTRACT PRICE 4.01 Owner will pay Contractor for completion of the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents at the unit prices shown in the attached BID FORM. Unit prices have been computed in accordance with Paragraph 15.03 of the General Conditions. Contractor acknowledges that estimated quantities are not guaranteed, and were solely for the purpose of comparing Bids, and final payment for all unit price items will be based on actual quantities, determined as provided in the Contract Documents. Total Base Bid Price $ 3,448,147.00 Agreement 00 52 23-2 Commodore Park Improvements, Phase 1-#23173 Rev 12/2021 ARTICLE 5—PAYMENT PROCEDURES 5.01 Submit Applications for Payment in accordance with Article 17 of the General Conditions. Applications for Payment will be processed by the OAR as provided in the General Conditions. 5.02 Progress Payments; Retainage: A. The Owner will make progress payments on or about the 25th day of each month during performance of the Work. Payment is based on Work completed in accordance with the Schedule of Values established as provided in the General Conditions. B. Progress payments equal to the full amount of the total earned value to date for completed Work minus the retainage listed below and properly stored materials will be made prior to Substantial Completion. 1. The standard retainage is 5 percent. C. Payment will be made for the amount determined per Paragraph 5.02.13, less the total of payments previously made and less set-offs determined in accordance with Paragraph 17.01 of the General Conditions. D. At the Owner's option, Owner may pay Contractor 100 percent of the Work completed, less amounts withheld in accordance with Paragraph 17.01 of the General Conditions and less 200 percent of OAR's estimate of the value of Work to be completed or corrected to reach Substantial Completion. Owner may, at its sole discretion, elect to hold retainage in the amounts set forth above for progress payments prior to Substantial Completion if Owner has concerns with the ability of the Contractor to complete the remaining Work in accordance with the Contract Documents or within the time frame established by this Agreement. Release or reduction in retainage is contingent upon and consent of surety to the reduction in retainage. 5.03 Owner will pay the remainder of the Contract Price as recommended by OAR in accordance with Paragraph 17.16 of the General Conditions upon Final Completion and acceptance of the Work. ARTICLE 6—INTEREST ON OVERDUE PAYMENTS AND RETAINAGE 6.01 The Owner is not obligated to pay interest on overdue payments except as required by Texas Government Code Chapter 2251. Invoices must comply with Article 17 of the General Conditions. 6.02 Except as specified in Article 5, the Owner is not obligated to pay interest on moneys not paid except as provided in Texas Government Code Chapter 2252. ARTICLE 7—CONTRACTOR'S REPRESENTATIONS 7.01 The Contractor makes the following representations: A. The Contractor has examined and carefully studied the Contract Documents and the other related data identified in the Bidding Documents. B. The Contractor has visited the Site and become familiar with and is satisfied as to the general, local, and Site conditions that may affect cost, progress, and performance of the Work. Agreement 00 52 23-3 Commodore Park Improvements, Phase 1-#23173 Rev 12/2021 C. The Contractor is familiar with Laws and Regulations that may affect cost, progress, and performance of the Work. D. The Contractor has carefully studied the following Site-related reports and drawings as identified in the Supplementary Conditions: 1. Geotechnical Data Reports regarding subsurface conditions at or adjacent to the Site; 2. Drawings of physical conditions relating to existing surface or subsurface structures at the Site; 3. Underground Facilities referenced in reports and drawings; 4. Reports and drawings relating to Hazardous Environmental Conditions, if any, at or adjacent to the Site; and 5. Technical Data related to each of these reports and drawings. E. The Contractor has considered the: 1. Information known to Contractor, 2. Information commonly known to contractors doing business in the locality of the Site; 3. Information and observations obtained from visits to the Site; and 4. The Contract Documents. F. The Contractor has considered the items identified in Paragraphs 7.01.D and 7.01.E with respect to the effect of such information, observations, and documents on: 1. The cost, progress, and performance of the Work; 2. The means, methods, techniques, sequences, and procedures of construction to be employed by Contractor; and 3. Contractor's safety precautions and programs. G. Based on the information and observations referred to in the preceding paragraphs, Contractor agrees that no further examinations, investigations, explorations, tests, studies, or data are necessary for the performance of the Work at the Contract Price, within the Contract Times, and in accordance with the other terms and conditions of the Contract Documents. H. The Contractor is aware of the general nature of Work to be performed by Owner and others at the Site that relates to the Work as indicated in the Contract Documents. I. The Contractor has correlated the information known to the Contractor, information and observations obtained from visits to the Site, reports and drawings identified in the Contract Documents, and all additional examinations, investigations, explorations, tests, studies, and data with the Contract Documents. J. The Contractor has given the OAR written notice of all conflicts, errors, ambiguities, or discrepancies that the Contractor has discovered in the Contract Documents,and the written resolution provided by the OAR is acceptable to the Contractor. K. The Contract Documents are generally sufficient to indicate and convey understanding of all terms and conditions for performance and furnishing of the Work. Agreement 00 52 23-4 Commodore Park Improvements, Phase 1-#23173 Rev 12/2021 L. Contractor's entry into this Contract constitutes an incontrovertible representation by Contractor that without exception all prices in the Agreement are premised upon performing and furnishing the Work required by the Contract Documents. M. CONTRACTOR SHALL INDEMNIFY, DEFEND AND HOLD HARMLESS THE OWNER'S INDEMNITEES IN ACCORDANCE WITH PARAGRAPH 7.14 OF THE GENERAL CONDITIONS AND THE SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS. ARTICLE 8—ACCOUNTING RECORDS 8.01 Accounting Record Availability: The Contractor shall keep such full and detailed accounts of materials incorporated and labor and equipment utilized for the Work consistent with the requirements of Paragraph 15.01 of the General Conditions and as may be necessary for proper financial management under this Agreement. Subject to prior written notice, the Owner shall be afforded reasonable access during normal business hours to all of the Contractor's records, books, correspondence,instructions,drawings, receipts,vouchers, memoranda,and similar data relating to the Cost of the Work and the Contractor's fee. The Contractor shall preserve all such documents for a period of 3 years after the final payment by the Owner. ARTICLE 9—CONTRACT DOCUMENTS 9.01 Contents: A. The Contract Documents consist of the following: 1. Solicitation documents. 2. Specifications, forms, and documents listed in SECTION 00 0100 TABLE OF CONTENTS. 3. Drawings listed in the Sheet Index. 4. Addenda. 5. Exhibits to this Agreement: a. Contractor's Bid Form. 6. Documentation required by the Contract Documents and submitted by Contractor prior to Notice of Award. B. There are no Contract Documents other than those listed above in this Article. C. The Contract Documents may only be amended, modified, or supplemented as provided in Article 11 of the General Conditions. Agreement 00 52 23-5 Commodore Park Improvements, Phase 1-#23173 Rev 12/2021 ARTICLE 10—CONTRACT DOCUMENT SIGNATURES ATTEST CITY OF CORPUS CHRISTI Stephanie Box(Nov 13,202516:31:38 CST) Jeff dmonds(Nov 13,202513:58:01 CST) Rebecca Huerta 11/13/2025 Jeffrey Edmonds, P.E 11/13/2025 City Secretary Director of Engineering Services Res.033780 AUTHORIZED APPROVED AS TO LEGAL FORM: BY COUNCIL 10/21/2025 RH/SB Janet Whitehead(Nov 13,2025 13:36:00 CST) Assistant City Attorney 11/13/2025 ATTEST(IF CORPORATION) CONTRACTOR CGyl' EYLOLOWJII! Chris Brzozowskl(Nov 12,202511:46:11 CST) (Seal Below) By: Chris Brzozowski 11/12/2025 Note: Attach copy of authorization to sign if Title: Vice President person signing for CONTRACTOR is not President, Vice President, Chief Executive Officer, or Chief 437 Opportunity Dr. Financial Officer Address Corpus Christi TX 78405 City State Zip 361-452-0560 Phone Fax chrisb@weaverandiacobs.com EMail END OF SECTION Agreement 00 52 23-6 Commodore Park Improvements, Phase 1-#23173 Rev 12/2021 BID FORM Project Name: COMMODORE PARK IMPROVEMENTS Project Number: 23173 Owner: City of Corpus Christi OAR: Joseph Johnson,Assistant Director,Construction Management Designer:ITurner I Ramirez Architects By its signature below,Bidder accepts all of the terms and conditions of the Bid Acknowledgement,acknowledges receipt of all Addenda to the Bid and agrees,if this Bid is accepted,to enter into a Contract with the Owner and complete the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents for the Bid price. Bidder: Weaver&Jacobs Constructors, Inc. (full legal name of Bidder) Signature: (signature of person with authority to bind the Bidder) Name: Chris Brzozowski (printed name of person signing Bid Form) Title: Vice President (title of person signing Bid Form) Attest: (signature) State of Residency: Texas Federal Tx ID No. 26-0036919 Address for Notices: Weaver&Jacobs Constructors, Inc. 437 Opportunity Dr. Corpus Christi,TX 78405 Phone: 361-452-0560 Email: chrisb@weaverandjacobs.com Bid Form Page 1 of 5 Commodore Park Improvements#23173 Rev 8/2019 CIVCAS, RFB 6673 Commodore Park Improvements 23173 Report Created On:9/3/2025 7:04:43 PM BID TOTALS BASE BID Total PART A-GENERAL $487,657.00 PART B- EXISTING CONDITIONS $0.00 PART C-CONCRETE $595,800.00 PART D- METALS $7,105.00 PART E-WOOD, PLASTIC,AND COMPOSITE $43,759.00 PART F-THERMAL&MOISTURE PROTECTION $61,811.00 PART G- FINISHES $6,780.00 PART H- EQUIPMENT $0.00 PART I- ELECTRICAL $38,759.00 PART J- EARTHWORK $225,919.00 PART K- EXTERIOR IMPROVEMENTS $747,500.00 PART L- SITE UTILITIES $38,900.00 PART M-ALLOWANCES $200,000.00 Total $2,453,990.00 ALTERNATE 1 Total PART N-ALTERNATE NO. 01 $327,780.00 PART O-ALTERNATE NO. 02 $666,377.00 Total $994,157.00 PART A-GENERAL No. Description Unit Qty Unit Price Ext Price Al MOBILIZATION LS 1 $52,657.00 $52,657.00 A2 STORM WATER POLLUTION LS 1 $45,000.00 $45,000.00 PREVENTION A3 GENERAL SITE CONDITIONS LS 1 $275,000.00 $275,000.00 A4 TEMPORARY FACILITIES LS 1 $65,000.00 $65,000.00 A5 BONDS AND INSURANCE LS 1 $50,000.00 $50,000.00 Subtotal: $487,657.00 CIVCAST RFB 6673 Commodore Park Improvements 23173 Report Created On:9/3/2025 7:04:43 PM PART B- EXISTING CONDITIONS No. Description Unit Qty Unit Price Ext Price 131 DEMOLITION LS 1 $0.00 $0.00 Subtotal: $0.00 PART C-CONCRETE No. Description Unit Qty Unit Price Ext Price C1 CONCRETE FORMWORK LS 1 $50,000.00 $50,000.00 C2 CONCRETE FORMS LS 1 $20,000.00 $20,000.00 C3 CONCRETE REINFORCEMENT LS 1 $85,000.00 $85,000.00 C4 REINFORCING STEEL LS 1 $100,000.00 $100,000.00 C5 CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE LS 1 $265,800.00 $265,800.00 C6 EPDXY RELATED WORK LS 1 $0.00 $0.00 C7 CONCRETE STRUCTURES LS 1 $15,000.00 $15,000.00 C8 CONCRETE FINISHING LS 1 $50,000.00 $50,000.00 C9 CONCRETE CURING LS 1 $10,000.00 $10,000.00 Subtotal: $595,800.00 PART D- METALS No. Description Unit Qty Unit Price Ext Price D1 METAL FABRICATIONS LS 1 $3,500.00 $3,500.00 D2 PIPE AND TUBE RAILINGS LS 1 $3,605.00 $3,605.00 Subtotal:$7,105.00 PART E-WOOD, PLASTIC,AND COMPOSITE No. Description Unit Qty Unit Price Ext Price E1 ROUGH CARPENTRY LS 1 $32,500.00 $32,500.00 E2 WOOD DECKING LS 1 $11,259.00 $11,259.00 Subtotal: $43,759.00 PART F-THERMAL&MOISTURE PROTECTION CIVCAST RFB 6673 Commodore Park Improvements 23173 Report Created On:9/3/2025 7:04:43 PM No. Description Unit Qty Unit Price Ext Price F1 SELF-ADHEREING SHEET LS 1 $4,200.00 $4,200.00 WATERPROOFING F2 FLUID APPLIED AIR BARRIER LS 1 $4,000.00 $4,000.00 F3 STANDING-SEAM METAL ROOF PANELS LS 1 $30,000.00 $30,000.00 F4 FIBER-CEMENT SIDING AND TRIM LS 1 $11,511.00 $11,511.00 F5 SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM LS 1 $5,300.00 $5,300.00 F6 JOINT SEALANTS LS 1 $6,800.00 $6,800.00 Subtotal: $61,811.00 PART G- FINISHES No. Description Unit Qty Unit Price Ext Price G1 PAINTING LS 1 $2,530.00 $2,530.00 G2 HIGH-PERFORMANCE COATINGS LS 1 $4,250.00 $4,250.00 Subtotal:$6,780.00 PART H- EQUIPMENT No. Description Unit Qty Unit Price Ext Price H1 ATHLETIC FIELD EQUIPMENT LS 1 $0.00 $0.00 Subtotal: $0.00 PART I- ELECTRICAL No. Description Unit Qty Unit Price Ext Price 11 ELECTRICAL WIRE AND CABLE LS 1 $0.00 $0.00 12 RACEWAYS LS 1 $38,759,00 $38,759.00 13 ELECTRICAL GEAR LS 1 $0.00 $0.00 14 LUMINAIRES LS 1 $0.00 $0.00 Subtotal: $38,759.00 PART J- EARTHWORK No. Description Unit Qty Unit Price Ext Price J1 CLEARING AND GRUBBING LS 1 $50,000.00 $50,000.00 CIVCAST RFB 6673 Commodore Park Improvements 23173 Report Created On:9/3/2025 7:04:43 PM J2 SITE GRADING LS 1 $85,000.00 $85,000.00 J3 ROADWAY SUBGRADE SHAPING LS 1 $30,000.00 $30,000.00 J4 CHANNEL SHAPING LS 1 $0.00 $0.00 J5 TRENCHING LS 1 $0.00 $0.00 J6 EMBANKMENT LS 1 $58,919.00 $58,919.00 J7 TERMITE CONTROL LS 1 $2,000.00 $2,000.00 Subtotal: $225,919.00 PART K- EXTERIOR IMPROVEMENTS No. Description Unit Qty Unit Price Ext Price K1 SUBGRADE AND BASE COURSE LS 1 $0.00 $0.00 K2 LIME TREATED SUBGRADE LS 1 $0.00 $0.00 K3 CEMENT TREATED SUBGRADES LS 1 $0.00 $0.00 K4 FLEXIBLE BASE COURSE LS 1 $0.00 $0.00 K5 PRIME COAT LS 1 $0.00 $0.00 K6 PAINT-MIX ASPHALT PAVING LS 1 $0.00 $0.00 K7 CONCRETE PAVING LS 1 $150,000.00 $150,000.00 K8 CURB AND GUTTER LS 1 $0.00 $0.00 K9 SIDEWALKS LS 1 $0.00 $0.00 K10 DRIVEWAYS LS 1 $0.00 $0.00 K11 PAINTED PAVEMENT MARKINGS LS 1 $8,500.00 $8,500.00 K12 PLAYGROUND PROTECTIVE SURFACING LS 1 $370,000.00 $370,000.00 K13 ACRYLIC TENNIS&RECREATIONAL LS 1 $36,000.00 $36,000.00 SPORTS SURFACES K14 CHAINLINK FENCES &GATES LS 1 $85,000.00 $85,000.00 K15 SEEDING LS 1 $98,000.00 $98,000.00 K16 TRUCKING AND WATERING WITH TYPE 1 LS 1 $0.00 $0.00 EFFLUENT Subtotal: $747,500.00 PART L-SITE UTILITIES No. Description Unit Qty Unit Price Ext Price RFB 6673 Commodore Park Improvements 23173 Report Created On:9/3/2025 7:04:43 PM L1 EXCAVATION AND BACKFILL FOR LS 1 $13,000.00 $13,000.00 UTILITIES L2 STORMWATER GRAVITY PIPING LS 1 $18,000.00 $18,000.00 L3 STORMWATER STRUCTURES LS 1 $7,900.00 $7,900.00 Subtotal: $38,900.00 PART M-ALLOWANCES No. Description Unit Qty Unit Price Ext Price M1 UNFORESEEN CONDITIONS DURING AL 1 $200,000.00 $200,000.00 CONSTRUCTION Subtotal: $200,000.00 PART N-ALTERNATE NO.01 No. Description Unit Qty Unit Price Ext Price N1 TWO(2)ADDITIONAL PICKLEBALL& LS 1 $327,780.00 $327,780.00 ONE(1)TENNIS COURT Subtotal: $327,780.00 PART O-ALTERNATE NO.02 No. Description Unit Qty Unit Price Ext Price 01 COVERED BASKETBALL COURT LS 1 $666,377.00 $666,377.00 Subtotal: $666,377.00 CIVCAS i RFB 6673 Commodore Park Improvements 23173 Report Created On:9/3/2025 7:04:43 PM ACKNOWLEDGE ADDENDA NAME ACKNOWLEDGEMENT DATE Addendum No. 1 09/03/2025 17:56:33 PM Addendum No.2 09/03/2025 17:56:34 PM Addendum No.3 09/03/2025 17:56:35 PM RFB 6673 Commodore Park Improvements 23173 Report Created On:9/3/2025 7:04:43 PM REQUIRED DOWNLOADS TYPE NAME DOWNLOAD DATE Plans Drawings/Plans 9/3/20251:22:01 PM Invitation To Bid Invitation to Bid RFB 6673 8/29/2025 11:34:51 AM Other Notice to Contractors and Supplier- No 9/3/2025 1:22:04 PM Contact Period Addenda Addendum No. 1 9/3/2025 1:22:07 PM Addenda Addendum No.2 8/29/2025 11:34:29 AM Other Pre-Bid Presentation 6673 9/3/2025 1:22:05 PM Other Notice to Contractors and Suppliers-Site 9/3/2025 1:22:06 PM Visit Addenda Addendum No.3 9/2/2025 4:27:04 PM CONTRACT DOCUMENTS FOR CONSTRUCTION OF COMMODORE PARK IMPROVEMENTS, PHASE 1 [Bond 2022] PROJECT NUMBER: 23173 0 CORPOR 11 1852 TURNER � RAMIREZ A R C H I T E C T S 3751 South Alameda Street Corpus Christi, Texas 78411 TRA PROJECT NO. 2023-24 July 3, 2025 Record Drawing Number: CP-301 [Addendum 02 — August 27, 2025] 000100 TABLE OF CONTENTS Division/ Title Section Division 00 Preface Documents 00 00 00 Cover Sheet 000100 Table of Contents 000101 Seals Page (Optional) 000102 List of Drawings Division 00 Procurement and Contracting Requirements 00 52 23 Agreement(Rev 12-2021) 00 72 00 General Conditions(Rev6-2021) 00 73 00 Supplementary Conditions(Rev4-2022) Division 01 General Requirements 01 11 00 Summary of Work (Rev 10-2018) 01 23 10 Alternates and Allowances(Rev 5-2020) 01 29 01 Measurement and Basis for Payment (Revs-2020) 01 33 01 Submittal Register(Rev 10-2018) 01 50 00 Temporary Facilities and Controls(Rev 8-2019) 01 57 00 Temporary Controls(Revs-2019) Part S Standard Specifications NOT USED Part T Technical Specifications DIVISION 02 EXISTING CONDITIONS 024100 Demolition DIVISION 03 CONCRETE 03 10 00 Concrete Formwork(Structural) 03 11 13.11 Concrete Forms (Civil) 03 20 00 Concrete Reinforcement(Structural) 03 21 11 Reinforcing Steel (Civil) 03 30 00 Cast-in-Place Concrete (Structural) Table of Contents 00 0100- 1 Commodore Park Improvements, Phase 1-#23173 Rev 1/2022 Division/ Title Section 033100 Epoxy Related Work (Structural) 03 31 11 Concrete Structures (Civil) 03 35 11 Concrete Finishing 03 39 11 Concrete Curing DIVISION 05 METALS 05 50 00 Metal Fabrications 05 52 13 Pipe and Tube Railings DIVISION 06 WOOD, PLASTICS,AND COMPOSITES 06 10 00 Rough Carpentry 06 15 00 Wood Decking DIVISION 07 THERMAL AND MOISTURE PROTECTION 07 13 26 Self-Adhering Sheet Waterproofing 07 27 20 Fluid Applied Air Barrier 07 41 13.16 Standing-Seam Metal Roof Panels 07 46 46 Fiber-Cement Siding and Trim 07 62 00 Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim 07 92 00 Joint Sealants DIVISION 09 FINISHES 09 91 23 Painting 09 96 00 High-Performance Coatings DIVISION 11 EQUIPMENT 11 68 13 Playground Equipment 11 68 33 Athletic Field Equipment DIVISION 13 SPECIAL CONSTRUCTION 13 34 19 Metal Building Systems Table of Contents 00 0100-2 Commodore Park Improvements, Phase 1-#23173 Rev 1/2022 Division/ Title Section DIVISION 26 ELECTRICAL 26 06 00 Grounding 26 07 50 Electrical Identification 26 12 30 Wire & Cable 26 13 60 Raceways 26 14 00 Wire Devices 26 24 16 Panelboards 26 43 13 Surge Protection Devices 26 44 10 Disconnects 265100 Luminaires DIVISION 31 EARTHWORK 311100 Clearing and Grubbing 31 22 13.10 Site Grading 31 22 16.13 Roadway Subgrade Shaping 31 22 16.23 Channel Shaping 312316.13 Trenching 312413.10 Embankment 31 31 16 Termite Control DIVISION 32 EXTERIOR IMPROVEMENTS 321100 Subgrade and Base Course 32 11 13.13 Lime Treated Subgrade 32 11 13.26 Cement Treated Subgrade 32 11 23 Flexible Base Course 32 12 13.19 Prime Coat 32 12 16.13 Plant-Mix Asphalt Paving 32 13 13 Concrete Paving 32 16 13.13 Curb and Gutter 32 16 23 Sidewalks 32 16 33 Driveways 32 17 23.13 Painted Pavement Markings 32 18 16.13 Playground Protective Surfacing Table of Contents 00 0100-3 Commodore Park Improvements, Phase 1-#23173 Rev 1/2022 Division/ Title Section 32 18 18 Acrylic Tennis & Recreational Sport Surfaces 32 31 13 Chain Link Fences and Gates 32 92 19 Seeding DIVISION 33 SITE UTILITIES 33 0S 10 Excavation and Backfill for Utilities 33 42 11 Stormwater Gravity Piping 33 42 30 Stormwater Structures APPENDIX TESTING REPORTS Geotechnical Engineering Report No. G124344, published by UES, dated October 4, 2024; 29 pages END OF SECTION Table of Contents 00 0100-4 Commodore Park Improvements, Phase 1-#23173 Rev 1/2022 SECTION 00 0101 -SEALS PAGE ARCHITECT: PHILIP RAMIREZ TURNER,RAMIREZ,&ASSOCIATES 3751 S.ALAMEDA ST. CORPUS CHRISTI,TX 78411 V 361.994.8900 F 361.994.8955 E philip@trarch.com STRUCTURAL: ROBERT E. MARTINEZ, P.E. OF * * REM ENGINEERING iiiI oiRiauFz Maim¢ 2218 BASSE ROAD 89387 SAN ANTONIO,TX 78213 ss"CENO. 7/3/25 V 210.320.1199 THE SEAL APPEARING ON U E robert@remengineeringcorp.com THIS DOCUMENT WAS AUTHORIZED l/ BY ROBERT E MARTINEZ.RE /89387 T.B.P E. RRM NO. 6944 MECHANICAL/ELECTRICAL/PLUMBING: OF 1 JOHN RODRIGUEZ, P.E. .. T,LI� � NRG ENGINEERING /JOHN A. RODRIGUEZ III% 5656 S. STAPLES /.................................... 90273 7/03/2025 CORPUS CHRISTI,TX 78411 fog�/C V 1 361.852.2727 E jrod@nrgcc.com THE SEAL APPEARING ON THIS DOCUMENT WAS AUTHORIZED BY JOHN A.RODRIGUEZ III,P.E.#90273.T.B.P.E.FIRM NO.5318. CIVI L: 0•�E of rFs MICHAEL YORK,P.E. .• .............::t I YORK ENGINEERING * MICHAEL C.YORK j I,•••:,•„••„•„•,,,,,•„:„:.... 9708 S. PADRE ISLAND DRIVE 124938 CORPUS CHRISTI,TX 78418 A-• 0 0. %-47CENSE�. � 1t%%;`"`:��� V 1 361.985.1115 3 July 2025 E I michael@yorkeng.com THE SEAL APPEARING ON THIS DOCUMENT WAS AUTHORIZED BY MICHAEL C.YORK,P.E.124938.ALTERATION OF A SEALED DOCUMENT WITHOUT PROPER NOTIFICATION TO THE RESPONSIBLE ENGINEER IS AN OFFENSE UNDER THE TEXAS ENGINEERING PRACTICE ACT. END OF SECTION 00 0101 SEALS PAGE 00 01 01- 1 Commodore Park Improvements, Phase 1-#23173 July 3, 2025 SECTION 00 0102— LIST OF DRAWINGS 1.01 LIST OF DRAWING SHEETS A. DRAWINGS: Drawings consist of the Contract Drawings and other drawings listed on the Table of Contents page of the separately bound drawing set titled "100% Pre-NOA Design Submission", dated July 3, 2025, as modified by subsequent Addenda and Contract Modifications. Sheet No. Drawing Title FRONT END A0.0 COVER SHEET A0.4 SYMBOLS AND ABBREVIATIONS CIVIL C1.0 CIVIL COVER&GENERAL NOTES C2.1 GENERAL DIMENSION PLAN C2.2 GENERAL DIMENSION PLAN C2.3 GENERAL DIMENSION PLAN C2.4 PAVEMENT SECTION &JOINT LAYOUT C2.5 PAVEMENT SECTION &JOINT LAYOUT C2.6 PAVEMENT SECTION &JOINT LAYOUT C2.7 GRADING PLAN C2.8 GRADING PLAN C2.9 GRADING PLAN C2.10 GRADING PLAN C2.11 GRADING PLAN C2.12 GRADING PLAN C2.13 ALTERNATE GRADING AND DMENSION PLAN C2.14 DRAINAGE PLAN C2.15 UTILITY PLAN C3.1 STORM WATER POLLUTION PREVENTION PLAN C4.1 PAVING DETAILS C5.1 CONCRETE PAVING STANDARD DETAILS C5.2 DRIVEWAY STARDARD DETAILS C5.3 DRIVEWAY STARDARD DETAILS C5.4 DRIVEWAY STARDARD DETAILS C5.5 CURB, GUTTER AND SIDEWALK STANDARD DETAILS List of Drawings 00 0102- 1 Commodore Park Improvements, Phase 1-#23173 July 3, 2025 C5.6 PEDESTRIAN CURB RAMP STANDARD DETAILS C5.7 PEDESTRIAN CURB RAMP STANDARD DETAILS C5.8 STORM WATER STANDARD DETAILS C5.9 STORM WATER STANDARD DETAILS C5.10 STORM WATER STANDARD DETAILS C5.11 STORM WATER POLLUTION PREVENTION PLAN NOTES C5.12 STORM WATER ENVIORMENTAL PERMITS ISSUED AND COMMENT C5.13 STORM WATER POLLUTION PREVENTION STANDARD DETAILS STRUCTURAL 51.1 COMPOSITE FOUNDATION PLAN —PHASE 1 51.2 PAVILION FOUNDATION PLAN— PHASE 1 S1.3 TENNIS COURTS FOUNDATION PLAN —PHASE 1 51.4 PICKLEBALL COURTS FOUNDATION PLAN—PHASE 1 51.5 PAVILION SCHEMATIC ROOF FRAMING PLAN—PHASE 1 S1.6 BIRD OBSERVATORY FOUNDATION AND FRAMING PLANS—PHASE 1 52.1 FOUNDATION DETAILS 52.2 FOUNDATION DETAILS 53.1 FRAMING DETAILS 54.1 GENERAL NOTES 54.2 GENERAL NOTES ARCHITECTURAL DEMOLITION AD1.1 SITE DEMOLITION ARCHITECTURAL A1.0 OVERALL SITE PLAN — BASE BID A1.OA OVERALL SITE PLAN—ALTERNATE BID ITEMS A1.1 ENLARGED SITE PLAN— BASE BID A1.OA ENLARGED SITE PLAN—ALTERNATE BID ITEMS A1.2 SITE DETAILS A2.1 PAVILION FLOOR PLAN & ROOF PLAN—ALTERNATE BID ITEM#2 A2.2 PAVILION ELEVATIONS—ALTERNATE BID ITEM #2 A2.3 PAVILION SECTIONS & DETAILS—ALTERNATE BID ITEM #2 A2.4 BIRD OBSERVATORY FLOOR PLAN & ELEVATIONS List of Drawings 00 0102-2 Commodore Park Improvements, Phase 1-#23173 July 3, 2025 A2.5 BIRD OBSERVATORY SECTIONS & DETAILS A3.0 ENLARGED SITE PLAN—PLAYGROUND A3.1 PLAYGROUND EQUIPMENT ELECTRICAL EO.01 ELECTRICAL ABBREVIATIONS EO.02 ELECTRICAL SYMBOLS E1.00 ELECTRICAL SITE PLAN —BASE BID E1.00A ELECTRICAL SITE PLAN —ALTERNATE BID E1.10A ELECTRICAL FLOOR PLANS— PAVILION ALTERNATE#2 E2.00A ELECTRICAL ONE-LINE DIAGRAM —ALTERNATE#2 E3.00A ELECTRICAL DETAILS—ALTERNATE#2 END OF SECTION 00 0102 List of Drawings 00 0102-3 Commodore Park Improvements, Phase 1-#23173 July 3, 2025 S Cgs_ O v �h�ONPOPPtfQ 1852 00 52 23 AGREEMENT This Agreement, for the Project awarded on [insert Award Date], is between the City of Corpus Christi (Owner) and (Contractor). Owner and Contractor agree as follows: ARTICLE 1—WORK 1.01 Contractor shall complete all Work as specified or indicated in the Contract Documents. The Work is generally described as: City of Corpus Christi Commodore Park Improvements, Phase 1 Proiect No. 23173 ARTICLE 2—DESIGNER AND OWNER'S AUTHORIZED REPRESENTATIVE 2.01 The Project has been designed by: ARCHITECT OF RECORD Turner I Ramirez Architects 3751 South Alameda Street Corpus Christi,Texas 78411 Contact:Jay Porterfield,AIA I iay@trarch.com 2.02 The Owner's Authorized Representative for this Project is: Joseph Johnson,Assistant Director Construction Management 4917 Holly Road, Building 5 Corpus Christi,Texas 78411 Joseph)@cctexas.com ARTICLE 3—CONTRACT TIMES 3.01 Contract Times A. The Work is required to be substantially completed within Three Hundred(300) calendar days after the date when the Contract Times commence to run as provided in the Notice to Proceed and is to be completed and ready for final payment in accordance with Paragraph Agreement 00 52 23- 1 Commodore Park Improvements, Phase 1-#23173 Rev 12/2021 17.16 of the General Conditions within Three Hundred Thirty(330) calendar days after the date when the Contract Times commence to run. B. Performance of the Work is required as shown in Paragraph 7.02 of the General Conditions. C. Milestones,and the dates for completion of each,are as defined in Section 0135 00 SPECIAL PROCEDURES. 3.02 Liquidated Damages A. Owner and Contractor recognize that time limits for specified Milestones, Substantial Completion, and completion and readiness for Final Payment as stated in the Contract Documents are of the essence of the Contract. Owner and Contractor recognize that the Owner will suffer financial loss if the Work is not completed within the times specified in Paragraph 3.01 and as adjusted in accordance with Paragraph 11.05 of the General Conditions. Owner and Contractor also recognize the delays, expense, and difficulties involved in proving in a legal or arbitration proceeding the actual loss suffered by Owner if the Work is not completed on time. Accordingly, instead of requiring any such proof,Owner and Contractor agree that as liquidated damages for delay (but not as a penalty): 1. Substantial Completion: Contractor shall pay Owner$400.00 for each day that expires after the time specified in Paragraph 3.01 for Substantial Completion until the Work is substantially complete. 2. Completion of the Remaining Work: Contractor agrees to pay Owner$400.00 for each day that expires after the time specified in Paragraph 3.01 for completion and readiness for final payment until the Work is completed and ready for final payment in accordance with Paragraph 17.16 of the General Conditions. 3. Liquidated damages for failing to timely attain Substantial Completion and Final Completion are not additive and will not be imposed concurrently. 4. Milestones: Contractor agrees to pay Owner liquidated damages as stipulated in SECTION 0135 00 SPECIAL PROCEDURES for failure to meet Milestone completions. 5. The Owner will determine whether the Work has been completed within the Contract Times. B. Owner is not required to only assess liquidated damages, and Owner may elect to pursue its actual damages resulting from the failure of Contractor to complete the Work in accordance with the requirements of the Contract Documents. ARTICLE 4—CONTRACT PRICE 4.01 Owner will pay Contractor for completion of the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents at the unit prices shown in the attached BID FORM. Unit prices have been computed in accordance with Paragraph 15.03 of the General Conditions. Contractor acknowledges that estimated quantities are not guaranteed, and were solely for the purpose of comparing Bids, and final payment for all unit price items will be based on actual quantities, determined as provided in the Contract Documents. Total Base Bid Price $ Agreement 00 52 23-2 Commodore Park Improvements, Phase 1-#23173 Rev 12/2021 ARTICLE 5—PAYMENT PROCEDURES 5.01 Submit Applications for Payment in accordance with Article 17 of the General Conditions. Applications for Payment will be processed by the OAR as provided in the General Conditions. 5.02 Progress Payments; Retainage: A. The Owner will make progress payments on or about the 25th day of each month during performance of the Work. Payment is based on Work completed in accordance with the Schedule of Values established as provided in the General Conditions. B. Progress payments equal to the full amount of the total earned value to date for completed Work minus the retainage listed below and properly stored materials will be made prior to Substantial Completion. 1. The standard retainage is 5 percent. C. Payment will be made for the amount determined per Paragraph 5.02.13, less the total of payments previously made and less set-offs determined in accordance with Paragraph 17.01 of the General Conditions. D. At the Owner's option, Owner may pay Contractor 100 percent of the Work completed, less amounts withheld in accordance with Paragraph 17.01 of the General Conditions and less 200 percent of OAR's estimate of the value of Work to be completed or corrected to reach Substantial Completion. Owner may, at its sole discretion, elect to hold retainage in the amounts set forth above for progress payments prior to Substantial Completion if Owner has concerns with the ability of the Contractor to complete the remaining Work in accordance with the Contract Documents or within the time frame established by this Agreement. Release or reduction in retainage is contingent upon and consent of surety to the reduction in retainage. 5.03 Owner will pay the remainder of the Contract Price as recommended by OAR in accordance with Paragraph 17.16 of the General Conditions upon Final Completion and acceptance of the Work. ARTICLE 6—INTEREST ON OVERDUE PAYMENTS AND RETAINAGE 6.01 The Owner is not obligated to pay interest on overdue payments except as required by Texas Government Code Chapter 2251. Invoices must comply with Article 17 of the General Conditions. 6.02 Except as specified in Article 5, the Owner is not obligated to pay interest on moneys not paid except as provided in Texas Government Code Chapter 2252. ARTICLE 7—CONTRACTOR'S REPRESENTATIONS 7.01 The Contractor makes the following representations: A. The Contractor has examined and carefully studied the Contract Documents and the other related data identified in the Bidding Documents. B. The Contractor has visited the Site and become familiar with and is satisfied as to the general, local, and Site conditions that may affect cost, progress, and performance of the Work. Agreement 00 52 23-3 Commodore Park Improvements, Phase 1-#23173 Rev 12/2021 C. The Contractor is familiar with Laws and Regulations that may affect cost, progress, and performance of the Work. D. The Contractor has carefully studied the following Site-related reports and drawings as identified in the Supplementary Conditions: 1. Geotechnical Data Reports regarding subsurface conditions at or adjacent to the Site; 2. Drawings of physical conditions relating to existing surface or subsurface structures at the Site; 3. Underground Facilities referenced in reports and drawings; 4. Reports and drawings relating to Hazardous Environmental Conditions, if any, at or adjacent to the Site; and 5. Technical Data related to each of these reports and drawings. E. The Contractor has considered the: 1. Information known to Contractor; 2. Information commonly known to contractors doing business in the locality of the Site; 3. Information and observations obtained from visits to the Site; and 4. The Contract Documents. F. The Contractor has considered the items identified in Paragraphs 7.01.D and 7.01.E with respect to the effect of such information, observations, and documents on: 1. The cost, progress, and performance of the Work; 2. The means, methods, techniques, sequences, and procedures of construction to be employed by Contractor; and 3. Contractor's safety precautions and programs. G. Based on the information and observations referred to in the preceding paragraphs, Contractor agrees that no further examinations, investigations, explorations, tests, studies, or data are necessary for the performance of the Work at the Contract Price, within the Contract Times, and in accordance with the other terms and conditions of the Contract Documents. H. The Contractor is aware of the general nature of Work to be performed by Owner and others at the Site that relates to the Work as indicated in the Contract Documents. I. The Contractor has correlated the information known to the Contractor, information and observations obtained from visits to the Site, reports and drawings identified in the Contract Documents, and all additional examinations, investigations, explorations, tests, studies, and data with the Contract Documents, J. The Contractor has given the OAR written notice of all conflicts, errors, ambiguities, or discrepancies that the Contractor has discovered in the Contract Documents,and the written resolution provided by the OAR is acceptable to the Contractor. K. The Contract Documents are generally sufficient to indicate and convey understanding of all terms and conditions for performance and furnishing of the Work. Agreement 00 52 23-4 Commodore Park Improvements, Phase 1-#23173 Rev 12/2021 L. Contractor's entry into this Contract constitutes an incontrovertible representation by Contractor that without exception all prices in the Agreement are premised upon performing and furnishing the Work required by the Contract Documents. M. CONTRACTOR SHALL INDEMNIFY, DEFEND AND HOLD HARMLESS THE OWNER'S INDEMNITEES IN ACCORDANCE WITH PARAGRAPH 7.14 OF THE GENERAL CONDITIONS AND THE SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS. ARTICLE 8—ACCOUNTING RECORDS 8.01 Accounting Record Availability: The Contractor shall keep such full and detailed accounts of materials incorporated and labor and equipment utilized for the Work consistent with the requirements of Paragraph 15.01 of the General Conditions and as may be necessary for proper financial management under this Agreement. Subject to prior written notice,the Owner shall be afforded reasonable access during normal business hours to all of the Contractor's records,books, correspondence, instructions, drawings, receipts,vouchers, memoranda,and similar data relating to the Cost of the Work and the Contractor's fee. The Contractor shall preserve all such documents for a period of 3 years after the final payment by the Owner. ARTICLE 9—CONTRACT DOCUMENTS 9.01 Contents: A. The Contract Documents consist of the following: 1. Solicitation documents. 2. Specifications, forms, and documents listed in SECTION 00 0100 TABLE OF CONTENTS. 3. Drawings listed in the Sheet Index. 4. Addenda. 5. Exhibits to this Agreement: a. Contractor's Bid Form. 6. Documentation required by the Contract Documents and submitted by Contractor prior to Notice of Award. B. There are no Contract Documents other than those listed above in this Article. C. The Contract Documents may only be amended, modified, or supplemented as provided in Article 11 of the General Conditions. ARTICLE 10—CONTRACT DOCUMENT SIGNATURES ATTEST CITY OF CORPUS CHRISTI Rebecca Huerta Jeffrey Edmonds, P.E City Secretary Director of Engineering Services Agreement 00 52 23-5 Commodore Park Improvements, Phase 1-#23173 Rev 12/2021 AUTHORIZED APPROVED AS TO LEGAL FORM: BY COUNCIL Assistant City Attorney ATTEST(IF CORPORATION) CONTRACTOR (Seal Below) By: Note: Attach copy of authorization to sign if Title: person signing for CONTRACTOR is not President, Vice President, Chief Executive Officer, or Chief Financial Officer Address City State Zip Phone Fax Entail END OF SECTION Agreement 00 52 23-6 Commodore Park Improvements, Phase 1-#23173 Rev 12/2021 00 72 00 GENERAL CONDITIONS Table of Contents Page Article 1—Definitions and Terminology .....................................................................................................10 1.01 Defined Terms.............................................................................................................................10 1.02 Terminology................................................................................................................................15 Article2—Preliminary Matters...................................................................................................................16 2.01 Delivery of Bonds and Evidence of Insurance.............................................................................16 2.02 Copies of Documents..................................................................................................................16 2.03 Project Management System......................................................................................................16 2.04 Before Starting Construction ......................................................................................................17 2.05 Preconstruction Conference; Designation of Authorized Representatives................................17 Article 3—Contract Documents: Intent, Requirements, Reuse.................................................................17 3.01 Intent...........................................................................................................................................17 3.02 Reference Standards...................................................................................................................18 3.03 Reporting and Resolving Discrepancies......................................................................................19 3.04 Interpretation of the Contract Documents.................................................................................20 3.05 Reuse of Documents...................................................................................................................20 Article 4—Commencement and Progress of the Work..............................................................................20 4.01 Commencement of Contract Times; Notice to Proceed.............................................................20 4.02 Starting the Work........................................................................................................................20 4.03 Progress Schedule.......................................................................................................................21 4.04 Delays in Contractor's Progress..................................................................................................21 Article 5—Availability of Lands; Subsurface and Physical Conditions; Hazardous Environmental Conditions...................................................................................................................................................22 5.01 Availability of Lands....................................................................................................................22 5.02 Use of Site and Other Areas........................................................................................................22 5.03 Subsurface and Physical Conditions............................................................................................23 5.04 Differing Subsurface or Physical Conditions...............................................................................24 5.05 Underground Facilities................................................................................................................25 5.06 Hazardous Environmental Conditions at Site .............................................................................26 Article 6—Bonds and Insurance .................................................................................................................28 6.01 Performance, Payment, and Other Bonds..................................................................................28 General Conditions 00 72 00-1 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 6.02 Licensed Sureties ........................................................................................................................29 6.03 Required Minimum Insurance Coverage....................................................................................29 6.04 General Insurance Provisions......................................................................................................29 6.05 Contractor's Insurance................................................................................................................30 6.06 Property Insurance......................................................................................................................33 6.07 Waiver of Rights..........................................................................................................................34 6.08 Owner's Insurance for Project....................................................................................................34 6.09 Acceptable Evidence of Insurance..............................................................................................35 6.10 Certificate of Insurance...............................................................................................................35 6.11 Insurance Policies........................................................................................................................35 6.12 Continuing Evidence of Coverage...............................................................................................35 6.13 Notices Regarding Insurance ......................................................................................................35 6.14 Texas Workers' Compensation Insurance Required Notice .......................................................36 Article 7-Contractor's Responsibilities.....................................................................................................38 7.01 Supervision and Superintendence..............................................................................................38 7.02 Labor; Working Hours.................................................................................................................38 7.03 Services, Materials, and Equipment ...........................................................................................39 7.04 Concerning Subcontractors, Suppliers, and Others....................................................................39 7.05 Patent Fees and Royalties...........................................................................................................40 7.06 Permits........................................................................................................................................41 7.07 Taxes...........................................................................................................................................41 7.08 Laws and Regulations..................................................................................................................41 7.09 Safety and Protection .................................................................................................................42 7.10 Safety Representative.................................................................................................................43 7.11 Hazard Communication Programs..............................................................................................43 7.12 Emergencies................................................................................................................................43 7.13 Contractor's General Warranty and Guarantee .........................................................................43 7.14 INDEMNIFICATION......................................................................................................................44 7.15 Delegation of Professional Design Services................................................................................45 Article 8-Other Work at the Site...............................................................................................................46 8.01 Other Work.................................................................................................................................46 8.02 Coordination ...............................................................................................................................47 8.03 Legal Relationships......................................................................................................................47 General Conditions 00 72 00-2 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 Article 9—Owner's and OPT's Responsibilities...........................................................................................48 9.01 Communications to Contractor ..................................................................................................48 9.02 Replacement of Owner's Project Team Members......................................................................48 9.03 Furnish Data................................................................................................................................48 9.04 Pay When Due.............................................................................................................................48 9.05 Lands and Easements; Reports and Tests...................................................................................48 9.06 Insurance.....................................................................................................................................48 9.07 Modifications..............................................................................................................................48 9.08 Inspections,Tests, and Approvals...............................................................................................48 9.09 Limitations on OPT's Responsibilities .........................................................................................48 9.10 Undisclosed Hazardous Environmental Condition......................................................................49 9.11 Compliance with Safety Program................................................................................................49 Article 10—OAR's and Designer's Status During Construction ..................................................................49 10.01 Owner's Representative..........................................................................................................49 10.02 Visits to Site.............................................................................................................................49 10.03 Resident Project Representatives...........................................................................................49 10.04 Rejecting Defective Work........................................................................................................49 10.05 Shop Drawings, Modifications and Payments.........................................................................50 10.06 Decisions on Requirements of Contract Documents and Acceptability of Work...................50 10.07 Limitations on OAR's and Designer's Authority and Responsibilities.....................................50 Article 11—Amending the Contract Documents; Changes in the Work ....................................................50 11.01 Amending and Supplementing the Contract Documents.......................................................50 11.02 Owner-Authorized Changes in the Work................................................................................51 11.03 Unauthorized Changes in the Work........................................................................................51 11.04 Change of Contract Price ........................................................................................................52 11.05 Change of Contract Times.......................................................................................................52 11.06 Change Proposals....................................................................................................................52 11.07 Execution of Change Orders ...................................................................................................53 11.08 Notice to Surety......................................................................................................................54 Article 12—Change Management ..............................................................................................................54 12.01 Requests for Change Proposal................................................................................................54 12.02 Change Proposals....................................................................................................................54 12.03 Designer Will Evaluate Request for Modification...................................................................55 General Conditions 00 72 00-3 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 12.04 Substitutions...........................................................................................................................55 Article13—Claims.......................................................................................................................................56 13.01 Claims......................................................................................................................................56 13.02 Claims Process.........................................................................................................................57 Article 14—Prevailing Wage Rate Requirements.......................................................................................58 14.01 Payment of Prevailing Wage Rates.........................................................................................58 14.02 Records....................................................................................................................................58 14.03 Liability; Penalty; Criminal Offense.........................................................................................59 14.04 Prevailing Wage Rates.............................................................................................................59 Article 15—Cost of the Work; Allowances; Unit Price Work......................................................................59 15.01 Cost of the Work.....................................................................................................................59 15.02 Allowances..............................................................................................................................63 15.03 Unit Price Work.......................................................................................................................63 15.04 Contingencies..........................................................................................................................64 Article 16—Tests and Inspections; Correction, Removal, or Acceptance of Defective Work....................65 16.01 Access to Work........................................................................................................................65 16.02 Tests, Inspections and Approvals............................................................................................65 16.03 Defective Work .......................................................................................................................65 16.04 Acceptance of Defective Work................................................................................................66 16.05 Uncovering Work....................................................................................................................66 16.06 Owner May Stop the Work.....................................................................................................67 16.07 Owner May Correct Defective Work.......................................................................................67 Article 17—Payments to Contractor; Set-Offs; Completion; Correction Period ........................................67 17.01 Progress Payments..................................................................................................................67 17.02 Application for Payment.........................................................................................................69 17.03 Schedule of Values..................................................................................................................71 17.04 Schedule of Anticipated Payments and Earned Value............................................................72 17.05 Basis for Payments..................................................................................................................73 17.06 Payment for Stored Materials and Equipment.......................................................................73 17.07 Retainage and Set-Offs ...........................................................................................................74 17.08 Procedures for Submitting an Application for Payment.........................................................74 17.09 Responsibility of Owner's Authorized Representative...........................................................75 17.10 Contractor's Warranty of Title................................................................................................76 General Conditions 00 72 00-4 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 17.11 Substantial Completion...........................................................................................................76 17.12 Partial Utilization.....................................................................................................................77 17.13 Final Inspection.......................................................................................................................77 17.14 Final Application for Payment.................................................................................................77 17.15 Final Payment..........................................................................................................................78 17.16 Waiver of Claims.....................................................................................................................78 17.17 Correction Period....................................................................................................................78 Article 18-Suspension of Work and Termination.....................................................................................79 18.01 Owner May Suspend Work.....................................................................................................79 18.02 Owner May Terminate for Cause............................................................................................79 18.03 Owner May Terminate For Convenience................................................................................80 Article 19-Project Management...............................................................................................................81 19.01 Work Included.........................................................................................................................81 19.02 Quality Assurance ...................................................................................................................81 19.03 Document Submittal...............................................................................................................81 19.04 Required Permits ....................................................................................................................81 19.05 Safety Requirements...............................................................................................................82 19.06 Access to the Site....................................................................................................................82 19.07 Contractor's Use of Site..........................................................................................................82 19.08 Protection of Existing Structures and Utilities........................................................................83 19.09 Pre-Construction Exploratory Excavations..............................................................................83 19.10 Disruption of Services/Continued Operations........................................................................84 19.11 Field Measurements ...............................................................................................................84 19.12 Reference Data and Control Points.........................................................................................84 19.13 Delivery and Storage...............................................................................................................85 19.14 Cleaning During Construction.................................................................................................86 19.15 Maintenance of Roads, Driveways, and Access......................................................................86 19.16 Area Access and Traffic Control..............................................................................................87 19.17 Overhead Electrical Wires.......................................................................................................87 19.18 Blasting....................................................................................................................................87 19.19 Archeological Requirements...................................................................................................87 19.20 Endangered Species Resources...............................................................................................88 19.21 Cooperation with Public Agencies..........................................................................................88 General Conditions 00 72 00-5 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 Article 20—Project Coordination................................................................................................................88 20.01 Work Included.........................................................................................................................88 20.02 Document Submittal...............................................................................................................88 20.03 Communication During Project...............................................................................................89 20.04 Project Meetings.....................................................................................................................89 20.05 Requests for Information........................................................................................................91 20.06 Decision and Action Item Log..................................................................................................91 20.07 Notification By Contractor......................................................................................................92 20.08 Record Documents..................................................................................................................92 Article 21—Quality Management...............................................................................................................94 21.01 Contractor's Responsibilities ..................................................................................................94 21.02 Quality Management Activities by OPT..................................................................................95 21.03 Contractor's Use of OPT's Test Reports..................................................................................96 21.04 Documentation .......................................................................................................................96 21.05 Standards................................................................................................................................97 21.06 Delivery and Storage...............................................................................................................97 21.07 Verification Testing for Corrected Defects..............................................................................97 21.08 Test Reports............................................................................................................................97 21.09 Defective Work .......................................................................................................................98 21.10 Limitation of Authority of Testing Laboratory........................................................................98 21.11 Quality Control Plan................................................................................................................98 21.12 Implement Contractor's Quality Control Plan ......................................................................100 Article 22—Final Resolution of Disputes..................................................................................................101 22.01 Senior Level Negotiations .....................................................................................................101 22.02 Mediation..............................................................................................................................101 Article 23—Minority/MBE/DBE Participation Policy................................................................................102 23.01 Policy.....................................................................................................................................102 23.02 Definitions.............................................................................................................................102 23.03 Goals......................................................................................................................................103 23.04 Compliance............................................................................................................................104 Article 24—Document Management........................................................................................................104 24.01 Work Included.......................................................................................................................104 24.02 Quality Assurance .................................................................................................................104 General Conditions 00 72 00-6 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 24.03 Contractor's Responsibilities ................................................................................................104 24.04 Document Submittal.............................................................................................................105 24.05 Document Numbering ..........................................................................................................105 24.06 Document Requirements......................................................................................................106 Article25—Shop Drawings.......................................................................................................................107 25.01 Work Included.......................................................................................................................107 25.02 Quality Assurance .................................................................................................................107 25.03 Contractor's Responsibilities ................................................................................................107 25.04 Shop Drawing Requirements ................................................................................................109 25.05 Special Certifications and Reports........................................................................................109 25.06 Warranties and Guarantees..................................................................................................110 25.07 Shop Drawing Submittal Procedures....................................................................................110 25.08 Sample and Mockup Submittal Procedures..........................................................................112 25.09 Equal Non Specified Products...............................................................................................113 25.10 Requests for Deviation..........................................................................................................113 25.11 Designer Responsibilities......................................................................................................114 25.12 Resubmission Requirements.................................................................................................116 Article26—Record Data...........................................................................................................................117 26.01 Work Included.......................................................................................................................117 26.02 Quality Assurance .................................................................................................................117 26.03 Contractor's Responsibilities ................................................................................................117 26.04 Record Data Requirements...................................................................................................118 26.05 Special Certifications and Reports........................................................................................118 26.06 Warranties and Guarantees..................................................................................................119 26.07 Record Data Submittal Procedures.......................................................................................119 26.08 Designer's Responsibilities....................................................................................................120 Article 27—Construction Progress Schedule............................................................................................121 27.01 Requirements........................................................................................................................121 27.02 Document Submittal.............................................................................................................121 27.03 Schedule Requirements........................................................................................................121 27.04 Schedule Revisions................................................................................................................123 27.05 Float Time..............................................................................................................................123 Article 28—Video and Photographic documentation ..............................................................................124 General Conditions 00 72 00-7 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 28.01 Work Included.......................................................................................................................124 28.02 Quality Assurance .................................................................................................................124 28.03 Document Submittal.............................................................................................................124 28.04 Photographs..........................................................................................................................125 28.05 Video Recording....................................................................................................................125 Article 29-Execution and Closeout.........................................................................................................125 29.01 Substantial Completion.........................................................................................................125 29.02 Final Inspections....................................................................................................................126 29.03 Reinspection Fees .................................................................................................................126 29.04 Closeout Documents Submittal ............................................................................................127 29.05 Transfer of Utilities ...............................................................................................................127 29.06 Warranties, Bonds and Service Agreements.........................................................................127 Article30-Miscellaneous........................................................................................................................128 30.01 Computation of Times...........................................................................................................128 30.02 Owner's Right to Audit Contractor's Records.......................................................................128 30.03 Independent Contractor.......................................................................................................129 30.04 Cumulative Remedies ...........................................................................................................129 30.05 Limitation of Damages..........................................................................................................129 30.06 No Waiver.............................................................................................................................129 30.07 Severability............................................................................................................................129 30.08 Survival of Obligations ..........................................................................................................130 30.09 No Third Party Beneficiaries .................................................................................................130 30.10 Assignment of Contract.........................................................................................................130 30.11 No Waiver of Sovereign Immunity........................................................................................130 30.12 Controlling Law.....................................................................................................................130 30.13 Conditions Precedent to Right to Sue...................................................................................130 30.14 Waiver of Trial by Jury...........................................................................................................130 30.15 Attorney Fees........................................................................................................................130 30.16 Compliance with Laws...........................................................................................................131 30.17 Enforcement..........................................................................................................................131 30.18 Subject to Appropriation.......................................................................................................131 30.19 Contract Sum.........................................................................................................................131 30.20 Contractor's Guarantee as Additional Remedy....................................................................131 General Conditions 00 72 00-8 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 30.21 Notices. .................................................................................................................................131 General Conditions 00 72 00-9 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 ARTICLE 1—DEFINITIONS AND TERMINOLOGY 1.01 Defined Terms A. Terms with initial capital letters, including the term's singular and plural forms, have the meanings indicated in this paragraph wherever used in the Bidding Requirements or Contract Documents. In addition to the terms specifically defined, terms with initial capital letters in the Contract Documents may include references to identified articles and paragraphs, and the titles of other documents or forms. 1. Addenda - Documents issued prior to the receipt of Bids which clarify or modify the Bidding Requirements or the proposed Contract Documents. 2. Agreement - The document executed between Owner and Contractor covering the Work. 3. Alternative Dispute Resolution -The process by which a disputed Claim may be settled as an alternative to litigation, if Owner and Contractor cannot reach an agreement between themselves. 4. Application for Payment - The forms used by Contractor to request payments from Owner and the supporting documentation required by the Contract Documents. 5. Award Date—The date the City Council of the City of Corpus Christi (City)authorizes the City Manager or designee to execute the Contract on behalf of the City. 6. Bid —The documents submitted by a Bidder to establish the proposed Contract Price and Contract Times and provide other information and certifications as required by the Bidding Documents. 7. Bidding Documents — The solicitation documents, the proposed Contract Documents and Addenda. 8. Bidder—An individual or entity that submits a Bid to Owner. 9. Bonds - Performance Bond, Payment Bond, Maintenance Bond, and other Surety instruments executed by Surety. When in singular form, refers to individual instrument. 10. Change Order-A document issued on or after the Effective Date of the Contract,which modifies the Work, Contract Price, Contract Times, or terms and conditions of the Contract. 11. Change Proposal - A document submitted by Contractor in accordance with the requirements of the Contract Documents: a. Requesting an adjustment in Contract Price or Contract Times; b. Contesting an initial decision concerning the requirements of the Contract Documents or the acceptability of Work under the Contract Documents; c. Challenging a set-off against payment due; or d. Seeking a Modification with respect to the terms of the Contract. 12. City Engineer - The Corpus Christi City Engineer and/or designee as identified at the preconstruction conference or in the Notice to Proceed. General Conditions 00 72 00-10 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 13. Claim - A demand or assertion by Owner or Contractor submitted in accordance with the requirements of the Contract Documents. A demand for money or services by an entity other than the Owner or Contractor is not a Claim. Claims must be initiated by written notice, signed and sworn to be an authorized corporate officer, verifying the truth and accuracy of the Claim. 14. Constituent of Concern - Asbestos, petroleum, radioactive materials, polychlorinated biphenyls (PCBs), hazardous wastes, and substances, products, wastes, or other materials that are or become listed, regulated, or addressed pursuant to: a. The Comprehensive Environmental Response, Compensation and Liability Act, 42 U.S.C. §§9601 et seq. ("CERCLA"); b. The Hazardous Materials Transportation Act, 49 U.S.C. §§5101 et seq.; c. The Resource Conservation and Recovery Act,42 U.S.C. §§6901 et seq. ("RCRA"); d. The Toxic Substances Control Act, 15 U.S.C. §§2601 et seq.; e. The Clean Water Act, 33 U.S.C. §§1251 et seq.; f. The Clean Air Act, 42 U.S.C. §§7401 et seq.; or g. Any other Laws or Regulations regulating, relating to, or imposing liability or standards of conduct concerning hazardous,toxic, or dangerous waste, substance, or material. 15. Contract -The entire integrated set of documents concerning the Work and describing the relationship between the Owner and Contractor. 16. Contract Amendment-A document issued on or after the Effective Date of the Contract and signed by Owner and Contractor which: a. Authorizes new phases of the Work and establishes the Contract Price, Contract Times, or terms and conditions of the Contract for the new phase of Work; or b. Modifies the terms and conditions of the Contract but does not make changes in the Work. 17. Contract Documents - Those items designated as Contract Documents in the Agreement. 18. Contract Price - The monetary amount stated in the Agreement and as adjusted by Modifications,and increases or decreases in unit price quantities, if any,that Owner has agreed to pay Contractor for completion of the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents. 19. Contract Times-The number of days or the dates by which Contractor must: a. Achieve specified Milestones; b. Achieve Substantial Completion; and c. Complete the Work. 20. Contractor-The individual or entity with which Owner has contracted for performance of the Work. General Conditions 00 72 00-11 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 21. Contractor's Team - Contractor and Subcontractors, Suppliers, individuals, or entities directly or indirectly employed or retained by them to perform part of the Work or anyone for whose acts they may be liable. 22. Cost of the Work -The sum of costs incurred for the proper performance of the Work as allowed by Article 15. 23. Defective - When applied to Work, refers to Work that is unsatisfactory, faulty, or deficient in that it: a. Does not conform to the Contract Documents; b. Does not meet the requirements of applicable inspections, reference standards, tests, or approvals referred to in the Contract Documents; or c. Has been damaged or stolen prior to OAR's recommendation of final payment unless responsibility for the protection of the Work has been assumed by Owner at Substantial Completion 24. Designer - The individuals or entity named as Designer in the Agreement and the subconsultants, individuals, or entities directly or indirectly employed or retained by Designer to provide design or other technical services to the Owner. Designer has responsibility for engineering or architectural design and technical issues related to the Contract Documents. Designers are Licensed Professional Engineers, Registered Architects or Registered Landscape Architects qualified to practice their profession in the State of Texas. 25. Drawings - The part of the Contract that graphically shows the scope, extent, and character of the Work. Shop Drawings and other Contractor documents are not Drawings. 26. Effective Date of the Contract -The date indicated in the Agreement on which the City Manager or designee has signed the Contract. 27. Field Order-A document issued by OAR or Designer requiring changes in the Work that do not change the Contract Price or the Contract Times. 28. Hazardous Environmental Condition - The presence of Constituents of Concern at the Site in quantities or circumstances that may present a danger to persons or property exposed to Constituents of Concern. The presence of Constituents of Concern at the Site necessary for the execution of the Work or to be incorporated in the Work is not a Hazardous Environmental Condition provided these Constituents of Concern are controlled and contained pursuant to industry practices, Laws and Regulations, and the requirements of the Contract. 29. Indemnified Costs-All costs, losses,damages,and legal or other dispute resolution costs resulting from claims or demands against Owner. These costs include fees for engineers, architects, attorneys, and other professionals. 30. Laws and Regulations; Laws or Regulations-Applicable laws,statutes, rules, regulations, ordinances,codes,and orders of governmental bodies,agencies,authorities,and courts having jurisdiction over the Project. 31. Liens - Charges, security interests, or encumbrances upon Contract related funds, real property, or personal property. General Conditions 00 72 00-12 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 32. Milestone-A principal event in the performance of the Work that Contractor is required by Contract to complete by a specified date or within a specified period of time. 33. Modification - Change made to the Contract Documents by one of the following methods: a. Contract Amendment; b. Change Order; c. Field Order; or d. Work Change Directive. 34. Notice of Award-The notice of Owner's intent to enter into a contract with the Selected Bidder. 35. Notice to Proceed - A notice to Contractor of the Contract Times and the date Work is to begin. 36. Owner-The City of Corpus Christi (City), a Texas home-rule municipal corporation and political subdivision organized under the laws of the State of Texas, acting by and through its duly authorized City Manager and designee, the City Engineer (the Director of Engineering Services), and the City's officers, employees, agents, or representatives, authorized to administer design and construction of the Project. 37. Owner's Authorized Representative or OAR -The individual or entity named as OAR in the Agreement and the consultants, subconsultants, individuals, or entities directly or indirectly employed or retained by them to provide construction management services to the Owner. The OAR may be an employee of the Owner. 38. Owner's Project Team or OPT - The Owner, Owner's Authorized Representative, Resident Project Representative, Designer, and the consultants, subconsultants, individuals or entities directly or indirectly employed or retained by them to provide services to the Owner. 39. Partial Occupancy or Use - Use by Owner of a substantially completed part of the Work for the purpose for which it is intended (or a related purpose) prior to Substantial Completion of all the Work. 40. Progress Schedule -A schedule prepared and maintained by Contractor, describing the sequence and duration of the activities comprising the Contractor's plan to accomplish the Work within the Contract Times. The Progress Schedule must be a Critical Path Method (CPM) Schedule. 41. Project - The total undertaking to be accomplished for Owner under the Contract Documents. 42. Project Manual — That portion of the Contract Documents that may include the following: introductory information,solicitation requirements and responses, proposal, Contract forms and General and Supplementary Conditions, General Requirements, Specification, Drawings, Project Safety Manual and Addenda. 43. Resident Project Representative or RPR-The authorized representative of OPT assigned to assist OAR at the Site. As used herein, the term Resident Project Representative includes assistants and field staff of the OAR. General Conditions 00 72 00-13 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 44. Samples - Physical examples of materials, equipment, or workmanship representing some portion of the Work that are used to establish the standards for that portion of the Work. 45. Schedule of Documents-A schedule of required documents, prepared and maintained by Contractor. 46. Schedule of Values - A schedule, prepared and maintained by Contractor, allocating portions of the Contract Price to various portions of the Work and used as the basis for Contractor's Applications for Payment. 47. Shop Drawings - All drawings, diagrams, illustrations, schedules, and other data or information that are specifically prepared or assembled and submitted by Contractor to illustrate some portion of the Work. Shop Drawings,whether approved or not, are not Drawings and are not Contract Documents. 48. Site - Lands or areas indicated in the Contract Documents as being furnished by Owner upon which the Work is to be performed. The Site includes rights-of-way, easements, and other lands furnished by Owner which are designated for use by the Contractor. 49. Specifications -The part of the Contract that describes the requirements for materials, equipment, systems, standards, and workmanship as applied to the Work, and certain administrative requirements and procedural matters applicable to the Work. 50. Subcontractor-An individual or entity having a direct contract with Contractor or with other Subcontractors or Suppliers for the performance of a part of the Work. 51. Substantial Completion - The point where the Work or a specified part of the Work is sufficiently complete to be used for its intended purpose in accordance with the Contract Documents. 52. Supplementary Conditions -The part of the Contract that amends or supplements the General Conditions. 53. Supplier - A manufacturer, fabricator, supplier, distributor, materialman, or vendor having a direct contract with Contractor or with Subcontractors or other Suppliers to furnish materials or equipment to be incorporated in the Work. 54. Technical Data-Those items expressly identified as Technical Data in the Supplementary Conditions with respect to either: a. Subsurface conditions at the Site; b. Physical conditions relating to existing surface or subsurface structures at the Site, except Underground Facilities; or C. Hazardous Environmental Conditions at the Site. 55. Underground Facilities - All underground pipelines, conduits, ducts, cables, wires, manholes, vaults, tanks, tunnels, other similar facilities or appurtenances, and encasements containing these facilities which are used to convey electricity, gases, steam, liquid petroleum products, telephone or other communications, fiber optic transmissions, cable television, water, wastewater, storm water, other liquids or chemicals, or traffic or other control systems. 56. Unit Price Work-Work to be paid for on the basis of unit prices. General Conditions 00 72 00-14 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 57. Work - The construction of the Project or its component parts as required by the Contract Documents. 58. Work Change Directive -A directive issued to Contractor on or after the Effective Date of the Contract ordering an addition, deletion, or revision in the Work. The Work Change Directive serves as a memorandum of understanding regarding the directive until a Change Order can be issued. 1.02 Terminology A. The words and terms discussed in this Paragraph 1.02 are not defined, but when used in the Bidding Requirements or Contract Documents, have the indicated meaning. B. It is understood that the cost for performing Work is included in the Contract Price and no additional compensation is to be paid by Owner unless specifically stated otherwise in the Contract Documents. Expressions including or similar to "at no additional cost to Owner," "at Contractor's expense,"or similar words mean that the Contractor is to perform or provide specified operation of Work without an increase in the Contract Price. C. The terms"day"or"calendar day' mean a calendar day of 24 hours measured from midnight to the next midnight. D. The meaning and intent of certain terms or adjectives are described as follows: 1. The terms "as allowed," "as approved," "as ordered," "as directed," or similar terms in the Contract Documents indicate an exercise of professional judgment by the OPT. 2. Adjectives including or similar to "reasonable," "suitable," "acceptable," "proper," "satisfactory," or similar adjectives are used to describe a determination of OPT regarding the Work. 3. Any exercise of professional judgment by the OPT will be made solely to evaluate the Work for general compliance with the Contract Documents unless there is a specific statement in the Contract Documents indicating otherwise. 4. The use of these or similar terms or adjectives does not assign a duty or give OPT authority to supervise or direct the performance of the Work, or assign a duty or give authority to the OPT to undertake responsibilities contrary to the provisions of Articles 9 or 10 or other provisions of the Contract Documents. E. The use of the words "furnish," "install," "perform," and "provide" have the following meanings when used in connection with services, materials, or equipment: 1. Furnish means to supply and deliver the specified services, materials, or equipment to the Site or other specified location ready for use or installation. 2. Install means to complete construction or assembly of the specified services, materials, or equipment so they are ready for their intended use. 3. Perform or provide means to furnish and install specified services, materials, or equipment, complete and ready for their intended use. 4. Perform or provide the specified services, materials, or equipment complete and ready for intended use if the Contract Documents require specific services, materials, or General Conditions 00 72 00-15 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 equipment, but do not expressly use the words "furnish," "install," "perform," or "provide." F. Contract Documents are written in modified brief style: 1. Requirements apply to all Work of the same kind, class, and type even though the word "all" is not stated. 2. Simple imperative sentence structure is used which places a verb as the first word in the sentence. It is understood that the words "furnish," "install," "perform," "provide," or similar words include the meaning of the phrase "The Contractor shall..." before these words. 3. Unless specifically stated that action is to be taken by the OPT or others, it is understood that the action described is a requirement of the Contractor. G. Words or phrases that have a well-known technical or construction industry or trade meaning are used in the Contract Documents in accordance with this recognized meaning unless stated otherwise in the Contract Documents. H. Written documents are required where reference is made to notices, reports, approvals, consents, documents, statements, instructions, opinions or other types of communications required by the Contract Documents. Approval and consent documents must be received by Contractor prior to the action or decision for which approval or consent is given. These may be made in printed or electronic format through the OPT's project management information system or other electronic media as required by the Contract Documents or approved by the OAR. I. Giving notice as required by the Contract Documents may be by printed or electronic media using a method that requires acknowledgment of the receipt of that notice. ARTICLE 2—PRELIMINARY MATTERS 2.01 Delivery of Bonds and Evidence of Insurance A. Provide required Bonds with the executed Agreement. B. Provide evidence of insurance required by the Contract Documents with the executed Agreement. 2.02 Copies of Documents A. OPT is to furnish one fully executed Agreement (either electronic or printed) and one copy of the executed Contract Documents in electronic portable document format (PDF). This document is the Project Record Copy of the Contract Documents. 2.03 Project Management System A. Owner shall administer its design and construction management through an internet-based project management system known as e-Builder. B. Contractor shall conduct all communication through and perform all project-related functions utilizing this project management system. This includes all correspondence, General Conditions 00 72 00-16 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 submittals, requests for information, payment requests and processing, contract amendments, change orders, delivery orders and other administrative activities. C. Owner shall administer the software and provide training to Contractor's Team. 2.04 Before Starting Construction A. Provide the following preliminary documents in accordance with the Contract Documents within 10 days after the Effective Date of the Contract: 1. Progress Schedule, which must be a Critical Path Method (CPM) Schedule; 2. Schedule of Documents; and 3. Schedule of Values and projected cash flow information. 2.05 Preconstruction Conference; Designation of Authorized Representatives A. Attend the preconstruction conference as required by the Contract Documents. B. Designate the specific individuals authorized to act as representatives of the Contractor. These individuals must have the authority to transmit and receive information, render decisions relative to the Contract, and otherwise act on behalf of the Contractor. C. Owner is to designate the specific individuals authorized to act as representatives of the Owner and the limits of their authority with regard to acting on behalf of the Owner. ARTICLE 3—CONTRACT DOCUMENTS: INTENT, REQUIREMENTS, REUSE 3.01 Intent A. Requirements of components of the Contract Documents are as binding as if required by all Contract Documents. It is the intent of the Contract Documents to describe a functionally complete Project. The Contract Documents do not indicate or describe all of the Work required to complete the Project. Additional details required for the correct installation of selected products are to be provided by the Contractor and coordinated with the OPT. 1. The Contract requirements described in the General Conditions and Supplementary Conditions apply to Work regardless of where it is described in the Contract Documents, unless specifically noted otherwise. 2. In offering a Bid for this Project and in entering into this Contract,Contractor represents: a. Contractor has studied the Contract Documents, the Work, the Site, local conditions, Laws and Regulations, and other conditions that may affect the Work; b. Contractor has studied the Technical Data and other information referred to in the Contract Documents and has or will make additional surveys and investigations as deemed necessary for the performance of the Work; c. Contractor has correlated these studies and observations with the requirements of the Contract Documents; and d. Contractor has taken all of this information into consideration in developing the Contract Price offered and that the Contract Price offered provides full compensation for providing the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents. General Conditions 00 72 00-17 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 3. Organization of the Contract Documents is not intended to control or lessen the responsibility of the Contractor when dividing Work among Subcontractors or Suppliers, or to establish the extent of Work to be performed by trades, Subcontractors, or Suppliers. Specifications or details do not need to be indicated or specified in each Specification or Drawing. Items shown in the Contract Documents are applicable regardless of their location in the Contract Documents. 4. Standard paragraph titles and other identifications of subject matter in the Specifications are intended to aid in locating and recognizing various requirements of the Specifications. Titles do not define, limit, or otherwise restrict Specification text. 5. Provide the labor, documentation, services, materials, or equipment that may be inferred from the Contract Documents or from prevailing custom or trade usage as being required to produce the indicated result, whether specifically called for in the Contract Documents or not. Include these related costs in the offered Contract Price. B. Provide equipment that is functionally complete as described in the Contract Documents. The Drawings and Specifications do not indicate or describe all of the Work required to complete the installation of products purchased by the Owner or Contractor. Additional details required for the correct installation of selected products are to be provided by the Contractor and coordinated with the Designer through the OAR. C. Comply with the most stringent requirements where compliance with two or more standards is specified and they establish different or conflicting requirements for the Work, unless the Contract Documents indicate otherwise. D. Provide materials and equipment comparable in quality to similar materials and equipment incorporated in the Project or as required to meet the minimum requirements of the application if the materials and equipment are shown in the Drawings but are not included in the Specifications. E. The Project Record Copy of the Contract Documents governs if there is a discrepancy between the Project Record Copy of the Contract Documents and subsequent electronic or digital versions of the Contract Documents, including printed copies derived from these electronic or digital versions. F. The Contract supersedes all prior written or oral negotiations, representations, and agreements. The Contract Documents comprise the entire Agreement between Owner and Contractor. The Contract Documents may be modified only by a Modification. G. Request clarification from OAR for a decision before proceeding if Contractor is not clear on the meaning of the Contract Documents. OAR is to issue clarifications and interpretations of the Contract Documents in accordance with the Contract Documents. 3.02 Reference Standards A. Standard Specifications, Codes, Laws and Regulations: 1. Reference in the Contract Documents to standard specifications, manuals, reference standards, or codes of technical societies, organizations, or associations, or to Laws or Regulations,whether specific or implied, are those in effect at the time Contractor's Bid is submitted or when Contractor negotiates the Contract Price unless specifically stated otherwise in the Contract Documents. General Conditions 00 72 00-18 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 2. No provision of referenced standard specifications, manuals, reference standards, codes, or instructions of a Supplier changes the duties or responsibilities of OPT or Contractor from those described in the Contract Documents or assigns a duty to or gives authority to the OPT to supervise or direct the performance of the Work or undertake responsibilities inconsistent with the Contract Documents. 3. The provisions of the Contract Documents take precedence over standard specifications, manuals, reference standards, codes, or instructions of a Supplier unless specifically stated otherwise in the Contract Documents. B. Comply with applicable construction industry standards, whether referenced or not. 1. Standards referenced in the Contract Documents govern over standards not referenced but recognized as applicable in the construction industry. 2. Comply with the requirements of the Contract Documents if they produce a higher quality of Work than the applicable construction industry standards. 3. Designer determines whether a code or standard is applicable, which of several are applicable, or if the Contract Documents produce a higher quality of Work. C. Make copies of reference standards available if requested by OAR. 3.03 Reporting and Resolving Discrepancies A. Reporting Discrepancies: 1. Carefully study the Drawings and verify pertinent figures and dimensions with respect to actual field measurements before undertaking the Work. Immediately report conflicts, errors, ambiguities, or discrepancies that Contractor discovers or has actual knowledge of to the OAR. Do not proceed with affected Work until the conflict, error, ambiguity, or discrepancy is resolved by a clarification or interpretation from the OAR or by a Modification to the Contract Documents issued pursuant to Paragraph 11.01. 2. The exactness of existing grades, elevations, dimensions or locations given on any Drawings issued by Designer, or the work installed by other contractors, is not guaranteed by Owner. Contractor shall,therefore, satisfy itself as to the accuracy of all grades, elevations, dimensions and locations. Any errors due to Contractor's failure to verify at the site all such grades, elevations, dimensions or locations relating to such existing or other work shall be rectified by Contractor without any additional cost to Owner. 3. Immediately notify the OAR of conflicts, errors, ambiguities, or discrepancies in the Contract Documents or discrepancies between the Contract Documents and: a. Applicable Laws or Regulations; b. Actual field conditions; c. Standard specifications, manuals, reference standards, or codes; or d. Instructions of Suppliers. 4. Do not proceed with affected Work until the conflict, error, ambiguity, or discrepancy is resolved by a clarification or interpretation from the OAR or by a Modification to the General Conditions 00 72 00-19 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 Contract Documents issued pursuant to Paragraph 11.01, except in an emergency as required by Paragraph 7.12. 5. Contractor is liable to the OPT for failure to report conflicts, errors, ambiguities, or discrepancies in the Contract Documents of which Contractor has actual knowledge. 6. Contractor is deemed to have included the most expensive item, system, procedure, etc. in the Contract Price if a conflict, error,ambiguity, or discrepancy in components of the Contract Documents was known, but not reported prior to submitting the Bid or when Contractor negotiates the Contract Price. 3.04 Interpretation of the Contract Documents A. Submit questions concerning the non-technical or contractual/administrative requirements of the Contract Documents to the OAR immediately after those questions arise. OAR is to provide an interpretation of the Contract Documents regarding these questions and will coordinate the response of the OPT to Contractor. B. Submit questions regarding the design of the Project described in the Contract Documents to the OAR immediately after those questions arise. OAR is to request an interpretation of the Contract Documents from the Designer. Designer is to respond to these questions by providing an interpretation of the Contract Documents. OAR will coordinate the response of the OPT to Contractor. C. OPT may initiate a Modification to the Contract Documents through the OAR if a response to the question indicates that a change in the Contract Documents is required. Contractor may appeal Designer's or OAR's interpretation by submitting a Change Proposal. 3.05 Reuse of Documents A. Contractor's Team has no rights to the Contract Documents and may not use the Contract Documents, or copies or electronic media editions of the Contract Documents, other than for the construction of this Project. This provision survives final payment or termination of the Contract. B. Contractor is allowed to retain a copy of the Contract Documents for record purposes, unless specifically prohibited by the Owner for security reasons. Surrender paper and digital copies of the Contract Documents and other related documents and remove these documents from computer equipment or storage devices as a condition of final payment if the Owner so directs. ARTICLE 4—COMMENCEMENT AND PROGRESS OF THE WORK 4.01 Commencement of Contract Times; Notice to Proceed A. The Contract Times commence to run on the date indicated in the Notice to Proceed. 4.02 Starting the Work A. Begin performing the Work on the date indicated in the Notice to Proceed. Do not begin Work prior to having the insurance required in Article 6 in force or before the date indicated in the Notice to Proceed. General Conditions 00 72 00-20 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 4.03 Progress Schedule A. Construct the Work in accordance with the Progress Schedule established in accordance with the Contract Documents. 1. Adjust the Progress Schedule as required to accurately reflect actual progress on the Work. 2. Submit proposed adjustments in the Progress Schedule that change the Contract Times in accordance with the requirements of Article 11. B. Continue performing Work and adhere to the Progress Schedule during disputes or disagreements with Owner. Do not delay or postpone Work pending resolution of disputes or disagreements, or during an appeal process. 4.04 Delays in Contractor's Progress A. No Damages for Delay: Contractor shall receive no compensation for delays or hindrances to the Work,except in the case of direct interference with means and methods by the Owner. In no event shall the Contractor be entitled to any compensation or recovery of any special damages in connection with any delays, including without limitation: consequential damages, lost opportunity costs, impact damages, or other similar damages. Owner's exercise of any of its rights or remedies under the Contract Documents (including without limitation ordering changes in the Work, or directing suspension, rescheduling, or correction of the Work), regardless of the extent or frequency of Owner's exercise of such rights or remedies, shall not be construed as active interference in the Contractor's performance of the Work. An extension of Contract Time, to the extent permitted, shall be the sole remedy of the Contractor for any acknowledged delays.Contractor agrees that the extension of time provides an equitable adjustment. B. Contractor is not entitled to an adjustment in Contract Price or Contract Times for delays, disruptions, or interference caused by or within the control of Contractor's Team. C. No time extensions are allowed for weather conditions, other than those listed in Paragraph 4.04.D, for Projects using calendar days or a fixed date to establish the Contract Time. Contractor is to include the cost associated with weather related delays in the Contract Price and assumes the risks associated with delays related to weather conditions. D. Contractor is entitled to an equitable adjustment in the Contract Times if Contractor's performance or progress is delayed,disrupted or interfered with by unanticipated causes not the fault of and beyond the control of OPT or Contractor. These adjustments in Contract Times are the Contractor's sole and exclusive remedy for the delays, disruption, and interference described in this paragraph. These unanticipated causes may include: 1. Severe and unavoidable natural catastrophes e.g. fires, floods, hurricanes, epidemics, and earthquakes; 2. Acts or failures to act of utility owners performing other work at or adjacent to the Site; 3. Acts of war or terrorism; and 4. Rain days in excess of the number specified in a calendar year. General Conditions 00 72 00-21 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 E. Delays, disruption, and interference to the performance or progress of the Work resulting from the following are governed by Article 5: 1. The existence of a differing subsurface or physical condition; 2. An Underground Facility not shown or not indicated with reasonable accuracy by the Contract Documents; and 3. Hazardous Environmental Conditions. F. Article 8 governs delays, disruption, and interference to the performance or progress of the Work resulting from the performance of certain other work at or adjacent to the Site. G. Notify the OAR immediately of a potential delaying, disrupting, or interfering event. Submit a Change Proposal seeking an adjustment in Contract Price or Contract Times within 30 days of the commencement of the delaying, disrupting, or interfering event. Claims for adjustment to the Contract Price or Contract Times that do not comply with Article 13 are waived. H. Contractor is only entitled to an adjustment of the Contract Times for specific delays, disruptions, and interference to the performance or progress of the Work that can be demonstrated to directly impact the ability of the Contractor to complete the Work within the Contract Times. No adjustments in Contract Times are allowed for delays on components of the Work which were or could have been completed without impacting the Contract Times. I. Contractor is not entitled to an adjustment in Contract Price or Contract Times for delay, disruption, or interference caused by or within the control of the Owner if this delay is concurrent with a delay, disruption, or interference attributable to or within the control of the Contractor's Team. ARTICLE 5—AVAILABILITY OF LANDS; SUBSURFACE AND PHYSICAL CONDITIONS; HAZARDOUS ENVIRONMENTAL CONDITIONS 5.01 Availability of Lands A. Owner is to furnish the Site and inform the Contractor of encumbrances or restrictions known to Owner related to use of the Site with which Contractor must comply in performing the Work. B. Provide for additional lands and access Contractor requires for temporary construction facilities or storage of materials and equipment, other than those identified in the Contract Documents. Provide documentation of authority to use these additional lands to OAR before using them. 5.02 Use of Site and Other Areas A. Limitation on Use of Site and Other Areas: 1. Confine construction equipment, temporary construction facilities, the storage of materials and equipment,and the operations of workers to the Site,adjacent areas that Owner or Contractor has arranged to use through construction easements or agreements, and other adjacent areas as permitted by Laws and Regulations. Assume General Conditions 00 72 00-22 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 full responsibility for damage or injuries which result from the performance of the Work or from other actions or conduct of the Contractor's Team, including: a. Damage to the Site; b. Damage to adjacent areas used for Contractor's Team's operations; C. Damage to other adjacent land or areas; and d. Injuries and losses sustained by the owners or occupants of these lands or areas. 2. Take the following action if a damage or injury claim is made by the owner or occupant of adjacent land or area because of the performance of the Work, or because of other actions or conduct of the Contractor's Team: a. Take immediate corrective or remedial action as required by Paragraph 7.09; and b. Attempt to settle the claim through negotiations with the owner or occupant, or otherwise resolve the claim by mediation or other dispute resolution proceeding or at law. 5.03 Subsurface and Physical Conditions A. The Supplementary Conditions identify: 1. Those reports known to OPT of explorations and tests of subsurface conditions at or adjacent to the Site; 2. Those drawings known to OPT of physical conditions related to existing surface or subsurface structures at the Site, except Underground Facilities; and 3. Technical Data contained in these reports and drawings. B. Data contained in boring logs, recorded measurements of subsurface water levels, and the results of tests performed on materials described in geotechnical data reports specifically prepared for the Project and made available to Contractor are defined as Technical Data, unless Technical Data has been defined more specifically in the Supplementary Conditions. C. Contractor may rely upon the accuracy of the Technical Data contained in these reports and drawings, but these reports and drawings are not Contract Documents. Except for this reliance on Technical Data,Contractor may not rely upon or make claims against Owner with respect to: 1. The completeness of reports and drawings for Contractor's purposes, including aspects of the means, methods, techniques, sequences, and procedures of construction to be employed by Contractor, or Contractor's safety precautions and programs; 2. Other data, interpretations, opinions, and information contained in these reports or shown or indicated in the drawings; or 3. Contractor's interpretation of or conclusions drawn from Technical Data or other data, interpretations, opinions, or information. General Conditions 00 72 00-23 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 5.04 Differing Subsurface or Physical Conditions A. Notify OAR immediately, but in no event later than 3 days, after becoming aware of a subsurface or physical condition that is uncovered or revealed at the Site, and before further disturbing the subsurface or physical conditions or performing any related Work that: 1. Establishes that the Technical Data on which Contractor is entitled to rely as provided in Paragraph 5.03 is materially inaccurate; 2. Requires a change in the Drawings or Specifications; 3. Differs materially from that shown or indicated in the Contract Documents; or 4. Is of an unusual nature and differs materially from conditions ordinarily encountered and generally recognized as inherent in work of the character provided for in the Contract Documents. Do not further disturb or perform Work related to this subsurface or physical condition, except in an emergency as required by Paragraph 7.12, until permission to do so is issued by OAR. B. OAR is to notify the OPT after receiving notice of a differing subsurface or physical condition from the Contractor. Designer is to: 1. Promptly review the subsurface or physical condition; 2. Determine the necessity of OPT's obtaining additional exploration or tests with respect to the subsurface or physical condition; 3. Determine if the subsurface or physical condition falls within one or more of the differing Site condition categories in Paragraph 5.04.A; 4. Prepare recommendations to OPT regarding the Contractor's resumption of Work in connection with the subsurface or physical condition in question; 5. Determine the need for changes in the Drawings or Specifications; and 6. Advise OPT of Designer's findings, conclusions, and recommendations. C. OAR is to issue a statement to Contractor regarding the subsurface or physical condition in question and recommend action as appropriate after review of Designer's findings, conclusions, and recommendations. D. Possible Contract Price and Contract Times Adjustments: 1. Contractor is entitled to an equitable adjustment in Contract Price or Contract Times to the extent that a differing subsurface or physical condition causes a change in Contractor's cost or time to perform the Work provided the condition falls within one or more of the categories described in Paragraph 5.04.A. Any adjustment in Contract Price for Work that is paid for on a unit price basis is subject to the provisions of Paragraph 15.03. General Conditions 00 72 00-24 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 2. Contractor is not entitled to an adjustment in the Contract Price or Contract Times with respect to a subsurface or physical condition if: a. Contractor knew of the existence of the subsurface or physical condition at the time Contractor made an offer to Owner with respect to Contract Price and Contract Times; b. The existence of the subsurface or physical condition could have been discovered or revealed as a result of examinations, investigations, explorations, tests, or studies of the Site and contiguous areas expressly required by the Bidding Requirements or Contract Documents prior to when Contractor's Bid is submitted or when Contractor negotiates the Contract Price; or c. Contractor failed to give notice as required by Paragraph 5.04.A. 3. Contractor may submit a Change Proposal no later than 30 days after OAR's issuance of the OPT's statement to Contractor regarding the subsurface or physical condition in question. 4. A Change Order is to be issued by the OAR if Owner and Contractor agree that Contractor is entitled to an adjustment in the Contract Price or Contract Times and agree to the amount or extent of adjustments in the Contract Price or Contract Times. 5.05 Underground Facilities A. The information and data shown or indicated in the Contract Documents with respect to existing Underground Facilities at or adjacent to the Site is based on information and data furnished to OPT by the owners of these Underground Facilities or by others. OPT is not responsible for the accuracy or completeness of information or data provided by others that OPT makes available to Contractor. The Contractor is responsible for: 1. Investigating and field-verifying the location of underground facilities before beginning Work; 2. Reviewing and checking available information and data regarding existing Underground Facilities at the Site; 3. Complying with Laws and Regulations related to locating Underground Facilities before beginning Work; 4. Locating Underground Facilities shown or indicated in the Contract Documents; 5. Coordinating the Work with the owners, including Owner, of Underground Facilities during construction; and 6. The safety and protection of existing Underground Facilities at or adjacent to the Site and repairing damage resulting from the Work. B. Notify the OAR and the owner of the Underground Facility immediately, but in no event later than 3 days, if an Underground Facility is uncovered or revealed at the Site that was not shown in the Contract Documents or was not shown with reasonable accuracy in the Contract Documents. Do not further disturb conditions or perform Work affected by this discovery, except in the event of an emergency as required by Paragraph 7.12. General Conditions 00 72 00-25 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 C. The Designer is to take the following action after receiving notice from the OAR: 1. Promptly review the Underground Facility and conclude whether the Underground Facility was not shown or indicated in the Contract Documents, or was not shown or indicated with reasonable accuracy; 2. Prepare recommendations to OPT regarding the Contractor's resumption of Work in connection with this Underground Facility; 3. Determine the extent to which a change is required in the Drawings or Specifications to document the consequences of the existence or location of the Underground Facility; and 4. Advise OAR of Designer's findings, conclusions, and recommendations and provide revised Drawings and Specifications if required. D. OAR is to issue a statement to Contractor regarding the Underground Facility in question and recommend action as appropriate after review of Designer's findings, conclusions, and recommendations. E. Contractor is entitled to an equitable adjustment in the Contract Price or Contract Times as provided in Paragraphs 11.04 and 11.05 to the extent that the existing Underground Facility at the Site that was not shown or indicated in the Contract Documents or was not shown or indicated with reasonable accuracy. Any adjustment in Contract Price for Work that is paid for on a unit price basis is subject to the provisions of Paragraph 15.03. F. Contractor is not entitled an adjustment in the Contract Price or Contract Times with respect to an existing Underground Facility at the Site if: 1. Contractor knew of the existence of the existing Underground Facility at the Site at the time Contractor made an offer to Owner with respect to Contract Price and Contract Times; 2. The existence of the existing Underground Facility at the Site could have been discovered or revealed as a result of examinations, investigations, explorations, tests, or studies of the Site and contiguous areas expressly required by the Bidding Requirements or Contract Documents prior to when Contractor's Bid is submitted or when Contractor negotiates the Contract Price; or 3. Contractor failed to give notice as required by Paragraph 5.05.B. G. Contractor may submit a Change Proposal regarding its entitlement to or the amount or extent of adjustments in the Contract Price or Contract Times no later than 30 days after OAR's issuance of OPT's statement to Contractor regarding the Underground Facility. 5.06 Hazardous Environmental Conditions at Site A. The Supplementary Conditions identify: 1. Those reports and drawings known to OPT relating to Hazardous Environmental Conditions that have been identified at or adjacent to the Site; and 2. Technical Data contained in these reports and drawings. B. Contractor may rely upon the accuracy of the Technical Data contained in reports and drawings relating to Hazardous Environmental Conditions identified in the Supplementary General Conditions 00 72 00-26 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 Conditions, but these reports and drawings are not Contract Documents. Except for the reliance on expressly identified Technical Data,Contractor may not rely upon or make claims against Owner's Indemnitees with respect to: 1. The completeness of these reports and drawings for Contractor's purposes, including aspects of the means, methods,techniques, sequences and procedures of construction to be employed by Contractor or Contractor's safety precautions and programs related to Hazardous Environmental Conditions; 2. Other data, interpretations, opinions, and information contained in these reports or shown or indicated in the drawings; or 3. Any Contractor interpretation of or conclusion drawn from Technical Data or other data, interpretations, opinions or information. C. The results of tests performed on materials described in environmental reports specifically prepared for the Project and made available to Contractor are defined as Technical Data unless Technical Data has been defined more specifically in the Supplementary Conditions. D. Contractor is not responsible for removing or remediating Hazardous Environmental Conditions encountered, uncovered or revealed at the Site unless this removal or remediation is expressly identified in the Contract Documents to be within the scope of the Work. E. Contractor is responsible for controlling, containing, and duly removing and remediating Constituents of Concern brought to the Site by Contractor's Team and paying associated costs. 1. Owner may remove and remediate the Hazardous Environmental Condition and impose a set-off against payments to Contractor for associated costs if Contractor's Team creates a Hazardous Environmental Condition,and Contractor does not take acceptable action to remove and remediate the Hazardous Environmental Condition. 2. Contractor's obligation to indemnify Owner for claims arising out of or related to Hazardous Environmental Conditions are as set forth in Paragraph 7.14. F. Immediately notify the OAR and take the following action if Contractor uncovers or reveals a Hazardous Environmental Condition at the Site or adjacent areas used by the Contractor's Team that was not created by the Contractor's Team: 1. Secure or otherwise isolate this condition; 2. Stop Work in affected areas or connected with the condition, except in an emergency as required by Paragraph 7.12; and 3. Do not resume Work in connection with the Hazardous Environmental Condition or in affected areas until after OPT has obtained required permits and OAR sends notice to the Contractor: a. Specifying that this condition and affected areas are or have been rendered safe for the resumption of Work; or b. Specifying special conditions under which Work may be resumed safely. General Conditions 00 72 00-27 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 4. Owner may order the portion of the Work that is in the area affected by the Hazardous Environmental Condition to be deleted from the Work following the procedures in Article 11 if Contractor does not agree to: a. Resume the Work based on a reasonable belief it is unsafe; or b. Resume the Work under the special conditions provided by the OAR. 5. Owner may have this deleted portion of the Work performed by Owner's own forces or others in accordance with Article 8. G. Contractor may submit a Change Proposal or Owner may impose a set-off if an agreement is not reached within 10 days of OAR's notice regarding the resumption of Work as to whether Contractor is entitled to an adjustment in Contract Price or Contract Times or on the amount or extent of adjustments resulting from this Work stoppage or special conditions under which Contractor agrees to resume Work. H. The provisions of Paragraphs 5.03, 5.04, and 5.05 do not apply to the presence of Constituents of Concern or a Hazardous Environmental Condition uncovered or revealed at the Site. ARTICLE 6—BONDS AND INSURANCE 6.01 Performance, Payment, and Other Bonds A. Furnish Performance and Payment Bonds, each in an amount equal to the Contract Price, as security for the faithful performance and payment of Contractor's obligations under the Contract Documents. These Bonds are to remain in effect until 1 year after the date of final payment. Furnish other Bonds as required by the Contract Documents. B. Bonds furnished by the Contractor must meet the requirements of Texas Insurance Code Chapter 3503, Texas Government Code Chapter 2253, and all other applicable Laws and Regulations. C. Notify OAR immediately if the surety on Bonds furnished by Contractor: 1. Is declared bankrupt, or becomes insolvent; 2. Has its right to do business in Texas terminated; or 3. Ceases to meet the requirements of Paragraph 6.02. Provide a Bond and surety which comply with the requirements of Paragraph 6.02 within 20 days after the event giving rise to this notification. D. Contractor is to use amounts paid by Owner to Contractor under the Contract for the performance of the Contract and to satisfy claims against the Payment Bond. E. Notify the OAR of claims filed against the Payment Bond. Notify the claimant and OAR of undisputed amounts and the basis for challenging disputed amounts when a claimant has satisfied the conditions prescribed by Texas Government Code Chapter 2253. Promptly pay undisputed amount. F. Owner is not liable for payment of costs or expenses of claimants under the Payment Bond. Owner has no obligations to pay, give notice or take other action to claimants under the Payment Bond. General Conditions 00 72 00-28 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 G. Owner may exclude the Contractor from the Site and exercise Owner's termination rights under Article 18 if Contractor fails to obtain or maintain required Bonds. H. OPT will provide a copy of the Payment Bond to Subcontractors, Suppliers, or other persons or entities claiming to have furnished labor or materials used in the performance of the Work that request this information in accordance with Texas Government Code Chapter 2253. 6.02 Licensed Sureties A. Provide Bonds in the form prescribed by the Contract Documents from sureties named in the list of"Companies Holding Certificates of Authority as Acceptable Sureties on Federal Bonds and as Acceptable Reinsuring Companies" as published in Circular 570 (amended) by the Financial Management Service, Surety Bond Branch, U.S. Department of the Treasury. B. Provide Bonds required by the Contract Documents from surety companies that are duly licensed or authorized to provide bonds in the State of Texas. 6.03 Required Minimum Insurance Coverage A. Obtain and maintain insurance as required in this Article and in the Supplementary Conditions. B. Deliver evidence of insurance in accordance with the Supplementary Conditions to the Owner to demonstrate that Contractor has obtained and is maintaining the policies, coverages, and endorsements required by the Contract. Provide copies of these certificates to each named insured and additional insured as identified in the Supplementary Conditions or otherwise. 6.04 General Insurance Provisions A. Provide insurance coverages and limits meeting the requirements for insurance in accordance with this Article 6 and the Supplementary Conditions. B. Provide endorsements to the policies as outlined in this Article. C. Obtain insurance from companies that are duly licensed or authorized in the State of Texas to issue insurance policies for the required limits and coverages. Provide insurance from companies that have an A.M. Best rating of A-Vill or better. D. Furnish copies of endorsements and documentation of applicable self-insured retentions and deductibles upon request by OPT or any named insured or additional insured. Contractor may block out (redact) any confidential premium or pricing information contained in any endorsement furnished under this Contract. E. The name and number of the Project must be referenced on the certificate of insurance. F. OPT's failure to demand such certificates or other evidence of the Contractor's full compliance with the insurance requirements or failure to identify a deficiency in compliance from the evidence provided is not a waiver of the Contractor's obligation to obtain and maintain the insurance required by the Contract Documents. G. Notify the Owner if the Contractor fails to purchase or maintain the insurance required by the Contract Documents. Contractor shall not be allowed to perform any Work on the General Conditions 00 72 00-29 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 Project until the required insurance policies are in effect. A Certificate of Liability Insurance shall be submitted to the OPT. H. Owner may exclude the Contractor from the Site and exercise Owner's termination rights under Article 18 if Contractor fails to obtain or maintain the required insurance. I. Owner does not represent that the insurance coverage and limits established in this Contract are adequate to protect Contractor or Contractor's interests. J. The required insurance and insurance limits do not limit the Contractor's liability under the indemnities granted to Owner in the Contract Documents. K. Provide for an endorsement that the "other insurance" clause shall not apply to the OPT where the OPT is an additional insured shown on the policy. Contractor's insurance is primary and non-contributory with respect to any insurance or self-insurance carried by the OPT for liability arising out of operations under this Contract. L. Include the Owner and list the other members of the OPT and any other individuals or entities identified in the Supplementary Conditions as additional insureds on all policies with the exception of the workers' compensation policy and Contractor's professional liability policy. 6.05 Contractor's Insurance A. Purchase and maintain workers' compensation and employer's liability insurance for: 1. Claims under workers' compensation, disability benefits, and other similar employee benefit acts. Obtain workers' compensation coverage through a licensed insurance company in accordance with Texas law and written on a policy and endorsements approved by the Texas Department of Insurance. Provide insurance in amounts to meet all workers' compensation obligations. Provide an "All Other States" endorsement if Contractor is not domiciled in Texas and policy is not written in accordance with Texas Department of Insurance rules. 2. Claims for damages because of bodily injury, occupational sickness or disease, or death of Contractor's employees. 3. United States Longshoreman and Harbor Workers' Compensation Act and Jones Act coverage (if applicable). 4. Foreign voluntary worker compensation (if applicable). B. Purchase and maintain commercial general liability insurance covering all operations by or on behalf of Contractor. The expected coverage is that which would be included in a commercially available ISO Commercial General Liability policy and should provide coverage on an occurrence basis, against: 1. Claims for damages because of bodily injury,sickness or disease,or death of any person other than Contractor's employees; 2. Claims for damages insured by reasonably available personal injury liability coverage which are sustained; 3. By any person as a result of an offense directly or indirectly related to the employment of such person by Contractor; and General Conditions 00 72 00-30 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 4. Claims for damages,other than to the Work itself, because of injury to or destruction of tangible property wherever located, including any resulting loss of use. C. Provide Contractor's commercial general liability policy that is written on a 1996 (or later) ISO commercial general liability form (occurrence form) and include the following coverages and endorsements: 1. Products and completed operations coverage as required in this Article and the Supplementary Conditions. Insurance is to remain in effect for 3 years after final payment. Furnish evidence of the continuation of this insurance at final payment and again each year for 3 years after final payment to Owner and each named insured or additional insured. a. If required by the Supplementary Conditions, provide and maintain Installation Floater insurance for property under the care, custody, or control of Contractor. Provide Installation Floater insurance that is a broad form or "All Peril" policy providing coverage for all materials, supplies, machinery, fixtures, and equipment which will be incorporated into the Work. 1) Provide coverage under the Contractor's Installation Floater that includes: a) Faulty or Defective workmanship, materials, maintenance, or construction; b) Cost to remove Defective or damaged Work from the Site or to protect it from loss or damage; c) Cost to cleanup and remove pollutants; d) Coverage for testing and startup; e) Any loss to property while in transit; f) Any loss at the Site; g) Any loss while in storage, both on and off the Site; and h) Any loss to temporary Project Works if their value is included in the Contract Price. 2) Coverage cannot be contingent on an external cause or risk or limited to property for which the Contractor is legally liable. Provide limits of insurance adequate to cover the value of the installation. Pay any deductible carried under this coverage and assume responsibility for claims on materials, supplies, machinery, fixtures, and equipment which will be incorporated into the Work while in transit or in storage. 2. Blanket contractual liability coverage for Contractor's contractual indemnity obligations in Paragraph 7.14, and all other contractual indemnity obligations of Contractor in the Contract Documents. Industry standard ISO Contractual Liability coverage will meet this obligation. 3. Broad form property damage coverage. 4. Severability of interest. 5. Underground explosion and collapse coverage. General Conditions 00 72 00-31 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 6. Personal injury coverage. 7. Endorsement CG 2032, "Additional Insured - Engineers, Architects or Surveyors Not Engaged by the Named Insured" or its equivalent. D. Purchase and maintain automobile liability insurance against claims for damages because of bodily injury or death of any person or property damage arising out of the ownership, maintenance or use of any motor vehicle. E. For Projects with a Contract Value that exceeds$5,000,000, purchase and maintain umbrella or excess liability insurance written over the underlying employer's liability, commercial general liability, and automobile liability insurance described in the paragraphs above. Provide coverage that is at least as broad as all underlying policies. Provide a policy that provides first-dollar liability coverage as needed. F. Provide Contractor's commercial general liability and automobile liability policies that: 1. Are written on an occurrence basis; 2. Include the individuals or entities identified in the Supplementary Conditions as additional insureds; 3. Include coverage for Owner as defined in Article 1; and 4. Provide primary coverage for all claims covered by the policies, including those arising from both ongoing and completed operations. G. Purchase and maintain insurance coverage for third-party injury and property damage claims, including clean-up costs that result from Hazardous Environmental Conditions which result from Contractor's operations and completed operations. Provide Contractor's pollution liability insurance that includes long-term environmental impacts for the disposal of pollutants/contaminants and is not limited to sudden and accidental discharge. The completed operations coverage is to remain in effect for 3 years after final payment. The policy must name OPT and any other individuals and entities identified in the Supplementary Conditions as additional insureds. H. Purchase and maintain applicable professional liability insurance, or have Subcontractors and Suppliers do so, if Contractor or any Subcontractor or Supplier will provide or furnish professional services under this Contract. I. The policies of insurance required by this Article must: 1. Include at least the specific coverages and be written for not less than the limits of liability provided in this Article or the Supplementary Conditions or required by Laws or Regulations,whichever is greater. 2. Contain a provision that coverage afforded will not be canceled or materially changed until at least 30 days prior written notice has been given to Contractor, Owner, and all named insureds and additional insureds. 3. Remain in effect at all times when Contractor is performing Work or is at the Site to conduct tasks arising from the Contract Documents. 4. Be appropriate for the Work being performed and provide protection from claims resulting from the Contractor's performance of the Work and Contractor's other obligations under the Contract Documents, whether performed by Contractor, General Conditions 00 72 00-32 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 Subcontractor, Supplier, anyone directly or indirectly employed or retained by any of them, or by anyone for whose acts they may be liable. J. The coverage requirements for specific policies of insurance must be met directly by those policies and may not rely on excess or umbrella insurance provided in other policies to meet the coverage requirement. 6.06 Property Insurance A. Purchase and maintain builder's risk insurance in the amount of the full replacement cost of the Project. This policy is subject to the deductible amounts requirements in this Article and the Supplementary Conditions or those required by Laws and Regulations and must comply with the requirements of Paragraph 6.09. This insurance shall: 1. Include the OPT,Contractor,and all Subcontractors,and any other individuals or entities identified in the Supplementary Conditions, as named insureds. 2. Be written on a builder's risk "all risk" policy form that includes insurance for physical loss or damage to the Work, temporary buildings, falsework, and materials and equipment in transit, and insures against at least the following perils or causes of loss: fire; lightning; windstorm; riot; civil commotion; terrorism; vehicle impact; aircraft; smoke; theft; vandalism and malicious mischief; mechanical breakdown, boiler explosion, and artificially generated electric current; earthquake; volcanic activity, and other earth movement; flood; collapse; explosion; debris removal; demolition occasioned by enforcement of Laws and Regulations; water damage (other than that caused by flood); and such other perils or causes of loss as may be specifically required by this Section. If insurance against mechanical breakdown, boiler explosion, and artificially generated electric current; earthquake; volcanic activity, and other earth movement; or flood, are not commercially available under builder's risk, by endorsement or otherwise, this insurance may be provided through other insurance policies acceptable to Owner and Contractor. 3. Cover expenses incurred in the repair or replacement of any insured property. 4. Cover materials and equipment in transit or stored prior to being incorporated in the Work. 5. Cover Owner-furnished or assigned property. 6. Allow for partial utilization of the Work by Owner. 7. Allow for the waiver of the insurer's subrogation rights as set forth below. 8. Provide primary coverage for all losses and damages caused by the perils or causes of loss covered. 9. Not include a co-insurance clause. 10. Include a broad exception for ensuing losses from physical damage or loss with respect to any Defective workmanship, design, or materials exclusions. 11. Include testing and startup. 12. Be maintained in effect until the Work as a whole is complete, unless otherwise agreed to in writing by Owner and Contractor. General Conditions 00 72 00-33 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 B. Evidence of insurance provided must contain a provision or endorsement that the coverage afforded will not be canceled or materially changed or renewal refused until at least 30 days' prior written notice has been given to Owner and Contractor and to each named insured. C. Pay for costs not covered by the policy deductible. D. Notify builder's risk insurance provider if Owner will occupy or use a portion or portions of the Work prior to Substantial Completion of all the Work. Maintain the builder's risk insurance in effect during this Partial Occupancy or Use. E. Contractor may purchase other special insurance to be included in or to supplement the builder's risk or property insurance policies provided under this Article and the Supplementary Conditions. F. Contractor, Subcontractors, or employees of the Contractor or a Subcontractor owning property items, such as tools, construction equipment, or other personal property not expressly covered in the insurance required by the Contract Documents are responsible for providing their own insurance. 6.07 Waiver of Rights A. Insurance shall include a waiver of subrogation in favor of the additional insureds identified in the Supplementary Conditions. B. All policies purchased in accordance with this Article are to contain provisions to the effect that the insurers have no rights of recovery against OPT, named insureds or additional insureds in the event of a payment for loss or damage. Contractor and insurers waive all rights against the Owner's Indemnities for losses and damages created by or resulting from any of the perils or causes of loss covered by these policies and any other applicable property insurance. None of these waivers extend to the rights Contractor has to the proceeds of insurance as trustee. C. Contractor is responsible for assuring that agreements with Subcontractors contain provisions that the Subcontractor waive all rights against Owner,Contractor, named insureds and additional insureds, and the officers, directors, members, partners, employees, agents, consultants, and subcontractors of each and any of them,for all losses and damages created by or resulting from any of the perils or causes of loss covered by builder's risk insurance and other property insurance. 6.08 Owner's Insurance for Project A. Owner is not responsible for purchasing and maintaining any insurance to protect the interest of the Contractor, Subcontractors, or others in the Work. The stated limits of insurance required are minimum only. Determine the limits that are adequate. These limits may be basic policy limits or any combination of basic limits and umbrella limits. In any event, Contractor is fully responsible for all losses arising out of, resulting from, or connected with operations under this Contract whether or not these losses are covered by insurance. The acceptance of evidence of insurance bythe OPT, named insureds,or additional insureds does not release the Contractor from compliance with the insurance requirements of the Contract Documents. General Conditions 00 72 00-34 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 6.09 Acceptable Evidence of Insurance A. Provide evidence of insurance acceptable to the Owner with the executed Contract Documents. Provide the following as evidence of insurance: 1. Certificates of Insurance on an acceptable form; 2. Riders or endorsements to policies; and 3. Policy limits and deductibles. B. Provide a list of"Additional Insureds" for each policy. C. Provide evidence that waivers of subrogation are provided on all applicable policies. D. Provide evidence of requirements for 30 days' notice before cancellation or any material change in the policy's terms and conditions, limits of coverage, or change in deductible amount. 6.10 Certificate of Insurance A. Submit Certificates of Insurance meeting the following requirements: 1. Form has been filed with and approved by the Texas Department of Insurance under Texas Insurance Code §1811.101; or 2. Form is a standard form deemed approved by the Department under Texas Insurance Code §1811.101. 3. No requirements of this Contract may be interpreted as requiring the issuance of a certificate of insurance on a certificate of insurance form that has not first been filed with and approved by the Texas Department of Insurance. B. Include the name of the Project in the description of operations box on the certificate of insurance. 6.11 Insurance Policies A. If requested by the Owner, make available for viewing a copy of insurance policies, declaration pages and endorsements, and documentation of applicable self-insured retentions and deductibles. B. Contractor may block out (redact) any proprietary information or confidential premium pricing information contained in any policy or endorsement furnished under this Contract. 6.12 Continuing Evidence of Coverage A. Provide updated, revised, or new evidence of insurance in accordance this Article and the Supplementary Conditions prior to the expiration of existing policies. B. Provide evidence of continuation of insurance coverage at final payment and for the following 3 years. 6.13 Notices Regarding Insurance A. Notices regarding insurance are to be sent to the Owner at the following address: General Conditions 00 72 00-35 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 City of Corpus Christi— Engineering Attn: Construction Contract Admin. P.O. Box 9277 Corpus Christi,TX 78469-9277 B. Submit questions regarding insurance requirements to the Construction Contract Administrator by calling 361-826-3530. 6.14 Texas Workers' Compensation Insurance Required Notice A. Definitions: 1. Certificate of coverage ("certificate") -A copy of a certificate of insurance, a certificate of authority to self-insure issued by the commission, or a coverage agreement (TWCC- 81, TWCC-82, TWCC-83, or TWCC-84), showing statutory workers' compensation insurance coverage for the person's or entity's employees providing services on a project, for the duration of the Project. 2. Duration of the Project-includes the time from the beginning of the Work on the Project until the Contractor's/person's Work on the Project has been completed and accepted by the governmental entity. 3. Persons providing services on the Project ("Subcontractor" in §406.096) - includes all persons or entities performing all or part of the services the Contractor has undertaken to perform on the Project, regardless of whether that person contracted directly with the Contractor and regardless of whether that person has employees. This includes, without limitation, independent contractors, subcontractors, leasing companies, motor carriers, owner-operators, employees of any such entity, or employees of any entity which furnishes persons to provide services on the Project. "Services" include, without limitation, providing, hauling, or delivering equipment or materials, or providing labor, transportation, or other service related to a project. "Services" does not include activities unrelated to the Project, such as food/beverage vendors, office supply deliveries, and delivery of portable toilets. B. The Contractor shall provide coverage, based on proper reporting of classification codes and payroll amounts and filing of any coverage agreements, which meets the statutory requirements of Texas Labor Code, Section 401.011(44) for all employees of the Contractor providing services on the Project, for the duration of the Project. C. The Contractor must provide a certificate of coverage to the governmental entity prior to being awarded the Contract. D. If the coverage period shown on the Contractor's current certificate of coverage ends during the duration of the Project,the Contractor must, prior to the end of the coverage period,file a new certificate of coverage with the governmental entity showing that coverage has been extended. E. The Contractor shall obtain from each person providing services on a project, and provide to the governmental entity: 1. A certificate of coverage, prior to that person beginning Work on the Project, so the governmental entity will have on file certificates of coverage showing coverage for all persons providing services on the Project; and General Conditions 00 72 00-36 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 2. No later than seven days after receipt by the Contractor, a new certificate of coverage showing extension of coverage, if the coverage period shown on the current certificate of coverage ends during the duration of the Project. F. The Contractor shall retain all required certificates of coverage for the duration of the Project and for one year thereafter. G. The Contractor shall notify the governmental entity in writing by certified mail or personal delivery,within 10 days after the Contractor knew or should have known,of any change that materially affects the provision of coverage of any person providing services on the Project. H. The Contractor shall post on each Project Site a notice, in the text, form and manner prescribed by the Texas Workers' Compensation Commission, informing all persons providing services on the Project that they are required to be covered, and stating how a person may verify coverage and report lack of coverage. I. The Contractor shall contractually require each person with whom it contracts to provide services on a project,to: 1. Provide coverage, based on proper reporting of classification codes and payroll amounts and filing of any coverage agreements,which meets the statutory requirements of Texas Labor Code, Section 401.011(44) for all of its employees providing services on the Project,for the duration of the Project; 2. Provide to the Contractor, prior to that person beginning Work on the Project, a certificate of coverage showing that coverage is being provided for all employees of the person providing services on the Project,for the duration of the Project; 3. Provide the Contractor, prior to the end of the coverage period, a new certificate of coverage showing extension of coverage, if the coverage period shown on the current certificate of coverage ends during the duration of the Project; 4. Obtain from each other person with whom it contracts, and provide to the Contractor: a. A certificate of coverage, prior to the other person beginning Work on the Project; and b. A new certificate of coverage showing extension of coverage, prior to the end of the coverage period, if the coverage period shown on the current certificate of coverage ends during the duration of the Project; 5. Retain all required certificates of coverage on file for the duration of the Project and for one year thereafter; 6. Notify the governmental entity in writing by certified mail or personal delivery, within 10 days after the person knew or should have known, of any change that materially affects the provision of coverage of any person providing services on the Project; and 7. Contractually require each person with whom it contracts, to perform as required by this section, with the certificates of coverage to be provided to the person for whom they are providing services. J. By signing this Contract or providing or causing to be provided a certificate of coverage, the Contractor is representing to the governmental entity that all employees of the Contractor who will provide services on the Project will be covered by workers' compensation coverage for the duration of the Project, that the coverage will be based on proper reporting of General Conditions 00 72 00-37 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 classification codes and payroll amounts, and that all coverage agreements will be filed with the appropriate insurance carrier or, in the case of a self-insured, with the commission's Division of Self-Insurance Regulation. Providing false or misleading information may subject the Contractor to administrative penalties, criminal penalties, civil penalties, or other civil actions. K. The Contractor's failure to comply with any of these provisions is a breach of contract by the Contractor which entitles the governmental entity to declare the Contract void if the Contractor does not remedy the breach within ten days after receipt of notice of breach from the governmental entity. ARTICLE 7—CONTRACTOR'S RESPONSIBILITIES 7.01 Supervision and Superintendence A. Supervise, inspect, and direct the performance of the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents. Contractor is solely responsible for the means, methods, techniques, sequences, and procedures of construction. B. Provide a competent resident superintendent acceptable to the OPT. The resident superintendent or acceptable qualified assistant is to be present at all times when Work is being done. Do not replace this resident superintendent except under extraordinary circumstances. Provide a replacement resident superintendent equally competent to the previous resident superintendent if replacement is required. Notify the Owner prior to replacing the resident superintendent and obtain Owner's consent to the change in superintendent. 7.02 Labor; Working Hours A. Provide competent,suitably qualified personnel to survey and lay out the Work and perform Work to complete the Project. Maintain good discipline and order at the Site. B. Perform Work at the Site during regular working hours except as otherwise required for the safety or protection of persons or the Work or property at the Site or adjacent to the Site and except as otherwise stated in the Contract Documents. Regular working hours are between sunrise and sundown Monday through Saturday unless other times are specifically authorized in writing by OAR. C. Do not perform Work on a Sunday or legal holiday without OAR's consent. The following legal holidays are observed by the Owner: Holiday Date Observed New Year's Day January 1 Martin Luther King Jr Day Third Monday in January Memorial Day Last Monday in May Independence Day July 4 Labor Day First Monday in September Thanksgiving Day Fourth Thursday in November General Conditions 00 72 00-38 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 Holiday Date Observed Friday after Thanksgiving Friday after Thanksgiving Christmas Day December 25 D. If a legal holiday falls on a Saturday, it will be observed the preceding Friday. If a legal holiday falls on a Sunday, it will be observed the following Monday. E. Pay additional cost incurred by Owner for services of the OAR or RPR to observe Work constructed outside of regular working hours. OAR will issue a Set-off in the Application for Payment for this cost per Paragraph 17.01.13 7.03 Services, Materials, and Equipment A. Provide services, materials, equipment, labor, transportation, construction equipment and machinery, tools, appliances, fuel, power, light, heat, telephone, water, sanitary facilities, temporary facilities, and other facilities and incidentals necessary for the performance, testing, start-up, and completion of the Work, whether or not these items are specifically called for in the Contract Documents. B. Provide new materials and equipment to be incorporated into the Work. Provide special warranties and guarantees required by the Contract Documents. Provide satisfactory evidence, including reports of required tests, as to the source, kind, and quality of materials and equipment as required by the Contract Documents or as requested by the OAR. C. Store, apply, install, connect, erect, protect, use, clean, and condition materials and equipment in accordance with instructions of the applicable Supplier, unless otherwise required by the Contract Documents. 7.04 Concerning Subcontractors, Suppliers, and Others A. Contractor may retain Subcontractors and Suppliers for the performance of parts of the Work. All Subcontractors and Suppliers must be acceptable to Owner. B. Contractor must retain specific Subcontractors, Suppliers, or other individuals or entities for the performance of designated parts of the Work if required to do so by the Contract Documents. C. Submit a list of proposed Subcontractors and Suppliers to OAR prior to entering into binding subcontracts or purchase orders. These proposed Subcontractors or Suppliers are deemed acceptable to Owner unless Owner raises a substantive, reasonable objection within 30 days after receiving this list. Under no circumstances shall any Subcontractor debarred under Chapter 41 of The Code of Ordinances, City of Corpus Christi, be deemed acceptable to Owner. D. Contractor is not required to retain Subcontractors,Suppliers,or other individuals or entities to furnish or perform part of the Work after the Effective Date of the Contract if Contractor has reasonable objection. E. Owner may require the replacement of Subcontractors, Suppliers, or other individuals or entities retained by the Contractor. Provide an acceptable replacement for the rejected Subcontractor, Supplier, or other individual or entity. Owner also may require Contractor to retain specific replacements, subject to Contractor's reasonable objections. General Conditions 00 72 00-39 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 F. Contractor may be entitled to an adjustment in Contract Price or Contract Times with respect to a replacement of Subcontractors, Suppliers, or other entities required by Owner. The Contractor is not entitled to an adjustment in Contract Price or Contract Time with respect to replacement of any individual deemed unsuitable by the OPT. Notify OAR immediately if a replacement of Subcontractors, Suppliers, or other entity increases the Contract Price or Contract Times. Initiate a Change Proposal for the adjustment within 10 days of Owner's notice to replace a Subcontractor,Supplier,or other entity retained by Contractor to perform part of the Work. Do not make the replacement until the change in Contract Price or Contract Times has been accepted by the Owner if Change Proposal is to be submitted. G. Owner's initial acceptance of Subcontractors, Suppliers, or other individuals or entities, or their replacements, does not constitute a waiver of the obligation of the Contractor to complete the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents. H. Maintain a current and complete list of Subcontractors and Suppliers that are to perform or furnish part of the Work. I. Contractor is fully responsible for the acts and omissions of Subcontractors, Suppliers, and other individuals or entities performing or furnishing Work. J. Contractor is solely responsible for scheduling and coordinating the work of Subcontractors, Suppliers, and other individuals or entities performing or furnishing Work. K. Require Subcontractors, Suppliers, and other individuals or entities performing or furnishing Work to communicate with OPT through Contractor. L. Contracts between the Contractor and their Subcontractors or Suppliers may specifically bind the Subcontractors or Suppliers to the applicable terms and conditions of the Contract Documents. Contractor is responsible for meeting the requirements of the Contract Documents if they choose to not bind the Subcontractors or Suppliers to applicable terms or conditions of the Contract Documents. 1. All Subcontractors employed on this Project must be required to obtain Workers' Compensation Insurance. 2. Proof of this insurance will be required prior to the start of any Work. M. OPT may furnish information about amounts paid to Contractor for Work provided by Subcontractors or Suppliers to the entity providing the Work. N. Nothing in the Contract Documents: 1. Creates a contractual relationship between members of the OPT and members of the Contractor's Team. 2. Creates an obligation on the part of the Owner to pay or to see to the payment of money due members of the Contractor's Team, except as may be required by Laws and Regulations. 7.05 Patent Fees and Royalties A. Pay license fees, royalties, and costs incident to the use of inventions, designs, processes, products, or devices which are patented or copyrighted by others in the performance of the Work, or to incorporate these inventions, designs, processes, products, or devices which are patented or copyrighted by others in the Work. The Contract Documents identify inventions, General Conditions 00 72 00-40 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 designs, processes, products, or devices OPT knows are patented or copyrighted by others or that its use is subject to patent rights or copyrights calling for the payment of a license fee or royalty to others. Contractor is to include the cost associated with the use of patented or copyrighted products or processes, whether specified or selected by the Contractor, in the Contract Price. B. Contractor's obligation to indemnify Owner for claims arising out of or related to infringement of patent rights and copyrights are as set forth in Paragraph 7.14. 7.06 Permits A. Obtain and pay for construction permits and licenses. OPT is to assist Contractor in obtaining permits and licenses when required to do so by applicable Laws and Regulations. Pay governmental charges and inspection fees necessary for the prosecution of the Work which are applicable at the time the Contractor's Bid is submitted or when Contractor negotiates the Contract Price. This Project is not exempt from City permits and fees unless expressly stated otherwise. 7.07 Taxes A. Contractor is responsible for all taxes and duties arising out of the Work. The Owner generally qualifies as a tax exempt agency as defined by the statutes of the State of Texas and is usually not subject to any city or state sales or use taxes, however certain items such as rented equipment may be taxable even though Owner is a tax-exempt agency. Contractor is responsible for including in the Contract Price any applicable sales and use taxes and is responsible for complying with all applicable statutes and rulings of the State Comptroller. Pay sales, consumer, use, and other similar taxes required to be paid by Contractor in accordance with the Laws and Regulations. B. The Owner is exempt from the Federal Transportation and Excise Tax. Contractor must comply with all federal regulations governing the exemptions. C. Products incorporated into the Work are exempt from state sales tax according to the provisions of Subchapter H, Chapter 151, of the Texas Tax Code. D. Contractor may not include any amounts for sales, use, or similar taxes for which the Owner is exempt in the Contract Price or any proposed Change Order or Application for Payment. E. Obtain tax exemption certificates or other documentation necessary to establish Owner's exemption from such taxes. 7.08 Laws and Regulations A. Give required notices and comply with Laws and Regulations applicable to the performance of the Work. OPT is not responsible for monitoring Contractor's compliance with Laws or Regulations except where expressly required by applicable Laws and Regulations. B. Pay costs resulting from actions taken by Contractor that are contrary to Laws or Regulations. Contractor is not responsible for determining that the design aspects of the Work described in the Contract Documents is in accordance with Laws and Regulations. This does not relieve Contractor of its obligations under Paragraph 3.03. General Conditions 00 72 00-41 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 C. Owner or Contractor may give notice to the other party of changes in Laws or Regulations that may affect the cost or time of performance of the Work, including: 1. Changes in Laws or Regulations affecting procurement of permits; and 2. Sales, use, value-added, consumption, and other similar taxes which come into effect after Contractor's Bid is submitted or when Contractor negotiates the Contract Price. D. Contractor may submit a Change Proposal or Owner may initiate a Claim within 30 days of this notice if Owner and Contractor are unable to agree on entitlement to or on the amount or extent of adjustments in Contract Price or Contract Times resulting from these changes. 7.09 Safety and Protection A. Contractor is solely responsible for initiating,maintaining,and supervising safety precautions and programs in connection with the Work. This responsibility does not relieve Subcontractors of their responsibility for the safety of persons or property in the performance of their work, nor for compliance with applicable safety Laws and Regulations. B. Take necessary precautions for the safety of persons on the Site or who may be affected by the Work, and provide the necessary protection to prevent damage, injury, or loss to: 1. Work and materials and equipment to be incorporated in the Work, whether stored on or off Site; and 2. Other property at or adjacent to the Site, including trees, shrubs, lawns, walks, pavements, roadways, structures, other work in progress, utilities, and Underground Facilities not designated for removal, relocation, or replacement in the course of construction. C. Comply with applicable Laws and Regulations relating to the safety and protection of persons or property. Erect and maintain necessary safeguards for safety and protection. Notify Owner; the owners of adjacent property, Underground Facilities, and other utilities; and other contractors and utility owners performing work at or adjacent to the Site when prosecution of the Work may affect them. Cooperate with them in the protection, removal, relocation, and replacement of their property or work in progress. 1. Comply with requirements of Underground Facility Damage Prevention and Safety Act, Texas Utilities Code Chapter 251. 2. Comply with all applicable safety rules and regulations of the Federal Occupational Health and Safety Act of 1970 and subsequent amendments (OSHA). D. Remedy damage, injury, or loss to property referred to in Paragraph 7.09.B caused by Contractor's Team. Pay remediation costs unless the damage or loss is: 1. Attributable to the fault of the Contract Documents; 2. Attributable to acts or omissions of OPT; or 3. Not attributable to the actions or failure to act of the Contractor's Team. E. Contractor's duties and responsibilities for safety and protection of persons or the Work or property at or adjacent to the Site continues until Work is completed and resumes whenever Contractor's Team returns to the Site to fulfill warranty or correction obligations or to conduct other tasks. General Conditions 00 72 00-42 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 F. Comply with the applicable requirements of the Owner's safety program if required to do so in the Supplementary Conditions. A copy of the Owner's safety program will be provided in the Bidding Documents. 7.10 Safety Representative A. Provide a qualified and experienced safety representative at the Site whose duties and responsibilities are the prevention of accidents and maintaining and supervising safety programs. 7.11 Hazard Communication Programs A. Coordinate the exchange of material safety data sheets or other hazard communication information required to be made available or exchanged between or among employers at the Site in accordance with Laws or Regulations. 7.12 Emergencies A. Act to prevent threatened damage, injury or loss in emergencies affecting the safety or protection of persons or the Work or property at or adjacent to the Site. Notify OAR immediately if Contractor believes that significant changes in the Work or variations from the Contract Documents have been caused or are required as a result of this need to act. A Modification is to be issued by OAR if OPT determines that the incident giving rise to the emergency action was not the responsibility of the Contractor and that a change in the Contract Documents is required because of the action taken by Contractor in response to this emergency. 7.13 Contractor's General Warranty and Guarantee A. Contractor warrants and guarantees to Owner that Work is in accordance with the Contract Documents and is not Defective. Owner is entitled to rely on Contractor's warranty and guarantee. Assume and bear responsibility for costs and time delays associated with variations from the requirements of the Contract Documents. B. This Contractor's warranty and guarantee excludes defects or damage caused by improper maintenance or operation, abuse, or modification by OPT; or normal wear and tear under normal usage. C. Contractor's obligation to perform and complete Work in accordance with the Contract Documents is absolute. None of the following constitute an acceptance of Defective Work or a release of Contractor's obligation to perform Work in accordance with the Contract Documents: 1. Observations by OPT; 2. Recommendation by OAR to pay or payment by Owner of progress or final payments; 3. The issuance of a Certificate of Substantial Completion; 4. Use or occupancy of part of the Work by Owner; 5. Review and approval of a Shop Drawing or Sample; 6. Inspections,tests, or approvals by others; or General Conditions 00 72 00-43 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 7. Correction of Defective Work by Owner. D. The Contract Documents may require the Contractor to accept the assignment of a contract between the Owner and a contractor or supplier. The specific warranties, guarantees, and correction obligations contained in an assigned contract govern with respect to Contractor's performance obligations to Owner for the Work described in an assigned contract. 7.14 INDEMNIFICATION A. To the fullest extent permitted by law, Contractor shall indemnify, defend, and hold harmless the Owner from and against claims, damages, losses and expenses, including but not limited to attorney's fees or dispute resolution costs, arising out of or resulting from performance of the Work and/or failure to comply with the terms and conditions of the contract, violations of Laws or Regulations, or bodily injury, death or destruction of tangible property caused by the acts, omissions or negligence of the Contractor's Team, regardless of whether such claim, damage, loss or expense is alleged to be caused in part by an Owner hereunder, subject to the Owner's defenses and liability limits under the Texas Tort Claims Act. However, nothing herein shall be construed to require Contractor to indemnify an Owner against a claim, loss, damage or expense caused by the sole negligence of an Owner. B. To the fullest extent permitted by law, Contractor shall indemnify, defend, and hold harmless the Owner from and against Indemnified Costs, arising out of or relating to: (i) the failure to control, contain, or remove a Constituent of Concern brought to the Site by Contractor's Team or a Hazardous Environmental Condition created by Contractor's Team, (ii) Contractor's Team's action or inaction related to damages, delays, disruptions or interference with the work of Owner's employees, other contractors, or utility owners performing other work at or adjacent to the Site, or (iii) the correction of Defective Work. Nothing in this paragraph obligates the Contractor to indemnify the Owner from the consequences of the Owner's sole negligence. c. To the fullest extent permitted by law, Contractor shall indemnify, defend, and hold harmless the Owner from and against Indemnified Costs resulting from infringement on patent rights or copyrights by Contractor's Team. General Conditions 00 72 00-44 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 D. The indemnification obligations of this Paragraph 7.14 are not limited by the amount or type of damages, compensation or benefits payable by or for members of the Contractor's Team or other individuals or entities under workers' compensation acts, disability benefit acts, or other employee benefit acts in claims against Owner by an employee or the survivor or personal representative of employee of Contractor's Team. The indemnification obligations of this Paragraph 7.14 shall not be deemed to be released,waived or modified in any respect by reason of any surety or insurance provided by Contractor. E. The indemnification obligations of this Paragraph 7.14 do not extend to the liability of Designer arising out of the preparation of the Contract Documents or giving directions or instructions, or failing to give them, to the extent they are obligated to do so if that is the primary cause of the injury or damage. F. Notify the other party within 10 days if Owner or Contractor receives notice of any claim or circumstances that could give rise to an indemnified loss. The notice must include the following: 1. A description of the indemnification event in reasonable detail; 2. The basis on which indemnification may be due; and 3. The anticipated amount of the indemnified loss. This notice does not stop or prevent Owner from later asserting a different basis for indemnification or a different amount of indemnified loss than that indicated in the initial notice. Owner does not waive any rights to indemnification except to the extent that Contractor is prejudiced, suffers loss, or incurs expense because of the delay if Owner does not provide this notice within the 10-day period. G. Defense of Indemnification Claims: 1. Assume the defense of the claim with counsel chosen by the Contractor and pay related costs, unless Owner decides otherwise. Contractor's counsel must be acceptable to Owner. Control the defense and any negotiations to settle the claim. Advise Owner as to its defense of the claim within 10 days after being notified of the indemnification request. Owner may assume and control the defense if Contractor does not assume the defense. Pay all defense expenses of the Owner as an indemnified loss. 2. Owner may retain separate counsel to participate in, but not control, the defense and any settlement negotiations if Contractor defends the claim. Contractor may not settle the claim without the consent or agreement of Owner. Contractor may settle the claim with Owner's consent and agreement unless it: a. Would result in injunctive relief or other equitable remedies or otherwise require Owner to comply with restrictions or limitations that adversely affect Owner; b. Would require Owner to pay amounts that Contractor does not fund in full; or c. Would not result in Owner's full and complete release from all liability to the plaintiffs or claimants who are parties to or otherwise bound by the settlement. 7.15 Delegation of Professional Design Services A. Contractor is not required to provide professional design services unless these services are specifically required by the Contract Documents for a portion of the Work or unless these General Conditions 00 72 00-45 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 services are required to carry out Contractor's responsibilities for construction means, methods, techniques, sequences, and procedures. Contractor is not required to provide professional services in violation of applicable Laws and Regulations. B. The Contract Documents specify performance and design criteria related to systems, materials or equipment if professional design services or certifications by a design professional related to systems, materials, or equipment are specifically required of Contractor. These services or certifications must be provided by the licensed Texas Professional Engineer or Registered Architect who prepares, signs, and seals drawings, calculations, specifications, certifications, Shop Drawings, and other documents. C. OPT is entitled to rely upon the adequacy, accuracy, and completeness of the services, certifications, or approvals performed by Contractor's design professionals, provided OPT has specified to Contractor the performance and design criteria that these services must satisfy. D. Pursuant to this Paragraph 7.15, Designer's review and approval of design calculations and design drawings is only for the limited purpose of checking for conformance with the performance and design criteria given and the design concepts expressed in the Contract Documents. Designer's review and approval of Shop Drawings and other documents is only for the purpose stated in the Contract Documents. E. Contractor is not responsible for the adequacy of the performance or design criteria specified by OPT. Advise OPT if the performance or design criteria are known or considered likely to be inadequate or otherwise deficient. ARTICLE 8—OTHER WORK AT THE SITE 8.01 Other Work A. Owner may arrange for other work at or adjacent to the Site which is not part of the Contractor's Work. This other work may be performed by Owner's employees or through other contractors. Utility owners may perform work on their utilities and facilities at or adjacent to the Site. Include costs associated with coordinating with entities performing other work or associated with connecting to this other work in the Contract Price if this other work is shown in the Contract Documents. B. OPT is to notify Contractor of other work prior to starting the work and provide any knowledge they have regarding the start of utility work at or adjacent to the Site to Contractor. C. Provide other contractors: 1. Proper and safe access to the Site; 2. Reasonable opportunity for the introduction and storage of materials and equipment; and 3. Reasonable opportunity to execute their work. D. Provide cutting, fitting, and patching of the Work required to properly connect or integrate with other work. Do not endanger the work of others by cutting, excavating, or otherwise altering the work of others without the consent of OAR and the others whose work will be affected. General Conditions 00 72 00-46 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 E. Inspect the work of others and immediately notify OAR if the proper execution of part of Contractor's Work depends upon work performed by others and this work has not been performed or is unsuitable for the proper execution of Contractor's Work. Contractor's failure to notify the OAR constitutes an acceptance of this other work as acceptable for integration with Contractor's Work. This acceptance does not apply to latent defects or deficiencies in the work of others. F. Take adequate measures to prevent damages, delays, disruptions, or interference with the work of Owner, other contractors, or utility owners performing other work at or adjacent to the Site. 8.02 Coordination A. Owner has sole authority and responsibility for coordination of this other work unless otherwise provided in the Contract Documents. The Owner is to identify the entity with authority and responsibility for coordination of the activities of the various contractors, the limitations of their authority, and the work to be coordinated prior to the start of other work at or adjacent to the Site. 8.03 Legal Relationships A. Contractor may be entitled to a change in Contract Price or Contract Times if, while performing other work at or adjacent to the Site for Owner, the OPT or other contractor retained by the City: 1. Damages the Work or property of Contractor's Team; 2. Delays, disrupts, or interferes with the execution of the Work; or 3. Increases the scope or cost of performing the Work through their actions or inaction. B. Notify the OAR immediately of the event leading to a potential Change Proposal so corrective action can be taken. Submit the Change Proposal within 30 days of the event if corrective action has not adequately mitigated the impact of the actions or inactions of others. Information regarding this other work in the Contract Documents is used to determine if the Contractor is entitled to a change in Contract Price or Contract Times. Changes in Contract Price require that Contractor assign rights against the other contractor to Owner with respect to the damage, delay, disruption, or interference that is the subject of the adjustment. Changes in Contract Times require that the time extension is essential to Contractor's ability to complete the Work within the Contract Times. C. Take prompt corrective action if Contractor's Team damages, delays, disrupts, or interferes with the work of Owner's employees, other contractors, or utility owners performing other work at or adjacent to the Site or agree to compensate other contractors or utility owners for correcting the damage. Promptly attempt to settle claims with other contractors or utility owners if Contractor damages, delays, disrupts, or interferes with the work of other contractors or utility owners performing other work at or adjacent to the Site. D. Owner may impose a set-off against payments due to Contractor and assign the Owner's contractual rights against Contractor with respect to the breach of the obligations described in this Paragraph 8.03 to other contractors if damages, delays, disruptions, or interference occur. General Conditions 00 72 00-47 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 E. Contractor's obligation to indemnify Owner for claims arising out of or related to damages, delays,disruptions,and interference with other work at the Site are as set forth in Paragraph 7.14. ARTICLE 9—OWNER'S AND OPT'S RESPONSIBILITIES 9.01 Communications to Contractor A. OPT issues communications to Contractor through OAR except as otherwise provided in the Contract Documents. 9.02 Replacement of Owner's Project Team Members A. Owner may replace members of the OPT at its discretion. 9.03 Furnish Data A. OPT is to furnish the data required of OPT under the Contract Documents. 9.04 Pay When Due A. Owner is to make payments to Contractor when due as described in Article 17. 9.05 Lands and Easements; Reports and Tests A. Owner's duties with respect to providing lands and easements are described in Paragraph 5.01. OPT will make copies of reports of explorations and tests of subsurface conditions and drawings of physical conditions relating to existing surface or subsurface structures at the Site available to Contractor in accordance with Paragraph 5.03. 9.06 Insurance A. Owner's responsibilities with respect to purchasing and maintaining insurance are described in Article 6. 9.07 Modifications A. Owner's responsibilities with respect to Modifications are described in Article 11. 9.08 Inspections,Tests, and Approvals A. OPT's responsibility with respect to certain inspections,tests, and approvals are described in Paragraph 16.02. 9.09 Limitations on OPT's Responsibilities A. The OPT does not supervise, direct, or have control or authority over, and is not responsible for Contractor's means, methods, techniques, sequences, or procedures of construction, or related safety precautions and programs, or for failure of Contractor to comply with Laws and Regulations applicable to the performance of the Work. OPT is not responsible for Contractor's failure to perform the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents. General Conditions 00 72 00-48 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 9.10 Undisclosed Hazardous Environmental Condition A. OPT's responsibility for undisclosed Hazardous Environmental Conditions is described in Paragraph 5.06. 9.11 Compliance with Safety Program A. Contractor is to inform the OPT of its safety programs and OPT is to comply with the specific applicable requirements of this program. 9.12 Plans and Specifications A. Owner does not warrant the plans and specification. ARTICLE 10—OAR'S AND DESIGNER'S STATUS DURING CONSTRUCTION 10.01 Owner's Representative A. OAR is Owner's representative. The duties and responsibilities and the limitations of authority of OAR as Owner's representative are described in the Contract Documents. 10.02 Visits to Site A. Designer is to make periodic visits to the Site to observe the progress and quality of the Work. Designer is to determine, in general, if the Work is proceeding in accordance with the Contract Documents based on observations made during these visits. Designer is not required to make exhaustive or continuous inspections to check the quality or quantity of the Work. Designer is to inform the OPT of issues or concerns and OAR is to work with Contractor to address these issues or concerns. Designer's visits and observations are subject to the limitations on Designer's authority and responsibility described in Paragraphs 9.09 and 10.07. B. OAR is to observe the Work to check the quality and quantity of Work, implement Owner's quality assurance program, and administer the Contract as Owner's representative as described in the Contract Documents. OAR's visits and observations are subject to the limitations on OAR's authority and responsibility described in Paragraphs 9.09 and 10.07. 10.03 Resident Project Representatives A. Resident Project Representatives assist OAR in observing the progress and quality of the Work at the Site. The limitations on Resident Project Representatives' authority and responsibility are described in Paragraphs 9.09 and 10.07. 10.04 Rejecting Defective Work A. OPT has the authority to reject Work in accordance with Article 16. OAR is to issue a Defective Work Notice to Contractor and document when Defective Work has been corrected or accepted in accordance with Article 16. General Conditions 00 72 00-49 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 10.05 Shop Drawings, Modifications and Payments A. Designer's authority related to Shop Drawings and Samples are described in the Contract Documents. B. Designer's authority related to design calculations and design drawings submitted in response to a delegation of professional design services are described in Paragraph 7.15. C. OAR and Designer's authority related to Modifications is described in Article 11. D. OAR's authority related to Applications for Payment is described in Articles 15 and 17. 10.06 Decisions on Requirements of Contract Documents and Acceptability of Work A. OAR is to render decisions regarding non-technical or contractual / administrative requirements of the Contract Documents and will coordinate the response of the OPT to Contractor. B. Designer is to render decisions regarding the conformance of the Work to the requirements of the Contract Documents. Designer will render a decision to either correct the Defective Work or accept the Work under the provisions of Paragraph 16.04 if Work does not conform to the Contract Documents. OAR will coordinate the response of the OPT to Contractor. C. Contractor may appeal Designer's decision by submitting a Change Proposal if Contractor does not agree with the Designer's decision. 10.07 Limitations on OAR's and Designer's Authority and Responsibilities A. OPT is not responsible for the acts or omissions of Contractor's Team. No actions or failure to act, or decisions made in good faith to exercise or not exercise the authority or responsibility available under the Contract Documents creates a duty in contract, tort, or otherwise of the OPT to the Contractor or members of the Contractor's Team. ARTICLE 11—AMENDING THE CONTRACT DOCUMENTS;CHANGES IN THE WORK 11.01 Amending and Supplementing the Contract Documents A. The Contract Documents may be modified by a Contract Amendment, Change Order, Work Change Directive, or Field Order. 1. Contract Amendment: Owner and Contractor may modify the terms and conditions of the Contract Documents without the recommendation of the Designer using a Contract Amendment. A Contract Amendment may be used for: a. Changes that do not involve: 1) The performance or acceptability of the Work; 2) The design as described in the Drawings, Specifications, or otherwise; or 3) Other engineering, architectural or technical matters. b. Authorizing new phases of the Work and establishing the Contract Price, Contract Times, or terms and conditions of the Contract for the new phase of Work when using phased construction or purchasing Goods and Special Services to be incorporated into the Project. General Conditions 00 72 00-50 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 2. Change Order: All changes to the Contract Documents that include a change in the Contract Price or the Contract Times for previously authorized Work, or changes to the Work requiring Designer's approval must be made by a Change Order. A Change Order may also be used to establish modifications of the Contract Documents that do not affect the Contract Price or Contract Times. 3. Work Change Directive: A Work Change Directive does not change the Contract Price or the Contract Times, but is evidence that the parties expect that the modifications ordered or documented by a Work Change Directive will be incorporated in a subsequently issued Change Order following negotiations on the Contract Price and Contract Times. If negotiations under the terms of the Contract Documents governing adjustments, expressly including Paragraphs 11.04 and 11.05 are unsuccessful, Contractor must submit a Change Proposal seeking an adjustment of the Contract Price or the Contract Times no later than 30 days after the completion of the Work set out in the Work Change Directive. 4. Field Order: Designer may require minor changes in the Work that do not change the Contract Price or Contract Times using a Field Order. OAR may issue a Field Order for non-technical, administrative issues. Submit a Change Proposal if Contractor believes that a Field Order justifies an adjustment in the Contract Price or Contract Times before proceeding with the Work described in the Field Order. B. Perform added or revised Work under the applicable provisions of the Contract Documents for the same or similar Work unless different Drawings, Specifications or directions are provided in the Modification. 11.02 Owner-Authorized Changes in the Work A. Owner may order additions, deletions,or revisions in the Work at any time as recommended by the Designer to the extent the change: 1. Involves the design as described in the Contract Documents; 2. Involves acceptance of the Work; or 3. Involves other engineering, architectural or technical matters. B. These changes may be authorized by a Modification. Proceed with the Work involved or, in the case of a deletion in the Work, immediately cease construction activities with respect to the deleted Work upon receipt of the Modification. Nothing in this paragraph obligates the Contractor to undertake Work that Contractor reasonably concludes cannot be performed in a manner consistent with Contractor's safety obligations under the Contract Documents or Laws and Regulations. 11.03 Unauthorized Changes in the Work A. Contractor is not entitled to an increase in the Contract Price or an extension of the Contract Times with respect to Work performed that is not required by the Contract Documents, except in the case of an emergency as provided in Paragraph 7.12, or in the case of uncovering Work as provided in Paragraph 16.05. General Conditions 00 72 00-51 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 B. Contractor is responsible for costs and time delays associated with variations from the requirements of the Contract Documents unless the variations are specifically approved by Change Order. 11.04 Change of Contract Price A. The Contract Price for authorized Work can only be changed by a Change Order. Any Change Proposal for an adjustment in the Contract Price must comply with the provisions of Paragraph 11.06. Any Claim for an adjustment of Contract Price must comply with the provisions of Article 13. B. An adjustment in the Contract Price is to be determined as follows: 1. By applying unit prices to the quantities of the items involved, subject to the provisions of Paragraph 15.03, where the Work involved is covered by unit prices in the Contract Documents; 2. By a mutually agreed lump sum where the Work involved is not covered by unit prices in the Contract Documents; or 3. Payment on the basis of the Cost of the Work determined as provided in Paragraph 15.01 plus a Contractor's fee for overhead and profit determined as provided in Paragraph 15.05 when the Work involved is not covered by unit prices in the Contract Documents and the parties do not reach a mutual agreement to a lump sum. C. The original Contract Price may not be increased by more than 25 percent or the limit set out in Texas Local Government Code 252.048 or its successor statute, whichever is greater. Owner may decrease the Work by up to 25 percent of the Contract Price. 11.05 Change of Contract Times A. The Contract Times for authorized Work can only be changed by Change Order. Any Change Proposal for an adjustment in the Contract Times must comply with the provisions of Paragraph 11.06. Any Claim for an adjustment in the Contract Times must comply with the provisions of Article 13. B. An adjustment of the Contract Times is subject to the limitations described in Paragraph 4.04. 11.06 Change Proposals A. Submit a Change Proposal in accordance with Article 12 to the OAR to: 1. Request an adjustment in the Contract Price or Contract Times; 2. Appeal an initial decision by OPT concerning the requirements of the Contract Documents or relating to the acceptability of the Work under the Contract Documents; 3. Contest a set-off against payment due; or 4. Seek other relief under the Contract Documents. General Conditions 00 72 00-52 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 B. Notify the OAR within 3 days if a Change Proposal is to be submitted. Submit each Change Proposal to OAR no later than 30 days after the event initiating the Change Proposal. 11.07 Execution of Change Orders A. Owner and Contractor are to execute Change Orders covering: 1. Changes in the Contract Price or Contract Times, which are agreed to by Owner and Contractor, including undisputed sums or amount of time for Work actually performed in accordance with a Work Change Directive; 2. Changes in Contract Price resulting from Owner set-offs unless the set-off has been successfully challenged by Contractor; 3. Changes in the Work which are: a. Ordered by Owner pursuant to Paragraph 11.02.A, b. Required because Defective Work was accepted under Paragraph 16.04 or Owner's correction of Defective Work under Paragraph 16.07, or c. Agreed to by the Owner and Contractor; and 4. Changes in the Contract Price or Contract Times, or other changes under Paragraph 11.06 or Article 13. B. Acceptance of a Change Order by Contractor constitutes a full accord and satisfaction for any and all claims and costs of any kind, whether direct or indirect, including but not limited to impact, delay or acceleration damages arising from the subject matter of the Change Order. Each Change Order must be specific and final as to prices and extensions of time, with no reservations or other provisions allowing for future additional money or time as a result of the particular changes identified and fully compensated in the Change Order. The execution of a Change Order by Contractor constitutes conclusive evidence of Contractor's agreement to the ordered changes in the Work. This Contract, as amended, forever releases any claim against Owner for additional time or compensation for matters relating to or arising out of or resulting from the Work included within or affected by the executed Change Order. This release applies to claims related to the cumulative impact of all Change Orders and to any claim related to the effect of a change on unchanged Work. C. All Change Orders require approval by either the City Council or Owner by administrative action. The approval process requires a minimum of 45 days after submission in final form with all supporting data. Receipt of Contractor's submission by Owner constitutes neither acceptance nor approval of a Change Order, nor a warranty that the Change Order will be authorized by City Council or administrative action. The time required for the approval process may not be considered a delay and no extensions to the Contract Times or increase in the Contract Price will be considered or granted as a result of the process. Contractor may proceed with Work if a Work Change Directive is issued. D. If the Contractor refuses to execute a Change Order that is required to be executed under the terms of this Paragraph 11.07, the Change Order is deemed to be in full force as if executed by Contractor. Contractor may file a Claim for payment and/or time, pursuant to Article 13. General Conditions 00 72 00-53 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 11.08 Notice to Surety A. Notify the surety of Modifications affecting the general scope of the Work, changes in the provisions of the Contract Documents,or changes in Contract Price or Contract Times. Adjust the amount of each Bond when Modifications change the Contract Price. ARTICLE 12—CHANGE MANAGEMENT 12.01 Requests for Change Proposal A. Designer will initiate Modifications by issuing a Request for a Change Proposal (RCP). 1. Designer will prepare a description of proposed Modifications. 2. Designer will issue the Request for a Change Proposal form to Contractor. A number will be assigned to the Request for a Change Proposal when issued. 3. Return a Change Proposal in accordance with Paragraph 12.02 to the Designer for evaluation by the OPT. 12.02 Change Proposals A. Submit a Change Proposal (CP) to the Designer for Contractor initiated changes in the Contract Documents or in response to a Request for Change Proposal. A Change Proposal must be submitted to the OAR no later than 30 days after the event initiating the Change Proposal. 1. Use the Change Proposal form provided. 2. Assign a number to the Change Proposal when issued. 3. Include with the Change Proposal: a. A complete description of the proposed Modification if Contractor initiated or proposed changes to the OPT's description of the proposed Modification. b. The reason the Modification is requested, if not in response to a Request for a Change Proposal. c. A detailed breakdown of the cost of the change if the Modification requires a change in Contract Price. The itemized breakdown is to include: 1) List of materials and equipment to be installed; 2) Man hours for classification; 3) Equipment used in construction; 4) Consumable supplies,fuels, and materials; 5) Royalties and patent fees; 6) Bonds and insurance; 7) Overhead and profit; 8) Field office costs; and 9) Other items of cost. General Conditions 00 72 00-54 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 d. Provide the level of detail outlined in the paragraph above for each Subcontractor or Supplier actually performing the Work if Work is to be provided by a Subcontractor or Supplier. Indicate appropriate Contractor mark-ups for Work provided through Subcontractors and Suppliers. Provide the level of detail outline in the paragraph above for self-performed Work. e. Submit Change Proposals that comply with Article 15 for Cost of Work. f. Provide a revised schedule. Show the effect of the change on the Project Schedule and the Contract Times. B. Submit a Change Proposal to the OAR to request a Field Order. C. A Change Proposal is required for all substitutions or deviations from the Contract Documents. D. Request changes to products in accordance with Article 25. 12.03 Designer Will Evaluate Request for Modification A. OAR is to advise OPT regarding the Change Proposal. OPT is to review each Change Proposal and Contractor's supporting data, and within 30 days after receipt of the documents, direct the OAR to either approve or deny the Change Proposal in whole or in part. OAR is to issue a Change Order for an approved Change Proposal. The Contractor may deem the Change Proposal to be denied if OAR does not take action on the Change Proposal within 30 days and start the time for appeal of the denial under Article 13. 1. Change Orders and Contract Amendments will be sent to the Contractor for execution with a copy to the Owner recommending approval. A Work Change Directive may be issued if Work needs to progress before the Change Order or Contract Amendment can be authorized by the Owner. 2. Work Change Directives, Change Orders, and Contract Amendments can only be approved by the Owner. a. Work performed on the Change Proposal prior to receiving a Work Change Directive or approval of the Change Order or Contract Amendment is performed at the Contractor's risk. b. No payment will be made for Work on Change Orders or Contract Amendments until approved by the Owner. B. The Contractor may be informed that the Request for a Change Proposal is not approved and construction is to proceed in accordance with the Contract Documents. 12.04 Substitutions A. The products of the listed Suppliers are to be furnished where Specifications list several manufacturers but do not specifically list "or equal" or "or approved equal" products. Use of any products other than those specifically listed is a substitution. Follow these procedures for a substitution. B. Substitutions are defined as any product that the Contractor proposes to provide for the Project in lieu of the specified product. Submit a Change Proposal per Paragraph 12.02 along with a Shop Drawing as required by Article 25 to request approval of a substitution. General Conditions 00 72 00-55 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 C. Prove that the product is acceptable as a substitute. It is not the Designer's responsibility to prove the product is not acceptable as a substitute. 1. Indicate on a point by point basis for each specified feature that the product is acceptable to meet the intent of the Contract Documents requirements. 2. Make a direct comparison with the specified Suppliers published data sheets and available information. Provide this printed material with the documents submitted. 3. The decision of the Designer regarding the acceptability of the proposed substitute product is final. D. Provide a written certification that, in making the substitution request,the Contractor: 1. Has determined that the substituted product will perform in substantially the same manner and result in the same ability to meet the specified performance as the specified product. 2. Will provide the same warranties and/or bonds for the substituted product as specified or as would be provided by the manufacturer of the specified product. 3. Will assume all responsibility to coordinate any modifications that may be necessary to incorporate the substituted product into the Project and will waive all claims for additional Work which may be necessary to incorporate the substituted product into the Project which may subsequently become apparent. 4. Will maintain the same time schedule as for the specified product. E. Pay for review of substitutions in accordance with Article 25. ARTICLE 13—CLAIMS 13.01 Claims A. Follow the Claims process described in this Article for the following disputes between Owner and Contractor: 1. Seeking an adjustment of Contract Price or Contract Times; 2. Contesting an initial decision by OAR concerning the requirements of the Contract Documents or the acceptability of Work under the Contract Documents; 3. Appealing OAR's decision regarding a Change Proposal; 4. Seeking resolution of a contractual issue that OAR has declined to address; or 5. Seeking other relief with respect to the terms of the Contract. B. Contractor shall be entitled to an extension of Contract Time for delays or disruptions due to unusually severe weather in excess of weather normally experienced at the job site, as determined from climatological data set forth by the National Weather Service and which affects the Project's critical path. Contractor shall bear the entire economic risk of all weather delays and disruptions. Contractor shall not be entitled to any increase in the Contract Price by reason of such delays or disruptions. Upon Contractor reaching Substantial Completion, Owner and Contractor shall look back at the entire duration of the calendar day Project and review the totality of what Contractor claims were unusually severe weather disruptions. If the Project was delayed or disrupted due to unusually severe weather in General Conditions 00 72 00-56 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 excess of weather normally experienced over the entire duration of the Project, Contractor may make a Claim for an extension of the Contract Time for delays or disruptions due to unusually severe weather in excess of weather normally experienced at the job site, as determined from climatological data set forth by the National Weather Service and which affects the Project's critical path. Any time extension granted shall be non-compensatory. 13.02 Claims Process A. Claims must be initiated by written notice. Notice must conspicuously state that it is a notice of a Claim in the subject line or first sentence. Notice must also list the date of first occurrence of the claimed event. B. Except for Claims resulting from unusually severe weather, notice of a Claim by Contractor must be in writing and delivered to the Owner, Designer and the OAR within 14 days after the start of the event giving rise to the Claim. Failure by Contractor to submit written notice of a Claim within 14 days shall constitute a waiver of such Claim. C. Submit the complete Claim with supporting documentation to Owner no later than 60 days after the start of the event giving rise to the Claim (unless Designer allows additional time for claimant to submit additional or more accurate data in support of such Claim). The Claim must be signed and sworn to by Contractor, certifying that the Claim is made in good faith, that the supporting data is accurate and complete, and that to the best of Contractor's knowledge and belief,the relief requested accurately reflects the full compensation to which Contractor is entitled. Failure by Contractor to submit the Claim within 60 days shall constitute a waiver of such Claim. D. Any Claims by Contractor that are not brought within 90 days following the termination of the Contract are waived and shall be automatically deemed denied. E. Claims by Owner must be submitted by written notice to Contractor. F. The responsibility to substantiate a Claim rests with the entity making the Claim. Claims must contain sufficient detail to allow the other party to fully review the Claim. 1. Claims seeking an adjustment of Contract Price must include the Contractor's job cost report. Provide additional documentation as requested by OAR or Designer. 2. Claims seeking an adjustment of Contract Time must include a Time Impact Analysis and native schedule files in Primavera or MS Project digital format. Provide additional documentation as requested by OAR or Designer. G. Claims by Contractor against Owner and Claims by Owner against Contractor, including those alleging an error or omission by Designer but excluding those arising under Section 7.12,shall be referred initially to Designer for consideration and recommendation. H. Designer will review a Claim by Contractor within 30 days of receipt of the Claim and take one or more of the following actions: 1. Request additional supporting data from the party who made the Claim; 2. Issue a recommendation; 3. Suggest a compromise; or General Conditions 00 72 00-57 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 4. Advise the parties that Designer is not able to make a recommendation due to insufficient information or a conflict of interest. I. If the Designer does not take any action, the Claim shall be deemed denied 30 days after receipt of the Claim. J. Following receipt of Designer's initial recommendation regarding a Claim,the Contractor and the Owner shall seek to resolve the Claim through the exchange of information and direct negotiations. If no agreement is reached within 90 days, the Claim shall be deemed denied. The Owner and Contractor may extend the time for resolving the Claim by mutual agreement. Notify OAR of any actions taken on a Claim. K. If the entity receiving a Claim approves the Claim in whole or in part or denies it in whole or in part, this action is final and binding unless the other entity invokes the procedure described in Article 22 for final resolution of disputes by filing a notice of appeal within 30 days after this action. L. If the Owner and Contractor reach a mutual agreement regarding a Claim, the results of the agreement or action on the Claim will be incorporated in a Change Order by the OAR to the extent they affect the Contract Documents, the Contract Price, or the Contract Times. M. Both parties shall continue to perform all obligations under the Agreement during the pendency of any dispute or disagreement relating to this Agreement, unless performance would be impracticable or impossible under the circumstances. N. Any failure of Contractor to comply with any of the foregoing conditions precedent with regard to any such Claim shall constitute a waiver of any entitlement to submit or pursue such Claim. O. Receipt and review of a Claim by City shall not be construed as a waiver of any defenses to the Claim available to the City under the Contract Documents or at law. ARTICLE 14—PREVAILING WAGE RATE REQUIREMENTS 14.01 Payment of Prevailing Wage Rates A. Contractor and any Subcontractors employed on this Project shall pay not less than the rates established by the Owner as required by Texas Government Code Chapter 2258. B. Contractor and its Subcontractors are required to pay Davis-Bacon Wage Rates. C. Contractor and its Subcontractors are required to pay laborers and mechanics an overtime rate of not less than one and one-half times the basic rate for all hours worked in excess of forty hours in a given workweek. 14.02 Records A. In accordance with Tex. Gov't Code§2258.024,the Contractor and its Subcontractors, if any, shall keep a record showing: 1. The name and occupation of each worker employed by the Contractor or Subcontractor in the construction of the Work; and 2. The actual per diem wages paid to each worker. General Conditions 00 72 00-58 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 B. The record shall be open at all reasonable hours to inspection by the officers and agents of the Owner. 14.03 Liability; Penalty; Criminal Offense A. Tex. Gov't Code §2258.003 — Liability: An officer, agent, or employee of the Owner is not liable in a civil action for any act or omission implementing or enforcing Chapter 2258 unless the action was made in bad faith. B. Tex. Gov't Code §2258.023(b)— Penalty: Any Contractor or Subcontractor who violates the requirements of Chapter 2258,shall pay to the Owner,on whose behalf the Contract is made, $60 for each worker employed on each calendar day or part of the day that the worker is paid less than the wage rates stipulated in the Contract. C. Tex. Gov't Code §2258.058—Criminal Offense: 1. An officer, agent, or representative of the Owner commits an offense if the person willfully violates or does not comply with a provision of Chapter 2258. 2. Any Contractor or Subcontractor, or an agent or representative of the Contractor or Subcontractor, commits an offense if the person violates Tex. Gov't Code §2258.024. 3. An offense is punishable by: a. A fine not to exceed $500; b. Confinement in jail for a term not to exceed 6 months; or c. Both a fine and confinement. 14.04 Prevailing Wage Rates A. Use the Prevailing Wage Rates specified in the Supplementary Conditions. ARTICLE 15—COST OF THE WORK;ALLOWANCES; UNIT PRICE WORK 15.01 Cost of the Work A. The Cost of the Work is the sum of costs described in this Paragraph 15.01, except those excluded in Paragraph 15.01.D, necessary for the proper performance of the Work. The provisions of this Paragraph 15.01 are used for two distinct purposes: 1. To determine Cost of the Work when Cost of the Work is a component of the Contract Price under cost-plus, time-and-materials, or other cost-based terms; or 2. To determine the value of a Change Order, Change Proposal, Claim, set-off, or other adjustment in Contract Price. B. Contractor is entitled only to those additional or incremental costs required because of the change in the Work or because of the event giving rise to the adjustment when the value of the adjustment is determined on the basis of the Cost of the Work. General Conditions 00 72 00-59 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 C. Costs included in the Cost of the Work may not exceed the prevailing costs in the proximate area of the Site for similar work unless agreed to by the Owner. Cost of the Work includes only the following items: 1. Payroll costs for Contractor's employees performing the Work, including one foreman per crew, and other required and agreed upon personnel for the time they are employed on the Work. Employees are to be paid according to wage rates for job classifications as agreed to by Owner. Where the Cost of the Work is being used under provisions of Paragraph 15.01.A.2, rates paid for this Work are to be the same as paid for Contract Work as established by certified payroll. Payroll costs may include: a. Actual costs paid for salaries and wages; b. Actual cost paid for fringe benefits, which may include: 1) Social security contributions, 2) Unemployment, 3) Excise and payroll taxes, 4) Workers' compensation, 5) Health and retirement benefits, 6) Bonuses, and 7) Paid time off for sick leave,vacations, and holidays; and c. Actual cost of additional compensation paid for performing Work outside of regular working hours, on Sunday or legal holidays, to the extent authorized by Owner. 2. Cost of materials and equipment furnished and incorporated in the Work, including transportation and storage costs and required Suppliers'field services. Contractor may retain cash discounts unless Owner provided funds to the Contractor for early payment of these materials and equipment. Cash discounts are to be credited to Owner if the Owner provides funds for early payment. Make provisions for trade discounts, rebates, refunds, and returns from sale of surplus materials and equipment and reduce the Cost of the Work by these amounts. 3. Payments made by Contractor to Subcontractors for Work performed by Subcontractors. Obtain competitive bids from Subcontractors acceptable to Owner unless Owner agrees to use Subcontractors proposed by the Contractor. Bids are to be opened in the presence of the OAR and other designated members for the OPT. Provide copies of bids to the OAR to use in determining,with the OPT,which bids are acceptable. The Subcontractor's Cost of the Work and fee are determined in the same manner as Contractor's Cost of the Work and fee as provided in this Paragraph 15.01 if the subcontract provides that the Subcontractor is to be paid on the basis of Cost of the Work plus a fee. 4. Supplemental costs including the following: a. The proportion of necessary transportation, travel, and subsistence expenses of Contractor's employees incurred in discharge of duties connected with the Work; b. Costs of materials, supplies, equipment, machinery, appliances, office, and temporary facilities at the Site including transportation and maintenance costs; General Conditions 00 72 00-60 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 c. Costs of hand tools not owned by the workers consumed in the performance of the Work. Costs of hand tools not owned by the workers which are used but not consumed in the performance of the Work and which remain the property of Contractor, less their market value when Work is completed; d. For Contractor-and Subcontractor-owned machinery,trucks, power tools or other equipment, use the FHWA rental rates found in the Rental Rate Blue Book ("Blue Book") multiplied by the regional adjustment factor and the rate adjustment factor to establish hourly rates. Use the rates in effect for each section of the Blue Book at the time of use. Payment will be made for the actual hours used in the Work. 1) Standby costs will be paid at SO% of the FHWA rental rates found in the Blue Book if Contractor is directed by Owner in writing to standby. Standby costs will not be allowed during periods when the equipment would otherwise have been idle. For a six-day work week, no more than eight hours per a 24-hour day, no more than 48 hours per week and no more than 208 hours per month shall be paid of standby time. Operating costs shall not be charged by Contractor. e. Rental of construction equipment, including the costs of transporting, loading, unloading, assembling, dismantling, and removing construction equipment, whether rented from Contractor or others, in accordance with rental agreements approved by Owner. Costs for rental of equipment will not be paid when the equipment is no longer necessary for the Work. Justify idle time for equipment by demonstrating that it was necessary to keep equipment on Site for related future Work; 1) The hourly rate shall be determined by dividing the actual invoice cost by the actual number of hours the equipment is involved in the Work. Owner reserves the right to limit the hourly rate to comparable Blue Book rates. 2) If Contractor is directed to standby in writing by Owner, standby costs will be paid at the invoice daily rate excluding operating costs, which includes fuel, lubricants, repairs and servicing. f. Applicable sales, consumer, use, and other similar taxes related to the Work for which the Owner is not exempt, and which Contractor pays consistent with Laws and Regulations; g. Deposits lost for causes other than negligence of Contractor's Team; h. Royalty payments and fees for permits and licenses; i. Cost of additional utilities,fuel, and sanitary facilities at the Site; j. Minor expense items directly required by the Work; and k. Premiums for Bonds and insurance required by the Contract Documents. D. The Cost of the Work does not include the following items: 1. Payroll costs and other compensation of Contractor's officers, executives, principals of partnerships and sole proprietorships, general managers, safety managers, superintendents, engineers, architects, estimators, attorneys, auditors, accountants, purchasing and contracting agents, expediters, clerks, and other personnel employed General Conditions 00 72 00-61 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 by Contractor, whether at the Site or in Contractor's principal or branch office, for general administration of the Work and not specifically included in the agreed upon schedule of job classifications referred to in Paragraph 15.01.C.1 or specifically covered by Paragraph 15.01.C.4. These administrative costs are covered by the Contractor's fee. 2. Office expenses other than Contractor's office at the Site. 3. Any part of Contractor's capital expenses, including interest on Contractor's capital employed for the Work and charges against Contractor for delinquent payments. 4. Costs due to the actions of Contractor's Team for the correction of Defective Work, disposal of materials or equipment that do not comply with Specifications, and correcting damage to property. 5. Losses, damages, and related expenses caused by damage to the Work or sustained by Contractor in connection with the performance of the Work. Contractor is entitled to recover costs if covered by insurance provided in accordance with Article 6. Such losses may include settlements made with the approval of Owner. Do not include these losses, damages, and expenses in the Cost of the Work when determining Contractor's fee. 6. Any Indemnified Cost paid with regard to Contractor's indemnification of Owner. 7. Other overhead or general expense costs and the costs of items not described in Paragraphs 15.01.C. E. The Contractor's fee for profit and overhead is determined as follows: 1. In accordance with the Agreement when the Work is performed on a cost-plus basis; 2. A mutually acceptable fixed fee; or 3. A fee based on the following percentages of the various portions of the Cost of the Work: a. The Contractor's fee is 15 percent for costs incurred under Paragraphs 15.01.C.1, 15.01.C.2 and 15.01.C.4; b. The Contractor's fee is 5 percent for costs incurred under Paragraph 15.01.C.3; C. Fees are to be determined as follows where one or more tiers of subcontracts are used: 1) The Subcontractor's fee is 15 percent for costs incurred under Paragraphs 15.01.C.1 and 15.01.C.2 forthe Subcontractor that actually performs the Work at whatever tier; 2) The Subcontractor's fee is 5 percent for costs incurred under Paragraph 15.01.C.4 for the Subcontractor that actually performs the Work at whatever tier; and 3) The Contractor and Subcontractors of a tier higher than that of the Subcontractor that actually performs the Work are to be allowed a fee of 5 percent of the fee plus underlying costs incurred by the next lower tier Subcontractor. d. No fee is payable on the basis of costs itemized under Paragraph 15.01.D; General Conditions 00 72 00-62 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 e. Five percent of the net decrease in the cost is to be deducted for changes which result in a net decrease in Contract Price; and 4. The adjustment in Contractor's fee is based on the net change in accordance with Paragraphs 15.05.13.1 through 15.05.13.5, inclusive when both additions and credits are involved in any one change. F. Establish and maintain records in accordance with generally accepted accounting practices and submit these records, including an itemized cost breakdown together with supporting data, in a form and at intervals acceptable to OAR whenever the Cost of the Work is to be determined pursuant to this Paragraph 15.01. 15.02 Allowances A. Include allowances specified in the Contract Documents in the Contract Price and provide Work covered by the allowance as authorized by the Owner through the OAR. B. Contractor agrees that: 1. The cash allowance is used to compensate the Contractor for the cost of furnishing materials and equipment for the Work covered by the allowance item in the Contract Documents. Cost may include applicable taxes. Make provisions for trade discounts, rebates, and refunds and reduce the allowance costs by these amounts. 2. Contractor's costs for unloading and handling on the Site, labor, installation, overhead, profit, and other expenses contemplated for the cash allowances have been included in the Contract Price and not in the allowances; and 3. Costs for cash allowances and installation costs as described in Paragraphs 15.02.13.1 and 15.02.13.2 above are included in the Contract Price. C. OAR will issue a Change Order to adjust the Contract Price by the difference between the allowance amount and the actual amount paid by Contractor for Work covered by the allowance. The Change Order will be issued at the time costs are incurred by Contractor for Work covered by the allowance and this Work is included on the Application for Payment. 15.03 Unit Price Work A. The initial Contract Price for Unit Price Work is equal to the sum of the unit price line items in the Agreement. Each unit price line item amount is equal to the product of the unit price for each line item times the estimated quantity of each item as indicated in the Contract. B. The estimated quantities of items of Unit Price Work are not guaranteed and are solely for the purpose of comparing Bids and determining an initial Contract Price. Payments to Contractor for Unit Price Work are to be based on actual quantities measured for Work in place. C. Each unit price is deemed to include an amount considered by Contractor to be adequate to cover Contractor's overhead and profit for each separately identified item. D. OAR is to determine the actual quantities and classifications of Unit Price Work performed by Contractor to be incorporated into each Application for Payment. OAR's decision on actual quantities is final and binding, subject to the provisions of Paragraph 15.03.E. General Conditions 00 72 00-63 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 E. Contractor may submit a Change Proposal,or Owner may file a Claim,seeking an adjustment in the Contract Price within 30 days of OAR's decision under Paragraph 15.03.D, if: 1. The total cost of a particular item of Unit Price Work amounts to 20 percent or more of the total Contract Price and the variation in the quantity of that particular item of Unit Price Work performed by the Contractor differs by more than 20 percent from the estimated quantity of an item indicated in the Contract; 2. There is no corresponding adjustment with respect to other items of Work; and 3. Contractor believes it has incurred additional expense as a result of this condition or Owner believes that the quantity variation entitles Owner to an adjustment in the Contract Price. 15.04 Contingencies A. Contingency funds may be included in the Contract Price to pay for Work not defined specifically by the Contract Documents that is essential to the completion of the Project. Contingency funds will be as described in the Contract. B. The contingency funds may be used for costs incurred by the Contractor provided these costs are approved by the Owner. Costs are to be determined and documented in accordance with Paragraph 15.01. The contingency funds are not to be used for the following items: 1. Cost overruns due to changes in material costs after the Contract Price is established, unless specific price escalation provisions are made in the Contract. 2. Rework required to correct Defective Work. 3. Inefficiencies in completing the Work due to the Contractor's selected means, methods, sequences, or procedures of construction. 4. Work Contractor failed to include in the Contract Price. 5. Changes required by changes in Laws and Regulations enacted after the Contract Price is established. 6. Any Work that does not constitute a change in Scope in the Work included in the Contract Price. C. OAR is to issue a Change Order for approved expenditures from contingency funds. When the Change Order is issued, the costs are to be added to the Application for Payment. Contractor is to maintain a tabulation showing the contingency amount, adjustments to the contingency amount, and amounts remaining as the Project progresses. D. Any contingency amounts that are not included in a Change Order are retained bythe Owner. A Change Order will be issued to deduct unused contingency amounts from the Contract Price prior to Final Payment. General Conditions 00 72 00-64 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 ARTICLE 16—TESTS AND INSPECTIONS;CORRECTION,REMOVAL,OR ACCEPTANCE OF DEFECTIVE WORK 16.01 Access to Work A. Provide safe access to the Site and the Work for the observation, inspection, and testing of the Work in progress. Contractor can require compliance with Contractor's safety procedures and programs as part of providing safe access. 16.02 Tests, Inspections and Approvals A. OPT may retain and pay for the services of an independent inspector, testing laboratory, or other qualified individual or entity to perform inspections. Notify OAR when the Work is ready for required inspections and tests. Provide adequate notice to allow for coordination with entities providing inspection or testing as determined by the OAR. Cooperate with inspection and testing personnel and assist with providing access for required inspections, tests, and handling test specimens or Samples. B. Arrange for and facilitate inspections, tests, and approvals required by Laws or Regulations of governmental entities having jurisdiction that require Work to be inspected, tested, or approved by an employee or other representative of that entity. Pay associated costs and furnish OAR with the required certificates of inspection or approval. C. Arrange, obtain, and pay for inspections and tests required: 1. By the Contract Documents, unless the Contract Documents expressly allocate responsibility for a specific inspection or test to OPT; 2. To attain OPT's acceptance of materials or equipment to be incorporated in the Work; 3. By manufacturers of equipment furnished under the Contract Documents; 4. For testing, adjusting, and balancing of mechanical, electrical, and other equipment to be incorporated into the Work; 5. For acceptance of materials, mix designs, or equipment submitted for approval prior to Contractor's purchase thereof for incorporation in the Work; 6. For re-inspecting or retesting Defective Work, including any associated costs incurred by the testing laboratory for cancelled tests or standby time; and 7. For retesting due to failed tests. D. Provide independent inspectors, testing laboratories, or other qualified individuals or entities acceptable to OPT to provide these inspections and tests. 16.03 Defective Work A. It is Contractor's obligation to ensure that the Work is not Defective. B. OPT has the authority to determine whether Work is Defective and to reject Defective Work. C. OAR is to notify Contractor of Defective Work of which OPT has actual knowledge. D. Promptly correct Defective Work. E. Take no action that would void or otherwise impair Owner's special warranties or guarantees when correcting Defective Work. General Conditions 00 72 00-65 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 F. Pay claims, costs, losses,and damages arising out of or relating to Defective Work, including: 1. Costs for correction, removal, and replacement of Defective Work; 2. Cost of the inspection and testing related to correction of Defective Work; 3. Fines levied against Owner by governmental authorities because of Defective Work; and 4. Costs of repair or replacement of work of others resulting from Defective Work. 16.04 Acceptance of Defective Work A. Owner may elect to accept Defective Work instead of requiring correction or removal and replacement of Defective Work provided: 1. This acceptance occurs prior to final payment; 2. Designer confirms that the Defective Work is in general accordance with the design intent and applicable engineering or architectural principles; and 3. Designer confirms that acceptance of the Defective Work does not endanger public health or safety. B. Owner may impose a reasonable set-off against payments due under Article 17 for costs associated with OPT's evaluation of Defective Work to determine if it can be accepted and to determine the diminished value of the Work. Owner may impose a reasonable set-off against payments due under Article 17 if the parties are unable to agree as to the decrease in the Contract Price to compensate Owner for the diminished value of Defective Work accepted. OAR is to issue a Modification for acceptance of the Defective Work prior to final payment. Pay an appropriate amount to Owner if the acceptance of Defective Work occurs after final payment. 16.05 Uncovering Work A. OPT has the authority to require inspection or testing of the Work, whether or not the Work is fabricated, installed or completed. B. Work that is covered prior to approval of the OAR must be uncovered for OPT's observation if requested by OAR. Pay for uncovering Work and its subsequent restoration unless Contractor has given OAR timely notice of Contractor's intention to cover the Work and OAR fails to act with reasonable promptness in response to this notice. C. Provide necessary labor, material, and equipment and uncover, expose, or otherwise make available the portion of the Work suspected of being Defective for observation, inspection, or testing if OPT considers it necessary or advisable that covered Work be observed by Designer or inspected or tested by others as directed by the OAR. 1. Pay for claims, costs, losses, and damages associated with uncovering, exposing, observing, inspecting, and testing if it is found that the uncovered Work is Defective. Pay costs for correction of Defective Work. Pay for reconstruction, repair, or replacement of work of others resulting from the Defective Work if it is found that the uncovered Work is Defective. General Conditions 00 72 00-66 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 16.06 Owner May Stop the Work A. Owner may order Contractor to stop the Work if: 1. The Work is Defective; 2. Contractor fails to supply sufficient skilled workers or suitable materials or equipment; or 3. Contractor performs Work that may fail to conform to the Contract Documents when completed. This stop work order is to remain in effect until the reason for the stop work order has been eliminated. Owner's right to stop the Work does not create a duty to exercise this right for the benefit of Contractor's Team or surety. 16.07 Owner May Correct Defective Work A. Owner may remedy deficiencies in the Work after 7 days' notice to Contractor if: 1. Contractor fails to correct Defective Work, or to remove and replace rejected Work as required by OPT; 2. Contractor fails to perform the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents; or 3. Contractor fails to comply with other provisions of the Contract Documents. B. Owner may: 1. Exclude Contractor from the Site; 2. Take possession of the Work and suspend Contractor's services related to the Work; and 3. Incorporate stored materials and equipment in the Work. C. Allow OPT access to the Site and off-Site storage areas to enable Owner to exercise the rights and remedies under this Paragraph 16.07. D. All claims, costs, losses, and damages incurred or sustained by Owner in exercising the rights and remedies under this Paragraph 16.07 are to be charged against Contractor as a set-off against payments due under Article 17. These claims, costs, losses, and damages include costs of repair and the cost of replacement of work of others destroyed or damaged by correction, removal, or replacement of Contractor's Defective Work. E. Contractor is not allowed an extension of the Contract Times because of delays in the performance of the Work attributable to the exercise of the Owner's rights and remedies under this Paragraph 16.07. ARTICLE 17—PAYMENTS TO CONTRACTOR;SET-OFFS;COMPLETION; CORRECTION PERIOD 17.01 Progress Payments A. Progress payment requests are to be submitted to the OAR on the Application for Payment form provided by the OAR following procedures in this Article 17. General Conditions 00 72 00-67 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 1. Progress payments for lump sum Work are to be paid on the basis of the earned value to date at the amounts shown in the Schedule of Values submitted as required by Paragraph 17.03. Final payment will be for the total lump sum amount. 2. Progress payments for Unit Price Work are based on the number of units completed as determined under the provisions of Paragraph 15.03. 3. Progress payments for Work to be paid on the basis of the Cost of the Work per Paragraphs 15.01, 15.02 and 15.04 are to be paid for Work completed by Contractor during the pay period. B. Reduction in Payment by Owner: 1. Owner is entitled to impose a set-off against payment based on the following: a. Claims made against Owner or costs, losses,or damages incurred by Owner related to: 1) Contractor's conduct in the performance of the Work, including, but not limited to, workplace injuries, non-compliance with Laws and Regulations, or patent infringement; or 2) Contractor's failure to take reasonable and customary measures to avoid damage, delay, disruption, and interference with other work at or adjacent to the Site, including but not limited to, workplace injuries, property damage, and non-compliance with Laws and Regulations. b. Owner has been required to remove or remediate a Hazardous Environmental Condition for which Contractor is responsible; c. Work is Defective, or completed Work has been damaged by Contractor's Team, requiring correction or replacement; d. Owner has been required to correct Defective Work or complete Work in accordance with Paragraph 16.07; e. The Contract Price has been reduced by Change Orders; f. Events have occurred that would constitute a default by Contractor justifying a termination for cause; g. Liquidated damages have accrued as a result of Contractor's failure to achieve Milestones, Substantial Completion, or completion of the Work; h. Liens have been filed in connection with the Work, except where Contractor has delivered a specific Bond satisfactory to Owner to secure the satisfaction and discharge of these Liens; i. Failure to submit up-to-date record documents as required by the Contract Documents; j. Failure to submit monthly Progress Schedule updates or revised schedules as requested by the OAR; k. Failure to provide Project photographs required by the Contract Documents; I. Failure to provide Certified Payroll required by the Contract Documents; General Conditions 00 72 00-68 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 m. Compensation for OPT for overtime charges of OAR or RPR, third review of documents, review of substitutions, re-inspection fees, inspections or designs related to correction of Defective Work, or other services identified as requiring payment by the Contractor; n. Costs for tests performed by the Owner to verify that Work previously tested and found to be Defective has been corrected; o. OPT has actual knowledge of the occurrence of events that would constitute a default by Contractor and therefore justify termination for cause under the Contract Documents with associated cost impacts; p. Other items entitling Owner to a set-off against the amount recommended; or q. Payment would result in an over-payment of the Contract Price. 2. Compensation for services of OPT staff is to be at the rates established by negotiations between OPT and Contractor. 3. OAR is to notify Contractor stating the amount and the reasons for an imposed set-off. The Owner is to pay the Contractor amounts remaining after deduction of the set-off. Owner is to pay the set-off amount agreed to by Owner and Contractor if Contractor remedies the reasons for the set-off. Contractor may submit a Change Proposal contesting the set-off. C. Delayed Payments: 1. No money shall be paid by Owner upon any claim, debt, demand, or account whatsoever, to any person, firm, or corporation who is in arrears to Owner for taxes; and Owner shall be entitled to counterclaim and automatically offset against any such debt, claim,demand, or account in the amount of taxes so in arrears and no assignment or transfer of such debt, claim, demand, or account after said taxes are due, shall affect the right of Owner to offset said taxes, and associated penalties and interest if applicable, against the same. 2. No payment will be made for Work authorized by a Work Change Directive until the Work Change Directive is incorporated into a Change Order. Payment can be included in an Application for payment when the Change Order is approved. D. The Owner is to pay the amount of payment recommended by the OAR within 30 days after receipt of the Application for Payment and accompanying documentation from the OAR. 17.02 Application for Payment A. Submit Applications for Payment for completed Work and for materials and equipment in accordance with the Supplementary Conditions, the Agreement, and this Article 17. The Contract Price is to include costs for: 1. Providing the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents; 2. Installing Owner furnished equipment and materials; 3. Providing Work for Alternates and Allowances; 4. Commissioning, start-up,training and initial maintenance and operation; 5. Acceptance testing in manufacturer's facilities or on Site; General Conditions 00 72 00-69 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 6. All home office overhead costs and expenses, including profit made directly or indirectly for the Project; 7. Project management, Contract administration, field office, and field operations staff, including supervision, clerical support, and technology system support; 8. Professional services including design fees, legal fees, and other professional services; 9. Bonds and insurance; 10. Permits, licenses, patent fees, and royalties; 11. Taxes; 12. Providing all documents and Samples required by the Contract Documents; 13. Facilities and equipment at the Site including: a. Field offices, office furnishings, and all related office supplies, software, and equipment, b. Storage facilities for Contractor's use, storage facilities for stored materials and equipment, including spare parts storage, c. Shops, physical plant, construction equipment, small tools, vehicles, technology and telecommunications equipment, d. Safety equipment and facilities to provide safe access and working conditions for workers and for others working at the Site, e. Temporary facilities for power and communications, f. Potable water and sanitation facilities, and g. Mobilization and demobilization for all of these facilities and equipment; 14. Products, materials, and equipment stored at the Site or other suitable location; 15. Products, materials, and equipment permanently incorporated into the Project; 16. Temporary facilities for managing water, including facilities for pumping, storage, and treatment as required for construction and protection of the environment; 17. Temporary facilities for managing environment conditions and Constituents of Concern; 18. Temporary facilities such as sheeting, shoring, bracing, formwork, embankments, storage facilities, working areas, and other facilities required for construction of the Project; 19. Temporary and permanent facilities for protection of all overhead, surface, or underground structures or features; 20. Temporary and permanent facilities for removal, relocation, or replacement of any overhead, surface, or underground structures or features; 21. Products, materials, and equipment consumed during the construction of the Project; 22. Contractor labor and supervision to complete the Project, including that provided through Subcontractors or Suppliers; General Conditions 00 72 00-70 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 23. Correcting Defective Work during the Contract Times, during the Correction Period, or as required to meet any warranty provision of the Contract Documents; 24. Risk associated with weather and environmental conditions, start-up, and initial operation of facilities including equipment, processes, and systems; 25. Contractor's safety programs, including management, administration, and training; 26. Maintenance of facilities, including equipment, processes, and systems until operation is transferred to Owner; 27. Providing warranties, extended or special warranties, or extended service agreements; 28. Cleanup and disposal of any and all surplus materials; and 29. Demobilization of all physical,temporary facilities not incorporated into the Project. B. Include the cost not specifically set forth as an individual payment item but required to provide a complete and functional system in the Contract Price. C. Provide written approval of the surety company providing Bonds for the Schedule of Values, Application for Payment form, and method of payment prior to submitting the first Application for Payment. Payment will not be made without this approval. D. OAR may withhold processing Applications for Payment if any of the following processes or documentation are not up to date: 1. Record Documents per Article 20. 2. Progress Schedule per Article 27. 3. Project photographs per Article 28. 4. Documentation required to comply with Owner's Minority / MBE / DBE Participation Policy. 5. Documentation required to substantiate any approved Project deviation, including overruns of Designer's estimated quantity. 6. Documentation required by funding agency, if applicable. 17.03 Schedule of Values A. Submit a detailed Schedule of Values for the Work at least 10 days prior to submitting the first Application for Payment. B. Submit the Schedule of Values in the form attached to the Application for Payment - Tabulation of Earned Value of Original Contract Performed. C. Do not submit an Application for Payment until the Schedule of Values has been approved by the OAR. D. If unit prices are included in the Contract, use each unit price line item in the Contract as a unit price line item in the Schedule of Values. E. Divide lump sum line items, including Subcontractor and Supplier amounts in the Schedule of Values into smaller components to allow more accurate determination of the earned value for each item. General Conditions 00 72 00-71 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 1. Provide adequate detail to allow a more accurate determination of the earned value expressed as a percentage of Work completed for each item. 2. Line items may not exceed $50,000.00, unless they are for products, materials or equipment permanently incorporated into the Project that cannot be subdivided into units or subassemblies. 3. Lump sum items may be divided into an estimated number of units to determine earned value. a. The estimated number of units times the cost per unit must equal the lump sum amount for that line item. b. Contractor will receive payment for the lump sum for the line item, regardless of the number of units installed, unless an adjustment is made by Change Order. 4. Include Contractor's overhead and profit in each line item in proportion to the value of the line item to the Contract Price. 5. Include the cost not specifically set forth as an individual payment item but required to provide a complete and functional system in the Contract Price for each item. 6. These line items may be used to establish the value of Work to be added or deleted from the Project. 7. The sum of all values listed in the schedule must equal the total Contract Price. F. Subdivide each line item in the Schedule of Values into two payment components. The first component is the direct cost for products, materials, and equipment permanently incorporated into the Project. The second component is all other costs associated with the item in the Contract. The sum of the two components must equal the value of the line item in the Schedule of Values. G. Where a percentage of the line value is allowed for a specified stage of completion,show the value for each stage of completion as a component of that line item cost. 17.04 Schedule of Anticipated Payments and Earned Value A. Submit a schedule of the anticipated Application for Payments showing the application numbers, submission dates, and the anticipated amount to be requested. Incorporate retainage into the development of this schedule of anticipated payments. B. Submit a tabulation of the anticipated Total Earned Value of Fees, Work, and Materials to create a graphic (curve) representation of the anticipated progress on the Project each month. Adjust this table and curve to incorporate Modifications. Use this curve to compare actual progress on the Project each month by comparing the anticipated cumulative Total Earned Value of Fees, Work, and Materials to the actual Total Earned Value of Fees, Work, and Materials each month. Use the comparison of values to determine performance on budget and schedule. C. Update the Schedule of Payments as necessary to provide a reasonably accurate indication of the funds required to make payments each month to the Contractor for Work performed. General Conditions 00 72 00-72 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 17.05 Basis for Payments A. Lump Sum Contracts: 1. Payment will be made for the earned value of Work completed during the payment period expressed as a percentage of Work completed for each line item during the payment period per the Contract Documents. 2. Payment amount is the value of Work completed per the Contract Documents multiplied by the percentage of Work completed. 3. Payment for lump sum items divided into an estimated number of units to determine earned value per Paragraph 17.03 will be made for the measured number of units. 4. Payment for stored materials and equipment will be made per Paragraph 17.06. B. Unit Price Contracts: 1. Payment will be made for the actual quantity of Work completed during the payment period and for materials and equipment stored during the payment period per the Contract Documents. a. Payment amount is the Work quantity measured per the Contract Documents multiplied by the unit prices for that line item in the Contract. b. Payment for stored materials and equipment will be made per Paragraph 17.06. 2. Measure the Work described in the Contract for payment. Payment will be made only for the actual measured and/or computed length, area, solid contents, number, and weight, unless other provisions are made in the Contract Documents. Payment on a unit price basis will not be made for Work outside finished dimensions shown in the Contract Documents. Include cost for waste, overages, and tolerances in the unit price for that line item. 17.06 Payment for Stored Materials and Equipment A. Store materials and equipment properly at the Site. 1. Payment will be made for the invoice amount less the specified retainage. 2. Payment for materials and equipment shown in the Application for Payment and attachments will be made for the invoice amount,up to the value shown in the Schedule of Values for that line item. Costs for material and equipment in excess of the value shown in the Schedule of Values may not be added to other line items. 3. Payment will be made in full for the value shown in the line item for products and materials if invoices for materials and equipment are less than the amount shown in the line item and it can be demonstrated that no additional materials or equipment are required to complete Work described in that item. 4. Provide invoices at the time materials are included on the Application for Payment and attachments. Include invoice numbers so that a comparison can be made between invoices and amounts included on the Application for Payment and attachments. B. Provide a bill of sale, invoice, or other documentation warranting that Owner has received the materials and equipment free and clear of Liens. Provide documentation of payment for General Conditions 00 72 00-73 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 materials and equipment with the next Application for Payment. Adjust payment to the amount actually paid if this differs from the invoice amount. Remove items from the tabulation of materials and equipment if this documentation is not provided. Payment will not be made for material and equipment without documentation of payment. C. Contractors can be paid for non-perishable materials on hand stored at the site, provided that invoices are furnished to the City for verification of the material value, and that Contractor provides documents, satisfactory to the City,that show that the material supplier has been paid for the materials delivered to the work site. D. Provide evidence that the materials and equipment are covered by appropriate property insurance or other arrangements to protect Owner's interest. E. The Work covered by progress payments becomes the property of the Owner at the time of payment. The Contractor's obligations with regard to proper care and maintenance, insurance, and other requirements are not changed by this transfer of ownership until accepted in accordance with the General Conditions. F. Payment for materials and equipment does not constitute acceptance of the product. 17.07 Retainage and Set-Offs A. Retainage will be withheld from each Application for Payment per the Agreement. Retainage will be released per the General Conditions. B. Reduce payments for set-offs per the General Conditions. Include the appropriate attachment to the Application for Payment. 17.08 Procedures for Submitting an Application for Payment A. Submit a draft Application for Payment to the OAR each month at least 20 days before the date established in the Contract for Owner to make progress payments. Do not submit Applications for Payment more often than monthly. Review the draft Application for Payment with the OAR to determine concurrence with: 1. The earned value for each lump sum item including the value of properly stored and documented materials and equipment for each item in the original Contract. 2. The quantity of Work completed for each unit price item. 3. Set-offs included in the Application for Payment. 4. Values requested for materials and equipment consistent with invoices for materials and equipment. B. Submit Applications for Payment monthly through the OAR after agreement has been reached on the draft Application for Payment. 1. Number each application sequentially and include the dates for the application period. 2. Show the total amounts for earned value of original Contract performed, earned value for Work on approved Contract Amendments and Change Orders, retainage, and set- offs. Show total amounts that correspond to totals indicated on the attached tabulation for each. General Conditions 00 72 00-74 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 3. Include Attachment A to show the earned value on each line item in the Schedule of Values for Work shown in the original Contract. 4. Include Attachment B to show the earned value on line items for approved Change Orders. Add items to Attachment B as Change Orders are approved. Change Orders must be approved before payment can be made on Change Order items. 5. Include Attachment C to document set-offs required per the Contract Documents. Show each set-off as it is applied. Show a corresponding line item to reduce the set-off amount if a payment held by a set-off is released for payment. 6. Include Attachment D to allow tracking of invoices used to support amounts requested as materials in Attachments A and B. Enter materials to show the amount of the invoice assigned to each item in Attachment A or B if an invoice includes materials used on several line items. 7. Complete the certification stating that all Work, including materials and equipment, covered by this Application for Payment have been completed or delivered and stored in accordance with the Contract Documents,that all amounts have been paid for Work, materials, and equipment for which previous payments have been made by the Owner, and that the current payment amount shown in this Application for Payment is now due. C. Submit attachments in Portable Document Format (PDF): 1. Generate attachments to the Application for Payment using the Excel spreadsheet provided. 2. Submit PDF documents with adequate resolution to allow documents to be printed in a format equivalent to the document original. Documents are to be scalable to allow printing on standard 8-1/2 x 11 or 11 x 17 paper. 17.09 Responsibility of Owner's Authorized Representative A. OAR will review draft Application for Payment with Contractor to reach an agreement on the values that will be recommended for payment by the OAR. B. OAR will review Application for Payment submitted by Contractor to determine that the Application for Payment has been properly submitted and is in accordance with the agreed to draft Application for Payment. C. OAR is to either recommend payment of the Application for Payment to Owner or notify the Contractor of the OPT's reasons for not recommending payment. Contractor may make necessary corrections and resubmit the Application for Payment if it is not recommended within 10 days after receipt of the notice. OAR will review resubmitted Application for Payment and reject or recommend payment of the Application for Payment to Owner as appropriate. D. OAR's recommendation of the Application for Payment constitutes a representation by OPT that based on their experience and the information available: 1. The Work has progressed to the point indicated; 2. The quality of the Work is generally in accordance with the Contract Documents; and 3. Requirements prerequisite to payment have been met. General Conditions 00 72 00-75 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 E. This representation is subject to: 1. Further evaluation of the Work as a functioning whole; 2. The results of subsequent tests called for in the Contract Documents; or 3. Any other qualifications stated in the recommendation. F. OPT does not represent by recommending payment: 1. Inspections made to check the quality or the quantity of the Work as it has been performed have been exhaustive, extended to every aspect of the Work in progress, or involved detailed inspections of the Work; or 2. Other matters or issues between the parties that might entitle Contractor to additional compensation or entitle Owner to withhold payment to Contractor may or may not exist. G. Neither OPT's review of Contractor's Work for the purposes of recommending payments nor OAR's recommendation of payment imposes responsibility on OPT: 1. To supervise, direct, or control the Work; 2. For the means, methods, techniques, sequences, or procedures of construction, or safety precautions and programs; 3. For Contractor's failure to comply with Laws and Regulations applicable to Contractor's performance of the Work; 4. To make examinations to ascertain how or for what purposes Contractor has used the monies paid on account of the Contract Price; or 5. To determine that title to the Work, materials, or equipment has passed to Owner free and clear of Liens. 17.10 Contractor's Warranty of Title A. Contractor warrants and guarantees that title to the Work, materials, and equipment furnished under the Contract is to pass to Owner free and clear of Liens, title defects, and patent, licensing, copyright, or royalty obligations no later than 7 days after the time of payment by Owner of the Application for Payment which includes these items. 17.11 Substantial Completion A. Notify OAR when Contractor considers the entire Work substantially complete and request a Certificate of Substantial Completion. B. OPT is to inspect the Work within 30 days after Contractor's notification to determine if the Work is substantially complete. OAR, within 120 days after receipt of Contractor's notification, is to either issue the Certificate of Substantial Completion which sets the date of Substantial Completion or notify Contractor of the reasons the Project is not considered to be substantially complete. General Conditions 00 72 00-76 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 C. The OPT and Contractor are to meet to discuss Owner's use or occupancy of the Work following Substantial Completion. Items to be discussed at this meeting include: 1. Review of insurance policies with respect to the end of the Contractor's coverage, and confirm the transition to coverage of the Work under a permanent property insurance policy held by Owner; 2. Owner's assumption of responsibility for security, operation, protection of the Work, maintenance, and utilities upon Owner's use or occupancy of the Work; 3. Contractor's obligations for operations and maintenance during performance and acceptance testing; 4. Contractor's access to the Site to complete punch list items; and 5. Procedures for correction of Defective Work during the 1-year correction period. 17.12 Partial Utilization A. Owner may use or occupy substantially completed parts of the Work which are specifically identified in the Contract Documents, or which OPT and Contractor agree constitutes a separately functioning and usable part of the Work prior to Substantial Completion of the Work. Owner must be able to use that part of the Work for its intended purpose without significant interference with Contractor's performance of the remainder of the Work. Contractor and OPT are to follow the procedures of Paragraph 17.11 for this part of the Work. B. No use or occupancy or separate operation of part of the Work may occur prior to compliance with the requirements of Article 6. 17.13 Final Inspection A. OPT is to make a final inspection upon notice from Contractor that the entire Work or portion to be accepted is complete. OAR is to notify Contractor of Work determined to be incomplete or Defective. Immediately take corrective measures to complete the Work and correct Defective Work. 17.14 Final Application for Payment A. Include adjustments to the Contract Price in the final Application for Payment for: 1. Approved Change Orders and Contract Amendments, 2. Allowances not previously adjusted by Change Order, 3. Deductions for Defective Work that has been accepted by the Owner, 4. Penalties and bonuses, 5. Deductions for liquidated damages, 6. Deduction for all final set-offs, and 7. Other adjustments if needed. B. OAR will prepare a final Change Order reflecting the approved adjustments to the Contract Price which have not been covered by previously approved Change Orders and if necessary reconcile estimate unit price quantities with actual quantities. General Conditions 00 72 00-77 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 17.15 Final Payment A. Make final Application for Payment after completing required corrections identified during the final inspection and delivering items and documents required by the Contract Documents. Provide the following with the final Application for Payment: 1. Consent of Surety to Final Payment acknowledging unsettled disputes; and 2. Certification of Payment of Debts and Claims or Certification of Release of Liens or furnish receipts or releases in full from Subcontractors and Suppliers. B. OAR is to either recommend payment of the final Application for Payment to Owner if OPT is satisfied that the Work has been completed and Contractor's other obligations under the Contract Documents have been fulfilled or notify the Contractor of the OPT's reasons for not recommending final payment. C. The Work is complete, subject to surviving obligations, when it is ready for final payment as established by the OAR's recommendation of payment of the final Application for Payment to Owner and the issuance of a Certificate of Final Completion. D. The Owner is to pay the amount of final payment recommended by the OAR within 30 days after receipt of the final Application for Payment and accompanying documentation from the OAR. 17.16 Waiver of Claims A. The making of final payment does not constitute a waiver by Owner of claims or rights against Contractor. Owner expressly reserves claims and rights arising from: 1. Unsettled Liens or claims for non-payment; 2. Defective Work appearing after final inspection; 3. Contractor's failure to comply with the Contract Documents or the terms of specified special guarantees; or 4. Contractor's continuing obligations under the Contract Documents. B. Contractor waives claims and rights against Owner by accepting final payment with the exception of those Claims made in accordance with the provisions of Article 22 and specifically noted in the Certificate of Final Completion. 17.17 Correction Period A. Promptly correct Defective Work without cost to Owner for 1 year after the date of Substantial Completion or, in the event of a latent defect, within 1 year after discovery thereof by City. B. Promptly correct damages to the Site or adjacent areas that Contractor has arranged to use through construction easements or other agreements. Promptly correct damages to Work or the work of others. Make corrections without cost to Owner. C. Owner may have the Defective Work and damages described in Paragraphs 17.17.A and 17.17.13 corrected if Contractor does not comply with the terms of OAR's instructions, or in an emergency where delay would cause serious risk of loss or damage. General Conditions 00 72 00-78 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 D. Contractor's obligation to indemnify Owner for claims arising out of or related to the correction of Defective Work are as set forth in Paragraph 7.14. E. The correction period starts to run from the date when a specific item of equipment or system is placed in continuous beneficial use by Owner before Substantial Completion of Work if so provided in the Specifications or if accepted for beneficial use by the Owner. F. Contractor's obligations under this Paragraph 17.17 are in addition to other obligations or warranties. The provisions of this Paragraph 17.17 are not a substitute for, or a waiver of, the provisions of applicable statutes of limitation or repose. ARTICLE 18—SUSPENSION OF WORK AND TERMINATION 18.01 Owner May Suspend Work A. Owner may suspend the Work or a portion of the Work for a period of not more than 90 consecutive days, at any time and without cause, by notice to Contractor. This notice fixes the date on which Contractor is to resume Work. Contractor is entitled to adjustments in the Contract Price and Contract Times directly attributable to this suspension only if efforts are made to mitigate the cost impacts of the suspension. Meet with the Owner within 10 days of the notice of suspension to discuss specific strategies to reduce or eliminate the cost of delays. Submit a Change Proposal seeking an adjustment no later than 30 days after the date fixed for resumption of Work. 18.02 Owner May Terminate for Cause A. The occurrence of one or more of the following events constitutes a default by Contractor and justifies termination for cause: 1. Contractor's persistent failure to perform the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents, including failure to supply sufficient skilled workers or suitable materials or equipment; 2. Failure to adhere to the Progress Schedule; 3. Failure of the Contractor to provide a satisfactory replacement Bond or insurance in the event either is lost or canceled; 4. Failure of Contractor to maintain financial solvency to adequately complete the Project as indicated by one or more of the following: a. A petition of bankruptcy is filed by or against Contractor, b. Contractor is adjudged as bankrupt or insolvent, c. Contractor or surety makes a general assignment for the benefit of creditors, d. A receiver is appointed for the benefit of Contractor's creditors, or e. A receiver is appointed on account of Contractor's insolvency; 5. Contractor's disregard of Laws or Regulations of public bodies having jurisdiction; 6. Contractor's repeated disregard of the authority of OPT; 7. Contractor's failure to prosecute the work with diligence; or General Conditions 00 72 00-79 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 8. Contractor's other material breach of the contract. B. Contractor and surety must provide adequate assurance of future performance in accordance with the Contract Documents that is satisfactory to Owner if Contractor is believed to be in financial distress due to the existence of one or more of the indicators listed in Paragraph 18.02.A.4. Owner may terminate Contractor's performance under this Contract if Contractor and surety fail to provide adequate documentation satisfactory to Owner within 10 days of OAR's request for this information. C. Owner may declare Contractor to be in default, give notice to Contractor and surety that Contractor's performance under the Contract is terminated, and enforce the rights available to Owner under the Performance Bond after giving Contractor and surety 10 days' notice that one or more of the events identified in Paragraph 18.02.A has occurred. D. Owner may exclude Contractor from the Site, take possession of the Work, incorporate the materials and equipment stored and complete the Work as Owner may deem expedient if Owner has terminated Contractor's performance under the Contract for cause. E. Owner may elect not to proceed with termination of Contractor's performance under the Contract under this Paragraph 18.02 if Contractor begins to cure the cause for termination within 7 days of receipt of notice of intent to terminate. F. Contractor is not entitled to receive further payments until the Work is completed if Owner proceeds as provided in this Paragraph 18.02. The amount of the Contract Price remaining is to be paid to the Contractor if the unpaid balance exceeds the cost to complete the Work. The cost to complete the Work may include related claims, costs, losses, damages, and the fees and charges of engineers, architects, attorneys, and other professionals retained by Owner. Pay the difference to Owner if the cost to complete the Work including related claims, costs, losses, and damages exceeds the unpaid balance of the Contract Price. Owner is not required to obtain the lowest price for the Work performed when exercising its rights or remedies under this paragraph. G. Termination of Contractor's performance does not affect the rights or remedies of Owner against Contractor or against surety under the Payment Bond or Performance Bond. Owner does not release Contractor from liability by paying or retaining money due Contractor. H. In the event the Owner terminates the contract for cause, and it is later determined that cause for termination was lacking, the termination will be deemed a termination without cause under Paragraph 18.03. 18.03 Owner May Terminate For Convenience A. Owner may terminate the Contract without cause after giving 7 days' notice to Contractor of the effective date of termination. Contractor is to be paid for the following if Owner terminates for convenience: 1. Work completed in accordance with the Contract Documents prior to the effective date of termination; 2. Actual costs sustained prior to the effective date of termination for Work in progress, plus a fee calculated in accordance with Paragraph 15.05; and 3. Reasonable expenses directly attributable to termination, including costs incurred to prepare a termination for convenience cost proposal. General Conditions 00 72 00-80 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 B. No payment is payable to Contractor for loss of anticipated overhead, profits or revenue, or other economic loss arising out of or resulting from this termination. ARTICLE 19— PROJECT MANAGEMENT 19.01 Work Included A. Furnish resources required to complete the Project with an acceptable standard of quality within the Contract Times. B. Construct Project in accordance with current safety practices. C. Manage Site to allow access to Site and control construction operations. D. Construct temporary facilities to provide and maintain control over environmental conditions at the Site. Remove temporary facilities when no longer needed. E. Provide temporary controls for pollutions, management of water and management of excess earth. 19.02 Quality Assurance A. Employ competent workmen,skilled in the occupation for which they are employed. Provide Work meeting quality requirements of the Contract Documents. B. Remove Defective Work from the Site immediately unless provisions have been made and approved by the OPT to allow repair of the product at the Site. Clearly mark Work as Defective until it is removed or allowable repairs have been completed. 19.03 Document Submittal A. Provide documents in accordance with Article 24. 1. Provide copies of Supplier's printed storage instructions prior to furnishing materials or products and installation instructions prior to beginning the installation. 2. Incorporate field notes,sketches, recordings,and computations made by the Contractor in Record Data. 19.04 Required Permits A. Obtain building permits for the Project from the local authorities having jurisdiction. Pay building permit fees and include this cost in the Contract Price. B. Obtain environmental permits required for construction at the Site. C. Provide required permits for transporting heavy or oversized loads. D. Provide other permits required to conduct any part of the Work. E. Arrange for inspections and certification by agencies having jurisdiction over the Work. F. Make arrangements with private utility companies and pay for fees associated with obtaining services, or for inspection fees. G. Retain copies of permits and licenses at the Site and observe and comply with all regulations and conditions of the permit or license. General Conditions 00 72 00-81 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 19.05 Safety Requirements A. Manage safety to protect the safety and welfare of persons at the Site. B. Provide safe access to move through the Site. Provide protective devices to warn and protect from hazards at the Site. C. Provide safe access for those performing tests and inspections. D. Comply with latest provisions of the Occupational Health and Safety Administration and other Laws and Regulation. E. Cooperate with accident investigations. Provide two copies of all reports,including insurance company reports, prepared concerning accidents, injury, or death related to the Project to the OAR as Record Data per Article 26. 19.06 Access to the Site A. Maintain access to the facilities at all times. Do not obstruct roads, pedestrian walks, or access to the various buildings, structures, stairways, or entrances. Provide safe access for normal operations during construction. B. Provide adequate and safe access for inspections. Leave ladders, bridges, scaffolding, and protective equipment in place until inspections have been completed. Construct additional safe access if required for inspections. C. Use roadways for construction traffic only with written approval of the appropriate representatives of each entity. Obtain written approval to use roads to deliver heavy or oversized loads to the Site. Furnish copies of the written approvals to the Owner as Record Data per Article 26. 19.07 Contractor's Use of Site A. Limit the use of Site for Work and storage to those areas designated on the Drawings or approved by the OAR. Coordinate the use of the premises with the OAR. B. Provide security at the Site as necessary to protect against vandalism and loss by theft. C. Do not permit alcoholic beverages or illegal substances on the Site. Do not allow persons under the influence of alcoholic beverages or illegal substances to enter or remain on the Site at any time. Persons on Site under the influence of alcoholic beverages or illegal substances will be permanently prohibited from returning to the Site. Criminal or civil penalties may also apply. D. Park construction equipment in designated areas only and provide spill control measures. E. Park employees'vehicles in designated areas only. F. Obtain written permission of the Owner before entering privately-owned land outside of the Owner's property, rights-of-way, or easements. G. Do not allow the use of audio devices, obnoxious, vulgar or abusive language, or sexual harassment in any form. These actions will cause immediate and permanent removal of the offender from the premises. Criminal or civil penalties may apply. General Conditions 00 72 00-82 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 H. Require Workers to wear clothing that is inoffensive and meets safety requirements. Do not allow sleeveless shirts, shorts, exceedingly torn, ripped, or soiled clothing to be worn on the Project. I. Do not allow firearms or weapons of any sort to be brought on to the Site under any conditions. No exception is to be made for persons with concealed handgun permits. Remove any firearms or weapons and the person possessing these firearms or weapons immediately from the Site. 19.08 Protection of Existing Structures and Utilities A. Examine the Site and review the available information concerning the Site. Locate utilities, streets, driveways, fences, drainage structures, sidewalks, curbs, and gutters. Verify the elevations of the structures adjacent to excavations. Report any discrepancies from information in the Contract Documents to the OAR before beginning construction. B. Determine if existing structures, poles, piping, or other utilities at excavations will require relocation or replacement. Prepare a Plan of Action and coordinate Work with local utility companies and others for the relocation or replacement. C. Protect buildings, utilities, street surfaces, driveways, sidewalks, curb and gutter, fences, wells, drainage structures, piping, valves, manholes, electrical conduits, and other systems or structures unless they are shown to be replaced or relocated on the Drawings. Restore damaged items to the satisfaction of the OPT and utility owner. D. Carefully support and protect all structures and/or utilities so that there will be no failure or settlement where excavation or demolition endangers adjacent structures and utilities. Do not take existing utilities out of service unless required by the Contract Documents or approved by the OAR. Notify and cooperate with the utility owner if it is necessary to move services, poles, guy wires, pipelines, or other obstructions. E. Protect existing trees and landscaping at the Site. 1. Identify trees that may be removed during construction with OPT. 2. Mark trees to be removed with paint. 3. Protect trees to remain from damage by wrapping trunks with 2 x 4 timbers around the perimeter, securely wired in place, where machinery must operate around existing trees. Protect branches and limbs from damage by equipment. 4. Protect root zone from compaction. 19.09 Pre-Construction Exploratory Excavations A. Excavate and expose existing pipelines that cross within 20 feet of Project pipelines prior to any Work. Survey the line to determine its exact vertical and horizontal location at each point the existing pipeline may potentially conflict with the Work. B. Excavate and expose existing parallel pipelines at 300 feet intervals (maximum) for existing pipelines which are within 10 feet of Project pipelines. Survey the line to determine its exact vertical and horizontal location at each point where the line is excavated and exposed. General Conditions 00 72 00-83 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 C. Prepare a Plan of Action indicating the owner of pipelines excavated and surveyed and all pertinent survey data, including the station where lines cross or conflicts may exist and the distance to the pavement centerline and elevations of the top of existing pipelines. D. Do not perform Work on the Project until all exploratory excavations have been completed and the Plan of Action has been approved by the OAR. E. Unless specifically indicated otherwise in the Bid Form, no separate payment will be made for pre-construction exploratory excavations. Include the cost for pre-construction exploratory excavations in the unit price for the pipe construction or other applicable feature. When necessary, pavement repairs associated with exploratory excavations that are beyond the limits of the new pavement will be paid for at the unit prices for pavement repair when an item is included in the Bid Form. When an item for pavement repair is not included in the Bid Form, the cost should be included in the unit price for the pipe construction or other applicable feature. 19.10 Disruption of Services/Continued Operations A. Existing facilities are to continue in service as usual during the construction unless noted otherwise. Owner of utilities must be able to operate and maintain the facilities. Keep disruptions to existing utilities, piping, process piping, or electrical services to a minimum. 1. Do not restrict access to critical valves or operators. 2. Limit operations to the minimum amount of space needed to complete the specified Work. 3. Maintain storm sewers and sanitary sewers in service at all times. Provide temporary service around the construction or otherwise construct the structure in a manner that the flow is not restricted. B. Provide a Plan of Action if facilities must be taken out of operation. 19.11 Field Measurements A. Perform complete field measurements prior to purchasing products or beginning construction for products required to fit existing conditions. B. Verify property lines, control lines, grades, and levels indicated on the Drawings. C. Check Shop Drawings and indicate the actual dimensions available where products are to be installed. D. Include field measurements in Record Data as required in Article 26. 19.12 Reference Data and Control Points A. The OPT will provide the following control points: 1. Base line or grid reference points for horizontal control. 2. Benchmarks for vertical control. B. Locate and protect control points prior to starting the Work and preserve permanent reference points during construction. Designated control points may be on an existing structure or monument. Do not change or relocate points without prior approval of the OAR. General Conditions 00 72 00-84 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 Notify OAR when the reference point is lost, destroyed, or requires relocation. Replace Project control points on the basis of the original survey. C. Provide complete engineering layout of the Work needed for construction. 1. Provide competent personnel. Provide equipment including accurate surveying instruments, stakes, platforms,tools, and materials. 2. Provide surveying with accuracy meeting the requirements established for Category 5 Construction Surveying as established in the Manual of Practice of Land Surveying in Texas published by the Texas Society of Professional Surveyors, latest revision. 3. Record Data and measurements per standards. 19.13 Delivery and Storage A. Deliver products and materials to the Site in time to prevent delays in construction. B. Deliver packaged products to Site in original undamaged containers with identifying labels attached. Open cartons as necessary to check for damage and to verify invoices. Reseal cartons and store properly until used. Leave products in packages or other containers until installed. C. Assume full responsibility for the protection and safekeeping of products stored at the Site. D. Store products at locations acceptable to the OAR and to allow Owner access to maintain and operate existing facilities. E. Store products in accordance with the Supplier's storage instructions immediately upon delivery. Leave seals and labels intact. F. Provide additional storage areas as needed for construction. Store products subject to damage by elements in substantial weather-tight enclosures or storage sheds. Provide and maintain storage sheds as required for the protection of products. Provide temperature, humidity control, and ventilation within the ranges stated in the Supplier's instructions. Remove storage facilities at the completion of the Project. G. Protect the pipe interior. Keep all foreign materials such as dirt, debris, animals, or other objects out of the pipe during the Work. Cap or plug ends of installed pipe in an approved manner when pipe is not being installed. Clean or wash out pipe sections that become contaminated before continuing with installation. Take precautions to prevent the pipe from floating or moving out of the proper position during or after laying operations. Immediately correct any pipe that moves from its correct position. H. Provide adequate exterior storage for products that may be stored out-of-doors. 1. Provide substantial platforms, blocking, or skids to support materials and products above ground which has been sloped to provide drainage. Protect products from soiling or staining. 2. Cover products subject to discoloration or deterioration from exposure to the elements, with impervious sheet materials. Provide ventilation to prevent condensation below covering. 3. Store loose, granular materials on clean, solid surfaces, or on rigid sheet materials, to prevent mixing with foreign matter. General Conditions 00 72 00-85 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 4. Provide surface drainage to prevent erosion and ponding of water. 5. Prevent mixing of refuse or chemically injurious materials or liquids with stored materials. 6. Pipes and conduits stored outdoors are to have open ends sealed to prevent the entrance of dirt, moisture, and other injurious materials. Protect PVC pipe from ultraviolet light exposure. 7. Store light weight products to prevent wind damage. I. Maintain storage facilities. Inspect stored products on a weekly basis and after periods of severe weather to verify that: 1. Storage facilities continue to meet specified requirements; 2. Supplier's required environmental conditions are continually maintained; and 3. Products that can be damaged by exposure to the elements are not adversely affected. J. Replace any stored item damaged by inadequate protection or environmental controls. K. Payment may be withheld for any products not properly stored. 19.14 Cleaning During Construction A. Provide positive methods to minimize raising dust from construction operations and provide positive means to prevent air-borne dust from disbursing into the atmosphere. Control dust and dirt from demolition, cutting, and patching operations. B. Clean the Project as Work progresses and dispose of waste materials, keeping the Site free from accumulations of waste or rubbish. Provide containers on Site for waste collection. Do not allow waste materials or debris to blow around or off of the Site. Control dust from waste materials. Transport waste materials with as few handlings as possible. C. Comply with Laws and Regulations. Do not burn or bury waste materials. Remove waste materials, rubbish and debris from the Site and legally dispose of these at public or private disposal facilities. D. Provide a final cleaning to thoroughly clean the entire Site and make ready for acceptance. 1. Remove construction debris, boxes, and trash from the Site. 2. Remove construction storage sheds and field offices. 3. Restore grade to match surrounding condition and remove excess dirt. 4. Sweep all drives and parking lots clean of dirt and debris. Use water trucks or hose down paved site to like new appearance. 19.15 Maintenance of Roads, Driveways, and Access A. Maintain roads and streets in a manner that is suitable for safe operations of public vehicles during all phases of construction unless the Owner approves a street closing. Do not close public roads overnight. B. Submit a Notification by Contractor for Owner's approval of a street closing. The request shall state: General Conditions 00 72 00-86 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 1. The reason for closing the street. 2. How long the street will remain closed. 3. Procedures to be taken to maintain the flow of traffic. C. Construct temporary detours, including by-pass roads around construction,with adequately clear width to maintain the free flow of traffic at all times. Maintain barricades, signs, and safety features around the detour and excavations. Maintain barricades, signs, and safety features around the Work in accordance with all provisions of the latest edition of the Manual on Uniform Traffic Control Devices (MUTCD). D. Assume responsibility for any damage resulting from construction along roads or drives. 19.16 Area Access and Traffic Control A. Provide traffic control measures to assure a safe condition and to provide a minimum of inconvenience to motorists and the public. Provide all-weather access to all residents and businesses at all times during construction. Provide temporary driveways and/or roads of approved material during wet weather. Maintain a stockpile of suitable material on the Site to meet the demands of inclement weather. B. Schedule operations to minimize adverse impact on the accessibility of adjoining properties. Sequence construction to build driveways in half widths, construct temporary ramps, or any other measure required to maintain access to adjoining properties. C. Comply with the Owner's Uniform Barricading Standards and Practices. Copies of this document are available through the Owner's Traffic Engineering Department. Secure required permits from the Owner's Traffic Engineering Department. 19.17 Overhead Electrical Wires A. Comply with OSHA safety requirements regarding construction equipment working beneath overhead electrical wires. Prevent and pay for repairs for damage to existing overhead electrical wires or facilities. B. Provide for adequate safety with regard to overhead lines whether overhead lines are or are not shown in the Contract Documents. 19.18 Blasting A. Blasting is not allowed for any purpose. 19.19 Archeological Requirements A. Cease operations immediately and contact the Owner for instructions if historical or archaeological artifacts are found during construction. B. Conduct all construction activities to avoid adverse impact on the Sites where significant historical or archaeological artifacts are found or identified as an area where other artifacts could be found. 1. Obtain details for Working in these areas. 2. Maintain confidentiality regarding the Site. General Conditions 00 72 00-87 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 3. Adhere to the requirements of the Texas Historical Commission. 4. Notify the OAR and the Texas Historical Commission. C. Do not disturb archaeological sites. 1. Obtain the services of a qualified archaeological specialist to instruct construction personnel on how to identify and protect archaeological finds on an emergency basis. 2. Coordinate activities to permit archaeological work to take place within the area. a. Attempt to archaeologically clear areas needed for construction as soon as possible. b. Provide a determination of priority for such areas. D. Assume responsibility for any unauthorized destruction that might result to such Sites by construction personnel, and pay all penalties assessed by the State or Federal agencies for non-compliance with these requirements. E. Contract Times will be modified to compensate for delays caused by such archaeological finds. No additional compensation will be paid for delays. 19.20 Endangered Species Resources A. Do not perform any activity that is likely to jeopardize the continued existence of a threatened or endangered species as listed or proposed for listing under the Federal Endangered Species Act (ESA), and/or the State of Texas Parks and Wildlife Code on Endangered Species, or to destroy or adversely modify the habitat of such species. B. Cease Work immediately in the area of the encounter and notify the OAR if a threatened or endangered species is encountered during construction. OPT will implement actions in accordance with the ESA and applicable State statutes. Resume construction in the area of the encounter when authorized to do so by the OAR. 19.21 Cooperation with Public Agencies A. Cooperate with all public and private agencies with facilities operating within the limits of the Project. B. Provide a 48-hour notice to any applicable agency when work is anticipated to proceed in the vicinity of any facility by using Texas 811 at 811 and the Lone Star Notification Company at 1-800-669-8344. ARTICLE 20—PROJECT COORDINATION 20.01 Work Included A. Administer Contract requirements to construct the Project. Provide documentation per the requirements of this Section. Provide information as requested by the OPT. 20.02 Document Submittal A. Provide documents in accordance with Article 24. General Conditions 00 72 00-88 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 B. Use the forms provided for Contract administration, applications for payment, document submittals, documentation of test results, equipment installation and documentation, and Project closeout. A digital copy of the required forms will be provided to the Contractor before or at the pre-construction conference. 20.03 Communication During Project A. The OAR is to be the first point of contact for all parties on matters concerning this Project. B. The OAR will coordinate correspondence concerning: 1. Documents, including Applications for Payment. 2. Clarification and interpretation of the Contract Documents. 3. Contract Modifications. 4. Observation of Work and testing. 5. Claims. C. The OAR will normally communicate only with the Contractor. Any required communication with Subcontractors or Suppliers will only be with the direct involvement of the Contractor. D. Direct written communications to the OAR at the address indicated at the pre-construction conference. Include the following with communications as a minimum: 1. Name of the Owner. 2. Project name. 3. Contract title. 4. Project number. 5. Date. 6. A reference statement. 20.04 Project Meetings A. Pre-Construction Conference: 1. Attend a pre-construction conference. 2. The location of the conference will be determined by the OAR. 3. The time of the meeting will be determined by the OAR but will be after the Notice of Award is issued and not later than 15 days after the Notice to Proceed is issued. 4. The OPT, Contractor's project manager and superintendent, representatives of utility companies, and representatives from major Subcontractors and Suppliers may attend the conference. 5. Provide and be prepared to discuss: a. Preliminary construction schedule per Article 27. b. Schedule of Values and anticipated Schedule of Payments per Article 17. C. List of Subcontractors and Suppliers. General Conditions 00 72 00-89 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 d. Contractor's organizational chart as it relates to this Project. e. Letter indicating the agents of authority for the Contractor and the limit of that authority with respect to the execution of legal documents,Contract Modifications, and payment requests. B. Progress Meetings: 1. Attend meetings with the OAR and Owner. a. Meet on a monthly basis or as requested by the OAR to discuss the Project. b. Meet at the Site or other location as designated by the OAR. c. Contractor's superintendent and other key personnel are to attend the meeting. Other individuals may be requested to attend to discuss specific matters. d. Notify the OAR of any specific items to be discussed a minimum of 1 week prior to the meeting. 2. Provide information as requested by the OAR or Owner concerning this Project. Prepare to discuss: a. Status of overall Project schedule. b. Contractor's detailed schedule for the next month. c. Anticipated delivery dates for equipment. d. Coordination with the Owner. e. Status of documents. f. Information or clarification of the Contract Documents. g. Claims and proposed Modifications to the Contract. h. Field observations, problems, or conflicts. i. Maintenance of quality standards. 3. OAR will prepare minutes of meetings. Review the minutes of the meeting and notify the OAR of any discrepancies within 10 days of the date of the meeting memorandum. The minutes will not be corrected after the 10 days have expired. Corrections will be reflected in the minutes of the following meeting or as an attachment to the minutes. C. Pre-Submittal and Pre-Installation Meetings: 1. Conduct pre-submittal and pre-installation meetings as required in the individual technical Specifications or as determined necessary by the OAR (for example, instrumentation, roofing, concrete mix design, etc.). 2. Set the time and location of the meetings when ready to proceed with the associated Work. Submit a Notification by Contractor in accordance with Paragraph 20.07 for the meeting 2 weeks before the meeting. OPT must approve of the proposed time and location. 3. Attend the meeting and require the participation of appropriate Subcontractors and Suppliers in the meeting. General Conditions 00 72 00-90 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 4. Prepare minutes of the meeting and submit to the OPT for review. OPT will review the minutes of the meeting and notify the Contractor of any discrepancies within 10 days of the date of the meeting memorandum. The minutes will not be corrected after the 10 days have expired. Corrections will be reflected in a revised set of meeting minutes. 20.05 Requests for Information A. Submit Request for Information (RFI) to the OAR to obtain additional information or clarification of the Contract Documents. 1. Submit a separate RFI for each item on the form provided. 2. Attach adequate information to permit a written response without further clarification. OAR will return requests that do not have adequate information to the Contractor for additional information. Contractor is responsible for all delays resulting from multiple document submittals due to inadequate information. 3. A response will be made when adequate information is provided. Response will be made on the RFI form or in attached information. B. Response to an RFI is given to provide additional information, interpretation, or clarification of the requirements of the Contract Documents, and does not modify the Contract Documents. C. Designer will initiate a Request for a Change Proposal (RCP) per Article 12 if the RFI indicates that a Contract Modification is required. D. Use the Project Issues Log to document decisions made at meetings and actions to be taken in accordance with Paragraph 20.06. E. Use the Action Item Log to document assignments for actions to be taken in accordance with Paragraph 20.06. 20.06 Decision and Action Item Log A. OAR will maintain a Project Decision Log to document key decisions made at meetings, telephone conversation or Site visits using the format provided: 1. Review the log prior to each regular meeting. 2. Report any discrepancies to the OAR for correction or discussion at the next monthly meeting. B. OAR will maintain an Action Item log in conjunction with the Project Decision Log to track assignments made at meetings, telephone conversation, or Site visits using the format provided: 1. Review the Action Item Log prior to each regular meeting. 2. Report actions taken subsequent to the previous progress meeting on items in the log assigned to the Contractor or through the Contractor to a Subcontractor or Supplier to the OAR. Report on status of progress 1 week prior to each progress meeting established in Paragraph 20.04 to allow OAR to update the log prior to the Progress meetings. 3. Be prepared to discuss the status at each meeting. General Conditions 00 72 00-91 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 C. Decisions or action items in the log that require a change in the Contract Documents will have the preparation of a Modification as an action item if appropriate. The Contract Documents can only be changed by a Modification. 20.07 Notification By Contractor A. Notify the OAR of: 1. Need for testing. 2. Intent to work outside regular working hours. 3. Request to shut down facilities or utilities. 4. Proposed utility connections. 5. Required observation by OAR, Designer, or inspection agencies prior to covering Work. 6. Training. B. Provide notification a minimum of 2 weeks in advance in order to allow OPT time to respond appropriately to the notification. C. Use "Notification by Contractor" form provided. 20.08 Record Documents A. Maintain at the Site one complete set of printed Record Documents including: 1. Drawings. 2. Specifications. 3. Addenda. 4. Modifications. 5. Record Data and approved Shop Drawings. 6. Construction photographs. 7. Test Reports. 8. Clarifications and other information provided in Request for Information responses. 9. Reference standards. B. Store printed Record Documents and Samples in the Contractor's field office. 1. Record Documents are to remain separate from documents used for construction. 2. Provide files and racks for the storage of Record Documents. 3. Provide a secure storage space for the storage of Samples. 4. Maintain Record Documents in clean, dry, legible conditions, and in good order. 5. Make Record Documents and Samples available at all times for inspection by the OPT. C. Maintain a digital record of Specifications and Addenda to identify products provided in PDF format. General Conditions 00 72 00-92 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 1. Reference the Record Data number, Shop Drawings number,and O&M manual number for each product and item of equipment furnished or installed. 2. Reference Modifications by type and number for all changes. D. Maintain a digital record of Drawings in PDF format. 1. Reference the Record Data number, Shop Drawings number,and O&M manual number for each product and item of equipment furnished or installed. 2. Reference Modifications by type and number for all changes. 3. Record information as construction is being performed. Do not conceal any Work until the required information is recorded. 4. Mark Drawings to record actual construction, including the following: a. Depths of various elements of the foundation in relation to finished first floor datum or the top of walls. b. Horizontal and vertical locations of underground utilities and appurtenances constructed and existing utilities encountered during construction. C. Location of utilities and appurtenances concealed in the Work. Refer measurements to permanent structures on the surface. Include the following equipment: 1) Piping. 2) Ductwork. 3) Equipment and control devices requiring periodic maintenance or repair. 4) Valves, unions,traps, and tanks. 5) Services entrance. 6) Feeders. 7) Outlets. d. Changes of dimension and detail. e. Changes by Modifications. f. Information in Request for Information or included in the Project Issues Log. g. Details not on the original Drawings. Include field verified dimensions and clarifications, interpretations, and additional information issued in response to RFIs. 5. Mark Drawings with the following colors: a. Highlight references to other documents, including Modifications in blue; b. Highlight mark ups for new or revised Work(lines added) in yellow; C. Highlight items deleted or not installed (lines to be removed) in red; and d. Highlight items constructed per the Contract Documents in green. General Conditions 00 72 00-93 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 6. Submit Record Documents to Designer for review and acceptance 30 days prior to Final Completion of the Project. E. Applications for Payment will not be recommended for payment if Record Documents are found to be incomplete or not in order. Final payment will not be recommended without complete Record Documents. ARTICLE 21—QUALITY MANAGEMENT 21.01 Contractor's Responsibilities A. Review the OPT's Quality Management Program and prepare and submit the Contractor's Quality Control Plan. B. Implement the Contractor's Quality Control Plan to control the quality of the Work and verify that the Work meets the standards of quality established in the Contract Documents. 1. Inspect products to be incorporated into the Project. Ensure that Suppliers have adequate quality control systems to ensure that products that comply with the Contract Documents are provided. 2. Integrate quality control measures into construction activities to produce Work which meets quality expectations of the Contract Documents. Inspect the Work of the Contractor, Subcontractors, and Suppliers. Correct Defective Work. 3. Provide and pay for the services of an approved professional materials testing laboratory acceptable to the OPT to provide testing that demonstrates that products proposed in Shop Drawings and Record Data for the Project fully comply with the Contract Documents. 4. Provide facilities, equipment, and Samples required for quality control inspections and tests: a. Give the OAR adequate notice before proceeding with Work that would interfere with inspections or testing; b. Notify the OAR and testing laboratories prior to the time that testing is required, providing adequate lead time to allow arrangements for inspections or testing to be made; C. Do not proceed with any Work that would impact the ability to correct defects or Work that would require subsequent removal to correct defects until testing services have been performed and results of tests indicate that the Work is acceptable; d. Cooperate fully with the performance of sampling, inspection, and testing; e. Provide personnel to assist with sampling or to assist in making inspections and field tests; f. Obtain and handle Samples for testing at the Site or at the production source of the product to be tested; g. Provide adequate quantities of representative products to be tested to the laboratory at the designated locations; General Conditions 00 72 00-94 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 h. Provide facilities required to store and cure test Samples; i. Provide calibrated scales and measuring devices for the OPT's use in performing inspections and testing; j. Provide adequate lighting to allow OPT observations; and k. Make Contract Documents available to testing agencies when requested. 5. Provide safe access for all inspection and testing activities, including those to be conducted as part of the OPT's Quality Management Program. 6. Document Defective Work through Certified Test Reports and Defective Work Notices. Document that corrective actions have been taken to correct any defects and that corrected Work is in compliance with the Contract Documents. 7. Apply quality control measures to documentation provided for the Project. 8. Implement countermeasures to prevent future Defective Work. C. Perform tests as indicated in this and other Sections of the Specifications. Technical Specifications govern if any testing and inspection requirements of this Section conflict with the testing and inspection requirements of the technical Specifications. D. All verification testing is to be observed by the OAR or designated representative. E. Send test reports to the OAR and the Designer. F. Provide an update on quality control activities at monthly progress meetings. G. Owner will withhold payment for Defective Work, or Work that has not been tested or inspected in accordance with the Contractor's Quality Control Plan,the OPT's Quality Control Program, or the Contract Documents. H. Owner will withhold payment for additional testing fees incurred due to Contractor noncompliance with OPT's Quality Control Program, including retesting fees, standby time, cancellation charges, and trip fees for retesting or cancellations. I. Work performed that is connected or adjacent to Defective Work or Work that would have to be removed to correct Defective Work is also considered to be Defective. Contractor is responsible for all cost with replacing any acceptable Work that must be removed or might be damaged by corrective actions. 21.02 Quality Management Activities by OPT A. OPT will perform its own quality assurance tests independent of the Contractor's Quality Control Program. Assist the OPT and testing organizations in performing quality assurance activities per Paragraph 21.01. B. Quality assurance testing performed by the OPT will be paid for by the Owner, except for verification testing required per Paragraph 21.07. C. Quality assurance activities of the OPT, through their own forces or through contracts with consultants and materials testing laboratories are for the purpose of monitoring the results of the Contractor's Work to see that it is in compliance with the requirements of the Contract Documents. Quality assurance activities or non-performance of quality assurance activities by the OPT do not: General Conditions 00 72 00-95 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 1. Relieve the Contractor of its responsibility to provide Work or furnish products that conform with the requirements of the Contract Documents; 2. Relieve the Contractor of its responsibility for providing adequate quality control measures; 3. Relieve the Contractor of its responsibility for damage to or loss of Work or products before OPT's acceptance; 4. Constitute or imply OPT's acceptance; and 5. Affect the continuing rights of the Owner after OPT's acceptance of the completed Work. D. Work is subject to OPT's quality assurance observations or testing at any time. Products which have been tested or inspected and approved by OPT at a supply source or staging area may be inspected or tested again by the OPT before, during or after incorporation into the Work and rejected if products do not comply with the Contract Documents. 21.03 Contractor's Use of OPT's Test Reports A. OPT has prepared a Quality Management Plan that describes, in general, the OPT's anticipated quality assurance testing program for this Project. This testing program will be made available to Bidders during the bidding phase. This plan outlines only the testing in general terms and may not reflect actual testing. Actual testing will depend on the Contractors means, methods and procedures of construction which will not be known until the Contractor begins Work and submits their own Quality Control Plan for review. There is no guarantee that all testing will be performed. B. Contractor will receive copies of all test reports documenting OPT's quality assurance activities. Contractor is entitled to rely on the accuracy of these test results and use these as part of their quality control efforts. C. Contractor is to determine additional testing or inspections that may be required to implement the Contractor's Quality Control Plan. Include cost for additional testing and inspections required to meet Contractors quality control obligations, including the cost for correcting Defective Work in the Contract Price. D. Contractor may submit a Change Proposal if OPT's quality assurance testing program deviates significantly from the OPT's Quality Management Plan, and Contractor can demonstrate that additional cost was incurred to implement the Contractor's Quality Control Plan resulting from these deviations. 21.04 Documentation A. Provide documentation which includes: 1. Contractor's Quality Management Plan that establishes the methods of assuring compliance with the Contract Documents. Submit this plan as a Shop Drawings per Article 25. 2. A Statement of Qualification for any proposed testing laboratories that includes a list of the engineers and technical staff that will provide testing services on the Project, descriptions of the qualifications of these individuals, list of tests that can be performed, General Conditions 00 72 00-96 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 equipment used with date of last certification, and a list of recent projects for which testing has been performed with references for those projects. 3. Provide Certified Test Reports for products to be incorporated into the Project. Provide reports to indicate that proposed products comply with the Contract Documents or indicate that proposed products do not comply with the Contract Documents and why it does not comply. Submit these test reports as part of a Shop Drawings submitted per Article 25. 4. Provide Certified Test Reports for inspection and testing required in this Section and in other Specification Sections. Provide reports to indicate that Work complies with the Contract Documents or indicate that Work does not comply with the Contract Documents and why it does not comply. Submit these test reports on forms provided per Article 24. 21.05 Standards A. Provide testing laboratories that comply with the American Council of Independent Laboratories (ACIL) "Recommended Requirements for Independent Laboratory Qualifications." B. Perform testing per recognized test procedures as listed in the various Sections of the Specifications, standards of the State Department of Highways and Public Transportation, American Society of Testing Materials (ASTM), or other testing associations. Perform tests in accordance with published procedures for testing issued by these organizations. 21.06 Delivery and Storage A. Handle and protect test specimens of products and construction materials at the Site in accordance with recognized test procedures. Provide facilities for storing, curing, and processing test specimens as required by test standard to maintain the integrity of Samples. 21.07 Verification Testing for Corrected Defects A. Provide verification testing on Work performed to correct Defective Work to demonstrate that the Work is now in compliance with the Contract Documents. Document that Defective Work has been corrected and verify that the OAR closes the item in the Defective Work Register. B. Pay for verification testing. OPT may perform verification testing as part of their Quality Management Program and impose a Set-off to recover the cost for this testing. C. Conduct the same tests or inspections used to determine that the original Work was Defective. Different tests or methods may be used if approved by the OPT. 21.08 Test Reports A. Certified Test Reports are to be prepared for all tests. 1. Tests performed by testing laboratories may be submitted on their standard test report forms if acceptable to the OPT. These reports must include the following: a. Name of the Owner, Project title and number and Contractor; General Conditions 00 72 00-97 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 b. Name of the laboratory, address, and telephone number; C. Name and signature of the laboratory personnel performing the test; d. Description of the product being sampled or tested; e. Date and time of sampling, inspection, and testing; f. Date the report was issued; g. Description of the test performed; h. Weather conditions and temperature at time of test or sampling; i. Location at the Site or structure where the sample was taken; j. Standard or test procedure used in making the test; k. A description of the results of the test; I. Statement of compliance or non-compliance with the Contract Documents; and m. Interpretations of test results, if appropriate. 2. Submit reports on tests performed by Contractor, Subcontractors or Suppliers on the forms provided by the OAR. 3. OPT will prepare test reports on test performed by the OPT. B. Send test report to Designer within 24 hours of completing the test. Flag tests reports with results that do not comply with Contract Documents for immediate attention. C. Payment for Work may be withheld until test reports indicate that the Work is not Defective. 21.09 Defective Work A. Immediately correct any Defective Work or notify the OAR why the Work is not to be corrected immediately and when corrective action will be completed. B. No payment will be made for Defective Work. Remove Work from the Application for Payment if Work paid for on a previous Application for Payment is found to be Defective. 21.10 Limitation of Authority of Testing Laboratory A. The testing laboratory representatives are limited to providing testing services and interpreting the results of the test performed. B. The testing laboratory is not authorized to: 1. Alter the requirements of the Contract Documents; 2. Accept or reject any portion of the Work; 3. Perform any of the duties of the Contractor; or 4. Direct or stop the Work. 21.11 Quality Control Plan A. Submit the Contractor's Quality Control Plan for approval as a Shop Drawing per Article 25. Use Contractor's Quality Control Plan Checklist provided to review the document before General Conditions 00 72 00-98 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 submitting and include a copy of the completed checklist with the Contractor's Quality Control Plan. Do not begin Work until the Contractor's Quality Control Plan is approved. Submit an interim plan covering only the portion of Work to be performed if the Contractor plans to begin Work prior to submitting the Contractor's Quality Control Plan for the Project. Do not begin Work on other parts of the Project until the Contractor's Quality Control Plan is approved or another interim plan covering the additional Work to be started is approved. B. Provide a Contractor's Quality Control Plan that incorporates construction operations at both the Site and production Work at remote locations and includes Work by Subcontractors and Suppliers. The Contractor's Quality Control Plan is to include: 1. A description of the quality control organization, including an organization chart showing lines of authority to control the quality of Work; 2. Documentation describing name, qualifications (in resume format), duties, responsibilities, and level of authority of the Quality Control Manager; 3. The name, qualifications (in resume format), duties, responsibilities, and authorities of other persons assigned a quality control function; 4. Procedures for scheduling, reviewing, certifying, and managing documentation, including documentation provided by Subcontractors and Suppliers; 5. Control,verification, and acceptance testing procedures for each specific test. Include: a. Name of tests to be performed, b. Specification paragraph requiring test, C. Parameters of Work to be tested, d. Test frequency, e. Persons responsible for each test, and f. Applicable industry testing standards and laboratory facilities to be used for the test; 6. Integrate the OPT quality assurance testing into the Contractor's Quality Control Plan, specifically identifying the tests or inspections in Paragraph 21.11.13.5 that will be provided by the OPT as part of their Quality Management Program; 7. Procedures for tracking and documenting quality management efforts. 8. Procedures for tracking Defective Work from initial identification through acceptable corrective action. Indicate how documentation of the verification process for deficiencies will be made. 9. Reporting procedures which incorporate the use of forms provided by the OAR. 10. The name of the proposed testing laboratories along with documentation of qualifications per Paragraph 21.04. C. The Quality Control Manager must have authority to reject Defective Work and redirect the efforts of the Contractor's Team to prevent or correct Defective Work. D. Notify the Designer of any changes to the Contractor's Quality Control Plan or quality control personnel. General Conditions 00 72 00-99 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 E. Meet with the OPT 7 days after Contractor's Quality Control Plan is submitted and before start of construction to discuss the Contractor's Quality Control Plan and expedite its approval. 21.12 Implement Contractor's Quality Control Plan A. Perform quality control observations and testing as required in each Section of the Specifications and where indicated on the Drawings. B. Include the following phases for each definable Work task. A definable Work task is one which is separate and distinct from other tasks, has separate control requirements, may be provided by different trades or disciplines, or may be Work by the same trade in a different environment. 1. Planning Phase: Perform the following before beginning each definable Work task: a. Review the Contract Drawings. b. Review documents and determine that they are complete in accordance with the Contract Documents. c. Check to assure that all materials and/or equipment have been tested, submitted, and approved. d. Examine the work area to assure that all required preliminary Work has been completed and complies with the Contract Documents. e. Examine required materials, equipment, and Sample Work to assure that they are on hand, conform to Shop Drawings and Record Data, and are properly stored. f. Review requirements for quality control inspection and testing. g. Discuss procedures for controlling quality of the Work. Document construction tolerances and workmanship standards for the Work task. h. Check that the portion of the plan for the Work to be performed incorporates document review comments. i. Discuss results of planning phase with the OAR. Conduct a meeting attended by the Quality Control Manager, the OAR, superintendent, other quality control personnel as applicable, and the foreman responsible for the Work task. Instruct applicable workers as to the acceptable level of workmanship required in order to meet the requirements of the Contract Documents. Document the results of the preparatory phase actions by separate meeting minutes prepared by the Quality Control Manager and attached to the quality control report. j. Do not move to the next phase unless results of investigations required for the planning phase indicate that requirements have been met. 2. Work Phase: Complete this phase after the Planning Phase: a. Notify the OAR at least 24 hours in advance of beginning the Work and discuss the review of the planning effort to indicate that requirements have been met. b. Check the Work to ensure that it is in full compliance with the Contract Documents. General Conditions 00 72 00-100 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 c. Verify adequacy of controls to ensure full compliance with Contract Documents. Verify required control inspection and testing is performed. d. Verify that established levels of workmanship meet acceptable workmanship standards. Compare with required Sample panels as appropriate. e. Repeat the Work phase for each new crew to work on-site, or any time acceptable specified quality standards are not being met. 3. Follow-up Phase: Perform daily checks to assure control activities, including control testing, are providing continued compliance with contract requirements: a. Make checks daily and record observations in the quality control documentation. b. Conduct follow-up checks and correct all deficiencies prior to the start of additional Work tasks that may be affected by the Defective Work. Do not build upon nor conceal Defective Work. c. Conduct a review of the Work with the OPT one month prior to the expiration of the correction period. Correct defects as noted during the review. C. Conduct additional planning and Work phases if: 1. The quality of on-going Work is unacceptable; 2. Changes are made in applicable quality control staff, on-site production supervision or crews; 3. Work on a task is resumed after a substantial period of inactivity; or 4. Other quality problems develop. ARTICLE 22—FINAL RESOLUTION OF DISPUTES 22.01 Senior Level Negotiations A. Each party is required to continue to perform its obligations under the Contract pending the final resolution of any dispute arising out of or relating to the Contract, unless it would be impossible or impracticable under the circumstances then present. B. All negotiations pursuant to Article 22 are confidential and shall be treated as compromise and settlement negotiations for purposes of applicable rules of evidence. C. Before invoking mediation, Owner and Contractor agree that they first shall try to resolve any dispute arising out of or related to this Contract through discussions directly between those senior management representatives within their respective organizations who have overall managerial responsibility for similar projects. Both Owner and Contractor agree that this step shall be a condition precedent to use of any other alternative dispute resolution process. If the parties' senior management representatives cannot resolve the dispute within 45 calendar days after a party delivers a written notice of such dispute to the other, then the parties shall proceed with mediation. 22.02 Mediation A. In the event that Owner and/or Contractor contend that the other has committed a material breach of the Contract or the parties cannot reach a resolution of a claim or dispute pursuant General Conditions 00 72 00-101 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 to Article 13, as a condition precedent to filing a lawsuit,either party shall request mediation of the dispute with the following requirements: 1. The request for mediation shall be in writing and shall request that the mediation commence not less than 30 calendar days or more than 90 calendar days following the date of the request, except upon agreement of the parties. 2. In the event Owner and Contractor are unable to agree to a date for the mediation or to the identity of the mediator within 30 calendar days following the date of the request for mediation, all conditions precedent shall be deemed to have occurred. 3. Owner and Contractor are to each pay one-half of the mediator's fees and costs.Venue for any mediation or lawsuit filed under this Contract shall be in Nueces County,Texas. Any agreement reached in mediation shall be enforceable as a settlement in any court having jurisdiction thereof. 4. Nothing in this Contract shall be construed as consent to a lawsuit. No provision of the Contract shall waive any immunity or defense. ARTICLE 23—MINORITY/MBE/DBE PARTICIPATION POLICY 23.01 Policy A. It is the policy of the City of Corpus Christi that maximum opportunity is afforded minorities, women, low income persons and Minority/Disadvantaged Business Enterprises (M/DBE) to participate in the performance of contracts awarded by the City of Corpus Christi in support of Equal Employment Opportunity goals and objectives. In accordance with such policy,the City has established goals, as stated herein, both for minority and female participation by trade and for Minority Business Enterprise. 23.02 Definitions A. Prime Contractor: Any person, firm, partnership, corporation, association, or joint venture as herein provided which has been awarded a City contract. B. Subcontractor: Any named person, firm, partnership, corporation, association, or joint venture herein identified as providing work, labor, services, supplies, equipment, materials, or any combination of the foregoing under contract with a prime contractor on a City contract. C. Minority/Disadvantaged Business Enterprise: A business enterprise that is owned and controlled by one or more minority person(s) or socially and economically disadvantaged individual(s). Minority/Disadvantaged person(s) must collectively own, operate and/or actively manage, and share in payments from such an enterprise in the manner hereinafter set forth: 1. Owned: a. For a sole proprietorship to be deemed a minority business enterprise, it must be owned by a minority person. b. For an enterprise doing business as a partnership, at least 51 percent of the assets or interest in the partnership property must be owned by one or more minority person(s). General Conditions 00 72 00-102 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 C. For an enterprise doing business as a corporation, at least 51 percent of the assets or interest in the corporate shares must be owned by one or more minority person(s). 2. Controlled: a. The primary power, direct or indirect,to manage a business enterprise rests with a minority person(s). 3. Share in Payments: a. Minority partners, proprietors, or stockholders of the business enterprise must be entitled to receive 51 percent or more of the total profits, bonuses, dividends, interest payments, commissions, consulting fees, rents, procurement, and subcontract payments, and any other monetary distribution paid by the business enterprise. D. Minority: Minority persons include Blacks, Mexican-Americans and other persons of Hispanic origin, American Indians, Alaskan Natives, and Asians or Pacific Islanders. For the purposes of this policy,women are also considered as minorities. E. Socially and economically disadvantaged individual:Any individual who is a citizen (or lawfully admitted permanent resident) of the United States and who has been subjected to racial or ethnic prejudice or cultural bias within American society because of his or her identity as a member of a group and without regard to his or her individual qualities.The social disadvantage must stem from circumstances beyond the individual's control. F. Female Owned Business Enterprise: A sole proprietorship that is owned and controlled by a woman,a partnership at least 51 percent of whose assets or partnership interests are owned by one or more women, or a corporation at least 51 percent of whose assets or interests in the corporate shares are owned by one or more women. G. Joint Venture: A joint venture means an association of two or more persons, partnerships, corporations, or any combination thereof, founded to carry on a single business activity which is limited in scope and direction. The degree to which a joint venture may satisfy the stated MBE goal cannot exceed the proportionate interest of the MBE as a member of the joint venture in the Work to be performed by the joint venture. For example,a joint venture which is to perform 50 percent of the Work itself and in which a minority joint venture partner has a 50 percent interest, shall be deemed equivalent to having minority participation in 25 percent of the Work. Minority members of the joint venture must have financial, managerial, or technical skills in the Work to be performed by the joint venture. 23.03 Goals A. The goals for participation by minorities and Minority Business Enterprises expressed in percentage terms for the Contractor's aggregate workforce on all construction Work for the Contract award shall be 1. Minority participation goal is 45%. 2. Minority Business Enterprise participation goal is 15%. B. These goals are applicable to all the construction work (regardless of federal participation) performed in the Contract, including approved Change Orders. The hours of minority General Conditions 00 72 00-103 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 employment must be substantially uniform throughout the length of the Contract and in each trade. The transfer of minority employees from Contractor to Contractor or from project to project for the sole purpose of meeting the Contractor's percentage is prohibited. 23.04 Compliance A. Upon completion of the Project, a final breakdown of MBE participation, substantiated by copies of paid invoices, shall be submitted by the Contractor to the City Engineer. B. Make bi-weekly payroll submittals to the City Engineer. The Contractor is to indicate the percent of minority and female participation, by trade, which has been utilized on the Project. Along with the request for final payment on the Project,the Contractor will indicate, in writing, the overall participation in these areas which have been achieved. The City Engineer may withhold monthly or final payments to the Contractor for failure to submit bi- weekly payrolls in a timely fashion or to submit overall participation information as required. ARTICLE 24—DOCUMENT MANAGEMENT 24.01 Work Included A. Submit documentation as required by the Contract Documents and as reasonably requested by the OPT. 24.02 Quality Assurance A. Submit legible, accurate, complete documents presented in a clear, easily understood manner. Documents not meeting these criteria will be returned without review. 24.03 Contractor's Responsibilities A. Review documents prior to submitting. Make certifications as required by the Contract Documents and as indicated on forms provided. B. Provide a Schedule of Documents to list the documents that are to be submitted, the dates on which documents are to be sent to the Designer for review, and proposed dates that documents must be returned to comply with the Project schedule. Use the form provided for this list. C. Incorporate the dates for processing documents into the Progress Schedule required by Article 27. 1. Provide documents in accordance with the schedule so construction of the Project is not delayed. 2. Allow a reasonable time for the review of documents when preparing the Progress Schedule. Assume a 14 day review cycle for each document unless a longer period of time is indicated in the Contract Documents or agreed to by Designer and Contractor. 3. Schedule submittal of documents to provide all information for interrelated Work at one time. 4. Allow adequate time for processing documents so construction of the Project is not delayed. General Conditions 00 72 00-104 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 24.04 Document Submittal A. Submit documents through the Designer. Send all documents in digital format for processing. 1. Provide all information requested with a completed Document Transmittal form. Do not leave any blanks incomplete. If information is not applicable, enter NA in the space provided. 2. The Document Transmittal form is to be the first page in the document submitted. 3. Submit all documents in Portable Document Format (PDF). a. Create PDF documents from native format files unless files are only available from scanned documents. b. Rotate pages so that the top of each document appears at the top of the monitor screen when opened in PDF viewing software. c. Submit PDF document with adequate resolution to allow documents to be printed in a format equivalent to the document original. Documents are to be scalable to allow printing on standard 8-1/2 x 11 or 11 x 17 paper. d. Submit color PDF documents where color is required to interpret the document. e. Create or convert documents to allow text to be selected for comments or searched using text search features. Run scanned documents through Optical Character Recognition (OCR) software if necessary. f. Flatten markups in documents to prevent markups made by Contractor from being moved or deleted. Flatten documents to allow markup recovery. g. Use software to reduce file size using default settings except the option for "Drop Metadata." Uncheck the "Drop Metadata" box when reducing file size. h. Add footers to each document with the Project name. 24.05 Document Numbering A. Assign a number to the documents originated to allow tracking of the documents during the review process. 1. Assign the number consisting of a prefix, a sequence number, and a letter suffix. Prefixes shall be as follows: Prefix Description Originator AP Application for Payment Contractor CO Change Order OAR CID Change Proposal Contractor CTR Certified Test Report Contractor FO Field Order OAR NBC Notification by Contractor Contractor PD Photographic Documentation Contractor General Conditions 00 72 00-105 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 Prefix Description Originator RCP Request for a Change Proposal OAR RD Record Data Contractor RFI Request for Information Contractor SD Shop Drawing Contractor SCH Schedule of Progress Contractor 2. Issue sequence numbers in chronological order for each type of document. 3. Issue numbers for resubmittals that have the same number as the original document followed by an alphabetical suffix indicating the number of times the same document has been sent to the Designer for processing. For example: SD 025 A represents Shop Drawing number 25 and the letter "A" designates that this is the second time this document has been sent for review. 4. Clearly note the document number on each page or sheet of the document. 5. Correct assignment of numbers is essential since different document types are processed in different ways. B. Include reference to the Drawing number and/or Specification Section, detail designation, schedule, or location that corresponds with the data on the document transmittal forms. Other identification may also be required, such as layout drawings or schedules to allow the reviewer to determine where a particular product is to be used. 24.06 Document Requirements A. Furnish documents as indicated below or in individual Specification Sections. Submit documents per the procedures described in the Contract Documents. B. Submit documents per the Specification Section shown in the following table: Document Type Section Application for Payment Article 17 Change Proposal Article 12 Certified Test Report Article 25 for approval of product Article 21 to demonstrate compliance Notification by Contractor Article 20 Photographic Documentation Article 28 Progress Schedules Article 27 Record Data Article 26 Request for Information Article 20 Shop Drawing Article 25 Schedule of Values Article 17 Substitutions Article 12 General Conditions 00 72 00-106 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 Document Type Section Suppliers and Subcontractors Articles 20 and 26 ARTICLE 25—SHOP DRAWINGS 25.01 Work Included A. Shop Drawings are required for those products that cannot adequately be described in the Contract Documents to allow fabrication, erection, or installation of the product without additional detailed information from the Supplier. B. Submit Shop Drawings as required by the Contract Documents and as reasonably requested by the OPT to: 1. Record the products incorporated into the Project for the Owner; 2. Provide detailed information for the products proposed for the Project regarding their fabrication, installation, commissioning, and testing; and 3. Allow the Designer to advise the Owner if products proposed for the Project by the Contractor conform, in general,to the design concepts of the Contract Documents. C. Contractor's responsibility for full compliance with the Contract Documents is not relieved by the review of Shop Drawings, Samples, or mockups. Contract modifications can only be approved by Change Order or Field Order. 25.02 Quality Assurance A. Submit legible, accurate, and complete documents presented in a clear, easily understood manner. Shop Drawings not meeting these criteria will be rejected. B. Demonstrate that the proposed products are in full and complete compliance with the design criteria and requirements of the Contract Documents or will be if deviations requested per Paragraph 25.10 are approved. C. Furnish and install products that fully comply with the information included in the document submittal. 25.03 Contractor's Responsibilities A. Provide Shop Drawings as required by Paragraph 25.03 of the Supplementary Conditions. B. Include Shop Drawings in the Schedule of Documents required by Article 24 to indicate the Shop Drawings to be submitted,the dates on which documents are to be sent to the Designer for review and proposed dates that the product will be incorporated into the Project. C. Incorporate the dates for processing Shop Drawings into the Progress Schedule required by Article 27. 1. Submit Shop Drawings in accordance with the schedule so construction of the Project is not delayed. 2. Allow a reasonable time for the review of Shop Drawings when preparing the Progress Schedule. Include time for making revisions to the Shop Drawings and resubmitting the Shop Drawing for a least a second review. Assume a 14-day review cycle for each time General Conditions 00 72 00-107 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 a Shop Drawing is submitted for review unless a longer period of time is indicated in the Contract Documents. 3. Schedule document submittals to provide all information for interrelated Work at one time. 4. Allow adequate time for ordering, fabricating, delivering, and installing product so construction of the Project is not delayed. D. Complete the following before submitting a Shop Drawing or Sample: 1. Prepare Shop Drawing Review and coordinate the Shop Drawing or Sample with other Shop Drawings and Samples and with the requirements of the Work and the Contract Documents; 2. Determine and verify specified performance and design criteria, installation requirements, materials,catalog numbers, and similar information with respect to Shop Drawings and Samples; 3. Determine and verify the suitability of materials and equipment offered with respect to the indicated application, fabrication, shipping, handling, storage, assembly, and installation pertaining to the performance of the Work; and 4. Determine and verify information relative to Contractor's responsibilities for means, methods, techniques, sequences, and procedures of construction, and safety precautions and programs incident thereto. E. Determine and verify: 1. Accurate field measurements, quantities, and dimensions are shown on the Shop Drawings; 2. Location of existing structures, utilities, and equipment related to the Shop Drawing have been shown and conflicts between the products existing structures, utilities, and equipment have been identified; 3. Conflicts that impact the installation of the products have been brought to the attention of the OPT through the Designer; 4. Shop Drawings are complete for their intended purpose; and 5. Conflicts between the Shop Drawings related to the various Subcontractors and Suppliers have been resolved. F. Review Shop Drawings prior to submitting to the Designer. Certify that all Shop Drawings have been reviewed by the Contractor and are in strict conformance with the Contract Documents as modified by Addenda, Change Order, Field Order, or Contract Amendment when submitting Shop Drawings except for deviations specifically brought to the Designer's attention on an attached Shop Drawing Deviation Request form in accordance with Paragraph 25.09. G. Fabrication or installation of any products prior to the approval of Shop Drawings is done at the Contractor's risk. Defective products may be rejected at the Owner's option. H. Payment will not be made for products for which Shop Drawings or Samples are required until these are approved by the Designer. General Conditions 00 72 00-108 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 25.04 Shop Drawing Requirements A. Provide adequate information in Shop Drawings and Samples so Designer can: 1. Assist the Owner in selecting colors,textures, or other aesthetic features. 2. Compare the proposed features of the product with the specified features and advise Owner that the product does, in general, conform to the Contract Documents. 3. Compare the performance features of the proposed product with those specified and advise the Owner that the product does, in general,conform to the performance criteria specified in the Contract Documents. 4. Review required certifications, guarantees, warranties, and service agreements for compliance with the Contract Documents. B. Include a complete description of the product to be furnished, including: 1. Type, dimensions, size, arrangement, and operational characteristics of the product; 2. Weights,gauges,materials of construction,external connections,anchors,and supports required; 3. All applicable standards such as ASTM or Federal specification numbers; 4. Fabrication and installation drawings, setting diagrams, manufacturing instructions, templates, patterns, and coordination drawings; 5. Mix designs for concrete, asphalt, or other materials proportioned for the Project; and 6. Complete and accurate field measurements for products which must fit existing conditions. Indicate on the document submittal that the measurements represent actual dimensions obtained at the Site. C. Submit Shop Drawings that require coordination with other Shop Drawings at the same time. Shop Drawings requiring coordination with other Shop Drawings will be rejected until a complete package is submitted. 25.05 Special Certifications and Reports A. Provide all required certifications with the Shop Drawings as specified in the individual Specification Sections: 1. Certified Test Reports (CTR): A report prepared by an approved testing agency giving results of tests performed on products to indicate their compliance with the Specifications. This report is to demonstrate that the product when installed will meet the requirements and is part of the Shop Drawing. Field tests may be performed by the Owner to determine that in place materials or products meet the same quality as indicated in the CTR submitted as part of the Shop Drawing. 2. Certification of Local Field Service (CLS): A certified letter stating that field service is available from a factory or supplier approved service organization located within a 300 mile radius of the Site. List names, addresses, and telephone numbers of approved service organizations on or attach it to the certificate. 3. Certification of Adequacy of Design (CAD): A certified letter from the manufacturer of the equipment stating that they have designed the equipment to be structurally stable General Conditions 00 72 00-109 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 and to withstand all imposed loads without deformation, failure, or adverse effects to the performance and operational requirements of the unit. The letter shall state that mechanical and electrical equipment is adequately sized to be fully operational for the conditions specified or normally encountered by the product's intended use. 25.06 Warranties and Guarantees A. Provide all required warranties, guarantees, and related documents with the Shop Drawing. The effective date of warranties and guarantees will be the date of acceptance of the Work by the Owner. B. Identify all Extended Warranties, defined as any guarantee of performance for the product or system beyond the 1-year correction period described in the General Conditions. Issue the warranty certificate in the name of the Owner. Provide a Warranty Bond for Extended Warranties if required by Specification Sections. C. Provide a copy of all warranties in a separate document in accordance with Article 29. 25.07 Shop Drawing Submittal Procedures A. Submit Shop Drawings through the Designer. Send all documents in digital format for processing. 1. Provide all information requested in the Shop Drawing submittal form. Do not leave any blanks incomplete. If information is not applicable,enter NA in the space provided. The Shop Drawing submittal form is to be the first document in the file submitted. 2. Submit all documents in Portable Document Format(PDF). a. Create PDF documents from native format files unless files are only available from scanned documents. b. Rotate pages so that the top of each document appears at the top of the monitor screen when opened in PDF viewing software. c. Submit PDF document with adequate resolution to allow documents to be printed in a format equivalent to the document original. Documents are to be scalable to allow printing on standard 8-1/2 x 11 or 11 x 17 paper. d. Submit color PDF documents where color is required to interpret the Shop Drawing. Submit Samples and color charts per Paragraph 25.08.A. e. Create or convert documents to allow text to be selected for comments or searched using text search features. Run scanned documents through Optical Character Recognition (OCR) software if necessary. f. Flatten markups in documents to prevent markups made by Contractor from being moved or deleted. Flatten documents to allow markup recovery. g. Use software to reduce file size using default settings except the option for "Drop Metadata." Uncheck the "Drop Metadata" box when reducing file size. h. Add footers to each document with the Project name. General Conditions 00 72 00-110 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 3. Submit each specific product or class of material separately so these can be tracked and processed independently. Do not submit Shop Drawings for more than one product in the same Shop Drawing. 4. Submit items specified in different Specification Sections separately unless they are part of an integrated system. 5. Define abbreviations and symbols used in Shop Drawings. a. Use terms and symbols in Shop Drawings consistent with the Contract Drawings. b. Provide a list of abbreviations and their meaning as used in the Shop Drawings. c. Provide a legend for symbols used on Shop Drawings. 6. Mark Shop Drawings to reference: a. Related Specification Sections, b. Drawing number and detail designation, c. Product designation or name, d. Schedule references, e. System into which the product is incorporated, and f. Location where the product is incorporated into the Project. B. Use the following conventions to markup Shop Drawings for review: 1. Make comments and corrections in the color blue. Add explanatory comments to the markup. 2. Highlight items in black that are not being furnished when the Supplier's standard drawings or information sheets are provided so that only the products to be provided are in their original color. 3. Make comments in the color yellow where selections or decisions by the Designer are required, but such selections do not constitute a deviation from the Contract Documents. Add explanatory comments to the markup to indicate the action to be taken by the Designer. 4. Make comments in the color orange that are deviation requests. Include the deviation request number on the Shop Drawing that corresponds to the deviation request on the Shop Drawing Deviation Request form. Include explanatory comments in the Shop Drawing Deviation Request form. 5. Mark dimensions with the prefix FD to indicate field verified dimensions on the Shop Drawings. C. Submit a Change Proposal per Article 12 to request modifications to the Contract Documents, including those for approval of"or equal" products when specifically allowed by the Contract Documents or as a substitution for specified products or procedures. D. Designate a Shop Drawing as requiring priority treatment in the comment section of the Shop Drawing submittal form to place the review of the Shop Drawing ahead of other Shop Drawings previously delivered. Shop Drawings are typically reviewed in the order received, unless Contractor requests that a different priority be assigned. Priority Shop Drawings will General Conditions 00 72 00-111 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 be reviewed before other Shop Drawings for this Project already received but not yet reviewed. Use of this priority designation for Shop Drawings may delay the review of Shop Drawings previously submitted, pushing the processing of Shop Drawings beyond the 14-day target. Contractor is responsible for delays resulting from the use of the priority designation status on Shop Drawings. E. Complete the certification required by Paragraph 25.03. 25.08 Sample and Mockup Submittal Procedures A. Submit color charts and Samples for every product requiring color, texture, or finish selection. 1. Submit color charts and Samples only after Shop Drawings for the products have been approved. 2. Deliver all color charts and Samples at one time. 3. Provide Samples of adequate size to clearly illustrate the functional characteristics of the product, with integrally related parts and attachment devices. 4. Indicate the full range of color, texture, and patterns. 5. Deliver color charts and Samples to the field office and store for the duration of the Project 6. Notify the Designer that color charts and Samples have been delivered for approval using the Notification by Contractor form. 7. Submit color charts and Samples not less than 30 days prior to when these products are to be ordered or released for fabrication to comply with the Project schedule. 8. Remove Samples that have been rejected. Submit new Samples following the same process as for the initial Sample until Samples are approved. 9. Dispose of Samples when related Work has been completed and approved and disposal is approved by the Designer. At Owner's option, Samples will become the property of the Owner. B. Construct mockups for comparison with the Work being performed. 1. Construct mockups from the actual products to be used in construction per detailed Specification Sections. 2. Construct mockups of the size and in the area indicated in the Contract Documents. 3. Construct mockups complete with texture and finish to represent the finished product. 4. Notify the Designer that mockups have been constructed and are ready for approval using the Notification by Contractor form. Allow 2 weeks for OPT to approve of the mockup before beginning the Work represented by the mockup. 5. Remove mockups that have been rejected. Construct new mockups following the same process as for the initial mockup until mockup is approved. 6. Protect mockups until Work has been completed and accepted by the OPT. General Conditions 00 72 00-112 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 7. Dispose of mockups when related Work has been completed and disposal is approved by the Designer. 25.09 Equal Non Specified Products A. Contractor may submit other manufacturers' products that are in full compliance with the Specification where Specifications list one or more manufacturers followed by the phase "or equal" or"or approved equal." 1. Submit a Shop Drawing as required by this article to document that the proposed product is equal or superior to the specified product. 2. Prove that the product is equal. It is not the OPT's responsibility to prove the product is not equal. a. Indicate on a point by point basis for each specified feature that the product is equal to the Contract Document requirements. b. Make a direct comparison with the specified manufacturer's published data sheets and available information. Provide this printed material with the Shop Drawing. c. The decision of the Designer regarding the acceptability of the proposed product is final. 3. Provide a typewritten certification that, in furnishing the proposed product as an equal, the Contractor: a. Has thoroughly examined the proposed product and has determined that it is equal or superior in all respects to the product specified. b. Has determined that the product will perform in the same manner and result in the same process as the specified product. c. Will provide the same warranties and/or bonds as for the product specified. d. Will assume all responsibility to coordinate any modifications that may be necessary to incorporate the product into the construction and will waive all claims for additional Work which may be necessary to incorporate the product into the Project which may subsequently become apparent. e. Will maintain the same time schedule as for the specified product. 25.10 Requests for Deviation A. Submit requests for deviation from the Contract Documents for any product that does not fully comply with the Contract Documents. B. Submit requests for deviation using the Shop Drawing Deviation Request form provided. Identify each deviation request as a separate item. Include all requested deviations that must be approved as a group together and identify them as a single item. C. Include a description of why the deviation is required and the impact on Contract Price or Contract Times. Include the amount of any cost savings to the Owner for deviations that result in a reduction in cost. D. Submit as a Change Proposal prior to submitting the Shop Drawing if the deviation will result in a change in Contract Price or Contract Times. General Conditions 00 72 00-113 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 E. A Modification must be issued by the Designer for approval of a deviation. Approval of a requested Shop Drawing deviation by the Designer on the Shop Drawings Deviation Request form indicates approval of the requested deviation only on its technical merits as generally conforming to the Contract Documents. Deviations from the Contract Documents can only be approved by a Modification. 25.11 Designer Responsibilities A. Shop Drawings will be received by the Designer. Designer will log the documents and review per this Article for general conformance with the Contract Documents. 1. Designer's review and approval will be only to determine if the products described in the Shop Drawing or Sample will, after installation or incorporation into the Work, conform to the information given in the Contract Documents and be compatible with the design concept of the completed Project as a functioning whole as indicated by the Contract Documents. 2. Designer's review and approval will not extend to means, methods, techniques, sequences,or procedures of construction or to safety precautions or programs incident thereto. 3. Designer's review and approval of a separate item as such will not indicate approval of the assembly in which the item functions. B. Comments will be made on items called to the attention of the Designer for review and comment. Any marks made by the Designer do not constitute a blanket review of the document submittal or relieve the Contractor from responsibility for errors or deviations from the Contract requirements. 1. Designer will respond to Contractor's markups by either making markups directly in the Shop Drawings file using the color green or by attaching a Document Review Comments form with review comments. 2. Shop Drawings that are reviewed will be returned with one or more of the following status designations: a. Approved: Shop Drawing is found to be acceptable as submitted. b. Approved as Noted: Shop Drawing is Approved so long as corrections or notations made by Designer are incorporated into the Show Drawing. C. Not Approved: Shop Drawing or products described are not acceptable. 3. Shop Drawing will also be designated for one of the following actions: a. Final distribution: Shop Drawing is acceptable without further action and has been filed as a record document. b. Shop Drawing not required: A Shop Drawing was not required by the Contract Documents. Resubmit the document per Article 26. c. Cancelled: This action indicates that for some reason, the Shop Drawing is to be removed from consideration and all efforts regarding the processing of that document are to cease. General Conditions 00 72 00-114 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 d. Revise and resubmit: Shop Drawing has deviations from the Contract Documents, significant errors, or is inadequate and must be revised and resubmitted for subsequent review. e. Resubmit with corrections made: Shop Drawing is "Approved as Noted," but has significant markups. Make correction and notations to provide a revised document with markup incorporated into the original document so that no markups are required. f. Returned without review due to excessive deficiencies: Document does not meet the requirement of the Specifications for presentation or content to the point where continuing to review the document would be counterproductive to the review process or clearly does not meet the requirements of the Contract Documents. Revise the Shop Drawing to comply with the requirements of this Section and resubmit. g. Actions a through c will close out the Shop Drawing review process and no further action is required as a Shop Drawing. Actions d through f require follow up action to close out the review process. 4. Drawings with a significant or substantial number of markings by the Contractor may be marked "Approved as Noted" and "Resubmit with corrections made." These drawings are to be revised to provide a clean record of the Shop Drawing. Proceed with ordering products as the documents are revised. 5. Dimensions or other data that does not appear to conform to the Contract Documents will be marked as "At Variance With" (AVW) the Contract Documents or other information provided. The Contractor is to make revisions as appropriate to comply with the Contract Documents. C. Bring deviations to the Shop Drawings to the attention of the Designer for approval by using the Shop Drawing Deviation Request form. Use a single line for each requested deviation so the Status and Action for each deviation can be determined for that requested deviation. If approval or rejection of a requested deviation will impact other requested deviations, then all related deviations should be included in that requested deviation line so the status and action can be determined on the requested deviation as a whole. D. Requested deviations will be reviewed as possible Modification to the Contract Documents. 1. A Requested deviation will be rejected as "Not Approved" if the requested deviation is unacceptable. Contractor is to revise and resubmit the Shop Drawing with corrections for approval. 2. A Field Order will be issued by the Designer for deviations approved by the Designer if the requested deviation is acceptable and if the requested deviation will not result in a change in Contract Price or Contract Times. Requested deviations from the Contract Documents may only be approved by Field Order. 3. A requested deviation will be rejected if the requested deviation is acceptable but the requested deviation will or should result in a change in Contract Price or Contract Times. Submit any requested deviation that requires a change in Contract Price or Contract Times as a Change Proposal for approval prior to resubmitting the Shop Drawing. General Conditions 00 72 00-115 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 E. Contractor is to resubmit the Shop Drawing until it is acceptable and marked Approved or Approved as Noted and is assigned an action per Paragraph 25.11 that indicates that the Shop Drawing process is closed. F. Information that is submitted as a Shop Drawings that should be submitted as Record Data or other type of document, or is not required may be returned without review, or may be deleted. No further action is required and the Shop Drawing process for this document will be closed. 25.12 Resubmission Requirements A. Make all corrections or changes in the documents required by the Designer and resubmit to the Designer until approved. 1. Revise initial drawings or data and resubmit as specified for the original document. 2. Highlight or cloud in green those revisions which have been made in response to the previous reviews by the Designer. This will include changes previously highlighted or clouded in yellow to direct attention to Designer to items requiring selections or decisions by the Designer or highlighted or clouded in orange for a requested deviation from the Contract Documents. 3. Highlight and cloud new items in yellow where selections or decisions by the Designer are required, but such selections do not constitute a deviation from the Contract Documents. Add explanatory comments to the markup to indicate the action to be taken by the Designer. 4. Highlight and cloud new items in orange that are deviation requests. Include the deviation request number on the Shop Drawing that corresponds to the deviation request on the Shop Drawing Deviation Request form. Numbering for these new items is to start with the next number following the last Shop Drawing deviation requested. Include explanatory comments in the Shop Drawing Deviation Request form. B. Pay for excessive review of Shop Drawings. 1. Excessive review of Shop Drawings is defined as any review required after the original review has been made and the first resubmittal has been checked to see that corrections have been made. 2. Review of Shop Drawings or Samples will be an additional service requiring payment by the Contractor if the Contractor submits a substitution for a product for which a Shop Drawing or Sample has previously been approved, unless the need for such change is beyond the control of Contractor. 3. Cost for additional review time will be billed to the Owner by the Designer for the actual hours required for the review of Shop Drawings by Designer and in accordance with the rates listed in SECTION 00 73 00 SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS. 4. A Set-off will be included in each Application for Payment to pay costs for the additional review to the Owner on a monthly basis. The Set-off will be based on invoices submitted to Owner for these services. General Conditions 00 72 00-116 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 5. Need for more than one resubmission or any other delay of obtaining Designer's review of Shop Drawings will not entitle the Contractor to an adjustment in Contract Price or an extension of Contract Times. ARTICLE 26—RECORD DATA 26.01 Work Included A. Submit Record Data as required by the Contract Documents and as reasonably requested by the OPT. Provide Record Data for all products unless a Shop Drawing is required for the same item. B. Submit Record Data to provide documents that allow the Owner to: 1. Record the products incorporated into the Project for the Owner; 2. Review detailed information about the products regarding their fabrication,installation, commissioning, and testing; and 3. Provide replacement or repair of the products at some future date. C. Contractor's responsibility for full compliance with the Contract Documents is not relieved by the receipt or cursory review of Record Data. Contract modifications can only be approved by Change Order or Field Order. D. Provide various reports or other documents that Contract Documents require for record purposes. 26.02 Quality Assurance A. Submit legible, accurate, and complete documents presented in a clear, easily understood manner. Record Data not meeting these criteria will be rejected. 26.03 Contractor's Responsibilities A. Submit Record Data in accordance with SECTION 00 73 00 SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS. B. Include Record Data in the Schedule of Documents required by Article 24 to indicate the Record Data to be submitted,the dates on which documents are to be sent to the Designer for review, and proposed dates that the product will be incorporated into the Project. C. Complete the following before submitting Record Data: 1. Prepare Record Data and coordinate with Shop Drawings or Samples, other Record Data, and with the requirements of the Work and the Contract Documents; 2. Determine and verify specified performance and design criteria, installation requirements, materials, catalog numbers, and similar information; 3. Determine and verify the suitability of materials and equipment offered with respect to the indicated application, fabrication, shipping, handling, storage, assembly, and installation pertaining to the performance of the Work; and 4. Determine and verify information relative to Contractor's responsibilities for means, methods, techniques, sequences, and procedures of construction, and safety precautions and programs incident thereto. General Conditions 00 72 00-117 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 D. Determine and verify: 1. Accurate field measurements, quantities, and dimensions are shown on the Record Data; 2. Location of existing structures, utilities, and equipment related to the Record Data have been shown and conflicts between the products existing structures, utilities, and equipment have been identified; 3. Conflicts that impact the installation of the products have been brought to the attention of the OPT through the Designer; 4. Record Data are complete for their intended purpose; and 5. Conflicts between the Record Data related to the various Subcontractors and Suppliers have been resolved. E. Review Record Data prior to submitting to the Designer. Certify that all Record Data has been reviewed by the Contractor and is in strict conformance with the Contract Documents as modified by Addenda, Change Order, Field Order, or Contract Amendment when submitting Record Data. 26.04 Record Data Requirements A. Include a complete description of the material or equipment to be furnished, including: 1. Type,dimensions,size,arrangement,model number,and operational parameters of the components; 2. Weights,gauges,materials of construction,external connections,anchors,and supports required; 3. All applicable standards such as ASTM or Federal specification numbers; 4. Fabrication and installation drawings, setting diagrams, manufacturing instructions, templates, patterns, and coordination drawings; 5. Mix designs for concrete, asphalt or other materials proportioned for the Project; and 6. Complete and accurate field measurements for products which must fit existing conditions. Indicate on the document submittal that the measurements represent actual dimensions obtained at the Site. 26.05 Special Certifications and Reports A. Provide all required certifications with the Record Data as specified in the individual Specification Sections: 1. Certified Test Reports (CTR): A report prepared by an approved testing agency giving results of tests performed on products to indicate their compliance with the Specifications. This report is to demonstrate that the product when installed will meet the requirements and is part of the Record Data. Field tests may be performed by the Owner to determine that in place materials or products meet the same quality as indicated in the CTR submitted as part of the Record Data. General Conditions 00 72 00-118 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 26.06 Warranties and Guarantees A. Provide all required warranties, guarantees, and related documents with the Record Data. The effective date of warranties and guarantees will be the date of acceptance of the Work by the Owner. B. Identify all Extended Warranties, defined as any guarantee of performance for the product or system beyond the 1 year correction period described in the General Conditions. Issue the warranty certificate in the name of the Owner. Provide a Warranty Bond for Extended Warranties if required. C. Provide a copy of all warranties in a separate document in accordance with Article 29. 26.07 Record Data Submittal Procedures A. Submit Record Data through the Designer. Send all documents in digital format for processing. 1. Provide all information requested in the Record Data submittal form. Do not leave any blanks incomplete. If information is not applicable,enter NA in the space provided. The Record Data submittal form is to be the first document in the file. 2. Submit all documents in Portable Document Format (PDF). a. Create PDF documents from native format files unless files are only available from scanned documents. b. Rotate pages so that the top of each document appears at the top of the monitor screen when opened in PDF viewing software. c. Submit PDF document with adequate resolution to allow documents to be printed in a format equivalent to the document original. Documents are to be scalable to allow printing on standard 8-1/2 x 11 or 11 x 17 paper. d. Submit color PDF documents where color is required to interpret the Record Data. e. Create or convert documents to allow text to be selected for comments or searched using text search features. Run scanned documents through Optical Character Recognition (OCR) software if necessary. f. Flatten markups in documents to prevent markups made by Contractor from being moved or deleted. Flatten documents to allow markup recovery. g. Use software to reduce file size using default settings except the option for "Drop Metadata." Uncheck the "Drop Metadata" box when reducing file size. h. Add footers to each document with the Project name. 3. Submit each specific product, class of material, or product separately so these can be tracked and processed independently. Do not submit Record Data for more than one system in the same Record Data. 4. Submit items specified in different Specification Sections separately unless they are part of an integrated system. 5. Define abbreviations and symbols used in Record Data. General Conditions 00 72 00-119 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 a. Use terms and symbols in Record Data consistent with the Contract Drawings. b. Provide a list of abbreviations and their meaning as used in the Record Data. C. Provide a legend for symbols used on Record Data. 6. Mark Record Data to reference: a. Related Specification Sections, b. Drawing number and detail designation, c. Product designation or name, d. Schedule references, e. System into which the product is incorporated, and f. Location where the product is incorporated into the Project. B. Submit a Change Proposal per Article 12 to request modifications to the Contract Documents, including those for approval of"or equal" products when specifically allowed by the Contract Documents or as a substitution for specified products or procedures. Deviations from the Contract Documents can only be approved by a Modification. C. Complete the certification required by Paragraph 26.03. 26.08 Designer's Responsibilities A. Record Data will be received by the Designer, logged, and provided to Owner as the Project record. 1. Record Data may be reviewed to see that the information provided is adequate for the purpose intended. Record Data not meeting the requirements of Paragraph 26.02 may be rejected as unacceptable. 2. Record Data is not reviewed for compliance with the Contract Documents. Comments may be returned if deviations from the Contract Documents are noted during the cursory review performed to see that the information is adequate. 3. Contractor's responsibility for full compliance with the Contract Documents is not relieved by the review of Record Data. Contract modifications can only be approved by a Modification. B. Designer may take the following action in processing Record Data: 1. File Record Data as received if the cursory review indicates that the document meets the requirements of Paragraph 26.02. Document will be given the status of "Filed as Received" and no further action is required on that Record Data. 2. Reject the Record Data for one of the following reasons: a. The document submittal requirements of the Contract Documents indicate that the document submitted as Record Data should have been submitted as a Shop Drawing. The Record Data will be marked "Rejected" and "Submit Shop Drawing." No further action is required on this document as Record Data and the Record Data process will be closed. Resubmit the document as a Shop Drawing per Article 25. General Conditions 00 72 00-120 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 b. The cursory review indicates that the document does not meet the requirements of Paragraph 26.02. The Record Data will be marked "Rejected" and "Revise and Resubmit." Contractor is to resubmit the Record Data until it is acceptable and marked "Filed as Received." When Record Data is filed, no further action is required, and the Record Data process will be closed. c. The Record Data is not required by the Contract Documents nor is the Record Data applicable to the Project. The Record Data will be marked "Rejected" and "Cancel -Not Required." No further action is required,and the Record Data process will be closed. C. Contractor is to resubmit the Record Data until it is acceptable and marked "Filed as Received." ARTICLE 27—CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS SCHEDULE 27.01 Requirements A. Prepare and submit a Progress Schedule for the Work and update the schedule on a monthly basis for the duration of the Project. B. Provide schedule in adequate detail to allow Owner to monitor progress and to relate document processing to sequential activities of the Work. C. Incorporate and specifically designate the dates of anticipated submission of documents and the dates when documents must be returned to the Contractor into the schedule. D. Assume complete responsibility for maintaining the progress of the Work per the schedule submitted. E. Schedule Work based upon a six day work week. 27.02 Document Submittal A. Submit Progress Schedules in accordance with Article 24. B. Submit a preliminary schedule within 10 days after the Notice of Award. The schedule is to be available at the pre-construction conference. C. Submit a detailed schedule at least 10 days prior to the first payment request. D. Submit Progress Schedule updates monthly with Applications for Payment to indicate the progress made on the Project to that date. Failure to submit the schedule may cause delay in the review and approval of Applications for Payment. 27.03 Schedule Requirements A. Schedule is to be in adequate detail to: 1. Assure adequate planning, scheduling, and reporting during the execution of the Work; 2. Assure the coordination of the Work of the Contractor and the various Subcontractors and Suppliers; 3. Assist in monitoring the progress of the Work; and General Conditions 00 72 00-121 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 4. Assist in evaluating proposed changes to the Contract Times and Project schedule. B. Provide personnel with 5 years' minimum experience in scheduling construction work comparable to this Project. Prepare the schedule using acceptable scheduling software. C. Provide the schedule in the form of a computer generated critical path schedule which includes Work to be performed on the Project. It is intended that the schedule accomplish the following: 1. Give early warning of delays in time for correction. 2. Provide detailed plans for the execution of the Work in the form of future activities and events in sequential relationships. 3. Establish relationships of significant planned Work activities and provide a logical sequence for planned Work activities. 4. Provide continuous current status information. 5. Allow analysis of the Contractor's program for the completion of the Project. 6. Permit schedules to be revised when the existing schedule is not achievable. 7. Log the progress of the Work as it actually occurs. D. Prepare a time scaled CPM arrow or precedence diagram to indicate each activity and its start and stop dates. 1. Develop Milestone dates and Project completion dates to conform to time constraints, sequencing requirements and Contract completion date. 2. Use calendar day durations while accounting for holidays and weather conditions in the projection of the duration of each activity. 3. Clearly indicate the critical path for Work to complete the Project. E. Provide a time scaled horizontal bar chart which indicates graphically the Work scheduled at any time during the Project. The chart is to indicate: 1. Complete sequence of construction by activity; 2. Identification of the activity by structure, location, and type of Work; 3. Chronological order of the start of each item of Work; 4. The activity start and stop dates; 5. The activity duration; 6. Successor and predecessor relationships for each activity; 7. A clearly indicated single critical path; and 8. Projected percentage of completion, based on dollar value of the Work included in each activity as of the first day of each month. F. Provide a schedule incorporating the Schedule of Documents provided in accordance with Article 24 indicating: 1. Specific date each document is to be delivered to the Designer. 2. Specific date each document must be received in order to meet the proposed schedule. General Conditions 00 72 00-122 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 3. Allow a reasonable time to review documents, taking into consideration the size and complexity of the document, other documents being processed, and other factors that may affect review time. 4. Allow time for re-submission of each document. Contractor is responsible for delays associated with additional time required to review incomplete or erroneous documents and for time lost when documents are submitted for products that do not meet Specification requirements. 27.04 Schedule Revisions A. Revise the schedule if it appears that the schedule no longer represents the actual progress of the Work. 1. Submit a written report if the schedule indicates that the Project is more than 30 days behind schedule. The report is to include: a. Number of days behind schedule; b. Narrative description of the steps to be taken to bring the Project back on schedule; and c. Anticipated time required to bring the Project back on schedule. 2. Submit a revised schedule indicating the action that the Contractor proposes to take to bring the Project back on schedule. B. Revise the schedule to indicate any adjustments in Contract Times approved by Modification. 1. Include a revised schedule with Change Proposals if a change in Contract Times is requested. 2. OPT will deem any Change Proposal that does not have a revised schedule and request for a change in Contract Times as having no impact on the ability of the Contractor to complete the Project within the Contract Times. C. Updating the Project schedule to reflect actual progress is not considered a revision to the Project schedule. D. Applications for Payment may not be recommended for payment without a revised schedule and if required, the report indicating the Contractor's plan for bringing the Project back on schedule. 27.OS Float Time A. Define float time as the amount of time between the earliest start date and the latest start date of a chain of activities on the construction schedule. B. Float time is not for the exclusive use or benefit of either the Contractor or Owner. C. Where several subsystems each have a critical path, the subsystem with the longest time of completion is the critical path and float time is to be assigned to other subsystems. D. Contract Times cannot be changed by the submission of a schedule. Contract Times can only be modified by a Change Order or Contract Amendment. General Conditions 00 72 00-123 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 E. Schedule completion date must be the same as the Contract completion date. Time between the end of construction and the Contract completion date is float time. ARTICLE 28—VIDEO AND PHOTOGRAPHIC DOCUMENTATION 28.01 Work Included A. Provide a video recording of the Site prior to the beginning of construction. 1. Record the condition of all existing facilities in or abutting the construction area (right- of-way)including but not limited to streets,curb and gutter, utilities,driveways,fencing, landscaping, etc. 2. Record after construction staking is complete but prior to any clearing. 3. Provide one copy of the recording, dated and labeled to the OAR before the start of construction. Provide additional recording as directed by the OAR if the recording provided is not considered suitable for the purpose of recording pre-existing conditions. B. Furnish an adequate number of photographs of the Site to clearly depict the completed Project. 1. Provide a minimum of ten different views. 2. Photograph a panoramic view of the entire Site. 3. Photograph all significant areas of completed construction. 4. Completion photographs are not to be taken until all construction trailers, excess materials, trash, and debris have been removed. 5. Employ a professional photographer approved by the OAR to photograph the Project. 6. Provide one aerial photograph of the Site from an angle and height to include the entire Site while providing adequate detail. C. All photographs, video recordings, and a digital copy of this media are to become the property of the Owner. Photographs or recordings may not be used for publication,or public or private display without the written consent of the Owner. 28.02 Quality Assurance A. Provide clear photographs and recordings taken with proper exposure. View photographs and recordings in the field and take new photographs or recordings immediately if photos of an adequate print quality cannot be produced or video quality is not adequate. Provide photographs with adequate quality and resolution to permit enlargements. 28.03 Document Submittal A. Submit photographic documentation as Record Data in accordance with Article 24. B. Submit two DVDs of the video recording as Record Data in accordance with Article 24. General Conditions 00 72 00-124 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 28.04 Photographs A. Provide photographs in digital format with a minimum resolution of 1280 x 960, accomplished without a digital zoom. B. Take photographs at locations acceptable to the OAR. C. Provide two color prints of each photograph and a digital copy on a DVD of each photograph taken. D. Identify each print on back with: 1. Project name. 2. Date,time, location, and orientation of the exposure. 3. Description of the subject of photograph. E. Submit photographs in clear plastic sheets designed for photographs. Place only one photograph in each sheet to allow the description on the back to be read without removing the photograph. F. Final photographs are to include two 8-by-10-inch glossy color prints for each of ten photographs selected by the OAR. These photographs are in addition to normal prints. 28.05 Video Recording A. Provide digital format on DVD that can be played with Windows Media Player in common format in full screen mode. B. Identify Project on video by audio or visual means. C. Video file size should not exceed 400 MB. D. Video resolution shall be 1080p. E. The quality of the video must be sufficient to determine the existing conditions of the construction area. Camera panning must be performed while at rest, do not pan the camera while walking or driving. Camera pans should be performed at intervals sufficient to clearly view the entire construction area. F. DVD shall be labeled with construction stationing and stationing should be called out, voice recorded, in the video. G. The entire construction area recording shall be submitted at once. Sections submitted separately will not be accepted. H. Pipeline projects should be recorded linearly from beginning to end. ARTICLE 29—EXECUTION AND CLOSEOUT 29.01 Substantial Completion A. Notify the OAR that the Work or a designated portion of the Work is substantially complete per the General Conditions. Include a list of the items remaining to be completed or corrected before the Project will be considered to be complete. General Conditions 00 72 00-125 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 B. OPT will visit the Site to observe the Work within 30 days after notification is received to determine the status of the Project. C. OAR will notify the Contractor, within 120 days after notification, that the Work is either substantially complete or that additional Work must be performed before the Project will be considered substantially complete. 1. OAR will notify the Contractor of items that must be completed before the Project will be considered substantially complete. 2. Correct the noted deficiencies in the Work. 3. Notify the OAR when the items of Work in the OAR's notice have been completed. 4. OPT will revisit the Site and repeat the process. 5. OAR will issue a Certificate of Substantial Completion to the Contractor when the OPT considers the Project to be substantially complete. The Certificate will include a tentative list of items to be corrected before Final Payment will be recommended. 6. Review the list and notify the OAR of any objections to items on the list within 10 days after receiving the Certificate of Substantial Completion. 29.02 Final Inspections A. Notify the OAR when: 1. Work has been completed in compliance with the Contract Documents; 2. Equipment and systems have been tested per Contract Documents and are fully operational; 3. Final Operations and Maintenance Manuals have been provided to the Owner and all operator training has been completed; 4. Specified spare parts and special tools have been provided; and 5. Work is complete and ready for final inspection. B. OPT will visit the Site to determine if the Project is complete and ready for Final Payment within 30 days after the notice is received. C. Designer will notify the Contractor that the Project is complete or will notify the Contractor that Work is Defective. D. Take immediate steps to correct Defective Work. Notify the Designer when Defective Work has been corrected. OPT will visit the Site to determine if the Project is complete and the Work is acceptable. OAR will notify the Contractor that the Project is complete or will notify the Contractor that Work is Defective. E. Submit the Request for Final Payment with the closeout documents described in Paragraph 29.04 if notified that the Project is complete, and the Work is acceptable. 29.03 Reinspection Fees A. Owner may impose a Set-off against the Application for Payment in accordance with the General Conditions to compensate the OPT for additional visits to the Project if additional Work is required. General Conditions 00 72 00-126 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 29.04 Closeout Documents Submittal A. Record Documents per Article 20. B. Warranties and bonds. C. Equipment installation reports on equipment. D. Shop Drawings, Record Data, and other documents as required by the Contract Documents. E. Evidence of continuing insurance and bond coverage as required by the Contract Documents. F. Final Photographs per Article 28. 29.05 Transfer of Utilities A. If applicable to the Project,transfer utilities to the Owner when the Certificate of Substantial Completion has been issued and the Work has been occupied by the Owner. B. Submit final meter readings for utilities and similar data as of the date the Owner occupied the Work. 29.06 Warranties, Bonds and Service Agreements A. Provide warranties, bonds, and service agreements required by the Contract Documents. B. The date for the start of warranties, bonds, and service agreements is established per the Contract Documents. C. Compile warranties, bonds, and service agreements and review these documents for compliance with the Contract Documents. 1. Provide a log of all equipment covered under the 1-year correction period specified in the Contract Documents and all products for which special or extended warranties or guarantees are provided. Index the log by Specification Section number on forms provided. Include items 2.e through 2.g below in the tabulation. 2. Provide a copy of specific warranties or guarantees under a tab indexed to the log. Each document is to include: a. A description of the product or Work item; b. The firm name with the name of the principal, address, and telephone number; c. Signature of the respective Supplier or Subcontractor to acknowledge existence of the warranty obligation for extended warranties and service agreements; d. Scope of warranty, bond, or service agreement; e. Indicate the start date for the correction period specified in the Contract Documents for each product and the date on which the specified correction period expires. f. Indicate the start date for extended warranties for each product and the date on which the specified extended warranties period expires. g. Start date, warranty or guarantee period, and expiration date for each warranty, bond, and service agreement; General Conditions 00 72 00-127 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 h. Procedures to be followed in the event of a failure; and i. Specific instances that might invalidate the warranty or bond. D. Submit digital copies of the documents to the Designer for review. E. Submit warranties, bonds, and service agreements within 10 days after equipment or components are placed in service. ARTICLE 30—MISCELLANEOUS 30.01 Computation of Times A. Exclude the first day and include the last day when determining dates for a period of time referred to in the Contract Documents by days. The last day of this period is to be omitted from the determination if it falls on a Sunday or a legal holiday. B. All references and conditions for a Calendar Day Contract in the Contract Documents apply for a Fixed Date Contract. A Fixed Date Contract is one in which the calendar dates for reaching Substantial Completion and/or final completion are specified in lieu of identifying the number of days involved. 30.02 Owner's Right to Audit Contractor's Records A. By execution of the Contract, Contractor grants Owner the right to audit, examine, inspect and/or copy, at Owner's election at all reasonable times during the term of this Contract and for a period of four (4) years following the completion or termination of the Work, all of Contractor's written and electronically stored records and billings relating to the performance of the Work under the Contract Documents. The audit, examination or inspection may be performed by an Owner designee,which may include its internal auditors or an outside representative engaged by Owner. Contractor agrees to retain its records for a minimum of four(4)years following termination of the Contract, unless there is an ongoing dispute under the Contract,then, such retention period must extend until final resolution of the dispute. As used in these General Conditions, "Contractor written and electronically stored records" include any and all information, materials and data of every kind and character generated as a result of the work under this Contract. Examples of Contractor written and electronically stored records include, but are not limited to:accounting data and reports, billings, books, general ledgers, cost ledgers, invoices, production sheets, documents, correspondence, meeting notes, subscriptions, agreements, purchase orders, leases, contracts, commitments, arrangements, notes, daily diaries, reports, drawings, receipts, vouchers, memoranda, time sheets, payroll records, policies, procedures, Subcontractor agreements, Supplier agreements, rental equipment proposals, federal and state tax filings for any issue in question, along with any and all other agreements, sources of information and matters that may, in Owner's sole judgment, have any bearing on or pertain to any matters, rights, duties or obligations under or covered by any Contract Documents. B. Owner agrees to exercise the right to audit, examine or inspect Contractor's records only during regular business hours. Contractor agrees to allow Owner and/or Owner's designee access to all of the Contractor's Records, Contractor's facilities, and current or former employees of Contractor, deemed necessary by Owner or its designee(s), to perform such audit, inspection or examination. Contractor also agrees to provide adequate and General Conditions 00 72 00-128 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 appropriate work space necessary for Owner or its designees to conduct such audits, inspections or examinations. C. Contractor must include this Paragraph 30.02 in any Subcontractor, supplier or vendor contract. 30.03 Independent Contractor A. Contractor is to perform its duties under this Contract as an independent contractor. The Contractor's Team and their personnel are not considered to be employees or agents of the Owner. Nothing in this Contract is to be interpreted as granting Contractor's Team the right or authority to make commitments for the Owner. This Contract does not constitute or create a joint venture, partnership or formal business organization of any kind. 30.04 Cumulative Remedies A. The duties and obligations imposed by these General Conditions and the rights and remedies available to the Owner or Contractor by these General Conditions are in addition to, and are not a limitation of,the rights and remedies which are otherwise imposed or available by: 1. Laws or Regulations; 2. Special warranties or guarantees; or 3. Other provisions of the Contract Documents. B. The provisions of this Paragraph 30.04 are as effective as if repeated specifically in the Contract Documents in connection with each particular duty, obligation, right and remedy to which they apply. 30.05 Limitation of Damages A. Owner is not liable to Contractor for claims, costs, losses or damages sustained by Contractor's Team associated with other projects or anticipated projects. B. Contractor waives claims for consequential damages, incidental or special damages arising out of or relating to this Contract, whether the damages are claimed in contract, tort or on any other basis. 30.06 No Waiver A. The failure of Owner or Contractor to enforce any provision of this Contract does not constitute a waiver of that provision or affect the enforceability of that provision or the remainder of this Contract. 30.07 Severability A. If a court of competent jurisdiction renders a part of this Contract invalid or unenforceable, that part is to be severed and the remainder of this Contract continues in full force. General Conditions 00 72 00-129 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 30.08 Survival of Obligations A. Representations, indemnifications, warranties, guarantees and continuing obligations required by the Contract Documents survive completion and acceptance of the Work or termination of the Contract. 30.09 No Third Party Beneficiaries A. Nothing in this Contract can be construed to create rights in any entity other than the Owner and Contractor. Neither the Owner nor Contractor intends to create third party beneficiaries by entering into this Contract. 30.10 Assignment of Contract A. This Contract may not be assigned in whole or in part by the Contractor without the prior written consent of the Owner. 30.11 No Waiver of Sovereign Immunity A. The Owner has not waived its sovereign immunity by entering into and performing its obligations under this Contract. B. This Contract is to perform a governmental function solely for the public benefit. 30.12 Controlling Law A. This Contract is governed by the laws of the State of Texas without regard to its conflicts of laws. Venue for legal proceedings lies exclusively in Nueces County, Texas. Cases must be filed and tried in Nueces County and cannot be removed from Nueces County,Texas. 30.13 Conditions Precedent to Right to Sue A. Notwithstanding anything herein to the contrary,Contractor will have at least 90 days to give notice of a claim for damages as a condition precedent to the right to sue on the Contract, subject to the contractual Claims and Alternative Dispute Resolution processes set forth herein. 30.14 Waiver of Trial by Jury A. Owner and Contractor agree that they have knowingly waived and do hereby waive the right to trial by jury and have instead agreed, in the event of any litigation arising out of or connected to this Contract, to proceed with a trial before the court, unless both parties subsequently agree otherwise in writing. 30.15 Attorney Fees A. The Parties expressly agree that, in the event of litigation, all parties waive rights to payment of attorneys' fees that otherwise might be recoverable, pursuant to the Texas Civil Practice and Remedies Code Chapter 38, Texas Local Government Code §271.153, the Prompt Payment Act, common law or any other provision for payment of attorney's fees. General Conditions 00 72 00-130 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 30.16 Compliance with Laws A. Comply with the Americans with Disabilities Act of 1990 as amended (ADA) and Texas Architectural Barriers Act and all regulations relating to either statute. B. No qualified person shall on the basis of race, color, religion, national origin, gender, age or disability be excluded from participation in, be denied the benefits of, or be subjected to discrimination under any program or activity which receives or benefits from federal financial assistance. C. Comply with all applicable federal, state and city laws, rules and regulations. D. Each applicable provision and clause required by law to be inserted into the Contract shall be deemed to be enacted herein,and the Contract shall be read and enforced as though each were physically included herein. 30.17 Enforcement A. The City Manager or designee and the City Attorney or designee are fully authorized and will have the right to enforce all legal rights and obligations under the Contract without further authorization from City Council. 30.18 Subject to Appropriation A. Funds are appropriated by the Owner on a yearly basis. If for any reason, funds are not appropriated in any given year,the Owner may direct immediate suspension or termination of the Contract with no additional liability to the Owner. If the Contractor is terminated or suspended and the Owner requests remobilization at a later date, the Contractor may request payment for reasonable demobilization/remobilization costs. Such costs shall be addressed through a Change Order to the Contract. Under no circumstances may a provision or obligation under this Contract be interpreted as contrary to this paragraph. 30.19 Contract Sum A. The Contract Sum is stated in the Contract and, including authorized adjustments,is the total maximum not-to-exceed amount payable by Owner to Contractor for performance of the Work under the Contract Documents. Contractor accepts and agrees that all payments pursuant to this Contract are subject to the availability and appropriation of funds by the Corpus Christi City Council. If funds are not available and/or appropriated,this Contract shall immediately be terminated with no liability to any party to this Contract. 30.20 Contractor's Guarantee as Additional Remedy A. The Contractor's guarantee is a separate and additional remedy available to benefit the Owner. Neither the guarantee nor the expiration of the guarantee period will operate to reduce, release or relinquish any rights or remedies available to the Owner for any claims or causes of action against the Contractor or any other individual or entity. 30.21 Notices. A. Any notice required to be given to Owner under any provision in this Contract must include a copy to OAR by mail or e-mail. General Conditions 00 72 00-131 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 30.22 Public Information A. The requirements of Subchapter J, Chapter 552, Government Code, may apply to this contract, and Contractor agrees that the contract can be terminated if Contractor knowingly or intentionally fails to comply with a requirement of that subchapter. END OF SECTION General Conditions 00 72 00-132 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 00 73 00 SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS These Supplementary Conditions amend or supplement SECTION 00 72 00 GENERAL CONDITIONS and other provisions of the Contract Documents. All provisions not amended or supplemented in these Supplementary Conditions remain in effect. The terms used in these Supplementary Conditions have the meanings stated in the General Conditions. Additional terms used in these Supplementary Conditions have the meanings stated below. ARTICLE 1—DEFINITIONS AND TERMINOLOGY SC-1.01 DEFINED TERMS A. The members of the OPT as defined in Paragraph 1.01.A.41 consists of the following organizations: City of Corpus Christi,Texas Turner I Ramirez Architects York Engineering REM Engineering NRG Engineering LIES/Rock Engineering Testing Lab B. Paragraph 1.01.A.51"Substantial Completion" is more specifically defined for this Project as: 1. The following items are fully functional and suitable for operation in accordance with the Contract Documents: a. A Certificate of Occupancy is required. b. RAS inspection must be completion. c. All required inspections to be met. ARTICLE 4—COMMENCEMENT AND PROGRESS OF THE WORK SC-4.04 DELAYS IN CONTRACTOR'S PROGRESS A. The allocation for delays in the Contractor's progress for rain days as set forth in General Conditions Paragraph 4.04.D are to be determined as follows: 1. Include rain days in developing the schedule for construction. Schedule construction so that the Work will be completed within the Contract Times assuming that these rain days will occur. Incorporate residual impacts following rain days such as limited access to and within the Site, inability to work due to wet or muddy Site conditions, delays in delivery of equipment and materials, and other impacts related to rain days when developing the schedule for construction. Include all costs associated with these rain days and residual impacts in the Contract Price. 2. A rain day is defined as any day in which the amount of rain measured by the National Weather Services at the Power Street Stormwater Pump Station is 0.50 inch or greater. Records indicate the following average number of rain days for each month: Supplementary Conditions 00 73 00- 1 Commodore Park Improvements, Phase 1-#23173 Rev 3/2023 Month Day Month Days January 3 July 3 February 3 August 4 March 2 September 7 April 3 October 4 May 4 November 3 June 4 December 3 3. A total of 37 rain days have been set for this Project. An extension of time due to rain days will be considered only after 37 rain days have been exceeded in a calendar year and the OAR has determined that a detrimental impact to the construction schedule resulted from the excessive rainfall. Rain days are to be incorporated into the schedule and unused rain days will be considered float time which may be consumed by the Owner or Contractor in delay claims. ARTICLE 5 — AVAILABILITY OF LANDS; SUBSURFACE CONDITIONS AND PHYSICAL CONDITIONS; HAZARDOUS ENVIRONMENTAL CONDITIONS SC-5.03 SUBSURFACE AND PHYSICAL CONDITIONS A. This Supplementary Condition identifies documents referenced in General Conditions Paragraph 5.03.A which describe subsurface and physical conditions. 1. Geotechnical Reports include the following: a. Geotechnical Engineering Report No. G124344, Published by LIES, October 4, 2024; 29 pages -The Contractor may rely on the following Technical Data in using this document. SC-5.06 HAZARDOUS ENVIRONMENTAL CONDITIONS AT SITE— NOT APPLICABLE ARTICLE 6—BONDS AND INSURANCE SC-6.03 REQUIRED MINIMUM INSURANCE COVERAGE INSURANCE REQUIREMENTS CONTRACTOR'S INSURANCE AMOUNTS Provide the insurance coverage for at least the following amounts unless greater amounts are required by Laws and Regulations: Type of Insurance Minimum Insurance Coverage Commercial General Liability including 1. Commercial Broad Form $1,000,000 Per Occurrence 2. Premises—Operations $2,000,000 Aggregate Supplementary Conditions 00 73 00-2 Commodore Park Improvements, Phase 1-#23173 Rev 3/2023 3. Underground Hazard 4. Products/Completed Operations 5. Contractual Liability 6 Independent Contractors 7. Personal &Advertising Injury Business Automobile Liability-Owned, Non- $500,000 Combined Single Limit Owned, Rented and Leased Workers' Compensation Statutory Employer's Liability $500,000/500,000/500,000 Excess Liability/Umbrella Liability $1,000,000 Per Occurrence Required if Contract Price>$5,000,000 Contractor's Pollution Liability / $1,000,000 Per Claim Environmental Impairment Coverage Not limited to sudden and accidental ❑x Required ❑ Not Required discharge. To include long-term environmental impact for the disposal of pollutants/contaminants. Required if excavation > 5 ft or asbestos present Builder's Risk(All Perils including Collapse) Coverage limit shall be in the amount of the total cost of the project. Required for vertical structures and bridges ❑X Required ❑ Not Required Installation/Equipment Floater Equal to Contract Price Required if installing city-owned equipment or storing contractor equipment on city- ❑X Required ❑ Not Required owned property ARTICLE 7—CONTRACTOR'S RESPONSIBILITIES SC-7.04 CONCERNING SUBCONTRACTORS, SUPPLIERS,AND OTHERS A. Add the following sentence to the end of Paragraph 7.04.A: "The Contractor goal is to perform at least 30 percent of the Work,measured as a percentage of the Contract Price, using its own employees." ARTICLE 14—PREVAILING WAGE RATE REQUIREMENTS Supplementary Conditions 00 73 00-3 Commodore Park Improvements, Phase 1-#23173 Rev 3/2023 SC-14.04 PREVAILING WAGE RATES A. The minimum rates for various labor classifications as established by the Owner are shown below: Wage Determination Construction Type Project Type (WD) No TX288 Building Building Construction Projects (does not include single family homes or apartments up to and including 4 stories) GENERAL DECISION NUMBER: TX20250288 03/14/2025 SUPERSEDED GENERAL DECISION NUMBER: TX20240288 STATE: TEXAS CONSTRUCTION TYPE: BUILDING COUNTIES:ARANSAS, NUECES,AND SAN PATRICIO COUNTIES IN TEXAS BUILDING CONSTRUCTION PROJECTS (does not include single family homes or apartments up to and including 4 stories). NOTE: CONTRACTS SUBJECT TO THE DAVIS-BACON ACT ARE GENERALLY REQUIRED TO PAY AT LEAST THE APPLICABLE MINIMUM WAGE RATE. REQUIRED UNDER EXECUTIVE ORDER 14026 OR EXECUTIVE ORDER 13658. PLEASE NOTE THAT THESE EXECUTIVE ORDERS APPLY TO COVERED CONTRACTS ENTERED INTO BY THE FEDERAL GOVERNEMENT THAT ARE SUBJECT TO THE DAVIS-BACON ACT ITSELF, BUT DO NOT APPLY TO CONTRACTS SUBJECT ONLY TO THE DAVIS-BACON RELATED ACTS, INCLUDING THOSE SET FORTH AT 29 CFR 5.1(a)(1). If the contract is entered into on or afterJanuar • Executive Order 14026 generally applies to y the contract. 30, 2022, or the contract is renewed or extended (e.g., an option is exercised) on or ' The contractor must pay all covered workers after January 30, 2022: at least $17.75 per hour (or the applicable wage rate listed on this wage determination, if it is higher) for all hours spent performing on the contract in 2025. If the contract was awarded on or between Executive Order 13658 generally applies to January 1, 2015 and January 29, 2022, and the the contract. contract is not renewed or extended on or after The contractor must pay all covered workers January 30, 2022: at least $13.30 per hour (or the applicable wage rate listed on this wage determination, if it is higher) for all hours spent performing on that contract in 2025. THE APPLICABLE EXECUTIVE ORDER MINIMUM WAGE RATE WILL BE ADJUSTED ANNUALLY. IF THIS Supplementary Conditions 00 73 00-4 Commodore Park Improvements, Phase 1-#23173 Rev 3/2023 CONTRACT IS COVERED BY ONE OF THE EXECUTIVE ORDERS AND A CLASSIFICATION CONSIDERED NECESSARY FOR PERFORMANCE OF WORK ON THE CONTRACT DOES NOT APPEAR ON THIS WAGE DETERMINATION,THE CONTRACTOR MUST STILL SUBMIT A CONFORMANCE REQUEST. ADDITIONAL INFORMATION ON CONTRACTOR REQUIREMENTS AND WORKER PROTECTIONS UNDER THE EXECUTIVE ORDERS IS AVAILABLE AT HTTP://WWW.DOL.GOV/WHD/GOVCONTRACTS. MODIFICATION NUMBER PUBLICATION DATE 0 01/03/2025 1 03/14/2025 * BOIL0074-003 01/01/2025 RATES FRINGES BOILERMAKER......................$ 33.17 24.92 ---------------------------------------------------------------- ELECO278-002 08/25/2024 RATES FRINGES ELECTRICIAN......................$ 30.80 8.97 ---------------------------------------------------------------- ENG10178-005 06/01/2020 RATES FRINGES POWER EQUIPMENT OPERATOR (1)TOWER CRANE.............$ 32.85 13.10 (2) CRANES WITH PILE DRIVING OR CAISSON ATTACHMENT AND HYDRAULIC CRANE 60 TONS AND ABOVE.....$ 28.75 10.60 (3) HYDRAULIC CRANES 59 TONS AND UNDER..............$ 32.35 13.10 ---------------------------------------------------------------- I RO N 0084-011 06/01/2024 RATES FRINGES IRONWORKER, ORNAMENTAL...........$ 28.26 8.13 ---------------------------------------------------------------- * SUTX2014-068 07/21/2014 Supplementary Conditions 00 73 00-5 Commodore Park Improvements, Phase 1-#23173 Rev 3/2023 RATES FRINGES BRICKLAYER.......................$ 20.04 0.00 CARPENTER........................$ 15.21 ** 0.00 CEMENT MASON/CONCRETE FINISHER...$ 15.33 ** 0.00 INSULATOR-MECHANICAL(DUCT, PIPE & MECHANICAL SYSTEM INSULATION)...............$ 19.77 7.13 IRONWORKER, REINFORCING..........$ 12.27 ** 0.00 IRONWORKER, STRUCTURAL...........$ 22.16 5.26 LABORER: COMMON OR GENERAL......$ 9.68 ** 0.00 LABORER: MASON TENDER- BRICK...$ 11.36 ** 0.00 LABORER: MASON TENDER-CEMENT/CONCRETE..................$ 10.58 ** 0.00 LABORER: PIPELAYER..............$ 12.49 ** 2.13 LABORER: ROOF TEAROFF...........$ 11.28 ** 0.00 OPERATOR: BACKHOE/EXCAVATOR/TRACKHOE.......$ 14.25 ** 0.00 OPERATOR: BOBCAT/SKID STEER/SKID LOADER................$ 13.93 ** 0.00 OPERATOR: BULLDOZER.............$ 18.29 1.31 OPERATOR: DRILL.................$ 16.22 ** 0.34 OPERATOR: FORKLIFT..............$ 14.83 ** 0.00 OPERATOR: GRADER/BLADE..........$ 13.37 ** 0.00 OPERATOR: LOADER................$ 13.55 ** 0.94 OPERATOR: MECHANIC..............$ 17.52 ** 3.33 OPERATOR: PAVER (ASPHALT, AGGREGATE,AND CONCRETE).........$ 16.03 ** 0.00 OPERATOR: ROLLER................$ 12.70 ** 0.00 Supplementary Conditions 00 73 00-6 Commodore Park Improvements, Phase 1-#23173 Rev 3/2023 PAINTER(BRUSH, ROLLER,AND SPRAY)...........................$ 14.45 ** 0.00 PIPEFITTER.......................$ 25.80 8.55 PLUMBER..........................$ 25.64 8.16 ROOFER...........................$ 13.75 ** 0.00 SHEET METALWORKER (HVAC DUCT INSTALLATION ONLY)...............$ 22.73 7.52 SHEET METAL WORKER, EXCLUDES HVAC DUCT INSTALLATION...........$ 21.13 6.53 TILE FINISHER....................$ 11.22 ** 0.00 TILE SETTER......................$ 14.74 ** 0.00 TRUCK DRIVER: DUMP TRUCK........$ 12.39 ** 1.18 TRUCK DRIVER: FLATBED TRUCK.....$ 19.65 8.57 TRUCK DRIVER: SEMI-TRAILER TRUCK............................$ 12.50 ** 0.00 TRUCK DRIVER: WATER TRUCK.......$ 12.00 ** 4.11 ---------------------------------------------------------------- WELDERS- RECEIVE RATE PRESCRIBED FOR CRAFT PERFORMING OPERATION TO WHICH WELDING IS INCIDENTAL. ---------------------------------------------------------------- ---------------------------------------------------------------- ** WORKERS IN THIS CLASSIFICATION MAY BE ENTITLED TO A HIGHER MINIMUM WAGE UNDER EXECUTIVE ORDER 14026 ($17.75) OR 13658 ($13.30). PLEASE SEETHE NOTE ATTHE TOP OF THE WAGE DETERMINATION FOR MORE INFORMATION. PLEASE ALSO NOTE THAT THE MINIMUM WAGE REQUIREMENTS OF EXECUTIVE ORDER 14026 ARE NOT CURRENTLY BEING ENFORCED AS TO ANY CONTRACTOR SUBCONTRACT TO WHICH THE STATES OF TEXAS, LOUISIANA, OR MISSISSIPPI, INCLUDING THEIR AGENCIES,ARE A PARTY, NOTE: EXECUTIVE ORDER (EO) 13706, ESTABLISHING PAID SICK LEAVE FOR FEDERAL CONTRACTORS APPLIES TO ALL CONTRACTS SUBJECT TO THE DAVIS-BACON ACT FOR WHICH THE CONTRACT IS AWARDED (AND ANY SOLICITATION WAS ISSUED) ON OR AFTER JANUARY 1, 2017. IF THIS CONTRACT IS COVERED BY THE EO,THE CONTRACTOR MUST PROVIDE EMPLOYEES WITH 1 HOUR OF PAID SICK LEAVE FOR EVERY 30 HOURS THEY WORK, UP TO 56 HOURS OF PAID SICK LEAVE EACH YEAR. EMPLOYEES MUST BE PERMITTED TO USE PAID SICK LEAVE FOR THEIR OWN ILLNESS, INJURY OR OTHER HEALTH-RELATED Supplementary Conditions 00 73 00-7 Commodore Park Improvements, Phase 1-#23173 Rev 3/2023 NEEDS, INCLUDING PREVENTIVE CARE;TO ASSIST A FAMILY MEMBER (OR PERSON WHO IS LIKE FAMILY TO THE EMPLOYEE)WHO IS ILL, INJURED, OR HAS OTHER HEALTH-RELATED NEEDS, INCLUDING PREVENTIVE CARE; OR FOR REASONS RESULTING FROM, OR TO ASSIST A FAMILY MEMBER(OR PERSON WHO IS LIKE FAMILY TO THE EMPLOYEE) WHO IS A VICTIM OF, DOMESTIC VIOLENCE, SEXUAL ASSAULT, OR STALKING. ADDITIONAL INFORMATION ON CONTRACTOR REQUIREMENTS AND WORKER PROTECTIONS UNDER THE EO IS AVAILABLE AT HTTPS://WWW.DOL.GOV/AGENCIES/W HD/GOVERNM ENT-CONTRACTS. UNLISTED CLASSIFICATIONS NEEDED FOR WORK NOT INCLUDED WITHIN THE SCOPE OF THE CLASSIFICATIONS LISTED MAY BE ADDED AFTER AWARD ONLY AS PROVIDED IN THE LABOR STANDARDS CONTRACT CLAUSES(29CFR 5.5 (A) (1) (III)). ---------------------------------------------------------------- THE BODY OF EACH WAGE DETERMINATION LISTS THE CLASSIFICATIONS AND WAGE RATES THAT HAVE BEEN FOUND TO BE PREVAILING FOR THE TYPE(S) OF CONSTRUCTION AND GEOGRAPHIC AREA COVERED BY THE WAGE DETERMINATION.THE CLASSIFICATIONS ARE LISTED IN ALPHABETICAL ORDER UNDER RATE IDENTIFIERS INDICATING WHETHER THE PARTICULAR RATE IS A UNION RATE (CURRENT UNION NEGOTIATED RATE), A SURVEY RATE,A WEIGHTED UNION AVERAGE RATE, A STATE ADOPTED RATE, OR A SUPPLEMENTAL CLASSIFICATION RATE. UNION RATE IDENTIFIERS A FOUR-LETTER IDENTIFIER BEGINNING WITH CHARACTERS OTHER THAN ""SU"", ""UAVG"", ?SA?, OR ?SC? DENOTES THAT A UNION RATE WAS PREVAILING FOR THAT CLASSIFICATION IN THE SURVEY. EXAMPLE: PLUM0198-005 07/01/2024. PLUM IS AN IDENTIFIER OF THE UNION WHOSE COLLECTIVELY BARGAINED RATE PREVAILED IN THE SURVEY FOR THIS CLASSIFICATION, WHICH IN THIS EXAMPLE WOULD BE PLUMBERS. 0198 INDICATES THE LOCAL UNION NUMBER OR DISTRICT COUNCIL NUMBER WHERE APPLICABLE, I.E., PLUMBERS LOCAL 0198.THE NEXT NUMBER, 005 IN THE EXAMPLE, IS AN INTERNAL NUMBER USED IN PROCESSING THE WAGE DETERMINATION.THE DATE, 07/01/2024 IN THE EXAMPLE, IS THE EFFECTIVE DATE OF THE MOST CURRENT NEGOTIATED RATE. UNION PREVAILING WAGE RATES ARE UPDATED TO REFLECT ALL CHANGES OVER TIME THAT ARE REPORTED TO WHD IN THE RATES IN THE COLLECTIVE BARGAINING AGREEMENT(CBA) GOVERNING THE CLASSIFICATION. UNION AVERAGE RATE IDENTIFIERS THE UAVG IDENTIFIER INDICATES THAT NO SINGLE RATE PREVAILED FOR THOSE CLASSIFICATIONS, BUT THAT 100% OF THE DATA REPORTED FOR THE CLASSIFICATIONS REFLECTED UNION RATES. EXAMPLE: UAVG-OH-0010 01/01/2024. UAVG INDICATES THAT THE RATE IS A WEIGHTED UNION AVERAGE RATE. OH INDICATES THE STATE OF OHIO. THE NEXT NUMBER, 0010 IN THE EXAMPLE, IS AN INTERNAL NUMBER USED IN PRODUCING THE WAGE Supplementary Conditions 00 73 00-8 Commodore Park Improvements, Phase 1-#23173 Rev 3/2023 DETERMINATION.THE DATE, 01/01/2024 IN THE EXAMPLE, INDICATES THE DATE THE WAGE DETERMINATION WAS UPDATED TO REFLECT THE MOST CURRENT UNION AVERAGE RATE. A UAVG RATE WILL BE UPDATED ONCE A YEAR, USUALLY IN JANUARY,TO REFLECT A WEIGHTED AVERAGE OF THE CURRENT RATES IN THE COLLECTIVE BARGAINING AGREEMENTS ON WHICH THE RATE IS BASED. SURVEY RATE IDENTIFIERS THE ""SU"" IDENTIFIER INDICATES THAT EITHER A SINGLE NON-UNION RATE PREVAILED (AS DEFINED IN 29 CFR 1.2) FOR THIS CLASSIFICATION IN THE SURVEY OR THAT THE RATE WAS DERIVED BY COMPUTING A WEIGHTED AVERAGE RATE BASED ON ALL THE RATES REPORTED IN THE SURVEY FOR THAT CLASSIFICATION.AS A WEIGHTED AVERAGE RATE INCLUDES ALL RATES REPORTED IN THE SURVEY, IT MAY INCLUDE BOTH UNION AND NON-UNION RATES. EXAMPLE: SUFL2022-007 6/27/2024. SU INDICATES THE RATE IS A SINGLE NON-UNION PREVAILING RATE OR A WEIGHTED AVERAGE OF SURVEY DATA FOR THAT CLASSIFICATION. FL INDICATES THE STATE OF FLORIDA. 2022 IS THE YEAR OF THE SURVEY ON WHICH THESE CLASSIFICATIONS AND RATES ARE BASED.THE NEXT NUMBER, 007 IN THE EXAMPLE, IS AN INTERNAL NUMBER USED IN PRODUCING THE WAGE DETERMINATION.THE DATE, 6/27/2024 IN THE EXAMPLE, INDICATES THE SURVEY COMPLETION DATE FOR THE CLASSIFICATIONS AND RATES UNDER THAT IDENTIFIER. ?SU?WAGE RATES TYPICALLY REMAIN IN EFFECT UNTIL A NEW SURVEY IS CONDUCTED. HOWEVER, THE WAGE AND HOUR DIVISION (WHD) HAS THE DISCRETION TO UPDATE SUCH RATES UNDER 29 CFR 1.6(C)(1). STATE ADOPTED RATE IDENTIFIERS THE ""SA"" IDENTIFIER INDICATES THAT THE CLASSIFICATIONS AND PREVAILING WAGE RATES SET BY A STATE (OR LOCAL) GOVERNMENT WERE ADOPTED UNDER 29 C.F.R 1.3(G)-(H). EXAMPLE: SAME2023- 007 01/03/2024. SA REFLECTS THAT THE RATES ARE STATE ADOPTED. ME REFERS TO THE STATE OF MAINE. 2023 IS THE YEAR DURING WHICH THE STATE COMPLETED THE SURVEY ON WHICH THE LISTED CLASSIFICATIONS AND RATES ARE BASED.THE NEXT NUMBER, 007 IN THE EXAMPLE, IS AN INTERNAL NUMBER USED IN PRODUCING THE WAGE DETERMINATION.THE DATE,01/03/2024 IN THE EXAMPLE, REFLECTS THE DATE ON WHICH THE CLASSIFICATIONS AND RATES UNDER THE ?SA? IDENTIFIER TOOK EFFECT UNDER STATE LAW IN THE STATE FROM WHICH THE RATES WERE ADOPTED. ----------------------------------------------------------- WAGE DETERMINATION APPEALS PROCESS 1) HAS THERE BEEN AN INITIAL DECISION IN THE MATTER?THIS CAN BE: A)A SURVEY UNDERLYING A WAGE DETERMINATION B)AN EXISTING PUBLISHED WAGE DETERMINATION Supplementary Conditions 00 73 00-9 Commodore Park Improvements, Phase 1-#23173 Rev 3/2023 C)AN INITIAL WHD LETTER SETTING FORTH A POSITION ON A WAGE DETERMINATION MATTER D)AN INITIAL CONFORMANCE (ADDITIONAL CLASSIFICATION AND RATE) DETERMINATION ON SURVEY RELATED MATTERS, INITIAL CONTACT, INCLUDING REQUESTS FOR SUMMARIES OF SURVEYS, SHOULD BE DIRECTED TO THE WHD BRANCH OF WAGE SURVEYS. REQUESTS CAN BE SUBMITTED VIA EMAIL TO DAVISBACONINFO@DOL.GOV OR BY MAIL TO: BRANCH OF WAGE SURVEYS WAGE AND HOUR DIVISION U.S. DEPARTMENT OF LABOR 200 CONSTITUTION AVENUE, N.W. WASHINGTON, DC 20210 REGARDING ANY OTHER WAGE DETERMINATION MATTER SUCH AS CONFORMANCE DECISIONS, REQUESTS FOR INITIAL DECISIONS SHOULD BE DIRECTED TO THE WHD BRANCH OF CONSTRUCTION WAGE DETERMINATIONS. REQUESTS CAN BE SUBMITTED VIA EMAIL TO BCWD-OFFICE@DOL.GOV OR BY MAIL TO: BRANCH OF CONSTRUCTION WAGE DETERMINATIONS WAGE AND HOUR DIVISION U.S. DEPARTMENT OF LABOR 200 CONSTITUTION AVENUE, N.W. WASHINGTON, DC 20210 2) IF AN INITIAL DECISION HAS BEEN ISSUED,THEN ANY INTERESTED PARTY (THOSE AFFECTED BY THE ACTION)THAT DISAGREES WITH THE DECISION CAN REQUEST REVIEW AND RECONSIDERATION FROM THE WAGE AND HOUR ADMINISTRATOR (SEE 29 CFR PART 1.8 AND 29 CFR PART 7). REQUESTS FOR REVIEW AND RECONSIDERATION CAN BE SUBMITTED VIA EMAIL TO DBA.RECONSIDERATION @DOL.GOV OR BY MAIL TO: WAGE AND HOUR ADMINISTRATOR U.S. DEPARTMENT OF LABOR 200 CONSTITUTION AVENUE, N.W. WASHINGTON, DC 20210 THE REQUEST SHOULD BE ACCOMPANIED BY A FULL STATEMENT OF THE INTERESTED PARTY'S POSITION AND ANY INFORMATION (WAGE PAYMENT DATA, PROJECT DESCRIPTION,AREA PRACTICE MATERIAL, ETC.)THAT THE REQUESTOR CONSIDERS RELEVANT TO THE ISSUE. 3) IF THE DECISION OF THE ADMINISTRATOR IS NOT FAVORABLE,AN INTERESTED PARTY MAY APPEAL DIRECTLY TO THE ADMINISTRATIVE REVIEW BOARD (FORMERLY THE WAGE APPEALS BOARD). WRITE TO: ADMINISTRATIVE REVIEW BOARD Supplementary Conditions 00 73 00- 10 Commodore Park Improvements, Phase 1-#23173 Rev 3/2023 U.S. DEPARTMENT OF LABOR 200 CONSTITUTION AVENUE, N.W. WASHINGTON, DC 20210. ---------------------------------------------------------------- ---------------------------------------------------------------- END OF GENERAL DECISION" ARTICLE 19—PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION SC-19.21 COOPERATION WITH PUBLIC AGENCIES A. For the Contractor's convenience, the following telephone numbers are listed: Public Agencies/Contacts Phone Number City Engineer 361-826-3500 Turner Ramirez Architects 361-994-8900 Jay Porterfield,AIA 361-278-5006 Traffic Engineering 361-826-3547 Police Department 361-882-2600 361-826-1800 (361-826-1818 after Water/Wastewater/Stormwater hours) Gas Department 361-885-6900 (361-885-6942 after hours) Parks& Recreation Department 361-826-3461 Street Department 361-826-1875 City Street Div.for Traffic Signals 361-826-1610 Solid Waste & Brush 361-826-1973 IT Department(City Fiber) 361-826-1956 AE P 1-877-373-4858 AT&T 361-881-2511 (1-800-824-4424 after hours) Grande Communications 1-866-247-2633 Spectrum Communications 1-800-892-4357 Crown Castle Communications 1-888-632-0931 (Network Operations Center) Centu ryl-i n k 361-208-0730 Windstream 1-800-600-5050 Regional Transportation Authority 361-289-2712 Port of Corpus Christi Authority Engr. 361-882-5633 Supplementary Conditions 00 73 00- 11 Commodore Park Improvements, Phase 1-#23173 Rev 3/2023 Public Agencies/Contacts Phone Number TxDOT Area Office 361-808-2500 Corpus Christi ISD 361-695-7200 ARTICLE 25-SHOP DRAWINGS SC-25.03 CONTRACTOR'S RESPONSIBILITIES A. Provide Shop Drawings for the following items: See Section 0133 01-Submittal Register Specification Section Shop Drawing Description SC-25.12 RESUBMISSION REQUIREMENTS B. Pay for excessive review of Shop Drawings. 1. A maximum of two (2) design submittals per item is expected. If additional submittals are required due to contractor errors, such as incomplete, unclear, or unprofessional submissions, these will be considered excessive. Any excess designer review fees incurred as a result will be passed onto the Contractor at the rates shown below. 2. Cost for additional review time will be billed to the Owner by the Designer for the actual hours required for the review of Shop Drawings by Designer and in accordance with the rates listed below: Turner I Ramirez Architects-Professional Services HourLy Rates (2025- 20261 EFFECTIVE JANUARY 1, 2025 Principal $265.00/hr Director $235.00/hr Senior Project Manager $215.00/hr Project Architect II/Interior❑e5igner II $205.U0/hr Project Architect I/Interior Designer I $195.00/hr Project Manager $185.00/hr Associate II $1 F5.00/hr Associate I $165.00/hr Admin $110.00/hr ARTICLE 26-RECORD DATA SC-26.03 CONTRACTOR'S RESPONSIBILITIES A. Submit Record Data for the following items: See Section 0133 01-Submittal Register Supplementary Conditions 00 73 00- 12 Commodore Park Improvements, Phase 1-#23173 Rev 3/2023 Specification Section Record Data Description SC-30.21 Notices. B. Strict compliance is required for all notice provisions in this Contract. END OF SECTION Supplementary Conditions 00 73 00- 13 Commodore Park Improvements, Phase 1-#23173 Rev 3/2023 011100 SUMMARY OF WORK 1.00 GENERAL 1.01 WORK INCLUDED A. Construct Work as described in the Contract Documents. 1. Provide the materials, equipment, and incidentals required to make the Project completely and fully useable. 2. Provide the labor, equipment, tools, and consumable supplies required for a complete Project. 3. The Contract Documents do not indicate or describe all of the Work required to complete the Project. Additional details required for the correct installation of selected products are to be provided by the Contractor and coordinated with the OAR. 1.02 DESCRIPTION OF WORK A. Work is described in general, non-inclusive terms as: 1. Phase 1: Construct a trail system throughout the existing Commodore Park Property. Trails construction will consist of various materials. Construct pickle ball courts,tennis courts and basketball court with a pre-engineered roof cover supported by concrete columns. Provide playground equipment,fencing, landscape and irrigation. Scope includes paved parking and exterior lighting. 2. 1.03 WORK UNDER OTHER CONTRACTS A. The following items of work are not included in this Contract, but may impact construction scheduling and completion: NONE 1. B. In the case of a disagreement between the above list and those specified elsewhere in the Contract Documents, the Contractor is to base his Proposal on the most expensive listing. C. Completion of the Work described in this Contract may impact the construction and testing of the items listed above. 1. Coordinate construction activities through the OAR. 2. Pay claims for damages which result from the late completion of the Project or any specified Milestones. 1.04 WORK BY OWNER A. The Owner plans to perform the following items of work which are not included in this Contract, but may impact the construction scheduling and completion: NONE B. Completion of the Work described in this Contract may impact the construction of the items listed above. Summary of Work 01 1100- 1 Commodore Park Improvements, Phase 1-#23173 Rev 10/2018 1. Coordinate construction activities through the OAR. 2. Pay claims for damages which result from the late completion of the Project or any specified Milestones. C. Owner will provide normal operation and maintenance of the existing facilities during construction, unless otherwise stated. 1.05 CONSTRUCTION OF UTILITIES A. Pay for temporary power, including but not limited to construction cost, meter connection fees, and permits. 1.06 USE PRIOR TO FINAL COMPLETION A. Owner has the right to use or operate any portion of the Project that is ready for use after notifying the Contractor of its intent to do so. B. The execution of Bonds is understood to indicate the consent of the surety to these provisions for use of the Project. C. Provide an endorsement from the insurance carrier permitting use of Project during the remaining period of construction. D. Conduct operations to insure the least inconvenience to the Owner and general public. 2.00 PRODUCTS (NOT USED) 3.00 EXECUTION (NOT USED) END OF SECTION Summary of Work 01 1100-2 Commodore Park Improvements, Phase 1-#23173 Rev 10/2018 01 23 10 ALTERNATES AND ALLOWANCES 1.00 GENERAL 1.01 REQUIREMENTS A. Alternates: 1. This Section describes each alternate by number and describes the basic changes to be incorporated into the Work when this alternate is made a part of the Work in the Agreement. 2. Drawings and Specifications will outline the extent of Work to be included in the alternate Contract Price. 3. Coordinate related Work and modify surrounding Work as required to properly integrate the Work under each alternate,and provide a complete and functional Project as required by the Contract Documents. 4. Bids for alternates may be accepted or rejected at the option of the Owner. 5. Owner may incorporate these alternates in the Contract when executed, or may issue a Change Order to incorporate these alternates within 120 days at the prices offered in the Bid, unless noted otherwise. A Request for a Change Proposal may be issued after 120 days or other designated time period to negotiate a new price for incorporating the Work into the Project. B. Allowances: 1. Include specified allowance amount in the Contract Price. 2. The amount of each allowance includes: a. The cost of the product to the Contractor less any applicable trade discounts. b. Delivery to the Site. c. Applicable taxes. 3. Include in the Contract Price all costs for: a. Handling at the Site, including unloading, uncrating, and storage per Article 19 of SECTION 0172 00 GENERAL CONDITIONS. b. Cost for labor and equipment for installation and finishing. c. Cost for related products not specifically listed in the allowance required for installation, including consumable supplies and materials. d. All overhead, profit, and related costs. 4. Assist Owner in the selection of products. a. Identify qualified Suppliers. b. Obtain bids from qualified Suppliers. C. Present available alternates to the Owner through the OAR. Notify OAR of: 1) Any objections to a particular Supplier or product. Alternates and Allowances 01 23 10- 1 Commodore Park Improvements, Phase 1-#23173 Rev 5/2020 2) Effect on the Construction Schedule anticipated by the selection of each option. 3) Cost of each option. 5. Upon selection of the product: a. Purchase and install the product. b. Contractor's responsibilities for products shall be the same as for products selected by the Contractor. 6. Submit a Change Proposal per Article 12 of SECTION 00 72 00 GENERAL CONDITIONS to adjust Contract Price if the net cost of the product is more or less than the specified amount. a. Adjust the unit cost applied to the quantities installed per the method of payment described in Article 17 of SECTION 00 72 00 GENERAL CONDITIONS for products specified as Unit Price Work. b. Do not perform Work until selection of alternate has been approved by the Owner. C. Provide actual invoices for the materials. C. The Lump Sum Bid Items described as "Allowances" have been set as noted in Section 00 30 01 Bid Form and shall be included in the Total Base Bid of the Bid Form for each Bidder. These Allowances may be used at the Owner's discretion in the event that unforeseen conditions or conflicts are encountered during construction that warrants the use of the Allowance funds. If the use of Allowance funds becomes necessary, the OAR will provide written authorization at a cost negotiated between Owner and Contractor, using unit prices in the Bid Form when applicable. No work is to be performed under the Allowance items without written authorization from the OAR. There is no guarantee that any of these funds will need to be used during the course of the Work. 1.02 DOCUMENT SUBMITTALS A. Provide documents for materials furnished as part of the alternate in accordance with Article 24 of SECTION 00 72 00 GENERAL CONDITIONS. 1.03 DESCRIPTION OF ALTERNATES A. Alternate A-Two(2)Additional Pickleball and one (1)Tennis Court 1. Provide additional Tennis and Pickleball Courts as indicated in the Drawings. This includes additional fencing, foundation, sports equipment, sports surfacing and modifies sidewalk routing. B. Alternate B-Covered Basketball Court: 1. Provide a covered basketball court that consists of structural foundation, concrete columns, pre-engineered metal building roof structure, standing seam metal roof material, high performance coatings, court marking, basketball goals, roof drainage and additional sidewalks. Included in this alternate is electrical service for court lighting and electrical convenience outlets. Alternates and Allowances 01 23 10-2 Commodore Park Improvements, Phase 1-#23173 Rev 5/2020 1.04 DESCRIPTION OF ALLOWANCES A. Allowance A- Unforeseen Conditions During Construction: 1. The sum of $200,000.00 to be used for the purchase of unforeseen conditions during construction. 2.00 PRODUCTS (NOT USED) 3.00 EXECUTION (NOT USED) END OF SECTION Alternates and Allowances 01 23 10-3 Commodore Park Improvements, Phase 1-#23173 Rev 5/2020 01 29 01 MEASUREMENT AND BASIS FOR PAYMENT 1.00 GENERAL 1.01 MEASUREMENT AND BASIS FOR PAYMENTS ON LUMP SUM ITEMS A. Include all cost for completing the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents for lump sum payment items. Include all direct cost for the Work associated with that lump sum item and a proportionate amount for the indirect costs as described in Article 17 of SECTION 00 72 00 GENERAL CONDITIONS for each lump sum item. Include cost not specifically set forth as an individual payment item but required to provide a complete and functional system in the lump sum price. B. Measurement for progress payments will be made on the basis of the earned value for each item shown as a percentage of the cost for the lump sum item as described in Article 17 of SECTION 00 72 00 GENERAL CONDITIONS. Payment at Final Completion will be equal to the total lump sum amount for that item. 1.02 MEASUREMENT AND BASIS FOR PAYMENTS ON UNIT PRICE ITEMS A. Include all cost for completing the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents in unit price payment items. Include all direct cost for the Work associated with that unit price item and a proportionate amount for the indirect costs as described in Article 17 of SECTION 00 72 00 GENERAL CONDITIONS for each unit price item. Include cost not specifically set forth as an individual payment item but required to provide a complete and functional system in the unit price. B. Measurement for payments will be made only for the actual measured and/or computed length, area, solid contents, number, and weight, unless other provisions are made in the Contract Documents. Payment on a unit price basis will not be made for Work outside finished dimensions shown in the Contract Documents. Include cost for waste, overages, and tolerances in the unit price for that line item. Measurement will be as indicated for each unit price item. 1.03 MEASUREMENT AND BASIS FOR PAYMENT FOR BASE BID ITEMS A. Bid Item A1—Mobilization (Maximum 5%): 1. Include the following costs in this Bid item: a. Transportation and setup for equipment; b. Transportation and/or erection of all field offices, sheds, and storage facilities; c. Salaries for preparation of documents required before the first Application for Payment; d. Salaries for field personnel assigned to the Project related to the mobilization of the Project; e. Demobilization; and f. Mobilization may not exceed 5 percent of the total Contract Price. Measurement and Basis for Payment 01 29 01- 1 Commodore Park Improvements, Phase 1-#23173 [Addendum 02] Rev 5/2020 2. Measurement for payment will be made per lump sum on the following basis: When at least 5% of the adjusted contract amount for construction is earned, 75% of the mobilization lump sum bid amount will be eligible for payment, minus retainage. Upon substantial completion of all work under this Contract and removal of all equipment and materials from the Project site, the remaining 25% of the mobilization lump sum bid amount will be eligible for payment, minus retainage. B. Bid Item A2—Storm Water Pollution Prevention 1. Payment shall include but not be limited to furnishing and submitting the SWPPP to TCEQ and Owner and updating the Plan during the Project as needed. All permits and required fees related to the SWPPP will be included in this item. 2. Measurement for payment will be made per lump sum on the following basis: The initial pay application will include 50%of the lump sum bid amount minus retainage. The balance will be paid according to the percent of construction completion after 50%completion has occurred, minus retainage. C. Bid Item A3—General Site Conditions 1. Upon acceptance of the Bid Item above,the basis of payment will be determined by the percentage of completion of the scope of the bid item. 2. The unit measure for the basis of payment for this bid item will be on a percentage basis of completion verified by the Architect D. Bid Item A4—Temporary Facilities 1. Upon acceptance of the Bid Item above,the basis of payment will be determined by the percentage of completion of the scope of the bid item. 2. The unit measure for the basis of payment for this bid item will be on a percentage basis of completion verified by the Architect. E. Bid Item A5—Bonds and Insurance 1. Payment shall include all bonds and insurance required under Contract Documents and not exceed 2% of the Bid Price. 2. Payment for Bonds and Insurance will be based on the receipt of documentation of actual costs. Contractor shall furnish satisfactory evidence of rate or rates paid for all bonds and insurance. Contractor will be reimbursed for the actual cost of unique insurance as required and obtained specifically for this Project, not including the routine and general company insurance policies that are maintained for the course of conducting normal business operations. Contractor will be reimbursed for the actual cost of the project specific bonds and insurance, not to exceed the bid amount or the verifiable costs of Project specific bonds and insurance incurred by the Contractor. F. Bid Item 131—Demolition 1. Refer to Specification Section 02 4100—Demolition. 2. Upon acceptance of the Bid Items above, the basis of payment will be determined by the percentage of completion of the scope of the bid item. 3. The unit measure for the basis of payment for this bid item will be on a percentage basis of completion verified by the Architect. Measurement and Basis for Payment 01 29 01-2 Commodore Park Improvements, Phase 1-#23173 [Addendum 02] Rev 5/2020 G. Bid Items C1 thru C9—Concrete 1. Refer to Division 03—Concrete Specifications. 2. Upon acceptance of the Bid Items above, the basis of payment will be determined by the percentage of completion of the scope of the bid item. 3. The unit measure for the basis of payment for this bid item will be on a percentage basis of completion verified by the Architect. H. Bid Items D1 thru D2—Metals 1. Refer to Division 05— Metals Specifications 2. Upon acceptance of the Bid Items above, the basis of payment will be determined by the percentage of completion of the scope of the bid item. 3. The unit measure for the basis of payment for this bid item will be on a percentage basis of completion verified by the Architect. I. Bid Items E1 thru E2—Wood, Plastic, and Composites 1. Refer to Division 06—Wood, Plastic, and Composite Specifications 2. Upon acceptance of the Bid Items above, the basis of payment will be determined by the percentage of completion of the scope of the bid item. 3. The unit measure for the basis of payment for this bid item will be on a percentage basis of completion verified by the Architect. J. Bid Items F1 thru F6—Thermal and Moisture Protection 1. Refer to Division 07—Thermal and Moisture Protection Specifications 2. Upon acceptance of the Bid Items above, the basis of payment will be determined by the percentage of completion of the scope of the bid item. 3. The unit measure for the basis of payment for this bid item will be on a percentage basis of completion verified by the Architect. K. Bid Items G1 thru G2—Finishes 1. Refer to Division 09— Finishes Specifications 2. Upon acceptance of the Bid Items above, the basis of payment will be determined by the percentage of completion of the scope of the bid item. 3. The unit measure for the basis of payment for this bid item will be on a percentage basis of completion verified by the Architect. L. Bid Items H1 thru H2—Equipment 1. Refer to Division 11— Equipment Specifications 2. Upon acceptance of the Bid Items above, the basis of payment will be determined by the percentage of completion of the scope of the bid item. 3. The unit measure for the basis of payment for this bid item will be on a percentage basis of completion verified by the Architect. Measurement and Basis for Payment 01 29 01-3 Commodore Park Improvements, Phase 1-#23173 [Addendum 02] Rev 5/2020 M. Bid Items 11 thru 14—Electrical 1. Refer to Division 26— Electrical Specifications 2. Upon acceptance of the Bid Items above, the basis of payment will be determined by the percentage of completion of the scope of the bid item. 3. The unit measure for the basis of payment for this bid item will be on a percentage basis of completion verified by the Architect. N. Bid Items J1 thru J7—Earthwork 1. Refer to Division 31— Earthwork Specifications 2. Upon acceptance of the Bid Items above, the basis of payment will be determined by the percentage of completion of the scope of the bid item. 3. The unit measure for the basis of payment for this bid item will be on a percentage basis of completion verified by the Architect. O. Bid Items K1 thru K16—Exterior Improvements 1. Refer to Division 32— Exterior Improvements Specifications 2. Upon acceptance of the Bid Items above, the basis of payment will be determined by the percentage of completion of the scope of the bid item. 3. The unit measure for the basis of payment for this bid item will be on a percentage basis of completion verified by the Architect. P. Bid Items L1 thru L3—Site Utilities 1. Refer to Division 33—Site Utilities Specifications 2. Upon acceptance of the Bid Items above, the basis of payment will be determined by the percentage of completion of the scope of the bid item. 3. The unit measure for the basis of payment for this bid item will be on a percentage basis of completion verified by the Architect. Q. Other Bid Items 1. The basis of measurement and payment for other Bid Items shall be as described in the applicable Specification Sections, Construction Drawings and/or Bid Form and Schedule of Values. 2.00 PRODUCTS (NOT USED) 3.00 EXECUTION (NOT USED) END OF SECTION Measurement and Basis for Payment 01 29 01-4 Commodore Park Improvements, Phase 1-#23173 [Addendum 02] Rev 5/2020 01 50 00 TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS 1.00 GENERAL 1.01 WORK INCLUDED A. Provide temporary facilities, including OPT's field office and the Contractor's field offices, storage sheds, and temporary utilities needed to complete the Work. B. Install and maintain temporary Project identification signs. Provide temporary on-site informational signs to identify key elements of the construction facilities. Do not allow other signs to be displayed. 1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Provide a total electrical heating and cooling system for the OPT's field office capable of maintaining the following conditions: 1. Heating: Minimum 75 degrees ID temp at 10 degrees ambient. 2. Cooling: Minimum 75 degrees ID temp at 105 degrees ambient. 3. Relative humidity: 48 to 54 percent. B. Inspect and test each service before placing temporary utilities in use. Arrange for all required inspections and tests by regulatory agencies, and obtain required certifications and permits for use. 1.03 DELIVERY AND STORAGE A. Arrange transportation, loading, and handling of temporary buildings and sheds. 1.04 JOB CONDITIONS A. Locate buildings and sheds at the Site as indicated or as approved by the OPT. B. Prepare the Site by removing trees, brush, or debris and performing demolition or grubbing needed to clear a space adequate for the structures. C. Pay for the utilities used by temporary facilities during construction. D. Provide each temporary service and facility ready for use at each location when the service or facility is first needed to avoid delay in the performance of the Work. Provide OPT's field office complete and ready for occupancy and use within 7 days of the Notice to Proceed. E. Maintain, expand as required, and modify temporary services and facilities as needed throughout the progress of the Work. F. Remove services and facilities when approved by the OAR. G. Operate temporary facilities in a safe and efficient manner. 1. Restrict loads on temporary services or facilities to within their designed or designated capacities. 2. Provide sanitary conditions. Prevent public nuisance or hazardous conditions from developing or existing at the Site. Temporary Facilities and Controls 0150 00- 1 Commodore Park Improvements, Phase 1-#23173 Rev 8/2019 3. Prevent freezing of pipes,flooding, or the contamination of water. 4. Maintain Site security and protection of the facilities. 1.05 OPTIONS A. Construction offices may be prefabricated buildings on skids or mobile trailers. B. Storage sheds may be prefabricated buildings on skids or truck trailers. 2.00 PRODUCTS 2.01 TEMPORARY FIELD OFFICES A. The Contractor must furnish the OPT with a field office at the Site. The field office must contain at least 120 square feet of useable space. The field office must be air-conditioned and heated and must be furnished with an inclined table that measures at least 30 inches by 60 inches and two chairs. The Contractor shall move the field office on the Site as required by the OAR. There is no separate pay item for the field office. B. Furnish a field office of adequate size for Contractor's use. Provide conference room space for a minimum of 10 people. C. Other trades may provide their own offices only when space is available at the Site, and the OPT agrees to its size, condition, and location. D. No monthly partial payments will be processed until OPT's field office facilities are completed and approved. 2.02 TEMPORARY STORAGE BUILDINGS A. Furnish storage buildings of adequate size to store any materials or equipment delivered to the Site that might be affected by weather. 2.03 TEMPORARY SANITARY FACILITIES A. Provide sanitary facilities at the Site from the commencement of the Project until Project conclusion. Maintain these facilities in a clean and sanitary condition at all times,and comply with the requirements of the local health authority. On large sites, provide portable toilets at such locations that no point in the Site shall be more than 600 feet from a toilet. B. Use these sanitary facilities. Do not use restrooms within existing or Owner-occupied buildings. 2.04 TEMPORARY HEAT A. Provide heating devices needed to protect buildings during construction. Provide fuel needed to operate the heating devices and attend the heating devices at all times they are in operation, including overnight operations. Temporary Facilities and Controls 0150 00-2 Commodore Park Improvements, Phase 1-#23173 Rev 8/2019 2.05 TEMPORARY UTILITIES A. Provide the temporary utilities for administration, construction, testing, disinfection, and start-up of the Work, including electrical power, water, and telephone. Pay all costs associated with furnishing temporary utilities. 1. Provide a source of temporary electrical power of adequate size for construction procedures. a. Use existing power systems where spare capacity is available. Provide temporary power connections that do not adversely affect the existing power supply. Submit connections to the OAR for approval prior to installation. b. Provide electrical pole and service connections that comply with Laws and Regulations and the requirements of the power company. 2. Provide telephone service to the Site and install telephones inside the Contractor's and the OPT's field office. 2.06 WATER FOR CONSTRUCTION A. Provide temporary water. Potable water may be purchased from the Owner by obtaining a water meter from the Owner and transporting water from a water hydrant. Non-potable water may be used for hydraulic testing of non-potable basins or pipelines. Include the cost of water in the Contract Price. B. Contractor must comply with the City of Corpus Christi's Water Conservation and Drought Contingency Plan as amended (the "Plan"). This includes implementing water conservation measures established for changing conditions. The City Engineer will provide a copy of the Plan to Contractor at the pre-construction meeting. The Contractor will keep a copy of the Plan on the Site throughout construction. 3.00 EXECUTION 3.01 LOCATION OF TEMPORARY FACILITIES A. Locate temporary facilities in areas approved by the OAR. Construct and install signs at locations approved by the OAR. Install informational signs so they are clearly visible. 3.02 PROJECT IDENTIFICATION AND SIGNS A. The Owner will furnish one(1) BOND sign to be installed by the Contractor.The sign must be installed before construction begins and will be maintained throughout the Project period by the Contractor. The location of the sign will be determined in the field by the OAR. B. Contractor signs are allowed at the Contractor's expense and may require permitting and approval by Development Services. 3.03 TEMPORARY LIGHTING A. Provide temporary lighting inside buildings once buildings are weatherproof. B. Provide lighting that is adequate to perform Work within any space. Temporary lights may be removed once the permanent lighting is in service. Temporary Facilities and Controls 0150 00-3 Commodore Park Improvements, Phase 1-#23173 Rev 8/2019 C. Provide portable flood lights at any time that Work will be performed outside the structure at night. Provide adequate lighting at any location Work is being performed. 3.04 DRINKING WATER A. Provide all field offices with potable water. Provide a dispenser and cooling apparatus if bottled drinking water is provided. B. Pay for water services and maintain daily. 3.05 CONSTRUCTION FENCE A. Install and maintain a construction fence around the laydown area. Fence must be a minimum 6 feet high chain link construction unless shown otherwise. Provide gates with padlocks. Project fencing requires screening with project rendering image. 3.06 REMOVAL OF TEMPORARY FACILITIES A. Remove temporary buildings,sheds,and utilities at the conclusion of the Project and restore the Site to original condition or finished in accordance with the Drawings. B. Remove informational signs upon completion of construction. C. Remove Project identification signs, framing, supports, and foundations upon completion of the Project. 3.07 MAINTENANCE AND JANITORIAL SERVICE A. Provide janitorial service (sweeping/mopping)for the OPT's field office on a weekly basis or as requested. Empty trash receptacles daily or as needed. B. Maintain signs and supports in a neat, clean condition. Repair damage to structures, framings, or signs. C. Repair any damage to Work caused by placement or removal of temporary signage. D. Service, maintain, and replace, if necessary, the OPT's field office computer equipment throughout the Project as required by the OPT including replacement cartridges for all office equipment. END OF SECTION Temporary Facilities and Controls 0150 00-4 Commodore Park Improvements, Phase 1-#23173 Rev 8/2019 01 57 00 TEMPORARY CONTROLS 1.00 GENERAL 1.01 WORK INCLUDED A. Provide labor, materials, equipment, and incidentals necessary to construct temporary facilities to provide and maintain control over environmental conditions at the Site. Remove temporary facilities when no longer needed. B. Construct temporary impounding works, channels, diversions, furnishing and operation of pumps, installing piping and fittings, and other construction for control of conditions at the Site. Remove temporary controls at the end of the Project. C. Provide a Storm Water Pollution Prevention Plan (SWPPP) as required by Texas Pollutant Discharge Elimination System (TPDES) General Permit No. TXR150000 for stormwater discharges from construction activities as applicable to the nature and size of the Project. Comply with all requirements of the Texas Commission on Environmental Quality(TCEQ)and Laws and Regulations. File required legal notices and obtain required permits prior to beginning any construction activity. D. Provide labor, materials, equipment, and incidentals necessary to prevent stormwater pollution for the duration of the Project. Provide and maintain erosion and sediment control structures as required to preventive sediment and other pollutants from the Site from entering any stormwater system including open channels. Remove pollution control structures when no longer required to prevent stormwater pollution. 1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Construct and maintain temporary controls with adequate workmanship using durable materials to provide effective environmental management systems meeting the requirements of the Contract Documents and Laws and Regulations. Use materials that require minimal maintenance to prevent disruption of construction activities while providing adequate protection of the environment. B. Periodically inspect systems to determine that they are meeting the requirements of the Contract Documents. 1.03 DOCUMENT SUBMITTAL A. Provide documents requiring approval by the OPT as Shop Drawings in accordance with Article 2S of SECTION 00 72 00 GENERAL CONDITIONS. B. Provide copies of notices, records, and reports required by the Contract Documents or Laws and Regulations as Record Data in accordance with Article 26 of SECTION 00 72 00 GENERAL CONDITIONS. 1.04 STANDARDS A. Provide a SWPPP that complies with all requirements of TPDES General Permit No. TXR150000 and any other applicable Laws and Regulations. Temporary Controls 0157 00- 1 Commodore Park Improvements, Phase 1-#23173 Rev 8/2019 B. Perform Work to comply with the City of Corpus Christi Code of Ordinances, Part III, Chapter 14, Article X - titled "STORM WATER QUALITY MANAGEMENT PLANS" and any other applicable Laws and Regulations. 1.05 PERMITS A. As applicable, submit the following to the TCEQ and the Operator of any Municipal Separate Storm Sewer System (MS4) receiving stormwater discharges from the Site: 1. Notice of Intent (NOI) at least 48 hours prior to beginning construction activity. Construction activity may commence 24 hours after the submittal of an electronic NOI. 2. Notice of Change (NOC) letter when relevant facts or incorrect information was submitted in the NOI, or if relevant information in the NOI changes during the course of construction activity. 3. Notice of Termination (NOT) when the construction Project has been completed and stabilized. B. Post a copy of the NOI at the Site in a location where it is readily available for viewing by the general public and as required by Laws and Regulations prior to starting construction activities and maintain the posting until completion of the construction activities. C. Maintain copies of a schedule of major construction activities, inspection reports, and revision documentation with the SWPPP. D. Development Services Department (DSD) has approved plans for construction. Contractor must register with DSD as the contractor of record and obtain a final permit prior to commencing construction work. 1.06 STORMWATER POLLUTION CONTROL A. Comply with the current requirements of TPDES General Permit No. TXR150000 as set forth by the TCEQ for the duration of the Project as applicable to the nature of the work and the total disturbed area: 1. Develop a SWPPP meeting all requirements of the TPDES General Permit. 2. Submit of a Notice of Intent to the TCEQ. 3. Develop and implement appropriate Best Management Practices as established by local agencies of jurisdiction. 4. Provide all monitoring and/or sampling required for reporting to the TCEQ. 5. Submit reports to the TCEQ as required as a condition of the TPDES General Permit. 6. Submit copies of the reports to the Designer as Record Data in accordance with Article 26 of SECTION 00 72 00 GENERAL CONDITIONS. 7. Retain copies of these documents at the Site at all times for review and inspection by the OPT or regulatory agencies. Post a copy of the permit as required by Laws and Regulations. 8. Assume sole responsibility for implementing, updating, and modifying the TPDES General Permit per Laws and Regulations for the SWPPP and Best Management Practices. Temporary Controls 0157 00-2 Commodore Park Improvements, Phase 1-#23173 Rev 8/2019 B. Use forms required by the TCEQ to file the Notice of Intent. Submit the Notice of Intent at least 2 days prior to the start of construction. Develop the SWPPP prior to submitting the Notice of Intent. Provide draft copies of the Notice of Intent,SWPPP,and any other pertinent TCEQ submittal documents to Owner for review prior to submittal to the TCEQ. C. Return any property disturbed by construction activities to either specified conditions or pre- construction conditions as set forth in the Contract Documents. Provide an overall erosion and sedimentation control system that will protect all undisturbed areas and soil stockpiles/spoil areas. Implement appropriate Best Management Practices and techniques to control erosion and sedimentation and maintain these practices and techniques in effective operating condition during construction. Permanently stabilize exposed soil and fill as soon as practical during the Work. D. Assume sole responsibility for the means, methods,techniques, sequences, and procedures for furnishing, installing, and maintaining erosion and sedimentation control structures and procedures and overall compliance with the TPDES General Permit. Modify the system as required to effectively control erosion and sediment. E. Retain copies of reports required by the TPDES General Permit for 3 years from date of Final Completion. 1.07 POLLUTION CONTROL A. Prevent the contamination of soil, water, or atmosphere by the discharge of noxious substances from construction operations. Provide adequate measures to prevent the creation of noxious air-borne pollutants. Prevent dispersal of pollutants into the atmosphere. Do not dump or otherwise discharge noxious or harmful fluids into drains or sewers, nor allow noxious liquids to contaminate public waterways in any manner. B. Provide equipment and personnel and perform emergency measures necessary to contain any spillage. 1. Contain chemicals in protective areas and do not dump on soil. Dispose of such materials at off-site locations in an acceptable manner. 2. Excavate contaminated soil and dispose at an off-site location if contamination of the soil does occur. Fill resulting excavations with suitable backfill and compact to the density of the surrounding undisturbed soil. 3. Provide documentation to the Owner which states the nature and strength of the contaminant, method of disposal, and the location of the disposal site. 4. Comply with Laws and Regulations regarding the disposal of pollutants. C. Groundwater or run-off water which has come into contact with noxious chemicals, sludge, or sludge-contaminated soil is considered contaminated. Contaminated water must not be allowed to enter streams or water courses, leave the Site in a non-contained form, or enter non-contaminated areas of the Site. 1. Pump contaminated water to holding ponds constructed by the Contractor for this purpose, or discharge to areas on the interior of the Site, as designated by the OAR. 2. Construct temporary earthen dikes or take other precautions and measures as required to contain the contaminated water and pump to a designated storage area. Temporary Controls 0157 00-3 Commodore Park Improvements, Phase 1-#23173 Rev 8/2019 3. Wash any equipment used for handling contaminated water or soil within contaminated areas three times with uncontaminated water prior to using such equipment in an uncontaminated area. Dispose of wash water used to wash such equipment as contaminated water. 1.08 EARTH CONTROL A. Remove excess soil, spoil materials, and other earth not required for backfill at the time of generation. Control stockpiled materials to eliminate interference with Contractor and Owner's operations. B. Dispose of excess earth off the Site. Provide written approval from the property owner for soils deposited on private property. Obtain approval of the Owner if this disposal impacts the use of Site or other easements. 1.09 OZONE ADVISORY DAYS—NOT APPLICABLE A. Do not conduct roofing, priming, or hot-mix paving operations, except for repairs, on days the City Engineer has notified Contractor that an ozone advisory is in effect. An extension of time will be allowed for each day for which priming or hot mix paving was scheduled, crews were prepared to perform this Work and the City Engineer issued ozone alert prevents this Work. Contractor will be compensated at the unit price indicated in the Bid for each day for which an extension of time was granted due to an ozone alert. 1.10 MANAGEMENT OF WATER A. Manage water resulting from rains or ground water at the Site. Maintain trenches and excavations free of water at all times. B. Lower the water table in the construction area by acceptable means if necessary to maintain a dry and workable condition at all times. Provide drains, sumps, casings, well points, and other water control devices as necessary to remove excess water. C. Provide continuous operation of water management actions. Maintain standby equipment to provide proper and continuous operation for water management. D. Ensure that water drainage does not damage adjacent property. Divert water into the same natural watercourse in which its headwaters are located, or other natural stream or waterway as approved by the Owner. Assume responsibility for the discharge of water from the Site. E. Remove the temporary construction and restore the Site in a manner acceptable to the OAR and to match surrounding material at the conclusion of the Work. 1.11 DEWATERING— NOT APPLICABLE A. This item is considered subsidiary for all dewatering methods other than "well pointing" to the appropriate bid items as described in the Bid Form where dewatering is needed to keep the excavation dry, as approved by the Designer, and shall include all costs to provide a dry foundation for the proposed improvements. Temporary Controls 0157 00-4 Commodore Park Improvements, Phase 1-#23173 Rev 8/2019 B. Storm water that enters an excavation can be pumped out as long as care is taken to minimize solids and mud entering the pump suction and flow is pumped to a location that allows for sheet flow prior to entering a storm water drainage ditch or storm water inlet. C. An alternative to sheet flow is to pump storm water to an area where ponding occurs naturally without leaving the designated work area or by a manmade berm(s) prior to entering the storm water system. Sheet flow and ponding is to allow solids screening and/or settling prior to entering a storm water conduit or inlet. D. Storm water or groundwater shall not be discharged to private property without permission. It is the intent that Contractor discharges groundwater primarily into the existing storm water system, provided that the quality of groundwater is equal to or better than the receiving stream,the Laguna Madre. E. Testing of groundwater quality is to be performed by the Contractor, at the Contractor's expense, prior to commencing discharge and shall be retested by the Contractor, at the Contractor's expense, a minimum of once a week. Contractor shall coordinate with the Owner on all testing. Tests will also be performed as each new area of construction is started. F. Another option for disposal of groundwater by Contractor would include pumping to the nearest wastewater system. If discharging to temporary holding tanks and trucking to a wastewater or wastewater plant, the costs for these operations shall be negotiated. Other groundwater disposal alternatives or solutions may be approved by the Designer on a case by case basis. G. Prior to pumping groundwater from a trench to the wastewater system the Contractor shall contact Wastewater Pre-treatment Coordinator at 826-1817 to obtain a "no cost" permit from the Owner's Waste Water Department. Contractor will pay for any water quality testing or water analysis cost required. The permit will require an estimate of groundwater flow. Groundwater flow can be estimated by boring a hole or excavating a short trench then record water level shortly after completion, allow to sit overnight, record water level again, pump hole or trench dry to a holding tank or vacuum truck then record how long it takes to fill to original level and overnight level. 1.12 DISPOSAL OF CONTAMINATED GROUNDWATER— NOT APPLICABLE A. An allowance will be included in the Bid for the unanticipated disposal of contaminated groundwater. This allowance may not be needed but is provided in case contaminated groundwater is encountered during the course of the Project and does not meet the water quality requirements for discharge into the storm water or wastewater systems. This allowance includes all materials, tools, equipment, labor, transportation, hauling, coordination, and proper disposal of the contaminated water at an approved landfill, deep water injection well, or other site as agreed to by the Designer. Suggested disposal facilities would be [US Ecology (USET) in Robstown, Texas or Texas Molecular in Corpus Christi, Texas]. B. The payment for this Work will be based on the Contractor's actual costs and will be negotiated. Payment will not include costs associated with routine dewatering, which is considered subsidiary to the appropriate bid items as described in Paragraph 1.11. Temporary Controls 0157 00-5 Commodore Park Improvements, Phase 1-#23173 Rev 8/2019 1.13 DISPOSAL OF HIGHLY CHLORINATED WATER—NOT APPLICABLE A. Dispose of water used for testing, disinfection, and line flushing. Comply with Owner's requirements and Laws and Regulation regarding the disposal of contaminated water, including water with levels of chlorine,which exceed the permissible limits for discharge into wetlands or environmentally sensitive areas. Comply with the requirements of all regulatory agencies in the disposal of all water used in the Project. Include a description and details for disposal of this water in a Plan of Action per SECTION 0135 00 SPECIAL PROCEDURES. Do not use the Owner's wastewater system for disposal of contaminated water. 1.14 WINDSTORM CERTIFICATION A. All affected materials and installation shall comply with Texas Department of Insurance Requirements for windstorm resistant construction for design wind speed as required by the current version of the International Building Code (IBC). When applicable, [Contractor] Owner shall be responsible for contracting with a licensed structural engineer in the State of Texas to perform all inspections and provide documentation for windstorm certification to the Texas Board of Insurance. The Contractor shall be responsible for providing all necessary design/assembly documentation for all new windows, doors, louvers, etc. to the windstorm engineer/inspectors required to conform with the requirements of the Texas Department of Insurance. 2.00 PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS A. Provide materials that comply with Laws and Regulations. 3.00 EXECUTION 3.01 CONSTRUCTING, MAINTAINING AND REMOVING TEMPORARY CONTROLS A. Construct temporary controls in accordance with Laws and Regulations. B. Maintain controls in accordance with regulatory requirements where applicable, or in accordance with the requirements of the Contract Documents. C. Remove temporary controls when no longer required, but before the Project is complete. Correct any damage or pollution that occurs as the result of removing controls while they are still required. END OF SECTION Temporary Controls 0157 00-6 Commodore Park Improvements, Phase 1-#23173 Rev 8/2019 SECTION 00 0101 -SEALS PAGE ARCHITECT: PHILIP RAMIREZ TURNER,RAMIREZ,&ASSOCIATES 3751 S.ALAMEDA ST. CORPUS CHRISTI,TX 78411 V 361.994.8900 F 361.994.8955 E philip@trarch.com STRUCTURAL: ROBERT E. MARTINEZ, P.E. OF * * REM ENGINEERING iiiI oiRiauFz Maim¢ 2218 BASSE ROAD 89387 SAN ANTONIO,TX 78213 ss"CENO. 7/3/25 V 210.320.1199 THE SEAL APPEARING ON U E robert@remengineeringcorp.com THIS DOCUMENT WAS AUTHORIZED l/ BY ROBERT E MARTINEZ.RE /89387 T.B.P E. RRM NO. 6944 MECHANICAL/ELECTRICAL/PLUMBING: OF 1 JOHN RODRIGUEZ, P.E. .. T,LI� � NRG ENGINEERING /JOHN A. RODRIGUEZ III% 5656 S. STAPLES /.................................... 90273 7/03/2025 CORPUS CHRISTI,TX 78411 fog�/C V 1 361.852.2727 E jrod@nrgcc.com THE SEAL APPEARING ON THIS DOCUMENT WAS AUTHORIZED BY JOHN A.RODRIGUEZ III,P.E.#90273.T.B.P.E.FIRM NO.5318. CIVI L: 0•�E of rFs MICHAEL YORK,P.E. .• .............::t I YORK ENGINEERING * MICHAEL C.YORK j I,•••:,•„••„•„•,,,,,•„:„:.... 9708 S. PADRE ISLAND DRIVE 124938 CORPUS CHRISTI,TX 78418 A-• 0 0. %-47CENSE�. � 1t%%;`"`:��� V 1 361.985.1115 3 July 2025 E I michael@yorkeng.com THE SEAL APPEARING ON THIS DOCUMENT WAS AUTHORIZED BY MICHAEL C.YORK,P.E.124938.ALTERATION OF A SEALED DOCUMENT WITHOUT PROPER NOTIFICATION TO THE RESPONSIBLE ENGINEER IS AN OFFENSE UNDER THE TEXAS ENGINEERING PRACTICE ACT. END OF SECTION 00 0101 SEALS PAGE 00 01 01- 1 Commodore Park Improvements, Phase 1-#23173 July 3, 2025 SECTION 02 4100 - DEMOLITION PART 1-GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Selective demolition of built site elements. B. Abandonment and removal of existing utilities and utility structures. 1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A. Section 0110 00-Summary: Limitations on Contractor's use of site and premises. B. Section 0150 00 -Temporary Facilities and Controls: Site fences, security, protective barriers, and waste removal. C. Section 01 70 00 - Execution and Closeout Requirements: Project conditions; protection of bench marks, survey control points, and existing construction to remain; reinstallation of removed products;temporary bracing and shoring. D. Section 31 10 00 - Site Clearing: Vegetation and existing debris removal; earth stripping and stockpiling. E. Section 3122 00-Grading: Rough and fine grading. F. Section 31 23 23 - Fill: Filling holes, pits, and excavations generated as a result of removal operations. 1.03 DEFINITIONS A. Demolish: Dismantle, raze, destroy, or wreck any building or structure or any part thereof. B. Remove: Detach or dismantle items from existing construction and dispose of them off site, unless items are indicated to be salvaged or reinstalled. C. Existing to Remain: Designation for existing items that are not to be removed and that are not otherwise indicated to be salvaged or reinstalled. 1.04 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. 29 CFR 1926-Safety and Health Regulations for Construction; Current Edition. PART 2- PRODUCTS-- NOT USED PART 3- EXECUTION 3.01 DEMOLITION A. Remove paving and curbs required to accomplish new work. DEMOLITION 02 4100- 1/4 Commodore Park Improvements-Phase 1 -#23173 July 3, 2025 B. Fill excavations, open pits, and holes in ground areas generated as result of removals, using specified fill; compact fill as specified in Section 3122 00. 3.02 GENERAL PROCEDURES AND PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Comply with requirements in Section 0170 00. B. Comply with applicable codes and regulations for demolition operations and safety of adjacent structures and the public. 1. Obtain required permits. 2. Use of explosives is not permitted. 3. Take precautions to prevent catastrophic or uncontrolled collapse of structures to be removed; do not allow worker or public access within range of potential collapse of unstable structures. 4. Provide, erect, and maintain temporary barriers and security devices. 5. Conduct operations to minimize effects on and interference with adjacent structures and occupants. 6. Do not close or obstruct roadways or sidewalks without permits from authority having jurisdiction. 7. Conduct operations to minimize obstruction of public and private entrances and exits. Do not obstruct required exits at any time. Protect persons using entrances and exits from removal operations. 8. Obtain written permission from owners of adjacent properties when demolition equipment will traverse, infringe upon, or limit access to their property. C. Do not begin removal until receipt of notification to proceed from Owner. D. Do not begin removal until vegetation to be relocated has been removed and vegetation to remain has been protected from damage. E. Protect existing structures and other elements to remain in place and not removed. 1. Provide bracing and shoring. 2. Prevent movement or settlement of adjacent structures. 3. Stop work immediately if adjacent structures appear to be in danger. F. Hazardous Materials: 1. If hazardous materials are discovered during removal operations, stop work and notify Architect and Owner; hazardous materials include regulated asbestos containing materials, lead, PCBs, and mercury. G. Partial Removal of Paving and Curbs: Neatly saw cut at right angle to surface. DEMOLITION 02 4100-2/4 Commodore Park Improvements-Phase 1 -#23173 July 3, 2025 3.03 EXISTING UTILITIES A. Coordinate work with utility companies. Notify utilities before starting work, comply with their requirements, and obtain required permits. B. Protect existing utilities to remain from damage. C. Do not disrupt public utilities without permit from authority having jurisdiction. D. Do not close, shut off, or disrupt existing life safety systems that are in use without at least 7 days prior written notification to Owner. E. Do not close, shut off, or disrupt existing utility branches or take-offs that are in use without at least 3 days prior written notification to Owner. F. Locate and mark utilities to remain; mark using highly visible tags or flags,with identification of utility type; protect from damage due to subsequent construction, using substantial barricades if necessary. G. Remove exposed piping,valves, meters,equipment,supports,and foundations of disconnected and abandoned utilities. 3.04 SELECTIVE DEMOLITION FOR ALTERATIONS A. Existing construction and utilities indicated on drawings are based on casual field observation and existing record documents only. 1. Verify construction and utility arrangements are as indicated. 2. Report discrepancies to Architect before disturbing existing installation. 3. Beginning of demolition work constitutes acceptance of existing conditions that would be apparent upon examination prior to starting demolition. B. Remove existing work as indicated and required to accomplish new work. 1. Remove items indicated on drawings. C. Services including, but not limited to, Plumbing, Electrical, and Telecommunications: Remove existing systems and equipment as indicated. 1. Maintain existing active systems to remain in operation,and maintain access to equipment and operational components. 2. Where existing active systems serve occupied facilities but are to be replaced with new services, maintain existing systems in service until new systems are complete and ready for service. 3. Verify that abandoned services serve only abandoned facilities before removal. 4. Remove abandoned pipe, ducts, conduits, and equipment. Remove back to source of supply where possible, otherwise cap stub and tag with identification. D. Protect existing work to remain. DEMOLITION 02 4100-3/4 Commodore Park Improvements-Phase 1 -#23173 July 3, 2025 1. Prevent movement of structure. Provide shoring and bracing as required. 2. Perform cutting to accomplish removal work neatly and as specified for cutting new work. 3. Repair adjacent construction and finishes damaged during removal work. 4. Patch to match new work. 3.05 DEBRIS AND WASTE REMOVAL A. Remove debris,junk, and trash from site. B. Remove materials not to be reused on site; do not burn or bury. C. Leave site in clean condition, ready for subsequent work. D. Clean up spillage and wind-blown debris from public and private lands. END OF SECTION 02 4100 DEMOLITION 02 4100-4/4 Commodore Park Improvements-Phase 1 -#23173 July 3, 2025 SECTION 03 10 00-CONCRETE FORMWORK PART 1-GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division-1 Specification sections, apply to work of this section. 1.2 DESCRIPTION OF WORK The work of this section includes all labor, materials and equipment required to form all cast-in- place concrete shown on the drawings including but not limited to all slabs,joists, beams, walls, stairs, and equipment pads. 1.3 CODES AND STANDARDS Comply with the provision of the following codes, specifications and standards except where more stringent requirements are shown or specified: A. ACI 301 "Specifications for Structural Concrete for Buildings" B. ACI 318 "Building Code Requirements for Reinforced Concrete" C. Concrete Reinforcing Steel Institute "Reinforced Concrete, Manual of Standard Practice" D. ACI SP-4 "Formwork for Concrete" In addition, all formwork shall be designed, erected, supported, braced, and maintained as a minimum according to ACI Standard 347 "Guide to Formwork". 1.4 RESPONSIBILITY The design, construction and safety of all formwork shall be the responsibility of the General Contractor. The Contractor shall also be responsible for determining when temporary supports, shores, backshores, and other bracing may be safely removed. PART 2- PRODUCTS 2.1 FORMS FOR EXPOSED FINISH CONCRETE Unless otherwise specified, formwork for exposed concrete surfaces shall consist of plywood, metal, metal framed plywood, or other acceptable surface. Formwork shall provide a continuous straight and smooth surface conforming to the joint system as specified on the Architect's drawings. Form material shall have sufficient thickness to withstand pressure of concrete without bow or deflection. Plywood shall be overlaid plywood complying with U.S. Product Standard PS-1 "A-C or B-B High Density Overlaid Concrete Form", Class I, or plywood CONCRETE FORMWORK 03 10 00- 1/5 Commodore Park Improvements—Phase 1 -#23173 July 3, 2025 complying with U.S. Product Standard PS-1 "B-B (Concrete Form) Plywood", Class I, Exterior Grade or better, mill-oiled and edge sealed, with each piece bearing legible inspection trademark. 2.2 FORMS FOR UNEXPOSED FINISH CONCRETE Unless otherwise specified,formwork for unexposed concrete surfaces shall be constructed with plywood, lumber, metal or other acceptable material. Lumber shall be dressed on at least two edges and one side for tight fit. 2.3 FORMWORK COATINGS Formwork coatings shall be a commercial formulation that will not bond with, stain, nor adversely affect concrete surfaces or impair subsequent treatment of concrete surfaces requiring bond or adhesion, nor impede curing with water or curing compounds. Provide a product that has a maximum VOC (Volatile Organic Compounds) of 350 mg/I but not greater than permitted by the local government agency having jurisdiction in the area where the project is located. 2.4 NAILS AND FASTENERS Use only galvanized nails and fasteners for securing formwork in structures exposed to weather or unconditioned spaces such as garages, canopies and porte-cocheres. PART 3- EXECUTION 3.1 FABRICATION AND CONSTRUCTION A. Design, erect, support, brace and maintain formwork to support vertical and lateral loads that might be applied until such loads can be supported by concrete structure. Construct formwork so concrete members and structures are of correct size, shape, alignment, elevation and position. Maintain formwork construction tolerances complying with ACI 347. B. Design formwork to be readily removable without impact, shock or damage to cast-in- place concrete surfaces and adjacent materials. C. Construct forms to sizes, shapes, lines and dimensions shown, and to obtain accurate alignment, location, grades, level and plumb work in finished structures. Provide for openings, offsets, sinkages, keyways, recesses, moldings, rustications, reglets, chamfers, blocking, screeds, bulkheads, anchorages and inserts and other features required in work. Use selected materials to obtain required finishes. Solidly butt joints and provide back-up at joints to prevent leakage of cement paste. D. Fabricate forms for easy removal without hammering or prying against concrete surfaces. Provide crush plates or wrecking plates where stripping may damage cast concrete surfaces. Provide top forms for inclined surfaces where slope is too steep to CONCRETE FORMWORK 03 10 00-2/5 Commodore Park Improvements—Phase 1 -#23173 July 3, 2025 place concrete with bottom forms only. Kerf wood inserts for forming keyways, reglets, recesses, and the like,to prevent swelling and for easy removal. E. Provide temporary openings where interior area of formwork is inaccessible for cleanout, for inspection before concrete placement, and for placement of concrete. Securely brace temporary openings and patch forms to prevent loss of concrete mortar. Locate temporary openings on forms at inconspicuous locations. F. Chamfer exposed corners and edges as indicated, using wood, metal, PVC or rubber chamfer strips fabricated to produce uniform smooth lines and tight edge joints. G. Form Ties: Factory-fabricated, adjustable-length, removable or snapoff metal form ties, designed to prevent form deflection, and to prevent spalling concrete surfaces upon removal. Unless otherwise indicated, provide ties so portion remaining within concrete after removal is 1 1/2" inside concrete and will not leave holes larger than 1" diameter in concrete surface. Provide only galvanized form ties in structures exposed to weather or unconditioned spaces. H. Provisions for Other Trades: Provide openings in concrete formwork to accommodate work of other trades. Determine size and location of openings, recesses and chases from trades providing such items. Accurately place and securely support items built into forms. 3.2 CLEANING AND TIGHTENING Thoroughly clean forms and adjacent surfaces to receive concrete. Remove chips, wood, sawdust, dirt, and all other debris just prior to concrete placement. Retighten forms and bracing prior to concrete placement as required to prevent mortar leaks and maintain proper alignment. 3.3 CLEANING AND RE-USE OF FORMS Forms reused in the work shall be repaired and cleaned. Split, frayed, delaminated, or otherwise damaged facing material will not be acceptable for exposed surfaces. Forms intended for successive concrete placement shall have surfaces cleaned, fins and laitance removed, and joints tightened to avoid surface offsets. New form coating compound shall be applied to reused forms. Thin form-coating compounds only with thinning agent of type, and in amount, and under conditions of form-coating compound manufacturer's directions. Do not allow excess form-coating material to accumulate in forms or to come into contact with in-place concrete surfaces against which fresh concrete will be placed. Apply in compliance with manufacturer's instructions. Coat steel forms with a non-staining, rust-preventative form oil or otherwise protect against rusting. Rust-stained steel formwork is not acceptable. 3.4 TOLERANCES Unless specified otherwise, all tolerances for concrete formwork shall conform to ACI Standard 117, "Standard Tolerances for Concrete Construction and Materials". Before concrete CONCRETE FORMWORK 03 10 00-3/5 Commodore Park Improvements—Phase 1 -#23173 July 3, 2025 placement the Contractor shall check lines and levels of erected formwork and make any corrections and adjustments as required to ensure proper size and location of concrete members and stability of forming systems. During concrete placement the Contractor shall check formwork and supports to ensure that forms have not displaced and that completed work will be within specified tolerances. 3.5 SHORES AND SUPPORTS A. Definitions 1. Shores: Vertical or inclined support members designed to carry the weight of formwork, concrete, and construction loads above. 2. Reshores: Shores placed snugly under a stripped concrete structural member after the original forms and shores have been removed from the member, thus requiring the member to carry its own weight and superimposed construction loads at the time of installation. Reshores are assumed to carry no load at the time of installation. After the installation of reshores, superimposed construction loads are assumed to be distributed among all members connected by reshores. 3. Backshores: Shores placed snugly under a stripped concrete structural member after the original formwork and shores have been removed from a small area without allowing the structural member to deflect or support its own weight or superimposed construction loads. It is assumed that backshores carry the same load as that carried by the original shores they replace. Comply with ACI 347 for shoring, reshoring and backshoring in concrete construction and as herein specified where more stringent: B. Structures with Three Supported Levels or Less: Extend shoring from soil supported slab or suitable subgrade to uppermost level for structures with three structurally supported levels or less. 3.6 REMOVAL OF FORMS AND SUPPORTS A. Curing and Stripping Concrete Cylinders: The General Contractor shall be responsible for making and curing stripping concrete cylinders, cured under field conditions, for the purpose of determining concrete strength at time of form and shore removal. Such cylinders shall be made by the Contractor and tested by his testing laboratory. B. Formwork Not Supporting Concrete: CONCRETE FORMWORK 03 10 00-4/5 Commodore Park Improvements—Phase 1 -#23173 July 3, 2025 Formwork not supporting concrete such as sides of beams, walls, columns and similar parts of the structure, may be removed after cumulatively (not necessarily consecutively) curing at not less than 50°F for 12 hours after placing concrete, provided the concrete is sufficiently hard so as not to be damaged by form removal operations and provided curing and protection operations are maintained. If ambient air temperatures remain below 507 or if retarding agents are used, then this specified minimum period should be increased as required to safely remove the forms without damage to the concrete. Where such forms also support formwork for slab or beam soffits,the removal times of the latter shall govern. END OF SECTION 03 10 00 CONCRETE FORMWORK 03 10 00-5/5 Commodore Park Improvements—Phase 1 -#23173 July 3, 2025 SECTION 031113.11 CONCRETE FORMS PART 1-GENERAL 1.01 Description A. This specification shall govern work required for the installation and removal of Concrete Forms as required to complete the project. 1.02 References The latest edition of the referenced item below shall be used. A. American Concrete Institute B. Texas Department of Transportation (TxDOT) Standard Specification for Construction and Maintenance of Highways,Streets,and Bridges Item 420,Concrete Structures 1.03 Submittals A. Forming plans shall be submitted to the Owner for review as specified. PART 2-PRODUCTS 2.01 General A. Forms may be of either wood or metal,except where otherwise specified or directed by the Owner. B. Forms shall be straight,free from warp,and of a depth equal to the thickness of the finished work. C. Forms shall be practically mortar-tight,rigidly braced and strong enough to prevent bulging between supports and maintained to the proper line and grade during concrete placement. 2.02 Form Design and Form Plans A. Forms shall be designed for the pressure exerted by a liquid weighing 150 pounds per cubic foot. 1. The rate of placing the concrete shall be taken into consideration in determining the depth of the equivalent liquid. B. For job-fabricated forms,an additional live load of fifty pounds per square foot(50 psf)shall be allowed on horizontal surfaces. C. Commercially produced structural units used in formwork shall not exceed the manufacturer's maximum allowable working load for moment,shear or end reaction. D. The maximum working load shall include a live load of thirty-five pounds per square foot (35 psf) of horizontal form surface and sufficient details and data shall be submitted for use in checking formwork details for approval. E. Forming plans shall be submitted to the Owner for approval when specified. 2.03 Wood Forms A. Lumber 1. Lumber for forms shall be properly seasoned,of good quality,and free from imperfections which would affect its strength or impair the finished surface of the concrete. 2. The lumber used for facing or sheathing shall be finished on at least one(1)side and two(2)edges and shall be sized to uniform thickness. B. Plywood 1. Forms may be constructed of plywood not less than one-half inch(1/2")in thickness,with no form lining required. 2. The grain of the face plies on plywood forms shall be placed parallel to the span between the supporting studs or joists. 3. Plywood used for forming surfaces which remain exposed shall be equal to that specified as B-B Plyform Class I or Class II. C. Reuse of Lumber or Plywood Forms 1. Forms or form lumbers to be reused shall be maintained clean and in good condition. 2. Any lumber or plywood which is split, warped, bulged, marred or has defects that will produce inferior work shall not be used and,if condemned,shall be promptly removed from the work. D. Liner 1. Form lining will be required for all formed surfaces,except for the inside of culvert barrels,inlets and manholes; surfaces that are subsequently covered by backfill material or are completely enclosed; and,any surface formed by a single finished board. 2. Lining will not be required when plywood forms are used. CONCRETE FORMS 03 11 13.11-1 3. Form lining shall be of an approved type such as Masonite or plywood. 4. Thin membrane sheeting,such as polyethylene sheets,shall not be used for form lining. 2.04 Metal Forms A. The foregoing requirements for timber forms as regard to design, mortar-tightness, filleted corners, beveled projections, bracing, alignment, removal, reuse and wetting shall also apply to metal forms, except that these will not require lining,unless specifically noted on the plans. B. The thickness of form metal shall be as required to maintain the true shape without warping or bulging. C. All bolt and rivet heads on the facing sides shall be countersunk. D. Clamps, pins or other connecting devices shall be designed to hold the forms rigidly together and to allow removal without injury to the concrete. E. Metal forms which do not present a smooth surface or line up properly shall not be used. F. Metal shall be kept free from rust,grease or other foreign materials. 2.05 Molding A. Molding specified for chamfer strips or other uses shall be made of materials of a grade that will not split when nailed and which can be maintained to a true line without warping. B. Wood molding shall be mill cut and dressed on all faces. C. Unless otherwise provided, forms shall be filleted at all sharp corners and edges with triangular chamfer strips measuring three-fourths inch(3/4") on the sides. 2.06 Metal Form Ties A. Metal form ties of an approved type or a satisfactory substitute shall be used to hold forms in place and shall be of a type that permits ease of removal of the metal as hereinafter specified. B. Devices holding metal ties in place shall be capable of developing the strength of the tie and adjustable to allow for proper alignment. 2.07 Form Removal Coating A. Shall be oil or other bond breaking coating of such composition that it will not discolor or otherwise injuriously affect the concrete surface,which is approved by the Owner. PART 3-EXECUTION 3.01 General Information A. All Work shall be in accordance with the Contract, Specifications, Drawings, Manufacturer recommendations,and industry standards. 1. In the event that a requirement conflicts with another the more stringent requirement shall be followed,unless directed otherwise by the Owner. 3.02 Supports A. Studs and joists shall be spaced so that the facing form material remains in true alignment under the imposed loads. B. Shall be securely staked to line and grade and maintained in a true position during the depositing of concrete. 3.03 Form Walls A. Walls shall be spaced close enough to hold forms securely to the designated lines and scabbed at least four-feet(4') on each side of joints to provide continuity. B. A row of walls shall be placed near the bottom of each placement. C. Adequate clean-out openings shall be proved for narrow walls and other locations where access to the bottom of the forms is not readily attainable. D. Facing material shall be placed with parallel and square joints and securely fastened to supporting studs. E. Forms for surfaces receiving only an ordinary finish and exposed to view shall be placed with the form panels symmetrical,i.e.,long dimensions set in the same direction. F. Forms for round columns exposed to view shall be of steel,except that other materials will be allowed with written permission of the Owner. G. Horizontal joints shall be continuous. H. All forms shall be constructed to permit their removal without marring or damaging the concrete. 1. The forms maybe given a slight draft to permit ease of removal. I. Offset at form joints shall not exceed one-sixteenth inch(1/16"). 1. Forms shall conform to the specified radius when placed on curves. CONCRETE FORMS 03 11 13.11-2 K. All forms and footing areas shall be cleaned of any extraneous matter before placing concrete. L. Permission to place concrete will not be given until all such formwork is completed to the satisfaction of the Owner. M. If, at any stage of the work, the forms show signs of bulging or sagging, the portion of the concrete causing such condition shall be removed immediately, if necessary, and the forms shall be reset and securely braced against further movement 3.04 Spreaders A. Metal and wooden spreaders which are separate from the forms shall be removed entirely as the concrete is being placed. 3.05 Metal Appliances A. All metal appliances used inside of forms for alignment purposes shall be removed to a depth of at least one-half inch(1/2")from the concrete surface. B. They shall be made so the metal may be removed without undue chipping or spalling, and when removed,shall leave a smooth opening in the concrete surface. C. Burning off of rods,bolts or ties will not be permitted. D. Any wire ties used shall be cut back at least one-half inch(1/2")from the face of the concrete. 3.06 Railing and Ornamental Work A. Forms for railing and ornamental work shall be constructed to standards equivalent to first-class millwork. B. All moldings,panel work and bevel strips shall be straight and true with nearly mitered joints designed so the finished work is true,sharp and clean cut. 3.07 Form Removal Coating A. Prior to placing concrete reinforcement,the facing of all forms shall be treated with oil or other bond breaking coating of such composition that it will not discolor or otherwise injuriously affect the concrete surface. 3.08 Removal of Forms A. Except as herein provided,forms for vertical surfaces may be removed when the concrete has aged not less than one (1) day when Type I and Type Il cement is used, and not less than one-half(1/2) day when Type III cement is used,provided it can be done without damage to the concrete. B. Forms for inside curb faces may be removed in approximately three(3)hours provided it can be done without damage to the curb. C. Weight-supporting forms shall be removed once the concrete has attained a compressive strength of 2,500 psi or as directed by the Owner. CONCRETE FORMS 03 11 13.11-3 SECTION 03 20 00- CONCRETE REINFORCEMENT PART 1-GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division 1 Specification Sections apply to work of this section. 1.2 DESCRIPTION OF WORK The work of this section includes labor, materials, hardware, equipment, transportation and services required to fabricate and place all reinforcement for cast-in-place concrete including bars,welded wire fabric,ties and supports shown on the drawings and as specified. 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Codes and Standards: Comply with all provisions of the following codes, specifications and standards except where more stringent requirements are shown or specified: 1. ACI 315, "ACI Manual of Standard Practice for Detailing Reinforced Concrete Structures". 2. ACI 318, "Building Code Requirements for Reinforced Concrete." 3. Concrete Reinforcing Steel Institute, "Reinforced Concrete, Manual of Standard Practice". 4. Concrete Reinforcing Steel Institute, "Placing Reinforcing Bars." 1.4 SHOP DRAWINGS A. Shop drawings and samples for all reinforcing steel and related accessories shall be submitted for the Engineer's approval. B. Shop Drawings shall show layout, bending and assembly diagrams, bar schedules, stirrup spacing, splicing and laps of bars and shall be prepared in accordance with ACI 315. 1.5 TESTING AND INSPECTION Perform all tests and inspections specified in Laboratory Testing Section of these specifications. CONCRETE REINFORCEMENT 03 20 00- 1/4 Commodore Park Improvements—Phase 1 -#23173 July 3, 2025 PART 2- PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS A. Reinforcement: 1. Reinforcing Steel: All reinforcing steel shall conform to the " Standard Specification for Deformed and Plain Billet-Steel Bars for Concrete Reinforcement," ASTM A615 Grade 60 unless noted otherwise on the drawings. All reinforcing steel required to be welded shall conform to ASTM A 706 "Standard Specification for Low-Alloy Steel Deformed Bars for Concrete Reinforcement". 2. Tie Wire: Tie wire shall be annealed steel tie wire, minimum 16 gauge. Provide only plastic coated or stainless steel tie wire in exposed concrete structures and all architectural concrete. B. Supports for Reinforcement: Provide supports for reinforcement including bolsters, chairs, spacers and other devices for spacing, supporting and fastening reinforcing bars and welded wire fabric in place. Use wire bar type supports complying with CRSI recommendations. 1. Slabs-on-Grade: Use supports with sand plates or horizontal runners. 2.2 SPLICES A. Splice Type and Lap Lengths: Required splice type and lap lengths are defined on the drawings. Lap splice lengths for unscheduled bars not shown otherwise on the drawings shall be 40 bar diameters minimum. PART 3- EXECUTION 3.1 FABRICATION AND DELIVERY A. Bending and Forming: Fabricate bars of indicated sizes and accurately form to shapes and lengths indicated and required, by methods not injurious to materials. Do not heat reinforcement for bending. Bars with kinks or bends not scheduled will be rejected. B. Marking and Shipping: CONCRETE REINFORCEMENT 03 20 00-2/4 Commodore Park Improvements—Phase 1 -#23173 July 3, 2025 Bundle reinforcement and tag with suitable identification to facilitate sorting and placing. Transport and store at site so as not to damage material. Keep sufficient supply of tested, approved and proper reinforcement at the site to avoid delays. Maintain reinforcing bars free of mud, dirt, grease, or other coating. 3.2 PLACING REINFORCEMENT A. Comply with Concrete Reinforcing Steel Institute's recommended practice for "Placing Reinforcing Bars", for details and methods of reinforcement placement and supports and as herein specified. B. Before placing and again before concrete is placed, clean reinforcement of loose rust and mill scale, earth, ice and other materials which reduce or destroy bond with concrete. C. Accurately position, support and secure reinforcement against displacement by formwork, construction, or concrete placement operations. Locate and support reinforcing by metal chairs, runners, bolsters, spacers and hangers, as required. Exercise particular care to maintain proper distance and clearance between parallel bars and between bars and forms. Provide metal spreaders and spacers to hold steel in position. Support steel at proper height upon approved chairs. D. Place reinforcement to obtain at least minimum coverages for concrete protection. Arrange, space and securely tie bars and bar supports to hold reinforcement in position during concrete placement operations. Set wire ties so ends are directed into concrete, not toward exposed concrete surfaces. E. Coordinate with other trades and expedite materials and labor to avoid omissions and delay. F. Install waterproof membrane or moisture barrier as specified prior to placing steel for concrete slabs-on-grade. G. Extend reinforcement continuous through construction joints or, if approved on the shop drawings, provide dowels of sufficient length to develop the full tension or compression strength of the bar as applicable. H. Provide and place additional reinforcing steel at all sleeves and openings in beams, slabs and walls as specified on the drawings. Where reinforcement is interrupted by sleeves or openings not shown on the drawings, consult with Engineer for instructions for placing and splicing of bars. Provide required additional reinforcing steel at no additional cost to the Owners. 3.3 REINFORCING STEEL SPACING AND COVERAGE A. Reinforcing Steel Coverage CONCRETE REINFORCEMENT 03 20 00-3/4 Commodore Park Improvements—Phase 1 -#23173 July 3, 2025 Reinforcing steel coverage should conform to the requirements specified in the General Notes. Cover specified shall be considered minimums that may require increasing where reinforcing steel intersects for different member types. Cover in structural members not specified in the General Notes shall conform to the requirements of ACI 318-08 Section 7.7 unless specified otherwise on the drawings. B. Reinforcing Steel Spacing: The clear distance between parallel bars in a layer shall be not less than the bar diameter nor 1". Where parallel reinforcement is placed in 2 or more layers, bars in the upper layer shall be placed directly above bars in the lower layer with clear distance between layers of not less than 1". 3.4 SPLICING REINFORCING STEEL A. All lap splices in reinforcing steel shall be contact lap splices unless detailed otherwise on the drawings. B. Maintain proper cover between reinforcing bars at splices. C. Lap unscheduled reinforcing bars not otherwise specified a minimum of 40 bar diameters at splices. Lap welded wire fabric a minimum of one full wire mesh plus two inches. 3.5 SHRINKAGE AND TEMPERATURE REINFORCEMENT Provide shrinkage and temperature reinforcement at right angles to main top and bottom bars for all structural slabs unless detailed otherwise on the drawings. See drawings for sizes and spacings. 3.6 MECHANICAL AND PLUMBING REQUIREMENTS Refer to Mechanical and Plumbing Drawings for formed concrete requiring reinforcing steel. Such reinforcement shall be furnished as part of the work of this section. 3.7 QUALITY CONTROL TESTING DURING CONSTRUCTION See Testing Laboratory Services section of these specifications for concrete reinforcement inspection and test requirements. END OF SECTION 03 20 00 CONCRETE REINFORCEMENT 03 20 00-4/4 Commodore Park Improvements—Phase 1 -#23173 July 3, 2025 SECTION 03 2111 REINFORCING STEEL PART 1-GENERAL 1.01 Description A. This specification shall govern work required for the furnishing and placement of Reinforcing Steel as required to complete the project 1.02 Related Sections A. 03 3111 CONCRETE STRUCTURES 1.03 References The latest edition of the referenced item below shall be used. A. American Concrete Institute(ACI)318,Building Code Requirements for Structural Concrete B. ASTM A36/A36M-Standard Specification for Carbon Structural Steel C. ASTM A82/A82M-Standard Specification for Steel Wire,Plain,for Concrete Reinforcement D. ASTM A123/A123M-Standard Specification for Zinc(Hot-Dip Galvanized)Coating on Iron and Steel Products E. ASTM A185/A185M-Standard Specification for Steel Welded Wire Reinforcement,Plain,for Concrete F. ASTM A496/A496M-Standard Specification for Steel Wire,Deformed,for Concrete Reinforcement G. ASTM A615/A615M-Standard Specification for Deformed and Plain Carbon-Steel Bars for Concrete Reinforcement H. ASTM A675/A675M-Standard Specification for Steel Bars,Carbon,Hot-Wrought,Special Quality,Mechanical Properties I. ASTM A706/A706M-Standard Specification for Low-Alloy Steel Deformed and Plain Bars for Concrete Reinforcement J. ASTM A77S/A775M-Standard Specification for Epoxy-Coated Steel Reinforcing Bars K ASTM A884/A884M-Standard Specification for Epoxy-Coated Steel Wire and Welded Wire Reinforcement L. ASTM A934/A934M-Standard Specification for Epoxy-Coated Prefabricated Steel Reinforcing Bars M. ASTM A996/A996M-Standard Specification for Rail-Steel and Axle-Steel Deformed Bars for Concrete Reinforcement N. ASTM D3963-Standard Specification for Fabrication and Jobsite Handling of Epoxy-Coated Steel Reinforcing Bars 0. Texas Department of Transportation(TxDOT)Standard Specification for Construction and Maintenance of Highways,Streets,and Bridges Item 440,Reinforcing Steel P. Texas Department of Transportation (TxDOT) Departmental Material Specification DMS-7320, "Qualification Procedure for Reinforcing Steel Mills" Q. Texas Department of Transportation (TxDOT) Departmental Material Specification DMS-7330, "Qualification Procedure for Reinforcing Steel Epoxy Coating Applicators" R. Texas Department of Transportation(TxDOT)Departmental Material Specification DMS-4510,"Mechanical Couplers" S. Concrete Reinforcing Steel Institute(CRSI) T. American Welding Society AWS D1.4/D1.4M,"Structural Welding Code-Reinforcing Steel" 1.04 Submittals A. Product Information 1. Clearly indicate within submittal that the product is in compliance with this and related Section(s). B. Mill approval letter certified by mill. PART 2-PRODUCTS 2.01 General A. The requirements of the Drawings,Owner,ASTM Designation,and/or ACI requirements shall govern all products. B. In cases where the provisions of this specification are in conflict with the provisions of the ASTM Designation and/or ACI requirements to which reference is made,the provisions of this specification shall govern. C. All bars shall be marked in accordance with ASTM A615 or ASTM A706. D. Furnish copies of a written certification that the reinforcing steel meets the requirements of this Section. 2.02 Approved Mills REINFORCING STEEL 03 2111-1 A. Reinforcement shall be produced by mills that are approved by the Texas Department of Transportation(TxDOT)in accordance with TxDOT DMS-7320. B. Mill certification shall be submitted with each delivery prior to incorporation of the material into the Project. 2.03 Deformed Bar A. Unless otherwise designated on the Drawings,all bar reinforcement shall be deformed. B. Reinforcing Steel must conform to one of the following: 1. ASTM A615,Grades 40 or 60, 2. ASTM A996,Type A,Grades 40 or 60, 3. ASTM A996,Type R,Grade 60,permitted in concrete pavement only(Furnish ASTM A996,Type R bars as straight bars only and do not bend them.Bend tests are not required), 4. ASTM A706 S. ACI 318 C. Large diameter new billet steel(Nos.14 and 18),Grade 75,and will be permitted for straight bars only. D. The nominal size and area and the theoretical weight of reinforcing steel bars covered by this specification is shown in Table 1: Table 1 Size,Area,and Weight of Reinforcing Steel Bars Bar Size Nominal Diameter Nominal Area Weight Per Number (inch) (square inch) Linear Foot 2 0.250 0.05 0.167 3 0.375 0.11 0.376 4 0.500 0.20 0.668 5 0.625 0.31 1.043 6 0.750 0.44 1.502 7 0.875 0.60 2.044 8 1.000 0.79 2.670 9 1.128 1.00 3.400 10 1.270 1.27 4.303 11 1.410 1.56 5.313 14 1.693 2.25 7.600 18 2.257 4.00 13.60 2.04 Smooth Round Bars and Dowels A. Reinforcing Steel must conform to one of the following: 1. ASTM A615,Grades 40 or 60, 2. ASTM A996,Type A,Grades 40 or 60, 3. ASTM A996,Type R,Grade 60,permitted in concrete pavement only(Furnish ASTM A996,Type R bars as straight bars only and do not bend them.Bend tests are not required), 4. ASTM A706 S. ACI 318 B. Large diameter new billet steel(Nos.14 and 18),Grade 75,and will be permitted for straight bars only. C. Smooth bars larger than No.3,provide steel conforming to ASTM A615 or meet the physical requirements of ASTM A36 and ACI 318. D. Concrete pavement 1. Smooth bars and Dowels must have a minimum yield strength of 60 ksi and meet ASTM A615 and ACI 318. 2.05 Spiral Reinforcement A. Spiral reinforcement shall be smooth(not deformed)bars or wire of the minimum diameter shown on the Drawings. B. Bars 1. Bars must comply with ASTM A615,Grade 40;ASTM A996,Type A,Grade 40;or ASTM A675,Grade 80,meeting the dimensional tolerances of ASTM A615,and ACI 318. REINFORCING STEEL 03 2111-2 C. Wire 1. Wire shall be cold-drawn from rods that have been hot-rolled from billets and shall comply with ASTM A185 and ACI 318. 2. Smooth wire must comply with ASTM A82. 3. Deformed wire must comply with ASTM A496. 2.06 Weldable Reinforcing Steel A. Reinforcement shall comply with ASTM A706 or have a carbon equivalent(C.E.)of at most 0.55%. B. Furnish copies of the chemical analysis showing the percentages of carbon,manganese,phosphorus and sulfur and written certification that the reinforcing steel meets the requirements of this Section. 2.07 Welded Wire Fabric A. Provide in rolls or sheets complying with ASTM A185. 2.08 Epoxy Coating 1. Required when and as shown on the Drawings,or as directed by the Owner. 2. The epoxy shall be applied by an approved applicator in accordance with TxDOT DMS-7330,"Qualification Procedure for Reinforcing Steel Epoxy Coating Applicators". 3. Reinforcement is to be coated in accordance with Table 2. Table 2 Epoxy Coating Requirements for Reinforcing Steel Material Specification Bar ASTM A775 or A934 Wire or Fabric ASTM A884 Class A or B Mechanical Couplers As shown on Drawings Hardware As shown on Drawings 4. Epoxy coating material and coating repair material shall comply with TxDOT DMS-8130,"Epoxy Powder Coating for Reinforcing Steel". S. Epoxy-Coated Reinforcement will be sampled and tested in accordance with TxDOT Tex-739-I. 6. Maintain identification of all reinforcing throughout the coating and fabrication and until delivery to the project. 7. Furnish copies of a written certification that the reinforcing steel meets the requirements of this Section and copies of the manufacturers control tests. 2.09 Mechanical Couplers A. When mechanical splices are shown in the Drawings and allowed by the Owner,the following types shall be used: 1. Sleeve-filler, 2. Sleeve-threaded, 3. Sleeve-swaged,or 4. Sleeve-wedge(not permitted on coated reinforcement). B. Furnish only couplers that have been produced by a manufacturer that is approved in accordance with TxDOT DMS-4510, "Mechanical Couplers". C. Couplers must be sampled and tested in accordance with DMS-4510. D. Furnish copies of a written certification that the mechanical couplers meets the requirements of this Section. 2.10 Ties A. Uncoated Reinforcement 1. Ties shall be a minimum of 16 gauge of like material of the reinforcement 2. Be in accordance with the Drawings and ACI 318. B. Coated Reinforcement 1. Ties shall be a minimum of 16 gauge 7 mil PVC coated 2. Be in accordance with the Drawings and ACI 318 3. Be approved by the Owner. 2.11 Spacers and Blocking A. Galvanized Metal Spacers 1. Be galvanized in conformance with ASTM A123. REINFORCING STEEL 03 2111-3 2. Are to be approved for use by Owner. 3. Not allowed with epoxy-coated reinforcement B. Metal Spacers with Plastic Coated Tips 1. Are to be approved for use by Owner. C. Stainless Steel Spacers 1. Shall be type 316 or as directed by Owner. 2. Are to be approved for use by Owner. D. Plastic Spacers 1. For approval of plastic spacers on project,representative samples of the plastic shall show no visible indications of deterioration after immersion in a five percent(5%)solution of sodium hydroxide for 120 hours. 2. Must be used with epoxy-coated reinforcement. E. Pre-cast Mortar or Concrete Blocks 1. Pre-cast mortar or concrete blocks to be used for holding steel in position adjacent to formed surfaces shall be cast in molds meeting the approval of the Owner and shall be cured by covering with wet burlap or cotton mats for a period of 72 hours. 2. The blocks shall be cast in the form of a frustum of a cone or pyramid with the smaller face placed against the forms. 3. A suitable tie wire shall be provided in each block,to be used for anchoring to the steel. 4. Except in unusual cases,and when specifically otherwise authorized by the Owner,the size of the surface to be placed adjacent to the forms shall not exceed two and one-half inches(21/2")square or the equivalent thereof in cases where circular or rectangular areas are provided. S. Blocks shall be cast accurately to the thickness required,and the surface to be placed adjacent to the forms shall be a true plane free of surface imperfections. 6. Not allowed with epoxy-coated reinforcement PART 3-EXECUTION 3.01 General A. All Work shall be in accordance with the Contract, Specifications, Drawings, Manufacturer recommendations, and industry standards. 1. In the event that a requirement conflicts with another the more stringent requirement shall be followed,unless directed otherwise by the Owner. 3.02 Bending A. The reinforcement shall be bent cold,true to the shapes indicated on the Drawings. B. Bending shall preferably be done in the shop. 1. Field bending and method of,will need to be approved by the Owner. C. Irregularities in bending shall be cause for rejection at no cost to the Owner. D. Unless otherwise shown on the Drawings,the inside diameter of bar bends,in terms of the nominal bar diameter(d),shall be as shown in Table 3: Table 3 Minimum Inside Diameter of Bends Bend Bar Size Number(inch) Grade 40 Grade 60 Grade 75 Bends of 90 degree and greater in #3,#4,#5 3d 4d stirrups,ties and other secondary bars that enclose another bar in the bend. #6,#7,#8 4d 6d REINFORCING STEEL 03 2111-4 #3,#4,#5,#6,#7,#8 5d 6d All bends in main bars and in secondary #9,#10 5d 8d bars not covered above. #11 5d 8d 8d #14,#18 10d 10d E. Where bending of bar sizes No. 14 or No. 18 of Grades 40 and 60 is required,bend testing shall be performed on representative specimens as described for smaller bars in the applicable ASTM Specification. 1. The required bend shall be 90 degrees around a pin having a diameter of ten(10)times the nominal diameter of the bar. 3.03 Tolerances A. Fabricating tolerances for bars shall be as specified on the Drawings or as shown in Figure 1: Figure 1 Fabrication Tolerances for Bars *1.. +1/20 ±2" From end of bar to any bend Spiral or Circular Tie ±1/2" ±1/2" +0, -1/4" if 6" or less +0, -1/2" if over 6" {V +1 Stirrup or Tie 3.04 Storage A. All materials shall be stored above the surface of the ground upon platforms,skids,or other supports and shall be protected as far as practicable from mechanical injury and surface deterioration caused by exposure to conditions producing rust. B. Materials shall be free from injurious defects such as cracks and laminations. C. Rust,surface seams,surface irregularities or mill scale will not be cause for rejection,provided the minimum dimensions,cross-sectional area and tensile properties of a hand wire crushed specimen meets the physical requirements for size and grade of steel specified. 3.05 Splices A. Bars 1. No splicing of bars,except when provided on the Drawings or specified herein,will be permitted without written approval of the Owner. REINFORCING STEEL 03 2111-5 2. Splices not provided for on the Drawings will be permitted,but not included for measurement,in Grade 40 bars only,sizes No.8 and smaller,subject to the following: a. For bars exceeding forty-feet(40')in drawing length,the distance center to center of splices shall not be less than forty-feet (40')and no individual bar length shall be less than ten-feet(10'). b. Splices will not be permitted in bars less than forty-feet(40')in drawing length. C. Splices which are not shown on the Drawings,but permitted hereby,shall be made in accordance with Table 4,or as directed by Owner: Table 4 Minimum Lap Requirements Bar Size Number(inches) Uncoated Lap Length Coated Lap Length 3 1'-6" 2'-6" 4 2'-0" T-0" 5 2'-6" T-6" 6 T-0" 4'-0" 7 T-6" T-6" 8 4'-6" T-0" 9 6'-0" 8'-6" 10 T-6" 11'-01, 11 9'-01, 13'-6" d. Do not lap No.14 or No.18 bars e. The specified concrete cover shall be maintained at such splices and the bars placed in contact and securely tied together. 3. Splices will not be permitted in main reinforcement at points of maximum stress. a. When permitted in main bars,splices in adjacent bars will be staggered a minimum of two(2)splice lengths. B. Welded Wire 1. Lap length shall be at least two(2)cross wires plus two inches(2")on each sheet or roll. 2. All intersections of wire shall be securely tied together. C. Box Culvert Extensions 1. For box culvert extensions with less than one-foot(1')of fill,the existing longitudinal bars shall have a twenty(20)diameter lap with the new bars. 2. For extensions with more than one-foot(1')of fill,a minimum of one-foot(1')lap will be required. D. Welding 1. Welding of reinforcing bars may be used only where shown on the Drawings and by a method approved by the Owner. 2. All welding operations,processes,equipment,materials,workmanship,and inspection shall conform to the requirements of the Drawings and AWS D1.4/D1.4M,"Structural Welding Code-Reinforcing Steel"of the American Welding Society. 3. All splices shall be of such dimension and character as to develop the full strength of bar being spliced 4. End preparation for butt welding reinforcing bars,shall be done in the field. S. Delivered bars shall be of sufficient length to permit this practice. 6. Welding of coated bars is not allowed unless the Owner approves of the method and location. E. Mechanical Couplings 1. Install mechanical coupling in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations only where shown on the Drawings. 2. Do not repair damaged threads. 3. Mechanical coupling of coated bars is not allowed unless the Owner approves of the method and location. 3.06 Dowel Bars 1. Unless otherwise shown on the Drawings,dowel bars transferring tensile stresses,shall have a minimum embedment equal to the minimum lap requirements shown in Table 4. 2. Shear transfer dowels shall have a minimum embedment of twelve-inches(12"). REINFORCING STEEL 03 2111-6 3. Bars shall be greased or sleeved on one(1)end. 3.07 Uncoated Reinforcement Placement 1. Handling a. Provide systems for handling the reinforcement to prevent damage. b. Bundles shall be lifted with a strong back,spreader bar,multiple supports,platform bridge,or other means to prevent damage. C. Do not drag or drop reinforcement. d. Do not drag or drop other materials onto reinforcement. 2. Cutting a. Cutting of rods,bolt,and ties shall be done by saw or shear-cut only. b. Burning off of rods,bolts or ties will not be permitted. 3. Reinforcement a. Reinforcement shall be placed as near as possible in the position shown on the Drawings. 1) Unless otherwise shown on the Drawings,dimensions shown for reinforcement are to the centers of the bars. 2) In the plane of the steel parallel to the nearest surface of concrete,bars shall not vary from Drawing placement by more than one-twelfth(1/12)of the spacing between bars. 3) In the plane of the steel perpendicular to the nearest surface of concrete,bars shall not vary from Drawing placement by more than one-quarter inch(1/4"). 4) Cover of concrete to the nearest surface of steel shall meet the above requirements but shall never be less than one inch (1")or as shown on the Drawings or as directed by the Owner. b. Vertical stirrups shall always pass around the main tensions members and be attached securely thereto. c. When placed in the work,reinforcement shall be free from dirt,paint,grease,oil,or other foreign materials. 4. Support a. Reinforcement is to be supported and tied in such manner that a sufficiently rigid case of steel is provided. b. If the cage is not adequately supported to resist settlement or floating upward of the steel,overturning of truss bars,or movement in any direction during concrete placement,permission to continue concrete placement will be withheld until corrective measures are taken. C. Sufficient measurements shall be made during concrete placement to insure compliance with this specification and the Drawings. d. All metal appliances used inside of forms for alignment purposes shall be removed to a depth of at least one-half inch (1/2")from the concrete surface. 1) They shall be made so the metal may be removed without undue chipping or spalling,and when removed,shall leave a smooth opening in the concrete surface. 5. Tying a. All reinforcing steel shall be tied at all intersections,except that where spacing is less than one foot(1')in each direction, alternate intersections only,need be tied. b. Any wire ties used shall be cut back at least one-half inch(1/2")from the face of the concrete. 6. Spacers and Blocking a. The reinforcing steel shall be spaced its required distance from the form surface by means of approved galvanized metal spacers,metal spacers with plastic coated tips, stainless steel spacers,plastic spacers,or approved pre-cast mortar or concrete blocks. b. Metal supports are not allowed to come into contact with the soil,subgrade,water,or other material which is corrosive to metal,unless approved by the Owner. 3.08 Coated Reinforcement Placement 1. Handling a. Provide systems for handling the reinforcement with padded contact areas to prevent damage to the coating. b. Bundles shall be lifted with a strong back,spreader bar,multiple supports,platform bridge,or other means to prevent damage to the coating. C. Do not drag or drop reinforcement. d. Do not drag or drop other materials onto reinforcement. REINFORCING STEEL 03 2111-7 2. Cutting a. Cutting of rods,bolt,and ties shall be done by saw or shear-cut only when approved. 1) The cut shall be coated in accordance with ASTM D3963 and as recommended by the manufacturer. 3. Reinforcement a. Reinforcement shall be placed as near as possible in the position shown on the Drawings. 1) Unless otherwise shown on the Drawings,dimensions shown for reinforcement are to the centers of the bars. 2) In the plane of the steel parallel to the nearest surface of concrete,bars shall not vary from Drawing placement by more than one-twelfth(1/12)of the spacing between bars. 3) In the plane of the steel perpendicular to the nearest surface of concrete,bars shall not vary from Drawing placement by more than one-quarter inch(1/4"). 4) Cover of concrete to the nearest surface of steel shall meet the above requirements but shall never be less than one-inch (1")or as shown on the Drawings or as directed by the Owner. b. Vertical stirrups shall always pass around the main tensions members and be attached securely thereto. C. When placed in the work,reinforcement shall be free from dirt,paint,grease,oil,or other foreign materials. 4. Support a. Reinforcement is to be supported and tied in such a manner that a sufficiently rigid case of steel is provided. b. If the cage is not adequately supported to resist settlement or floating upward of the steel,overturning of truss bars,or movement in any direction during concrete placement,permission to continue concrete placement will be withheld until corrective measures are taken. C. Sufficient measurements shall be made during concrete placement to insure compliance with this specification and the Drawings. d. All metal appliances used inside of forms for alignment purposes shall be removed to a depth of at least one-half inch (1/2")from the concrete surface. 1) They shall be made so the metal may be removed without undue chipping or spalling,and when removed,shall leave a smooth opening in the concrete surface. 5. Tying a. All reinforcing steel shall be tied at all intersections,except that where spacing is less than one-foot(1')in each direction, alternate intersections only,need be tied. b. Any wire ties used shall be cut back at least one-half inch(1/2")from the face of the concrete. 6. Spacers and Blocking a. The reinforcing steel shall be spaced its required distance from the form surface by means of approved metal spacers with plastic coated tips,stainless steel spacers,or approved plastic spacers. b. Metal supports are not allowed to come into contact with the soil,subgrade,water,or other material which is corrosive to metal,unless approved by the Owner. 7. Coating Repair a. The coating repair shall be in accordance with ASTM D3963 and as recommended by the manufacturer. 3.09 Concrete Placement 1. No concrete shall be deposited until the Owner has inspected the placement of the reinforcing steel and given permission to proceed. 2. Before any concrete is placed,all debris shall be cleaned from the reinforcement REINFORCING STEEL 03 2111-8 SECTION 03 30 00-CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE PART 1-GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division-1 Specification sections, apply to work of this section. 1.2 DESCRIPTION OF WORK A. Extent of concrete work is shown on drawings, including schedules, notes and details which show size and location of members and type of concrete to be poured. Furnish all labor, materials, services, equipment and hardware required in conjunction with or related to the forming, delivery and pouring of all poured-in-place concrete work. B. Architectural Concrete is specified in other Division-3 sections. 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE The Contractor is responsible for quality control, including workmanship and materials furnished by his subcontractors and suppliers. A. Codes and Standards: Comply with provisions of following codes, specifications and standards, except where more stringent requirements are shown or specified: 1. ACI 301 - "Specifications for Structural Concrete for Buildings". 2. ACI 302 - "Guide for Concrete Floor and Slab Construction". 3. ACI 304 - "Recommended Practice for Measuring, Mixing, Transporting and Placing Concrete". 4. ACI 305 - "Recommended Practice for Hot Weather Concreting". 5. ACI 306- "Recommended Practice for Cold Weather Concreting". 6. ACI 318- "Building Code Requirements for Reinforced Concrete". B. Document Precedence: In case of conflict among documents, including architectural and structural drawings and specifications, notify the Architect prior to submitting proposal. In case of conflict between the structural drawings and specifications, the strictest interpretation shall govern. C. Materials and installed work may require testing and retesting, as directed by the Architect/Engineer, at any time during progress of work. Allow free access to material stockpiles and facilities. Tests, not specifically indicated to be done at the Owner's expense, including retesting of rejected materials and installed work, shall be done at the Contractor's expense. See Testing Laboratory section of the Specifications. Inspection or testing by the Owner does not relieve the Contractor of his responsibility to perform the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents. 1.4 SUBMITTALS CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 03 30 00- 1/18 Commodore Park Improvements—Phase 1 -#23173 July 3, 2025 A. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's product data with application and installation instructions for proprietary materials and items, including admixtures, patching compounds, epoxies, grouts, waterstops, joint systems, curing compounds, dry-shake finish materials, hardeners, sealers and others as requested by Architect/Engineer. B. Samples: Submit samples of materials specified if requested by Architect/ Engineer, including names, sources and descriptions. C. Laboratory Test Reports and Mix Designs: Submit laboratory test reports for concrete materials and mix designs as specified in the Testing Laboratory section of the Specifications. D. Material and Mill Certificates: Provide material and mill certificates as specified herein and in the Testing Laboratory section of the Specifications. Material and mill certificates shall be signed by manufacturer and Contractor, certifying that each material item complies with, or exceeds, specified requirements. E. Construction Joints: There shall be no construction joints for slab on grade, structural floors or columns where they are not indicated on the drawings. 1.5 PROVISION FOR OTHER WORK Provide for installation of inserts, hangers, metal ties, anchors, bolts, angle guards, dowels, thimbles, slots, nailing strips, blocking, grounds and other fastening devices required for attachment of work. Properly locate in cooperation with other trades and secure in position before concrete is poured. Do not install sleeves in any concrete slabs, beams or columns except where shown on the drawings or upon written approval of the Architect/Engineer. PART 2- PRODUCTS 2.1 CONCRETE MATERIALS Refer to the drawings for classes and strengths of concrete required. A. Portland Cement: ANSI/ASTM C 150, Type I or Type III, unless otherwise approved by the Architect/Engineer. Use one brand of cement, for each class of concrete, throughout the project, unless approved otherwise by the Architect/Engineer and the Testing Laboratory. B. Normal Weight Aggregates: ANSI/ASTM C 33, and as herein specified. Provide aggregates from a single source for exposed concrete. C. Water: Clean, fresh, drinkable, free of oils, acids or organic matter. CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 03 30 00-2/18 Commodore Park Improvements—Phase 1 -#23173 July 3, 2025 D. Air-Entraining Admixture: ANSI/ASTM C 260. Provide air entrainment in all concrete used for vehicular traffic and parking or concrete permanently exposed to the weather as specified in Table 4.5.1 of ACI 318. Submit manufacturer's certification that product conforms to the requirements specified. E. Water-Reducing Admixture: ANSI/ASTM C 494, Type A. See maximum permissible chloride ion content in concrete specified below. Submit manufacturer's certification that product conforms to the requirements specified. F. High-Range Water-Reducing Admixture (Super Plasticizer): ASTM C 494, Type F or Type G. See maximum permissible chloride ion content in concrete specified below. Submit manufacturer's certification that product conforms to the requirements specified. G. Water-Reducing, Accelerator Admixture (Non-Corrosive, Non-Chloride): ASTM C 494, Type C or E. See maximum permissible chloride ion content in concrete specified below. Submit manufacturer's certification that product conforms to the requirements specified. H. Water-Reducing, Retarding Admixture: ASTM C 494,Type D. See maximum permissible chloride ion content in concrete specified below. Submit manufacturer's certification that product conforms to the requirements specified. I. Specification for Pozzolan Admixtures: Fly ash or other pozzolans used as admixtures may be used provided they conform to "Specification for Fly Ash and/or Calcined Natural Pozzolans for Use in Portland Cement Concrete", ASTM C 618 Class C or F. Fly ash replacement of cement shall not exceed 20% (one part fly ash max. to four parts cement) by weight. Fly ash may not be used in architecturally exposed concrete. Submit manufacturer's certification that product conforms to the requirements specified. J. Admixtures containing Chloride Ions: Admixtures containing chloride ions shall not be used in concrete containing galvanized or aluminum embedments, concrete containing high early strength cement(Type III), or concrete exposed to sulfate containing solutions such as soils with a water soluble sulfate content more than 0.20 percent by weight and all water with a sulfate content more than 1500 parts per million. Admixtures containing more than 0.05% chloride ions shall not be permitted. The maximum chloride ion content in concrete for corrosion protection shall be as follows: Max. Water Soluble Chloride Ion in Concrete Type of Member of Cement at 28 Days,% by weight Reinforced Concrete and other structures,which may be exposed to chloride in service 0.15 Reinforced Concrete in buildings and other structures that will be dry or protected from moisture in service 1.00 CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 03 30 00-3/18 Commodore Park Improvements—Phase 1 -#23173 July 3, 2025 All other reinforced concrete construction 0.30 The Contractor shall have the Concrete Supplier verify in a written submittal to the Architect/Engineer and Testing Laboratory that the chloride ion content in all concrete mix designs used on the project will not exceed limits stated above. K. Prohibited Admixtures: Calcium chloride, thiocyanates or admixtures containing more than 0.05%chloride ions are not permitted. L. Certification: Written conformance to the above mentioned requirements and the chloride ion content of the admixture will be required from the admixture manufacturer prior to mix design review by the Engineer. 2.2 RELATED MATERIALS A. Waterstops: Provide waterstops at all construction joints and other joints in all foundation walls below grade and where shown on the drawings. Size to suit joints. 1. Rubber waterstops: Corps of Engineers CRD-C 513. 2. Polyvinyl chloride (PVC) waterstops: Corps of Engineers CRD-C 572. 3. Preformed Plastic Waterstops: Federal Specifications SS-S-210A "Sealing Compound for Expansion Joints". B. Moisture Barrier: Provide moisture barrier cover over prepared base material where indicated. Use only materials, which are resistant to decay when tested in accordance with ANSI/ASTM E 154. C. Absorptive Cover: Burlap cloth made from jute or kenaf, weighing approximately 9 oz. per sq.yd., complying with AASHTO M 182, Class 2. D. Moisture-Retaining Cover: Complying with ANSI/ASTM C 171: E. Non-slip Aggregate Finish: Provide fused aluminum oxide grits, or crushed emery, as abrasive aggregate for non-slip finish with emery aggregate containing not less than 40% aluminum oxide and not less than 25% ferric oxide. Use material that is factory- graded, packaged, rust-proof and non-glazing, and is unaffected by freezing, moisture and cleaning materials. F. Colored Wear-Resistant Finish: Packaged, dry, combination of materials, consisting of portland cement, graded quartz aggregate, coloring pigments (if required) and plasticizing admixtures. Use coloring pigments that are finely ground, non-fading mineral oxides, interground with cement. Color, as selected by Architect, unless otherwise indicated. Submit manufacturer's certification that product conforms to the requirements specified. CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 03 30 00-4/18 Commodore Park Improvements—Phase 1 -#23173 July 3, 2025 G. Liquid Membrane-Forming Curing Compound: Liquid type membrane forming curing compound complying with ANSI/ASTM C 309, Type I, Class A unless otherwise acceptable to the Architect/Engineer. Submit manufacturer's certification that product conforms to the requirements specified. H. Chemical Curing/Floor Hardener Compound: A clear liquid chemically acting compound of sodium silicate that performs as a curing agent with a penetrating compound that changes the free lime in the concrete to calcium silicate, resulting in a surface having a maximum abrasion coefficient of 0.25 cm3/cm2 when tested in accordance with ASTM C 118. Submit manufacturer's certification that product conforms to the requirements specified. I. Chemical Hardener: Colorless aqueous solution containing a blend of magnesium fluosilicate and zinc fluosilicate combined with a wetting agent, containing not less than 2 lb. of fluosilicates per gal. Submit manufacturer's certification that product conforms to the requirements specified. J. Bonding Compound: Polyvinyl acetate or acrylic base, rewettable type for use in cosmetic nonstructural repairs. K. Epoxy Products: Two component material suitable for use on dry or damp surface, complying with ASTM C 881,for use in all structural concrete repairs. L. Self-Leveling Mortars for Slab Fill Repair: M. Expansion Bolts in Concrete: 1. ICBO Approval: Only concrete anchors approved by the International Conference of Building Officials (ICBO) with a published Research Report shall be approved for use. 2. Type: All expansion bolts in concrete shall be only wedge type expansion bolts. 3. Interior Use: All expansion bolts, nuts and washers for use in interior conditioned environments free of potential moisture shall be manufactured from carbon steel zinc plated in accordance with Federal Specification QQ-Z- 325C,Type II, Class 3. 4. Exterior or Exposed Use: All expansion bolts, nuts and washers for use in exposed or potentially wet environments, or for attachment of exterior cladding materials shall be galvanized or stainless steel. Galvanized bolts, nuts and washers shall conform to ASTM A 153. Stainless steel bolts shall be manufactured from 300 series stainless steel and nuts and washers from 300 series or Type 18-8 stainless steel. 5. Nuts and Washers: Nuts and washers shall be furnished from the manufacturer and used with the bolts. CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 03 30 00-5/18 Commodore Park Improvements—Phase 1 -#23173 July 3, 2025 N. Non-Shrink Grout: 1. Type: Grout for base plates and bearing plates shall be a non-metallic, shrinkage resistant, premixed, non-corrosive, non-staining product containing Portland cement, silica sands, shrinkage compensating agents and fluidity improving compounds. 2. Specifications: Non-shrink grout shall conform to Corps of Engineers Specification for Non-Shrink Grout, CRD-C621-83. 3. Compressive Strength: Twenty-eight day compressive strength as determined by grout cube tests, shall be: a. 6,000 PSI for supporting concrete 3000 psi and less. b. 8,000 PSI for supporting concrete greater than 3000 psi and less than or equal to 4000 psi. C. 10,000 PSI for supporting concrete greater than 4000 psi. 2.3 PROPORTIONING AND DESIGN OF MIXES A. Refer to Testing Laboratory section of the Specifications. 2.4 CONCRETE MIXES A. Ready-Mix Concrete: Comply with requirements of ANSI/ASTM C 94, "Ready Mixed Concrete" and Testing Laboratory section of the specifications. PART 3- EXECUTION 3.1 JOINTS IN CONCRETE A. Construction Joints: Locate and install construction joints as indicated on the drawings or if not shown on drawings, located so as not to impair strength and appearance of the structure, as acceptable to Architect/Engineer. 1. Place construction joints in the center one third of spans unless specified otherwise. Continue reinforcement across construction joints. Submit construction joint locations not shown on the drawings for Engineer's approval. 2. Waterstops: Provide waterstops in construction joints as indicated on the Architectural and Structural Drawings. Install waterstops to form continuous diaphragm in each joint. Make provisions to support and protect exposed waterstops during progress of work. Fabricate field joints in waterstops in accordance with manufacturer's printed instructions. CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 03 30 00-6/18 Commodore Park Improvements—Phase 1 -#23173 July 3, 2025 3.2 INSTALLATION OF EMBEDDED ITEMS A. General: Set and build into work anchorage devices and other embedded items required for other work that is attached to, or supported by, cast-in-place concrete. Use setting drawings, diagrams, instructions and directions provided by suppliers of items to be attached thereto. B. Edge Forms and Screed Strips for Slabs: Set edge forms or bulkheads and intermediate screed strips for slabs to obtain required elevations and contours in finished slab surface. Provide and secure units sufficiently strong to support types of screed strips by use of strike-off templates or accepted compacting type screeds. 3.3 PREPARATION OF FORM SURFACES A. Clean reused forms of concrete matrix residue, repair and patch as required to return forms to acceptable surface condition. B. Coat contact surfaces of forms with a form-coating compound before reinforcement is placed. C. Thin form-coating compounds only with thinning agent of type, and in amount, and under conditions of form-coating compound manufacturer's directions. Do not allow excess form-coating material to accumulate in forms or to come into contact with concrete surfaces against which fresh concrete will be placed. Apply in compliance with manufacturer's instructions. 3.4 CONCRETE PLACEMENT A. Preplacement Inspection: Before placing concrete, inspect and complete formwork installation, reinforcing steel and items to be embedded or cast-in. Notify other crafts to permit installation of their work; cooperate with other trades in setting such work. Moisten wood forms immediately before placing concrete where form coatings are not used. B. Coordinate the installation of joint materials and moisture barriers with placement of forms and reinforcing steel. C. Comply with ACI 304, Recommended Practice for Measuring, Mixing, Transporting and Placing Concrete, and as herein specified. 1. Deposit concrete continuously or in layers of such thickness that no concrete will be placed on concrete which has hardened sufficiently to cause the formation of seams or planes of weakness. If a section cannot be placed continuously, provide construction joints as herein specified. Deposit concrete as nearly as practicable to its final location to avoid segregation. 2. Placing Concrete in Forms: Deposit concrete in forms in horizontal layers not deeper than 24" and in a manner to avoid inclined construction joints. Where CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 03 30 00-7/18 Commodore Park Improvements—Phase 1 -#23173 July 3, 2025 placement consists of several layers, place each layer while preceding layer is still plastic to avoid cold joints. 3. Consolidate placed concrete by mechanical vibrating equipment supplemented by hand-spading, rodding or tamping. Use equipment and procedures for consolidation of concrete in accordance with ACI 309 recommended practices. 4. Do not use vibrators to transport concrete inside forms. Insert and withdraw vibrators vertically at uniformly spaced locations not farther than visible effectiveness of machine. Place vibrators to rapidly penetrate placed layer and at least 6" into preceding layer. Do not insert vibrators into lower layers of concrete that have begun to set. At each insertion limit duration of vibration to time necessary to consolidate concrete and complete embedment of reinforcement and other embedded items without causing segregation of mix. 5. Placing Concrete Slabs: Deposit and consolidate concrete slabs in a continuous operation, within limits of construction joints, until the placing of a panel or section is completed. 6. Consolidate concrete during placing operations so that concrete is thoroughly worked around reinforcement and other embedded items and into corners. 7. Bring slab surfaces to correct level with straightedge and strikeoff. Use highway straightedges, bull floats or darbies to smooth surface, free of humps or hollows. Do not disturb slab surfaces prior to beginning finishing operations. 8. Maintain reinforcing in proper position during concrete placement operations. 3.5 FINISH OF FORMED SURFACES A. Rough Form Finish: Provide rough form finish for formed concrete surfaces not exposed-to-view in the finish work unless otherwise indicated. This is the concrete surface having texture imparted by form facing material used, with tie holes and defective areas repaired and patched and fins and other projections exceeding 1/4" in height rubbed down or chipped off. B. Smooth Form Finish: Provide smooth form finish for formed concrete surfaces exposed- to-view or that are to be covered with a coating material applied directly to concrete, or a covering material applied directly to concrete, such as waterproofing, dampproofing, painting or other similar system. This is as-cast concrete surface obtained with selected form facing material, arranged orderly and symmetrically with a minimum of seams. Repair and patch defective areas with fins or other projections completely removed and smoothed. C. Smooth Rubbed Finish: Provide smooth rubbed finish to scheduled concrete surfaces, which have received smooth form finish treatment, not later than one day after form removal. Moisten concrete surfaces and rub with carborundum brick or other abrasive until a uniform color and texture is produced. Do not apply cement grout other than that created by the rubbing process. CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 03 30 00-8/18 Commodore Park Improvements—Phase 1 -#23173 July 3, 2025 D. Grout Cleaned Finish: Provide grout cleaned finish to scheduled concrete surfaces, which have received smooth form finish treatment. 1. Combine one part portland cement to 1-1/2 parts fine sand by volume, and mix with water to consistency of thick paint. Proprietary additives may be used at Contractor's option. Blend standard portland cement and white portland cement, amounts determined by trial patches, so that final color of dry grout will closely match adjacent surfaces. 2. Thoroughly wet concrete surfaces and apply grout to coat surfaces and fill small holes. Remove excess grout by scraping and rubbing with clean burlap. Keep damp by fog spray for at least 36 hours after rubbing. E. Related Unformed Surfaces: At tops of walls, horizontal offsets surfaces occurring adjacent to formed surfaces, strike-off smooth and finish with a texture matching adjacent formed surfaces. Continue final surface treatment of formed surfaces uniformly across adjacent unformed surfaces, unless otherwise indicated. 3.6 MONOLITHIC SLAB FINISHES A. Scratch Finish: Apply scratch finish to monolithic slab surfaces that are to receive concrete floor topping or mortar setting beds for tile, portland cement terrazzo and other bonded applied cementitious finish flooring material, and as otherwise indicated. After placing slabs, plane surface to tolerance specified below. Slope surfaces uniformly to drains where required. After leveling, roughen surface before final set, with stiff brushes, brooms or rakes. B. Float Finish: Apply float finish to monolithic slab surfaces to receive trowel finish and other finishes as hereinafter specified, and slab surfaces which are to be covered with membrane or elastic waterproofing, membrane or elastic roofing, or sand-bed terrazzo, and as otherwise indicated. After screeding, consolidating and leveling concrete slabs, do not work surface until ready for floating. Begin floating when surface water has disappeared or when concrete has stiffened sufficiently to permit operation of power- driven floats, or both. Consolidate surface with power-driven floats, or by hand-floating if area is small or inaccessible to power units. Check and level surface plane to a tolerance as specified below. Cut down high spots and fill low spots. Uniformly slope surfaces to drains. Immediately after leveling, refloat surface to a uniform, smooth, granular texture. C. Trowel Finish: Apply trowel finish to monolithic slab surfaces to be exposed-to-view, and slab surfaces to be covered with resilient flooring, carpet, ceramic or quarry tile, paint or other thinfilm finish coating system. After floating, begin first trowel finish operation using power-driven trowel. Begin final troweling when surface produces a ringing sound as trowel is moved over surface. Consolidate concrete surface by final hand-troweling operation,free of trowel marks, uniform in texture and appearance, and with a level surface to a tolerance as specified below. Grind smooth surface defects, which would telegraph through applied floor covering system. CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 03 30 00-9/18 Commodore Park Improvements—Phase 1 -#23173 July 3, 2025 D. Trowel and Fine Broom Finish: Where ceramic or quarry tile is to be installed with thin- set mortar, apply trowel finish as specified above, then immediately follow with slightly scarifying surface by fine brooming. E. Non-Slip Broom Finish: Apply non-slip broom finish to ramps less than 6% exterior concrete platforms, steps and elsewhere as indicated. Immediately after trowel finishing, slightly roughen concrete surface by brooming with fiber bristle broom perpendicular to main traffic route. Coordinate required final finish with Architect before application. F. Rake Finish: Provide a rake finish to all ramps exceeding a 6% slope. Finish shall be applied perpendicular to direction of traffic. G. Chemical-Hardener Finish: Apply chemical-hardener finish to interior concrete floors where indicated. Apply liquid chemical-hardener after complete curing and drying of the concrete surface. Dilute liquid hardener with water (parts of hardener/water as follows), and apply in 3 coats; first coat, 1/3-strength; second coat, 1/2-strength; third coat, 2/3-strength. Evenly apply each coat and allow 24 hours for drying between coats. Apply proprietary chemical hardeners, in accordance with manufacturer's printed instructions. After final coat of chemical-hardener solution is applied and dried, remove surplus hardener by scrubbing and mopping with water. H. Non-slip Aggregate Finish: Apply non-slip aggregate finish to concrete stair treads, platforms, ramps and elsewhere as indicated on the Architect's or Structural Drawings. After completion of float finishing, and before starting trowel finish, uniformly spread 25 lb. of dampened non-slip aggregate per 100 sq. ft. of surface. Tamp aggregate flush with surface using a steel trowel, but do not force below surface. After broadcasting and tamping, apply trowel finishing as herein specified. After curing, lightly work surface with a steel wire brush, or an abrasive stone, and water to expose non-slip aggregate. I. Colored Wear-Resistant Finish: Provide colored wear-resistant finish to monolithic slab surface indicated. Apply dry shake materials for colored wear-resistant finish at rate of not less than 60 lbs. per 100 sq.ft., unless greater amount is recommended by material manufacturer. Immediately following first floating operation, uniformly distribute approximately 2/3 of required weight of dry shake material over concrete surface, and embed by means of power floating. Follow floating operation with second shake application, uniformly distributing remainder of dry shake material at right angles to first application, and embed by power floating. After completion of broadcasting and floating, apply trowel finish as herein specified. Cure slab surface with curing compound recommended by dry shake hardener manufacturer, waiting up to time period as required by the manufacturer (depending on CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 03 30 00- 10/18 Commodore Park Improvements—Phase 1 -#23173 July 3, 2025 humidity and drying) before application. Do not use moisture-cover or moisture curing methods. 3.7 CONCRETE FINISH MEASUREMENT AND TOLERANCES A. Definitions: 1. Flatness -A measure of a concrete surfaces curvature or deviation from a planar surface. Concrete surfaces that are not flat are wavy or bumpy. 2. Levelness -A measure of a concrete surfaces tilt or inclination from a horizontal plane. Concrete surfaces that are not level are sloped or tilted. B. Construction Requirements to Achieve Specified Floor Finish Tolerances: 1. Forms shall be properly leveled, in good condition and securely anchored including special attention to ends and transitions. 2. Bearing surfaces for straightedges such as form edges or previously poured slabs shall be kept clean of laitance, sand,gravel, or other foreign elements. 3. Screeds shall be maintained in good condition with true round rolling wheels and level cutting edges. The use of optical sighting equipment such as lasers is recommended for checking levelness and straightness. The Contractor shall promptly adjust or replace equipment when test results indicate substandard work. C. Concrete Floor Finish Tolerance for Slab-on-Grade Construction: 1. Concrete Placement: Concrete shall be placed and screeded to predetermined marks set to elevations prescribed on the drawings. 2. Tolerance: Finished floor elevation shall not vary more than % inch in 10 feet, non cumulative. D. Remedial Measures for Slab Finish Construction Not Meeting Specified Tolerances: 1. Modification of Existing Surface: a. If, in the opinion of the Architect/Engineer or Owner's Representative, all or any portion of the substandard work can be repaired without sacrifice to the appearance or serviceability of the area, then the Contractor shall immediately undertake the approved repair method. b. The Contractor shall submit for review and approval a detailed work plan of the proposed repair showing areas to be repaired, method of repair and time to effect the repair. C. Repair method(s), at the sole discretion of the Architect/Engineer or Owner's Representative, may include grinding (floor stoning), planing, CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 03 30 00- 11/18 Commodore Park Improvements—Phase 1 -#23173 July 3, 2025 retopping with self leveling grout or polymer concrete, or any combination of the above. d. The Architect/Engineer or Owner's Representative maintains the right to require a test repair section using the approved method of repair for review and approval to demonstrate a satisfactory end product. If, in the opinion of the Architect/Engineer or Owner's Representative, the repair is not satisfactory an alternate method of repair shall be submitted or the defective area shall be replaced. e. The judgment of the Architect/Engineer or Owner's Representative on the appropriateness of a repair method and its ability to achieve the desired end product shall be final. f. All repair work shall be performed at no additional cost to the Owner and with no extension to the construction schedule. 2. Removal and Replacement: a. If, in the opinion of the Architect/Engineer or Owner's Representative, all or any portion of the substandard work cannot be satisfactorily repaired without sacrifice to the appearance or serviceability of the area, then the Contractor shall immediately commence to remove and replace the defective work. b. Replacement section boundaries shall be made to coincide with the test section boundaries as previously defined. C. Sections requiring replacement shall be removed by sawcutting along the section boundary lines to provide a neat clean joint between new replacement floor and existing floor. d. The new section shall be reinforced the same as the removed section and doweled into the existing floor as required by the Engineer. No existing removed reinforcing steel may be used. All reinforcing steel shall be new steel. e. Replacement sections may be retested for compliance at the discretion of the Architect/Engineer or Owner's Representative. f. The judgment of the Architect/Engineer or Owner's Representative on the need for replacement shall be final. g. All replacement work shall be performed at no additional cost to the Owner and with no extension to the construction schedule. 3.8 CONCRETE CURING AND PROTECTION A. General: CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 03 30 00- 12/18 Commodore Park Improvements—Phase 1 -#23173 July 3, 2025 1. Protect freshly placed concrete from premature drying and excessive cold or hot temperatures. Maintain concrete with minimal moisture loss at a relatively constant temperature for the period necessary for hydration of the cement and hardening of concrete. 2. Curing shall commence as soon as free water has disappeared from the concrete surface after placing and finishing. The curing period shall be 7 days for all concrete except high early strength concrete, which shall be cured for 3 days minimum, unless test cylinders, made and kept adjacent to the structure and cured by the same methods, are tested with the average compressive strength equal to 70% of the specified 28 day strength. Curing may also be terminated when the temperature of the concrete is maintained at least 507 for the same length of time that laboratory cured cylinders, representative of the concrete in place, require to achieve 85% of the 28 day compressive strength. 3. Curing shall be in accordance with ACI 301 procedures. Avoid rapid drying at the end of the curing period. B. Curing Methods: Perform curing of all concrete horizontal and vertical surfaces (including columns, shear walls and basement walls) by one of the methods specified or by combinations thereof, as herein specified. The Contractor shall choose a curing method that is compatible with the requirements for subsequent material usage on the concrete surface. Parking garages shall be cured using only methods 1 or 2 below. 1. Provide moisture curing by one of the following methods: a. Keep concrete surface continuously wet by covering with water. b. Continuous water-fog spray. C. Covering concrete surface with specified absorptive cover, thoroughly saturating cover with water and keeping continuously wet. Place absorptive cover to provide coverage of concrete surfaces and edges, with 4" lap over adjacent absorptive covers. 2. Provide moisture-cover curing as follows: Cover concrete surfaces with moisture-retaining cover for curing concrete, placed in widest practicable width with sides and ends lapped at least 3" and sealed by waterproof tape or adhesive. Immediately repair any holes or tears during curing period using cover material and waterproof tape. 3. Provide curing/hardener or liquid membrane forming curing compound to interior slabs with resilient flooring, carpet over cushion, or left exposed; and to exterior slabs, walks and curbs, as follows: Apply specified compound to concrete slabs as soon as final finishing operations are complete (within 2 hours). Apply uniformly in continuous operation by CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 03 30 00- 13/18 Commodore Park Improvements—Phase 1 -#23173 July 3, 2025 power-spray or roller in accordance with manufacturer's directions. Do not allow to puddle. Recoat areas subjected to heavy rainfall within 3 hours after initial application. Maintain continuity of coating and repair damage during curing period. Do not use membrane curing compounds on surfaces which are to be covered with coating material applied directly to concrete, liquid floor hardener, waterproofing, dampproofing, membrane roofing, flooring (such as ceramic or quarry tile, glue down carpet), painting and other coatings and finish materials, unless otherwise acceptable to the Architect. Use only clear curing compounds for exposed interior slabs and all exterior concrete. C. Curing Formed Surfaces: Where wooden forms are used, cure formed concrete surfaces, including undersides of beams, supported slabs and other similar surfaces by moist curing with forms in place for full curing period or until forms are removed. When forms are removed, continue curing by methods specified above, as applicable. D. Curing Unformed Surfaces: Cure unformed surfaces, such as slabs, floor topping and other flat surfaces by application of appropriate curing compound. Final cure concrete surfaces to receive liquid floor hardener or finish flooring by use of moisture-retaining cover, unless otherwise directed. 3.9 HOT WEATHER CONCRETING A. Definition: 1. Conditions warranting hot weather concreting practices are defined as any combination of high air temperature, low relative humidity and wind velocity tending to impair the quality of fresh or hardened concrete or otherwise result in abnormal properties. 2. The maximum acceptable concrete temperature at the truck discharge point shall be 95°F. B. Specification: Hot weather concreting practices required to limit the concrete temperature at the truck discharge point to 95°F or lower shall be followed according to ACI 305 "Hot Weather Concreting." C. Records: Under hot weather conditions, the Contractor shall keep records of outside air temperature, concrete temperature at truck discharge and general weather conditions. D. Hot Weather Concreting Requirements: The following items, all or in part as required, should be followed to limit the concrete temperature to 957 or lower: 1. Design the concrete mixes specifically for hot weather conditions replacing some cement with fly ash or other pozzolan and using a water reducing retarding admixture (ASTM C 494 Type D). CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 03 30 00- 14/18 Commodore Park Improvements—Phase 1 -#23173 July 3, 2025 2. Use the largest size and amount of coarse aggregate compatible with the job. 3. Use sunshades and/or windbreaks. 4. Delay construction of indoor slabs-on-grade until the walls and roof are constructed. 5. Cool and shade aggregate stockpiles. 6. Use ice as part of the mixing water or cool the water with liquid nitrogen. 7. Limit the number of revolutions at mixing speed to 125 maximum. 8. Paint mixers and storage bins or silos white to minimize heat absorption. 9. Reduce time between mixing and placing as much as possible. 10. Do not add water to ready-mixed concrete at the job site unless it is part of the amount required initially for the specified water-cement ratio and the specified slump. 11. Schedule concrete placement for early morning, late afternoon, or night. 12. Have all forms, equipment and workers ready to receive and handle concrete. 13. Maintain one standby vibrator for every three vibrators used. 14. Keep all equipment cool by spraying with water including chutes, conveyors, pump lines,tremies, reinforcement and buggies. 15. Dampen the subgrade and side forms with cool water. 16. Protect slab concrete at all stages against undue evaporation by applying a fog spray or mist above the surface or applying a monomolecular film. Where high temperatures and/or placing conditions dictate, use water-reducing retarding admixture (Type D) in lieu of the water-reducing admixture (Type A) as directed by the Owner's Testing Laboratory. 17. Provide continuous curing, preferably with water, during the first 24 hours using wet burlap, cotton mats, continuous spray mist, or by applying a curing compound meeting ASTM C 309. Continue curing for 3 days minimum. 18. Spray exteriors of forms to keep them cool. 19. As soon as possible, loosen forms and run water down the inside. When forms are removed, provide a wet cover to newly exposed surfaces. 3.10 COLD WEATHER CONCRETING A. Definition: 1. Concrete shall not be placed on any day when the outside air temperature is 40°F or less and falling unless cold weather concreting practices are followed as specified below. 2. Cold weather concreting practices should be followed whenever the mean daily temperature drops below 40°F for more than three successive days. 3. The temperature of concrete mixed and delivered to the job site shall conform to the following requirements: Air Temperature Min. Concrete Temperature Above 307 607 07 to 307 657 Below 07 70°F CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 03 30 00- 15/18 Commodore Park Improvements—Phase 1 -#23173 July 3, 2025 4. The minimum temperature of concrete during placement and curing shall be 55°F. The maximum concrete temperature heated by artificial means at point of placement shall not exceed 90°F. B. Specification: Cold weather concreting practices required to limit the concrete temperatures as specified above shall be followed according to ACI 30613-78 "Cold Weather Concreting". C. Records: Under cold weather conditions, the Contractor shall keep records of outside air temperature, concrete temperature as placed and general weather conditions. D. Cold Weather Concreting Requirements: The following items, all or in part as required, should be followed to assure acceptable concrete in cold weather conditions: 1. Design the concrete mix suitable for cold weather. Use air entrainment and obtain high early strength by using a higher cement content, a high early strength cement(Type III), or an accelerator(ASTM C 494 Type C and Q. 2. Protect the concrete during curing period using insulating blankets, insulated forms, enclosures and/or heaters. 3. Concrete cured in heated enclosures shall have heaters vented to prevent exposure of concrete and workmen to noxious gases. 4. Frozen subgrade shall be thawed prior to concrete placement and snow and ice shall be removed from forms. 5. Concrete shall be protected and cured at 55°F for three days minimum if normal concrete (Type I cement) is used and for two days minimum if high early strength concrete (concrete with Type III cement, 100 pounds cement added per cubic yard concrete, or an accelerator added). 6. Concrete not loaded during construction shall be protected a minimum of 3 days for normal concrete and 2 days for high early strength concrete to obtain safe form stripping strength. Concrete fully loaded during construction shall be protected for whatever time period is required to obtain the required strength as determined by nondestructive strength tests (Windsor probe, Swiss Hammer Test) on the in-place concrete. 7. Heat the mixing water and then blend hot and cold water to obtain concrete no more than 10°F above the required temperature. 8. Heat the aggregates by circulating steam in pipes placed in the storage bins for air temperatures consistently below 32°F. When either water or aggregate is heated to over 140°F combine them in the mixer first to obtain a maximum temperature of the mixture not to exceed 140°F in order to prevent flash set of the concrete. 9. Uniformly thaw aggregates far in advance of batching to prevent moisture variations in the stockpile. 10. Cover warmed stockpiles with tarps to retain heat. 11. Place air entraining admixture in the batch after the water temperature has been reduced by mixing with cooler solid materials. 12. Use wind screens to protect concrete from rapid cooling. 13. Place vertical pump lines inside the building, if possible, for concrete being pumped. CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 03 30 00- 16/18 Commodore Park Improvements—Phase 1 -#23173 July 3, 2025 14. Maintain artificial heat as low as possible to reduce temperature stresses during cooling. 15. Avoid water curing of concrete. Apply the required curing compound to unformed surfaces as soon as possible to prevent drying of concrete from heated enclosures. 16. Delay form stripping as long as possible to help prevent drying from heated enclosures and to reduce damage to formed surfaces caused by premature stripping. 17. Provide triple thickness of insulating materials at corners and edges vulnerable to freezing. 18. Wrap protruding reinforcing bars with insulation to avoid heat drain from the warm concrete. 19. Gradually reduce the heat at the end of the heating period to reduce likelihood of thermal shock. 3.11 MISCELLANEOUS CONCRETE ITEMS A. Filling-In: Fill-in holes and openings left in concrete structures for passage of work by other trades, unless otherwise shown or directed, after work of other trades is in place. Mix, place and cure concrete as herein specified, to blend with inplace construction. Provide other miscellaneous concrete filling shown or required to complete work. B. Curbs: Provide monolithic finish to interior curbs by stripping forms while concrete is still green and steel-troweling surfaces to a hard, dense finish with corners, intersections and terminations slightly rounded. C. Equipment Bases and Foundations: Provide machine and equipment bases and foundations, as shown on drawings. Set anchor bolts for machines and equipment to template at correct elevations, complying with certified diagrams or templates of manufacturer furnishing machines and equipment. 3.12 CONCRETE SURFACE REPAIRS A. Definition - Defective Areas: 1. Formed Surfaces: Concrete surfaces requiring repairs shall include all honeycombs, rock pockets and voids exceeding 1/4" in any dimension, holes left by tie rods or bolts, cracks in excess of 0.01" and any other defects that affect the durability or structural integrity of the concrete. 2. Unformed Surfaces: Concrete surfaces requiring repair shall include all surface defects such as crazing, cracks in excess of 0.01" wide or cracks which penetrate to reinforcement or through the member, popouts, spalling and honeycombs. B. Classification: 1. Structural Concrete Repair: Major defective areas in concrete members that are load carrying (such as shear walls, beams, joists and slabs), are highly stressed, and are vital to the structural integrity of the structure shall require structural CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 03 30 00- 17/18 Commodore Park Improvements—Phase 1 -#23173 July 3, 2025 repairs. Structural concrete repairs shall be made using a two part epoxy bonder and/or epoxy mortar. Location of structural concrete repairs shall be determined by the Engineer. 2. Cosmetic Concrete Repair: Defective areas in concrete members that are non- load carrying and minor defective areas in load carrying concrete members shall require cosmetic concrete repair. Cosmetic concrete repairs may be made using a non-epoxy non-shrink patching mortar and bonding agent. The location of cosmetic concrete repair required shall be determined by the Engineer. Cosmetic concrete repair in exposed-to-view surfaces will require Architect's approval prior to patching operation. 3. Slab Repairs: High areas in concrete slabs shall be repaired by grinding after concrete has cured at least 14 days. Low areas shall be filled using self-leveling mortars. Repair of slab spalls and other surface defects shall be made using epoxy products as specified above and as determined by the Engineer. 3.13 QUALITY CONTROL TESTING DURING CONSTRUCTION See Testing Laboratory Services section of these Specifications for concrete materials and cast- in-place concrete inspection and test requirements. END OF SECTION 03 30 00 CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 03 30 00- 18/18 Commodore Park Improvements—Phase 1 -#23173 July 3, 2025 SECTION 03 3100- EPDXY RELATED WORK PART 1-GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS Drawings and general provisions of contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division - 1 Specification Sections, apply to the work of this section. 1.2 SCOPE OF WORK A. Installation of epoxy grouted dowels or reinforcing steel, and bonding fresh concrete to hardened concrete. Such work shall be done by the Contractor in strict conformance to these specifications. 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Applicable Standards 1. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM) C881 Standard Specification for Epoxy-Resin-Base Bonding Systems for Concrete 2. American Concrete Institute (ACI) ACI 503 R Use of Epoxy Compounds with Concrete ACI 503.1 Standard Specification for Bonding, Hardened Concrete, Steel, Wood, Brick, and Other Materials to Hardened Concrete with a Multi-Component Epoxy Adhesive ACI 503.2 Standard Specification for Bonding Plastic Concrete to Hardened Concrete with a Multi-Component Epoxy Adhesive ACI 503.3 Standard Specification for Producing a Skid-Resistant Surface on Concrete by the Use of Multi-Component Epoxy System ACI 503.4 Standard Specification for Repairing Concrete with Epoxy Mortars B. Manufacturer's Qualifications Companies furnishing the epoxy materials shall have a proven track record of at least five years. Furthermore, they shall have in existence a program of training, certifying and supporting a nationally organized program of approved contractors. Evidence of this shall be made available to the Engineer/Architect upon request. EPDXY RELATED WORK 03 31 00- 1/7 Commodore Park Improvements—Phase 1 -#23173 July 3, 2025 C. Contractor's Qualifications: Contractor performing the work shall be an approved contractor by the manufacturer furnishing the epoxy materials, and shall have no less than five years experience in the various types of epoxy related work required in this project. A notarized certification from the manufacturer attesting to the training shall be submitted to the Engineer/Architect along with the proposal to do the work. PART 2- PRODUCTS 2.1 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS FOR EPDXY MATERIALS: A. All epoxy material shall be new and manufactured within the shelf life limitations set forth by the manufacturer. B. Epoxy shall be a two-part epoxy adhesive material, and shall be of epichlorohydrin/amine type. Polysulphide epoxies are not acceptable. C. Epoxy used shall be insensitive to the presence of water and moisture, and shall be capable of application and of strength development even when applied to damp surfaces having a temperature of 40'or above. D. Epoxy used shall develop a minimum strength of 6310 psi in tension and 12000 psi in compression at the end of seven days. E. Epoxies used shall not deteriorate under approximately 200 freeze thaw cycles. F. Epoxies used shall be 100%solids without solvents. G. Bonding and strength characteristics of epoxies shall be stable when exposed to ultraviolet rays. 2.2 ADDITIONAL REQUIREMENTS FOR EPDXY MORTARS A. Epoxy mortar used for bonding, patching, and resurfacing, shall have the following additional properties: 1. Epoxy mortar shall be non-sagging. 2. Sand used in preparing mortar shall be graded oven dry quartzite and furnished in bags. 3. The epoxy mortar patch material shall match the existing texture and color of exposed concrete without giving a blotchy appearance. A test patch shall be applied for approval prior to final acceptance of the mortar. Size of test patch shall be approximately equal to the size of the average mortar patch to be used on the project. 2.3 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS FOR POLYMER MODIFIED CEMENTITIOUS MORTARS: EPDXY RELATED WORK 03 31 00-2/7 Commodore Park Improvements—Phase 1 -#23173 July 3, 2025 A. Mortar used for bonding, patching, and resurfacing in exposed or exterior environmental conditions with large cyclic temperature changes shall have the following properties: 1. Mortar shall be non-sagging. 2. Coefficient of thermal expansion shall be comparable with that of concrete (5.5 x 10- 6 in/in/°F). 3. Sand used in preparing mortar shall be graded oven dry quartzite furnished in bags. 4. The mortar patch material shall match the existing texture and color of exposed concrete without giving a blotchy appearance. A test patch shall be applied for approval prior to final acceptance of the mortar. Size of test patch shall be approximately equal to the size of the average mortar patch to be used on the project. PART 3- EXECUTION 3.1 EPDXY MORTAR: A. Applicator's Qualifications 1. Epoxy mortar repair work shall only be performed by contractors who have successfully used this process on at least three similar structural repairs of equal scope which have performed successfully for a minimum period of five years. 2. Only adequately trained and experienced personnel shall be used on the job. B. Surface Preparation 1. Concrete surface to which the epoxy mortar is to be applied shall be exposed parent concrete free of loose and unsound materials. Surface preparation shall be done by abrasive blasting, waterblasting or as otherwise required by the manufacturer. 2. Necessary approvals shall be obtained by the Contractor from authorizing governmental or other agencies prior to abrasive blasting. Abrasive blasting operations shall comply with the requirements of OSHA and NIOSH (National Institute for Occupational Safety and Health) Standard PB-246-697. 3. Surfaces shall be free of any deleterious materials such as laitance, dust, dirt, and oil. 4. Any exposed reinforcing steel shall also be cleaned and be free of rust and other contaminants. Cleaning shall be accomplished by mechanical means. Use powered wire brushes in locations where reinforcing steel cannot be cleaned by abrasive- blasting or water-blasting. All exposed reinforcing steel shall be coated with a corrosion inhibiting product specified elsewhere in this specification prior to mortar application. EPDXY RELATED WORK 03 31 00-3/7 Commodore Park Improvements—Phase 1 -#23173 July 3, 2025 5. Prime the cleaned surface with primer as required by the manufacturer. C. Concrete Surface Inspection 1. Ensure that the surface temperature is at least 407 to permit wetting of concrete surface by epoxy coating. 2. The Contractor shall evaluate the moisture content of concrete surface receiving epoxy mortar. This shall be done by determining if moisture will collect at bond lines between concrete and epoxy mortar before epoxy has cured. Evaluate this by taping a piece of polyethylene sheet to the concrete. If moisture collects on underside of the polyethylene sheet before epoxy would cure, then allow concrete to dry sufficiently to prevent the possibility of moisture between old concrete and new epoxy. D. Mortar Application 1. Condition epoxy compound components to a temperature between 65°-80°F unless otherwise recommended by the manufacturer. Epoxies beyond this range of temperature shall not be used. 2. Stir each of the two parts of epoxy separately before mixing. Then mix in a clean container free of contaminants. 3. Thoroughly blend epoxy components and sand with Jiffy mixers (made by The Jiffy Mixer Co., Irvine, California) to a uniform and homogenous mixture. Small batches of one quart or less may be mixed by spatulas, palette knives or similar devices. 4. Mixing should be accomplished well within the pot life of epoxy (three minutes when using Jiffy mixer or five minutes when mixed by hand) after allowing for time required for application. 5. Apply mortar by trowel or other means suitable for the consistency of the epoxy-sand mortar mix. 6. Build up the repair area in layers with mortar thicknesses within those specified by the manufacturer(1/4" maximum per layer). 7. Consolidate the mortar thoroughly to remove entrapped air. 8. Finish surface of mortar to match the texture and contours of existing concrete. 9. Allow mortar to cure in accordance to manufacturers recommendations. E. Cleanup 1. Protect surfaces surrounding the work areas against spillage. 2. Epoxy and epoxy mortar spillages shall be cleaned before they set. EPDXY RELATED WORK 03 31 00-4/7 Commodore Park Improvements—Phase 1 -#23173 July 3, 2025 3. Cleanup all portions of the existing structure that are soiled or stained in the process of epoxy mortar repair work. 3.2 EPDXY GROUTED BOLTS, DOWELS OR REINFORCING STEEL: A. Applicator's Qualifications 1. Epoxy grouting of bolts, dowels or reinforcing steel shall only be performed by contractors who have had successful experience on a minimum of three projects of similar scope. 2. Only adequately trained epoxy applicators shall be used on the job. Furnish current certificate of training on request. B. Surface Preparation 1. All bolts, dowels and reinforcing bars shall be abrasive blasted no more than eight hours before the grouting. If evidence of oxidation exists on the surface, the bolts, reinforcing bars and dowels shall be recleaned. Blast-clean surfaces using Steel Structures Painting Council, Surface Preparation No. 6, to give a surface condition corresponding to ASa2, BSa2, CSa2 of SSPC Vis 1, depending on the initial surface condition of the steel surface. Prior to blast-cleaning, clean surfaces to conform to SSPC SP1, SP2, and SP3, as required. 2. All holes shall be clean of dust, debris, and contaminants. Use compressed air from an oil-and-water-free compressed air source prior to epoxy application. C. Drilling Holes for Embedment 1. Use only rotary-percussion type drills for drilling holes. 2. Drills shall be fitted with bits having single tooth that produce large cuttings, and hollow stem drill rods that permit simultaneous blowing of compressed air providing immediate expulsion of the cuttings from the hole. 3. Do not cut through any reinforcing steel unless indicated otherwise on the drawings. Use small diameter exploratory holes to detect presence of reinforcing steel prior to drilling holes for grouting. 4. Core drilling equipment, and electric impact hammers or other tools which do not provide for immediate expulsion of the drill cuttings shall not be used. 5. Unless noted otherwise on the drawings, depth of hole used for embedding the bolts, bars or dowels shall be at least fifteen times their diameter. 6. Unless noted otherwise on the drawings, the center to center distance between the embedded bolts, bars or dowels shall be at least twelve times their diameter. 7. Unless noted otherwise on the drawings, the edge distance shall be at least six times the diameter of the bolt, bar or dowel. EPDXY RELATED WORK 03 31 00-5/7 Commodore Park Improvements—Phase 1 -#23173 July 3, 2025 8. Hole diameter shall normally be 1/4" larger than the outside diameter of the embedded item. In no case shall the hole diameter be 3/8" larger than the diameter of the embedded item. D. Epoxy Application 1. Condition epoxy compound materials at a temperature between 65°-80°F unless otherwise recommended by the manufacturer. Epoxies beyond this range of temperature shall not be used. 2. Mix epoxy materials in a clean container free of contaminants. 3. Thoroughly blend epoxy components with mechanical mixers to a uniform and homogenous mixture. Mix small batches (up to 1 quart) by use of spatulas, palette knives, or similar devices. Take care to use proper proportions of the epoxy components when using small batches. 4. Mixing shall be accomplished well within the pot life of the epoxy after allowing for time required for application. 5. Partially fill the hole with epoxy. Then insert the bolt, dowel or reinforcing bar into the hole such that the resin material oozes out around the embedded item, ensuring complete contact. Twist the bolt, dowel or bar slightly as it is inserted in the hole to ensure complete contact. 6. As an alternative to inserting the embedded item after the epoxy is poured in the hole, the bolt, dowel, or bar may be positioned in the hole and filled up with epoxy by hand caulking guns or injected with an in-head mixing equipment. In either case, the nozzle shall be provided with a hose or tube of sufficient length to reach the bottom of the hole being filled. 7. Where the holes are horizontal or overhead, the opening shall be covered by a masking or a duct tape. Make a split in the tape and insert the epoxy injection tube through the split. Fill hole completely with epoxy and then insert the embedded item through the split tape. Amount of epoxy should be such that a small amount of material oozes through the split. Twist the bolt, dowel or bar slightly as it is inserted in the hole to ensure complete contact. 8. Do not apply epoxy in the rain or in the presence of standing water. E. Cleanup 1. Protect surfaces surrounding the work area against spillage. 2. Epoxy oozed out from the holes and spillages shall be cleaned before they become difficult to remove. 3. Cleanup whatever portions of the existing structure are soiled or stained in the process of grouting the bolts, dowels or reinforcing bars. EPDXY RELATED WORK 03 31 00-6/7 Commodore Park Improvements—Phase 1 -#23173 July 3, 2025 END OF SECTION 03 3100 EPDXY RELATED WORK 03 31 00-7/7 Commodore Park Improvements—Phase 1 -#23173 July 3, 2025 SECTION 03 3111 CONCRETESTRUCTURES PART 1-GENERAL 1.01 Description A. This specification shall govern work required for the construction of structures involving the use of structural concrete as required to complete the project. 1.02 Related Sections A. 03 1113.11 CONCRETE FORMS B. 03 2111 REINFORCING STEEL C. 03 35 11 CONCRETE FINISHING D. 03 39 11 CONCRETE CURING 1.03 References The latest edition of the referenced item below shall be used. A. ACI 211,"Standard Practice for Selecting Proportions for Normal,Heavyweight,and Mass Concrete" B. ACI 302,`Recommended Practice for Concrete Floor and Slab Construction" C. ACI 304,`Recommended Practice for Measuring,Mixing,Transporting,and Placing Concrete" D. ACI 305,`Recommended Practice for Hot Weather Concreting' E. ACI 306,`Recommended Practice for Cold Weather Concreting" F. ACI 309,"Consolidation of Concrete" G. ACI 315,'Recommended Practice for Detailing Reinforced Concrete Systems" H. ACI 318,'Building Code Requirements for Structural Concrete" 1. ACI 614,'Recommended Practice for Measuring,Mixing,Transporting,and Placing Concrete" J. ASTM C 150-Specification for Portland Cement IC ASTM C 595-Specification for Blended Hydraulic Cements L. ASTM C 845-Specification for Expansive Hydraulic Cement M. ASTM C 1157-Performance Specification for Hydraulic Cement N. ASTM D 994-Standard Specification for Preformed Expansion Joint Filler for Concrete(Bituminous Type) 0. ASTM D 1751 - Standard Specification for Preformed Expansion Joint Filler for Concrete Paving and Structural Construction(Nonextruding and Resilient Bituminous Types) P. Texas Department of Transportation (TxDOT) Standard Specification for Construction and Maintenance of Highways,Streets,and Bridges Item 420,Concrete Structures Q. Texas Department of Transportation (TxDOT) Standard Specification for Construction and Maintenance of Highways,Streets,and Bridges Item 421,Hydraulic Cement Concrete R. Texas Department of Transportation(TxDOT)Departmental Material Specification DMS-4610,Fly Ash S. Texas Department of Transportation (TxDOT) Departmental Material Specification DMS-4640, Chemical Admixtures for Concrete T. Texas Department of Transportation (TxDOT) Departmental Material Specification DMS-6310,Joint Sealants and Fillers U. Texas Department of Transportation (TxDOT) Departmental Material Specification DMS-6160, Waterstops, Nylon Reinforced Neoprene Sheet,and Elastomeric Pads V. Texas Department of Transportation (TxDOT) Departmental Material Specification DMS-4650, Hydraulic Cement Concrete Curing Materials and Evaporation Retardants W. Texas Department of Transportation(TxDOT)Test Procedure Tex-100-E X. Texas Department of Transportation(TxDOT)Test Procedure Tex-203-17 Y. Texas Department of Transportation(TxDOT)Test Procedure Tex-401-A Z. Texas Department of Transportation(TxDOT)Test Procedure Tex-410-A AA. Texas Department of Transportation(TxDOT)Test Procedure Tex-411-A BB. Texas Department of Transportation(TxDOT)Test Procedure Tex-413-A CC. Texas Department of Transportation(TxDOT)Test Procedure Tex-472-A DD. CRSI,"Reinforced Concrete-A Manual of Standard Practice" EE. National Ready Mixed Concrete Association(NRMCA) 1.04 Submittals A. Product Information 1. Clearly indicate within submittal that the product is in compliance with this and related Section(s). B. Complete concrete design data shall be submitted to the Owner for approval. C. All test results shall be sent to the Owner upon completion of test. CONCRETE STRUCTURES 03 31 11-1 1.05 Definitions A. Retarding admixture-a material which,when added to a concrete mixture in the correct quantity,will retard the initial set of the concrete. B. Water-reducing admixture-a material which,when added to a concrete mixture in the correct quantity,will reduce the quantity of mixing water required to produce concrete of a given consistency. PART 2-PRODUCTS 2.01 General A. Any testing required for approval of use of a product is the responsibility of the Contractor. 2.02 Hydraulic Cement A. Cement shall be in conformance with TxDOT DMS-4600. 1. Any testing required for approval of use is the responsibility of the Contractor. B. For cement strength requirements,either the tensile or the compressive test may be used. C. Either Type I or II cement shall be used unless Type II is specified on the Drawings. 1. Except when Type II is specified on the Drawings, Type III cement may be used when the anticipated air temperature for the succeeding twelve(12)hours will not exceed 60'F. 2. Type III cement may be used in all precast prestressed concrete, except in piling when Type II cement is required for substructure concrete. 3. Only one (1)brand of each type will be permitted on the entire project,unless otherwise authorized by the Owner. D. Cement Delivery 1. Bulk a. Cement may be delivered in bulk where adequate bin storage is provided. b. Information shall be provided in the bills of lading accompanying each shipment of name of the manufacturer and the type of cement. 2. Bag a. Shall be delivered in bags marked plainly with the name of the manufacturer and the type of cement. b. Information shall be provided in the bills of lading accompanying each shipment of name of the manufacturer and the type of cement. c. Bags shall contain ninety-four(94)pounds net. d. All bags shall be in good condition at time of delivery. 3. No caked cement will be accepted. E. Storage 1. All cement shall be stored in well-ventilated weatherproof buildings or approved bins,which will protect it from dampness or absorption of moisture. 2. Storage facilities shall be ample,and each shipment of packaged cement shall be kept separated to provide easy access for identification and inspection. 3. The Owner may permit small quantities of sacked cement to be stored in the open for a maximum of forty-eight (48)hours on a raised platform and under waterproof covering during periods of no precipitation. 4. Cement remaining in storage for a prolonged period of time may be retested and rejected if it fails to conform to any of the requirements of these specifications. 2.03Aggregate A. Supply aggregates that meet the definitions in TxDOT Tex-100-E. B. Coarse Aggregate 1. Coarse aggregate shall consist of durable particles of gravel, crushed blast furnace slag, crushed stone, or combinations thereof,free from frozen material or injurious amount of salt,alkali,vegetable matter,or other objectionable material either free or as an adherent coating; and its quality shall be reasonably uniform throughout. 2. It shall not contain more than quarter-percent(0.25%)by weight of clay lumps,nor more than one-percent (1%)by weight of shale,nor more than five-percent(5%)of weight of laminated and/or friable particles when tested in accordance with TxDOT Tex-413-A. CONCRETE STRUCTURES 03 31 11-2 3. It shall have a wear of not more than forty-percent(40%)when tested in accordance with TOOT Tex-410-A. 4. Unless otherwise specified on the Drawings,coarse aggregate will be subjected to a five(5)cycle magnesium sulfate soundness of not more than eighteen-percent(18%)when tested in accordance with TxDOT Tex-411- A. a. Crushed recycled hydraulic cement concrete is not subject to the five(5)cycle soundness test 5. When tested by approved methods,the coarse aggregate,including combinations of aggregates when used, shall conform to the grading requirements shown in Table 1. Table 1 Coarse Aggregate Gradation Percent Passing on Each Sieve Aggregate Nominal 21/2 2 11/2 1 3/4 1/2 3/8 No. No. Grade No. Size 4 8 80 50 20 0 1 2" 100 to to to to 100 85 40 5 2 95 35 10 0 (467)* 11/2" 100 to to to to 100 70 30 5 95 60 25 0 3 11/2" 100 to to to to 100 90 60 5 4 95 25 0 0 (57)* 1" 100 to to to to 100 60 10 5 5 90 20 0 0 (67) 3/4" 100 to to to to 100 55 10 5 6 90 40 0 0 (7) 1/2" 100 to to to to 100 70 15 5 70 0 7 3/8" 100 to to 95 25 95 20 0 8 3/8" 100 to to to 100 65 10 *Numbers in parenthesis indicate conformance with ASTM C33. 6. The Loss by Decantation as tested in accordance with TOOT Tex-406-A and the allowable weight of clay lumps shall not exceed one-percent(1%),or the value shown on the Drawings,whichever is smaller. a. In the case of aggregates made primarily from crushing stone,if the material finer than the No.200 sieve is established to be the dust of fracture and essentially free from clay or shale as established by TOOT Tex-406-A,Part III,the limit may be increased to one and one-half percent(1.5%). b. When crushed limestone coarse aggregate is used in concrete pavements,the decant may not exceed one- percent (1%) but not more than three-percent (3%) if the material finer than the No. 200 sieve is determined to be at least sixty-seven percent(67%) calcium carbonate in accordance with TxDOT Tex- 406-A,Part III. C. Fine Aggregate 1. Fine aggregate shall consist of clean,hard,durable and uncoated particles of natural or manufactured sand or a combination thereof,with or without a mineral filler. CONCRETE STRUCTURES 03 31 11-3 2. It shall be free from frozen material or injurious amounts of salt,alkali,vegetable matter or other objectionable material and it shall not contain more than half-percent(0.5%)by weight of clay lumps in accordance with TxDOT Tex-413-A. 3. When subjected to the color test for organic impurities in accordance with TxDOT Tex-408-A,it shall not show a color darker than standard. 4. Unless otherwise shown on the Drawings,the acid insoluble residue of the fine aggregate shall be not less than sixty-percent(60%)by weightwhen tested in accordance with TxDOT standard laboratory test procedure Tex- 612-J and as noted in TxDOT Item 421 for all concrete subject to direct traffic. S. When tested in accordance with TxDOT Tex-401-A,the fine aggregate or combinations of aggregates,including mineral filler,shall conform to the grading requirements shown in Table 2. Table 2 Fine Aggregate Gradation Chart Percent Retained on Each Sieve Aggregate No. No. Grade No. 3/8" No.4 No.8 No.16 No.30 No.50 100 200 0 0 15 35 65 90 97 1 0 to to to to to to to 5 20 50 1 75 1 90 1 100 1 100 NOTE 1: Where manufactured sand is used in lieu of natural sand,the percent retained on the No.200 sieve shall be 94 to 100. NOTE 2: Where the sand equivalent value is greater than 85,the retainage on the No.50 sieve may be 70 to 94 percent. 6. Fine aggregate will be subjected to the Sand Equivalent Test(TxDOT Tex-203-F). a. The sand equivalent shall not be less than 80 nor less than the value shown on the Drawings,whichever is greater. 7. For all classes of concrete except K,the fineness modulus for fine aggregates shall be between 2.30 and 3.10 as determined by TxDOT Tex-402-A. 8. For all class K concrete,the fineness modulus for fine aggregates shall be between 2.60 and 2.80 as determined by TxDOT Tex-402-A. D. Mineral Filler 1. Mineral filler shall consist of stone dust, clean crushed sand, or other approved inert material with 100% passing the No.30 sieve and 65%to 100%passing the No.200 sieve when tested in accordance with TxDOT Tex-401-A. E. Storage 1. The method of handling and storing concrete aggregate shall prevent contamination with foreign materials. 2. If the aggregates are stored on the ground,the sites for the stockpiles shall be clear of all vegetation and level. a. The bottom layer of aggregate shall not be disturbed or used without recleaning. 3. When conditions require the use of two (2) or more sizes of aggregates,they shall be separated to prevent intermixing. a. Where space is limited,stockpiles shall be separated by physical barriers. 4. Methods of handling aggregates during stockpiling and subsequent use shall be such that segregation will be minimized. a. If segregation is apparent,the stockpile shall be remixed and tested. 5. Unless otherwise authorized by the Owner,all aggregate shall be stockpiled at least twenty-four(24)hours to reduce the free moisture content. F. Supplementary Cementing Materials(SCM) 1. Fly Ash a. Shall conform to TxDOT DMS-4610 1) Do not use class C Fly Ash in sulfate-resistant concrete 2. Ultra-Fine Fly Ash(UFFA) a. Shall conform to TxDOT DMS-4610 3. Ground Granulated Blast-Furnace Slag(GGBFS) CONCRETE STRUCTURES 03 31 11-4 a. Shall conform to TxDOT DMS-4620,Grade 100 or 120 4. Silica Fume a. Shall conform to TxDOT DMS-4630 5. Metakaolin a. Shall conform to TxDOT DMS-4635 2.O4Mixing Water 1. Water for use in concrete shall be free from oils,acids,organic matter or other deleterious substances. 2. Water from municipal supplies approved by the State Health Department will not require testing,but water from other sources will be sampled and tested before use in structural concrete. 3. Water shall be in accordance with TxDOT Item 421. a. Any testing required for approval of use is the responsibility of the Contractor. 4. The water source shall be able to supply the required amounts of water and shall be maintained in such condition to insure completion of the work under way without excessive delays for repairs or replacements. S. The water source shall be arranged so that the amount of water can be measured accurately. 2.05Admixtures 1. Admixtures must be in conformance with TxDOT DMS-4640 and ASTM C 494 or ASTM C 1017 (for flowing concrete only). a. Any testing required for approval of use is the responsibility of the Contractor. 2. Dosage rates of admixtures shall be determined prior to use by means of trial mixes made with materials to be used and under anticipated construction conditions. 3. Calcium Chloride will not be permitted. 4. Storage shall be in accordance with the manufacturers recommendations. 2.O6Mortar and Grout 1. Mortar for repair of concrete shall consist of one(1)part hydraulic cement,two(2)parts finely graded sand, and sufficient water to make the mixture plastic and can be easily handled and spread by trowel. 2. When required to prevent color difference,white cement shall be added to produce the color required. 3. When required by the Owner,latex adhesive shall be added to the mortar. 2.O7Epoxy 1. Epoxy materials shall conform to TxDOT DMS-6100. 2. Epoxy Bonding Compound for bonding new concrete to hardened concrete or other structural material a. Epoxy Bonding Compound shall be a two component,100%solids,moisture insensitive system. 3. Epoxy Grout for Epoxy patch on non-horizontal surfaces to concrete a. Epoxy Compound shall be a low-modulus,high viscosity,moisture insensitive system. 2.08 Expansion Joint Material 1. Preformed Fiber Material a. Preformed fiber expansion joint material shall be of the dimensions shown on the Drawings. b. At the Contractor's option,the material shall be one of the following types,unless otherwise noted on the Drawings: 1) Asphalt Board a) Asphalt Board shall consist of two (2) liners of 0.016-inch asphalt impregnated paper,filled with a mastic mixture of asphalt and vegetable fiber and/or mineral filler. b) Boards shall be smooth,flat and sufficiently rigid to permit installation. c) When tested in accordance with TxDOT Tex-524-C,the asphalt board shall not deflect from the horizontal more than one inch(1")in three and one-half inches(3 1/2"). d) Bituminous fiber and bituminous mastic composition material conforming to ASTM D 994 and ASTM D 1751 2) Wood a) Shall be Filler board of selected stock. b) Use wood of density and type as follows: CONCRETE STRUCTURES 03 31 11-5 (1) Clear,all-heart cypress weighing no more than 40 pounds per cubic foot,after being oven dried to constant weight. (2) Clear,all-heart redwood weighing no more than 30 pounds per cubic foot,after being oven dried to constant weight. 3) Rebonded Neoprene Filler a) Rebonded neoprene filler shall consist of ground closed-cell neoprene particles,rebonded and molded into sheets of uniform thickness of the dimensions shown on Drawings. b) Filler material shall have the physical properties in Table 3 and shall meet the requirements of ASTM D1752,Type 1 where applicable: Table 3 Filler Material Properties Property Method Requirement Color ASTM D1752 Type 1 Black Density ASTM D1752 Type 1 40 PCF Min Recovery ASTM D1752 Type 1 90%Min. Compression ASTM D1752 Type 1 50 to 500 psi Extrusion ASTM D1752 Type 1 0.25 In.Max. Tensile Strength ASTM D1752 Type 1 20 psi Min. Elongation 75%Min c) The manufacturers shall furnish the Owner with certified test results as to the compliance with the above requirements and a twelve-inch (12") x twelve-inch (12") x one-inch (1") sample from the shipment for approval. 2. Joint Sealing Materials a. Unless otherwise shown on the Drawings, joint sealing material shall conform to the following requirements: 1) The material shall adhere to the sides of the concrete joint or crack and shall form an effective seal against infiltration of water and incompressible. 2) The material shall not crack or break when exposed to low temperatures. 3) The material shall be one of the following: a) Class 1-a (1) Two component,Synthetic Polymer,Cold Extruded Type. (2) Curing is to be by polymerization and not by evaporation of solvent or fluxing of harder particles. (3) This type is specifically designed for vertical or sloping joints and hence not self-leveling. (4) It shall cure sufficiently at an average temperature leveling. (5) It shall cure sufficiently at an average temperature of 77'F,+ 3°F maximum for twenty- four(24)hours. b) Class 1-b (1) Two component,Synthetic Polymer,Cold Pourable,Self Leveling Type. (2) Curing is to be by polymerization and not by evaporation of solvent or fluxing of harder particles. (3) It shall cure sufficiently at an average temperature of 77'F+ 3°F maximum for three (3) hours. c) For Sidewalks and Driveways (1) Shall be Greenstreak#610 or approved equal installed over expansion joint filler. 4) Performance Requirements a) Class 1-a and 1-b, when tested in accordance with TxDOT Tex-525-C, shall meet the above curing times and requirements as follows: (1) It shall be of such consistency that it can be mixed and poured,or mixed and extruded into joints at temperatures above 60'F. CONCRETE STRUCTURES 03 31 11-6 (2) Penetration at 77'F. (a) 150 gm.cone,5 sec.,max.cm..................0.90 (3) Bond and Extension 75%,0°F,5 cycles (a) Dry Concrete Blocks............................Pass (b) Wet Concrete Blocks............................Pass (c) Steel Blocks(Primed if specified by Manuf.)...Pass (d) Flow at 200'F.................................None (e) Water Content%by weight,max.................5.0 (4) Resilience (a) Original sample min.%(cured).................50 (b) Oven aged at 158°F min.%....................50 (5) For Class 1-a Material Only (a) Cold Flow(10 min.)............................None b) Greenstreak#610 (1) Provide flexible,modified PVC(polyvinyl chloride)"G-SEAL"as manufactured by Greenstreak,profile style number 610. (2) The modified PVC paving cap seal shall be extruded from an elastomeric plastic material of which the basic resins are prime virgin materials. The compound shall not contain any scrapped or reclaimed material whatsoever. (3) Performance Requirements as noted in Table 4: Table 4 Performance Requirements Property Test Method Requirements Tensile Strength ASTM D412-92 2350 psi min. Elongation ASTM D412-92 375%min. Hardness ASTM D2240-95 81+/-3 Shore A Oil Swell (ASTM Oil#3,70 hrs @ ASTM D471 95 +/- 15%by vol. 2120 F change in +/- 15%by wt. volume/weight) Ozone Resistance (20%strain,300 pphm,70 ASTM D518-91 No Cracking hrs @ 1040 F) UV Resistance ASTM G53 2200 psi minimum (2000hrs @ 701,F) 200%minimum Abrasion Resistance (10,500 cycles,1000 g ASTM D 3884 Material Loss: 0.35 grams max. load) Adhesive Bond Strength ASTM D412-92 1000 psi min. Tensile Strength retained: 90% Results after Heat Aging ASTM D573 Elongation retained: (24 hrs @ 70°F) 90% Hardness change: +/-3 Shore A CONCRETE STRUCTURES 03 31 11-7 PART 3-EXECUTION 3.01 General A. All Work shall be in accordance with the Contract,Specifications, Drawings,Manufacturer recommendations, and industry standards. 1. In the event that a requirement conflicts with another,the more stringent requirement shall be followed, unless directed otherwise by the Owner. 3.02 Forms A. General 1. Shall be in accordance with Section 03 1113.11 CONCRETE FORMS 2. Opening in forms shall be provided,if needed,for the removal of laitance of foreign matter of any kind. 3. All forms shall be wetted thoroughly before the concrete is placed therein. 4. If,at any stage of the work,the forms show signs of bulging or sagging,the portion of the concrete causing such condition shall be removed immediately,if necessary,and the forms shall be reset and securely braced against further movement. 3.03 Reinforcing Steel A. Shall be in accordance with Section 03 2111 REINFORCING STEEL 3.04 Equipment A. Concrete Plant 1. Certified by the National Ready Mixed Concrete Association(NRMCA)or have an inspection report signed and sealed by a Licensed Professional Engineer in the State of Texas showing that the equipment meets all requirements of ASTM C94. a. If the Plant is moved,it must be recertified. b. Plants with a licensed engineer's inspection are required to be reinspected every two(2)years. c. Provide a copy of the certification to the Owner's representative. d. When equipment fail to meet requirements it shall be removed from service and corrected. 2. The batching Plant shall be provided with adequate bins for batching all aggregates and materials required by the specifications. B. Mixing Equipment 1. General a. All equipment,tools,and machinery used for mixing materials and performing any part of the work shall be maintained in such condition to insure completion of the work under way without excessive delays for repairs or replacements. b. When equipment fail to meet specification requirements it shall be removed from service and corrected. c. Mixers may be either the revolving drum type or the revolving blade type, and shall be capable of producing concrete meeting the required specifications. 1) The mixer shall have a plate affixed showing the manufacturer's recommended operating data. d. Job mix concrete shall be concrete mixed in an approved batch mixer in accordance with the requirements of this specification,adjacent to the structure for which the concrete is being mixed,and moved to the placement site,in non-agitating equipment. 2. Mixers and Agitators a. General 1) Mixers shall be of an approved stationary or truck-type. b. Volumetric Mixers 1) Capable of combining the materials into a thoroughly mixed and uniform mass. 2) Shall have rating plates defining the capacity and the performance of the mixers in accordance with the Volumetric Mixer Manufacturers Bureau or equivalent. 3) Mixers shall comply with ASTM C685. 4) Provide information showing the mixers meet the uniformity test requirements of TxDOT Tex-472- A. c. Stationary Mixers CONCRETE STRUCTURES 03 31 11-8 1) Capable of combining the ingredients into a thoroughly mixed and uniform mass within the specified time or the number of revolutions specified and capable of discharging concrete which satisfies five (5)of the six(6)requirements of TxDOT Tex-472-A. 2) Facilities shall be provided to permit ready access to the inside of the drum for inspection,cleaning and repair of blades. 3) Mixer shall be subject to daily examination for changes in condition due to accumulation of hardened concrete and/or wear of blades. a) Any hardened concrete shall be removed before the mixer will be permitted to be used. b) Worn blades shall be repaired or replaced in accordance with the manufacturer's design when any part or section is worn as much as ten percent (10%) below the original height of the manufacturer's design. 4) If deemed not adequate or suitable for the work,it shall be removed from the site upon a written order from the Owner and a suitable mixer shall be provided by the Contractor. 5) Truck mixers mounted on a stationary base will not be considered a stationary mixer. d. Truck Mixer 1) Capable of combining the ingredients into a thoroughly mixed and uniform mass within the specified time or the number of revolutions specified and capable of discharging concrete which satisfies five (5)of the six(6)requirements of TxDOT Tex-472-A. 2) Certified by the National Ready Mixed Concrete Association(NRMCA)or have an inspection report signed and sealed by a Licensed Professional Engineer in the State of Texas showing that the equipment meets all requirements of ASTM C94. 3) Facilities shall be provided to permit ready access to the inside of the drum for inspection,cleaning and repair of blades. 4) Mixer shall be subject to daily examination for changes in condition due to accumulation of hardened concrete and/or wear of blades. a) Any hardened concrete shall be removed before the mixer will be permitted to be used. b) Worn blades shall be repaired or replaced in accordance with the manufacturer's design when any part or section is worn as much as ten percent (10%) below the original height of the manufacturer's design. 5) If deemed not adequate or suitable for the work,it shall be removed from the site upon a written order from the Owner and a suitable mixer shall be provided by the Contractor. 6) An engine in satisfactory working condition and capable of accurately going the desired speed of rotation shall be mounted as an integral part of the mixing unit for the purpose of rotating the drum. 7) Truck mixers equipped with a transmission that will govern the speed of the drum within the specified rpm will not require a separate engine. 8) All truck mixers shall be equipped with actuated counters by which the proper number of revolutions of the drum as specified may be readily verified. a) Counters (1) Truck mixers will be permitted to transport concrete to the job site at mixing speed if equipped with double actuated counters that will separate revolutions at mixing speed from total revisions. (2) Truck mixers equipped with a single actuated counter counting total revolutions of the drum shall mix the concrete at the Plant not less than fifty(50)nor more than seventy(70) revolutions at mixing speed,transport it to the job site at agitating speed and complete the required mixing before placing the concrete. b) The counters shall be read and recorded at the start of mixing at mixing speeds. 9) Shall have adequate water supply and accurate metering or gauging devices for measuring the amount used. e. Agitators 1) Concrete agitators shall be of the truck type,capable of maintaining a thoroughly mixed and uniform concrete mass and discharging it within the same degree of uniformity specified for mixers. 2) Agitators shall comply with all of the requirements for truck mixers, except for the actual mixing requirements. CONCRETE STRUCTURES 03 31 11-9 C. Hauling Equipment 1. All equipment,tools,and machinery used for hauling materials and performing any part of the work shall be maintained in such condition to insure completion of the work under way without excessive delays for repairs or replacements. 2. Certified by the National Ready Mixed Concrete Association(NRMCA)or have an inspection report signed and sealed by a Licensed Professional Engineer in the State of Texas showing that the equipment meets all requirements of ASTM C-94. a. Equipment with a licensed engineer's inspection is required to be reinspected every two(2)years. b. Provide a copy of the certification to the Owner's representative. c. When equipment fail to meet requirements it shall be removed from service and corrected. 3. Provide equipment capable of maintaining the mixed concrete with a satisfactory degree of uniformity. 4. When using non-agitating equipment for transporting concrete,provide equipment with smooth,mortar tight metal containers equipped with gates that prevent accidental discharge. D. Placing Equipment 1. The method and equipment used to transport concrete to the forms shall be capable of maintaining the rate of placement approved by the Owner. a. Concrete may be transported by buckets,chutes,buggies,belt conveyors,pumps or other acceptable methods. b. Chutes,troughs,conveyors or pipes shall be arranged and used so that the concrete ingredients will not be separated. c. All transporting equipment shall be kept clean and free from hardened concrete coatings. 1) Water used for cleaning shall be discharged clean of the concrete. d. Belt Conveyors and Pumps 1) When belt conveyors or pumps are used,sampling for testing will be done at the discharge end. 2) Concrete transported by conveyors shall be protected from sun and wind,if necessary,to prevent loss of slump and workability. e. Pipes 1) Pipes through which concrete is pumped shall be shaded and/or wrapped with wet burlap, if necessary,to prevent loss of slump and workability. 2) Concrete shall not be transported through aluminum pipes,tubes or other aluminum equipment. f. Troughs and Chutes 1) When steep slopes are necessary,the chutes shall be equipped with baffle boards or made in short lengths that reverse the direction of movement, or the chute ends shall terminate in vertical downspouts. 2) Open troughs and chutes shall extend,if necessary,down inside the forms or through holes left in them. E. Scales 1. Check prior to use,after each move,or whenever the accuracy or adequacy is questioned,and at least once every six(6)months. 2. Immediately correct deficiencies and recalibrate. 3. Provide a record of calibration showing the scales are in compliance with ASTM C94. 4. Check batching accuracy of volumetric water hatching devices and admixture dispensing devices at least every ninety(90)days. S. Perform daily checks as needed to confirm accuracy. F. Testing Equipment 1. Shall be provided in accordance with the requirements of the tests and in working condition to provide accurate information. 3.05Classification and Mix Design A. General a. It shall be the responsibility of the Contractor to furnish the mix design, for the class(es) of concrete specified. CONCRETE STRUCTURES 03 31 11-10 b. The mix shall be designed by a qualified concrete technician to conform with the requirements contained herein and in accordance with ACI 211. C. The Contractor shall perform,at his own expense,the work required to substantiate the design. d. It shall also be the responsibility of the Contractor to determine and measure the batch quantity of each ingredient, including all water, so that the mix conforms to these specifications and any other requirements shown on the Drawings. e. In lieu of the above mix design responsibility,the Contractor may accept a design furnished by the Owner; however,this will not relieve him of providing concrete meeting the requirements of these specifications. B. Aggregate a. Coarse Aggregate Factor 1) The coarse aggregate factor shall not be more than 0.82, except that when the voids in the coarse aggregate exceed forty-eight percent(48%)of the total dry loose volume,the coarse aggregate factor shall not exceed 0.85. 2) The coarse aggregate factor shall not be less than 0.70 for Grades 1,2 and 3 aggregate. b. Recycled Aggregate 1) Limit recycled crushed hydraulic cement concrete as a coarse or fine aggregate to Class A,B,D,E,and P concrete. 2) Limit recycled crushed concrete fine aggregate to a maximum of twenty percent (20%) of the fine aggregate. C. Strength 1. If the strength required for the class of concrete being produced is not secured with the cement specified in Table 5,the Contractor may use an approved water reducing or retarding admixture,or the Contractor shall furnish aggregates with different characteristics that will produce the required results. Table 5 Classes of Concrete Design Maximum Strength' Water to Coarse Class of Concrete Aggregate Concrete (psi) Ration Grades3,4 General Usages Inlets,Manholes,Curb,Gutter,Curb& A 3,000 0.60 1-4,8 gutter,Concrete retards,Sidewalks, Driveways,Backup walls,Anchors B 2,000 0.60 2-7 Riprap,Small roadside signs,and Anchors Drilled shafts,Bridge Substructure,Bridge railing,Culverts(except top slab of direct C 3,600 0.45 1-6 traffic culverts),Headwalls,Wing walls, Approach slabs,Concrete traffic barrier (cast-in-place) D 1,500 0.60 2-7 Riprap E 3,000 0.50 2-5 Seal Concrete CONCRETE STRUCTURES 03 31 11-11 4,000 min 6 Railroad structures;occasionally for bridge F Or as Noted on 0.45 2 5 piers,columns,or bents Drawings 4,000 min 6 Prestressed concrete beams,Boxes,Piling, H Or as Noted on 0.45 3 6 Concrete traffic barrier(precast) Drawings 4,000 min 6 Bridge slabs,Top slabs of direct traffic S Or as Noted on 0.45 2 5 culverts Drawings 4,000 min P Or as Noted on 0.45 2-3 Concrete pavement Drawings 5,500 min DC6 Or as Noted on 0.40 6 Dense concrete overlay Drawings 4,600 min CO6 Or as Noted on 0.40 6 Latex-modified concrete overlay Drawings 4,000 min 6 Slurry displacement shafts,Underwater LMC Or as Noted on 0.40 6 8 drilled shafts Drawings 1-minimum twenty-eight(28)day f c for all types of cement Z-Maximum water-cement or water-cementations ratio by weight 3-Do not use Grade 1 coarse aggregate except as approved by Owner,may not be used in Drilled shafts 4-Unless otherwise approved,use Grade 8 coarse aggregate in extruded curbs. 5-For information only,see Drawings and appropriate specifications for required class 6-Structural Concrete Classes 2. A higher class of concrete with equal or lower water to cementations material ratio may be substituted for the specified class of concrete. 3. To account for production variability and to ensure minimum compressive strength requirements are satisfied, the mix shall be over-designed in accordance with Table 6. Table 6 Over Design Compressive Strength Requirements CONCRETE STRUCTURES 03 31 11-12 Standard Deviation(psi) No.of Tests 300 400 500 600 700 15 470 620 850 1,120 1,390 20 430 580 760 1,010 1,260 30+ 400 530 670 900 1,130 Note: When designing the mix the values above shall be added to the minimum design strength in Table 5 Number of tests of a concrete mixture used to estimate D. Cementations Material 1. Unless otherwise specified or approved,limit cementations material content to no more than 700 lb per cubic yard. 2. Use only Type III cement only in precast concrete or when specified or permitted. E. Admixtures 1. Water Reducing or Retarding Agents a. Water reducing or retarding agents may be used with all classes of concrete at the option of the Contractor. b. When water reducing or retarding agents are used at the option of the Contractor,reduced dosage of the admixture will be permitted. 2. Entrained Air Agents a. Entrained air will be required in all concrete,except Class B,in accordance with Table 7 unless otherwise shown on the Drawings. Table 7 Air Entrainment %Air Aggregate Grade No. Moderate Exposure Severe Exposure 1 4 5 2 41/2 51/2 3 41/2 51/2 4 41/2 6 5 5 6 6 51/2 7 7 6 71/2 8 6 71/2 1. For specified concrete strengths above 5,000 psi a reduction of one(1)percentage point is permitted. b. Tolerances 1) Shall contain the proper amount as required in Table 7 with a tolerance of plus or minus one and one- half percentage(1 1/2%)points. 2) If the amount is beyond the above tolerance then the load of concrete will be rejected. CONCRETE STRUCTURES 03 31 11-13 F. Consistency 1. General a. The concrete shall be workable, cohesive, possess satisfactory finishing qualities, and of the stiffest consistency that can be placed and vibrated into a homogenous mass. b. The consistency of the concrete as placed should allow the completion of all finishing operations without the addition of water to the surface. c. Excessive bleeding shall be avoided. d. Modifications 1) In cases where the consistency requirements cannot be satisfied without exceeding the maximum allowable amount of water,the Contractor may use,or the Owner may require,an approved water reducing or retarding agent or the Contractor shall furnish additional aggregates,or aggregates with different characteristics,which will produce the required results. 2) Additional cement may be required or permitted as a temporary measure until aggregates are changed and designs checked with the different aggregates or admixture. 2. Slump a. Slump shall be in accordance with Table 8 using the lowest slump possible that can be placed and finished efficiently without segregation or honeycombing. Table 8 Slump Requirements Recommended Design Maximum And Design and Placement Slump 1 Placement Class of Slump 2 Concrete Concrete Use (inch) (inch) A Inlets,Manholes,Curb,Gutter,Curb&gutter, 4 or Concrete retards,Sidewalks,Driveways, 2.5 or B Backup walls,Anchors,Riprap,Small road Owner Owner Approved A roved D signs,Slip-formed,Extruded PP Thin Walled Section(9 inch or less) 4 5 Approach slabs,Concrete overlays,Caps, 3 4 Columns,Piers,Wall sections(over 9 inch) C Bridge railing,Concrete traffic barrier(cast-in- 4 61/2 F place) Drilled shafts(dry) 61/2 71/2 Drilled shafts(underwater,under slurry) 5 6 H Prestressed concrete beams,Boxes,Piling, 4 61/2 Concrete traffic barrier(precast) / CONCRETE STRUCTURES 03 31 11-14 S Bridge slabs,Top slabs of direct traffic culverts 4 5 1/2 Concrete pavement(slip-formed) 1 1/2 3 P Concrete pavement(formed) 4 61/2 DC Dense concrete overlay 3/4 2 CO Latex-modified concrete overlay 3 71/2 LMC Slurry displacement shafts,Underwater drilled 6 81/2 shafts 1-Recommended design and placement slump shall be as shown or as approved by Owner 2-Maximum design and placement slump shall be as shown or as approved by Owner b. Concrete that exceeds the maximum acceptable slump at time of delivery will be rejected. c. When approved, the slump may be increased above the values shown in Table 8 using chemical admixtures, provided that the admixture-treated concrete has the same or lower water-cement or water-cementations material ratio and does not exhibit segregation or excessive bleeding. 1) Mix design must be approved by the Owner. G. Mix Design Options 1. Shall be in accordance with TxDOT Item 421. H. Sulfate-Resistant Concrete 1. When sulfate-resistant concrete is required,use mix design options 1,2,3,or 4 given in below using Type I/II, II,V,IP,or IS cement in accordance with ACI 318. a. Option 1 1) Replace twenty percent(20%)to thirty-five percent(35%)of the cement with Class F fly ash. b. Option 2 1) Replace thirty-five percent(35%)to fifty percent(50%)of the cement with Ground Granulated Blast- Furnace Slag c. Option 3 1) Replace thirty-five percent(35%)to fifty percent(50%)of the cement with a combination of Class F fly ash,Ground Granulated Blast-Furnace Slag,or silica fume. d. Option 4 1) Use Type IP or Type IS cement. (Up to ten percent(10%) of a Type IP or Type IS cement may be replaced with Class F fly ash,Ground Granulated Blast-Furnace Slag,or silica fume.) 2. Do not use Class C Fly Ash in sulfate-resistant concrete I. Trial Batches 1. Trial batches will be made and tested using all the proposed ingredients prior to the placing of concrete,and when the aggregate and/or brand of cement or admixture are changed. 2. Trail batches shall be in accordance with TxDOT 421. 3. Trial batches shall be made in the mixer to be used on the job. 4. When Transit Mix concrete is to be used,the trial designs will be made in a transit mixer representative of the mixers to be used. a. Batch size shall not be less than fifty percent(50%)of the rated mixing capacity of the truck S. Mix designs from previous or concurrent jobs may be used without trial batches if it is shown that no substantial change in any of the proposed ingredients has been made. 3.O6Mixing A. Mixing Conditions 1. General a. The concrete shall be mixed in quantities required for immediate use. CONCRETE STRUCTURES 0331 11-15 2. Weather a. In threatening weather,which may result in conditions that will adversely affect quality of the concrete to be placed,the Owner may order postponement of the work. b. Where work has been started and changes in weather conditions require protective measures, the Contractor shall furnish adequate shelter to protect the concrete against damage from rainfall,or from freezing temperatures. c. If necessary to continue operations during rainfall,the Contractor shall also provide protective coverings for the material stockpiles. d. Aggregate stockpiles need be covered only to the extent necessary to control the moisture conditions in the aggregates to adequately control the consistency of the concrete. B. Mixing 1. General a. The mixing shall be done in a batch mixer of approved type and size that will produce uniform distribution of the material throughout the mass. b. After all the ingredients are assembled in the drum,the mixing shall continue not less than one(1)minute for mixers of one(1)cubic yard or less capacity plus fifteen(15)seconds for each additional cubic yard or portion thereof. c. The mixer shall operate at the speed and capacity designated by the Mixer Manufacturers Bureau of the Associated General Contractors of America. d. The absolute volume of the concrete batch shall not exceed the rated capacity of the mixer. e. The entire contents of the drum shall be discharged before any materials are placed therein for the succeeding batch. f. The first batch of concrete materials placed in the mixer for each placement shall contain an extra quantity of sand,cement,and water sufficient to coat the inside surface of the drum. g. Upon the cessation of mixing for any considerable length of time,the mixer shall be thoroughly cleaned. 2. Mixing Water a. A portion of the mixing water,required by the batch design to produce the desired slump,may be withheld and added at the job site,but only with permission of the Owner and under his supervision. b. When water is added under the above conditions,it shall be thoroughly mixed in accordance with this specification delivery provision for water added at the job site. 3. Ready-Mix Plants a. General 1) It shall be the Contractor's responsibility to furnish concrete meeting all requirements of the governing specifications. b. Mixing 1) Ready-Mixed Concrete shall be mixed and delivered by means of one of the following approved methods. 2) Mixers a) Stationary Mixed (1) Mixed completely in a stationary mixer and transported to the point of delivery in a truck agitator or a truck mixer operating at agitator or a truck mixer operating at agitation speed. (Central-Mix Concrete) (2) Mixed completely in a stationery mixer and transported to the job site in approved non- agitating trucks with special bodies. This method of transporting will be permitted for concrete pavement only. b) Truck Mixed (1) Mixed complete in a truck mixer and transported to the placement site at mixing and/or agitating speed(Transit-Mix Concrete),subject to the requirements of Mixing Equipment within this specification. 3.O7Quality of Concrete A. General 1. The concrete shall be uniform and workable. 2. Improperly mixed concrete shall not be placed in the structure. CONCRETE STRUCTURES 03 31 11-16 3. The cement content, maximum allowable water cement ratio, the desired and maximum slump and the strength requirements of the various classes of concrete shall conform to the requirements herein. 4. Sampling and Testing a. During the process of the work,the Owner or Inspector will require the Contractor to test the concrete actually placed. b. Testing Requirements 1) Testing Rate shall be in accordance with Table 9: Table 9 Testing Schedule Class of Concrete Testing Rate 1,2 General Usage 3 1 Set Curb,Gutter,Curb&gutter Per 500 Linear Feet or less 1 Set Sidewalks,Driveways Per 4,000 Square Feet or less 1 Set A Inlets,Manholes Per 6 or less 1 Set Per 30 cubic yards or less Concrete retards,Backup walls, Or Anchors As required by Drawings and/or Owner 1 Set Riprap,Small roadside signs Per 50 cubic yards or less 1 Set B Per 30 cubic yards or less Anchors Or As required by Drawings and/or Owner 1 Set Per 30 cubic yards or less Culverts(except top slab of direct or traffic culverts),Headwalls,Wing C As required by Drawings and/or walls Owner Drilled shafts,Bridge Substructure, As required by Drawings and/or Owner Bridge railing,Culverts(except top slab of direct traffic culverts), CONCRETE STRUCTURES 03 31 11-17 Headwalls,Wing walls,Approach slabs,Concrete traffic barrier(cast- in-place) 1 Set D Riprap Per 50 cubic yards or less E As required by Drawings and/or Owner Seal Concrete F As required by Drawings and/or Owner Railroad structures;occasionally for bridge piers,columns,or bents Prestressed concrete beams,Boxes, H As required by Drawings and/or Owner Piling,Concrete traffic barrier (precast) S As required by Drawings and/or Owner Bridge slabs,Top slabs of direct traffic culverts 1 Set Per 30 cubic yards or less P Concrete pavement or As required by Drawings and/or Owner DC As required by Drawings and/or Owner Dense concrete overly CO As required by Drawings and/or Owner Latex-modified concrete overly LMC As required by Drawings and/or Owner Slurry displacement shafts, Underwater drilled shafts 1-For information only,see Drawings and appropriate specifications for required class z-Test rates are per day of work unless Owner approves otherwise 3-For information only,see Drawings and appropriate specifications for required class 2) Testing of Fresh Concrete a) Air Content (1) In accordance with TEX-414-A or TEX-416-A b) Slump (1) In accordance with TEX-415-A c) Temperature (1) In accordance with TEX-422-A d) Making and Curing Strength Specimens (1) In accordance with TEX-447-A 3) Testing of Hardened Concrete a) Compressive Strength (1) In accordance with TEX-418-A b) Flexural Strength (1) In accordance with TEX-448-A c) Maturity (1) In accordance with TEX-426-A CONCRETE STRUCTURES 03 31 11-18 c. The Contractor shall provide and maintain curing facilities as described in the appropriate test procedure for the purpose of curing test specimens. 1) It will be the responsibility of the Contractor to ensure that the test cylinders are handled in a manner to ensure that the test results are accurate. d. When control of concrete quality is by twenty-eight(28) day compressive tests,job control will be by seven(7)day compressive tests that are shown to provide the required twenty-eight(28)day strength, based on results from trial batches. e. If the required seven(7)day strength is not secured with the cement specified in the mix design,changes in the batch design shall be made f. All test results shall be sent to the Owner upon completion of test. 3.08 Expansion Joints A. Joints and devices to provide for expansion and contraction shall be constructed where and as indicated herein or on the Drawings. B. All open joints and joints to be filled with expansion joint material,shall be constructed using forms adaptable to loosening or early removal. C. To avoid expansion or contraction damage to the adjacent concrete,these forms shall be loosened as soon as possible after final concrete set to permit free movement without requiring full form removal. D. Prior to placing the sealing material,the vertical facing the joint shall be cleaned of all laitance by sandblasting or by mechanical routing. E. Cracked or spalled edges shall be repaired. F. The joint shall be blown clean of all foreign material and sealed. G. Where preformed fiber joint material is used,it shall be anchored to the concrete on one side of the joint by light wire or nails,to prevent the material from falling out. H. The top one-inch(1")of the joint shall be filled with joint sealing material. I. Finished joints shall conform to the indicated outline with the concrete sections completely separated by the specified opening or joint material. J. Soon after form removal and again where necessary after surface finishing, all projecting concrete shall be removed along exposed edges to secure full effectiveness of the expansion joints. 3.09 Construction Joints A. The joint formed by placing plastic concrete in direct contact with concrete that has attained its initial set shall be deemed a construction joint. B. The term monolithic placement shall be interpreted to mean at the manner and sequence of concrete placing shall not create construction joints. C. Construction joints shall be of the type and at the locations shown on the Drawings. D. Additional joints will not be permitted without written authorization from the Owner,and when authorized, shall have details equivalent to those shown on the Drawings for joints in similar locations. E. Unless otherwise provided,construction joints shall be square and normal to the forms. F. Bulkheads shall be provided in the forms for all joints,except when horizontal. G. Construction joints requiring the use of joint sealing material shall be as detailed on the Drawings. H. The material will be specified on the Drawings without referenced to joint type. I. A concrete placement terminating at a horizontal construction joint shall have the top surface roughened thoroughly as soon as practicable after initial set is attained. J. The surfaces at bulkheads shall be roughened as soon as the forms are removed. K. The hardened concrete surface shall be thoroughly cleaned of all loose material,laitance,dirt or foreign material and saturated with water so it is moist when placing fresh concrete against it. L. Forms shall be drawn tight against the placing of the fresh concrete. 3.10Delivery of Concrete A. General 1. Delivery of concrete shall equal or exceed the rate approved by the Owner for continuous placement. 2. In all cases,the delivery of concrete to the placement site shall assure compliance with the time limits in the applicable specification for depositing successive batches in any monolithic unit. 3. The Contractor shall satisfy the Owner that adequate standby equipment are available. B. Delivery Tickets 1. A standard ticket system will be used for recording concrete batching,mixing and delivery date. 2. Loads arriving without ticket and/or in unsatisfactory condition shall not be used. CONCRETE STRUCTURES 03 31 11-19 3. Tickets will be delivered to the job inspector. C. Mixers 1. General a. When Ready-Mix Concrete is used, additional mortar (one (1) sack cement, three (3) parts sand and sufficient water)shall be added to the batch to coat the drum of the mixer or agitator truck and this shall be required for every load of Class C concrete only and for the first batch from central mix Plants. 2. Stationary Mixer a. When a stationary mixer is used for the entire mixing operation,the mixing time for one(1)cubic yard of concrete shall be one(1)minute plus fifteen(15)seconds for each additional cubic yard or portion thereof. b. This mixing time shall start when all cement,aggregates and initial water have entered the drum. c. The mixer shall be charged so that some of the mixing water will enter the drum in advance of the cement and aggregate. d. All of the mixing water shall be in the drum by the end of the first one-fourth(1/4)of the specified mixing time. e. Water used to flush down the blades after charging shall be accurately measured and included in the quantity of mixing water. f. The introduction of the initial mixing water, except blade wash down water and that permitted in this specification,shall be prior to or simultaneous with the charging of the aggregates and cement. g. The drum shall be kept in continuous motion from the time mixing is started until the discharge is completed. D. Truck Mixers 1. The loading of truck mixers shall not exceed sixty-three percent(63%)of the total volume of the drum. 2. When used as an agitator only,the loading shall not exceed eighty percent(80%)of the drum volume. 3. The drum shall be kept in continuous motion from the time mixing is started until the discharge is completed. E. Mixing Speed and Revolutions 1. Mixing speed shall be attained as soon as all ingredients are in the mixer,and each complete batch(containing all the required ingredients) shall be mixed not less than seventy (70) nor more than one-hundred (100) revolutions of the drum at mixing speed a. Except that when water is added at the job site,twenty-five(25)revolutions(minimum)at mixing speed, will be required to uniformly disperse the additional water throughout the mix 2. Mixing speed shall be as designated by the manufacturer. 3. All revolutions after the prescribed mixing time shall be at agitating speed. 4. The agitating speed shall be not less than one(1)nor more than five(5)rpm. 3.11 Placing Concrete A. General a. Before starting work, the Contractor shall inform the Owner fully of the construction methods he proposes to use,the adequacy of which shall be subject to the approval of the Owner. b. The Contractor shall give the Owner sufficient advance notice before placing concrete in any unit of the structure to permit the inspection of forms,reinforcing steel placement,and other preparations. C. Concrete shall not be placed in any unit prior to the completion of formwork and placement of reinforcement therein. d. Concrete mixing,placing and finishing shall be done in daylight hours,unless adequate provisions are made to light the entire site of all operations. e. Concrete placement will not be permitted when impending weather conditions will impair the quality of the finish work. 1) If rainfall should occur after placing operations are started, the Contractor shall provide ample covering to protect the work. 2) In case of drop in temperature,the provisions set forth in the"Placing Concrete in Cold Weather" of this specification shall be applied. CONCRETE STRUCTURES 03 31 11-20 f. Concrete not meeting the slump,workability and consistency requirements of the governing specification, shall not be placed in the structure or pavement g. Any concrete that is not in place within the limits outlined in shall not be used. h. The placing shall be regulated so the pressures caused by the plastic concrete shall not exceed the loads used in form design. i. The method of handling, placing and consolidation of concrete shall minimize segregation and displacement of the reinforcement,and produce a uniformly dense and compact mass. j. Concrete shall not have a free fall of more than five feet(T),except in the case of thin walls such as in culverts. 1) Any hardened concrete spatter ahead of the plastic concrete shall be removed. k. The method and equipment used to transport concrete to the forms shall be capable of maintaining the rate of placement approved by the Owner. 1. Each part of the forms shall be filled by depositing concrete as near its final position as possible. 1) The coarse aggregate shall be worked back from the face and the concrete forced under and around the reinforcement bars without displacing them. 2) Depositing large quantities at one point and running or working it along the forms will not be allowed. M. Concrete shall be deposited in the forms in layers of suitable depth but not more than thirty-six inches (36")in thickness,unless otherwise directed by the Owner. n. An approved retarding agent shall be used to control stress cracks and/or unauthorized cold joints in mass placements where differential settlement and/or setting time may induce stress cracking. B. Temperature and Time Allowances 1. The minimum temperature of all concrete at the time of placement shall be not less than 500 F. 2. The consistency of the concrete as placed should allow the completion of all finishing operations without the addition of water to the surface unless in accordance with section 03 35 29.13 CONCRETE FINISHING. 3. The maximum time interval between the addition of cement to the batch,and the placing of concrete in the forms shall not exceed the time in Table 10: Table 10 Maximum Time Interval between Addition of Cement to Placing Air or Concrete Temperature Maximum Time Non-Agitated Concrete Up to 80'F 30 minutes Over 80'F 15 minutes Agitated Concrete 90'F or above 45 minutes 750 F to 890 F 60 minutes 350 F to 740 F 90 minutes 4. The use of an approved retarding agent in the concrete will permit the extension of each of the temperature-time maximums shown in Table 10: a. Thirty(30)minutes for direct traffic culverts, b. One(1)hour for all other concrete except that the maximum time shall not exceed thirty(30)minutes for non-agitated concrete. 5. The sequence of successive layers or adjacent portions of concrete shall be such that they can be vibrated into a homogenous mass with the previously placed concrete without a cold joint. a. Not more than one(1)hour shall elapse between adjacent or successive placement of concrete. b. Authorized construction joints shall be avoided by placing all concrete between the authorized joints in one(1)continuous operation. 6. Consolidation CONCRETE STRUCTURES 03 31 11-21 a. All concrete shall be well consolidated and the mortar flushed to the form surfaces by continuous working with immersion type vibrators. b. Vibrators that operate by attachment to forms or reinforcement will not be permitted,except on steel forms. c. At least one(1)stand-by vibrator shall be provided for emergency use in addition to the ones required for placement. d. The concrete shall be vibrated immediately after deposit. e. Prior to the beginning of work,a systematic spacing of the points of vibration shall be established to insure complete consolidation and through working of the concrete around the reinforcement, embedded fixtures,and into the corners and angles of the forms. f. Immersion type vibrators shall be inserted vertically, at point eighteen inches (18) to thirty inches (30)apart,and slowly withdrawn. g. The vibrator may be inserted in a sloping or horizontal position in shallow slabs. h. The entire depth of each lift shall be vibrated,allowing the vibrator to penetrate several inches into the preceding lift. i. Concrete along construction joints shall be thoroughly consolidated by operating the vibrator along and close to but not against the joint surface. j. The vibration shall continue until thorough consolidation,and complete embedment of reinforcement and fixtures is produced,but not long enough to cause segregation. k. Vibration may be supplemented by hand spading or rodding, if necessary, to insure the flushing of mortar to the surface of all forms. 7. Slab concrete shall be mixed in a Plant located off the structure. a. Carting or wheeling concrete batches over completed slabs will not be permitted until they have aged at least four full curing days. b. If carts are used,timber Planking will be required for the remainder of the curing period. c. Carts shall be equipped with pneumatic tires. d. Curing operations shall not be interrupted for the purpose of wheeling concrete over finished slabs. 8. After concrete has taken its initial set, at least one (1) curing day shall elapse before placing strain on projecting reinforcement to prevent damage to the concrete. C. Placing Concrete in Cold Weather 1. General a. Concrete shall be placed as recommended in ACI 306. b. The Contractor is responsible for the protection of concrete placed under any and all weather conditions. c. Permission given by the Owner for placing during freezing weather will in no way relieve the Contractor of the responsibility for producing concrete equal in quality to that placed under normal conditions. d. Should concrete placed under such conditions prove unsatisfactory,it shall be removed and replaced at no additional cost. 2. Cast-in-Place Concrete a. Concrete may be placed when the atmospheric temperature is not less than 40'F and rising. b. Concrete shall not be placed in contact with any material coated with frost or having a temperature less than 32'F. c. When required, in order to produce the minimum specified concrete temperature, the aggregate and/or the water shall be heated uniformly,in accordance with the following: 1) The water temperature shall not exceed 180' F, and/or the aggregate temperature shall not exceed 150'F. 2) The heating apparatus shall heat the mass of aggregate uniformly. 3) The temperature of the mixture of aggregates and water shall be between 50'F and 85'F before introduction of the cement. d. All concrete shall be effectively protected as follows: 1) Slab Concrete a) The temperature of all unformed surfaces shall be maintained at 50°F or above for a period of 72 hours from time of placement and above 40'F for an additional 72 hours. CONCRETE STRUCTURES 03 31 11-22 2) Piers, Culverts walls, Retaining walls,Parapets,Wing walls,Bottoms of Slabs,and Other Similar Formed Concrete a) The temperature at the surface of all concrete shall be maintained at 40' F or above for a period of 72 hours from time of placement. b) The temperature of all concrete, including the bottom slabs of culverts placed on or in the ground,shall be maintained above 50'F for a period of 72 hours from time of placement. 3) Protection shall consist of providing additional covering,insulated forms or other means,and if necessary,supplementing such covering with artificial heating. 4) Curing as specified in Section 03 39 11 CONCRETE CURING shall be provided during this period until all requirements for curing have been satisfied. 5) When impending weather conditions indicate the possibility of the need for such temperature protection, all necessary heating and covering material shall be on hand ready for use before placement. 6) Sufficient extra test specimen will be made and cured with the placement to ascertain the condition of the concrete as placed prior to form removal and acceptance. 3. Precast Concrete a. A fabricating Plant for precast products which has adequate protection from cold weather in the form of permanent or portable framework and covering,which protects the concrete when placed in the forms, and is equipped with approved steam curing facilities, may place concrete under any low temperature conditions provided: 1) The framework and covering are placed and heat is provided for the concrete and the forms within one(1)hour after the concrete is placed. 2) This shall not be construed to be one(1)hour after the last concrete is placed,but that no concrete shall remain unprotected longer than one(1)hour. 3) For fabricating Plants without the above facilities and for job site precast products, the requirements of Section 03 39 11 CONCRETE CURING will apply. D. Placing Concrete in Hot Weather 1. Extra care shall be taken to reduce the temperature of the concrete being placed and to prevent rapid drying of newly placed concrete. 2. When the outdoor ambient temperature is more than 907,the temperature of the concrete as placed shall not exceed 907. 3. When high temperatures,low humidity and dry winds create conditions suitable for plastic cracking,an evaporation retarder may be required to be applied by spray one or more times during the finishing operation. 4. A fog spray shall be used during finishing operations. S. Curing shall be started as soon as the surface of the fresh concrete is sufficiently hard to permit it without damage. E. Placing Concrete in Water 1. Concrete shall be deposited in water only when specified on the Drawings or with written permission by the Owner. a. Its surface shall be kept approximately level during placement. 2. The forms or cofferdams shall be sufficiently tight to prevent any water current passing through the space in which the concrete is being deposited. 3. Pumping will not be permitted during the concrete placing,nor until it has set for at least thirty-six (36) hours. 4. The concrete shall be placed with a tremie, closed bottom-dump bucket, or other approved method,and shall not be permitted to fall freely through the water nor shall it be disturbed after it has been placed. a. Tremie 1) The tremie shall consist of a watertight tube fourteen inches(14")or less in diameter. 2) It shall be constructed so that the bottom can be sealed and opened after it is in place and fully charged with concrete. 3) It shall be supported so that it can be easily moved horizontally to cover all the work area and vertically to control the concrete flow. CONCRETE STRUCTURES 03 31 11-23 4) The placing operations shall be continuous until the work is complete. b. Bottom-dump Buckets 1) Bottom-dump buckets used for underwater placing shall have a capacity of not less than one-half cubic yard(1/2 cubic yard). 2) It shall be lowered gradually and carefully until it rests upon the concrete already placed and raised very slowly during the upward travel;the intent being to maintain still water at the point of discharge and to avoid agitating the mixture. 3) The placing operations shall be continuous until the work is complete. F. Placing Concrete in Box Culverts 1. In general,construction joints will be permitted only where shown on the Drawings. 2. Where the top slab and walls are placed monolithically in culverts more than four-feet(4')in clear height, an interval of not less than one (1)nor more than two(2)hours shall elapse before placing the top slab to allow for shrinkage in the wall concrete. 3. The base slab shall be finished accurately at the proper time to provide a smooth uniform surface. 4. Top slabs which carry direct traffic shall be finished as specified for roadway slabs in Section 03 35 11 CONCRETE FINISHING. 5. Top slabs of fill type culverts shall be given a reasonable smooth float finish. G. Placing Concrete in Foundations and Substructures 1. Concrete shall not be placed in footings until the depth and character of the foundation has been inspected by the Owner and permission has been given to proceed. 2. Placing of concrete footings upon seal courses will be permitted after the caissons or cofferdams are free from water and the seal course cleaned. 3. Any necessary pumping or bailing during the concreting operation shall be done from a suitable sump located outside the forms. 4. All temporary wales or braces inside cofferdams or caissons shall be constructed or adjusted as the work proceeds to prevent unauthorized construction joints in footings or shafts. 5. When footings can be placed in a dry excavation without the use of cofferdams or caissons,forms may be omitted, if desired by the Contractor and approved by the Owner, and the entire excavation filled with concrete to the elevation of the top of footing. a. Note: Measurement for payment will be based on the footing dimensions as shown on the Drawings. 3.12 Epoxy A. General Precaution 1. The Contractor is advised to become familiar with type of epoxy, method of application, and its basic limitations prior to using the epoxy. B. Bond New Concrete to Existing Concrete 1. Surface Preparation a. The existing concrete or structural surface to which the new concrete is to be bonded shall be roughened and cleaned. b. The existing surface shall be made free from dust, laitance, grease, curing compounds,waxes and all foreign material. c. Cleaning shall be done in strict accordance with manufacturer instructions. 1) Washing will not be allowed,unless authorized by Owner. d. During application of bonding compound,surface may be dry,moist,or wet,but surface shall be free of standing water. 2. Proportioning and Mixing a. The epoxy shall be mixed in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions. b. The epoxy shall be used in a neat condition(without aggregate filler). 3. Application of Epoxy a. The epoxy-bonding compound shall be applied in strict accordance with manufacturer instructions. b. Area adjacent to work shall be cleaned free of epoxy spills as to provide a neat appearance before work will be accepted. C. Concrete Overlay 1. The concrete overlay shall be in accordance with the Drawings and this section. CONCRETE STRUCTURES 03 31 11-24 2. The concrete overlay shall be applied over the epoxy within a period of time that shall not exceed sixty percent (60%)of the tack free time of the epoxy. a. It is important for the Contractor to note that these times vary with the temperature and pot time. b. The allowable times must be determined from the tack free times that are provided by the manufacturer. 3. If the allowable period of time is allowed to elapse before concrete overlay can be placed,another layer of epoxy shall be applied prior to placement of the concrete. D. Epoxy Grout for patch to non-horizontal surfaces to concrete: 1. Surface Preparation a. The existing concrete or structural surface to be bonded to shall be cleaned. b. The existing surface shall be made free from dust, laitance, grease, curing compounds,waxes and all foreign material. c. Cleaning shall be done in strict accordance with manufacturer instructions. 1) Washing will not be allowed,unless authorized by Owner. d. During application of bonding compound,surface may be dry,moist,or wet,but surface shall be free of standing water,unless otherwise recommended by manufacturer 2. Proportioning and Mixing a. The epoxy shall be mixed in accordance with the manufacturer instruction. b. The epoxy may be mixed with dry masonry sand. c. Sand shall conform to ASTM C-144 with 100%passing a No. 8 sieve and not more than 15%to 35% passing a No.50 mesh sieve. d. The amount of sand filler shall not exceed 3/4 to 1(loose sand to epoxy by volume). 3. Application a. Epoxy shall be applied in strict accordance with manufacturer instructions. b. Area adjacent to work shall be cleaned free of epoxy spills as to provide a neat appearance before work will be accepted. CONCRETE STRUCTURES 03 31 11-25 SECTION 03 35 11 CONCRETE FINISHING PART 1-GENERAL 1.01 Description A. This specification shall govern work required for the finishing of concrete as required to complete the project 1.02 Related Sections A. 03 3111 CONCRETE STRUCTURES 1.03 References The latest edition of the referenced item below shall be used. A. Texas Department of Transportation (TxDOT) Standard Specification for Construction and Maintenance of Highways,Streets,and Bridges Item 427,Surface Finishes for Concrete B. American Concrete Institute 1.04 Submittals A. Product Information 1. Clearly indicate within submittal that the product is in compliance with this and related Sections. PART 2-PRODUCTS 2.01 General A. All equipment,tools,and machinery used and performing any part of the work shall be maintained in such condition to insure completion of the work under way without excessive delays for repairs or replacements. 2.02 Screed A. The screed shall be designed rigid enough to hold true to shape and shall have sufficient adjustments to provide for the required camber. B. A vibrating screed may be used if heavy enough to prevent undue distortion. C. The screed shall be provided with a metal edge. 2.03 Hand Operated Fogging Equipment A. Shall be capable of producing a fine mist,not a spray. B. Equipment shall pump water or water and air under high pressure through a suitable atomizing nozzle. C. Shall be portable enough to use in the direction of any prevailing wind and adaptable for intermittent use to prevent excessive wetting of the concrete. PART 3-EXECUTION 3.01 General Information A. All Work shall be in accordance with the Contract, Specifications, Drawings, Manufacturer recommendations,and industry standards. 1. In the event that a requirement conflicts with another the more stringent requirement shall be followed,unless directed otherwise by the Owner. B. When field conditions are such that additional moisture is needed for the final concrete surface finishing operation, the required water shall be applied to the surface by fog spray only, and shall be held to a minimum. 3.02 Treatment and Finishing of Horizontal Surfaces Except Roadway Slabs A. All uniformed upper surfaces shall be struck off to grade and finished. B. The use of mortar topping for surfaces under this classification will not be permitted. C. After the concrete has been struck off,the surface shall be floated with a suitable float. D. Sidewalks 1. Shall be given a broom finish or may be stripped with a brush, as indicated on the Drawings or specified by the Owner. 2. Finish shall be perpendicular to the centerline providing a slip resistant surface. E. Other surfaces 1. Shall be float finished and stripped with a fine brush leaving a fine-grained texture. 3.03 Finish of Roadway Slabs A. As soon as the concrete has been placed and vibrated in a section of sufficient width to permit working, the surface shall be approximately leveled, struck off and screed, carrying a slight excess of concrete ahead of the screed to insure filling of all low spots. CONCRETE FINISHING 03 35 11-1 B. Screed 1. The surface of the concrete shall be screed a sufficient number of times and at such intervals to produce a uniform surface,true to grade and free of voids. 2. Longitudinal screeds shall be moved across the concrete with a saw-like motion while their ends rest on headers or templates set true to the roadway grade or on the adjacent finished slab. 3. If necessary, the screed surface shall be worked to smooth finish with a long handled wood or metal float of the proper size,or hand floated from bridges over the slab. C. When required by the Owner,the Contractor shall perform sufficient checks with a long handled ten- foot (10') straightedge on the plastic concrete to insure that the final surface will be within the tolerances specified below. 1. The check shall be made with the straightedge parallel to the centerline. 2. Each pass thereof shall lap half of the preceding pass. 3. Ordinates of irregularities measured from the face of the straight-edge to the surface of the slab shall not exceed one-eighth of an inch(1/8")in depth shall be filled with fresh concrete and floated, making proper allowances for camber,vertical curvature and surface texture. 4. Occasional variations,not exceeding three-sixteenth of an inch(3/16")will be acceptable,if in the opinion of the Owner it will not affect the riding qualities. S. The checking and floating shall be continued until the surface is true to grade and free of depressions,high spots,voids or rough spots. D. Rail support holes shall be filled with concrete and finished to match the top of the slab. E. Finish 1. Upon completion of the floating and/or straight edging and before the disappearance of the moisture sheen,the surface shall be given a finish as indicated within the Drawings or as directed by the Owner. 2. Should the texture depth fall below that intended, the finishing procedures shall be revised to produce the desired texture. F. In all roadway slab finishing operations,camber for specified vertical curvature and transverse slopes shall be provided. 3.04 Finishing Exposed Surfaces A. Concrete shall be finished as required for the respective items or as otherwise specified on the Drawings. B. An ordinary surface finish shall be applied to all concrete surfaces either as a final finish or preparatory to a higher finish. C. Ordinary Surface Finish shall be as follows: 1. After form removal, all porous or honeycombed areas and spalled areas shall be corrected by chipping away all loose or broken material to sound concrete. 2. Featheredges shall be eliminated by cutting a face perpendicular to the surface. 3. Shallow cavities shall be repaired using adhesive grout or epoxy grout. 4. If judged repairable by the Owner,large defective areas shall be corrected using concrete or other material approved by the Owner. S. Holes and spalls caused by removal of metal ties, etc., shall be cleaned and filled with adhesive grout or epoxy grout. 6. Exposed parts of metal chairs on surfaces to be finished by rubbing,shall be chipped out to a depth of one-half inch(1/2")and the surface repaired. 7. All fines,runs,drips or mortar shall be removed from surfaces that remain exposed. 8. Form marks and chamfer edges shall be smoothed by grinding and/or dry rubbing. 9. Grease,oil,dirt,curing compound,etc.,shall be removed from surfaces requiring a higher grade of finish. 10. Discolorations resulting from spillage or splashing of asphalt,paint or other similar material shall be removed. 11. Repairs shall be dense,well bonded and properly cured,and when made on surfaces that remain exposed and do not require a higher finish, shall be finished to blend with the surrounding concrete. CONCRETE FINISHING 03 35 11-2 SECTION 03 39 11 CONCRETE CURING PART 1-GENERAL 1.01 Description A. This specification shall govern work required for the curing of concrete as required to complete the project 1.02 elated Sections A. 03 3111 CONCRETE STRUCTURES 1.03 References The latest edition of the referenced item below shall be used. A. American Concrete Institute (ACI) 318,Building Code Requirements for Structural Concrete B. Texas Department of Transportation Departmental Material Specification DMS-4650, "Hydraulic Cement Concrete Curing Materials and Evaporation Retardants" C. AASHTO Method T-26,"Standard Method of Test for Quality of Water to be used in Concrete" 1.04 Submittals A. Product Information 1. Clearly indicate within submittal that the product is in compliance with this and related Section(s). PART 2-PRODUCTS 2.01 Membrane Curing A. Membrane curing materials shall comply with Texas Department of Transportation (TxDOT) Departmental Material Specification DMS-4650. B. It shall be of such consistency that it can be satisfactorily applied as a fine mist through an atomizing nozzle by means of approved pressure spraying equipment at atmospheric temperatures above 400 Fahrenheit. C. It shall be of such nature that it will not produce permanent discoloration of concrete surfaces nor react deleteriously with the concrete or its components. D. Type 1 compound shall contain a fugitive dye that will be distinctly visible not less than four(4)hours nor more than seven (7) days after application. E. The compound shall produce a firm, continuous, uniform moisture impermeable film free from pinholes and shall adhere satisfactorily to the surfaces of damp concrete. F. It shall, when applied to the damp concrete surface, at the rate of coverage specified herein, dry to touch in not more than four (4) hours and shall adhere in a tenacious film without running off or appreciable sagging. G. It shall not disintegrate,check,peel or crack during the required curing period. H. The compound shall not peel or pick up under traffic and shall disappear from the surface of the concrete by gradual disintegration. I. The compound shall be delivered to the job only in the manufacturer's original containers,which shall be clearly labeled with the manufacturer's name,the trade name of the material,and a batch number or symbol with which test samples may be correlated. J. Percentage loss shall be defined as the water lost after the application of the curing material was applied. K. The permissible percentage moisture loss (at the rate of coverage specified herein) shall not exceed the following: 1. 24 hours after application......................2 percent(2%) 2. 72 hours after application......................4 percent(4%) L. Type 1 (Resin Base Only) curing compound will be permitted for slab concrete in bridge decks and top slabs of direct traffic culverts. 2.02 Mat Curing A. Wet Mat 1. Shall be one (1) of the following: a. Cotton mats shall be used for this curing method. b. Damp burlap blankets made from nine-ounce stock CONCRETE CURING 03 39 11-1 2.03 Water A. Water for use in curing shall be free from oils,acids,organic matter or other deleterious substances and shall not contain more than 1000 parts per million of chlorides as CL nor than 1000 parts million of sulfates as SO4. B. Water from municipal supplies approved by the State Health Department will not require testing, but water from other sources will be sampled and tested before use. C. Tests shall be made in accordance with AASHTO Method T-26,except where such methods are in conflict with provisions of this specification. D. Seawater will not be permitted. E. Water that stains or leaves an unsightly residue shall not be used. PART 3-EXECUTION 3.01 General Information A. All Work shall be in accordance with the Contract, Specifications, Drawings, Manufacturer recommendations,and industry standards. 1. In the event that a requirement conflicts with another the more stringent requirement shall be followed,unless directed otherwise by the Owner. B. The Contractor shall inform the Owner fully of the methods and procedures proposed for curing;shall provide the proper equipment and material in adequate amounts,and shall have the proposed method, equipment and material approved prior to placing concrete. C. Inadequate curing and/or facilities therefore shall be cause for the Owner to stop all construction on the job until remedial action is taken. 3.02 Curing Period A. All concrete shall be cured fora period of seven 7 curing days except as noted below: Table 1 Curing Days of Selected Concrete Description Required Curing Top slabs of Direct Traffic Fourteen (14) curing days (Type I or III cement) Culverts Ten(10) curing days (Type II cement) Concrete Piling(non-prestressed) Ten(10) curing days B. When the air temperature is expected to drop below thirty-five (35) degrees Fahrenheit, the water curing mats shall be covered with polyethylene sheeting, burlap-polyethylene blankets or other material to provide the protection required by Article "Placing Concrete in Cold Weather" of these specifications. C. A curing day is defined as a calendar day when the temperature,taken in the shade away from artificial heat,is above fifty(50)degrees Fahrenheit for at least nineteen(19)hours, (colder days if satisfactory provisions are made to maintain the temperature at all surfaces of the concrete above forty (40) degrees Fahrenheit for the entire twenty-four(24)hours). D. The required curing period shall begin when all concrete therein has attained its initial set. 3.03 Curing Methods A. The following methods are permitted for curing concrete subject to the restrictions of Table 2 and the following requirements for each method of curing: 1. Form Curing a. When forms are left in contact with the concrete, other curing methods will not be required except for cold weather protection. 2. Water Curing a. General 1) All exposed surfaces of the concrete shall be kept wet continuously for the required curing time. b. Wet Mat 1) Mat curing of concrete is allowed where permitted by Table 2 in this specification or where otherwise approved by the Owner. 2) They shall be placed as soon as possible after the surface has sufficiently hardened to prevent damage to the concrete. CONCRETE CURING 03 39 11-2 3) The mats shall be weighted down adequately to provide continuous contact with all concrete surfaces where possible. 4) The surfaces of the concrete shall be kept wet for the required curing time. 5) Surfaces which cannot be cured by contact shall be enclosed with mats, anchored positively to the forms,or to the ground,so that outside air cannot enter the enclosure. 6) Sufficient moisture shall be provided inside the enclosure to keep all surfaces of the concrete wet. c. Water Spray a) This method shall consist of overlapping sprays or sprinklers that keeps all unformed surfaces continuously wet. d. Ponding 1) This method requires the covering of the surfaces with a minimum of two-inches(2") of approved clean granular sand material, kept wet at all times, or a minimum of one-inch depth of water. 2) Satisfactory provisions shall be made to provide a dam to retain the water or saturated sand. 3. Membrane Curing a. This consists of curing concrete pavement,concrete pavement(base),curbs,gutters,retards, sidewalk, driveways, medians, islands, concrete riprap, cement stabilized riprap, concrete structures and other concrete as indicated on the Drawings by impervious membrane method. b. Unless otherwise provided herein or shown on the Drawings, either Type 1 or Type 2 membrane curing compound may be used where permitted except that Type 1 (Resin Base Only)will be permitted for slab concrete in bridge decks and top of direct traffic culverts. c. Membrane curing shall be applied to dry surfaces,but shall be applied just after free moisture has disappeared. d. Formed surfaces and surfaces which have been given a first rub shall be dampened and shall be moist at the time of application of the membrane. e. When membrane is used for complete curing,the film shall remain unbroken for the minimum curing period specified. f. Membrane which is damaged shall be corrected immediately by reapplication of membrane. g. Unless otherwise noted herein or on the Drawings,the choice of membrane type shall be at the option of the Contractor. h. Only one(1)type of curing compound will be permitted on any one(1) structure. i. The membrane curing compound shall be applied after the surface finishing has been completed,and immediately after the free surface moisture has disappeared. j. The surface shall be sealed with a single uniform coating of curing compound applied at the rate of coverage recommended by the manufacturer and directed by the Owner,but not less than one(1)gallon per 180 square feet of area. k. The Contractor shall provide satisfactory means and facilities to properly control and check the rate of applications of the compound. 1. The compound shall be thoroughly agitated during its use and shall be applied by means of approved mechanical power pressure sprayers. m. The sprayers used to apply the membrane to concrete pavement or concrete pavement(base) shall travel at uniform speed along the forms and be mechanically driven. n. The equipment shall be of such design that it will insure uniform and even application of the membrane material. o. The sprayers shall be equipped with satisfactory atomizing nozzles. p. Only on small miscellaneous items will the Contractor be permitted to use hand-powered spray equipment. q. For all spraying equipment, the Contractor shall provide facilities to prevent the loss of the compound between the nozzle and the concrete surface during the spraying operations. r. The compounds shall not be applied to a dry surface and if the surface of the concrete has become dry,it shall be thoroughly moistened prior to application of membrane by fogging or mist application. s. Sprinkling or coarse spraying will not be allowed. CONCRETE CURING 03 39 11-3 t. At locations where the coating shows discontinuities,pinholes,or other defects;or if rain falls on the newly-coated surface before the film has dried sufficiently to resist damage, an additional coat of the compound shall be applied immediately at the same rate of coverage specified herein. u. To insure proper coverage,the Owner shall inspect all treated areas after application of the compound for the period of time designated in the governing specification for curing, either for membrane curing or for other methods. 1) Should the foregoing indicate that any area during the curing period is not protected,an additional coat or coats of the compound shall be applied immediately, and the rate of application of the membrane compound shall be increased until all areas are uniformly covered. v. When temperatures are such as to warrant protection against freezing,curing by this method shall be supplemented with an approved insulating material capable of protecting the concrete for the specified curing period. w. If at any time there is reason to believe that this method of curing is unsatisfactory or is detrimental to the work,the Contractor,when notified,shall immediately cease the use of this method and shall change to curing by one of the other methods specified under this contract. B. The following methods are permitted for curing concrete subject to the restrictions of Table 2 and the folio win requirements for each method of curing: Table 2 Curing Method REQUIRED PERMITTED Water Membrane Water Membrane Structure Unit Description for for Interim for for Interim Curing Curing Curing Curing Top slabs of direct traffic culverts X X Top surface of any concrete unit upon which concrete is to be placed and bonded at a later interval(Stub walls,risers,etc.)Other X superstructure concrete(wing walls,parapet walls,etc.) Concrete pavement,curbs,gutters,retards, sidewalks,driveways,medians,islands, X* X* concrete structures,concrete riprap,etc. All substructure concrete,culverts,box X* X* sewers,inlets,manholes,retaining walls *Polyethylene sheeting,burlap polyethylene mats,or laminated mats to prevent outside air from entering will be considered equivalent to water or membrane curing. CONCRETE CURING 03 39 11-4 SECTION 05 50 00 - METAL FABRICATIONS PART 1-GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Shop fabricated steel and aluminum items. 1.02 PRODUCTS FURNISHED, BUT NOT INSTALLED, UNDER THIS SECTION INCLUDE THE FOLLOWING: A. Loose steel lintels. B. Anchor bolts,steel pipe sleeves,slotted-channel inserts,and wedge-type inserts indicated to be cast into concrete or built into unit masonry. C. Steel weld plates and angles for casting into concrete 1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. AAMA 2604-Voluntary Specification, Performance Requirements and Test Procedures for High Performance Organic Coatings on Aluminum Extrusions and Panels (with Coil Coating Appendix); 2022. B. ASTM A276/A276M -Standard Specification for Stainless Steel Bars and Shapes; 2024. C. ASTM A36/A36M -Standard Specification for Carbon Structural Steel; 2019. D. ASTM A53/A53M - Standard Specification for Pipe, Steel, Black and Hot-Dipped, Zinc-Coated, Welded and Seamless; 2022. E. ASTM A123/A123M -Standard Specification for Zinc(Hot-Dip Galvanized) Coatings on Iron and Steel Products; 2017. F. ASTM A283/A283M -Standard Specification for Low and Intermediate Tensile Strength Carbon Steel Plates; 2018. G. ASTM A501/A501M-Standard Specification for Hot-Formed Welded and Seamless Carbon Steel Structural Tubing; 2021. H. ASTM A666 - Standard Specification for Annealed or Cold-Worked Austenitic Stainless Steel Sheet, Strip, Plate, and Flat Bar; 2023. I. ASTM B221 - Standard Specification for Aluminum and Aluminum-Alloy Extruded Bars, Rods, Wire, Profiles, and Tubes; 2021. J. AWS D1.1/D1.1M -Structural Welding Code -Steel; 2020, with Errata (2023). K. SSPC-Paint 15 -Steel Joist Shop Primer/Metal Building Primer; 2004. L. SSPC-Paint 20-Zinc-Rich Coating (Type I - Inorganic, and Type II -Organic); 2019. M. SSPC-SP 2 - Hand Tool Cleaning; 2024. METAL FABRICATIONS 05 50 00- 1/4 Commodore Park- Phase 1 -#23173 July 3, 2025 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. Shop Drawings: Indicate profiles, sizes, connection attachments, reinforcing, anchorage, size and type of fasteners,and accessories. Include erection drawings,elevations,and details where applicable. PART 2- PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS-STEEL A. Steel Sections: ASTM A36/A36M. B. Steel Tubing: ASTM A501/A501M hot-formed structural tubing. C. Plates: ASTM A283/A283M. D. Pipe: ASTM A53/A53M, Grade B Schedule 40, black finish. E. Stainless Steel, General: ASTM A666,Type 304. F. Stainless Steel Bars, Shapes and Moldings: ASTM A276/A276M,Type 304. G. Shop and Touch-Up Primer: SSPC-Paint 15,complying with VOC limitations of authorities having jurisdiction. H. Touch-Up Primer for Galvanized Surfaces: SSPC-Paint 20,Type I -Inorganic,complying with VOC limitations of authorities having jurisdiction. 2.02 MATERIALS-ALUMINUM A. Extruded Aluminum: ASTM B221 (ASTM B221M), 6063 alloy,T6 temper. B. Bolts, Nuts, and Washers: Stainless steel. 2.03 FABRICATION A. Fit and shop assemble items in largest practical sections, for delivery to site. B. Fabricate items with joints tightly fitted and secured. C. Grind exposed joints flush and smooth with adjacent finish surface. Make exposed joints butt tight, flush, and hairline. Ease exposed edges to small uniform radius. D. Furnish components required for anchorage of fabrications. Fabricate anchors and related components of same material and finish as fabrication, except where specifically noted otherwise. 2.04 FABRICATED ITEMS A. Ledge Angles, Shelf Angles, Channels, and Plates Not Attached to Structural Framing: For support of metal decking; prime paint finish. B. Lintels: As detailed; prime paint finish. METAL FABRICATIONS 05 50 00-2/4 Commodore Park- Phase 1 -#23173 July 3, 2025 2.05 FINISHES-STEEL A. Prime paint steel items not indicated to be galvanized. 1. Exceptions: Galvanize items to be embedded in concrete, items to be embedded in masonry, and items specified for galvanized finish. 2. Shop prime with primers specified in Section 09 9113 "Painting" unless zinc-rich primer is indicated. B. Prepare surfaces to be primed in accordance with SSPC-SP2. C. Clean surfaces of rust, scale, grease, and foreign matter prior to finishing. D. Prime Painting: One coat. E. Galvanizing of Structural Steel Members: Galvanize after fabrication to ASTM A123/A123M requirements. Provide minimum 1.7 oz/sq ft galvanized coating. (Provide minimum 530 g/sq m galvanized coating.) PART 3- EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Install items plumb and level, accurately fitted, free from distortion or defects. B. Provide for erection loads,and for sufficient temporary bracing to maintain true alignment until completion of erection and installation of permanent attachments. C. Field weld components as indicated on drawings. D. Perform field welding in accordance with AWS D1.1/D1.1M. E. Obtain approval prior to site cutting or making adjustments not scheduled. F. After erection, prime welds, abrasions, and surfaces not shop primed , except surfaces to be in contact with concrete. 3.02 TOLERANCES A. Maximum Variation From Plumb: 1/4 inch (6 mm) per story, non-cumulative. B. Maximum Offset From True Alignment: 1/4 inch (6 mm). C. Maximum Out-of-Position: 1/4 inch (6 mm). END OF SECTION 05 50 00 METAL FABRICATIONS 05 50 00-3/4 Commodore Park- Phase 1 -#23173 July 3, 2025 SECTION 05 52 13 - PIPE AND TUBE RAILINGS PART 1 -GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Wall mounted handrails. 1.02 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. ASTM A53/A53M - Standard Specification for Pipe, Steel, Black and Hot-Dipped, Zinc-Coated, Welded and Seamless; 2022. B. ASTM A500/A500M - Standard Specification for Cold-Formed Welded and Seamless Carbon Steel Structural Tubing in Rounds and Shapes; 2023. C. ASTM E935 -Standard Test Methods for Performance of Permanent Metal Railing Systems and Rails for Buildings; 2021. D. SSPC-Paint 15 -Steel Joist Shop Primer/Metal Building Primer; 2004. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. See Section 0130 00-Administrative Requirements,for submittal procedures. B. Shop Drawings: Indicate profiles, sizes, connection attachments, anchorage, size and type of fasteners, and accessories. 1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Structural Designer Qualifications: Professional Structural Engineer experienced in design of this work and licensed in the State in which the Project is located, or personnel under direct supervision of such an engineer. PART 2 -PRODUCTS 2.01 RAILINGS-GENERAL REQUIREMENTS A. Design, fabricate, and test railing assemblies in accordance with the most stringent requirements of applicable local code. B. Distributed Loads: Design railing assembly, wall rails, and attachments to resist distributed force of 75 pounds per linear foot (1095 N/m) applied to the top of the assembly and in any direction,without damage or permanent set. C. Concentrated Loads: Design railing assembly, wall rails, and attachments to resist a concentrated force of 200 pounds (890 N) applied at any point on the top of the assembly and in any direction,without damage or permanent set. PIPE AND TUBE RAILINGS 05 52 13- 1/4 Commodore Park Improvements-Phase 1 -#23173 July 3, 2025 D. Allow for expansion and contraction of members and building movement without damage to connections or members. E. Dimensions: See drawings for configurations and heights. 1. Top Rails and Wall Rails: 1-1/2 inches (38 mm) diameter, round. F. Provide anchors and other components as required to attach to structure, made of same materials as railing components unless otherwise indicated; where exposed fasteners are unavoidable provide flush countersunk fasteners. G. Provide mechanical and welding fittings where indicated to join lengths, seal open ends, and conceal exposed mounting bolts and nuts, including but not limited to elbows,T-shapes, splice connectors,flanges, escutcheons, and wall brackets. 2.02 STEEL RAILING SYSTEM A. Steel Tube: ASTM A500/A500M Grade B cold-formed structural tubing. B. Steel Pipe: ASTM A53/A53M Grade B Schedule 80, black finish. C. Non-Weld Mechanical Fittings: Slip-on,galvanized malleable iron castings,for Schedule 40 pipe, with flush setscrews for tightening by standard hex wrench, no bolts or screw fasteners. D. Welding Fittings: Factory- or shop-welded from matching pipe or tube; seams continuously welded;joints and seams ground smooth. E. Exposed Fasteners: No exposed bolts or screws. F. Shop and Touch-Up Primer: SSPC-Paint 15,complying with VOC limitations of authorities having jurisdiction. 2.03 FABRICATION A. Accurately form components to suit specific project conditions and for proper connection to building structure. B. Fit and shop assemble components in largest practical sizes for delivery to site. C. Fabricate components with joints tightly fitted and secured. D. Welded Joints: 1. Exterior Components: Continuously seal joined pieces by intermittent welds and plastic filler. Drill condensate drainage holes at bottom of members at locations that will not encourage water intrusion. 2. Interior Components: Continuously seal joined pieces by intermittent welds and plastic filler. 3. Grind exposed joints flush and smooth with adjacent finish surface. Make exposed joints butt tight,flush, and hairline. Ease exposed edges to small uniform radius. PIPE AND TUBE RAILINGS 05 52 13-2/4 Commodore Park Improvements-Phase 1 -#23173 July 3, 2025 PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. B. Install components plumb and level, accurately fitted,free from distortion or defects,with tight joints. C. Install railings in compliance with the Texas Accessibility Standards for accessible design at applicable locations. D. Anchor railings securely to structure. E. Conceal anchor bolts and screws whenever possible. Where not concealed, use flush countersunk fastenings. 3.02 TOLERANCES A. Maximum Variation From Plumb: 1/4 inch (6 mm) per floor level, non-cumulative. B. Maximum Offset From True Alignment: 1/4 inch (6 mm). C. Maximum Out-of-Position: 1/4 inch (6 mm). END OF SECTION 05 52 13 PIPE AND TUBE RAILINGS 05 52 13-3/4 Commodore Park Improvements-Phase 1 -#23173 July 3, 2025 SECTION 06 10 00 - ROUGH CARPENTRY PART 1-GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Structural dimension lumber framing. B. Rough opening framing for doors,windows, and roof openings. C. Sheathing. D. Underlayment. E. Roofing nailers. F. Preservative treated wood materials. G. Miscellaneous framing and sheathing. H. Concealed wood blocking, nailers, and supports. 1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A. Section 06 10 53 - Miscellaneous Rough Carpentry. B. Section 06 15 00-WOOD DECKING: Composite wood decking. C. Section 07 27 20- Fluid Applied Air Barrier over sheathing. D. Section 31 31 16 - TERMITE CONTROL: Field-applied termiticide and mildewcide for wood materials. 1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. ANSI A208.1 -American National Standard for Particleboard; 2022. B. ASTM A153/A153M - Standard Specification for Zinc Coating (Hot-Dip) on Iron and Steel Hardware; 2023. C. ASTM C1289 - Standard Specification for Faced Rigid Cellular Polyisocya nu rate Thermal Insulation Board; 2023a. D. AWPA U1 - Use Category System: User Specification for Treated Wood; 2024. E. PS 1 -Structural Plywood; 2023. F. PS 2 - Performance Standard for Wood Structural Panels; 2018. G. PS 20-American Softwood Lumber Standard; 2025. H. SPIB (GR) -Standard Grading Rules; 2021. ROUGH CARPENTRY 06 10 00- 1/1 Commodore Park Improvements-Phase 1 -#23173 July 3, 2025 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. See Section 0130 00-Administrative Requirements for submittal procedures. B. Product Data: Provide technical data on insulated sheathing, wood preservative materials, and application instructions. 1.05 DELIVERY,STORAGE,AND HANDLING A. General: Cover wood products to protect against moisture. Support stacked products to prevent deformation and to allow air circulation. 1.06 WARRANTY A. See Section 0178 00-Closeout Submittals for additional warranty requirements. B. Manufacturer Warranty: Provide 2-year manufacturer warranty for materials and workmanship commencing on Date of Substantial Completion. PART 2- PRODUCTS 2.01 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS A. Dimension Lumber: Comply with PS 20 and requirements of specified grading agencies. 1. If no species is specified, provide species graded by the agency specified; if no grading agency is specified, provide lumber graded by grading agency meeting the specified requirements. 2. Grading Agency: Grading agency whose rules are approved by the Board of Review, American Lumber Standard Committee at www.alsc.org, and who provides grading service for the species and grade specified; provide lumber stamped with grade mark unless otherwise indicated. 2.02 DIMENSION LUMBER FOR CONCEALED APPLICATIONS A. Grading Agency: Southern Pine Inspection Bureau, Inc; SPIB(GR). B. Sizes: Nominal sizes as indicated on drawings,S4S. C. Moisture Content: S-dry or MC19. D. Stud Framing(2 by 2 through 2 by 6 (50 by 50 mm through 50 by 150 mm) ): 1. Species: Southern Pine. 2. Grade: No. 2. E. Joist, Rafter, and Small Beam Framing (2 by 6 through 4 by 16 (50 by 150 mm through 100 by 400 mm) ): 1. Species: Southern Pine. ROUGH CARPENTRY 06 10 00-2/3 Commodore Park Improvements-Phase 1 -#23173 July 3, 2025 2. Grade: No. 1 and Better. F. Miscellaneous Framing, Blocking, Nailers, Grounds, and Furring: 1. Lumber: S4S, No. 2 or Standard Grade. 2. Boards: Standard or No. 3. 2.03 CONSTRUCTION PANELS A. Roof Sheathing: Plywood structural panel; PS 2; thickness as indicated in Drawings. 1. Grade: Structural 1 Sheathing. 2. Bond Classification: Exposure 1. 3. Performance Category: 5/8 PERF CAT. 4. Span Rating: 40/20. 5. Edges: Square. B. Floor Sheathing: Plywood structural panel; PS 2;Thickness as indicated in Drawings. 1. Grade: Structural 1 Sheathing. 2. Bond Classification: Exposure 1. 3. Performance Category: 5/8 PERF CAT. 4. Span Rating: 48/24. 5. Edges: Square. C. Wall Sheathing: PS 2 type,Thickness as indicated in Drawings. 1. Bond Classification: Exterior. 2. Grade: Structural I Sheathing. 3. Span Rating: 32/16. 4. Performance Category: 5/16 PERF CAT. 5. Edge Profile: Square edge. 2.04 ACCESSORIES A. Fasteners and Anchors: 1. Metal and Finish: Hot-dipped galvanized steel complying with ASTM A153/A153M for high humidity and preservative-treated wood locations. ROUGH CARPENTRY 06 10 00-3/4 Commodore Park Improvements-Phase 1 -#23173 July 3, 2025 2.05 FACTORY WOOD TREATMENT A. Treated Lumber and Plywood: Comply with requirements of AWPA U1 - Use Category System for wood treatments determined by use categories, expected service conditions, and specific applications. 1. Preservative-Treated Wood: Provide lumber and plywood marked or stamped by an ALSC- accredited testing agency,certifying level and type of treatment in accordance with AWPA standards. B. Preservative Treatment: 1. Preservative Pressure Treatment of Lumber Above Grade: AWPA U1, Use Category UC36, Commodity Specification A using waterborne preservative. a. Kiln dry lumber after treatment to maximum moisture content of 19 percent. b. Treat lumber exposed to weather. c. Treat lumber in contact with roofing,flashing, or waterproofing. d. Treat lumber in contact with masonry or concrete. e. Treat all lumber in the Bird Observatory building. PART 3- EXECUTION 3.01 PREPARATION A. Install sill gasket under sill plate of framed walls bearing on foundations; puncture gasket cleanly to fit tightly around protruding anchor bolts. B. Coordinate installation of rough carpentry members specified in other sections. 3.02 INSTALLATION -GENERAL A. Select material sizes to minimize waste. B. Reuse scrap to the greatest extent possible; clearly separate scrap for use on site as accessory components, including: shims, bracing, and blocking. C. Where treated wood is used on interior, provide temporary ventilation during and immediately after installation sufficient to remove indoor air contaminants. 3.03 FRAMING INSTALLATION A. Set structural members level, plumb, and true to line. Discard pieces with defects that would lower required strength. B. Make provisions for temporary construction loads, and provide temporary bracing sufficient to maintain structure in true alignment and safe condition until completion of erection and installation of permanent bracing. ROUGH CARPENTRY 06 10 00-4/5 Commodore Park Improvements-Phase 1 -#23173 July 3, 2025 C. Install structural members full length without splices unless otherwise specifically detailed. D. Comply with member sizes,spacing,and configurations indicated, and fastener size and spacing indicated, but not less than required by applicable codes. E. Install horizontal spanning members with crown edge up and not less than 1-1/2 inches(38 mm) of bearing at each end. F. Construct double joist headers at floor and ceiling openings and under wall stud partitions that are parallel to floor joists; use metal joist hangers unless otherwise detailed. G. Provide bridging at joists in excess of 8 feet (2.3 m) span as detailed. Fit solid blocking at ends of members. H. Frame wall openings with two or more studs at each jamb; support headers on cripple studs. 3.04 BLOCKING, NAILERS,AND SUPPORTS A. Provide framing and blocking members as indicated or as required to support finishes, fixtures, specialty items, and trim. 3.05 ROOF-RELATED CARPENTRY A. Coordinate installation of roofing carpentry with deck construction, framing of roof openings, and roofing assembly installation. 3.06 INSTALLATION OF CONSTRUCTION PANELS A. Roof Sheathing: Secure panels with long dimension perpendicular to framing members, with ends staggered and over firm bearing. 1. Nail panels to framing; staples are not permitted. B. Wall Sheathing: Secure with long dimension perpendicular to wall studs, with ends over firm bearing and staggered, using screws. 3.07 SITE APPLIED WOOD TREATMENT A. Apply preservative treatment compatible with factory applied treatment at site-sawn cuts, complying with manufacturer's instructions. B. Allow preservative to dry prior to erecting members. 3.08 TOLERANCES A. Framing Members: 1/4 inch (6 mm) from true position, maximum. B. Surface Flatness of Floor: 1/8 inch in 10 feet (1 mm/m) maximum, and 1/4 inch in 30 feet (7 mm in 10 m) maximum. C. Variation from Plane, Other than Floors: 1/4 inch in 10 feet (2 mm/m) maximum, and 1/4 inch in 30 feet (7 mm in 10 m) maximum. ROUGH CARPENTRY 06 10 00-5/6 Commodore Park Improvements-Phase 1 -#23173 July 3, 2025 3.09 CLEANING A. Waste Disposal: 1. Comply with applicable regulations. 2. Do not burn scrap on project site. 3. Do not burn scraps that have been pressure treated. 4. Do not send materials treated with pentachlorophenol, CCA, or ACA to co-generation facilities or"waste-to-energy" facilities. B. Do not leave wood, shavings, sawdust, etc. on the ground or buried in fill. C. Prevent sawdust and wood shavings from entering the storm drainage system. END OF SECTION 06 10 00 ROUGH CARPENTRY 06 10 00-6/6 Commodore Park Improvements-Phase 1 -#23173 July 3, 2025 SECTION 06 10 53 - MISCELLANEOUS ROUGH CARPENTRY PART 1-GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Roof-mounted curbs. B. Roofing nailers. C. Preservative treated wood materials. D. Fire retardant treated wood materials. E. Communications and electrical room mounting boards. F. Concealed wood blocking, nailers, and supports. G. Miscellaneous wood nailers,furring, and grounds. 1.02 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. ASTM A153/A153M - Standard Specification for Zinc Coating (Hot-Dip) on Iron and Steel Hardware; 2023. B. ASTM D2898 - Standard Practice for Accelerated Weathering of Fire-Retardant-Treated Wood for Fire Testing; 2010 (Reapproved 2017). C. ASTM E84 - Standard Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials; 2023d. D. AWPA U1 - Use Category System: User Specification for Treated Wood; 2024. E. PS 1 -Structural Plywood; 2023. F. PS 20-American Softwood Lumber Standard; 2025. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. See Section 0130 00-Administrative Requirements for submittal procedures. B. Product Data: Provide technical data on wood preservative materials and application instructions. C. Warranty Documentation: Submit manufacturer warranty and ensure that forms have been completed in Owner's name and registered with manufacturer. 1.04 DELIVERY,STORAGE,AND HANDLING A. General:Cover wood products to protect against moisture.Support stacked products to prevent deformation and to allow air circulation. B. Fire Retardant Treated Wood: Prevent exposure to precipitation during shipping, storage, and installation. MISCELLANEOUS ROUGH CARPENTRY 06 10 53- 1/5 Commodore Park Improvements-Phase 1 -#23173 July 3, 2025 1.05 WARRANTY A. See Section 0178 00-Closeout Submittals for additional warranty requirements. B. Correct defective work within a two-year period commencing on Date of Substantial Completion. PART 2- PRODUCTS 2.01 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS A. Dimension Lumber: Comply with PS 20 and requirements of specified grading agencies. 1. If no species is specified, provide species graded by the agency specified; if no grading agency is specified, provide lumber graded by grading agency meeting the specified requirements. 2. Grading Agency: Grading agency whose rules are approved by the Board of Review, American Lumber Standard Committee (www.alsc.org) and who provides grading service for the species and grade specified; provide lumber stamped with grade mark unless otherwise indicated. 2.02 DIMENSION LUMBER FOR CONCEALED APPLICATIONS A. Sizes: Nominal sizes as indicated on drawings,S4S. B. Moisture Content: S-dry or MC19. C. Miscellaneous Framing, Blocking, Nailers, Grounds, and Furring: 1. Lumber: S4S, No.2 or Standard Grade. 2. Boards: Standard or No.3. 2.03 CONSTRUCTION PANELS A. Communications and Electrical Room Mounting Boards: PSI,A-D plywood,or medium density fiberboard; 3/4 inch (19 mm) thick;flame spread index of 25 or less, smoke developed index of 450 or less, when tested in accordance with ASTM E84. 2.04 ACCESSORIES A. Fasteners and Anchors: 1. Metal and Finish: Stainless steel for high humidity and preservative-treated wood locations, unfinished steel elsewhere. 2. Anchors: Toggle bolt type for anchorage to hollow masonry. 3. Screws for Fastening to Metal Framing: ASTM C954, length as recommended by screw manufacturer for material being fastened. MISCELLANEOUS ROUGH CARPENTRY 06 10 53-2/5 Commodore Park Improvements-Phase 1 -#23173 July 3, 2025 4. Power-Driven Fasteners: Fastener systems with an evaluation report acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, based on ICC-ES AC70. 2.05 FACTORY WOOD TREATMENT A. Treated Lumber and Plywood: Comply with requirements of AWPA U1 - Use Category System for wood treatments determined by use categories, expected service conditions, and specific applications. 1. Fire-Retardant Treated Wood: Mark each piece of wood with producer's stamp indicating compliance with specified requirements. 2. Preservative-Treated Wood: Provide lumber and plywood marked or stamped by an ALSC- accredited testing agency,certifying level and type of treatment in accordance with AWPA standards. B. Fire Retardant Treatment: 1. Exterior Type: AWPA U1, Category UCFB, Commodity Specification H, chemically treated and pressure impregnated; capable of providing a maximum flame spread index of 25 when tested in accordance with ASTM E84, with no evidence of significant combustion when test is extended for an additional 20 minutes both before and after accelerated weathering test performed in accordance with ASTM D2898. a. Kiln dry wood after treatment to a maximum moisture content of 19 percent for lumber and 15 percent for plywood. b. Do not use treated wood in direct contact with ground. 2. Interior Type A: AWPA U1, Use Category UCFA, Commodity Specification H, low temperature, low hygroscopic type, chemically treated and pressure impregnated; capable of providing a maximum flame spread index of 25 when tested in accordance with ASTM E84, with no evidence of significant combustion when test is extended for an additional 20 minutes. a. Kiln dry wood after treatment to a maximum moisture content of 19 percent for lumber and 15 percent for plywood. b. Treat rough carpentry items as indicated. c. Do not use treated wood in applications exposed to weather or where the wood may become wet. C. Preservative Treatment by Pressure Process: AWPA U1; Use Category UC2 for interior construction not in contact with ground, Use Category UC3b for exterior construction not in contact with ground, and Use Category UC4a for items in contact with ground. 1. Preservative Chemicals: Acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction and containing no arsenic or chromium. D. Mark lumber with treatment quality mark of an inspection agency approved by the ALSC Board of Review. MISCELLANEOUS ROUGH CARPENTRY 06 10 53-3/5 Commodore Park Improvements-Phase 1 -#23173 July 3, 2025 E. Application:Treat items indicated on Drawings, and the following: 1. Wood cants, nailers, curbs, equipment support bases, blocking, stripping, and similar members in connection with roofing,flashing,vapor barriers, and waterproofing. 2. Wood sills, sleepers, blocking, and similar concealed members in contact with masonry or concrete. 3. Wood floor plates that are installed over concrete slabs-on-grade. 4. All wood members in the Bird Observatory building shall receive preservative treatment. PART 3- EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION -GENERAL A. Select material sizes to minimize waste. B. Reuse scrap to the greatest extent possible; clearly separate scrap for use on site as accessory components, including: shims, bracing, and blocking. C. Where treated wood is used on interior, provide temporary ventilation during and immediately after installation sufficient to remove indoor air contaminants. 3.02 BLOCKING, NAILERS,AND SUPPORTS A. Provide framing and blocking members as indicated or as required to support finishes, fixtures, specialty items, and trim. B. In walls, provide blocking attached to studs as backing and support for wall-mounted items, unless item can be securely fastened to two or more studs or other method of support is explicitly indicated. C. Where ceiling-mounting is indicated, provide blocking and supplementary supports above ceiling, unless other method of support is explicitly indicated. D. Provide the following specific nonstructural framing and blocking: 1. Grab bars. 2. Towel and bath accessories. 3. Wall-mounted doorstops. 3.03 ROOF-RELATED CARPENTRY A. Coordinate installation of roofing carpentry with deck construction, framing of roof openings, and roofing assembly installation. B. Provide wood curb at roof openings except where prefabricated curbs are specified and where specifically indicated otherwise. Form corners by alternating lapping side members. 3.04 INSTALLATION OF CONSTRUCTION PANELS MISCELLANEOUS ROUGH CARPENTRY 06 10 53-4/5 Commodore Park Improvements-Phase 1 -#23173 July 3, 2025 A. Communications and Electrical Room Mounting Boards: Secure with screws to studs with edges over firm bearing; space fasteners at maximum 24 inches(610 mm) on center on edges and into studs in field of board. 1. At fire-rated walls, install board over wall board indicated as part of the fire-rated assembly. 2. Where boards are indicated as full floor-to-ceiling height, install with long edge of board parallel to studs. 3. Install adjacent boards without gaps. 4. Size and Location: As indicated on drawings. END OF SECTION 06 10 53 MISCELLANEOUS ROUGH CARPENTRY 06 10 53-5/5 Commodore Park Improvements-Phase 1 -#23173 July 3, 2025 SECTION 06 15 00 -WOOD DECKING PART 1-GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Composite wood decking. 1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A. Section 06 10 00- Rough Carpentry: Bearing support. 1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. ASTM E84 - Standard Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials; 2023d. B. ICC (IBC) - International Building Code; Most Recent Edition Adopted by Authority Having Jurisdiction, Including All Applicable Amendments and Supplements. 1.04 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION A. Design floor live and dead load: 100 psf with deflection limited to 1/360 of span. 1.05 SUBMITTALS A. See Section 0130 00-Administrative Requirements,for submittal procedures. B. Shop Drawings: Indicate deck framing system, loads and cambers, bearing details, and framed openings. 1.06 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing the products specified in this section with at least three years of documented experience and certified by AITC. B. Installer Qualifications: Company specializing in performing work of the type specified in this section, with at least three years of documented experience. PART 2- PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. Composite Wood Decking: 1. Azek Building Products, Inc;TimberTech: www.azek.com/#sle. 2. Trex Company, Inc.;Trex Select: www.trex.com/. 3. Substitutions: See Section 0160 00- Product Requirements. 2.02 WOOD MATERIALS A. Composite Decking: Hardwood mixed with plastic and molded into standard lumber board sizes and accessory shapes; minimum plastic content of 40 percent. 1. Texture: Molded wood grain finish one side; smooth, matte finish on the other. 2. Color: Select from manufacturer's full range of colors. 3. Edges, Field Boards: Tongue and groove. 4. Edges, Perimeter Boards: Tongue and groove one edge; bullnose on the other. WOOD DECKING 06 15 00- 1/2 Commodore Park Improvements-Phase 1 -#23173 July 3,2025 5. Surface Burning Characteristics: Flame spread index of 80, maximum; smoke developed index of 200, maximum; when tested in accordance with ASTM E84. 6. Resistance to Fastener Withdrawal When Tested in Accordance With ASTM D1761: a. Screw (#10 wood screw): 558 pounds per inch (97.7 I(N/m). 2.03 ACCESSORIES A. Fasteners and Anchors: 1. Fastener Type and Finish for Composite Decking: Stainless steel,trim head. 2. Screws: Bugle head, hardened steel, power driven type, length three times thickness of decking. PART 3- EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verify that support framing is ready to receive decking. 3.02 PREPARATION A. Coordinate placement of bearing items. 3.03 INSTALLATION -BOARD DECKING A. Install decking perpendicular to framing members, with ends staggered over firm bearing. B. Engage decking tongue and groove edges. C. Secure with fasteners as recommended by Manufacturer. D. Maintain decking joint space of 1/16 inch (1.5 mm) maximum. 3.04 TOLERANCES A. Surface Flatness of Decking Without Load: 1/4 inch in 10 feet (2 mm/m) maximum, and 1/2 inch in 30 feet (12 mm/9 m) maximum. END OF SECTION 06 15 00 WOOD DECKING 06 15 00-2/2 Commodore Park Improvements-Phase 1 -#23173 July 3,2025 SECTION 07 13 26 -SELF-ADHERING SHEET WATERPROOFING PART 1-GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Modified bituminous sheet waterproofing. 1.02 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product. 1.03 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Sample warranties. 1.04 WARRANTY A. Manufacturer's Warranty: Manufacturer agrees to furnish replacement waterproofing material for waterproofing that does not comply with requirements or that fails to remain watertight within specified warranty period. 1. Warranty Period: Five years from date of Substantial Completion. PART 2- PRODUCTS 2.01 MODIFIED BITUMINOUS SHEET WATERPROOFING A. Modified Bituminous Sheet Waterproofing: Minimum 60-mil nominal thickness, self-adhering sheet consisting of 56 mils(1.4224 mm)of rubberized asphalt laminated on one side to a 4-mil- thick, polyethylene-film reinforcement, and with release liner on adhesive side. 1. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide product indicated on Drawings or comparable product by one of the following: a. GCP Applied Technologies Inc.; Bituthene 3000. 2. Physical Properties: a. Tensile Strength, Membrane: 325 psi (2240.80 kPa) minimum; ASTM D412, Die C, modified. b. Ultimate Elongation: 300 percent minimum; ASTM D412, Die C, modified. c. Low-Temperature Flexibility: Pass at minus 20 deg F;ASTM D1970/D1970M. d. Crack Cycling: Unaffected after 100 cycles of 1/8-inch movement;ASTM C836/C836M. e. Puncture Resistance: 50 Ibf minimum; ASTM E154/E154M. SELF-ADHERING SHEET WATERPROOFING 07 13 26- 1/4 Commodore Park Improvements-Phase 1 -#23173 July 3, 2025 f. Water Absorption: 0.1 percent weight-gain maximum after 48-hour immersion at 70 deg F; ASTM D570. g. Water Vapor Permeance: 0.05 perm maximum;ASTM E96/E96M, Water Method. h. Hydrostatic-Head Resistance: 200 feet(6096 cm) minimum;ASTM D5385. 3. Sheet Strips: Self-adhering, rubberized-asphalt strips of same material and thickness as sheet waterproofing. 2.02 AUXILIARY MATERIALS A. Furnish auxiliary materials recommended by waterproofing manufacturer for intended use and compatible with sheet waterproofing. 1. Furnish liquid-type auxiliary materials that comply with VOC limits of authorities having jurisdiction. B. Metal Termination Bars: Aluminum bars, approximately 1 by 1/8 inch (3.18 mm), predrilled at 9-inch centers where required by manufacturer. PART 3- EXECUTION 3.01 PREPARATION A. Clean, prepare, and treat substrates according to manufacturer's written instructions. Provide clean, dust-free, and dry substrates for waterproofing application. B. Mask off adjoining surfaces not receiving waterproofing to prevent spillage and overspray affecting other construction. 3.02 INSTALLATION OF MODIFIED BITUMINOUS SHEET-WATERPROOFING A. Install modified bituminous sheets according to waterproofing manufacturer's written instructions. B. Apply primer to substrates at required rate and allow it to dry. Limit priming to areas that will be covered by sheet waterproofing in same day. Reprime areas exposed for more than 24 hours. C. Apply and firmly adhere sheets over area to receive waterproofing. Accurately align sheets and maintain uniform 2-1/2-inch- minimum lap widths and end laps. Overlap and seal seams, and stagger end laps to ensure watertight installation. 1. When ambient and substrate temperatures range between 25 and 40 deg F, install self- adhering, modified bituminous sheets produced for low-temperature application. Do not use low-temperature sheets if ambient or substrate temperature is higher than 60 deg F. D. Horizontal Application: Apply sheets from low to high points of decks to ensure that laps shed water. E. Apply continuous sheets over already-installed sheet strips, bridging substrate cracks, construction, and contraction joints. SELF-ADHERING SHEET WATERPROOFING 07 13 26-2/4 Commodore Park Improvements-Phase 1 -#23173 July 3, 2025 F. Seal edges of sheet-waterproofing terminations with mastic. G. Install sheet-waterproofing and auxiliary materials to tie into adjacent waterproofing. H. Repair tears, voids, and lapped seams in waterproofing not complying with requirements. Slit and flatten fishmouths and blisters. Patch with sheet waterproofing extending 6 inches (152.4 mm) beyond repaired areas in all directions. 3.03 PROTECTION, REPAIR,AND CLEANING A. Do not permit foot or vehicular traffic on unprotected membrane. B. Correct deficiencies in or remove waterproofing that does not comply with requirements; repair substrates, reapply waterproofing, and repair sheet flashings. C. Clean spillage and soiling from adjacent construction using cleaning agents and procedures recommended in writing by manufacturer of affected construction. END OF SECTION 07 13 26 SELF-ADHERING SHEET WATERPROOFING 07 13 26-3/4 Commodore Park Improvements-Phase 1 -#23173 July 3, 2025 SECTION 07 27 20 - FLUID APPLIED AIR BARRIER PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this section. 1.02 SECTION INCLUDES A. Materials and installation methods supplementing a one-component vapour permeable, liquid applied elastic air and water barrier, vapour retarder materials and assemblies, located in the non-accessible part of the wall. B. Materials and installation to bridge and seal air leakage pathways and gaps, including, but not limited to the following: 1. Connections of the walls to the roof air barrier. 2. Connections of the walls to the foundations. 3. Expansion joints. 4. Openings and penetrations of window frames, store front, curtain wall. 5. Door frames. 6. Piping, conduit, duct and similar penetrations. 7. Masonry ties, screws, bolts and similar penetrations. 8. All other air leakage pathways in the building envelope. 9. Sealing flashing to wall surface. 1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. ASTM D412 - Standard Test Methods for Vulcanized Rubber and Thermoplastic Elastomers-- Tension; 2016 (Reapproved 2021). B. ASTM D4541 -Standard Test Method for Pull-Off Strength of Coatings Using Portable Adhesion Testers; 2022. C. ASTM E84 - Standard Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials; 2023d. D. ASTM E331 - Standard Test Method for Water Penetration of Exterior Windows, Skylights, Doors, and Curtain Walls by Uniform Static Air Pressure Difference; 2000 (Reapproved 2023). E. ASTM E2178 - Standard Test Method for Determining Air Leakage Rate and Calculation of Air Permeance of Building Materials; 2021a. FLUID APPLIED AIR BARRIER 07 27 20- 1/14 Commodore Park Improvements-Phase 1 -#23173 July 3, 2025 F. ASTM E2357-Standard Test Method for Determining Air Leakage Rate of Air Barrier Assemblies; 2024. G. ICC-ES AC212 - Acceptance Criteria for Water-Resistive Coatings Used as Water-Resistive Barriers over Exterior Sheathing; 2015,with Editorial Revision (2020). H. NFPA 285 - Standard Fire Test Method for Evaluation of Fire Propagation Characteristics of Exterior Wall Assemblies Containing Combustible Components; 2025. 1.04 RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 04 20 00— Unit Masonry: Flexible through wall flashing membrane. Sealing flashing to wall surface. B. Section 04 20 19— Masonry Veneer: Flexible through wall flashing membrane. Sealing flashing to wall surface. C. Section 06 10 53—Miscellaneous Carpentry: Covering preservative-treated materials with self- adhering membranes. D. Section 07 90 00—Joint Protection: Sealants. 1.05 PERFORMANCE REFERENCES A. ASTM E2178-01: Standard Test for Determining the Air Permeability of Building Materials. B. ASTM E2357, Standard Test Method for Determining Air Leakage of Air Barrier Assembly (Full Scale Wall Testing of the Air Barrier System). Ensure tests were conducted on steel stud frame walls with penetrations (Specimen 2)as some air barrier assembly are not tested in that critical mode. C. ASTM E283-91:Standard Test Method for Determining the Rate of Air Leakage Through Exterior Windows, Curtain Walls, and Doors Under Specified Pressure Differences Across the Specimen. D. CODE MANDATED ASTM E331: Standard Test Method for Structural Performance of Exterior Windows, Curtain Walls, and Doors by Uniform Static Air Pressure Difference. E. ASTM E96: Water Vapor Transmission of Materials, Procedure B F. AATCC 127 Water Resistance G. ASTM D 1970, Self Sealability H. ICC-ES AC212, Freeze Thaw, Crack Bridging I. CODE MANDATED Fire Testing:Air Barrier,as a component of a wall assembly,shall have passed a NFPA 285 complete wall fire test. J. ASTM E84, Standard Test Method for Surface Burning K. Listed as an evaluated system by Air Barrier Association of America at www.airbarriers.org. FLUID APPLIED AIR BARRIER 07 27 20-2/14 Commodore Park Improvements-Phase 1 -#23173 July 3, 2025 1.06 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Air Barrier Membrane Continuity: The application of the Air Barrier products and methods, when complete,shall provide a continuous and unbroken membrane"enclosure"on all exterior walls, soffits and other surfaces enclosing conditioned space. Special attention shall be paid to all door, window and louver penetrations and proper membrane continuity between the exterior cavity wall membrane and the specified roof system. (See attached details in this specification section and the Drawings for indications on Floor Plan & Wall Sections and their associated enlarge details.) B. Provide an air barrier system constructed to perform as a continuous elastic air barrier, and as a liquid water drainage plane flashed to discharge to the exterior any incidental condensation or water penetration. Membrane shall accommodate movements of building materials by providing expansion and control joints as required, with accessory air seal materials at such locations, changes in substrate and perimeter conditions. 1. The air barrier shall have the following characteristics: a. It must be continuous, with all joints made air-tight. b. It shall be capable of withstanding positive and negative combined design wind, fan and stack pressures on the envelope without damage or displacement, and shall transfer the load to the structure. It shall not displace adjacent materials under full load.The air barrier shall be joined in an airtight and flexible manner to the air barrier material of adjacent assembly, allowing for the relative movement of assembly due to thermal and moisture variations and creep. Connection shall be made between: 1) Foundation and walls. 2) Walls and the windows, curtain walls, storefronts, louvers and doors in those walls. 3) Different wall assemblies. 4) Wall and roof. 5) Wall and soffits below conditioned space 6) Wall and roof over conditioned and unconditioned space. 7) Walls,floor and roof across construction, control and expansion joints. 8) Walls,floors and roof to utility, pipe and duct penetrations. 9) Flashing to wall surface. 2. All penetrations of the air barrier and paths of air infiltration/exfiltration shall be made air- tight. 3. Air Permeability: Maximum 0.04 cfm/sq.ft. @ 10.5 psf per ASTM E283. 4. Air Permeability: @ delta P of 0.3 inches(7.62 mm)water...0.002 CFM/ft2 per ASTM E2178 5. ASTM E2357, Full Scale Wall Testing of the Air Barrier System FLUID APPLIED AIR BARRIER 07 27 20-3/14 Commodore Park Improvements-Phase 1 -#23173 July 3, 2025 a. System Air Leakage, Requirement—0.0008 CFM/ftz maximum b. Penetration Check, Requirement—0.00088 CFM/ft2 maximum 6. ASTM E96 Water Vapor Permeance:10-20 Perms per Procedure B 7. ASTM E331, Standard Test Method for Structural Performance of Exterior Windows, Curtain Walls, and Doors by Uniform Static Air Pressure Difference - 10 psf for 2 hours. 8. Elongation: Minimum 50% per ASTM D412. 9. AATC 127 Water Resistance—Pass 10. ASTM D 1970 Self Sealability—Pass 11. ICC-ES AC212, Freeze Thaw, Crack Bridging—Pass 12. Fire Testing: Air Barrier, as a component of a wall assembly, shall have passed a NFPA 285 complete wall fire test. 13. ASTM E84 Class A Fire Resistant 14. Listed as an evaluated assembly by the Air Barrier Association at www.airbarriers.org. 1.07 SUBMITTALS A. Submittal Procedures: Submit per Section 0133 00—Submittal Procedures. B. Quality Assurance Program: Submit evidence of current Contractor accreditation and Installer certification under the Air Barrier Association of America's (ABAA) Quality Assurance Program (QAP). Submit accreditation number of the Contractor and certification number(s) of the ABAA Certified Installer(s). C. Product Data: Submit material Manufacturer's Product Data, material manufacturer's instructions for evaluating,preparing,and treating substrate,temperature and other limitations of installation conditions,Technical Data, and tested physical and performance properties. 1. Submit letter from primary air barrier material manufacturer indicating approval of materials that are proposed to be used that are not currently listed in the accessories section of this specification for that manufacturer's material. 2. Include statement from the primary air barrier material manufacturer that the materials used in their air barrier assembly which will be used to adhere to the underlying substrate are chemically compatible to the substrate material. D. Shop Drawings: Submit Shop Drawings showing locations and extent of air barrier assemblies and details of all typical conditions, intersections with other envelope assemblies and materials, membrane counter-flashings, and details showing how gaps in the construction will be bridged, how inside and outside corners are negotiated, how materials that cover the materials are secured with air-tight condition maintained, and how miscellaneous penetrations such as conduits, pipes, electric boxes and similar items are sealed. 1. Include VOC content of each material, and applicable legal limit in the jurisdiction of the project. FLUID APPLIED AIR BARRIER 07 27 20-4/14 Commodore Park Improvements-Phase 1 -#23173 July 3, 2025 2. Include statement that materials are compatible with adjacent materials proposed for use. 3. Include required values for field adhesion test on each substrate in accordance with ASTM D4541 (modified), using a type II pull tester. E. Samples: Submit clearly labelled samples, three (3) inch by four (4) inch minimum size of each material specified. F. Prior to commencing the Work, submit manufacturer's independent Laboratory Report for the Air Barrier Assembly testing on ASTM E2357 tested on a steel stud frame wall, results are to be based on Specimen 2 testing only. G. Prior to commencing the Work,submit documentation certifying that the air barrier system has been tested independently, indicating compliance with the performance requirements of the Air Barrier Association of Association. H. Prior to commencing the Work, submit copies of manufacturers' literature for the system, membrane, primers, sealants, adhesives and associated auxiliary materials shall be included as parts of the system that is listed by the Air Barrier Association of America evaluation. I. Prior to commencing the Work,submit references clearly indicating that the materials proposed have been installed for not less than three years on projects of similar scope and nature. J. Prior to commencing the Work, submit manufacturers' complete set of standard details for air barrier/vapor retarders. The manufacturer's representative shall review the contract drawings and note any modifications required to make the system air and water tight. 1.08 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Quality Assurance Program:The Contractor shall implement and comply with the requirements of the Air Barrier Association of America's (ABAA) Quality Assurance Program (QAP) for the project, including audits of the project by an ABAA Certified Auditor. All deficiencies identified by the auditor shall be corrected prior to proceeding with any work that will necessitate removal and replacement to correct deficiencies in the air barrier system. B. Installers Qualifications: All work shall be performed by ABAA Certified Installers. C. Manufacturer's Qualifications: Provide primary products, including each component of the air barrier membrane system,which has been commercially available for a minimum of 3 years. D. Submit in writing, a document stating that the applicator of the primary air barrier membrane specified in this section is recognized by the manufacturer as suitable for the execution of the Work. E. Perform Work in accordance with the printed requirements of the air barrier manufacturer and this specification. F. Maintain one copy of manufacturer instructions on site. G. At the beginning of the Work and at all times during the execution of the Work, allow access to Work site by the air barrier membrane manufacturer's representative. FLUID APPLIED AIR BARRIER 07 27 20-5/14 Commodore Park Improvements-Phase 1 -#23173 July 3, 2025 H. Compatibility: Submit letter from primary material manufacturer stating that materials proposed for use are permanently chemically compatible and adhesively compatible with adjacent materials proposed for use. Submit letter from manufacturer stating that cleaning materials used during installation are chemically compatible with adjacent materials proposed for use. I. Manufacturer: Components used in this section shall be sourced from one manufacturer, including sheet membrane, air barrier sealants, primers, mastics, tapes and adhesives as listed as an evaluated air barrier assembly by the Air Barrier Association of America (ABAA). 1.09 PRE-INSTALLATION CONFERENCE A. Pre-installation Meeting: Convene a minimum of four weeks prior to commencing work of this section,Agenda shall include, as a minimum, construction and testing of mock-up, sequence of construction, coordination with substrate preparation, air barrier materials approved for use, compatibility of materials,coordination with installation of adjacent and covering materials,and details of construction and chemical/fire safety plans.Attendance is required by representatives of related trades including covering materials, substrate materials and adjacent materials. B. DO NOT PROCEED WITH THE INSTALLATION OF THE AIR BARRIER MEMBRANE AND THE THROUGH WALL FLASHING MEMBRANE PRIOR TO THE PRE-INSTALLATION CONFERENCE. 1.10 DELIVERY,STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Deliver materials to project site in original packaging with unbroken seals, labelled with Material Manufacturer's name, product, date of manufacturer and directions for storage. B. Store materials in their original undamaged packages in a clean, dry, protected location and within temperature range required by material manufacturer. C. Protect stored materials from direct sunlight and other sources of ultra-violet light. D. Handle materials in accordance with material manufacturer's recommendations. E. All pail goods shall bear the ABAA Evaluated Air Barrier label. F. Do not double stack pail goods. G. Store roll materials on end in original packaging. H. Keep all products stored at above 40°F.Apply to a substrate with a surface T`F of 40°F and rising. DO NOT ALLOW PRODUCT TO FREEZE. 1.11 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Temperature: Install fluid-applied air barrier material within range of ambient and substrate temperatures recommended by material manufacturer. Do not apply air barrier to a damp or wet substrate. FLUID APPLIED AIR BARRIER 07 27 20-6/14 Commodore Park Improvements-Phase 1 -#23173 July 3, 2025 B. Field Conditions: Do not install air barrier in snow, rain, fog, or mist. Do not install air barrier when the temperature of substrate surfaces and surrounding air temperatures are below those recommended by the manufacturer. C. Compatibility: Do not allow air barrier materials to come in contact with chemically incompatible materials D. Ultra Violet Light Exposure: Do not expose air barrier materials to sunlight longer than as recommended by the material manufacturer. 1.12 COORDINATION A. Ensure continuity of the air seal throughout the scope of this section. 1.13 WARRANTY A. Material Warranty: Provide material manufacturer's standard product warranty,for a minimum three (3)years from date of Substantial Completion. B. Installer Warranty: 1. Applicator must be approved by ABAA and Manufacturer 2. Provide a two(2)year installation warranty from date of Substantial Completion, including all accessories and materials of the air barrier assembly, against failures, including loss of air tight seal, loss of watertight seal, loss of attachment, loss of adhesion and failure to cure properly. PART 2- PRODUCTS 2.01 AIR BARRIER MATERIAL A. Liquid air barrier: One component elastomeric membrane, spray, trowel or brush applied, having the following characteristics and have passed all evaluations by the Air Barrier Association of America (ABAA) and be listed on their web site as having passed all the following evaluations: 1. Air permeability: a. Air Leakage Thru Cured Films: <0.04 cfm/ft2 @ 10.5 Ibs/ft2 or<0.005 L/sm2 @ 75 Pa to ASTM E283 (Modified) 24 hours, +/- 10%. b. Air Leakage per ASTM E2178, dry film, delta P of 0.3 inches (7.62 mm) of water,0.002 +/- 10% 2. Air Barrier System Test on Full Scale Wall Assembly,ASTM E2357 a. System Air Leakage, 0.0004 CFM/ft2+/- 10% b. Penetrations Check, MUST PASS ASTM E2357 requirements. 3. Water Vapor permeance: (704 ng/Pa.m2.s.) 10 to 20 perms, ASTM E96 Method B. Note: The material specified is VAPOR PERMEABLE. FLUID APPLIED AIR BARRIER 07 27 20-7/14 Commodore Park Improvements-Phase 1 -#23173 July 3, 2025 4. Elongation (ASTM D412: >50%) 5. Low temperature flexibility and crack bridging: Pass— ICC-ES AC212 6. ASTM D 1970, Self Sealability—Pass 7. AATCC 127 Water Resistance—Pass 8. ASTM E84, Class A Fire Resistant 9. Recycle content>20% B. Basis of Design Product: 1. Wall Guardian FW-100A(a non-asphaltic product) 2. Other products/assemblies meeting all requirements of Paragraph 2.1, A(Above) C. Acceptable Manufacturers 1. STS Coatings, Wall Guardian, 830-995-5177, www.wallguardian.com, a Certified Texas HUB 2. Other manufacturers with products/assemblies meeting all requirements of Paragraph 2.01,A(Above) 2.02 AIR BARRIER ACCESSORY MATERIALS A. Transition Membrane,Self-Adhering: Polymer-based,sheet membrane complete with polyester facing, and having the following physical properties: 1. Thickness: 35 mils(0.02 inch (0.5 mm)) min. 2. Vapor permeance: <0.1 3. Low temperature flexibility: -20 F to CGSB 37-GP-56M. 4. Elongation: >90%to ASTM D412-modifed 5. ASTM E331, 10 psf for 2 hours a. Acceptable material: 1) UT-40 by STS Coatings for use with the FW-100 system. 2) Others as recommended by manufacturer. B. Primer for self-adhering membranes: Synthetic polymer-based adhesive type, quick setting, having the following characteristics: 1. Acceptable material: As manufactured and/or recommended by the Air Barrier System manufacturer. Note: Primer shall be compatible with specified glass faced gypsum sheathing. 2. Verify compatibility of self-adhering membranes with preservative treated materials specified in Section 06 10 53 - Rough Carpentry. Prime preservative treated materials as required using primer recommended by self-adhering membrane manufacturer or use the non-chemical thermally modified wood known as EcoPrem. FLUID APPLIED AIR BARRIER 07 27 20-8/14 Commodore Park Improvements-Phase 1 -#23173 July 3, 2025 3. Other Primers as recommended by manufacturer for surfaces to be sealed. C. Through-Wall flashing at wall base and shelf angles: 1. As specified in Section 07 13 26—Self-Adhering Sheet Waterproofing. D. Transition Strip: 1. Basis of Design: UT-40 Universal Tape, By STS Coatings 2. Others as recommended by manufacturer. E. Sealants: Shall be compatible with air barrier assembly and shall be approved by the air barrier manufacturer. 1. Basis of Design for Concealed Applications: LT-100 Liquid Tape, By STS Coatings. 2. Basis of Design for Concealed & Exposed Applications: Great Seal PE-150 3. Others as recommended by manufacturer. F. Backer Rods: As recommended by sealant manufacturer. G. Other Products as recommended by manufacturer. PART 3- EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. The ABAA Certified installer shall examine substrates,areas and conditions under which the Air Barrier assembly will be installed, in the Presence of the General Contractor to confirm suitability of substrate and underlying work to accept Air Barrier B. Verify that surfaces and conditions are ready to accept the Work of this section. Notify Architect in writing of any discrepancies. Commencement of the work or any parts thereof shall mean acceptance of the prepared substrate. 3.02 PREPARATION A. All surfaces must be sound, dry, clean and free of oil, grease, dirt, excess mortar or other contaminants. Fill spalled areas in substrates to provide an even plane. B. Mortar joints in concrete block and form tie holes/voids in poured concrete shall be filled flush and smooth and allowed to be cured for a minimum of 24 hours. C. All joints between sheathing, roof board, masonry and concrete and other substrate joints up to 1/4" wide shall be treated: 1. STS Coatings LT-100 Liquid Tape,www.stscoatings.com. 2. York Manufacturing, US-100, www.yorkmfg.com. 3. Others as recommended by manufacturer. D. All joints between sheathing, roof board,masonry and concrete and other substrates wider than 1/4" shall be sealed with: FLUID APPLIED AIR BARRIER 07 27 20-9/14 Commodore Park Improvements-Phase 1 -#23173 July 3, 2025 1. UT-40, overlapping each side of joint a minimum of 3 inches (76.2 mm). 2. Others as recommended by manufacturer. E. Install backer rod and sealant at the following joints: 1. All expansion/control/erection joints between concrete wall panels. 2. All expansion/control joints in concrete block back-up. 3. All joints between concrete wall panels and concrete block back-up. 3.03 PRIMER FOR TRANSITION MEMBRANE(SELF-ADHERING TYPE ONLY) A. Apply primer for self-adhering membranes at rate recommended by manufacturer. B. Apply primer to all areas to receive transition sheet membrane as indicated in Drawings by roller or spray and allow minimum 30-minute open time. Primed surfaces not covered by transition membrane during the same working day must be re-primed. 3.04 TRANSITION MEMBRANE (SELF-ADHERING TYPE) A. Align and position self-adhering transition membrane, remove protective film and press firmly into place. Ensure minimum 2-inch overlap at all end and side laps unless otherwise noted. B. Tie-in to roofing system and at the interface of dissimilar materials as indicated in Drawings. C. Promptly roll all laps and membrane with a counter top roller to affect seal. D. Ensure all preparatory work is complete prior to applying liquid membrane. 3.05 PRIMARY AIR BARRIER A. Apply by spray or roller,a complete and continuous unbroken film at a temperature of 40°F and rising with less than a 30% chance of rain in the next 18 hours and apply at the same rate as listed in the Air Barrier Association of America evaluation. 1. Exterior Gypsum Sheathing, Plywood or OSB a. Wall Guardian FW-100A at a minimum of 2.5 gallons per 100 ft2(40 ft2/gallon)(40 wet mils) b. Others meeting stated requirements. c. Spray around all projections, including masonry veneer anchors, ensuring a complete and continuous air seal. 2. Concrete Masonry Unit (CMU), Concrete a. Wall Guardian FW-100A at a minimum of 2.5 gallons per 100 ft2 (40 ft2/gallon) (equal to 40 wet mils on a smooth surface) B. Others meeting stated requirements. FLUID APPLIED AIR BARRIER 07 27 20- 10/14 Commodore Park Improvements-Phase 1 -#23173 July 3, 2025 C. Spray around all projections including masonry veneer anchors ensuring a complete and continuous air seal. 3.06 QUALITY ASSURANCE/INSPECTION A. Quality Assurance Program: 1. (ABAA) Quality Assurance Program (QAP) Audits: a. Contractor shall verify the total # of audits required for the project and schedule all audits in accordance with the requirements of the QAP to insure eligibility for Certification under the QAP b. As multiple audits will be required, all deficiencies identified by the auditor, for each audit shall be corrected prior to proceeding with any work that will necessitate removal and replacement to correct deficiencies in the air barrier system. B. Notify Architect when sections of work are complete so as to allow for review prior to installing insulation. The manufacturer's representative shall be on site to review the installation along with the Architect. 3.07 PROTECTION OF FINISHED WORK A. Liquid membranes are not designed for permanent exposure. Cover the liquid membrane, as recommended by the manufacturer, within the following time frames. Contractor shall verify the number of calendar days with the air barrier manufacturer: 1. Cover the Wall Guardian material within 180 calendar days after installation. The nature of this product is such that some surface weathering may become apparent during exposure.This is a surface effect only and does not impact air barrier system performance. 2. Transition membranes shall be covered within 180 days after installation. B. Prepare, treat and seal vertical and horizontal surfaces at terminations and penetrations through the air barrier and at protrusions according to air barrier manufacturer's written instructions. 3.08 INSTALLATION A. Fluid Applied Membrane Air Barrier: Install air barrier accessories and fluid-applied membrane air barrier material to provide continuity throughout the building envelope in a shingle fashion. Install materials in accordance with material manufacturer's instructions and the following (unless manufacturer recommends other procedures in writing based on project conditions or particular requirements of their recommended materials): 1. Install veneer anchors as per air barrier manufacturer installation sequencing. 2. Apply treatment to exterior gypsum joints and screw heads as per air barrier material manufacturer. FLUID APPLIED AIR BARRIER 07 27 20- 11/14 Commodore Park Improvements-Phase 1 -#23173 July 3, 2025 3. Apply primer for transition material at the rate instructed by the air barrier material manufacturer for 1 inch (25.4 mm) beyond terminating edge of transition membrane. Allow primer to set/cure completely before transition strip application. 4. Position subsequent sheets of transition material so that membrane overlaps the membrane sheet below by a minimum of 2 inches (50.8 mm), unless greater overlap is recommended by the material manufacturer. Ensure transition membrane is securely sealed onto substrate with roller. 5. Overlap horizontally adjacent pieces of transition material a minimum of 2 inches (50.8 mm), unless greater overlap is recommended by the material manufacturer. Roll all areas of transition strip including seams with roller. 6. Seal around all penetrations with termination mastic/sealant,membrane counter-flashing or other procedure in accordance with material manufacturer's instructions, ensuring chemical compatibility amongst adjoining materials. 7. Connect air barrier in exterior wall assembly continuously to the air barrier of the roof, to concrete below-grade structures, to windows, curtain wall, storefront, louvers, exterior doors, other intersection conditions and transitions from wet cavity to dry cavity and seal penetrations using accessory materials in accordance with the material manufacturer's instructions. 8. Provide transition material at changes in substrate plane (with bead of sealant/mastic, membrane counter-flashing or other material recommended by material manufacturer) under membrane to eliminate all sharp 90 degree inside corners and to make a smooth transition from one plane to another. 9. Provide mechanically fastened non-corrosive metal sheet or other manufacturer approved transition material to span gaps greater than 1 inch (25.4 mm) in substrate plane and to make a smooth transition from one plane to the other. Transition membrane shall be installed continuously from air barrier material onto sheet metal maintaining 2-inch overlap on both edges. 10. For through-wall flashing and head-flashing, lap transition material over top edge of it. 11. Provide backup for the membrane to accommodate anticipated movement or use other manufacturer approved transition material at deflection and control joints. 12. Provide transition to the joint assemblies at expansion and seismic joints. 13. Apply a bead or trowel coat of mastic along membrane seams at reverse lapped seams, rough cuts, and as recommended by the material manufacturer. 14. Seal top edge of the self-adhered membrane to substrate with termination mastic at end of each working day. 15. Inspect installation prior to enclosing assembly and repair punctures, damaged areas and inadequately lapped seams with a patch of membrane lapped as recommended by material manufacturer. 16. Install primer for fluid-applied air barrier if instructed by material manufacturer. FLUID APPLIED AIR BARRIER 07 27 20- 12/14 Commodore Park Improvements-Phase 1 -#23173 July 3, 2025 17. Install fluid-applied membrane using equipment and methods recommended by manufacturer,to achieve a dry film thickness as required by the material manufacturer. 3.09 SCHEDULE A. Install liquid membrane system over the entire surface of the glass faced sheathing in the following area. Seal any masonry anchor penetrations air tight. 1. In the masonry cavity wall. B. Install liquid membrane system over the entire surface of the outer surface of the inner wythe of masonry. Seal any masonry anchor penetrations air tight. C. Install liquid membrane system over the entire surface of the glass faced gypsum sheathing and/or roof board in the following area: 1. Behind the metal parapet panels. 2. Behind the metal wall and soffit panels. 3. Behind the EIFS system. D. Hollow Metal Door Frames: Seal door frame to wall surface with transition membrane. E. Wall and Roof Junction: Seal wall to roof with transition membrane. F. Seal joints in glass-faced sheathing with tape in the following areas: 1. Cement plaster soffit. G. Seal the top of sheathing to the underside of the roof assembly with foam or LT-100. H. Openings: Seal around the perimeter of all openings with transition membrane. I. Perimeter wood nailers at wall openings: Cover all exposed surfaces of wood nailers with transition membrane. Extend membrane over sheathing, masonry and metal framing as shown. J. Aluminum window frames with nailing flanges: Seal the nailing flanges to the wall surface with transition membrane. K. Aluminum window frames without nailing flanges: Seal frames to the wall surface with transition membrane. L. Aluminum storefront frames: Seal frames to the wall surface with transition membrane. M. Aluminum curtain wall frames: Seal frames to wall surface with transition membrane. 3.10 PROTECTING AND CLEANING A. Protect air barrier materials from damage during installation and the remainder of the construction period, according to material manufacturer's written instructions. 1. Coordinate with installation of materials which cover the air barrier assemblies,to ensure exposure period does not exceed that recommended by the air barrier manufacturer. FLUID APPLIED AIR BARRIER 07 27 20- 13/14 Commodore Park Improvements-Phase 1 -#23173 July 3, 2025 B. Clean spillage and soiling from adjacent construction using cleaning agents and procedures recommended by manufacturer of affected construction and acceptable to the primary material manufacturer. END OF SECTION 07 27 20 FLUID APPLIED AIR BARRIER 07 27 20- 14/14 Commodore Park Improvements-Phase 1 -#23173 July 3, 2025 SECTION 07 41 13.16 - STANDING-SEAM METAL ROOF PANELS PART 1-GENERAL 1.01 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. ASCE 7 - Minimum Design Loads and Associated Criteria for Buildings and Other Structures; Most Recent Edition Cited by Referring Code or Reference Standard. B. ASTM C754-Standard Specification for Installation of Steel Framing Members to Receive Screw- Attached Gypsum Panel Products; 2020. C. ASTM E1592-Standard Test Method for Structural Performance of Sheet Metal Roof and Siding Systems by Uniform Static Air Pressure Difference; 2005 (Reapproved 2017). D. ASTM E1646 - Standard Test Method for Water Penetration of Exterior Metal Roof Panel Systems by Uniform Static Air Pressure Difference; 1995 (Reapproved 2018). E. FM 4471 -Approval Standard for Class 1 Panel Roofs; 2010. 1.02 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Preformed metal roof system including clips, perimeter and penetration flashing,closures, and fasteners. 2. This Section applies to the Bird Observatory only. 1.03 RELATED SECTIONS: A. Section 07 62 00-Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim. 1.04 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product: 1. Manufacturer's data sheet including all accessories. B. Shop Drawings (by Manufacturer, only): Include fabrication and installation layouts of metal panels; details of edge conditions, joints, panel profiles, corners, anchorages, attachment system,trim, flashings, closures, and accessories; and special details. 1. Full Roof Plan with panel layout. 2. Elevations, Sections, and Details. 3. Location,gauge, and finish of all related components. 4. Relationships with adjoining work. 5. Include fastener types and spacing. 6. Provide written certification that the submitted roofing system and related details comply with local building code and as specified herein. STANDING-SEAM METAL ROOF PANELS 07 4113.16- 1/7 Commodore Park Improvements-Phase 1 -#23173 July 3, 2025 C. Samples: For each type of metal panel indicated. 1. 12" long section of specified panel width and finish. 2. Panel Clips (standard & continuous). 1.05 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Test Reports: Must meet or exceed design performance criteria: 1. ASTM E1592 -Standard Test Method for Structural Performance of Sheet Metal Roof and Siding Systems by Uniform Static Air Pressure Difference. 2. ASTM E1646 - Standard Test Method for Water Penetration of Exterior Metal Roof Panel Systems by Uniform Static Air Pressure Difference. B. Warranties: Sample of special warranties. 1. Specified Finish Warranty. 2. Specified Weather-tightness Warranty. C. Letter from manufacturer stating roofing contractor has been trained to install the specified metal roofing system. D. Installer Qualifications: 1. 5 years' experience specializing in the installation of structural standing seam metal roof systems. 2. Must be trained by the manufacturer to install the specified system. 1.06 DELIVERY,STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Protect components using best practices to prevent abrasion damage, mechanical abuse, staining discoloration, or corrosion during manufacturing, shipment and storage. B. Secure panels where they are protected from wind and moisture, while allowing proper drainage and air circulation. 1.07 JOB CONDITIONS A. Coordinate work with related or adjoining trades to prevent damage to stored or installed components. B. Verify acceptable storage loads on roof slopes. C. Precise location of all roof penetrations shall be verified prior to final roof layout. 1.08 QUALITY CRITERIA A. A792-96-Specification for sheet steel, 55%Aluminum-Zinc Alloy coated by the hot-dip process. STANDING-SEAM METAL ROOF PANELS 07 4113.16-2/7 Commodore Park Improvements-Phase 1 -#23173 July 3, 2025 B. Static water pressure head water infiltration: The panel system shall be tested in accordance with FM 4471 Appendix G and pass with no leakage. The test specimen must successfully withstand being submerged under 6 inches (152.4 mm) of water for a minimum period of 7 days. C. E1592-95 - Standard Test Method for Structural Performance of Sheet Metal Roof and Siding Systems by Uniform Static Air Pressure Difference. 1.09 DESIGN AND PERFORMANCE CRITERA A. Thermal Movement 1. Metal Roofing System, including flashing, shall accommodate unlimited thermal movement without buckling or excess stress on the structure. 2. All panel and trim attachments will be designed to specifically satisfy the requirements of the roof design (shown in shop drawings). B. Uniform Wind Load Capacity: 1. Installed roof system and applicable trim and accessories shall withstand positive and negative design wind loading pressures complying with: a. The applicable version of ASCE 7. b. Risk Category:As per Code Analysis. c. Safety Factor: 1.67X d. Wind Speed: AS REQUIRED BY CODE FOR LOCATION. e. Exposure Category: AS REQUIRED BY CODE FOR LOCATION. f. Exposure Classification: E. g. Design Pressures (as determined by Engineer of Record, plus the required safety factor). 2. Capacity shall be generated using data generated from ASTM E1592 Testing. C. Water Infiltration: Panel system shall be tested in accordance with FM 4471 Appendix G and pass with no leakage.A 6 inch (152.4 mm)standing head of water is placed over the sample and maintained for a period of 7 days. 1.10 WARRANTY A. Special Weather-tightness Warranty—Manufacturer's 20-year non-prorated Weathertightness warranty in which manufacturer agrees to repair or replace standing-seam metal roof panel assemblies that fail to remain weathertight. Coverage includes all flashing, penetrations, and edge details. In addition,the manufacturer warrants to repair or replace damages resulting from system failure at pressures less than those specified herein. STANDING-SEAM METAL ROOF PANELS 07 4113.16-3/7 Commodore Park Improvements-Phase 1 -#23173 July 3, 2025 B. Special Warranty on Panel Finishes: Manufacturer's 20-year warranty in which manufacturer agrees to repair finish or replace metal panels that show evidence of deterioration of factory- applied finishes, including checking, crazing, peeling, chalking, fading, and adhesion. PART 2- PRODUCTS 2.01 ROOF PANEL, ROOF FIELD, PERIMETER TRIM, DRAINAGE AND SHEET METAL ACCESSORY MATERIALS A. Factory Painted Galvalume Plus Steel, Type AZ-55, Grade 50 as per ASTM A792-96. Color as selected by Architect from Manufacturer's full range of colors. B. Gauge: 24 GA(0.024 inches (0.61 mm)). 2.02 METAL ROOFING SYSTEM A. Basis of Design: Continuous panels with no end laps: 238T Standing Seam Roof System as provided by McElroy Metal (www.mcelroymetal.com - 1440 Aldine Bender Rd. Houston,Texas, 77032). 1. Profile: 238T- 16" 2. Finished seam height will be a minimum of 2-3/8" 3. Texture: Smooth OR Striations OR Stiffener Ribs (As selected by Architect). 4. Panels greater than 60' must be manufactured at the project location utilizing factory roll- forming equipment and operated by factory personnel. No end-laps will be accepted. 5. Panel design shall be symmetrical. 6. Cap shall have 2 rows of continuous factory applied hot melt sealant. 7. Panel must offer individual replaceability, without altering adjacent panels, after final installation is completed. 8. Alternate Manufacturers: a. Alternate Manufacturers must show full compliance with project specifications and submit all required data in accordance with Section 01600 for consideration. B. Substitutions shall fully comply with specified requirements in appearance, assembly, and performance. 1. Substitutions must be submitted within 10 days before bid due date with complete product performance data. 2. No post-bid substitution requests will be considered. C. Finishes 1. Fluorocarbon Coating: Consists of primer, applied at a nominal dry film thickness of .25- mil and a color coat, applied at a nominal dry film thickness of.75 mil (0.01905 mm),giving a 1.0 mil (0.0254 mm) nominal dry film on topcoat. Paint finish should be Kynar 500 as STANDING-SEAM METAL ROOF PANELS 07 4113.16-4/7 Commodore Park Improvements-Phase 1 -#23173 July 3, 2025 selected from manufacturer's full color selection. The back side of the material should be .25 mil (0.00635 mm). Primer and a 0.25 polyester wash-coat. 2.03 ROOF SYSTEM ACCESSORIES A. Clips shall be a one-piece, 16 GA (min.) galvanized steel and cannot make direct contact with the panel cap; or clips shall be continuous of the same gauge as per manufacturer's tested assembly to match required wind uplift pressures. B. All fasteners for clip, trim, and structural member attachment will be supplied by metal roof system manufacturer. C. Trim, flashing, gutters and downspouts will be of the same gauge and finish unless approved otherwise by the metal roof system manufacturer. 1. All sheet metal valleys, Gutters and Trim will be supplied in continuous lengths up to 32'. Gutters shall be detailed and fabricated with Expansion Joints every 50' as per SMACNA guidelines. 2. Ridge closures, consisting of metal channel surrounding factory precut closed cell foam, will not be secured through the field of the panel. 3. Trim will be installed specifically as displayed in the manufacturer provided shop drawings. Any suggested changes must be approved in writing by the metal roof system manufacturer. D. Sealants and Sealant Tapes will be specified and supplied by the metal roof system manufacturer and submitted to Architect for Review as part of the submittal process. E. Underlayment: Self-adhering High-Temperature-rated with surfacing suitable for Metal Roof Applications, as manufactured by Grace, Carlisle, or approved Equal. PART 3- EXECUTION 3.01 PREPARATION A. Miscellaneous Supports: Install subframing, furring, and other miscellaneous panel support members and anchorages according to ASTM C754 and metal panel manufacturer's written recommendations. 3.02 INSTALLATION OF UNDERLAYMENT A. Self-Adhering Sheet Underlayment: Apply primer if required by manufacturer. Comply with temperature restrictions of underlayment manufacturer for installation. Apply over entire roof surface,wrinkle free, in shingle fashion to shed water,and with end laps of not less than 6 inches (152.4 mm),staggered 24 inches(609.6 mm) between courses.Overlap side edges not less than 6 inches. Extend underlayment over rakes and eaves. Roll laps with roller. Cover underlayment within 14 days. 1. Apply over the entire roof surface. STANDING-SEAM METAL ROOF PANELS 07 4113.16-5/7 Commodore Park Improvements-Phase 1 -#23173 July 3, 2025 B. Flashings: Install flashings to cover underlayment to comply with requirements specified in Section 07 62 00"Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim." 3.03 INSTALLATION OF STANDING SEAM METAL ROOF PANELS A. Standing-Seam Metal Roof Panel Installation: Fasten metal roof panels to supports with concealed clips at each standing-seam joint at location, spacing, and with fasteners as per Manufacturer's Shop Drawings. 1. Protective film should be removed prior to extended exposure to sunlight, heat,and other weather elements. 2. Panels should be handled at seams to prevent buckling. 3. Limit traffic on installed panel to prevent unnecessary damage to the finish. 4. Install continuous length panels plumb, level, and straight with seams and ribs parallel. 5. Install panels without excessive waves, warps, or buckles. 6. Minimum required underlayment shall be fully installed prior to roof panel loading or installation on roof surface. 7. Refer to manufacturer shop drawings for: a. Clip spacing. b. Location(s)for fixing the roof panels. 8. All panels shall be panned at ridge, hip, and headwall conditions. 9. All panels shall have field applied butyl tape sealant between seams at the eave condition. B. Accessory Installation: Install accessories with positive anchorage to building and weathertight mounting and provide for thermal expansion. Coordinate installation with flashings and other components. 3.04 FLASHING AND TRIM INSTALLATION A. Flashing and Trim: Comply with performance requirements, manufacturer's written installation instructions, and SMACNA's "Architectural Sheet Metal Manual." Set units true to line and level as indicated. Install work with laps,joints, and seams that will be permanently watertight and weather resistant. 1. All trim shall be installed using the fastener type and spacing as displayed on the manufacturer shop drawings. 2. Trim attachments shall not restrict the thermal movement requirements of the panel. 3. Fabricate and install sheet metal flashing in accordance with SMACNA manual. 4. In the process of sheet metal installation, allow no sealant to migrate onto exposed surfaces 5. Any damaged product should be removed and replaced immediately upon recognition. STANDING-SEAM METAL ROOF PANELS 07 4113.16-6/7 Commodore Park Improvements-Phase 1 -#23173 July 3, 2025 6. Touch up paint should be used minimally for minor scratches. Major scratches or paint failures shall be recognized at damaged and require replacement. 7. Clean exposed surfaces upon completion of installation to prevent finish damage. 3.05 CLEANING AND PROTECTION A. Remove temporary protective coverings and strippable films, if any, as metal panels are installed, unless otherwise indicated in manufacturer's written installation instructions. On completion of metal panel installation,clean finished surfaces as recommended by metal panel manufacturer. Maintain in a clean condition during construction. END OF SECTION 07 4113.16 STANDING-SEAM METAL ROOF PANELS 07 4113.16-7/7 Commodore Park Improvements-Phase 1 -#23173 July 3, 2025 SECTION 07 46 46 - FIBER-CEMENT SIDING AND TRIM PART 1-GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Fiber-cement siding and trim. 1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A. Section 014119 -Windstorm Construction Requirements. B. Section 06 10 00- Rough Carpentry: Siding substrate. C. Section 07 25 00-Weather Barriers: Water-resistive barrier under siding. D. Section 07 92 00 - JOINT SEALANTS: Sealing joints between siding and adjacent construction and fixtures. E. Section 099123 - Paint: Field painting. 1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. ASTM C1186-Standard Specification for Flat Fiber-Cement Sheets;2022,with Editorial Revision (2023). 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. See Section 0130 00-Administrative Requirements for submittal procedures. B. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's data sheets on each product to be used, including: 1. Manufacturer's requirements for related materials to be installed by others. 2. Preparation instructions and recommendations. 3. Storage and handling requirements and recommendations. 4. Installation methods, including nail patterns. C. Manufacturer's qualification statement. D. Installer's qualification statement. E. Warranty: Submit copy of manufacturer's warranty, made out in Owner's name, showing that it has been registered with manufacturer. 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing products specified in this section, with not less than five years of documented experience. B. Installer Qualifications: Company specializing in performing work of type specified in this section with not less than three years of experience. Fiber-Cement Siding and Trim 07 46 46- 1/4 Commodore Park Improvements-Phase 1 -#23173 July 3, 2025 1.06 DELIVERY,STORAGE,AND HANDLING A. Deliver and store materials in manufacturer's unopened packaging, with labels intact, until ready for installation. B. Store materials under dry and waterproof cover, well ventilated, and elevated above grade on a flat surface. C. Protect materials from harmful environmental elements, construction dust, and other potentially detrimental conditions. 1.07 FIELD CONDITIONS A. Do not install panels when air temperature or relative humidity are outside manufacturer's limits. 1.08 WARRANTY A. See Section 0178 00-Closeout Submittals for additional warranty requirements. PART 2- PRODUCTS 2.01 FIBER-CEMENT SIDING A. Lap Siding: Individual horizontal boards made of cement and cellulose fiber formed under high pressure with integral surface texture, complying with ASTM C1186, Type A, Grade II; with machined edges,for nail attachment. 1. Texas Department of Insurance (TDI) Evaluation ID: EC-23,Assembly No. 10. 2. Style: Standard lap style. 3. Texture: Simulated cedar grain. 4. Length: 12 feet (3.7 m), nominal. 5. Width (Height): 5-1/4 inches (133 mm). 6. Thickness: 5/16 inch (8 mm), nominal. 7. Finish: Factory applied primer. 8. Warranty: 50 year limited;transferable. 9. Basis of Design Products: a. James Hardie Building Products, Inc; Hardie Plank HZ10 Lap Siding : www.jameshardie.com/#sle. b. Substitutions: See Section 0160 00- Product Requirements. B. Soffit Panels: Panels made of cement and cellulose fiber formed under high pressure with integral surface texture, complying with ASTM C1186, Type A, Grade II; with machined edges, for nail attachment. Fiber-Cement Siding and Trim 07 46 46-2/4 Commodore Park Improvements-Phase 1 -#23173 July 3, 2025 1. Texture: Simulated cedar grain. 2. Length: 96 inches (2440 mm), nominal. 3. Width: 48 inches (1220 mm). 4. Thickness: 1/4 inch (7.9 mm), nominal. 5. Finish: Factory applied primer. 6. Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range of available colors. 7. Manufacturer: Same as siding. 2.02 ACCESSORIES A. Trim: Same material and texture as siding. Refer to drawings. B. Fasteners: Galvanized or corrosion resistant; length as required to penetrate, No. 8 x 1-5/8 inches long x 0.375 head diameter ribbed wafer head screws, minimum. C. Sealant: Elastomeric, polyurethane or silyl-terminated polyether/polyurethane, and capable of being painted. PART 3- EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Examine substrate, clean and repair as required to eliminate conditions that would be detrimental to proper installation. B. Verify that the existing substrate and weather barrier are intact and correctly installed. C. Do not begin until unacceptable conditions have been corrected. D. If substrate preparation is responsibility of another installer, notify Architect of unsatisfactory preparation before proceeding. 3.02 PREPARATION A. Protect surrounding areas and adjacent surfaces during execution of this work. B. Install Sheet Metal Flashing: 1. Above door and window trim and casings. 2. Above horizontal trim in field of siding. 3.03 INSTALLATION A. Install siding in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and recommendations. 1. Read warranty and comply with terms necessary to maintain warranty coverage. Fiber-Cement Siding and Trim 07 46 46-3/4 Commodore Park Improvements-Phase 1 -#23173 July 3, 2025 2. Install in accordance with conditions stated in the Texas Department of Insurance (TDI) Product Evaluation ID: EC-23, Assembly 10. Comply with Specification Section 014119 - Windstorm Construction Requirements. 3. Install trim as recommended by the manufacturer. 4. Touch up field cut edges before installing. 5. Pre-drill nail holes if necessary to prevent breakage. B. Over Wood and Wood-Composite Sheathing: Fasten siding to the wood structural panel sheathing using the concealed screwing method. C. Allow space for thermal movement between both ends of siding panels that butt against trim; seal joint between panel and trim with specified sealant. D. Joints in Horizontal Siding: Avoid joints in lap siding except at corners; where joints are inevitable staggerjoints between successive courses. E. Do not install siding less than 6 inches(152 mm)from ground surface,or closer than 1 inch (25.4 mm) to roofs, patios, porches, and other surfaces where water may collect. F. After installation, seal joints except lap joints of lap siding; seal around penetrations, and paint exposed cut edges. G. Finish Painting: See Section 099123 - Paint. 3.04 CLEANING A. See Section 0170 00- Execution and Closeout Requirements for additional requirements. B. Clean faced panels in accordance with manufacturer's maintenance instructions, using cleaning materials and methods acceptable to manufacturer. 3.05 PROTECTION A. Protect installed products until Date of Substantial Completion. B. Touch-up, repair or replace damaged products before Date of Substantial Completion. END OF SECTION 07 46 46 Fiber-Cement Siding and Trim 07 46 46-4/4 Commodore Park Improvements-Phase 1 -#23173 July 3, 2025 SECTION 07 62 00 -SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM PART 1-GENERAL 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.02 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Formed Products: a. Formed roof drainage sheet metal fabrications. b. Miscellaneous sheet metal accessories. c. Precast concrete splash blocks. B. Related Sections: 1. Division 06 Section "Rough Carpentry"for wood nailers, curbs, and blocking. 2. Division 07 Section Styrene-Butadiene-Styrene (SBS) Modified Bituminous Roofing" for installing sheet metal flashing and trim integral with membrane roofing. 3. Division 07 Section "Roof Accessories" for set-on-type curbs, equipment supports, roof hatches,vents, and other manufactured roof accessory units. 1.03 REFERENCES A. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM): 1. A 153 -Zinc Coating(Hot-Dip) on Iron and Steel Hardware 2. A 653 -Steel Sheet, Zinc Coated, (Galvanized) or Zinc-Iron Alloy-Coated (Galvannealed) by the Hot-Dip process. 3. A 666, Type 316 Sheet Standard Specification - Annealed or Cold-Worked Austenitic Stainless-Steel Sheet, Strip, Plate, and Flat Bar. 4. A 755 - Steel Sheet, Metallic Coated by the Hot-Dip Process and Prepainted by the Coil- Coating Process for Exterior Exposed Building Products. 5. A 792 -Steel Sheet, 55%Aluminum-Zinc Alloy-Coated by the Hot-Dip Process. 6. B 32B-Solder Metal. 7. B 749 - Lead and Lead Alloy Strip, Sheet, and Plate Products. 8. C 920-Elastomeric Joint Sealants. 9. D 226-Asphalt-Saturated Organic Felt Used in Roofing and Waterproofing. 10. D 1187-Asphalt-Base Emulsions for Use as Protective Coatings for Metal. 11. D 4397- Polyethylene Sheeting for Construction, Industrial, and Agricultural Applications. 12. D 4586-Asphalt Roof Cement, Asbestos-Free. 13. D 4601 -Asphalt-Coated Glass Fiber Base Sheet Used in Roofing. B. National Roofing Contractors Association (NRCA): Roofing and Waterproofing Manual. C. Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractor's National Association (SMACNA): Architectural Sheet Metal Manual. D. National Association of Architectural Metal Manufacturers (NAAMM): Metal Finishes Manual for Architectural and Metal Products SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM 07 62 00- 1 Commodore Park—Phase 1423173 [Addendum 02]August 27,2025 1.04 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. General: Sheet metal flashing and trim assemblies as indicated to withstand wind loads, structural movement, thermally induced movement, and exposure to weather without failure due to defective manufacture, fabrication, installation, or other defects in construction. Completed sheet metal flashing and trim shall not rattle, leak, or loosen, and shall remain watertight. B. Edge Design: Fabricate and install parapet Copings that is identical to systems that have been successfully tested by a qualified testing and inspecting agency to resist roof edge design pressure (P) as identified in ANSI/SPRI-ES-1, as calculated according to<<ASCE 7>>. 1. Design Pressures: As per Engineer of Record calculations provided in the Construction Drawings. C. Thermal Movements: Provide sheet metal flashing and trim that allows for thermal movements from ambient and surface temperature changes. 1. Temperature Change (Range): 120 deg F, ambient; 180 deg F, material surfaces. D. Water Infiltration: Provide sheet metal flashing and trim that do not allow water infiltration to the building interior. 1.05 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product List: Submit list of proposed Products and manufacturers, including all items specified in Part 2— Products or otherwise required by the Work. B. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Include construction details, material descriptions, dimensions of individual components and profiles, and finishes for each manufactured product and accessory. C. Shop Drawings: Show fabrication and installation layouts of sheet metal flashing and trim, including plans, elevations, expansion-joint locations, and keyed details. Distinguish between shop-and field-assembled work. Include the following: 1. Identification of material, thickness, weight, and finish for each item and location in Project. 2. Details for forming sheet metal flashing and trim, including profiles, shapes, seams, and dimensions. 3. Details for joining,supporting, and securing sheet metal flashing and trim, including layout of fasteners, cleats, clips, and other attachments. Include pattern of seams. 4. Details of termination points and assemblies, including fixed points. S. Details of expansion joints and expansion-joint covers, including showing direction of expansion and contraction. 6. Details of edge conditions, including eaves, ridges, valleys, rakes, crickets, and counterflashings as applicable. 7. Details of special conditions. 8. Details of connections to adjoining work. 9. Detail formed flashing and trim at a scale of not less than 3 inches(76.2 mm)per 12 inches (304.8 mm). D. Samples for Initial Selection: For each type of sheet metal flashing,trim,and accessory indicated with factory-applied color finishes involving color selection. SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM 07 62 00-2 Commodore Park—Phase 1423173 [Addendum 02]August 27,2025 1.06 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Qualification Data: For qualified fabricator. B. Maintenance Data: For sheet metal flashing, trim, and accessories to include in maintenance manuals. C. Warranty: Sample of special warranty. 1.07 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. General: Work of this Section to physically protect membrane roofing, base flashings, and expansion joints from damage that would permit water leakage to building interior. B. Fabricator Qualifications: Shop that employs skilled workers who custom fabricate sheet metal flashing and trim similar to that required for this Project and whose products have a record of successful in-service performance, with three years minimum experience. C. Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim Standard: Comply with SMACNA's "Architectural Sheet Metal Manual" unless more stringent requirements are specified or shown on Drawings. D. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site. 1. Meet with Owner, Architect, Owner's insurer if applicable, Installer, and installers whose work interfaces with or affects sheet metal flashing and trim including installers of roofing materials, roof accessories, unit skylights, and roof-mounted equipment. 2. Review methods and procedures related to sheet metal flashing and trim. 3. Examine substrate conditions for compliance with requirements, including flatness and attachment to structural members. 4. Review special roof details, roof drainage, roof penetrations, equipment curbs, and condition of other construction that will affect sheet metal flashing. 5. Document proceedings, including corrective measures and actions required, and furnish copy of record to each participant. 1.08 DELIVERY,STORAGE,AND HANDLING A. Deliver sheet metal flashing materials and fabrications undamaged. Protect sheet metal flashing and trim materials and fabrications during transportation and handling. B. Unload,store, and install sheet metal flashing materials and fabrications in a manner to prevent bending, warping, twisting, and surface damage. C. Do not store sheet metal flashing and trim materials in contact with other materials that might cause staining, denting, or other surface damage. Store sheet metal flashing and trim materials away from uncured concrete and masonry. D. Protect strippable protective covering on sheet metal flashing and trim from exposure to sunlight and high humidity, except to the extent necessary for the period of sheet metal flashing and trim installation. 1.09 COORDINATION A. Coordinate installation of sheet metal flashing and trim with interfacing and adjoining construction to provide a leakproof, secure, and noncorrosive installation. B. Coordinate installation of flanged metal components, including gravel guards, pitch pans, and accessories to ensure strip-in with hot bitumen (where applicable) on same day they are installed. SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM 07 62 00-3 Commodore Park—Phase 1423173 [Addendum 02]August 27,2025 C. Schedule work to avoid storage on, and traffic over finished work. 1.10 WARRANTY A. Special Warranty on Finishes: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair finish or replace sheet metal flashing and trim that shows evidence of deterioration of factory-applied finishes within specified warranty period. 1. Exposed Panel Finish: Deterioration includes, but is not limited to,the following: a. Color fading more than 5 Hunter units when tested according to ASTM D2244. b. Chalking in excess of a No. 8 rating when tested according to ASTM D4214. c. Cracking, checking, peeling, or failure of paint to adhere to bare metal. 2. Finish Warranty Period: 20 years from date of Substantial Completion. PART 2- PRODUCTS 2.01 SHEET METALS A. General: Protect mechanical and other finishes on exposed surfaces from damage by applying a strippable, temporary protective film before shipping. B. Metallic-Coated Steel Sheet Restricted flatness steel sheet, metallic coated by the hot-dip process and prepainted by the coil-coating process to comply with ASTM A 755. 1. Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) Steel Sheet: ASTM A 653, G90 coating designation; structural quality. 2. Aluminum-Zinc Alloy-Coated (Galvalume) Steel Sheet: ASTM A 792, Class AZ50 coating designation, Grade 40; structural quality. 3. Surface: Smooth,flat. C. Prepainted Metallic-Coated Steel Sheet: Restricted flatness steel sheet, metallic coated by the hot-dip process and prepainted by the coil-coating process to comply with ASTM A 755. 1. Aluminum-Zinc Alloy-Coated (Galvalume) Steel Sheet: ASTM A 792, Class AZ50 coating designation, Grade 40; structural quality. 2. Surface: Smooth,flat. 3. Exposed Coil-Coated Finish: a. Two-Coat Fluoropolymer: AAMA 621. Fluoropolymer finish containing not less than 70 percent PVDF resin by weight in color coat. Prepare, pretreat,and apply coating to exposed metal surfaces to comply with coating and resin manufacturers' written instructions. b. Minimum Exposure Tests: 1) Humidity Resistance: 2000 hours. 2) Salt-Spray Resistance: 2000 hours. 4. Color: a. As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range. 5. Concealed Finish: Pretreat with manufacturer's standard white or light-colored acrylic or polyester backer finish, consisting of prime coat and wash coat with a minimum total dry film thickness of 0.5 mil (0.0127 mm). D. Stainless Steel Sheet: ASTM A666,Type 316, annealed or cold-worked austenitic stainless steel sheet, plate and flat bar. SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM 07 62 00-4 Commodore Park—Phase 1423173 [Addendum 02]August 27,2025 2.02 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS A. General: Provide materials and types of fasteners, solder, welding rods, protective coatings, separators, sealants, and other miscellaneous items as required for complete sheet metal flashing and trim installation and recommended by manufacturer of primary sheet metal unless otherwise indicated. B. Fasteners: Wood screws, annular threaded nails, self-tapping screws, self-locking rivets and bolts, and other suitable fasteners designed to withstand design loads and recommended by manufacturer of primary sheet metal. 1. General: Blind fasteners or self-drilling screws, gasketed, with hex-washer head. a. Exposed Fasteners: Heads matching color of sheet metal using plastic caps or factory- applied coating. b. Blind Fasteners: High-strength aluminum or stainless-steel rivets suitable for metal being fastened. 2. Fasteners for Stainless-Steel Sheet: Series 300 stainless steel. 3. Fasteners for Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) or Aluminum-Zinc Alloy-Coated Steel Sheet: Hot- dip galvanized steel according to ASTM A 153 or ASTM F 2329 or Series 300 stainless steel. 4. Rust-resistant and compatible with materials to be joined. 5. Length:As required for thickness of material to penetrate substrate 1/2-inch minimum. C. Mechanical Fasteners for Sheet Metal to Substrate Anchorage: 1. Wood Blocking: Hexagonal head screws, stainless steel, with neoprene rubber washers; jacket color to match pre-painted sheet metal. 2. Concrete:Tapcon, Stainless Steel fasteners, suitable for application. D. Roofing Nails: Stainless steel (for fastening into ACQ treated lumber), hot-dipped galvanized or non-ferrous type for fastening into non-treated lumber); with annular rings, size as required to suit application; minimum 11-gage with 3/8-inch diameter head. E. Mechanical Fasteners for Sheet Metal to Metal Fabrications (Support Framing) Anchorage: Appropriate for purpose intended, size as required to suit application and achieve positive anchorage to substrate material. F. Solder: 1. For Stainless Steel: ASTM B32, Grade Sn60, with an acid flux of type recommended by stainless-steel sheet manufacturer. 2. For Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) Steel: ASTM B32, Grade Sn50, 50 percent tin and 50 percent lead or Grade Sn60, 60 percent tin and 40 percent lead. G. Sealant Tape: Pressure-sensitive, 100 percent solids, gray polyisobutylene compound sealant tape with release-paper backing. Provide permanently elastic, nonsag, nontoxic, nonstaining tape 1/2-inch-wide and 1/8 inch (3.18 mm)thick. H. Elastomeric Sealant: ASTM C920, elastomeric polyurethane polymer sealant; low modulus, as specified in Division 07 Section "Sealants (for Roofing)"; of type, grade, class, and use classifications required to seal joints in sheet metal flashing and trim and remain watertight. I. Bituminous Coating: Cold-applied asphalt emulsion complying with ASTM D 1187. J. Splash Blocks: Precast concrete of size and profile indicated; minimum 3000 psi (20684.28 kPa) at 28 days, with minimum 5 percent air entrainment; suitable for downspouts discharging at grade level or onto roof surface. SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM 07 62 00-5 Commodore Park—Phase 1423173 [Addendum 02]August 27,2025 2.03 FABRICATION, GENERAL A. General: Custom fabricate sheet metal flashing and trim to comply with recommendations in SMACNA's "Architectural Sheet Metal Manual" that apply to design, dimensions, geometry, metal thickness, and other characteristics of item indicated. Fabricate items at the shop to greatest extent possible. B. Fabricate sheet metal flashing and trim in thickness or weight needed to comply with performance requirements, but not less than that specified for each application and metal. 1. Obtain field measurements for accurate fit before shop fabrication. C. Form sheet metal flashing and trim without excessive oil canning, buckling, and tool marks and true to line and levels indicated, with exposed edges folded back to form hems. 1. Conceal fasteners and expansion provisions where possible. Exposed fasteners are not allowed on faces exposed to view. D. Fabrication Tolerances: Fabricate sheet metal flashing and trim that is capable of installation to a tolerance of 1/4 inch (6.35 mm) in 20 feet (609.6 cm) on slope and location lines as indicated and within 1/8-inch offset of adjoining faces and of alignment of matching profiles. E. Sealed Joints: Form nonexpansion but movable joints in metal to accommodate elastomeric sealant. F. Expansion Provisions: Where lapped expansion provisions cannot be used, form expansion joints of intermeshing hooked flanges, not less than linch deep, filled with elastomeric sealant concealed within joints. 1. Fabricate all components with allowance for expansion at joints. Provide enlarged or oval holes at all piercing fasteners. G. Conceal fasteners and expansion provisions where possible on exposed-to-view sheet metal flashing and trim, unless otherwise indicated. H. Form all sheet metal components (except corners) in longest practical length up to 10-feet maximum; true to shape, square, accurate in size, and free from distortion or defects detrimental to appearance or performance. I. Fabricate corners on all sheet metal components (gravel guards, copings, cap flashings, etc.)to form one piece with minimum 18-inch and maximum 36-inch long legs. J. Fabricate cleats and attachment devices from same material as accessory being anchored or from compatible, noncorrosive metal. 1. Fabricate cleats and attachment devices of sizes as recommended by SMACNA's "Architectural Sheet Metal Manual" for application, but not less than thickness of metal being secured. K. Soldered Seams: Fabricate nonmoving seams with flat-lock seams.Tin edges to be seamed,form seams, and solder. L. Unsoldered Seams: Fabricate nonmoving seams with flat-lock seams. Form seams and seal with elastomeric sealant unless otherwise recommended by sealant manufacturer for intended use. Rivet joints where necessary for strength. M. Hem exposed edges of metal 1/2-inch; miter and seam corners. N. Fabricate vertical faces with bottom edge formed outward 3/4-inch at 30 degrees and hemmed to form drip. SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM 07 62 00-6 Commodore Park—Phase 1423173 [Addendum 02]August 27,2025 1. Where vertical height exceeds 8-inches,fabricate with stiffing grooves in accordance with SMACNA, unless specifically approved otherwise. O. Form all sheet metal material to provide watertight joints: 1. Unprotected Horizontal Surfaces (expansion joint covers, etc.): Standing seam or drive cleat joints. 2. Vertical Surfaces (copings, cap flashings, gravel guards, etc.): Flat lock or cover and backer plate seams. P. Miter all sheet metal corners and solder,weld, or fasten and seal all joints watertight: 1. Prepainted metallic-coated steel sheet:Apply minimum 1/4-inch bead of sealant between connecting metal flanges and drill and fasten with rivets at 2 inches o.c. 2. Stainless Steel: Solder joints watertight. 3. Unfinished Galvanized Steel: Solderjoints watertight. 4. After soldering, remove flux. Wipe and wash solder joints clean. 5. Install sealant so it will not be visible on outside of joints. Q. Fabricate elements complete with required connection pieces. R. Fabricate all components with horizontal (flat) surfaces with built-in slope for drainage toward roof unless indicated otherwise. S. Do not use graphite pencils to mark metal surfaces. 2.04 ROOF DRAINAGE SHEET METAL FABRICATIONS A. Hanging Gutters: Fabricate to cross section indicated, complete with end pieces, outlet tubes, and other accessories as required. Fabricate in 32-feet long sections. Furnish flat-stock gutter spacers and gutter brackets fabricated from same metal as gutters, of size recommended by SMACNA but not less than twice the gutter thickness. Fabricate expansion joints, expansion- joint covers, and gutter accessories from same metal as gutters. 1. Gutter Style: SMACNA designation A. a. Size: Designed to meet roof drainage area, rainfall intensity criteria, and downspout size and spacing. b. Supports: Minimum 1/8-inch x 1-inch Brackets and 0.1046 inch (2.66 mm) spacers at maximum 36-inches oc, staggered. c. Join sections with riveted and sealed or soldered joints. 2. Expansion Joints: Lap type. a. Spacing: Minimum twenty (20) feet, maximum fifty (50) feet between expansion joints. 3. Accessories: Wire ball downspout strainer. B. Downspouts: Fabricate rectangular downspouts complete with mitered elbows. Furnish with metal hangers,from same material as downspouts, and anchors. 1. Fabricated Hanger Style: SMACNA figure designation 1-35A. 2. Size: Designed to accept roof drainage area, rainfall intensity criteria, and downspout spacing. 3. Length: Minimum twenty (20) feet or required height, maximum fifty feet between expansion joints. 4. Joints: Sections with riveted and sealed or soldered joints. 5. Supports: 12 Gage straps at maximum 8-feet oc.All strap edges rolled or smooth. SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM 07 62 00-7 Commodore Park—Phase 1423173 [Addendum 02]August 27,2025 C. Fabricate gutter and downspout accessories seal watertight. 2.05 DOWNSPOUT BOOTS A. Basis-of-Design: O-Series, Model 0-8824F Downspout Boot, as manufactured by DownSpoutBoots.com, division of J.R. Hoe, Inc., www.downspoutboots.com; 1-800-245-5521. B. Material: ASTM A-48 Class 30 Gray Iron. C. Configuration: Offset. D. Cleanout Access: Provide cleanout access on all sizes 24 inches (609.6 mm) or greater in length. Cast iron cleanout covers with neoprene gasket is secured to downspout boot with stainless steel tamper-proof screws. E. Finish: Factory applied powder coat finish. Color as selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range of colors. F. Accessories: Provide rubber adapters or rubber couplings as required to provide connection from downspout boot outlet to underground drainage pipe. Mounting hardware consists of stainless-steel anchors, bolts and washers to install downspout boots on building wall. 2.06 FINISHES A. Comply with NAAMM's "Metal Finishes Manual for Architectural and Metal Products" for recommendations for applying and designating finishes. B. Protect mechanical and painted finishes on exposed surfaces from damage by applying a strippable,temporary protective covering before shipping. C. Appearance of Finished Work: Variations in appearance of abutting or adjacent pieces are acceptable if they are within one-half of the range of approved Samples. Noticeable variations in the same piece are not acceptable. Variations in appearance of other components are acceptable if they are within the range of approved Samples and are assembled or installed to minimize contrast. D. Exposed to View (Unfinished) Galvanized Steel Components: Paint to match prepainted metallic-coated steel prior to installation: 1. Clean: Comply with SSPC-1-Solvent Wipe. 2. Primer:Apply specified or finish paint manufacturer's recommended primer in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. 3. Finish Coat: Apply powder coating or approved urethane enamel in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. PART 3- EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer present, to verify actual locations, dimensions and other conditions affecting performance of the Work. 1. Verify compliance with requirements for installation tolerances of substrates. 2. Verify that substrate is sound, dry, smooth, clean, sloped for drainage, and securely anchored. 3. Verify that roof openings,curbs, pipes,sleeves,ducts,or vents through roof are solidly set, cant strips and reglets in place, and that nailing strips are located. SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM 07 62 00-8 Commodore Park—Phase 1423173 [Addendum 02]August 27,2025 4. Verify that membrane termination and base flashings are in place, sealed, and secure. B. For the record, prepare written report, endorsed by Installer, listing conditions detrimental to performance of the Work. C. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.02 UNDERLAYMENT INSTALLATION A. General: Install underlayment as recommended by SMACNA and as indicated on Drawings. B. Underlayment: Install underlayment with adhesive for temporary anchorage to minimize use of mechanical fasteners under sheet metal flashing and trim. Apply in shingle fashion to shed water,with lapped joints of not less than 2 inches (50.8 mm). 3.03 INSTALLATION,GENERAL A. Field measure site conditions prior to fabricating work. B. General: Anchor sheet metal flashing and trim and other components of the Work securely in place, with provisions for thermal and structural movement. Use fasteners, solder, welding rods, protective coatings, separators, sealants, and other miscellaneous items as required to complete sheet metal flashing and trim system. 1. Install sheet metal flashing and trim true to line and levels indicated. Provide uniform, neat seams with minimum exposure of solder, welds, and sealant. 2. Install sheet metal flashing and trim to fit substrates and to result in watertight performance. Verify shapes and dimensions of surfaces to be covered before fabricating sheet metal. 3. Provide continuous cleats fastened not more than 12-inches on center.Anchor cleats with a minimum of two fasteners. 4. Install exposed sheet metal flashing and trim without excessive oil canning, buckling, and tool marks. 5. Install sealant tape where indicated. 6. Torch cutting of sheet metal flashing and trim is not permitted. 7. Do not use graphite pencils to mark metal surfaces. C. Metal Protection: Where dissimilar metals will contact each other or corrosive substrates, protect against galvanic action by painting contact surfaces with bituminous coating or by other permanent separation as recommended by SMACNA. 1. Coat back side of stainless-steel and lead sheet metal flashing and trim with bituminous coating where flashing and trim will contact wood, ferrous metal, or cementitious construction. a. Minimum Dry Film Thickness: 15-mils. 2. Underlayment: Where installing metal flashing directly on cementitious or wood substrates, install a course of felt underlayment and cover with a slip sheet or install a course of polyethylene sheet. 3. Bed flanges in thick coat of asphalt roofing cement where required for waterproof performance. SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM 07 62 00-9 Commodore Park—Phase 1423173 [Addendum 02]August 27,2025 D. Expansion Provisions: Provide for thermal expansion of exposed flashing and trim. Space movement joints at a maximum of 10-feet. Provide joints within 18-to 36inches of all corners or intersections.Where lapped expansion provisions cannot be used orwould not be sufficiently watertight, form expansion joints of intermeshing hooked flanges, not less than linch deep, filled with elastomeric sealant concealed within joints. E. Fastener Sizes: Use fasteners of sizes that will penetrate wood sheathing not less than 1-1/4 inches (32 mm) for nails and not less than 3/4 inch (19.05 mm) for wood screws; and metal decking not less than recommended by fastener manufacturer to achieve maximum pull-out resistance: 1. Galvanized or Prepainted, Metallic-Coated Steel: Use stainless-steel fasteners. 2. Stainless Steel: Use stainless-steel fasteners. F. Seal joints as shown and as required with elastomeric sealant for watertight construction. 1. Where sealant-filled joints are used,embed hooked flanges of joint members not less than linch into sealant. Form joints to completely conceal sealant.When ambient temperature at time of installation is moderate, between 40 and 70 deg F, set joint members for 50 percent movement each way. Adjust setting proportionately for installation at higher ambient temperatures. Do not install sealant-type joints at temperatures below 40 deg F. 2. Preparejoints and apply sealants to comply with requirements in Division 07 Section "Joint Sealants (for Roofing)." G. Soldered Joints: Clean surfaces to be soldered, removing oils and foreign matter. Pretin edges of sheets to be soldered to a width of 1-1/2 inches (38 mm) except reduce pre-tinning where pre-tinned surface would show in completed Work. 1. Do not solder pre-painted metallic-coated steel sheet. 2. Do not use torches for soldering. Heat surfaces to receive solder and flow solder into joint. Fill joint completely. Completely remove flux and spatter from exposed surfaces. 3. Stainless-Steel Soldering: Tin edges of uncoated sheets using solder recommended for stainless steel and acid flux. Promptly remove acid flux residue from metal after tinning and soldering. Comply with solder manufacturer's recommended methods for cleaning and neutralization. H. Rivets: Rivet joints where indicated and where necessary for strength. I. Protect all membrane penetrations as indicated and as recommended in SMACNA and NRCA manuals. 3.04 ROOF DRAINAGE SYSTEM INSTALLATION A. General: Install sheet metal roof drainage items to produce complete roof drainage system according to SMACNA recommendations and as indicated. Coordinate installation of roof perimeter flashing with installation of roof drainage system. B. Hanging Gutters:Join sections with riveted and soldered joints or with lapped joints sealed with elastomeric sealant. Provide for thermal expansion. Attach gutters at eave or fascia to firmly anchored gutter brackets and straps spaced not more than 36 inches(914.4 mm)apart. Provide end closures and seal watertight with sealant. Slope to downspouts. 1. Fasten gutter spacers to front and back of gutter. 2. Loosely lock straps to front gutter bead and anchor to roof deck. 3. Anchor back of gutter that extends onto roof deck with cleats spaced not more than 24- inches apart. SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM 07 62 00- 10 Commodore Park—Phase 1423173 [Addendum 02]August 27,2025 4. Install gutter with expansion joints at locations indicated, but not exceeding 50 feet (1524 cm) apart. Install expansion-joint caps. C. Downspouts:Join sections with 1-1/2-inch telescoping joints. 1. Provide hangers with fasteners designed to hold downspouts securely to walls. Locate hangers at top and bottom and at approximately 36 inches (914 mm) o.c. in between. 2. Connect downspouts to underground drainage system where available. 3. Provide opening at base of downspout (As detailed in the Drawings) to direct water away from building. 4. Set splash blocks under downspouts not connected to underground drainage system. D. Splash Blocks: Install where downspouts discharge on low-slope roofs or onto grade. 1. Roof Discharge: Set on traffic pads compatible with roofing membrane. 2. Grade Discharge: Set on a bed of compacted fill. E. Expansion-Joint Covers: Install expansion-joint covers at locations and of configuration indicated in drawings. If not indicated in Drawings, locate expansion joints no greater than 50' apart in any Gutter Section. Locate 2 downspouts for each 50'section of gutter(min.). Lap joints a minimum of 4inches in direction of water flow. 3.05 ROOF FLASHING INSTALLATION A. General: Install sheet metal flashing and trim to comply with performance requirements and SMACNA's "Architectural Sheet Metal Manual." Provide concealed fasteners where possible, set units true to line, and level as indicated. Install work with laps,joints,and seams that will be permanently watertight and weather resistant. 1. Install starter and edge strips, and cleats before starting installation. 2. Strip in all sheet metal flanges the same day they are installed. B. Roof Edge Flashing: Anchor to resist uplift and outward forces specified in Part 1 and as indicated. 1. Backer Plates: Secure with fasteners suitable for substrate, 6-inches o.c. each face. 2. Interlock bottom edge of roof edge flashing with continuous cleats anchored to substrate at 12-inch centers. 3. Apply 1/4-inch bead of sealant between each layer of metal at each edge. 4. Cover Plates: Hook front or exposed face of cover plate over drip edge. 5. Do not use mastic between sheet metal components. 3.06 ERECTION TOLERANCES A. Installation Tolerances: Shim and align sheet metal flashing and trim within installed tolerance of 1/4 inch (6.35 mm) in 20 feet (609.6 cm) on slope and location lines as indicated and within 1/8-inch offset of adjoining faces and of alignment of matching profiles. 3.07 CLEANING AND PROTECTION A. Clean exposed metal surfaces of substances that interfere with uniform oxidation and weathering. B. Clean and neutralize flux materials. Clean off excess solder and sealants. SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM 07 62 00- 11 Commodore Park—Phase 1423173 [Addendum 02]August 27,2025 C. Remove temporary protective coverings and strippable films as sheet metal flashing and trim are installed unless otherwise indicated in manufacturer's written installation instructions. On completion of installation, remove unused materials and clean finished surfaces, including removing unused fasteners, metal filings, pop rivet stems, and pieces of flashing. Maintain in a clean condition during construction. D. Replace sheet metal flashing and trim that have been damaged or that have deteriorated beyond successful repair by finish touchup or similar minor repair procedures. 3.08 SCHEDULE- MATERIALS A. Exposed to View Components: 1. Roof Drip Edge: Metallic coated steel sheet, powder coated to match adjacent prepainted metallic-coated steel sheet components. 2. All Other Components: Metallic coated steel sheet, powder coated to match adjacent prepainted metallic-coated steel sheet components, 24 gage. B. Concealed from View Components, (Counterflashings, Cleats, Etc.): Metallic-coated Galvalume, 22 gage. C. Gutters and Downspouts: Stainless steel sheet, 24 gage. D. Concrete splash block: 12 inches wide by 36 inches long by 3 inches minimum thickness. Provide at Bird Observatory. END OF SECTION 07 62 00 SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM 07 62 00- 12 Commodore Park—Phase 1423173 [Addendum 02]August 27,2025 SECTION 07 92 00 -JOINT SEALANTS PART 1-GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Nonsag gunnable joint sealants. B. Self-leveling pourable joint sealants. C. Joint backings and accessories. 1.02 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. ASTM C661 - Standard Test Method for Indentation Hardness of Elastomeric-Type Sealants by Means of a Durometer; 2015 (Reapproved 2022). B. ASTM C920-Standard Specification for Elastomeric Joint Sealants; 2018. C. ASTM C1193-Standard Guide for Use of Joint Sealants; 2016 (Reapproved 2023). PART 2- PRODUCTS 2.01 JOINT SEALANT APPLICATIONS A. Scope: 1. Exterior Joints: a. Seal the following joints: 1) Wall expansion and control joints. 2) Joints between doors, windows, and other frames or adjacent construction. 3) Joints between different exposed materials. 2. Interior Joints: a. Seal the following joints: 1) Joints between door frames and window frames and adjacent construction. 2) In sound-rated wall and ceiling assemblies, gaps at electrical outlets, wiring devices, and piping penetrations. 3) In sound-rated wall and ceiling assemblies, seal joints between wall assemblies and ceiling assemblies; between wall assemblies and other construction; between ceiling assemblies and other construction. 3. Do Not Seal: a. Intentional weep holes in masonry. b. Joints indicated to be covered with expansion joint cover assemblies. JOINT SEALANTS 07 92 00- 1/4 Commodore Park Improvements-Phase 1 -#23173 July 3, 2025 c. Joints where sealant is specified to be furnished and installed by manufacturer of product to be sealed. d. Joints where sealant installation is specified in other sections. e. Joints between suspended ceilings and walls. B. Exterior Joints: Use nonsag polyurethane sealant, unless otherwise indicated. C. Interior Joints: Use nonsag polyurethane sealant, unless otherwise indicated. 1. Floor Joints in Wet Areas: Nonsag polyurethane traffic-grade sealant suitable for continuous liquid immersion. 2. Joints between Tile in Wet Areas and Floors,Walls, and Ceilings: Mildew-resistant silicone sealant; white. D. Interior Wet Areas: Bathrooms and restrooms; fixtures in wet areas include plumbing fixtures, countertops, cabinets, and other similar items. 2.02 NONSAG JOINT SEALANTS A. Mildew-Resistant Silicone Sealant: ASTM C920, Grade NS, Uses M and A; single component, mildew resistant; not expected to withstand continuous water immersion or traffic. 1. Color: White. B. Polyurethane Sealant: ASTM C920, Grade NS, Uses M and A; single or multi-component; not expected to withstand continuous water immersion or traffic. 1. Movement Capability: Plus and minus 25 percent, minimum. 2. Color: To be selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range. C. Nonsag Traffic-Grade Polyurethane Sealant: ASTM C920, Grade NS, Uses M and A; single or multi-component; explicitly approved by manufacturer for continuous water immersion and traffic without the necessity to recess sealant below traffic surface. 1. Movement Capability: Plus and minus 25 percent, minimum. 2. Hardness Range: 20 to 30, Shore A,when tested in accordance with ASTM C661. 2.03 ACCESSORIES A. Sealant Backing Materials, General: Materials placed in joint before applying sealants; assists sealant performance and service life by developing optimum sealant profile and preventing three-sided adhesion; type and size recommended by sealant manufacturer for compatibility with sealant, substrate, and application. B. Masking Tape: Self-adhesive, nonabsorbent, nonstaining, removable without adhesive residue, and compatible with surfaces adjacent to joints and sealants. C. Joint Cleaner: Noncorrosive and nonstaining type, type recommended by sealant manufacturer; compatible with joint forming materials. JOINT SEALANTS 07 92 00-2/4 Commodore Park Improvements-Phase 1 -#23173 July 3, 2025 D. Primers: Type recommended by sealant manufacturer to suit application; nonstaining. PART 3- EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verify that joints are ready to receive work. B. Verify that backing materials are compatible with sealants. C. Verify that backer rods are of the correct size. 3.02 PREPARATION A. Remove loose materials and foreign matter that could impair adhesion of sealant. B. Clean joints, and prime as necessary, in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. C. Perform preparation in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and ASTM C1193. D. Mask elements and surfaces adjacent to joints from damage and disfigurement due to sealant work; be aware that sealant drips and smears may not be completely removable. 3.03 INSTALLATION A. Install this work in accordance with sealant manufacturer's requirements for preparation of surfaces and material installation instructions. B. Provide joint sealant installations complying with ASTM C1193. C. Install bond breaker backing tape where backer rod cannot be used. D. Install sealant free of air pockets, foreign embedded matter, ridges, and sags, and without getting sealant on adjacent surfaces. E. Do not install sealant when ambient temperature is outside manufacturer's recommended temperature range, or will be outside that range during the entire curing period, unless manufacturer's approval is obtained and instructions are followed. F. Nonsag Sealants: Tool surface concave, unless otherwise indicated; remove masking tape immediately after tooling sealant surface. END OF SECTION 07 92 00 JOINT SEALANTS 07 92 00-3/4 Commodore Park Improvements-Phase 1 -#23173 July 3, 2025 SECTION 09 9123 - PAINTING PART 1-GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Surface preparation and field painting of exposed interior items and surfaces. B. Surface preparation and field painting of exposed exterior items and surfaces. C. Painting of exposed bare and covered pipes and ducts, hangers, exposed steel and iron supports, and surfaces of mechanical and electrical equipment that do not have a factory- applied final finish. 1.02 DEFINITIONS A. General: Standard coating terms defined in ASTM D16. 1. Flat refers to a lusterless or matte finish with a gloss range below 15 when measured at an 85 degree meter. 2. Eggshell refers to low-sheen finish with a gloss range between 20 and 35 when measured at a 60 degree meter. 3. Semi-Gloss refers to medium-sheen finish with a gloss range between 35 and 70 when measured at a 60 degree meter. 4. Full gloss refers to high-sheen finish with a gloss range more than 70 when measured at a 60 degree meter. 1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. ASTM D16 - Standard Terminology for Paint, Related Coatings, Materials, and Applications; 2024. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. See Section 0130 00-Administrative Requirements for submittal procedures. B. Product Data: For each paint system indicated, including: 1. Material List: An inclusive list of required coating materials. Indicate each material and cross reference specific coating, finish system, and application. Identify each material by manufacturer's catalog number and general classification. 2. Preparation instructions and recommendations. 3. Manufacturer's Information: Manufacturer's technical information, including label analysis and instructions for handling, storing, and applying each coating material. C. Selection Samples: For each finish product specified, two complete sets of color chips representing manufacturer's full range of available colors and patterns. PAINTING 09 91 23- 1/8 Commodore Park Improvements-Phase 1 -#23173 July 3, 2025 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer Qualifications: A firm or individual experienced in applying paints and coatings similar in material, design, and extent to those indicated for this project, whose work has resulted in applications with a record of successful in-service performance. B. Obtain block fillers and primers for each coating system from the same manufacturer as the finish coats. C. Paint exposed surfaces. If an item or a surface is not specifically mentioned, paint the item or surface the same as similar adjacent materials or surfaces. If a color of finish is not indicated, Architect will select from standard colors and finishes available. D. Do not paint prefinished items, concealed surfaces, finished metal surfaces, operating parts, and labels. E. Mock-Up: Provide a mock-up for evaluation of surface preparation techniques and application workmanship. 1. See Section 0140 00-Quality Requirements,for general requirements for mock-up. 2. Finish areas designated by Architect. 3. Do not proceed with remaining work until workmanship, color, and sheen are approved by Architect. 4. Refinish mock-up area as required to produce acceptable work. 1.06 DELIVERY,STORAGE,AND HANDLING A. Deliver materials to project site in manufacturer's original, unopened packages and containers bearing manufacturer's name and label. B. Store materials not in use in tightly covered containers in a well-ventilated area at a minimum ambient temperature of 45 degrees F (7 degrees Q. Maintain storage containers in a clean condition,free of foreign materials and residue. 1.07 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Maintain environmental conditions (temperature, humidity, and ventilation) within limits recommended by manufacturer for optimum results. Do not install products under environmental conditions outside manufacturer's absolute limits. B. Apply waterborne paints only when temperatures of surfaces to be painted and surrounding air are between 50 degrees F (10 degrees C) and 90 degrees F (32 degrees C). C. Apply solvent-thinned paints only when temperatures of surfaces to be painted and surrounding air are between 45 degrees F (7 degrees C) and 95 degrees F (35 degrees C). D. Do not apply paint in snow, rain,fog, or mist; or when relative humidity exceeds 85 percent; or at temperatures less than 5 degrees F (3 degrees C) above the dew point; or to damp or wet surfaces. PAINTING 09 91 23-2/8 Commodore Park Improvements-Phase 1 -#23173 July 3, 2025 1. Painting may continue during inclement weather if surfaces and areas to be painted are enclosed and heated within temperature limits specified by manufacturer during application and drying periods. 1.08 EXTRA MATERIALS A. Furnish extra paint materials from the same production run as the materials applied and in the quantities described below. Package with protective covering for storage and identify with labels describing contents. Deliver extra materials to Owner. B. Quantity: Furnish Owner with an additional three percent, but not less than 1 gallon (3.8 1) or 1 case, as appropriate, of each material and color applied. PART 2- PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. Basis of Design Manufacturer: Pittsburg Paints, 400 Bertha Lamme Drive Cranberry, PA 16066. Toll-Free Tel: 888-PPG-IDEA. Web: www.pittsburghpaintsco.com/#sle. B. Other Acceptable Manufacturers: 1. Benjamin Moore: www.benjaminmoore.com/#sle . 2. Sherwin Williams: www.sherwinwilliams.com/#sle. 3. Substitutions: See Section 0160 00- Product Requirements. 2.02 PAINT MATERIALS-GENERAL A. Material Compatibility: Provide block fillers, primers, and finish-coat materials that are compatible with one another and with the substrates indicated under conditions of service and application, as demonstrated by manufacturer based on testing and field experience. B. VOC Classification: Provide high-performance coating materials, including primers, undercoats, and finish-coat materials,that meet the applicable local, state, or federal VOC requirements. C. Color: Refer to Finish Schedule and Paint Legend for paint colors. 2.03 COMMERCIAL FACILITY INTERIOR PAINT SYSTEMS A. Gypsum Board Ceilings: 1. Acrylic Finish: Two finish coats over a primer. a. Flat Finish: 1) Primer: Pittsburgh Paints; 6-490OX1 Speedhide Zero Interior Latex Sealer. (a) Applied at a dry film thickness of not less than 1.4 mils (0.036 mm). 2) Flat Finish: Pittsburgh Paints; 6-70ZV Series Speedhide Interior Zero VOC Latex Flat. PAINTING 09 91 23-3/8 Commodore Park Improvements-Phase 1 -#23173 July 3, 2025 (a) Applied at a dry film thickness of not less than 1.2 mils (0.030 mm). B. Concrete Masonry Units (CMU): 1. Acrylic Finish: Two finish coats over a block filler. a. Semi-Gloss Finish: 1) Block Filler: Pittsburgh Paints; 6-15XI Speedhide Interior/Exterior Hi Fill Acrylic Masonry Block Filler. (a) Applied at a dry film thickness of not less than 7.0 mils (0.178 mm). 2) Semi-Gloss Finish: Pittsburgh Paints; 6-500ZV Series Speedhide Interior Zero VOC Latex Semi-Gloss. (a) Applied at a dry film thickness of not less than 1.5 mils (0.038 mm). C. Ferrous Metal: 1. Acrylic Finish: Two finish coats over a primer. a. Semi-Gloss Finish: 1) Primer: Pittsburgh Paints; 90-1912 Series Pitt-Tech Plus EP Interior/Exterior DTM Industrial Primer. (a) Applied at a dry film thickness of not less than 2.0 mils (0.050 mm). 2) Semi-Gloss Finish: Pittsburgh Paints; 90-1610 Series Pitt-Tech Plus EP Interior/Exterior DTM Industrial Enamel Semi-Gloss. (a) Applied at a dry film thickness of not less than 2.0 mils (0.050 mm). D. Non-Ferrous Metals: 1. Acrylic Finish:Two finish coats over a primer. a. Semi-Gloss Finish: 1) Primer: Pittsburgh Paints; 90-1912 Series Pitt-Tech Plus EP Interior/Exterior DTM Industrial Primer. (a) Applied at a dry film thickness of not less than 2.0 mils (0.050 mm). 2) Semi-Gloss Finish: Pittsburgh Paints; Pittsburgh Paints; 90-1610 Series Pitt-Tech Plus EP Interior/Exterior DTM Industrial Enamel Semi-Gloss. (a) Applied at a dry film thickness of not less than 2.0 mils (0.050 mm). E. Galvanized Surfaces and Aluminum: 1. Acrylic Finish: Two finish coats over a primer. a. Semi-Gloss Finish 1) Primer: Pittsburgh Paints;90-1912 Series Pitt-Tech Plus EP Interior/Exterior DTM Industrial Primer. (a) Applied at a dry film thickness of not less than 2.0 mils (0.050 mm). PAINTING 09 91 23-4/8 Commodore Park Improvements-Phase 1 -#23173 July 3, 2025 2) Semi-Gloss Finish: Pittsburgh Paints; 90-1610 Series Pitt-Tech Plus EP Interior/Exterior DTM Industrial Enamel Semi-Gloss. (a) Applied at a dry film thickness of not less than 2.0 mils (0.050 mm). 2.04 COMMERCIAL FACILITY EXTERIOR PAINT SYSTEMS A. Ferrous and Non-Ferrous Metals: 1. Primer is not required on shop-primed items. 2. Acrylic Finish: Two finish coats over a rust-inhibitive primer. a. Semi-Gloss Finish: 1) Primer (if required): Pittsburgh Paints; 90-1912 Pitt-Tech Plus EP Interior/Exterior Primer Finish DTM Industrial Enamel. (a) Applied at a dry film thickness of not less than 2.0 mils (0.050 mm). 2) Semi-Gloss Finish: Pittsburgh Paints; 90-1610 Pitt-Tech Plus EP Interior/Exterior DTM Industrial Enamel Semi-Gloss. (a) Applied at a dry film thickness of not less than 2.0 mils (0.050 mm). B. Wood and Fiber Cement-Siding,Trim, and Other Smooth Exterior Surfaces: 1. Acrylic Finish: Two finish coats over a primer. a. Semi-Gloss Finish: 1) Primer: Pittsburgh Paints; 17-921XI Series Seal Grip 100 Percent Acrylic Universal Primer: (a) Applied at a dry film thickness of not less than 1.6 mils (0.041 mm). 2) Semi-Gloss Finish: Pittsburgh Paints; 6-90OXI Series Speedhide Exterior House and Trim Acrylic Latex Paint Semi-Gloss. (a) Applied at a dry film thickness of not less than 1.4 mils (0.036 mm). PART 3- EXECUTION 3.01 PREPARATION A. General: Remove hardware and hardware accessories, plates, machined surfaces, lighting fixtures, and similar items already installed that are not to be painted. If removal is impractical or impossible because of size or weight of the item, provide surface-applied protection before surface preparation and painting. 1. After completing painting operations in each space or area, reinstall items removed using workers skilled in the trades involved. B. Cleaning: Before applying paint or other surface treatments, clean substrates of substances that could impair bond of the various coatings. Remove oil and grease before cleaning. PAINTING 09 91 23-5/8 Commodore Park Improvements-Phase 1 -#23173 July 3, 2025 C. Surface Preparation: Clean and prepare surfaces to be painted according to manufacturer's written instructions for each substrate condition and as specified. D. Material Preparation: Carefully mix and prepare coating materials according to manufacturer's written instructions. 1. Maintain containers used in mixing and applying coatings in a clean condition, free of foreign materials and residue. 2. Stir materials before applying to produce a mixture of uniform density. Stir as required during application. Do not stir surface film into the material. Remove film and, if necessary, strain coating material before using. 3. Use only the type of thinners approved by manufacturer and only within recommended limits. 4. Tinting: Tint each undercoat a lighter shade to simplify identification of each coat when multiple coats of same material are applied. Tint undercoats to match the color of the finish coat, but provide sufficient differences in shade of undercoats to distinguish each separate coat. 3.02 APPLICATION A. General: Apply paint according to manufacturer's written instructions. Use applicators and techniques best suited for substrate and type of material being applied. B. Application Procedures: Apply coatings by brush, roller, spray, or other applicators according to manufacturer's written instructions. 1. The number of coats and film thickness required is the same regardless of application method. 2. Completed Work: Match approved samples for color, texture, and coverage. Remove, refinish, or recoat work that does not comply with specified requirements. 3.03 CLEANING A. After completing painting, clean glass and paint spattered surfaces. Remove spattered paint by washing and scraping without scratching or damaging adjacent finished surfaces. 3.04 PROTECTION A. Protect work of other trades, whether being painted or not, against damage from painting. Correct damage by cleaning, repairing or replacing, and repainting, as approved by Architect. B. Provide "Wet Paint" signs to protect newly painted finishes. After completing painting operations, remove temporary protective wrappings provided by others to protect their work. C. After work of other trades is complete, touch up and restore damaged or defaced painted surfaces. PAINTING 09 91 23-6/8 Commodore Park Improvements-Phase 1 -#23173 July 3, 2025 END OF SECTION 09 9123 PAINTING 09 91 23-7/8 Commodore Park Improvements-Phase 1 -#23173 July 3, 2025 SECTION 09 96 00 - HIGH-PERFORMANCE COATINGS PART 1-GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. High performance coatings for concrete columns and exposed structural steel. B. Surface preparation. 1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A. Section 099123 - PAINT 1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. MPI (APSM) - Master Painters Institute Architectural Painting Specification Manual; Current Edition. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. See Section 0130 00-Administrative Requirements for submittal procedures. B. Product Data: Provide complete list of all products to be used, with the following information for each: 1. Manufacturer's name, product name and/or catalog number, and general product category (e.g. "alkyd enamel"). 2. MPI product number(e.g. MPI #47). 3. Cross-reference to specified coating system(s) product is to be used in; include description of each system. 4. Manufacturer's installation instructions. C. Maintenance Data: Include cleaning procedures and repair and patching techniques. D. Maintenance Materials: Furnish the following for Owner's use in maintenance of project. 1. Extra Coating Materials: 1 gallon (4 liters) of each type and color. 2. Label each containerwith manufacturer's name, product number,color number,and room names and numbers where used. 1.05 DELIVERY,STORAGE,AND HANDLING A. Deliver products to site in sealed and labeled containers; inspect to verify acceptability. B. Container Label: Include manufacturer's name,type of coating, brand name, lot number, brand code, coverage, surface preparation, drying time,cleanup requirements, color designation, and instructions for mixing and reducing. HIGH-PERFORMANCE COATINGS 09 96 00- 1/4 Commodore Park Improvements-Phase 1 -#23173 July 3, 2025 C. Coating Materials: Store at minimum ambient temperature of 45 degrees F (7 degrees C) and a maximum of 90 degrees F (32 degrees C), in ventilated area, and as required by manufacturer's instructions. 1.06 FIELD CONDITIONS A. Do not install materials when temperature is below 55 degrees F (13 degrees C) or above 90 degrees F (32 degrees C). B. Maintain this temperature range, 24 hours before, during, and 72 hours after installation of coating. C. Restrict traffic from area where coating is being applied or is curing. 1.07 WARRANTY A. See Section 0178 00-Closeout Submittals for additional warranty requirements. B. Correct defective Work within a five year period after Date of Substantial Completion. PART 2- PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. High-Performance Coatings: 1. Basis of Design Product: Sherwin-Williams Company: www.sherwin-williams.com 2. Pittsburgh Paints: www.ppgpaints.com/#sle. 3. Substitutions: Section 0160 00- Product Requirements. 2.02 TOP COAT MATERIALS A. Coatings - General: Provide complete multi-coat systems formulated and recommended by manufacturer for the applications indicated, in the thicknesses indicated; number of coats specified does not include primer or filler coat. 1. Colors: As selected by Architect from Manufacturer's full range of colors. B. Galvanized and ungalvanized exterior steel and concrete where noted in Drawings: 1. Top Coat(s): Urethane, Exterior, High Performance Industrial. a. Basis of Design Products: 1) Sherwin-Willliams Company; Pro Industrial Acrolon 100 Waterbased Urethane, B65 Series, Gloss, 2 coats @ 2.0 mils dry. 2.03 PRIMERS A. Primers: Provide the following unless other primer is required or recommended by coating manufacturer. HIGH-PERFORMANCE COATINGS 09 96 00-2/4 Commodore Park Improvements-Phase 1 -#23173 July 3, 2025 1. Primer over galvanized or ungalvanized steel. a. Products: 1) Sherwin-Willliams Company; Pro Industrial Pro-Cryl Universal Primer, B66-1300 Series, 1 coat @ 2.0 mils dry. 2. Primer over concrete. a. Products: 1) Sherwin-Willliams Company; Loxon Concrete and Masonry Primer-Sealer, LX02W0050, 1 coat @ 2.5 mils dry. 2.04 ACCESSORY MATERIALS A. Accessory Materials: Provide primers, sealers, cleaning agents, cleaning cloths, sanding materials, and clean-up materials as required for final completion of coated surfaces. PART 3- EXECUTION 3.01 PREPARATION A. Protect adjacent surfaces and materials not receiving coating from spatter and overspray; mask if necessary to provide adequate protection. Repair damage. B. Clean surfaces of loose foreign matter. C. Remove substances that would bleed through finished coatings. If unremovable, seal surface with shellac. D. Remove finish hardware,fixture covers, and accessories and store. E. Prepare surface as recommended by coating manufacturer. 3.02 PRIMING A. Concrete: Apply masonry filler to thickness required to fill holes and produce smooth surface; minimum thickness of 7.0 mils (0.178 mm). B. Galvanized Steel: Solvent Clean per SSPC-SP1 and apply a test patch.Allow paint to dry at least one week before testing adhesion. If adhesion is poor, brush blasting per SSPC-SP16 is necessary to remove these treatments. 3.03 COATING APPLICATION A. Apply coatings in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions,to thicknesses specified and recommendations in MPI -Architectural Painting and Specification Manual. B. Apply in uniform thickness coats, without runs, drips, pinholes, brush marks, or variations in color,texture,or finish. Finish edges,crevices,corners,and other changes in dimension with full coating thickness. HIGH-PERFORMANCE COATINGS 09 96 00-3/4 Commodore Park Improvements-Phase 1 -#23173 July 3, 2025 3.04 CLEANING A. Collect waste material that could constitute a fire hazard, place in closed metal containers, and remove daily from site. B. Clean surfaces immediately of overspray, splatter, and excess material. C. After coating has cured, clean and replace finish hardware, fixtures, and fittings previously removed. 3.05 PROTECTION A. Protect finished work from damage. END OF SECTION 09 96 00 HIGH-PERFORMANCE COATINGS 09 96 00-4/4 Commodore Park Improvements-Phase 1 -#23173 July 3, 2025 SECTION 1168 13 - PLAYGROUND EQUIPMENT PART 1-GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Playground layout and staking. B. Concrete footings for playground equipment. C. Playground equipment. D. Location of each item of playground equipment is indicated on drawings. 1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A. Section 03 30 00-Cast-in-Place Concrete: Footings for playground equipment. B. Section 09 9113 - Exterior Painting. C. Section 31 11 13.26: Cement Treated Subgrade. D. Section 3122 13.10-Grading: Shaping subgrade to specified grade levels. E. Section 32 18 16.13 - PLAYGROUND PROTECTIVE SURFACING: Protective surfacing in playground area. 1.03 DEFINITIONS A. Play Event: A piece of playground equipment that supports one or more play activities. B. Use Zone: Area under and around a play event within which the ground surfacing must meet fall impact attenuation requirements of ASTM F1292 when tested at the fall height specified for the play event. C. Fall Height: Vertical distance between the finished elevation of the designated play surface and the finished elevation of the protective surfacing beneath it, as defined in ASTM F1487. D. Protective Surfacing: Resilient ground surfacing, specified in Section 32 18 16.13. The characteristics of the protective surfacing are based on the fall height of the playground equipment.Changes in either the surfacing or the fall height, particularly reducing the resilience of the protective surfacing or increasing the fall height,will reduce safety-related performance. E. Subgrade: Surface of the ground on which the protective surfacing is installed. 1.04 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. ASTM A123/A123M -Standard Specification for Zinc(Hot-Dip Galvanized) Coatings on Iron and Steel Products; 2017. B. ASTM A135/A135M -Standard Specification for Electric-Resistance-Welded Steel Pipe; 2021. C. ASTM A500/A500M - Standard Specification for Cold-Formed Welded and Seamless Carbon Steel Structural Tubing in Rounds and Shapes; 2023. D. ASTM A513/A513M - Standard Specification for Electric-Resistance-Welded Carbon and Alloy Steel Mechanical Tubing; 2025. E. ASTM 1326/1326M - Standard Specification for Aluminum-Alloy Sand Castings; 2018, with Editorial Revision. PLAYGROUND EQUIPMENT 11 68 13- 1/8 Commodore Park- Phase 1 -#23173 [Addendum 02]August 27, 2025 F. ASTM 13108/13108M - Standard Specification for Aluminum-Alloy Permanent Mold Castings; 2019. G. ASTM B179-Standard Specification for Aluminum Alloys in Ingot and Molten Forms for Castings from All Casting Processes; 2018. H. ASTM B221 - Standard Specification for Aluminum and Aluminum-Alloy Extruded Bars, Rods, Wire, Profiles, and Tubes; 2021. I. ASTM D648-Standard Test Method for Deflection Temperature of Plastics Under Flexural Load in the Edgewise Position; 2018. J. ASTM D2240 - Standard Test Method for Rubber Property--Durometer Hardness; 2015 (Reapproved 2021). K. ASTM D6662-Standard Specification for Polyolefin-Based Plastic Lumber Decking Boards;2022. L. ASTM F1292 - Standard Specification for Impact Attenuation of Surfacing Materials Within the Use Zone of Playground Equipment; 2022. M. ASTM F1487-Standard Consumer Safety Performance Specification for Playground Equipment for Public Use; 2025. N. CPSC Pub. No. 325 - Public Playground Safety Handbook; 2015. 1.05 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS A. Preinstallation Meetings: Convene a meeting one week before starting earthwork for playground to discuss coordination between various installers. 1. Require attendance by personnel responsible for grading and installers of playground equipment, protective surfacing, footings, and adjacent work. 2. Include representatives of Contractor and Owner. 3. Notify Architect at least 2 weeks prior to meeting. 1.06 SUBMITTALS A. See Section 00 72 00-General Conditions for submittal procedures. B. Proposals for Substitutions: Substitutions that will increase fall height, platform height, or maximum equipment height will not be considered; submit shop drawings with proposed modifications clearly identified and sufficient information to determine compliance with specified criteria. C. Product Data: For manufactured equipment, provide manufacturer's product data showing materials of construction, compliance with specified standards, installation procedures, safety limitations, and the number of users permitted. 1. Treated Wood Products: Provide information on wood treatment chemical content, toxicity level, and life-cycle durability. 2. Wood Finishes: Provide information on wood finish chemical content and toxicity level. 3. Certifications: Provide International Play Equipment Manufacturers Association (IPEMA) certification that product complies with ASTM F1487, excluding section 10 and 12.6.1. D. Product Data: For fabricated items, provide the following: 1. Treated Wood Products: Provide information on wood treatment chemical content, toxicity level, and life-cycle durability. 2. Wood Finishes: Provide information on wood finish chemical content and toxicity level. PLAYGROUND EQUIPMENT 11 68 13-2/8 Commodore Park- Phase 1 -#23173 [Addendum 02]August 27, 2025 3. Galvanized Steel: Certification of galvanized coating thickness. E. Shop Drawings: Detailed scale drawings showing play event layout, use zone perimeters, and fall height for each play event. Include concrete footings and mounting details. 1. Show locations and dimensions of footings and anchorage points. 2. Clearly identify mounting elevations in relation to a fixed survey point on site and to subgrade elevation and depth of protective surfacing. 3. Show locations of underground utilities, storm drainage system and irrigation system. 4. Show locations of related construction such as walkways and roadways, fences, site furnishings, and plantings. F. Samples: For each item that a color must be selected, provide color chart showing full range of colors and finishes. G. Manufacturer's qualification statement. H. Installer's/Erector's qualification statement. I. Maintenance Data: Provide manufacturer's recommended maintenance instructions and list of replaceable parts for each equipment item,with address and phone number of source of supply. J. Manufacturer's Field Report. K. Executed warranty. 1.07 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Maintain one copy of the latest edition of ASTM F1487 and CPSC Pub. No. 325 at project site. B. Manufacturer Qualifications: Company regularly engaged in manufacturing materials and products specified in this section, with at least ten years of experience. 1. Provide documentation showing that playground equipment similar to that specified has been installed in at least ten sites and in successful service for at least five years; provide addresses. 2. Manufacturer's Representative: Provide product rep's name,company name and address, and playground safety training certificate. C. Installer Qualifications: Company certified by manufacturer for training and experience installing play events and equipment. 1.08 DELIVERY,STORAGE,AND HANDLING A. Deliver, handle, and store equipment to project site in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations. B. Store materials in a dry, covered area, elevated above grade. 1.09 WARRANTY A. See Section 00 72 00-General Conditions for additional warranty requirements. B. Provide warranty for playground equipment as scheduled below. Complete forms in Owner's name and register with manufacturer. 1. Hot dipped galvanized parts, stainless steel parts, HDPE parts: Lifetime. 2. High Pressure Laminate (HPL) and aluminum parts: 15 years. PLAYGROUND EQUIPMENT 11 68 13-3/8 Commodore Park- Phase 1 -#23173 [Addendum 02]August 27, 2025 3. Painted pre-galvanized parts, painted surface on pre-galvanized and aluminum, electro- galvanized, molded polypropolene decks, solid plastic parts, hollow plastic parts, transparent polycarbonate parts, wood composite, Robinia, Pine, Ash and other woods, stainless steel slides, rope and nets: 10 years. 4. Resin Coated Plywood,springs and ball bearings,graphic prints,concrete parts,connecting balls: 5 years. PART 2- PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. Playground Equipment: 1. Basis of Design: Kompan, Inc.: www.kompan.com 2. Substitutions: See Section 00 72 00-General Conditions. 2.02 PLAYGROUND EQUIPMENT-GENERAL A. Design Assumptions: Because the safety of the playground depends on strict compliance with design criteria,this information is provided for Contractor's information. 1. Playground has been designed for children ages 2 through 12. 2. Separate areas for different age groups are indicated on drawings. 3. If deviations from specified dimensions,especially fall heights, is required,obtain approval prior to proceeding; follow approval request procedure as specified for substitutions. B. Mount equipment on concrete footings, unless otherwise indicated, designed and provided by the Installer. 1. Playground protective surfacing constitutes a resilient layer installed over a subbase(non- resilient) that is installed over subgrade; top of footings and anchorage devices is to be covered by full depth of resilient portion of protective surfacing. 2. Playground protective surfacing constitutes a resilient layer installed over subgrade; locate top of footings and anchorage devices below surface of subgrade. 3. Protective Surfacing Depth: Refer to Section 32 18 16.13. 4. Provide supports as required to mount equipment at proper height above finish and sub- grades to allow installation of sufficient depth of protective surfacing; portion of support below top of surfacing must comply with specified requirements for equipment. 5. Paint portion of support that is intended to be installed below top surface of protective surfacing a different color, or mark in other permanent way, so that installers and maintainers of protective surfacing can easily determine whether sufficient depth has been installed. C. Provide permanent label for each equipment item stating age group that equipment was designed for, manufacturer identification, and warning labels in accordance with ASTM F1487. 2.03 PLAYGROUND EQUIPMENT A. Comply with ASTM F1487 and CPSC Pub. No. 325; provide equipment complying with specified requirements for relevant age group(s). 1. Provide components having factory-drilled holes; do not use components with extra holes that will not be filled by hardware or covered by other components. PLAYGROUND EQUIPMENT 11 68 13-4/8 Commodore Park- Phase 1 -#23173 [Addendum 02]August 27, 2025 2.04 MATERIALS A. Steel Pipe and Tube: Comply with ASTM A135/A135M, ASTM A500/A500M, o; hot-dipped galvanized and free of excess weld and spatter. 1. Tensile Strength: 45,000 psi (310 MPa), minimum. 2. Yield Point: 33,000 psi (225 MPa), minimum. 3. Galvanizing: Hot-dip metal components in zinc after fabrication, in accordance with ASTM A123/A123M; remove tailings and sharp protrusions and burnish edges. B. Extruded Aluminum: ASTM B221,Alloy 6061, 6062, or 6063. 1. Tensile Strength: 38,000 psi (262 MPa), minimum. 2. Yield Point: 35,000 psi (241 MPa), minimum. C. Cast Aluminum: ASTM B26/B26M,ASTM 13108/6108M, or ASTM B179. D. Chain: Corrosion resistant zinc plated steel; minimum size 4/0. E. Rope Cable: Strands of steel cable with UV-stabilized polypropylene synthetic covering; ends capped to prevent fraying. F. Hardware: Provide without hazardous protrusions, corners, or finishes, and that require tools for removal after installation; countersunk fasteners are preferred. 1. Use stainless steel for metal-to-metal connections; select type to minimize galvanic corrosion of materials connected by hardware. 2. Use stainless steel for wood-to-wood and wood-to-metal connections. 3. Use stainless steel with plastic components. 4. Bearings: Self lubricating. 5. Hooks, Including S-Hooks: Closed loop; maximum gap 0.04 inches (1 mm), less than the thickness of a dime. 6. Rails, Loops, and Hand Bars: Same metal as item is mounted on or in accordance with scheduled equipment, standard construction. 7. Anchors: In accordance with manufacturer's recommendations. G. Boards and Timbers: Free of holes, cracks, and loose knots; do not use wood or wood coatings that contain pesticides; do not utilize used lumber. 1. Species: Robinia wood. No preservative treatment required with Robinia wood. H. Transparent Plastic: Clear polycarbonate plastic sheets; shatterproof; resistant to crazing, cracking, and fogging. 1. Sheet Thickness: 3/16 inch (5 mm), minimum. I. Opaque Plastic: Molded homogeneous plastic or wood-polymer composite lumber; do not use plastic as major load bearing members; use as deck boards, panels, and railings is acceptable. 1. Homogeneous Plastic: Ultraviolet (UV) and color stabilized polyethylene without applied surface coating; color through entire thickness. 2. Wood-Polymer Composite Lumber: Comply with ASTM D6662;factory finished. 3. Decks and Platforms: Non-slip surface texture. 4. Maximum Deflection: 1/360 of span, when tested in accordance with ASTM D648, with a uniform live load of 40 pounds/ft (585 N/m). 5. Panel Edges: 3/16 inch (5 mm) radius, minimum. J. Paint for Wood: Minimum of two coats factory-applied polyurethane paint, resistant to weather, cracking,fading, and peeling. 1. As specified in Section 09 9123 - Painting. PLAYGROUND EQUIPMENT 11 68 13-5/8 Commodore Park- Phase 1 -#23173 [Addendum 02]August 27, 2025 K. Wood Sealer: Transparent dampproofing as required by manufacturer. L. Painted Wood: Water based, non-toxic, UV resistant. M. Powder Coating for Steel: Electrostatically applied and oven cured polyester powder over electrostatic zinc coating. N. Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) Coating: Ultraviolet (UV) stabilized and mold-resistant; slip-resistant finish; prime parts to be coated with clear acrylic thermosetting solution, and preheat prior to dipping in liquid PVC. 1. Thickness: 0.08 inch (2 mm), minimum, plus/minus 0.02 inch (0.5 mm). 2. Hardness: 85 durometer Shore A,when tested in accordance with ASTM D2240. O. Concrete: As specified in Section 03 30 00. PART 3- EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verify that playground area has been graded to subgrade elevations required and that excess soil, rocks, and debris have been removed. B. Verifythat playground equipment footings have been installed in proper locations and at proper elevations. C. Verify location of underground utilities and facilities in playground area; damage to underground utilities and facilities will be repaired at Contractor's expense. 3.02 PREPARATION A. Stake location of playground elements, including Use Zone perimeters, perimeter of protective surfacing, access and egress points, hard surfaces, walls, fences, and structures, and planting locations. B. Stake layout of entire Use Zone perimeter before starting any work and before subbase under resilient surfacing is laid. 1. Verify that Use Zone perimeters do not overlap hard surfaces, whether currently installed or not. 2. Verify that Use Zones are free of obstructions that would extend into protective surfacing. 3. If conflicts or obstructions exist, notify Architect. 4. Do not proceed until revised drawings have been provided, showing corrected layout, and obstructions have been removed. 3.03 INSTALLATION A. Coordinate work with preparation for and installation of protective surfacing specified in Section 32 18 16.13; install protective surfacing after playground equipment installation. B. Install in accordance with CPSC Pub. No. 325, ASTM F1487, manufacturer's instructions, and requirements of authorities having jurisdiction (AHJ). C. Anchor equipment securely below bottom elevation of resilient surfacing layer. D. Install without sharp points, edges or protrusions, entanglement hazards, pinch, crush,or shear points. E. Do not modify play events on site without written approval of manufacturer. PLAYGROUND EQUIPMENT 11 68 13-6/8 Commodore Park- Phase 1 -#23173 [Addendum 02]August 27, 2025 F. Install required signage if not factory-installed. 3.04 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Obtain the services of the equipment manufacturer's field representative to review the finished installation for compliance with specified requirements and with design criteria to the extent known to the Contractor; submit report of field review. B. Owner and Owner's representative will inspect playground equipment after installation to verify that playground meets specified design safety and accessibility requirements. C. Repair or replace rejected work until compliance is achieved. 3.05 CLEANING A. Restore adjacent existing areas that have been damaged from the construction. B. Clean playground equipment of construction materials, dirt, stains, filings, and blemishes due to shipment or installation; clean in accordance with manufacturer's instructions,using cleaning agents as recommended by manufacturer. C. Clean playground area of excess construction materials, debris, and waste. D. Remove excess and waste material and dispose of off-site in accordance with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction (AHJ). 3.06 PROTECTION A. Protect installed products until Date of Substantial Completion. B. Replace damaged products before Date of Substantial Completion. 3.07 SCHEDULES PLAYGROUND EQUIPMENT SCHEDULE KEYNOTE MODEL MANUFACTURER DESCRIPTION COMMENTS A PAR3003 KOMPAN 2-5 YR WELCOME SIGN VERIFY EXACT LOCATION B ELE400024 KOMPAN SPINNER BOWL COLOR TO BE SELECTED C NR0543 KOMPAN EXPLORER SHIP,MEDIUM OPTIONAL PLASTIC SLIDE D NRC60201 KOMPAN TRIPPLE WONDER PLAY PANEL E PAR3003 KOMPAN 5-12 YR WELCOME SIGN VERIFY EXACT LOCATION F NR0619 KOMPAN MUSIC STATION G NR0564 KOMPAN PROPELLER PLANE ACCENT COLORSTO MATCH SHIP (2)STANDARD SEATS,(1)47"ROPS NEST,(1) H NR0925 KOMPAN SWING FRAME-5 SEAT BABY SEAT DYNAMO HUMPBACK WHALE(GFRC OVER I NP-TCO23 PLAYGROUNDS STEEL FRAME) 1 CRP201301 KOMPAN TRANSFER PODIUM TRANSFER TO PROPELLER PLANE END OF SECTION 1168 13 PLAYGROUND EQUIPMENT 11 68 13-7/8 Commodore Park- Phase 1 -#23173 [Addendum 02]August 27, 2025 SECTION 1168 33 -ATHLETIC FIELD EQUIPMENT PART 1-GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Outdoor basketball equipment. B. Tennis court equipment. C. Pickleball court equipment. 1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A. Section 03 30 00-Cast-in-Place Concrete: Footings for field equipment. 1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. ASTM A123/A123M -Standard Specification for Zinc(Hot-Dip Galvanized) Coatings on Iron and Steel Products; 2017. B. ASTM A135/A135M -Standard Specification for Electric-Resistance-Welded Steel Pipe; 2021. C. ASTM A500/A500M - Standard Specification for Cold-Formed Welded and Seamless Carbon Steel Structural Tubing in Rounds and Shapes; 2023. D. ASTM A513/A513M - Standard Specification for Electric-Resistance-Welded Carbon and Alloy Steel Mechanical Tubing; 2020a. E. ASTM 1326/1326M - Standard Specification for Aluminum-Alloy Sand Castings; 2018, with Editorial Revision. F. ASTM 13108/13108M - Standard Specification for Aluminum-Alloy Permanent Mold Castings; 2019. G. ASTM B179-Standard Specification for Aluminum Alloys in Ingot and Molten Forms for Castings from All Casting Processes; 2018. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. See Section 0130 00-Administrative Requirements,for submittal procedures. B. Product Data: Provide athletic field equipment manufacturer's product data indicating materials of construction, compliance with specified standards, installation procedures, and necessary safety limitations. C. Shop Drawings: Submit detailed scale drawings showing athletic field equipment and perimeter layout. 1. Indicate locations and dimensions of footings and anchorage points. ATHLETIC FIELD EQUIPMENT 11 68 33- 1/5 Commodore Park Improvements-Phase 1 -#23173 July 3, 2025 2. Identify mounting elevations in relation to fixed survey point on site, and subgrade elevation. D. Samples: Submit color chart for each item that color must be selected showing full range of colors and finishes. E. Maintenance Data: Submit manufacturer's recommended maintenance instructions and list of replaceable parts for each athletic field equipment item, along with supplier's address and phone number. F. Executed Warranty. 1.05 DELIVERY,STORAGE,AND HANDLING A. Deliver, handle, and store equipment on project site in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations. B. Store materials in a dry, covered area, and elevated above grade. 1.06 WARRANTY A. See Section 0178 00-Closeout Submittals, for additional warranty requirements. B. Provide minimum one year manufacturer warranty for athletic field equipment. Provide minimum five year manufacturer warranty for tennis and pickleball posts. Provide life time manufacturer warranty against breakage of fan aluminum basketball backboards. Complete forms in Owner's name and register with manufacturer. PART 2- PRODUCTS 2.01 ATHLETIC FIELD EQUIPMENT-GENERAL A. Mount supporting posts in concrete footings, unless otherwise indicated, refer to Section 03 30 00 for additional concrete footing installation requirements. 2.02 OUTDOOR BASKETBALL EQUIPMENT A. Outdoor Basketball Support Post: Galvanized steel support post, with 4-1/2 inch (89 mm) diameter. 1. Gooseneck style with 5 feet(1.22 m) extension and 18 inch (457 mm)to 24 inch (610 mm) radius. 2. Cap top of post to protect from weather. 3. Anchor post in concrete footing; provide lug in support post to prevent rotation in footing. B. Backboard: Anchored to support post or extension arms. 1. Fan shaped cast aluminum backboard with perimeter flange and reinforcing ribs, 54 inch by 39 inch (1372 mm by 991 mm) overall size. ATHLETIC FIELD EQUIPMENT 11 68 33-2/5 Commodore Park Improvements-Phase 1 -#23173 July 3, 2025 2. Color and Finish: Orange with powder coat finish,with contrast colored target and border lines. 3. Lifetime Warranty: Against breakage of fan aluminum basketball backboards. C. Goal: Anchored to mounting plate through backboard to support post or extension arms. 1. Heavy duty stationary goal with nylon net. 2. Color and Finish: Orange powder coat. 3. Fabric Net: White braided nylon. 2.03 TENNIS COURT EQUIPMENT A. Outdoor Tennis Uprights: Single piece uprights, 60 inch (1.52 m) long of galvanized steel and 3 inch (76 mm) O.D. with net lacing rods and bottom pin to set at 42 inch (50.8 mm) height with remaining 18 inch (457 mm) of upright mounted in ground sleeve. 1. Provide cast aluminum cap with cable guide pins to close top of uprights. 2. Provide winch post on one side with internal cable length adjustment using removable handle, and internal net attachment in fixed post on other side. 3. Ground Sleeve: Polyvinyl chloride (PVC) pipe with 3 inch (76 mm) inside dimension and 24 inch (610 mm) long with debris trap at bottom. 4. Color and Finish: Black powder coat. B. Tennis Net: Polyethylene cord with 0.12 inch (3.0 mm) thick hollow braid, 36 ounce (1.0 kg) single layer vinyl headband, 18 ounce (0.5 kg) coated vinyl side and bottom tapes with brass grommets; vinyl coated galvanized cable at top and 1/2 inch (12.7 mm) diameter fiberglass dowels at each end. 1. Center Strap: Heavy-duty polyester webbing with black oxide coated brass slide buckles, nickel-plated double end snap with reinforced ends. 2. Center Ground Anchor: Galvanized steel tubing, 1-1/2 inch (38 mm) diameter and 9 inch (229 mm) long with stainless steel pin to attach to center strap, and mounted in concrete footing. 2.04 PICKLEBALL COURT EQUIPMENT A. Outdoor Pickleball Uprights: Single piece uprights, 54 inch (1.37 m) long of galvanized steel and 3 inch (76 mm) O.D. with net lacing rods. Mounted post sits 36 inches above the court surface. 1. Provide cast aluminum cap with cable guide pins to close top of uprights. 2. Internal wind self-locking gear mechanism. 3. Ground Sleeve: Polyvinyl chloride (PVC) pipe with 3 inch (76 mm) diameter inside dimension and 24 inch (610 mm) long with debris trap at bottom. 4. Color and Finish: Black powder coat. ATHLETIC FIELD EQUIPMENT 11 68 33-3/5 Commodore Park Improvements-Phase 1 -#23173 July 3, 2025 B. Pickleball Net: 1-3/4 inch square mesh, Polyethylene cord with 0.12 inch (3.0 mm)thick hollow braid, 65 ounce 2-ply vinyl coated headband, coated vinyl side and bottom tapes with brass grommets; vinyl coated galvanized cable at top and 1/2 inch (12.7 mm) diameter fiberglass dowels at each end. 2.05 MATERIALS A. Steel Pipe and Tube: Complying with ASTM A135/A135M, ASTM A500/A500M, or ASTM A513/A513M; hot-dip galvanized and free of excess weld and spatter. 1. Tensile Strength: 45,000 psi (310 MPa), minimum. 2. Yield Point: 33,000 psi (225 MPa), minimum. 3. Galvanizing: Hot-dip metal components in zinc after fabrication, in accordance with ASTM A123/A123M; remove tailings and sharp protrusions and burnish edges. B. Cast Aluminum: ASTM 1326/1326M,ASTM 13108/13108M, or ASTM B179. C. Powder Coating for Steel: Electrostatically applied and oven cured polyester powder over electrostatic zinc coating. PART 3- EXECUTION 3.01 PREPARATION A. Stake location of athletic field equipment elements, including necessary athletic field perimeters, surfacing, access and egress points, hard surfaces, walls,fences, and/or structures. B. Stake layout of athletic field equipment perimeter in accordance with approved shop drawings before starting any work. 1. Verify that athletic field perimeters do not overlap hard surfaces, whether currently installed or not. 2. Verify that athletic fields are free of obstructions. 3. If conflicts or obstructions are found, notify Architect. 4. Do not proceed with this work until revised drawings have been provided, showing corrected layout, and that any obstructions have been removed or corrections to layout have been made. 3.02 INSTALLATION A. Install concrete footings as indicated on the drawings. B. Install athletic field equipment in accordance with manufacturer's instructions, and rules and regulations of specified athletic association indicated for this work. C. Install backboards and posts plumb, level, and rigid using manufacturer provided attachment hardware, and ensure backstops are accurately positioned and free of vibrations. ATHLETIC FIELD EQUIPMENT 11 68 33-4/5 Commodore Park Improvements-Phase 1 -#23173 July 3, 2025 D. Install athletic field equipment without sharp points, edges, or protrusions; entanglement hazards or pinch, crush,or shear points. 3.03 CLEANING A. Clean athletic field equipment of construction materials, dirt, stains, filings, and blemishes due to shipment or installation; clean in accordance with manufacturer's instructions,using cleaning agents as recommended by manufacturer. B. Clean athletic field area of excess construction materials, debris, and waste. C. Remove excess and waste material and dispose of off-site in accordance with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction. 3.04 PROTECTION A. Protect installed products until Date of Substantial Completion. B. Replace damaged products before Date of Substantial Completion. END OF SECTION 1168 33 ATHLETIC FIELD EQUIPMENT 11 68 33-5/5 Commodore Park Improvements-Phase 1 -#23173 July 3, 2025 SECTION 13 3419 - METAL BUILDING SYSTEMS PART 1-GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Manufacturer-engineered,shop-fabricated structural steel building frame. B. Metal roof panels including drip edges, eave, rake and miscellaneous trim. 1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A. Section 01 41 19-WINDSTORM CONSTRUCTION REQUIREMENTS. B. Section 05 50 00- METAL FABRICATIONS. C. Section 07 62 00-SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM. D. Section 07 92 00 - JOINT SEALANTS: Sealing joints between accessory components and wall system. E. Section 09 96 00- HIGH PERFORMANCE COATINGS. 1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. AISC 360-Specification for Structural Steel Buildings; 2022, with Errata (2025). B. ASTM A36/A36M -Standard Specification for Carbon Structural Steel; 2019. C. ASTM A123/A123M -Standard Specification for Zinc(Hot-Dip Galvanized) Coatings on Iron and Steel Products; 2017. D. ASTM A153/A153M - Standard Specification for Zinc Coating (Hot-Dip) on Iron and Steel Hardware; 2023. E. ASTM A500/A500M - Standard Specification for Cold-Formed Welded and Seamless Carbon Steel Structural Tubing in Rounds and Shapes; 2023. F. ASTM A501/A501M-Standard Specification for Hot-Formed Welded and Seamless Carbon Steel Structural Tubing; 2021. G. ASTM A529/A529M - Standard Specification for High-Strength Carbon-Manganese Steel of Structural Quality; 2019. H. ASTM A653/A653M - Standard Specification for Steel Sheet, Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) or Zinc- Iron Alloy-Coated (Galvannealed) by the Hot-Dip Process; 2023. I. ASTM A792/A792M - Standard Specification for Steel Sheet, 55% Aluminum-Zinc Alloy-Coated by the Hot-Dip Process; 2023. J. ASTM C920-Standard Specification for Elastomeric Joint Sealants; 2018. K. ASTM C1107/C1107M - Standard Specification for Packaged Dry, Hydraulic-Cement Grout (Nonshrink); 2020. L. ASTM F1554-Standard Specification for Anchor Bolts, Steel, 36, 55, and 105-ksi Yield Strength; 2020. M. ASTM F3125/F3125M - Standard Specification for High Strength Structural Bolts and Assemblies, Steel and Alloy Steel, Heat Treated, Inch Dimensions 120 ksi, 144 ksi, and 150 ksi Minimum Tensile Strength, and Metric Dimensions 830 MPa and 1040 MPa Minimum Tensile Strength; 2025. METAL BUILDING SYSTEMS 13 34 19- 1 Commodore Park—Phase 1-#23173 [Addendum No.021 August 27, 2025 N. AWS A2.4-Standard Symbols for Welding, Brazing, and Nondestructive Examination; 2020. O. AWS 132.1/132.11M - Specification for Welding Procedure and Performance Qualification; 2021, with Errata (2023). P. AWS D1.1/D1.1M -Structural Welding Code -Steel; 2020, with Errata (2023). Q. IAS AC472 -Accreditation Criteria for Inspection Programs for Manufacturers of Metal Building Systems; 2024. R. MBMA(MBSM) - Metal Building Systems Manual; 2024. S. SSPC-Paint 20-Zinc-Rich Coating (Type I - Inorganic, and Type II -Organic); 2019. 1.04 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS A. Preinstallation Meeting: Convene one week before starting work of this section. 1.05 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Provide data on profiles, component dimensions, fasteners and roof panels. B. Shop Drawings: Indicate assembly dimensions, locations of structural members, connections, attachments, openings, and loads; wall and roof system dimensions, panel layout, general construction details, anchors and methods of anchorage, and installation; framing anchor bolt settings, sizes, locations from datum, and foundation loads; indicate welded connections with AWS A2.4 welding symbols; indicate net weld lengths; provide professional seal and signature. C. Samples: Submit two samples of precoated metal panels for each color selected, 3 by 5 inch (76 by 127 mm) in size illustrating color and texture of finish. D. Manufacturer's Instructions: Indicate preparation requirements, anchor bolt placement. E. Erection Drawings: Indicate members by label, assembly sequence, and temporary erection bracing. F. Designer's Qualification Statement. G. Manufacturer's Qualification Statement: Provide documentation showing metal building manufacturer is accredited under IAS AC472. 1. Include statement that manufacturer designs and fabricates metal building system as integrated components and assemblies, including but not limited to primary structural members, secondary members, joints, roof, and wall cladding components specifically designed to support and transfer loads and properly assembled components form a complete or partial building shell. H. Erector's Qualification Statement. I. Welders' Qualification Statement: Welders' certificates in accordance with AWS 132.1/62.11M and dated no more than 12 months before start of scheduled welding work. J. Project Record Documents: Record actual locations of concealed components and utilities. 1.06 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Designer Qualifications: Design structural components, develop shop drawings, and perform shop and site work under direct supervision of a Professional Structural Engineer experienced in design of this type of work. 1. Design Engineer Qualifications: Licensed in the State of Texas. METAL BUILDING SYSTEMS 13 34 19-2 Commodore Park—Phase 1-#23173 [Addendum No.021 August 27, 2025 2. Cooperate with regulatory agency or authorities having jurisdiction (AHJ), and provide data as requested. B. Perform work in accordance with AISC 360, MBMA (MBSM), and "Low Rise Building Systems Manual.". C. Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in the manufacture of products similar to those required for this project. 1. Not less than 10 years of documented experience. 2. Accredited by IAS in accordance with IAS AC472. D. Erector Qualifications: Company specializing in performing the work of this section with minimum 10 years' experience and approved by the manufacturer. E. Welder Qualifications: Welding processes and welding operators qualified in accordance with AWS D1.1/D1.1M and no more than 12 months before start of scheduled welding work. 1.07 WARRANTY A. See Section 00 72 00-General Conditions for additional warranty requirements. B. Correct defective Work within a two year period after Date of Substantial Completion. C. Provide 20 year manufacturer warranty for water tightness. 1. Include coverage for exterior pre-finished surfaces to cover pre-finished color coat against chipping, cracking or crazing, blistering, peeling, chalking, or fading. Include coverage for weather tightness of building enclosure elements after installation. PART 2- PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. Metal Buildings Systems: 1. Alliance Steel Building Systems; www.allianceol<c.com. 2. Butler Manufacturing Company: www.butlermfg.com. 3. Ceco Building Systems: www.cecobuildings.com. 4. Chief Buildings: www.chiefbuildings.com. 5. Kirby Building Systems, a Nucor Company:www.kirbybuildingsystems.com. 6. Metallic Building Systems: www.metaIlic.com. 7. Nucor Building Systems: www.nucorbuildingsystems.com. 8. Red Dot Buildings: www.reddotbuildings.com. 9. Star Building Systems; www.starbuildings.com. 10. VP Buildings: www.vp.com. 11. Substitutions: See Section 00 72 00-General Conditions. 2.02 ASSEMBLIES A. Single Span Tapered beam. B. Primary Framing: Rigid frame of rafter beams with overhang and wind bracing, hot-dipped galvanized. C. Secondary Framing: Purlins, Girts, Eave struts, Flange bracing, and Clips, and other items detailed, galvanized. METAL BUILDING SYSTEMS 13 34 19-3 Commodore Park—Phase 1-#23173 [Addendum No.021 August 27, 2025 D. Roof System: Preformed metal panels oriented parallel to slope, with sub-girt framing/anchorage assembly, and accessory components. E. Roof Slope: 1-1/2 inches in 12 inches (1/8). 2.03 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Design structural members to withstand dead load, and design loads due to pressure and suction of wind calculated in accordance with applicable code. Refer to Structural General Notes. B. Provide drainage to exterior for water entering or condensation occurring within wall or roof system. C. Permit movement of components without buckling, failure of joint seals, undue stress on fasteners or other detrimental effects,when subject to temperature range of 120 degrees F(49 degrees Q. D. Size and fabricate roof systems free of distortion or defects detrimental to appearance or performance. 2.04 MATERIALS- FRAMING A. Structural Steel Members: ASTM A36/A36M or ASTM A529/A529M Grade 50. B. Structural Tubing:ASTM A500/A500M Grade B cold-formed or ASTM A501/A501M hot-formed. C. Plate or Bar Stock:ASTM A529/A529M, Grade 50. D. Anchor Bolts:ASTM F1554, Grade 105, Class 1A,with hot dip type for protective coating. E. Bolts, Nuts, and Washers:ASTM F3125/F3125M,Type 1; galvanized to ASTM A153/A153M. F. Welding Materials: Perform in accordance with AWS D1.1/D1.1M. G. Primer: SSPC-Paint 20 zinc rich. H. Grout: ASTM C1107/C1107M; Non-shrink; premixed compound consisting of non-metallic aggregate, cement, water reducing and plasticizing agents. 1. Minimum Compressive Strength at 28 Days: 7,000 pounds per square inch (48 MPa). 2.05 MATERIALS-WALLS AND ROOF A. Steel Sheet: Designation SS (structural steel), Grade 50 (340),with G90/Z275 coating. B. Steel Sheet: ASTM A792/A792M aluminum-zinc alloy coated to AZ 60. C. Joint Seal Gaskets: Manufacturer's standard type. D. Fasteners: Manufacturer's standard type,stainless steel,finish to match adjacent surfaces when exterior exposed. E. Bituminous Paint:Asphaltic type. F. Sealant: ASTM C920, elastomeric sealant with movement capability of at least plus/minus 50 percent; 100 percent silicone; for exposed applications, match adjacent colors as closely as possible. G. Trim, Closure Pieces, Caps, Flashings, Fascias and Infill: Same material, thickness and finish as exterior sheets; brake formed to required profiles. METAL BUILDING SYSTEMS 13 34 19-4 Commodore Park—Phase 1-#23173 [Addendum No.021 August 27, 2025 2.06 FABRICATION - FRAMING A. Fabricate members in accordance with AISC 360 for plate, bar,tube,or rolled structural shapes. B. Anchor Bolts: Formed with straight shank, assembled with template for casting into concrete. 2.07 FABRICATION - ROOF PANELS A. Roofing: Minimum 24 gage metal thickness, standing seam profile, concealed fasteners. B. Girts/Purlins: Rolled formed structural shape to receive roofing sheet, 16 gage minimum. C. Internal and External Corners: Same material thickness and finish as adjacent material, profile brake formed to required angles. Back brace mitered internal corners with 24 gage thick sheet. D. Flashings, Closure Pieces, Fascia, Infills, Caps, and drips: Same material and finish as adjacent material, profile to suit system. E. Fasteners: To maintain load requirements and weather tight installation, same finish as cladding, non-corrosive type. 2.08 FABRICATION -GUTTERS AND DOWNSPOUTS A. Refer to Section 07 62 00-Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim. 2.09 FINISHES A. Framing Members: Clean, prepare, and galvanize to ASTM A123/A123M. Do not prime surfaces to be field welded. B. Exterior Surfaces of Roof Components and Accessories: Precoated enamel on steel of two-coat fluoropolymer finish, color as selected from manufacturer's standard range. C. Interior Surfaces of Roof Components and Accessories: Precoated enamel on steel of two-coat fluoropolymer finish, color as selected from manufacturer's standard range. PART 3- EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verify that foundation, floor slab, mechanical and electrical utilities, and placed anchors are in correct position. 3.02 ERECTION -FRAMING A. Erect framing in accordance with AISC 360. B. Provide for erection and wind loads. Provide temporary bracing to maintain structure plumb and in alignment until completion of erection and installation of permanent bracing. Locate braced bays as indicated. C. Set base plates with non-shrink grout to achieve full plate bearing. D. Do not field cut or alter structural members without approval. E. After erection, prime welds, abrasions, and surfaces not galvanized. 3.03 ERECTION -ROOF PANELS A. Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. METAL BUILDING SYSTEMS 13 34 19-5 Commodore Park—Phase 1-#23173 [Addendum No.021 August 27, 2025 B. Exercise care when cutting prefinished material to ensure cuttings do not remain on finish surface. C. Fasten cladding system to structural supports, aligned level and plumb. D. Locate end laps over supports. Place side laps over bearing. E. Use concealed fasteners. F. Install sealant and gaskets, providing a weather tight installation. 3.04 TOLERANCES A. Framing Members: 1/4 inch (6 mm)from level; 1/8 inch (3 mm)from plumb. B. Siding and Roofing: 1/8 inch (3 mm) from true position. END OF SECTION 13 34 19 METAL BUILDING SYSTEMS 13 34 19-6 Commodore Park—Phase 1-#23173 [Addendum No.021 August 27, 2025 SECTION 26 06 00 GROUNDING PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY: A. Section Includes: 1. Solid grounding of electrical systems, equipment, machine frames, enclosures, appliances and structures. 2. Basic requirements for grounding for protection of life, equipment, circuits, and systems. 3. Grounding requirements specified in this Section may be supplemented in other sections of these Specifications. 1.02 REFERENCES: A. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM): 1. B3 Standard Specification for Soft or Annealed Copper Wire. 2. B8 Standard Specification for Concentric-Lay-Stranded Copper Conductors, Hard, Medium-Hard or Soft. 3. B33 Standard Specification for Tinned Soft or Annealed Copper Wire for Electrical Purposes. B. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA): 1. 70 National Electrical Code 2. 78 Lightning Protection Code C. Underwriters Laboratories Inc. (UL) 1. 467 UL Standard for Safety Grounding and Bonding Equipment. 1.03 SUBMITTALS — FOR APPROVAL: A. Procedure: Submit in accordance with Section 013000 and 260100. B. Product Data: Submit for grounding conductors, ground rods, clamps, connectors, wells and insulating materials. 1.04 SUBMITTALS — RECORD DATA: GROUNDING 26 06 00-1/5 Commodore Park-Phase 1 -#23173 (100% Pre-NOA)July 3, 2025 A. Submit in accordance with Section 013000. B. Product Data: Approved, as furnished data as listed above. C. Test Reports 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE: A. Items provided under this Section shall be listed or labeled by UL. B. Regulatory Requirements: 1. National Electrical Code (NEC): Provide components and installation as required by National Fire Protection Association (NFPA) 70, Article 250. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 GENERAL: A. Provide products in quantities, sizes and ratings to comply with the NEC or the design drawings, whichever requirements are more stringent. B. Conductor Materials: Copper C. Connector Materials: Copper or bronze, tin-plated where required for corrosion resistance. 2.02 CONDUCTORS: A. Grounding Electrode Conductor: Soft drawn copper, Class B stranded per ASTM B-8, 600 volt TW, THW or THWN insulation. Size per NEC 250. B. Equipment Grounding Conductor: Soft drawn copper, Class B stranded per ASTM B-8 except that conductor sizes Nos. 12 and 10 AWG used in lighting and receptacle branch circuits may be solid conductor. All conductors shall have 600 volt, TW, THW or THWN insulation. C. Grounding Grid Conductor: Medium hard drawn bare copper, Class B stranded per ASTM B-8, No. 210 AWG or as otherwise indicated on the drawings. D. Color Code: Insulation color shall be green, except that sizes No. 2 AWG and larger may be black with green colored tape spirally applied over all visible surfaces within enclosures. 2.03 WIRE CONNECTORS: GROUNDING 26 06 00-2/5 Commodore Park-Phase 1 -#23173 (100% Pre-NOA)July 3, 2025 A. Terminal Lugs: Copper alloy, tin-plated, compression type, Burndy type, YA, NEMA 1 hole for sizes No. 6 through No. 1/0 AWG. Burndy type YGHA, NEMA 2 hole pad for sizes No. 2/0 AWG and larger. B. Split Bolt Connectors: Burndy SERVIT, type KS C. Taps and Splices: 1. Grounding Grid below Grade: Exothermic type (Cadweld) or compression type (Burndy Hyground). 2. Above Grade: Compression type. 2.04 CONDUIT CONNECTORS: A. Conduit Clamps: Burndy type GAR or GD. B. Grounding Bushings: 0-Z/GEDNEY 2.05 GROUNDING ELECTRODES: A. Ground Rods: 1/4 inch diameter, 10 feet long, copper clad steel with high strength sheath, molten welded to core. B. Rod Connectors: 1. Exothermic type: Cadweld 2. Mechanical type: Burndy type GAR or GD C. Test Wells: (Not Required) 2.06 INSULATING MATERIALS: A. Tape: Scotch 33+ vinyl plastic. B. Mastic Pads: Scotch EZ— Seal PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION: A. General: 1. Provide grounding of systems, equipment and structures in accordance with NEC Article 250, the requirements of the authority having jurisdiction and the design drawings. GROUNDING 26 06 00-3/5 Commodore Park-Phase 1 -#23173 (100% Pre-NOA)July 3, 2025 B. Service Entrance: 1. Provide a main bonding jumper between the service neutral conductor, the service equipment ground bus and the service equipment enclosure. 2. Provide a grounding electrode conductor to connect the service neutral conductor to the main grounding electrode. C. Building Steel and Piping: 1. Provide bonding jumper from the service neutral to the building steel and metallic piping systems. E. Equipment Grounding: 1. Provide a green insulated equipment grounding conductor in all branch circuits and feeder conduits. Size conductor in accordance with NEC 250 unless otherwise indicated on the drawings. 2. Connect the equipment grounding conductor to panelboard or switchgear ground bus and to all metallic raceways, outlet boxes, lighting fixtures, equipment enclosures, appliances and motor frames. 3. Where metallic raceways are installed, both the raceway and the internal equipment grounding conductor shall be utilized for equipment grounding. F. Grounding Grid: 1. Excavate and backfill for main grounding grid conductor. Locate conductors at least 3 feet away from foundation. Conductor depth shall be 18 to 24 inches below finished grade. 2. Install ground rods vertically in undisturbed soil so that the top of the rod is 18 to 24 inches below finished grade, except that in test wells the top of rods shall be 6 to 8 inches below grade. Space rods a minimum of 10 feet apart. 3. Make underground cable to cable connections using either exothermic or compression type connections. 4. Provide test wells where indicated on the drawings. Install top of test well flush with finished grade or pavement. Use only bolted type rod connectors in test wells. 5. In addition to equipment grounding conductor connections, make connections from the grounding grid to the following items using green, insulated conductors: GROUNDING 26 06 00-4/5 Commodore Park-Phase 1 -#23173 (100% Pre-NOA)July 3, 2025 a. Electrical equipment ground busses b. Electrical equipment enclosures C. Motor frames d. Steel support frames for electrical equipment e. Building steel frame 6. Grounding conductors stubbed up from below grade shall be enclosed in a 1- inch Schedule 40 PVC protective sleeve. G. Conduit: 1. Provide grounding bushings where metallic conduits connect to non-metallic enclosures or stub-up into open-bottom, floor-mounted enclosures. 2. Provide conduit grounding clamps where metallic conduit stub-ups are connected to non-metallic underground conduits. H. Testing: 1. Perform a "Fall of Potential" grounding test as described by ANSI/IEEE Standard 81. a. Provide ground resistance measurements prior to and after the grounding electrode system is installed. b. Ground resistance shall be 5 ohms or less. c. Provide additional grounding electrodes a minimum of 10 feet apart to achieve 5 ohms or less. d. Provide a signed grounding report to the Engineer and Owner on the Contractor's letterhead with date, time, and resistance measurements of when the tests were completed. END OF SECTION 26 06 00 GROUNDING 26 06 00-5/5 Commodore Park-Phase 1 -#23173 (100% Pre-NOA)July 3, 2025 SECTION 26 07 50 ELECTRICAL IDENTIFICATION PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY: A. Section Includes: 1. Equipment nameplates and labels 2. Warning and caution signs 3. Operational instruction signs 4. Identification labeling of conduits, cables B. Related Sections: 1. Additional identification requirements are specified in other Sections of Division 26. 1.02 REFERENCES: A. Code of Federal Regulations (CFR) 1. 29CFR1910.145 Specification for Accident Prevention Signs B. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA) 1. 70 National Electrical Code 1.03 SUBMITTALS FOR APPROVAL: A. Procedure: Submit in accordance with Section 013000 and 260100. B. Product Data: Submit for each type of product used on project. C. Schedules: Nameplate engraving schedule. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 ELECTRICAL IDENTIFICATION PRODUCTS: A. Engraved Nameplates and Signs: ELECTRICAL IDENTIFICATION 26 07 50-1/4 Commodore Park-Phase 1 -#23173 (100% Pre-NOA)July 3, 2025 1. Material: 3 ply plastic laminate, matte-finish, 0.125 inch thickness, white with black center core except that material used for warning signs shall be red with white center core. Provide punched mounting holes for mechanical fasteners. 2. Size: Minimum size to be 1 inch by 2.5 inches, rectangular shape with square corners. 3. Engraving: Accurately align lettering and engrave into center core. Lettering shall be normal block style. Character size shall be 3/8 inch high for grouped equipment and load designation and % inch for individual equipment, loads and devices. B. Warning Signs: 1. Fiberglass reinforced polyester, non-adhesive backed, indoor-outdoor with punched mounting holes, Brady B-120. 2. Polyester overlaminated with plastic coating, adhesive-backed, indoor-outdoor, Brady B-302. 3. High Voltage warning signs to read "Danger-High Voltage-Keep Out." 4. Provide identical signs for each application. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION: A. General: 1. Provide labels and signs in accordance with NEC requirements. 2. Install labels and signs at locations for best convenience of viewing without interference with operation and maintenance of equipment. 3. All nameplates and signs used on the project shall be of similar size, style and appearance. B. Equipment Nameplates: 1. Provide engraved identification nameplates for each of the following: a. Panelboards b. Circuit breakers C. Switches d. Contactors e. Pull and junction boxes 2. Nameplate legends shall include the equipment identification number as indicated on the design drawings and an appropriate service description. ELECTRICAL IDENTIFICATION 26 07 50-2/4 Commodore Park-Phase 1 -#23173 (100% Pre-NOA)July 3, 2025 3. Nameplates for switchgear assemblies, panelboards, and separately enclosed breakers, switches, starters and contactors shall include the operating voltage. 4. Attach engraved nameplates to equipment with self-tapping, stainless steel, round head screws. Use adhesive attachment only where the substrate material is not suitable for screw attachment. C. Warning Signs: 1. Voltage warning signs where required by the NEC, where indicated on drawing and as follows: a. Equipment Rooms: On all doors to equipment rooms containing equipment or circuits over 600 volts or containing exposed live parts. Minimum size shall be 7 inches x 10 inches. b. Pull Boxes: On removable covers for all pull and junction boxes containing circuits over 600 volts. C. Equipment: On front and rear compartment access doors and covers enclosing live parts. Signs provided as part of equipment that meet these requirements are acceptable. d. Fences: On each gate and on each side of fences that enclose equipment or circuits over 600 volts or exposed live parts. Minimum size shall be 10 inches by 14 inches. Locate at intervals not exceeding 30 feet. 2. Multiple Source Signs: a. Where enclosures contain voltages from more than one source which are not interrupted by opening the local unit disconnecting means, provide an engraved nameplate bearing the following (or similar) legend: "WARNING— MULTIPLE ELECTRICAL SOURCES EXIST WITHIN THIS ENCLOSURE" OR "WARNING—VOLTAGE MAY BE PRESENT WITH DISCONNECT SWITCH OPEN" 3. Hazardous Operation: a. Where operation of an electric switch or control device may create an unsafe or undesirable operating condition, provide an engraved plastic sign with appropriate warning statement. D. Multiple Services: ELECTRICAL IDENTIFICATION 26 07 50-3/4 Commodore Park-Phase 1 -#23173 (100% Pre-NOA)July 3, 2025 1. Where multiple services exist, provide each service disconnect with an additional sign which states the name and location of other service disconnects. E. Conduits: 1. Identify conduits at each termination and at all transitions from exposed to concealed or underground installation. 2. Mark conduits legibly with a permanent marker pen to indicate conduit per circuit number. F. Cables: 1. Identify cables in pull and junction boxes, vaults, manholes and where entering switchgear panelboard assembly. 2. Provide an engraved plastic nameplate or other suitable permanent tag for each cable or cable assembly. Attach with self-locking nylon cable tie. 3. Cable identification shall include circuit number and phase as indicated on drawings. END OF SECTION 26 07 50 ELECTRICAL IDENTIFICATION 26 07 50-4/4 Commodore Park-Phase 1 -#23173 (100% Pre-NOA)July 3, 2025 SECTION 26 12 30 WIRE & CABLE PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY: A. Section includes copper wire, cable, associated connectors, and termination hardware used on systems operating at 600 volts or less. 1.02 REFERENCES: A. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM) 1. B8 Concentric-Lay-Stranded Copper Conductor, Hard, Medium Hard, Or Soft. B. National Electrical Contractor Association (NECA) 1. Standard of Installation C. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA) 1. 70 National Electrical Code D. Underwriters Laboratories Inc. (UL) 1. 44 Rubber-Insulated Wires and Cables 2. 83 Thermoplastic-Insulated Wires and Cables 3. 486A Wire Connectors and Soldering Lugs for Use With Copper Conductors 4. 486C Splicing Wire Connectors 5. 510 Polyvinyl Chloride, Polyethylene and Rubber Insulating Tape 6. 1569 Metal-Clad Cables 1.03 SUBMITTALS — FOR APPROVAL: A. Procedures: Submit in accordance with Section 013000 and 260100. B. Product Data: Submit for each type of wire and cable, terminal lugs, connectors, and cable fittings. 1.04 SUBMITTALS — RECORD DATA: A. Procedure: Submit in accordance with Section 013000. B. Product Data: Approved, as furnished data as listed above. WIRE&CABLE 261230-1/6 Commodore Park-Phase 1 -#23173 (100% Pre-NOA)July 3, 2025 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE: A. Furnish wire, cable, associated connectors, and termination hardware bearing UL label. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 BUILDING WIRE: A. Single conductor, soft drawn, annealed copper conductor, Class B stranded except that sizes No. 10 AWG and smaller used for lighting and power branch circuits may be solid. Insulation shall be 600 volt, type THHN/THWN per UL 83 or type XHHW per UL 44. 2.02 TYPE MC CABLE: Metal Clad Cable type MC multi-conductor cabling as manufactured by AFC Cable Systems or equivalent having the following construction features: A. Conductor: Bare, soft annealed copper, Class B stranded per ASTM B-8. B. Insulation: Polypropylene tape assembly with 600 volt, 90°C (dry) type THHN insulation with printed number and color identification. C. Neutral conductor: White— 120v circuits; Gray—480Y277v circuits D. Grounding conductor: Green insulated copper ground conductor. E. Assembly: Three insulated conductors with grounding conductor, non-hygroscopic fillers and overall binder tape per UL 1569. F. Sheath: High strength, lightweight galvanized interlocking steel strip and color coded on the out side for easy identification. G. U.L rated 1569 2.03 CONNECTORS AND TERMINALS: A. Insulated Crimp Type Connectors and Terminals: Nylon insulated, Burndy INSULINK and INSULUG, or Thomas & Betts Sta-Kon. B. Split Bolts: High-conductivity copper alloy, Burndy SERVIT or Thomas & Betts Split- Bolt. C. Two Bolt Connectors: High-conductivity copper alloy, Burndy OKLIP, Type KVS or Blackburn 2BU. D. Compression Terminals: Copper, long barrel, Burndy HYLUG or Thomas & Betts Color-Keyed. WIRE&CABLE 261230-2/6 Commodore Park-Phase 1 -#23173 (100% Pre-NOA)July 3, 2025 E. Bolted Terminals: Cast copper alloy, Burndy QIKLUG or Thomas & Betts Locktite. F. Spring Wire Connectors: Insulated, twist-on type, Ideal Wire Nut or 3M Scotchlok. Push-in type connectors are prohibited. 2.04 CABLE TERMINATIONS: A. Type MC Cable: Steel set screw connectors 2.05 MISCELLANEOUS COMPONENTS: A. Tape: UL 510 1. Vinyl Plastic: 3M Scotch 33+ or Scotch 88. 2. Varnished Cambric (VC): 3M Irvington 2920. 3. Friction: Black friction tape. B. Pulling Lubricants: Ideal Yellow 77 or Polywater Type J. C. Wire Markers: 1. Individual Wires: Heat shrink, machine printed, Raychem. 2. Multi-Conductor Cables or Groups of Wires as a Cable: Nylon tie on marker, Thomas & Betts Nylon I.D. Ties, Ty-Raps. D. Wire and Cable Ties: Thomas & Betts Ty-Raps. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 APPLICATION: A. Wire and Cable: 1. THWN-THHN for power wiring through No. 250 AWG and control wiring in conduit. XHHW for sizes above No. 250 AWG in conduit. 2. TW or THW for equipment grounding conductor. 3. Type MC cable for fixture wipes no longer than 6' and in accordance with NEC Article 334. 4. No. 12 AWG minimum for power circuits and No. 14 AWG minimum for control circuits unless noted otherwise on drawings. B. Splices and Taps: 1. Use insulated spring wire connectors for lighting and receptacle branch circuits No. 10 AWG and smaller. Push-in type connectors are prohibited. 2. Use solderless pressure connectors for branch circuit conductors No. 8 AWG and larger. WIRE&CABLE 261230-3/6 Commodore Park-Phase 1 -#23173 (100% Pre-NOA)July 3, 2025 3. Do not make splices or taps in feeder circuits or control circuits. C. Terminals: 1. Use copper compression terminals, NEMA 1 hole for sizes No. 4 AWG and smaller, NEMA 2 hole for sizes No. 2 AWG and larger. 2. Use insulated, ring tongue terminals for signal and control conductors. 3.02 INSTALLATION: A. Install wire and cable in accordance with the NECA Standard of Installation. B. Installation in Conduit: 1. Swab conduits completely and thoroughly before pulling in conductors. 2. Pull all conductors into conduit at same time. 3. Use suitable wire pulling lubricant for building wire No. 4 AWG and larger. 4. Do not pull in conductors until conduit system is completed. Do not pull through boxes, fittings or enclosures where a change of conduit alignment or direction occurs. 5. Limit pulling tension to maximum values as recommended by manufacturer. 6. Do not combine circuits into a common conduit other than as indicated on the drawings. C. Direct Burial Cable: 1. Trench and backfill for direct burial cables. Minimum depth of installation shall be 24 inches. 2. Terminate and ground metallic cable sheath with suitable fittings. D. Compression Connectors and Terminals: 1. Install on wire and cable with approved tool and die to recommended compression pressure. Do not cut strands from conductors to fit lugs or terminals. E. Bolted Connectors and Terminals: 1. Torque to manufacturer's recommended foot-pounds for size and class of connector. 2. Where manufacturer's published torquing requirements are not indicated, tighten connectors and terminals to comply with UL 486A torque values. 3. Use galvanized steel bolts, nuts, split-lock washers and flat washers on terminal connections. WIRE&CABLE 261230-4/6 Commodore Park-Phase 1 -#23173 (100% Pre-NOA)July 3, 2025 F. Wiring in Enclosures: 1. Form and tie conductors in panelboards, cabinets, control panels, motor controllers, wireways, and wiring troughs in a neat and orderly manner. 2. Use Thomas & Betts wire and cable ties of appropriate size and type. 3. Limit spacing between ties to not more than 6 inches. G. Taping: 1. Above Ground and Dry Locations: Fill voids and irregularities with half-lapped layers of VC (two minimum) or electrical insulation putty. Insulate with three half-lapped layers of vinyl plastic and one half-layer of friction tape. 2. In damp or wet locations, wrap insulated spring wire connectors with 2 layers of vinyl plastic tape. 3.03 COLOR CODING: A. Power Wiring: Provide color coding for single and multi-conductor power circuits as follows: Voltage (PA 013 0C Neutral 240 volts and below Black Red Blue White 250 — 600 volts Brown Purple Yellow Gray 1. For specified insulation and jackets not manufactured with integral colors, use conductors with black insulation or jacket and color-coding tape. 2. Color code conductors entering boxes, troughs, cabinets, and other enclosures. 3. Color code conductors in wireways, trenches, and other locations where conductors are continuously accessible at intervals not exceeding 5 feet. B. Insulated Equipment Ground: Green. C. Isolated Ground conductor: Green with Yellow tracer. 3.04 WIRING IDENTIFICATION A. Control Circuits: Install a permanent wire label at each termination. Identifying numbers shall match approved schematic and wiring diagrams. B. Feeder and Branch Circuits: Install a permanent wire label at each termination. Identifying numbers shall include source panel designation and circuit number. 3.05 FIELD TESTS: A. Test conductors after installation is complete and prior to connection to equipment. WIRE&CABLE 261230-5/6 Commodore Park-Phase 1 -#23173 (100% Pre-NOA)July 3, 2025 B. Perform insulation resistance test on each conductor phase-to-ground with adjacent conductors grounded and test conductor disconnected from equipment. Applied potential shall be 1000 volts do for one minute. Minimum acceptable test values shall be 50 megohms. Investigate deviations in test values between adjacent phases. C. Verify tightness of bolted connections with a calibrated torque wrench. Torque values shall be terminal lug manufacturer's recommendations. END OF SECTION 26 12 30 WIRE&CABLE 261230-6/6 Commodore Park-Phase 1 -#23173 (100% Pre-NOA)July 3, 2025 SECTION 26 13 60 RACEWAYS PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY: A. Section Includes: 1. Rigid Galvanized Steel Conduit (RGS) 2. PVC-Coated Rigid Steel Conduit (CRGS) 3. Rigid Aluminum Conduit (RAC) 4. Electrical Metallic Tubing (EMT) 5. PVC Conduit (PVC) 6. Flexible Conduit 7. Associated Fittings 8. Wireways 9. Pull and Junction Boxes 1.02 REFERENCES: A. American National Standards Institute (ANSI): 1. C80.1 Rigid Steel Conduit—Zinc Coated 2. C80.3 Electrical Metallic Tubing —Zinc Coated 3. C80.5 Rigid Aluminum Conduit B. National Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA): 1. TC 2 Electrical Plastic Tubing (EPT) and Conduit (EPC-40 and EPC- 80) 2. TC 3 PVC Fitting for Use with Rigid PVC Conduit and Tubing 3. TC 13 Electrical Nonmetallic Tubing (ENT) 4. TC 14 Filament-Wound Reinforced Thermosetting Resin Conduit and Fittings. C. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA): 1. 70 National Electrical Code D. Underwriters Laboratories Inc. (UL): 1. 1 Flexible Metal Conduit 2. 5 Surface Metal Raceways and Fittings 3. 5A Nonmetallic Surface Raceways and Fittings 4. 6 Rigid Metal Conduit 5. 360 Liquid-Tight Flexible Steel Conduit 6. 514B Fittings for Conduit and Outlet Boxes 7. 797 Electrical Metallic Tubing 8. 870 Wireways, Auxiliary Gutters, and Associated Fittings RACEWAYS 26 13 60-1/8 Commodore Park-Phase 1 -#23173 (100% Pre-NOA)July 3, 2025 9. 886 Outlet Boxes and Fittings for Use in Hazardous (Classified) Locations 10. 1660 Liquid-Tight Flexible Nonmetallic Conduit 1.03 SUBMITTALS — FOR APPROVAL: A. Procedure: Submit in accordance with Section 013000 and 260100. B. Product Data: Submit for each type of conduit, fitting, connector, pull and junction box, and wireway used on the project. 1.04 SUBMITTALS — RECORD DATA: A. Procedure: Submit in accordance with Section 013000. B. Product Data: Approved, as furnished data as listed above. PART2 PRODUCTS 2.01 RIGID GALVANIZED STEEL (RGS): A. Conduit: Conduit including elbows, couplings, and nipples shall be standard weight zinc-coated steel, rigid threaded conduit; shall meet the requirements of ANSI C80.1; and shall be hot-dipped galvanized inside, outside and over threads and lacquered inside. B. Fittings: Conduit fittings and accessories for use with RGS conduit shall be cast malleable iron or ferrous alloy, hot-dipped galvanized or zinc-electro-plated and lacquered. Fittings shall have threaded hubs and gasketed covers. Fittings shall be the product of Crouse-Hinds, Appleton or Gedney or an equal. C. Boxes: Device and outlet boxes for use with RGS conduit shall be cast malleable iron, hot-dipped galvanized or zinc-electro-plated and lacquered. Boxes shall have threaded hubs and gasketed covers. Boxes shall be the product of Crouse-Hinds, Appleton, Gedney or equal. D. Fasteners and Supports: All clamps, straps, framing and supporting materials shall be hot-dipped galvanized steel or malleable iron. Bolts, nuts, screws, washers, etc. shall be stainless steel. Cadmium-plated or zinc-plated fasteners and hardware will not be acceptable. 2.02 POLYVINYL CHLORIDE (PVC - SCHEDULE 40): A. Conduit: Conduit, elbows and couplings shall be Schedule 40 rigid polyvinyl chloride (PVC) conduit per NEMA TC 2 with a 900 UL rating, and shall be the standard product of Krayloy or Carlon or approved equal. B. Fittings: Fittings and accessories for use with Schedule 40 PVC conduit shall conform to NEMA TC 3 and shall be of the same material and manufacturer as the conduit. RACEWAYS 26 13 60-2/8 Commodore Park-Phase 1 -#23173 (100% Pre-NOA)July 3, 2025 2.03 PVC COATED STEEL CONDUIT (CRGS): A. Conduit: Prior to coating, all conduits, elbows, couplings, nipples etc. shall be standard weight rigid, threaded steel and shall be hot dipped galvanized inside and out and over the ends. The conduit shall meet the requirements of ANSI C80.1, UL 6, and NEMA RN-1, 1980. B. Fittings: Prior to coating, fittings shall be cast malleable iron, hot dipped galvanized, Appleton Form 35 or Crouse-Hinds or equivalent with cast cover and neoprene gasket. C. Boxes: Device and outlet boxes for use with PVC coated conduit shall be cast malleable iron, hot dipped galvanized with threaded hubs and gasketed cast covers or device plates. Boxes shall be the product of Appleton or Crouse-Hinds. D. PVC Coating: Conduit, fittings, boxes and accessories shall be Plasti-Bond 2 coated, as produced by Robroy Industries Inc. or an approved equal. Before coating, the galvanized surfaces shall be coated with an epoxy-acrylic primer. Exterior surfaces shall have a 40 mil PVC coating applied by dip method. Interior surfaces of conduits, fittings, boxes, etc. shall have a fusion bonded phenolic coating with a thickness of 4-6 mils. E. Fasteners and Supports: U-bolts, conduit clamps, straps, modular framing channels shall be 1-5/8❑ ❑ 1-5/8❑ minimum section dimensions, Type 304 stainless steel, and shall be the product of Unistrut. Fasteners and attachment hardware shall be Type 304 stainless steel. 2.04 RIGID ALUMINUM CONDUIT: A. Conduit: Conduit, including elbows, couplings and nipples shall be standard weight, threaded, rigid aluminum 6063 alloy, with a copper content not to exceed 0.20%. The conduit shall have a silicon or lacquer coating inside. B. Fittings: Fittings, accessories and device boxes for aluminum conduit systems shall be the standard threaded type as manufactured by Crouse-Hinds, Appleton, or equal. Both fittings and covers shall be aluminum containing less than 0.4 of 1% copper. All screws shall be stainless steel. Covers shall be gasketed. C. Fasteners: All straps and clamps used to support aluminum conduit shall be hot- dipped galvanized steel or malleable iron, with a 40 mil fused PVC coating, Plastibond, Ocal or equivalent. Strut type framing channels shall be either PVC coated galvanized steel or fiberglass. D. Hardware: Nuts, bolts, screws, washers, etc. shall be stainless steel. Galvanized or cadmium-plated hardware will not be acceptable for use with aluminum conduit. 2.05 ELECTRICAL METALLIC TUBING (EMT): A. Conduit: Conduit, including elbows, couplings, and nipples shall be hot dipped galvanized steel inside and out with an organic corrosion resistant coating applied to the inside. RACEWAYS 26 13 60-3/8 Commodore Park-Phase 1 -#23173 (100% Pre-NOA)July 3, 2025 B. Fittings and Boxes: Conduit fittings, boxes, and accessories for use with EMT conduit shall be cast malleable iron or ferrous alloy, hot-dipped galvanized or zinc-electro- plated and lacquered. Fittings shall be compression type. Setscrew fittings are not acceptable. Fittings shall be the product of Crouse-Hinds, Appleton, OZ Gedney or an equal. C. Fasteners and Supports: All clamps, straps, framing and supporting materials shall be hot-dipped galvanized steel or malleable iron. 2.06 LIQUID-TIGHT FLEXIBLE METAL CONDUIT: A. Flexible Conduit: Flexible conduit shall have a spiraled, flexible, galvanized steel inner core and an outer jacket of neoprene. Sizes 3/8" through 4" shall have a continuous, internal copper ground. Liquid-tight connectors shall be galvanized steel or malleable iron with neoprene sealing gaskets, external ground lugs and insulated throats. Connectors shall be Appleton type STB or Gedney or equal. 2.07 WIREWAYS: A. Sheet Metal: 1. Indoor, dry locations: NEMA 1, sheet steel per UL 870 with hinged cover per NEMA ICS 6. Finish being manufacturer's standard gray enamel. 2. Outdoor and damp locations: NEMA 3R, galvanized sheet steel per UL 870 with hinged cover per NEMA ICS 6. B. Non-Metallic: 1. NEMA 4X, Robroy Industries fiberglass trough with gasketed cover attached with non-metallic fasteners. C. Fittings and Accessories: Include couplings, hubs, elbows, adapters, end caps and other fittings to match and mate with type of wireway furnished as required for a complete system. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 APPLICATION: A. General: 1. All field wiring shall be installed in conduit except as otherwise indicated. 2. Minimum conduit size shall be 1/2-inch nominal diameter. B. Exposed: 1. Conduit installed outdoors exposed shall be rigid galvanized steel. 2. Conduit installed indoors exposed and below 7 feet shall be rigid galvanized steel. Exposed conduit above 7 feet installed indoors may be EMT. RACEWAYS 26 13 60-4/8 Commodore Park-Phase 1 -#23173 (100% Pre-NOA)July 3, 2025 C. Underground: 1. Conduit installed underground shall be Schedule 40 PVC. See section 3.02-E for additional requirements. 2. Elbows used for underground conduit stub-ups from below grade shall be PVC coated rigid galvanized steel, non-metallic Schedule 80 PVC, or Rigid Galvanized Steel completely taped with non-corrosive protective tape. D. Concealed: 1. Conduit installed concealed above lay-in ceilings and in dry wall construction shall be EMT. E. Flexible Connections: 1. Indoor-dry areas: Flexible metal conduit. 2. Indoor-wet, damp areas: Liquid-tight, flexible metal conduit. 3. Outdoors: Liquid-tight, flexible metal conduit. 3.02 INSTALLATION: A. General: 1. Installation Methods: Conduit shall be installed concealed in walls or above ceiling or underground as indicated on the drawings. 2. Cleaning: All conduit systems shall be completed and shall be swabbed clean before conductors are pulled in. 3. Field cuts: Do not cut conduit with pipe cutters. 4. Bends: Field made bends and offsets shall be made with a hickey or conduit bending machine. Crushed or deformed raceways shall not be installed. The maximum number of 90❑ bends, or equivalent between pulling points in any conduit run shall be three. Pull and junction fittings and/or boxes shall be provided as necessary to satisfy this requirement. 5. Protection: The ends of all conduit runs shall be closed immediately after installation to prevent the accumulation of water, dirt and other foreign material. 6. Locknuts: Conduits shall be fastened to all sheet metal boxes and cabinets with two locknuts. Locknuts shall have sharp edges for digging into the wall of metal enclosures. Bushings shall be installed on the ends of all conduits and shall be the insulating type. 7. Conduit couplings shall be threaded type for RGS or RA conduit and compression type for EMT conduit. Set-screw couplings are not acceptable. 8. Spare conduits: Spare conduits shall have a pull cord installed. The pull cord shall be plastic with a minimum tensile strength of 200 pounds. Not less that 12 inches of slack shall be left at each end of the pull cord. RACEWAYS 26 13 60-5/8 Commodore Park-Phase 1 -#23173 (100% Pre-NOA)July 3, 2025 9. Supports: Supports shall be provided a minimum of every 10' and within 3' of all enclosures. In addition, conduits shall be rigidly supported between couplings, on either side of bends and at terminations and fittings. 10. Boxes: Boxes shall be provided in the raceway system as indicated on the drawings and also wherever required for pulling of wires or making connections. Unless otherwise shown on the drawings, boxes installed in normally wet locations or on the outside of exterior surfaces shall be NEMA 3R, stainless steel sheet construction. Boxes shall be furnished with hinged and gasketed doors and stainless steel back panels. Each box shall have the volume required by the NEC for the number of conductors enclosed in the box. All boxes shall be securely anchored in place. 11. Flexible Connections: Flexible connections of short length shall be provided for equipment subject to vibration, noise transmission or movement. A separate ground conductor shall be provided across all flexible connections. Flexible conduit connections shall be rigidly and securely supported in an approved manner at intervals not exceeding 24 inches in length and within 12 inches of each conduit termination. Lengths of not more than 36 inches may be installed without such supports where flexibility is required. 12. Identification: Identify conduits in accordance with Section 260750. 13. PVC: PVC conduit joints shall be solvent cement welded and shall be watertight. All PVC conduits shall have a separate grounding conductor installed. Where transition is made to the metallic conduit or enclosures, the grounding conductor shall be bonded to the metal conduit or enclosure. 14. Penetrations through walls, floors, and roof: All penetrations shall be sealed with a UL listed fire sealant equal to Dow Corning #3-6548. B. Exposed Conduit: 1. Routing: Exposed conduit shall be run straight and true to structure lines. Changes in direction of runs shall be made with fittings or symmetrical bends. Conduit in damp locations or outdoors shall be exposed to the air on all sides and shall not be installed tight against walls, ceilings and structural members, etc. Clamp backs and/or offsets shall be used as necessary to maintain uniform clearances. 2. Supports: Acceptable supporting and clamping materials for exposed conduit include one-hole straps and clamp back, "U" bolts, parallel or right angle conduit clamps, hot-dipped galvanized structural steel frames or modular stainless steel channel as manufactured by Unistrut or equal. Perforated steel tape, stamped steel one- and two-hole straps shall not be used. Conduits shall be supported in accordance with NEC 346-12. 3. Obstructions: Conduit shall be routed so as not to create any tripping or head banging hazard and so as not to create any obstruction to Owner's operation and maintenance activities. RACEWAYS 26 13 60-6/8 Commodore Park-Phase 1 -#23173 (100% Pre-NOA)July 3, 2025 4. Hubs: Watertight conduit hubs shall be installed where conduits enter the tops or sides of sheet metal or non-metallic enclosures. 5. Drains: Drain fittings shall be installed at low points throughout the conduit system where condensation is likely to occur. C. PVC Coated Conduit: 1. PVC coated conduit requires special care to minimize damage to the PVC coating during cutting, threading, bending and installation. Contractor shall install conduit in accordance with manufacturer's recommended installation procedures. 2. Contractor shall be responsible for providing strap wrenches, cutting dies, vises, and other special tools required to install PVC coated conduit. Standard pipe wrenches, chain wrenches or channel locks shall not be used. Conduit bending equipment shall have the proper diameter shoes or dies to allow for the thickness of the PVC coating. 3. PVC coated conduit shall be supported with Type 304 stainless steel clamps, straps, hangers and supports. Attachment hardware shall be Type 316 stainless steel. 4. All PVC coated conduit and fittings that have teeth marks, cuts, nicks or are otherwise damaged shall be repaired by coating damaged area with a liquid PVC touch-up compound. Spray-type compound is not acceptable. 5. Unistrut channel supports and related accessories for use with PVC coated conduit shall be Type 304 stainless steel. D. Aluminum: 1. Aluminum conduit shall not be installed in direct contact with earth, concrete, steel, copper, brass or bronze. Where aluminum conduit comes into contact with dissimilar metals or passes through concrete walls or floors, it shall be wrapped with 2 layers, half-lapped, of corrosion preventative pipe tape, Scotch 50 or equal. 2. Aluminum conduit threads shall have a Penetrox, No-Ox-Id or equal, applied when installed. E. Underground Conduit: 1. Under Landscaping (i.e. sod or grass): a. Underground conduits 2" and larger shall be laid in sand and covered with a 4" red concrete cap. The conduit shall be surrounded by a minimum of 3-inches of virgin sand (top, bottom, and sides). b. The top of concrete cap shall be a minimum of 24 inches below grade. RACEWAYS 26 13 60-7/8 Commodore Park-Phase 1 -#23173 (100% Pre-NOA)July 3, 2025 C. Communication conduits shall be buried a minimum of 36" to top of conduit. d. Provide red caution tape 12" below finish grade over all conduits. e. Unless otherwise indicated, electrical conduits must go below conflicts, such as yard piping, if the minimum depth cannot be met. Backfill for all trenches shall be compacted to original density. 2. Under Paved Areas (i.e. Parking Lot, Driveways, and Roads): a. Underground communication conduit runs shall be buried a minimum 36" below grade to top of conduit. Provide red caution tape 12" below finish grade overall conduits. b. Underground power conduit runs shall be buried the minimum depth per the National Electric Code. Provide red caution tape 12" below finish grade over all conduits. C. Unless otherwise indicated, electrical conduits must go below conflicts, such as yard piping, if the minimum depth cannot be met. Backfill for all trenches shall be compacted to original density. 3. Separation: Minimum separation between the outside edges of adjacent conduits shall be 3 inches. 4. Elbows: All elbows shall be long radius type. 5. Spacers: Conduit spacers shall be installed at 5 feet on centers. 6. Expansion Fittings: Provide expansion fittings in aboveground, vertical portion of each underground conduit stub-up. END OF SECTION 26 13 60 RACEWAYS 26 13 60-8/8 Commodore Park-Phase 1 -#23173 (100% Pre-NOA)July 3, 2025 SECTION 26 14 00 WIRING DEVICES PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY: A. Section Includes: 1. Receptacles 2. Ground Fault Circuit Interrupter Receptacles 3. Snap Switches 4. Wall Plates 1.02 REFERENCES: A. National Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA): 1. WD1-83 General Requirements for Wiring Devices 2. WD-5 Specific Purpose Wiring Devices B. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA): 1. 70 National Electrical Code C. Underwriters Laboratories Inc. (UL): 1. 20-86 Standard for Safety General Use Snap Switches 2. 94-91 Standard for Safety Tests for Flammability of Plastic Materials for Parts in Devices and Appliances 3. 498091 Standard for Safety Attachment Plugs and Receptacles 1.03 SUBMITTALS: A. Procedures: Submit for approval and record purposes in accordance with Section 013000 and 260100. B. Product Data: Submit for each type of device used on project. 1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE: A. Items provided under this section shall be listed and labeled by UL or other Nationally Recognized Testing Laboratory (NRTL). 1. Term "NRTL" shall be as defined in OSHA Regulation 1910.7. 2. Terms "listed" and 'labeled" shall be defined as they are in National Electrical Code, Article 100. B. Regulatory Requirements: WIRING DEVICES 26 14 00-1/4 Commodore Park-Phase 1 -#23173 (100% Pre-NOA)July 3, 2025 1. National Electrical Code: Components and installation shall comply with NFPA 70. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 WIRING DEVICES: A. General: Provide wiring devices, in types, characteristics, grades, colors, and electrical ratings for applications indicated which are UL listed and which comply with NEMA WD 1 and other applicable UL and NEMA Standards. B: Receptacles, General Use Duplex Receptacles: 125 volt, 15 or 20 amp, heavy duty, grounding type, TAMPER RESISTANT, by Hubbell, Leviton, or P&S. Device color shall be selected by the Architect. C: Ground-Fault Circuit Interrupter (GFCI) Receptacles: 125 volt, 15 or 20 amp, heavy duty, grounding type "non feed-through" conforming to UL 498 and UL 943 by Hubbell, Leviton, or P&S. Device color shall be selected by the Architect. D: Snap Switches: 120/277 volt, 20 ampere, quiet rated, heavy duty, complying with UL 20 and NEMA WD1 by Hubbell, Leviton, or P&S. Device color shall be selected by the Architect. E. Provide tamper proof receptacles where indicated on the drawings by the designation "T". Tamper proof receptacles shall be hospital grade tamper resistant duplex type. Tamper proof receptacles shall meet NEMA WDI Heavy Duty &WD6 requirements and be UL listed as "Hospital Grade" under UL 498. Hubbell identification number HBLSG63H, model number HBL8300SGI. 2.02 WIRING DEVICE ACCESSORIES: A. Wall Plates: 1. Single and combination, of types, sizes, and with ganging and cutouts as required by devices. 2. Provide plates which mate and match with wiring devices to which attached. 3. Provide metal screws for securing plates to devices with screw heads colored to match finish of plates. 4. Provide plates possessing following additional construction features. a. Device plates: Nylon. Color to match device b. Device plates for surface mounted, 4 inch sq boxes: 1/2 inch stainless steel covers. C. Device plates (including but not limited to receptacles, switches, TV outlet etc.) for secured areas shall be one piece#14 cold rolled zinc plated steel with safety ground-tab or equivalent redundant feature. WIRING DEVICES 26 14 00-2/4 Commodore Park-Phase 1 -#23173 (100% Pre-NOA)July 3, 2025 Plates shall have a five stage baked white polyester powder enamel finish. The back plate shall be#10 cold rolled galvanized steel. Plate assembly shall use four(4) #8-32 x '/z" stainless steel T-20 Torx head screws with center pin reject. Plates shall be UL listed as 514A or D. Hubbell Model number SWP. NO EQUAL. d. Weatherproof covers for exterior devices or devices in damp locations: Raintight while in use, UL listed, molded UV stabilized poly-carbonate with stainless steel screws and mounting gaskets. Tay Mac Corporation safety outlet enclosure, or equal. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION: A. Install wiring devices and accessories as indicated, in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions, applicable requirements of NEC and in accordance with recognized industry practices to fulfill project requirements. B. Coordinate with other Work, including painting, electrical boxes and wiring installations, as necessary to interface installation of wiring devices with other Work. C. Install wiring devices only in electrical boxes that are clean; free from building materials, dirt and debris. D. Mounting Heights: Unless otherwise indicated or directed, boxes for wiring devices shall be mounted so that the centerline of the device is at the following height above finished floor (AFF) or above finished grade (AFG). DEVICE FINISHED AREAS UNFINISHED AREAS Snap switches 48" 48" Convenience Receptacles 18" 18" E. Install wiring devices after wiring work is completed. F. Install wall plates after painting work is completed. G. Tighten connectors and terminals, including screws and bolts, in accordance with equipment manufacturer's published torque tightening values for wiring devices. Where manufacturer's torque requirements are not indicated, tighten connectors and terminals to comply with tightening torques specified in UL 486A. Use properly scaled torque indicating hand tool. H. Do not use terminals on wiring devices (hot or neutral) for feed-through connections, looped or otherwise. Make circuit connections via wire connectors and pigtails. WIRING DEVICES 26 14 00-3/4 Commodore Park-Phase 1 -#23173 (100% Pre-NOA)July 3, 2025 I. Ground receptacles with insulated green ground wire from device ground screw to bolted outlet box connection. 3.02 PROTECTION: A. Protect installed components from damage. Replace damaged items prior to final acceptance. 3.03 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL: A. Testing: Prior to energizing circuits, test wiring for electrical continuity and for short circuits. Ensure proper polarity of connections is maintained. Subsequent to energizing, test wiring devices and demonstrate compliance with requirements, operating each operable device at least six (6) times. B. Test receptacles with Hubbell 5200, Woodhead 1750 or equal for correct polarity, proper ground connection and wiring faults. C. Test ground fault interrupter operation with both local and remote fault simulations in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations. END OF SECTION 26 14 00 WIRING DEVICES 26 14 00-4/4 Commodore Park-Phase 1 -#23173 (100% Pre-NOA)July 3, 2025 26 24 16 PANELBOARDS PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SCOPE: A. Furnish and install panelboards as specified herein and as indicated on the drawings. B. Panelboard types included in this Section are: 1. Power distribution panelboards 2. Lighting and appliance panelboards 1.02 REFERENCES: A. National Electrical Contractors Association (NECA) 1. Standard of Installation B. National Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA) 1. AB 1 Molded Case Circuit Breakers 2. PB 1 Panelboards 3. PB1.1 General Instructions for Proper Installation, Operation and Maintenance of Panelboards Rated 600 Volts or Less. C. Underwriters Laboratories Inc. (UL) 1. 50 Cabinets and Boxes 2. 67 Panelboards 1.03 SUBMITTALS- FOR APPROVAL: A. Procedure: Submit in accordance with Section 013000, 26 0100, and as stated herein. B. Product Data: 1. Descriptive bulletins 2. Enclosure outline drawing with complete dimensions 3. Breaker layout drawing 4. Component list 5. Conduit entry/exit locations 6. Assembly ratings including: a. Short circuit current b. Voltage C. Continuous current 7. Cable terminal sizes. 8. Installation Instructions PANELBOARDS 26 24 16-1/8 Commodore Park-Phase 1 -#23173 (100% Pre-NOA)July 3, 2025 1.04 SUBMITTALS—RECORD DATA: A. Procedure: Submit in accordance with Section 013000. B. The following information shall be submitted for record purposes: 1. Final (as-built) drawings and information for items listed in Paragraph 1.03 2. Installation, operation and maintenance instruction 3. Spare parts list 1.05 QUALIFICATIONS: A. The manufacturer of the panelboard shall be the manufacturer of the major components within the assembly, including circuit breakers. B. For the equipment specified herein, the manufacturer shall be ISO 9000, 9001 or 9002 certified. 1.06 DELIVERY,STORAGE,AND HANDLING: A. Equipment shall be handled and stored in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. One (1) copy of these instructions shall be included with the equipment at time of shipment. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS: A. Cutler-Hammer B. Square D C. Siemens D. ABB 2.02 RATINGS: A. Panelboards rated 240 Vac or less shall have short circuit ratings as indicated on the drawings or as herein scheduled, but not less than 10,000 amperes RMS symmetrical. B. Panelboards rated 480 Vac shall have short circuit ratings as indicated on the drawings or as herein scheduled, but not less than 14,000 amperes RMS symmetrical. C. Panelboards shall be labeled with a UL short circuit rating.All panelboards shall be fully rated. Series ratings shall not be used. 2.03 CONSTRUCTION: PANELBOARDS 26 24 16-2/8 Commodore Park-Phase 1 -#23173 (100% Pre-NOA)July 3, 2025 A. Interiors shall be completely factory assembled devices.They shall be designed such that switching and protective devices can be replaced without disturbing adjacent units and without removing the main bus connectors. B. Trims for lighting and appliance panelboards shall be supplied with a hinged door covering all circuit breaker handles. Doors in panelboard trims shall not uncover any live parts. Doors shall have a semiflush, cylinder lock and catch assembly. Doors over 48 inches in height shall have auxiliary fasteners. C. Distribution panelboard trims shall cover all live parts. Switching device handles shall be accessible. D. Surface trims shall be same height and width as box. Flush trims shall overlap the box by 3/4 inch on all sides. Trims shall be secured to box with concealed clamps. E. A directory card with a clear plastic cover shall be supplied and mounted on the inside of each door in a metal frame. F. All locks shall be keyed alike. 2.04 BUS: A. Main bus bars shall be tin-plated copper, sized in accordance with UL standards to limit temperature rise on any current carrying part to a maximum of 65'C above an ambient of 40°C maximum. B. A bolted ground bus shall be included in all panels. C. Full-size (100%-rated) insulated neutral bars shall be included for panelboards indicated to have a neutral bus. Bus bar taps for panels with single-pole branches shall be arranged for sequence phasing of the branch circuit devices. Neutral busing shall have a suitable lug for each outgoing feeder requiring a neutral connection. 200%-rated neutrals shall be supplied for panels designated on drawings with oversized neutral conductors. 2.05 DISTRIBUTION PANELBOARDS: A. Distribution panelboards including circuit breakers contained therein shall have fully rated interrupting ratings as indicated on the drawings. Panelboards shall have bolt-on, molded case circuit breakers as indicated below. B. Molded case circuit breakers shall provide circuit overcurrent protection with inverse time and instantaneous tripping characteristics. Ground fault protection shall be provided where indicated. C. Circuit breakers shall be operated by a toggle-type handle and shall have a quick-make, quick-break, over-center switching mechanism that is mechanically trip-free.Automatic PANELBOARDS 26 24 16-3/8 Commodore Park-Phase 1 -#23173 (100% Pre-NOA)July 3, 2025 tripping of the breaker shall be clearly indicated by the handle position. Contacts shall be non-welding silver alloy and arc extinction shall be accomplished by means of arc chutes. A push-to-trip button on the front of the circuit breaker shall provide a local manual means to exercise the trip mechanism. D. Where indicated, circuit breakers shall be current limiting. E. Circuit breakers below 600-ampere shall have thermal-magnetic trip units and inverse time-current characteristics. F. Circuit breakers 600-ampere through 1200-ampere shall be provided with microprocessor-based RMS sensing trip units. 1. Each molded case circuit breaker microprocessor-based tripping system shall consist of three (3) current sensors, a trip unit, and a flux-transfer shunt trip. The trip unit shall use microprocessor-based technology to provide the adjustable time-current protection functions.True RMS sensing circuit protection shall be achieved by analyzing the secondary current signals received from the circuit breaker current sensors and initiating trip signals to the circuit breaker trip actuators when predetermined trip levels and time delay settings are reached. 2. Interchangeable rating plugs shall establish the continuous trip ratings of each circuit breaker. Rating plugs shall be fixed or adjustable as indicated. Rating plugs shall be interlocked so they are not interchangeable between frames, and interlocked such that a breaker cannot be closed and latched with the rating plug removed. 3. The microprocessor-based trip unit shall have thermal memory capabilities to prevent the breaker from being reset following an overload condition until after a preset time delay. 4. When the adjustable instantaneous setting is omitted,the trip unit shall be provided with an instantaneous override. Internal ground fault protection adjustable pick-up ratings shall not exceed 1200 amperes. Provide neutral ground fault current sensor for four-wire loads. 5. Breakers shall have built-in test points for testing the long-time delay, instantaneous, and ground fault functions of the breaker, by means of a 120- volt operated test set. Provide one test set capable of testing all breakers 600- ampere and above. 6. System coordination shall be provided by the following microprocessor-based, time-current curve shaping adjustments: Adjustable long-time pick-up Adjustable short-time pick-up and delay, with selective curve shaping Adjustable instantaneous pick-up Adjustable ground fault pick-up and delay,with selective curve shaping. PANELBOARDS 26 24 16-4/8 Commodore Park-Phase 1 -#23173 (100% Pre-NOA)July 3, 2025 G. Where indicated, provide circuit breakers UL listed for application at 100%of their continuous ampere rating in their intended enclosure. H. Provide shunt trips, bell alarms, and auxiliary switches as indicated on the drawings. I. Circuit breakers supplying air conditioning branch circuits shall be UL listed as type HACR. 2.06 LIGHTING AND APPLIANCE PANELBOARDS: A. The minimum integrated short circuit rating for branch circuit panelboards shall be indicated on the drawings. B. Bolt-in type, heavy-duty, quick-make, quick-break, single-and multi-pole circuit breakers of the types specified herein, shall be provided for each circuit with toggle handles that indicate when unit has tripped. C. Circuit breakers shall be thermal magnetic type with common type handle for all multiple pole circuit breakers. Circuit breakers shall be minimum 100-ampere frame and through 100-ampere trip sizes shall take up the same pole spacing. Circuit breakers shall be UL listed as type SWD for lighting circuits and HACR for air conditioning branch circuits. 1. Circuit breaker handle locks shall be provided for all circuits that supply exit signs, emergency lights, energy management and control system (EMCS) panels and fire alarm panels. 2.07 ENCLOSURE: A. General: Enclosures shall be at least 20 inches wide and made from galvanized steel. Provide minimum gutter space in accordance with the National Electrical Code. Where feeder cables supplying the mains of a panel are carried through its box to supply other electrical equipment,the box shall be sized to include the additional required wiring space.At least four interior mounting studs with adjustable nuts shall be provided. Enclosures shall be provided with blank ends. B. Rating: Indoor enclosures-NEMA type 1 enclosures except where other enclosure requirements are indicated. Outdoor enclosures- NEMA type 3R Stainless Steel enclosures except where other enclosure requirements are indicated. 2.08 FINISH: A. Surfaces of the trim assembly shall be properly cleaned, primed, and a finish coat of the manufacturers standard paint color shall be applied. 2.09 MISCELLANEOUS DEVICES PANELBOARDS 26 24 16-5/8 Commodore Park-Phase 1 -#23173 (100% Pre-NOA)July 3, 2025 A. Provide TVSS system integral to distribution panelboards and appliance panelboards where indicated on drawings. Reference section 266710 for specifications on TVSS units. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION: A. Confirm installation space and clearance requirements for panelboards in accordance with NEC requirements. 3.02 INSTALLATION: A. General: Install panelboards as indicated on the drawings and in accordance with manufacturer's published instructions, NEMA PB 1.1, and NECA"Standard of Installation". B. Mounting Heights: Top of trim 6 feet 2 inches above finished floor, except as otherwise indicated. C. Mounting: 1. Plumb and rigid without distortion of box. 2. Mount flush panels uniformly flush with wall finish. D. Circuit Directory: Typed directory indicating final circuit connections. Obtain approval before installing. E. Install filler plates in unused breaker spaces. F. Provisions for Future Circuits at Flush Panelboards: 1. Stub four 1-inch empty conduits from panel into accessible ceiling space or space designated to be ceiling space in future. 2. Stub four 1-inch empty conduits into raised floor space or below slab other than slabs on grade. G. Wiring in Panel Gutters: Train conductors neatly in groups, bundle, and wrap with wire ties after completion of load balancing. 3.03 IDENTIFICATION: A. Identify field-installed wiring and components and provide unit nameplate in accordance with Section 26 07 50. B. Provided one (1) 8-1/2"x11" stainless steel nameplate engraved with one-line diagram and year installed. One-line diagram shall include panel voltages, amps, AIC ratings, and feeder sizes. Nameplate shall be mounted to the exterior door of the main distribution panel. PANELBOARDS 26 24 16-6/8 Commodore Park-Phase 1 -#23173 (100% Pre-NOA)July 3, 2025 3.04 GROUNDING: A. Connections: Make equipment grounding connections for panelboards as required in Section 260600. B. Provide ground continuity to main electrical ground bus. C. Provide isolated ground bars for panels serving sensitive electronic equipment and as indicated on panel schedules. 3.05 CONNECTIONS: A. Tighten electrical connectors and terminals, including grounding connections, in accordance with manufacturer's published torque-tightening values. Where manufacturer's torque values are not indicated, use those specified in UL 486A. 3.06 FIELD TESTING: A. Inspect for compliance with drawings and specifications. B. Inspect for defects, damaged or missing parts. C. Operate each breaker a minimum of three (3)times to insure proper operation. D. Perform insulation resistance test on complete assembly at 1000 Vdc. Disconnect any solid-state devices prior to testing. Minimum acceptable test results are 100 megohms. 3.07 CLEANING: A. Upon completion of installation, inspect interior and exterior of panelboards. B. Remove paint splatters and other spots, dirt, and debris. C. Touch up scratches and mars of finish to match original finish. D. Clean interior of panelboard. 3.08 FIELD ADJUSTMENTS: A. Balancing Loads: Prior to final acceptance, conduct load-balancing measurements and circuit changes as follows: 1. Perform measurements during period of normal working load as advised by Owner. 2. Advise Engineer of load imbalances exceeding 20%or of loads exceeding 80%of circuit ratings. Reconnect branch circuit loads as directed by Engineer. PANELBOARDS 26 24 16-7/8 Commodore Park-Phase 1 -#23173 (100% Pre-NOA)July 3, 2025 3. Perform load-balancing circuit changes outside the normal occupancy/working schedule of the facility. Make special arrangements with Owner to avoid disrupting critical circuits. 4. Recheck loads after circuit changes during normal load period. Record load readings before and after changes and submit test records. END OF SECTION 26 24 16 PANELBOARDS 26 24 16-8/8 Commodore Park-Phase 1 -#23173 (100% Pre-NOA)July 3, 2025 SECTION 26 43 13 SURGE PROTECTION DEVICES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SCOPE A. This section describes the materials and installation requirements for surge protective devices (SPD)for the protection of all AC electrical circuits. 1.2 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. B. Other sections that may relate to the work in this section include, but are not limited to, the following: 1. Section 26 24 13.11 — Switchboards 2. Section 26 24 16— Low-Voltage Panelboards 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Submit shop drawings and product information for approval and final documentation in the quantities listed according to the Conditions of the Contract. All transmittals shall be identified by customer name, customer location, and customer order number. B. Submittals shall include UL 1449 4th Edition Listing documentation verifiable by visiting www.UL.com, clicking "Certifications" link, searching using UL Category Code: VZCA. 1. Short Circuit Current Rating (SCCR) 2. Voltage Protection Ratings (VPRs) for all modes 3. Maximum Continuous Operating Voltage rating (MCOV) 4. I-nominal rating (I-n) 5. SPD shall be Type 1 UL listed and labeled C. Upon request, an unencapsulated but complete SPD formally known as TVSS shall be presented for visual inspection. D. Minimum of ten (10) year warranty 1.4 RELATED STANDARDS A. IEEE C62.41.1, IEEE Guide on the Surge Environment in Low-Voltage (1000 V and Less) AC Power Circuits, B. IEEE C62.41.2, IEEE Recommended Practice on Characterization of Surges in Low-Voltage (1000 V and Less) AC Power Circuits, C. IEEE C62.45, IEEE Recommended Practice on Surge Testing for Equipment Connected to Low-Voltage (1000 V and Less)AC Power Circuits. D. National Electrical Code: Article 285 E. UL 1283 - Electromagnetic Interference Filters F. UL 1449, Fourth Edition — Surge Protective Devices 1.5 LISTING REQUIREMENTS SURGE PROTECTION DEVICES 26 43 13-1/4 Commodore Park-Phase 1 -#23173 (100% Pre-NOA)July 3, 2025 A. SPD shall bear the UL Mark and shall be Listed to most recent editions of UL 1449 and UL 1283. "Manufactured in accordance with" is not equivalent to UL listing and does not meet the intent of this specification. 1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Manufacturer Qualifications: Engage a firm with at least ten (10) years experience in manufacturing transient voltage surge suppressors. B. Manufacturer shall be ISO 9001 or 9002 certified. C. The manufacturer of this equipment shall have produced similar electrical equipment for a minimum period of five (10) years. When requested by the Engineer, an acceptable list of installations with similar equipment shall be provided demonstrating compliance with this requirement. D. The SPD shall be compliant with the Restriction of Hazardous Substances (RoHS) Directive 2002/95/EC. 1.7 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Handle and store equipment in accordance with manufacturer's Installation and Maintenance Manuals. One (1) copy of this document to be provided with the equipment at time of shipment. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Provide an externally mounted transient voltage suppressors by Siemens or pre-approved equal. Approved manufacturers are as follows: 1. ABB 2. ADP 3. THOR 2.2 SURGE PROTECTIVE DEVICE FEATURES A. SPD shall be UL 1449 listed and labeled with 200kA Short Circuit Current Rating (SCCR). Fuse ratings shall not be considered in lieu of demonstrated withstand testing of SPD, per NEC 285.6. B. SPD shall be UL 1449 labeled as Type 1 intended for use without need for external or supplemental overcurrent controls. Every suppression component of every mode, including N-G, shall be protected by internal overcurrent and thermal over-temperature controls. SPDs relying upon external or supplementary installed safety disconnects do not meet the intent of this specification. C. SPD shall be UL 1449 labeled with 20kA I-nominal (1-n) (verifiable at UL.com) for compliance to UL 96A Lightning Protection Master Label and NFPA 780. D. Suppression components shall be heavy duty `large block' MOVs, each exceeding 30mm diameter. E. Standard 7 Mode Protection paths: SPD shall provide surge current paths for all modes of protection: L-N, L-G, L-L, and N-G for Wye systems; L-L, L-G in Delta and impedance grounded Wye systems. SURGE PROTECTION DEVICES 26 43 13-2/4 Commodore Park-Phase 1 -#23173 (100% Pre-NOA)July 3, 2025 F. If a dedicated breaker for the SPD is not provided in the switchboard, the service entrance SPD shall include an integral UL Recognized disconnect switch. A dedicated breaker shall serve as a means of disconnect for distribution SPD's. G. SPD shall meet or exceed the following criteria: 1. Minimum surge current capability (single pulse rated) per phase shall be: a. Service Entrance applications: 1.) Siemens Model TPS3 12 with Maximum 7-Mode surge current capability shall be 250kA per phase. b. Distribution applications: 1.) Siemens Model TPS3 09 with Maximum surge current capability of 100kA perphase 2. UL 1449 Listed Voltage Protection Ratings (VPRs) shall not exceed the following: VOLTAGE L-N L-G N-G 208Y/120V 700V 700V 700V 480Y/277V 1500V 1500V 1500 V I. UL 1449 Listed Maximum Continuous Operating Voltage (MCOV) for L-N, L-G, and N-G modes of protection (verifiable at UL.com): System Voltage Allowable System MCOV Voltage Fluctuation 208Y/120 25% 150V 480Y/277V 20% 320V J. Service Entrance SPD shall be complimentary UL 1283 listed for EMI/RFI filtering with minimum attenuation of-50dB at 100kHz. K. SPD shall have a warranty for a period of ten (10) years, incorporating unlimited replacements of suppressor parts if they are destroyed by transients during the warranty period. L. Service Entrance SPDs shall be equipped with the following diagnostics: 1. Visual LED diagnostics including a minimum of one green LED indicator per phase, and one red service LED. 2. Audible alarm with on/off silence function and diagnostic test function (excluding branch). 3. Form C dry contacts 4. Optional —Surge Counter 5. No other test equipment shall be required for SPD monitoring or testing before or after installation. M. Distribution Panels SPDs shall be equipped with the following diagnostics: 1. Visual LED diagnostics including a minimum of one green LED indicator per phase, and one red service LED. 2. Audible Alarm & Dry Contacts 3. No other test equipment shall be required for SPD monitoring or testing before or after installation. PART 3- EXECUTION 3.2 INSTALLATION SURGE PROTECTION DEVICES 26 43 13-3/4 Commodore Park-Phase 1 -#23173 (100% Pre-NOA)July 3, 2025 I. The installation shall meet the following criteria: 1. Install per manufacturer's recommendations and contract documents. 2. Install units plumb, level and rigid without distortion 3. One primary suppressor shall be installed external to the service entrance in accordance with manufacturer instructions. 4. Service Entrance SPD shall be installed on the line or load side of the main service disconnect. 5. Service Entrance SPD ground shall be bonded to the service entrance ground. 6. At Service Entrance or Transfer Switch, a UL approved disconnect switch shall be provided as a means of servicing disconnect if a 60A breaker is not available. 7. One SPD shall be installed external to each designated distribution panelboard. 8. At Distribution, MCC and Branch, SPD shall have an independent means of servicing disconnect such that the protected panel remains energized. A 30A breaker (or larger) may serve this function. 9. SPD shall be installed per manufacturer's installation instructions with lead lengths as short (less than 24") and straight as possible. Gently twist conductors together. 10. Installer may reasonably rearrange breaker locations to ensure short & straightest possible leads to SPDs. 11. Before energizing, installer shall verify service and separately derived system Neutral to Ground bonding jumpers per NEC. 3.3 ADJUSTMENTS AND CLEANING A. Remove debris from SPD and wipe dust and dirt from all components. B. Repaint marred and scratched surface with touch up paint to match original finish. 3.4 TESTING A. Check tightness of all accessible mechanical and electrical connections to assure they are torqued to the minimum acceptable manufacture's recommendations. B. Check all installed panels for proper grounding, fastening and alignment. 3.5 WARRANTY A. Equipment manufacturer warrants that all goods supplied are free of non-conformities in workmanship and materials for one year from date of initial operations, but not more than eighteen months from date of shipment. END OF SECTION 26 43 13 SURGE PROTECTION DEVICES 26 43 13-4/4 Commodore Park-Phase 1 -#23173 (100% Pre-NOA)July 3, 2025 SECTION 26 44 10 DISCONNECT SWITCHES PART1 GENERAL 1.01 SCOPE A. The Contractor shall furnish and install the low-voltage fused and non-fused switches as specified herein and as shown on the contract drawings. 1.02 RELATED SECTIONS 1.03 REFERENCES A. The switches and all components shall be designed, manufactured and tested in accordance with the latest applicable standards of NEMA and UL. 1.04 SUBMITTALS -- FOR REVIEW/APPROVAL A. Procedure: Submit in accordance with Section 013000, 260100, and as stated herein. B. The following information shall be submitted to the Engineer: 1. Master drawing index 2. Dimensioned outline drawing 3. Conduit entry/exit locations 4. Switch ratings including: a. Short-circuit rating b. Voltage c. Continuous current 5. Fuse ratings and type 6. Cable terminal sizes. 1.05 SUBMITTALS -- FOR INFORMATION A. When requested by the Engineer the following product information shall be submitted: 1. Descriptive bulletins 2. Product sheets. 1.06 SUBMITTALS--FOR CLOSEOUT A. The following information shall be submitted for record purposes: 1. Final as-built drawings and information for items listed in section 1.04 DISCONNECT SWITCHES 26 44 10-1/4 Commodore Park-Phase 1 -#23173 (100% Pre-NOA)July 3, 2025 1.07 QUALIFICATIONS A. For the equipment specified herein, the manufacturer shall be ISO 9000, 9001 or 9002 certified. 1.08 NOT USED 1.09 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Equipment shall be handled and stored in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. One (1) copy of these instructions shall be included with the equipment at time of shipment. A. FIELD MEASUREMENTS A. Contractor shall field verify all dimensions prior to installation. Installation of all switches shall comply with the National Electric Codes clearance and mounting height requirements. B. OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS A. Three (3) copies of these instruction manuals shall be submitted with the closeout documents listed in section 1.06. PART PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. Square D B. ABB C. Siemens D. Eaton 2.02 DISCONNECT SWITCHES A. Provide switches as shown on drawings, with the following ratings: 1. 30 to 1200 amperes 2. 250 volts AC, DC; 600 volts AC (30A to 200A 600 volts DC) 3. 2, 3, 4, and 6 poles 4. Non-Fusible and Fusible 5. Copper/aluminum standard mechanical lugs. B. Construction 1. Switchblades and jaws shall be plated copper. DISCONNECT SWITCHES 26 44 10-2/4 Commodore Park-Phase 1 -#23173 (100% Pre-NOA)July 3, 2025 2. Switches shall have a handle that is easily pad lockable in the OFF position. 3. Switches shall have defeat-able door interlocks that prevent the door from opening when the handle is in the ON position. 4. Switch assembly and operating handle shall be an integral part of the enclosure base. 5. Fusible switches rated 100A to 1200A shall have reinforced fuse clips. 6. Switch blades shall be readily visible in the OFF position. 7. Switch operating mechanism shall be non-teasible, positive quick-make/quick- break type (except 30A plug fuse-type). 8. Fusible switches shall be suitable for service entrance equipment. 9. Switches shall have line terminal shields. 10. All exterior switches shall be heavy-duty type. 11. All interior switches shall be general-duty type unless otherwise noted. C. Enclosures A. Exterior: All enclosures shall be NEMA 3R rainproof unless otherwise noted. B. Interior: All enclosures shall be NEMA 1 unless otherwise noted. D. Fuses 1. Fuses shall be dual element, current limiting type such as Bussmann Low-Peak Yellow or equal. 2.04 NAMEPLATES A. Manufacturers nameplates shall be front cover mounted, contain a permanent record of switch type, ampere rating, and maximum voltage rating. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. All switches shall be cleaned free of debris after installation and prior to final acceptance by the owner. Remove all miscellaneous paint markings, grease and tar. 3.02 FACTORY TESTING A. Standard factory tests shall be performed on the equipment provided under this section. All tests shall be in accordance with the latest version of UL and NEMA standards. DISCONNECT SWITCHES 26 44 10-3/4 Commodore Park-Phase 1 -#23173 (100% Pre-NOA)July 3, 2025 3.03 INSTALLATION A. The equipment shall be installed per the manufacturer's recommendations. END OF SECTION 26 44 10 DISCONNECT SWITCHES 26 44 10-4/4 Commodore Park-Phase 1 -#23173 (100% Pre-NOA)July 3, 2025 SECTION 26 51 00 LUMINAIRES PART GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY: A. Section Includes: 1. Lighting fixtures 2. Lamps 3. Ballasts 4. Emergency lighting units 1.02 REFERENCES: A. American National Standards Institute (ANSI): 1. C78 Series Lamps 2. C82.1-97 Electric Lamp Ballast- Line Frequency Fluorescent Lamp Ballast 3. C82.2-84 Fluorescent Lamp Ballasts - Methods of Measurements 4. C82.4-92 Ballasts for High Intensity Discharge and Low-Pressure Sodium Lamps (Multiple Supply Type) 5. C82.11-93 High Frequency Fluorescent Lamp Ballasts B. Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers (IEEE): 1. C62.11-93 IEEE Recommended Practice on Metal Oxide Surge Arresters for Alternating Current Power Circuits C. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA): 1. 70 National Electrical Code D. Underwriters Laboratories Inc. (UL): 1. 844-95 Electric Lighting Fixtures for Use in Hazardous (Classified) Locations 2. 924-95 Emergency Lighting and Power Equipment 3. 935-95 Fluorescent Lamp Ballast 4. 1029-94 High Intensity Discharge Lamp Ballasts 5. 1570-95 Fluorescent Lighting Fixtures 6. 1571-95 Incandescent Lighting Fixtures 7. 1572-97 High Intensity Discharge Lighting Fixtures 1.03 DEFINITIONS: LUMINAIRES 26 5100-1/13 Commodore Park-Phase 1 -#23173 (100% Pre-NOA)July 3, 2025 A. Emergency Lighting Unit: Fixture with integral emergency battery power supply and means for controlling and charging battery. Emergency units are available with integral lamps only. B. Fixture: Complete lighting unit, exit sign, or emergency lighting unit. Fixtures include lamps and parts required to distribute light, position and protect lamps, and connect lamps to power supply. Internal battery powered exit signs and emergency lighting units also include battery and means for controlling and recharging battery. Emergency lighting units are available with and without integral lamp heads and lamps. C. Luminaire: Fixture. D. Average Life: Time after which 50% will have failed and 50% will have survived under normal conditions. E. Total Harmonic Distortion (THD): The root mean square (RMS) of all the harmonic current components divided by total fundamental (60 hz) current. 1.04 SUBMITTALS: A. Procedures: Submit in accordance with Section 01300, 16010, and as stated herein. B. Product Data: 1. Describe fixtures, lamps, ballasts, and emergency lighting units. Arrange product data for fixtures in order of fixture designation. Include data on features and accessories and the following information: a. Outline drawings of fixtures indicating dimensions and principal features. b. Electrical ratings and photometric data with specified lamps and certified results of independent laboratory tests. C. Data on batteries and chargers of emergency lighting units. C. Shop Drawings: 1. Detail nonstandard fixtures indicating dimensions, weights, methods of field assembly, components, features, and accessories. D. Supplies: 1. Submit sample of fixture if different than specified. LUMINAIRES 26 5100-2/13 Commodore Park-Phase 1 -#23173 (100% Pre-NOA)July 3, 2025 E. Miscellaneous: 1. Warranty for rechargeable battery. 2. Coordination drawings for fixtures that require coordination with other equipment installed in the same space. F. Substitutions to Specified Product 1. Prior approval requests will include the following a. Full submittal data, by type, clearly highlighted and arrowed to identify the specific proposed manufacturer's nomenclature b. Full submittal data of lamps of proposed manufacturer c. Full submittal data of ballast/driver (LED) data of proposed manufacturer d. LED lumen data shall include: i. Lumen output ii. L70 and L90 testing iii. Confirmation of independent test lab data ITL iv. Color temperature and CRI with quantity of McAdam Ellipse steps v. Data shall include sphere and goniometer results for total lumen, total power, luminaire efficacy, CRI and junction temperature for the specified color temperature vi. Make and brand of LED diode should be clearly identified on submittal data vii. LED dimming shall be equal in range and quality to the specified drivers, Quality of dimming to be defined by dimming range, freedom from perceived flicker or visible stroboscopic flicker, smooth and continuous change in level (no visible steps in transitions), natural square law response to control input, and stable when input voltage conditions fluctuate over what is typically experience in a commercial environment. viii. All substitutions must meet specified fixtures certifications UL,ETL,CE,CSA,RoHS,DLC, Energy Star) 2. Provide lighting calculations with the prior approval request based on reflectance values and light loss factors provided by the engineer and displayed on lighting calculation drawings. (may be unique by area) Calculations shall be shown on one sheet with dimensions as shown on construction set. Data will be submitted electronically in dxf format on a flash drive and with printed calculations on Architectural E size sheets to scale with construction set sheets. LUMINAIRES 26 5100-3/13 Commodore Park-Phase 1 -#23173 (100% Pre-NOA)July 3, 2025 a. Discrepancies between prior approval data calculations and the original design calculations will result in immediate disqualification of review due to time based constraints on the bid process 3. Prior approval request may require a sample of both the proposed and specified fixtures provided by the alternate manufacturer at NO additional cost to the project. Samples of both specified and proposed must be provided within 10 working days of request. 4. Energy calculations (Comcheck) must be provided with specification sheets including lamp and ballast data supporting input wattages highlighted in yellow and clearly identified by type. Input voltages must coincide with panel schedules. This data will be submitted under separate cover with the prior approval request 5. All data will be submitted electronically and in a bound format a. Bound data will be secured in hard binder with 3" rings for ease of review. b. Types will be marked with a tab by type and indexed for ease of reference 6. LED warranty information MUST be included by type and marked in RED to clearly identify the manufacturer's warranty terms. Warranty data MUST meet or exceed the specified manufacturers terms 7. Prior approvals MUST be received and acknowleged to the specifiers office no less than 15 days prior to bid. 8. ALL prior approval data must be submitted in one package with complete information. Information that is incomplete will be rejected without review. 9. The prior approval will be returned marked approved or rejected by type with no explanation. If any specification is deemed not equal the review will be stopped and the type rejected with no explanation. 10. Lumen output for the proposed fixture must be highlighted in yellow for clear identification 11. All inverter systems that supply power to LED fixtures must have pure PWM sine wave function and work with any type of lighting load. 1.05 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING: A. Deliver lighting fixtures in factory-fabricated containers or wrappings, which properly protect fixtures from damage. LUMINAIRES 26 5100-4/13 Commodore Park-Phase 1 -#23173 (100% Pre-NOA)July 3, 2025 B. Store lighting fixtures in original packaging. Store inside well-ventilated area protected from weather, moisture, soiling, extreme temperatures, humidity; laid flat and blocked off ground. C. Handle lighting fixtures carefully to prevent damage, breaking, and scarring of finishes. Do not install damaged units or components; replace with new. 1.06 QUALITY ASSURANCE: A. Items provided under this section shall be listed and labeled by UL or other Nationally Recognized Testing Laboratory (NRTL). 1. Term "NRTL" shall be as defined in OSHA Regulation 1910.7. 2. Terms "listed and "labeled" shall be as defined in National Electrical Code, Article 100. B. Regulatory Requirements: 1. National Electrical Code: Components and installation shall comply with NFPA 70. C. Coordinate fixtures mounting hardware and trim with ceiling system. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 FIXTURES, GENERAL: A. Comply with requirements specified in Paragraphs below and lighting fixture schedule. 2.02 FIXTURE COMPONENTS, GENERAL: A. Metal Parts: Free from burrs, sharp corners and edges. B. Sheet Metal Components: Steel, except as indicated. Form and support components to prevent warping and sagging. C. Doors, Frames, and Other Internal Access: Smooth operating and free from light leakage under operating conditions. Arrange to permit relamping without use of tools. Arrange doors, frames, lenses, diffusers and other pieces to prevent accidental falling during relamping and when secured in operating position. D. Reflecting Surfaces: Minimum reflectances as follows, except as otherwise indicated: 1. White Surfaces: 85% 2. Specular Surfaces: 83% LUMINAIRES 26 5100-5/13 Commodore Park-Phase 1 -#23173 (100% Pre-NOA)July 3, 2025 3. Diffusing Specular Surfaces: 75% 4. Laminated Silver Metallized Film: 90% E. Lenses, Diffusers, Covers, and Globes: 100% virgin acrylic plastic or water white, annealed crystal glass except as indicated. 1. Plastic: High resistance to yellowing and other changes due to aging, exposure to heat and UV radiation. 2. Lens Thickness: 0.125 inch, minimum. 2.03 SUSPENDED FIXTURE SUPPORT COMPONENTS: A. Single-Stem Hangers: 1/2-inch steel tubing with swivel ball fitting and ceiling canopy. Finish same as fixture. B. Twin-Stem Hangers: Two, '/2-inch steel tubes with single canopy arranged to mount single fixture. Finish same as fixture. C. Rod Hangers: '/4-inch diameter cadmium plated, threaded steel rod. D. Hook Hanger: Integrated assembly matched to fixture and line voltage and equipped with threaded attachment, cord and locking-type plug. 2.04 LED LIGHTING FIXTURES AND LED LAMPS A. All LED products must be UL, ETL and/or CSA listed B. All LED products must have LM-79 and LM-80 testing noted on specification sheet by an independent test lab 1. See note P this section C. All LED products should be identified as L70 and/or L90 ratings based on independent test lab data D. All outdoor pole mounted products must have surge suppression within each fixture. 1. See note P this section E. All outdoor and wet location listed products must clearly state the I rating carried on the fixture based on independent test lab data F. All LED products must be serviceable for accessable for field reapair needs LUMINAIRES 26 5100-6/13 Commodore Park-Phase 1 -#23173 (100% Pre-NOA)July 3, 2025 G. All outdoor lighting color rendering should be within a 7 step McAdams Ellipse. All outdoor lighting should be 4000 kelvin unless specifically noted 1. See note P this section H. All indoor lighting color rendering should be within a 3 step McAdams ellipse. All indoor lighting should be 4000-4100 kelvin unless specifically noted 1. See note P this section I. All control systems that interface with an LED product will be supported by a project "integrator" until project completion. This includes contact with the installer prior to installation, availability during installation, and final checkout and startup after installation. The quantity of days required for startup will be based on the manufacturer/agents discretion and need. 1. The project integrator must be capable of performing low voltage and dmx terminations. High voltage terminations are performed solely by the electrical subcontractor. 2. Reporting of final startup completion of the controls system back to the engineer is mandantory. J. Invitation to attend the training with the owners representative should be made to the engineer no less than 5 days prior to training K. Signature confirmation of training and startup is required within 5 business days after completion back to the engineers office. 1. A follow up call will be made to the owner 30-45 days after the startup and training of the controls system by the manufacturers representative to ensure all systems are operating to design specification. A 3 hour onsite system fine tuning at no additional cost to the owner is inclusive if requested by the owner at that time for additional training and programming. L. All LED drivers should be capable of 0-10 volt controls and DMX control and shall dim to 1% of total lumen output . Where specifically specified the dimming driver may be required to dim to .1% of lumen output , otherwise known as "dim to dark" M. Driver manufacturers must have a 5 year history producing dimmable electronic LED drivers for the North American market. LUMINAIRES 26 5100-7/13 Commodore Park-Phase 1 -#23173 (100% Pre-NOA)July 3, 2025 N. Ambient driver tiemperatures must be within -20 degrees to 50 degrees C (4 degrees to 122 degrees F) O. Driver must limit inrush current. 1. Base specification: meet or exceed NEMA 410 driver inrush standard of 430 amp per 10 amps load with a maximum of 370 amps/2 seconds 2. Preferred specification : Meet or exceed 30ma's at 277 VAC for up to 50 watts of load and 75A at 240us att 277 VAC for 100 watts of load 3. Withstand up to a 1,000 volt surge without impairment of performance as defined by ANSI C62.41 Category A 4. No visible change in light output with a variation of plus/minus 10% line voltage input. 5. Total harmonic distortion less than 20%, and meet ANSI C82.11 maximum allowable THD requirements at full output. THD shall at no point in the dimming curve allow imbalance current to exceed full output THD 6. See note P this section. P. Any exceptions are at the engineers discretion based on project needs and applicability. 2.05 FLUORESCENT FIXTURES: A. Fixtures: Conform to UL 1570. B. Ballasts: Electronic type. Conform to UL 935, ANSI C82.11 and NFPA 70. 1. Certification: By Electrical Testing Laboratory (ETL). 2. Labeling: By Certified Ballast Manufacturers Association (CBM). 3. Type: Class P, 0.95 P.F. minimum. 4. Sound Rating: "A" rating, except as indicated otherwise. 5. Voltage: Match connected circuits. 6. Temperature: Start and operate at minimum of 501 F. 7. THD: 10 percent maximum. C. Low Temperature Ballast: Start and maintain operation at a minimum of 0°F. D. T-8 Lamp Ballasts: Full-light output type, compatible with energy-saving lamps. Following are required average input wattages when tested according to ANSI C82.2. 1. 39 or less when operating one F32T8 lamp. 2. 62 or less when operating two F32T8 lamps. 3. 95 or less when operating three F32T8 lamps. 4. 114 or less when operating four F32T8 lamps. LUMINAIRES 26 5100-8/13 Commodore Park-Phase 1 -#23173 (100% Pre-NOA)July 3, 2025 E. Recessed fluorescent fixtures shall have 100% acrylic prismatic lenses with a minimum thickness of 0.125 inch unless otherwise indicated. 2.06 HIGH INTENSITY DISCHARGE (HID) FIXTURES: A. Fixtures: Conform to UL 1572. B. Ballasts: Conform to UL 1029 and ANSI C82.4. Provide ballasts with following features, except as otherwise indicated. 1. Constant wattage autotransformer (CWA) or regulator, high-power-factor type. 2. Voltage rating matches system voltage. 3. Single-Lamp Ballasts: Minimum starting temperature of—301 C. 4. Normal ambient operating temperature is 401 C. 5. Open circuit operation will not reduce average life. 6. Noise Suppression: Manufacturer's standard epoxy encapsulated model designed to minimize audible fixture noise. 2.07 INCANDESCENT FIXTURES: A. Conform to UL 1571. 2.08 FIXTURES FOR HAZARDOUS LOCATIONS: A. Conform to UL 844 or provide units that have Factory Mutual Engineering and Research Corporation (FM) certification for indicated class and division of hazard. 2.09 EXIT SIGNS: A. Conform to UL 924. 1. Sign Colors: Conform to local code. B. Self-Powered Exit Signs (Battery Backup): Integral automatic high/low trickle charger in self-contained power pack. 1. Battery: Sealed, maintenance-free, nickel cadmium type 1.5 hour minimum emergency run time. 2.09 EMERGENCY LIGHTING UNITS: A. Conform to UL 924. Provide self-contained units with features and characteristics as indicated on the drawings. LUMINAIRES 26 5100-9/13 Commodore Park-Phase 1 -#23173 (100% Pre-NOA)July 3, 2025 2.10 LAMPS: A. Conform to ANSI C78 series applicable to each type of lamp. B. Fluorescent Lamps: Color temperature of 35001 K. 2.11 FINISH: A. Steel Parts: Manufacturer's standard finish applied over corrosion-resistant primer, free of streaks, runs, holidays, stains, blisters and defects. Remove fixtures showing evidence of corrosion during project warranty period and replace with new fixtures. B. Other Parts: Manufacturer's standard finish. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION: A. Set units plumb, square and level with ceiling and walls, in alignment with adjacent fixtures, and secure according to manufacturer's printed instructions and approved submittals. B. Mounting heights specified or indicated shall be to the bottom of fixture for ceiling- mounted fixtures and to the center of fixture for wall-mounted fixtures. C. Obtain approval of the exact mounting for lighting fixtures on the job prior to commencing installation and, where applicable, after coordinating with the type, style and pattern of ceiling being installed. D. Where recessed fixtures are supported by ceiling support grid, install additional support wires near each corner of the fixture. E. Make branch circuit wiring connections with conductors having an insulation temperature rating suitable for the fixture. F. Ground and bond fixtures in accordance with Section 16060. G. Install lamp units according to manufacturer's instructions and fixture schedule. 3.02 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL: A. Inspect each installed fixture for damage. Replace damaged fixtures and components. LUMINAIRES 26 5100-10/13 Commodore Park-Phase 1 -#23173 (100% Pre-NOA)July 3, 2025 B. Give 7-days notice of dates and times for field tests. C. Verify normal operation of each fixture after fixtures have been installed and circuits have been energized with normal power source. D. Interrupt electrical energy to demonstrate proper operation of emergency lighting installation. 1. Duration of supply. 2. Low battery voltage shut-down. 3. Normal transfer to battery source and retransfer to normal. 4. Low supply voltage transfer. E. Replace or repair malfunctioning fixtures and components, then retest. Repeat procedure until units operate properly. 3.03 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING: A. Clean fixtures upon completion of installation. Use methods and materials recommended by manufacturer. B. Adjust aimable fixtures to provide required light intensities. C. Set and adjust photocells and/or time switches for proper operation as directed by Owner. 3.04 PRE-CONSTRUCTION JOBSITE VISIT: A. Pre-construction On-site Services to be provided by Lighting/Controls vendor/supplier: The project electrical contractor shall contact Lighting vendor/supplier to schedule a jobsite meeting prior to the installation of the lighting control system. Purposeof the meeting is to review submittals and installation documentation provided by the system manufacturer. Discussion should include wiring conventions and specific wiring requirements. Installation of specific devices is also to be addressed. Prior to start-up Lighting manufactures representative shall send a field service technician to visit the jobsite to confirm progress and answer any additional questions. Start-up date is to be confirmed at the time of this visit. Training agenda shall be provided to the contractor/distributor. Contractor/distributor shall confirm with the owner's representative and specifying engineer attendance at lighting system demonstrations and for training. Contractor/distributorshall provide to field service technician programming information as required for start- up such as but not limited to zone assignments, time schedules for operation, presets for all control stations, programming sequences for dynamic LED fixtures, emergency operation, blink-warn, LUMINAIRES 26 5100-11/13 Commodore Park-Phase 1 -#23173 (100% Pre-NOA)July 3, 2025 and system override. Programming information is required for system set-up and pre- start-up. B. Lighting Control System Start-up and Training 1. Prior to energizing lighting control system the following must be completed: No component of the lighting control system shall be energized until a factory certified field service engineer has approved the installation of the system by the project electrical contractor. The electrical contractor/distributor shall contact the Lighting vendor/supplier at least 3 weeks prior to the requested start-up date to schedule a field service technician to be at the jobsite. Request shall be in writing and shall include filled out start-up request form and dated jobsite photos of the dimmer and/or relay panels. Lighting Control system is defined as the dimmer/relay panel(s) and all associated control stations and related accessories. The electrical contractor is responsible to install the entire lighting control system, all power feeders, all load wiring, and control wiring. Equipment shall be installed according to the manufacturer's instructions, contract documents, and national and local codes and regulations. Equipment shall be plumb and level to the finished floor. All components of the lighting control system shall be clean, free of dust and paint spatters. Components shall be unmarred or damaged. All cable shall be dressed, neatly routed, and labeled. All conduit shall be securely attached to the dimmer/relay panel. Start-up services are not provided in conjunction or in association with any commissioning of lighting or other related control systems. 2. System Start-up Each dimmer/relay shall be tested by the electrical contractor (with a multi-meter) to confirm what voltage is being passed and to confirm that no voltage is being passed when the circuit is open. A representative of the owner shall be present to observe the testing/demonstration of the dimmer/relay panels. Each individual dimmer/relay panel shall be load tested with all circuits on while under load for a minimum of 1 hour. Where external devices are to be attached to the dimmer/relay panel including photocell, occupancy sensor, time clock, DMX controller, and/or control stations, operation of each device should be verified at the panel and specific circuits that are programmed to be controlled by the external device(s). Where control signals originate from the dimmer/relay panel for control of lighting fixtures, the control signal shall be tested by the electrical contractor to confirm that it is being delivered to each lighting fixture. Proper operation of the lighting fixtures LUMINAIRES 26 5100-12/13 Commodore Park-Phase 1 -#23173 (100% Pre-NOA)July 3, 2025 shall beconfirmed as part of the system testing/demonstration. 3. Training Training shall be provided for the owner's representative and contractor. Prior to start-up the owner's representative and electrical contractor/distributor shall acknowledge receipt of training agenda. The electrical contractor/distributor shall confirm that the specifying engineer has been contacted and been invited to attend the system demonstration and/or training. All product and lighting control system documentation and operation's manuals shall be provided by electrical contractor/distributor at the time of training. Training is to include, but not be limited to: basic operation of lighting control system, set-up of system and control panels, operation of control stations, programming of system, basic de-bugging, and overall system testing. At completion of training session all in attendees shall sign the start-up technician's field service report to confirm participation in the training session. Completed field service report shall be submitted to the electrical contractor/distributor and specifying engineer. 3.05 Follow-up Contact Services Approximately 90 days following the initialization of the lighting control system the Lighting/controls vendor/supplier shall contact the electrical contractor/distributor to confirm that the system is operating correctly and answer any questions that have come-up since system initialization. 3.06 Extended Follow-up Contact On-site Services Approximately 300 days following initialization of the lighting control system the Lighting/controls vendor/supplier shall contact the owner's representative in order to schedule a job site visit. The purpose of the visit shall be to confirm that all lighting control equipment that was initialized by lighting/control vendor/supplier is fully functioning. Any equipment not functioning as originally specified shall be repaired as required. In addition if the end user has adjustments that need to be made to programming or to any of the control of the system these shall be made during the jobsite visit. If further training on the system is required this shall be provided at the time of the visit or scheduled at a time of mutual convenience. A completed field service report shall be submitted to the electrical contractor, specifying engineer, and the owner's representative. END OF SECTION LUMINAIRES 26 5100-13/13 Commodore Park-Phase 1 -#23173 (100% Pre-NOA)July 3, 2025 SECTION 311100 CLEARING AND GRUBBING PART 1-GENERAL 1.01 Description A. This specification shall govern all work required for the clearing and grubbing as required to complete the project. 1.02 Related Sections A. 3122 13.10 SITE GRADING 1.03 Definitions The words defined in this section shall for the purpose of the specifications have the meanings ascribed to them A. Clearing and Grubbing - the clearing, grubbing, and stripping of objectionable matter including the removing and disposing of trees, stumps, brush, roots, vegetation, rubbish and other objectionable matter from the project site by mechanical means. PART 2-PRODUCTS [NOT USED] PART 3-EXECUTION 3.01 General A. All Work shall be in accordance with the Contract, Specifications, Drawings, Manufacturer recommendations,and industry standards. 1. In the event that one requirement conflicts with another the more stringent requirement shall be followed,unless directed otherwise by the Owner. B. The site shall be cleared of all trees, stumps, brush, roots, vegetation, rubble and other objectionable matter as indicated on Drawings,or as directed by the Owner. C. Trees,Tree Stumps and Tree Roots 1. Within Right-of-Way a. Area bounded by the lines two-feet(2')behind back of curbs 1) Shall be removed to a minimum depth of two-feet (2') below bottom of proposed road subgrade elevation. b. Area bounded by the lines two-feet(2')behind back of curbs to Right-of Way line 1) Shall be removed to a minimum depth of two-feet (2') below proposed finished grade or below natural grade,whichever is lower. 2. Beyond Right-of-Way a. Shall be removed to a minimum depth of two-feet(2')below proposed finished grade or below natural grade,whichever is lower. D. Vegetation,Humus,and Objectionable Matter 1. Areas which underlie compacted backfill shall be stripped of all vegetation, humus and other objectionable matter encountered within the top six-inches(6")of the soil. a. This material, with the exception of objectionable matter, shall be stockpiled, if feasible, and reused as surface stabilization material. 2. Objectionable matter shall be determined by the Owner and shall become the property of the Contractor and disposed of in accordance with Local,State,and Federal regulations,unless otherwise instructed by the Owner. E. Holes remaining after removal of materials shall be backfilled in accordance with Section 31 22 13.10 SITE GRADING. 3.02 Disposal of Materials A. Onsite 1. The material shall be disposed of at a disposal site as indicated on the Drawings or as directed by the Owner. 2. The Contractor is responsible for the disposal of materials in accordance with all applicable Local, State,and Federal regulations. B. Offsite 1. The material shall be disposed of at a disposal site obtained by the Contractor. CLEARING AND GRUBBING 31 11 00-1 2. All material removed from site under this operation shall become the property of the Contractor's and therefore the Contractor's responsibility for proper disposal. 3. The Contractor is responsible for the disposal of materials in accordance with all applicable Local, State,and Federal regulations. 3.03 Protection A. Existing Utilities 1. All existing utilities shall be identified and protected by the Contractor. 2. Damage to utilities shall be repaired by the Contractor at his sole expense as directed by the utility owner. B. Trees,Vegetation,Landscaping,and Other Features 1. That are designated to be preserved shall be protected by the Contractor. 2. Damage shall be repaired by the Contractor at his sole expense as directed by the Owner of the item. 3. Do not park equipment, service equipment, store materials, or disturb the root area under the branches of trees designated for preservation. C. Benchmarks,monuments,and existing structures designated to remain shall be protected. 1. Damage shall be repaired by the Contractor at his sole expense as directed by the Owner of the item. 3.04 Hazardous Materials A. If the Contractor encounters hazardous substances,industrial waste,other environmental pollutants, underground storage tanks, or conditions conducive to environmental damage, the Contractor shall immediately stop work in the area affected and report the condition to the Owner's representative in writing. B. Contractor shall not be responsible for or required to conduct any investigation, site monitoring, containment, cleanup, removal, restoration or other remedial work of any kind or nature (the "remedial work") under any applicable level, State or Federal law, regulation or ordinance, or any judicial order. C. If the Contractor agrees in writing to commence and/or prosecute some or all of the remedial work, all costs and expenses,to include any extension of the contract time, of such remedial work shall be paid by the Owner to Contractor as additional compensation. 3.05 Archeological A. In the event that archeological material is encountered during clearing and grubbing activities, the Contractor shall notify the Owner immediately and cease all work until notified by the Owner. 1. The Contract Time maybe adjusted if the work on the project is delayed. 3.06 Contamination A. In the event that contaminated material is encountered during clearing and grubbing activities, the Contractor shall notify the Owner immediately and cease all work in the contaminated area until notified by the Owner. 1. The Contract Time maybe adjusted if the work on the project is delayed. CLEARING AND GRUBBING 31 11 00-2 SECTION 312213.10 SITE GRADING PART 1-GENERAL 1.01 Description A. This specification shall govern all work required for site grading as required to complete the project. 1.02 Related Sections A. 31 11 00 CLEARING AND GRUBBING 1.03 Submittals A. Product Information 1. Clearly indicate within submittal that the product is in compliance with this and related Sections. 1.04 Definitions The words defined in this section shall for the purpose of this specification have the meanings ascribed to them. A. Site Grading-all areas beyond the right-of-way of roadways and access ways PART 2-PRODUCTS 2.01 Fill A. Shall be of similar material as to the natural occurring material onsite and approved by the Owner. B. Shall be uniform as to material,density,and moisture content. C. Shall be free of large clods,large rocks,organic matter,and other objectionable material. D. In all cases material shall be free of construction materials (concrete rubble, pipe, fiberglass, asphalt material,metal,etc.)and trash material. PART 3-EXECUTION 3.01 General A. All Work shall be in accordance with the Contract, Specifications, Drawings, Manufacturer recommendations,and industry standards. 1. In the event that one requirement conflicts with another the more stringent requirement shall be followed,unless directed otherwise by the Owner. 3.02 Site Preparation A. Prior to site grading the site shall be cleared in accordance with Section 31 11 00 CLEARING AND GRUBBING. B. Unless specified otherwise on Drawings,the existing surface shall be loosened by scarifying or plowing to a depth of not less than six-inches(6"). C. The loosened material shall be re-compacted with any fill material required for the project 3.03 Placement and Compaction A. No fill that is placed by dumping in a pile or windrow,shall be incorporated into a layer in that position; all such piles and windrows shall be moved by blading or similar method. B. All fill shall be placed in layers approximately parallel to the finish grade and in layers not in excess of six-inches(6")of un-compacted depth,unless indicated otherwise on Drawings. C. The fill shall be compacted to a density which approximates that of the existing natural ground unless indicated otherwise on Drawings. D. The Owner may order test rolling to evaluate the uniformity of compaction. E. All irregularities,depressions,and soft spots which develop shall be corrected by the Contractor. 3.04 Excess Material A. Excess material from excavation that is not incorporated into the site as fill shall become the property of the Contractor,unless indicated otherwise on the Drawings. B. The Contractor is responsible for disposal of the excess material away from the project in accordance with local,state,and federal regulations,unless indicated otherwise on the Drawings. SITE GRADING 3122 13.10-1 SECTION 312216.13 ROADWAY SUBGRADE SHAPING PART 1-GENERAL 1.01 Description A. This specification shall govern all work required for roadway subgrade shaping as required to complete the project. 1.02 Related Sections A. 31 11 00 CLEARING AND GRUBBING 1.03 References The latest edition of the referenced item below shall be used and obtained by the Contractor A. ASTM D 698-Standard Test Methods for Laboratory Compaction Characteristics of Soil Using Standard Effort(12 400 ft-lbf/ft3(600 kN-m/m3)) PART 2-PRODUCTS [NOT USED] PART 3-EXECUTION 3.01 General A. All Work shall be in accordance with the Contract, Specifications, Drawings, Manufacturer recommendations,and industry standards. 1. In the event that a requirement conflicts with another, the more stringent requirement shall be followed,unless directed otherwise by the Owner. B. Prior to performing subgrade or base course work all utilities under pavement shall be inspected and tested prior to placement. 1. The Contractor may proceed at his/her own risk, knowing that any repairs required to utilities that requires the removal and replacement of the subgrade, base, and/or pavement surface in accordance with relevant specification will be completed at the Contractors sole expense. 3.02 Stripping and Excavation A. The site shall be cleared and grubbed in accordance with Section 31 11 00 CLEARING AND GRUBBING. B. Unless otherwise noted,remove existing trees,shrubs,fences,curb,gutter,sidewalk,drives,paving,pipe and structures within the graded area which interfere with new construction of finished grading. C. All suitable excavated materials shall be utilized, insofar as practicable, in constructing the required roadway sections or in uniformly widening embankments, flattening slopes, etc., as directed by the Owner. D. Unwanted roadway excavation and roadway excavation in excess of that needed for construction shall become the property of the Contractor to be disposed of by him outside the limits of the right-of-way at a location suitable to the Owner. E. "Unsuitable"material encountered below subgrade elevation in roadway cuts,when declared unwanted by the Owner,shall be replaced as directed by the Owner with material from the roadway excavation or with other suitable material. F. Maintain moisture and density until covered by the subbase or base. G. Remove soft or wet areas found at any time,replace with suitable material,and recompact(esp.utility trenches). 3.03 Subgrade Preparation A. That area shown on the Drawings for roadway construction shall be cut to grade as indicated on the Drawings. B. Irregularities exceeding two-inches(2")in sixteen-feet(16')shall be corrected. C. Soft areas found at anytime shall be removed,replaced with acceptable material and compacted(esp.at utility trenches). D. The correct moisture density relationship shall be maintained. 3.04 Matching Grades at Right-of-Way Line A. Finished grade at the property line shall be as shown on the Drawings. B. The Owner may require a reasonable amount of filling on private property where the sidewalk grade is above the property elevation with permission from property owner. C. Use suitable material from the excavation. ROADWAY SUBGRADE SHAPING 3122 16.13-1 D. Unless otherwise directed,cuts at right-of-way lines shall be made at a maximum slope of 3:1. 3.05 Drainage A. During construction,the roadbed and ditches shall be maintained in such condition as to insure proper drainage at all times,and ditches and channels shall be so constructed and maintained as to avoid damage to the roadway section. B. All slopes that,in the judgment of the Owner,require variation shall be accurately shaped,and care shall be taken that no material is loosened below the required slopes. C. All breakage and slides shall be removed and disposed of as directed. ROADWAY SUBGRADE SHAPING 3122 16.13-2 SECTION 312216.23 CHANNEL SHAPING PART 1-GENERAL 1.01 Description A. This specification shall govern all work required for channel shaping as required to complete the project 1.02 Related Sections A. 3122 13.10 SITE GRADING B. 3124 13.10 EMBANKMENTS 1.03 Submittals A. Product Information 1. Clearly indicate within submittal that the product is in compliance with this and related Sections. PART 2-PRODUCTS 2.01 General A. Where shown on the Drawings, selected materials shall be utilized in the formation channels,in which case the work shall be performed in such manner and sequence that suitable materials may be selected, removed separately and deposited within limits and at elevations required. B. Material for fill shall be shall be in accordance with Section 3122 13.10 SITE GRADING or Section 3124 13.10 EMBANKMENTS PART 3-EXECUTION 3.01 General Information A. Excavated slopes shall be finished in conformance with the lines and grades indicated on the Drawings. B. When completed,the average plane of slopes shall conform to the slopes indicated on the Drawings and no point on completed slopes shall vary from the designated slopes by more than 0.5 foot measured at right angles to the slope,unless otherwise specified. C. In no case shall any portion of the slope encroach on the roadbed. D. The tops of excavated slopes and the end of excavation shall be rounded as shown on the Drawings. E. All suitable materials removed from the excavation shall be used,insofar as practicable,in the formation of embankments in accordance with the specification,Section 31 24 13.10 EMBANKMENTS,or shall be otherwise utilized or satisfactorily disposed of as indicated on Drawings, or as directed,and completed work shall conform to the established alignment,grades and cross sections. F. During construction, the channel shall be kept drained, insofar as practicable, and the work shall be prosecuted in a neat workmanlike manner. G. Unwanted channel excavation in excess of that needed for construction shall become the property of the Contractor and removed from the site and properly disposed of in accordance with Local, State, and Federal regulations. CHANNEL SHAPING 3122 16.23-1 SECTION 312316.13 TRENCHING PART 1-GENERAL 1.01 Description A. This specification shall govern all work required for trenching as required to complete the project. 1.02 References The latest edition of the referenced item(s) below shall be used and obtained by the Contractor A. Part 1926, Subpart P - Excavations, Trenching, and Shoring of the Occupational Safety and Health Administration (OSHA) Standards and Interpretations B. Texas Code Chapter 756 Subchapter C-Trench Safety 1.03 Submittals A. Submit a Trench Safety Program specifically for the construction of trench excavation and designed in accordance with Local,State,and Federal standards and regulations for trench safety laws. 1. Notice: Review of the safety program by the Owner will only be in regard to compliance with this specification and will not constitute, in any form, approval by the Owner nor relieve the Contractor of any obligations under Local,State,or Federal trench safety regulations. B. Construction and shop drawings containing deviations from local, state, and federal standards and regulations or special designs shall be sealed by a Registered Professional Engineer of the State of Texas and retained and paid by the Contractor. 1.04 Definitions The words defined in this section shall for the purpose of this specification have the meanings ascribed to them. A. A trench shall be defined as a narrow excavation (in relation to its depth) made below the surface of the ground. In general,the depth is greater than the width,but the width of a trench(measured at the bottom) is not greater than fifteen feet(15'). B. Trenches as used herein, shall apply to any excavation in which structures,utilities, or other items as a result of construction are placed or removed regardless of depth. C. Trench Safety Program as used herein, shall be a written and detailed plan that is developed by the Contractor with all methods and products used to provide for worker safety in excavation and trenching operations required during the project and includes all information required an in accordance with Local, State(Texas Code Chapter 756 Subchapter C-Trench Safety,but not limited to),and Federal(Part 1926, Subpart P-Excavations,Trenching,and Shoring of the Occupational Safety and Health Administration (OSHA) Standards and Interpretations,but not limited to)standards and regulations. D. The Trench Safety System shall include,but are not limited to,sloping,sheeting,trench boxes or trench shields,sheet piling,cribbing,bracing,shoring,dewatering or diversion of water to provide adequate drainage. 1.05 Indemnification A. The Contractor shall indemnify and hold harmless the Owner,its employees and agents,from any and all damages,costs (including,without limitation,legal fees,court costs,and the cost of investigation), judgments or claims by anyone for injury or death of person(s) resulting from the collapse or failure of trenches constructed under this Contract B. The Contractor acknowledges and agrees that this indemnity provision provides indemnity for the Owner,its employees and agents,in case the Owner,or its employees or agents,is negligent either by act or omission in providing for trench safety,including,but not limited to safety program and design reviews,inspections,failures to issue stop work orders,and the hiring of the Contractor. C. Review of the safety program by the Owner will only be in regard to compliance with this specification and will not constitute approval by the Owner nor relieve the Contractor of any obligations under Local,State,or Federal regulations. PART 2-PRODUCTS 2.01 All products shall be in accordance with the Trench Safety Program. TRENCHING 3123 16.13-1 PART 3-EXECUTION 3.01 General Information A. Worker Safety in excavations and trenches shall be provided by the Contractor in accordance with Occupational Safety and Health Administration(OSHA) Standards,29 CFR,in accordance with Local and State regulations,and industry standards. B. It is the sole responsibility of the Contractor,and not the Owner,to determine and monitor the specific applicability of a safety system to the field conditions to be encountered on the job site during the project. 3.02 Installation A. Install and maintain the trench safety system in accordance with the Trench Safety Program and all Local, State,and Federal provisions. B. Install specially designed trench safety systems in accordance with the Contractors trench excavation safety program for the locations and conditions identified in the program. C. A competent person,as identified in the Contractors Trench Safety Program,shall verify that trench safety equipment are certified for the actual installation conditions. 3.03 Inspection A. The Contractor or Contractors independently retained consultant, shall make daily inspections of the trench safety system(s) to ensure that the installed system(s) and operations meet the requirements of the Trench Safety Program,and Local,State,and Federal regulations. B. If evidence of possible cave-ins, slides, or trench safety system failure is apparent,the Contractor shall immediately stop work in and around the trench and move all personnel and individuals to a safe location until the necessary precautions have been taken by the Contractor to safeguard personnel entering the trench. C. The Contractor must maintain a permanent record of daily inspections on site. TRENCHING 3123 16.13-2 SECTION 312413.10 EMBANKMENT PART 1-GENERAL 1.01 Description A. This specification shall govern all work required for the furnishing,placing,and compacting materials for the construction of roadways,embankments,levees,dikes,or any designated section of the roadway where additional material is needed as required to complete the project. 1.02 Related Sections A. 31 11 00 CLEARING AND GRUBBING 1.03 References The latest edition of the referenced item below shall be used. A. Texas Department of Transportation (TxDOT) Standard Specification for Construction and Maintenance of Highways,Streets,and Bridges Item 107"Embankment" B. Texas Department of Transportation (TxDOT) Standard Specification for Construction and Maintenance of Highways,Streets,and Bridges Item 204"Sprinkling" C. Texas Department of Transportation (TxDOT) Standard Specification for Construction and Maintenance of Highways,Streets,and Bridges Item 210"Rolling" D. Texas Department of Transportation (TxDOT) Standard Specification for Construction and Maintenance of Highways,Streets,and Bridges Item 216"Proof Rolling" E. Texas Department of Transportation(TxDOT)Test Procedure TEX-104-E F. Texas Department of Transportation(TxDOT)Test Procedure TEX-106-E G. Texas Department of Transportation(TxDOT)Test Procedure TEX-107-E H. Texas Department of Transportation(TxDOT)Test Procedure TEX-115-E 1.04 Submittals A. Product Information 1. Clearly indicate within submittal that the product is in compliance with this and related Section(s). PART 2-PRODUCTS 2.01 General A. In addition to the requirement in the excavation items of the specifications covering the general selection and utilization of materials to improve the roadbed, embankments shall be constructed in proper sequence to receive the select material layers shown on the Drawings,with such modifications as may be directed by the Owner. B. The layer of embankment immediately preceding the upper layer of select material shall be constructed to the proper section and grade within a tolerance of not more than one-tenth of a foot(0.10') from the established section and grade when properly compacted and finished to receive the select material layer. 2.02 Materials A. Shall be approved on-site material capable of forming a stable embankment. B. Material shall be from on-site excavation free from vegetation or other objectionable material unless otherwise indicated on the Drawings. C. Offsite Material 1. When offsite material is to be used,the Contractor must comply with all local, state, and federal laws,ordinances,and regulations. 2. The Contractor must demonstrate and satisfy to the Owner that all permits, contracts, and legal documentation are in place prior to obtaining the material. 3. Prior to obtaining materials from offsite the Contractor shall provide all required material tests to analyze the material to insure compliance with specifications. a. When on-site excavation material is to be used and additional material from off-site is to be incorporated the materials shall be similar in properties. D. Water 1. Shall be free of objectionable materials. EMBANKMENT 3124 13.10-1 PART 3-EXECUTION 3.01 General Information A. All Work shall be in accordance with the Contract, Specifications, Drawings, Manufacturer recommendations,and industry standards. 1. In the event that one requirement conflicts with another the more stringent requirement shall be followed,unless directed otherwise by the Owner. B. Prior to placing embankment the area to be covered shall be stripped of all vegetation in accordance with Section 31 11 00 CLEARING AND GRUBBING. C. Equipment shall be applicable to conduct the work as described in this specification or as specified on the Drawings. D. Washes,gulleys,wet areas,and yielding areas shall be corrected as directed by the Owner. E. Trees,stumps,roots,vegetation or other unsuitable materials shall not be placed in embankment. F. Unless otherwise indicated on Drawings the surface of the ground which is to receive embankment shall be loosened by scarifying or plowing to depth of not less than six-inches(6"). 1. The loosened material shall be re-compacted with the new embankment as hereinafter specified. G. Each layer of embankment shall be uniform as to material,density and moisture content before beginning compaction. 3.02 Placement A. Embankment shall be placed in layers not to exceed six-inch(6")un-compacted depth and the full width of the embankment,unless otherwise noted. 1. Where embankment is adjacent to a hillside or old roadbed,the existing slope shall be cut in steps to not less than the vertical depth of an un-compacted layer of six-inches (6"). B. The fill material shall be placed from the low side and compacted. C. Each layer shall overlap the existing embankment by at least the width indicated by the embankment slope. D. Where layers of unlike materials are adjacent to each other,each layer shall be featheredged for at least 100 feet or the material shall be so mixed as to prevent abrupt changes in the soil. E. No material placed in the embankment by dumping in a pile or windrow shall be incorporated in a layer in that position,but all such piles or windrows shall be moved by blading or similar methods. F. Clods or lumps of material shall be broken and the embankment material mixed by blading,harrowing, disking or similar methods to the end that a uniform material of uniform density is secured in each layer. G. Except as otherwise required by the Drawings, all embankments shall be constructed in layers approximately parallel to the finished grade and each layer shall be so constructed as to provide a uniform slope of quarter-inch(1/4")per foot from the centerline of the embankment to the outside. 3.03 Compaction A. Each layer shall be compacted to the required density by rolling in accordance with TxDOT Item 210. B. Prior to and in conjunction with the rolling operation,each layer shall be brought to the moisture content necessary in accordance with TxDOT Item 204 to obtain the required density C. Prior to and in conjunction with the rolling operation, each layer shall be kept leveled with suitable equipment to insure uniform compaction over the entire layer. D. Rolling shall be longitudinally, begin at the sides, and proceed toward the center, overlapping on successive trips by at least 1/2 the width of the roller. E. All irregularities, depressions,weak or soft spots which develop shall be corrected immediately by the Contractor. 3.04 Density Control A. Laboratory Tests shall determine the maximum dry density(Da) and optimum moisture content(Wopt) by means of TxDOT TEX-114-E B. Field density determinations will be made in accordance with TxDOT TEX-115-E and on Table 2: Table 2 Field Density Control Requirements Description Density I Moisture Content TEX-115-E PI< 15 >_98%Da 15<PI<_35 >_98%Da and<_ 102%Da >_Wopt EMBANKMENT 3124 13.10-2 PI>35 >_95%D,and<_ 100%D, >_W'Pt C. After each layer of earth embankment or select material is complete,testing as required by the Owner will be made by the Contractor. D. If the material fails to meet the density specified,the course shall be reworked as necessary to obtain the specified compaction, and the compaction method shall be altered on subsequent work to obtain specified density. E. Such procedure shall be determined by,and subject to,the approval of the Owner. F. The Owner may order proof rolling to test the uniformity of compaction of the embankment layers. 1. Proof Rolling shall be in accordance with TxDOT Item 216 3.05 Maintenance of Moisture and Reworking A. Should the subgrade,due to any reason or cause,lose the required stability,density or moisture,before the pavement structure is placed, it shall be re-compacted and refinished at the sole expense of the Contractor. B. Excessive loss of moisture in the subgrade shall be prevented by sprinkling,sealing or covering with a subsequent layer or granular material. C. Excessive loss of moisture shall be construed to exist when the subgrade soil moisture content is more than two-percent(2%)below the optimum. EMBANKMENT 3124 13.10-3 SECTION 31 31 16 -TERMITE CONTROL PART 1-GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Soil-applied chemical treatment. 1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A. Section 3122 00-Grading. 1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. Title 7, United States Code, 136 through 136y - Federal Insecticide, Fungicide and Rodenticide Act; 2019. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Submit manufacturers'data on manufactured products showing compliance with specified requirements. B. Test Reports: Indicate regulatory agency approval reports when required. C. Manufacturer's Instructions: Indicate caution requirement. D. Installer's qualification statement. E. Executed warranty. 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer Qualifications: Company specializing in performing work of type specified, with minimum 3 years of documented experience. 1.06 WARRANTY A. Installer Warranty: Provide 2-year warranty for termite control commencing on Date of Substantial Completion. Complete forms in Owner's name and register with installer. 1. Include coverage for repairs to building and to damaged contents. Repair damage and, if required, re-treat. PART 2- PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS A. Soil-Applied Chemical Treatment: 1. Toxicant: Comply with Title 7, United States Code, 136 through 136y. TERMITE CONTROL 3131 16- 1/3 Commodore Park Improvements-Phase 1 -#23173 July 3, 2025 2. Color: Synthetically dyed for visual identification of treated soil. 3. Diluent: Recommended by toxicant manufacturer. 4. Mixes: Mix toxicant in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. 5. Manufacturers: a. Bayer Environmental Science Corp: www.bayer.com/en/agriculture/environmental- science/#sle. b. FMC Professional Solutions: www.fmcprosolutions.com/#sle. c. Syngenta Professional Products: www.syngentaprofessionaIproducts.com/#sle. d. Substitutions: See Section 0160 00- Product Requirements. PART 3- EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verify that soil surfaces are unfrozen and dry to absorb toxicant, ready to receive treatment. B. Verify final grading is complete; see Section 3122 00. C. Verify utility trenches are wide enough to receive application. 3.02 APPLICATION A. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions. B. Soil-Applied Chemical Treatment: 1. Comply with requirements of U.S. EPA and applicable state and local codes. 2. Spray-apply toxicant in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. 3. Apply toxicant at the following locations: a. Building footprint immediately prior to finish grading work outside foundations. b. Soil within 10 feet (3 m) of building perimeter immediately prior to finish grading. c. Along utility conveyances from foundation to 10 feet (3 m) of building perimeter. 3.03 PROTECTION A. Do not permit soil grading over treated work. B. Protect applications from damage after completion. Repair disturbances according to manufacturer's written instructions. END OF SECTION 31 31 16 TERMITE CONTROL 3131 16-2/3 Commodore Park Improvements-Phase 1 -#23173 July 3, 2025 THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK TERMITE CONTROL 3131 16-3/3 Commodore Park Improvements-Phase 1 -#23173 July 3, 2025 SECTION 321100 SUBGRADE AND BASE COURSE PART 1-GENERAL 1.01 Description A. This specification shall govern work required, but not limited to, the furnishing and placement of subgrade and base course(s)as required to complete the project. 1.02 Related Sections A. 32 1113.13 LIME TREATED SUBGRADE B. 32 1113.26 CEMENT TREATED SUBGRADE C. 32 1123.23 FLEXIBLE BASE COURSE 1.03 Submittals A. Product Information 1. Clearly indicate within submittal that the product is in compliance with this and related specification(s). B. Substitution of Base Course: 1. Product substitution submittal shall be in writing and submitted fourteen(14)working days prior to commencing construction of the base course and contain the following information: a. Product information conforming the requirements of the related Section, b. Design of Substituted Base Course indicating equivalence to the Base Course as indicated on the Drawings, c. Indicating other Bid Items affected by such a proposed substitution. PART 2-PRODUCTS 2.01 Subgrade A. Shall be as indicated on the Drawings. 1. If no Subgrade Treatment is indicated in the Drawings the treatment shall be as follows: a. Sand Material 1) Shall be as indicated on the Drawings. a) If not indicated on the Drawings,shall be Cement treated in accordance with Section 32 1113.26 CEMENT TREATED SUBGRADE,unless otherwise indicated by the Owner. b. Other 1) Shall be as indicated on the Drawings. a) If not indicated on the Drawings, shall be Lime treated in accordance with Section 32 11 13.13 LIME TREATED SUBGRADE,unless otherwise indicated by the Owner. 2.02 Base Course A. Shall be as indicated on the Drawings 1. Aggregate Base Course a. Shall be in accordance with Section 32 1123.13 FLEXIBLE BASE COURSE PART 3-EXECUTION 3.01 General A. All Work shall be in accordance with the Contract, Specifications, Drawings, Manufacturer recommendations,and industry standards. 1. In the event that a requirement conflicts with another, the more stringent requirement shall be followed,unless directed otherwise by the Owner. B. Prior to performing subgrade or base course work all utilities under pavement shall be inspected and tested prior to placement. 1. The Contractor may proceed at his/her own risk, knowing that any repairs required to utilities that requires the removal and replacement of the subgrade, base, and/or pavement surface in accordance with relevant specification will be completed at the Contractors sole expense. 3.02 Subgrade Treatment A. Shall be as indicated on the Drawings and in accordance with the applicable specification for the SUBGRADE AND BASE COURSE 32 11 00-1 product required. 3.03 Base Course A. Shall be as indicated on the Drawings and in accordance with the applicable specification for the product required. 3.04 Substitution of Drawing Indicated Subgrade and/or Base Course Material A. General 1. Substitution of Subgrade and/or Base Course materials, other than as indicated in the Drawings and Specifications is allowed subject to: a. A combination of strength and thickness that is equivalent to the Subgrade and/or Base Course strength and thickness as indicated in the Drawings and Specifications, b. Lines and Grades of the roadway surface must be maintained as indicated on the Drawings, including allowances for utilities, c. Owner and Engineer approval. 2. The Contractor may request the Subgrade and/or Base Course product to be substituted in accordance with Part 1 Section 1.03 of this specification. B. Effects of Substitution 1. Proposed Utilities and Existing Utilities a. If the Subgrade and/or Base Course product being substituted changes the depth required for the Subgrade and/or Base Course and as a result the horizontal and/or vertical location of utilities,as indicated on the Drawings,or determined in the field,are required to be adjusted, then: 1) The Contractor will be solely responsible for all costs associated with the changes including but not limited to; Designing, Drawing adjustments, Drawing reproduction, Specifications,Contract,Approvals,and incidentals,and, 2. Lines and Grades a. Roadway 1) If the Subgrade and/or Base Course product being substituted changes the depth required for the Subgrade and/or Base Course it is not to affect the lines and grades of the roadway and shall be maintained as indicated on the Drawings. b. Excavation 1) If the substituted Subgrade and/or Base Course product changes the depth required for the Subgrade and/or Base Course and in turn affects the quantities of existing materials to be excavated and/or filled, it shall be the sole responsibility of the Contractor to determine and to ensure that the project can be completed as per the Contract and in accordance with the Lines and Grades as shown on the Drawings. The Contractor will be solely responsible for all costs associated with the changes including but not limited to: Additional labor,materials,equipment,maintenance,disposal,and all incidental expenses required to perform the changes. SUBGRADE AND BASE COURSE 32 11 00-2 SECTION 321113.13 LIME TREATED SUBGRADE PART 1-GENERAL 1.01 Description A. This specification shall govern work required for the furnishing, mixing, compacting of Lime Treated Subgrade as required to complete the project. 1.02 References The latest edition of the referenced item below shall be used. A. Texas Department of Transportation (TxDOT) Standard Specification for Construction and Maintenance of Highways,Streets,and Bridges Item 204"Sprinkling" B. Texas Department of Transportation (TxDOT) Standard Specification for Construction and Maintenance of Highways,Streets,and Bridges Item 210"Rolling" C. Texas Department of Transportation (TxDOT) Standard Specification for Construction and Maintenance of Highways,Streets,and Bridges Item 260"Lie Treatment(Road-Mixed) D. Texas Department of Transportation (TxDOT) Test Procedure Tex-101-E Preparing Soil and Flexible Base Materials for Testing E. Texas Department of Transportation (TxDOT) Test Procedure Tex-103-E Determining Moisture Content in Soil Materials F. Texas Department of Transportation (TxDOT) Test Procedure Tex-115-E Field Method for Determining In-Place Density of Soils and Base Materials G. Texas Department of Transportation(TxDOT)Test Procedure Tex-121-E Soil-Lime Testing H. Texas Department of Transportation (TxDOT) Departmental Material Specification DMS-6350, Lime and Lime Slurry 1.03 Submittals A. Product Information 1. Clearly indicate within submittal that the product is in compliance with this and related specification(s). B. Test reports shall be as follows unless noted otherwise: 1. Submit within three (3)working days after the test is completed to the following: a. Owner, b. As directed by the Owner. 2. All test reports shall clearly indicate the following information: a. Location of area tested by the following, 1) Station, 2) Distance from Center Line, 3) Travel lane, 4) Or as otherwise specified b. Date, c. Company whom performed test, d. Person by who performed test by one of the following: 1) Name, 2) Initials, 3) Employee identification number, e. Material tested, f. Test used, g. Test values obtained, h. Indicate Pass or Fail in accordance with the Specification(s)and Drawing(s) requirements, i. Person with the testing company who has reviewed and approves the test results by all of the following: 1) Printed name 2) Signature 3) License number LIME TREATED SUBGRADE 32 11 13.13-1 PART 2-PRODUCTS 2.01 Soil A. Soil shall consist of Owner approved material, free from vegetation or other objectionable matter, encountered in the roadbed section and other acceptable material used in the preparation of the roadbed in accordance with this specification. 2.02 Lime A. In accordance with TxDOT Item 260. 2.03 Water A. Water shall be free from deleterious contaminants and other objectionable materials. B. Source of water shall be approved by the Owner. PART 3-EXECUTION 3.01 General A. It is the primary requirement of this specification to secure a completed course of treated material containing a uniform lime treated mixture,free from loose or segregated areas,of uniform density and moisture content,well bound for its full depth and with a smooth surface suitable for placing subsequent courses. B. It shall be the responsibility of the Contractor to regulate the sequence of his work, to use the proper amount of lime,maintain the work and rework the courses as necessary to meet the requirements. C. All Work shall be in accordance with the Contract, Specifications, Drawings, Manufacturer recommendations,and industry standards. 1. In the event that a requirement conflicts with another, the more stringent requirement shall be followed,unless directed otherwise by the Owner. 3.02 Equipment A. General 1. The machinery, tools and equipment necessary for proper execution of the work shall be on the project and approved by the Owner prior to the beginning of construction operations. 2. All machinery, tools, and equipment used shall be maintained in a satisfactory and workmanlike manner. 3. The Contractor shall at all times provide sufficient equipment to enable continuous execution of the work and its completion in the required number of working days. 4. The equipment provided by the Contractor shall be operated by experienced and capable workmen and shall be that necessary to provide a cement treatment meeting the requirements herein specified. B. Transportation Equipment 1. Shall be capable of hauling the material in a method recognized by the industry as being satisfactory for the material being transported. 2. Shall be of type recommended by manufacturer of product(s). 3. Equipment shall be in compliance with local,state,and federal laws and regulations. C. Rollers 1. Shall be in accordance with TxDOT Item 210. D. Storage Facility 1. Material shall be stored and handled in closed weatherproof containers until immediately before distribution. 2. If storage bins are used,they shall be completely enclosed. 3. Material in bags shall be stored in weatherproof buildings with adequate protection from ground dampness. E. Lime Slurry Equipment 1. Slurry tanks shall be equipped with agitation devices to slurry lime on the projector other approved location. F. Pulverization Equipment 1. Provide pulverization equipment that: a. Cuts and pulverizes material uniformly to the proper depth with cutters that will plane to a uniform surface over the entire width of the cut. LIME TREATED SUBGRADE 32 11 13.13-2 b. Provides a visible indication of the depth of cut at all times. c. Uniformly mixes the materials. 3.03 Material Transportation A. General 1. All material shall be transported in accordance with local,state,and federal regulations. B. Truck 1. Each truck shall have the weight of lime determined on certified scales. 2. All exit ports are to be sealed at the plant. C. Bags 1. Each bag shall bear the manufacturer's certified weight. 2. Bags varying more than five-percent(5%)from that weight maybe rejected and the average weight of bags in any shipment,as shown by weighing ten-percent(10%),with a minimum of five(5),of the bags taken at random from each pallet,shall not be less than the manufacturer's certified weight. 3.04 Preparation of Roadbed A. General 1. Before other construction operations are commenced,the roadbed shall be graded and shaped as required to construct the lime treatment for material in place in conformance with the lines,grades, thickness and typical cross section shown on the Drawings. 2. Unsuitable soil or material shall be removed and replaced with acceptable soil. 3. The subgrade shall be firm and able to support without displacing the construction equipment and the compaction hereinafter specified. 4. Soft or yielding subgrade shall be corrected and made stable before construction proceeds. B. Pulverization 1. The soil shall be pulverized so that 100%of the material passes the two and one-half-inch(2-1/2") sieve when tested from the roadway in the roadway condition by TxDOT Tex-101-E. 3.05 Placement A. General 1. It is the primary requirement of this specification to secure a completed course of treated material containing a uniform lime mixture, free from loose or segregated areas, of uniform density and moisture content, well bound for its full depth and with a smooth surface suitable for placing subsequent courses. 2. It shall be the responsibility of the Contractor to regulate the sequence of his work,to use the proper amount of lime,maintain the work and rework the courses as necessary to meet the requirements. B. Application 1. General a. Lime shall be spread only on that area where the first mixing operations can be completed during the same working day. b. Lime amount to be used is to be determined by the Contractor and approved by the Owner,if not on the Drawings. 1) Any rates indicated on the Drawings are the result of preliminary tests and shall be verified. 2) Application rate may be varied by the Owner,if conditions warrant c. Unless otherwise approved by the Owner,the lime operation shall not be started when the air temperature is below 402 F and falling,but may be started when the air temperature is above 352 F and rising. 1) The temperature will be taken in the shade and away from artificial heat 2) Lime shall not be placed when weather conditions in the opinion of the Owner are unsuitable. C. Method 1. General a. Unless otherwise shown on the Drawings,lime shall be applied at a rate in pounds of dry lime per square yards,in the form of a slurry. 2. Slurry Method a. The Lime shall be mixed with water to form a slurry with a solids content approved by the Owner. 1) Commercial Lime Slurry shall be delivered to the project in slurry form at or above the LIME TREATED SUBGRADE 32 11 13.13-3 minimum dry solids content approved by the Owner. 2) The distribution of lime at the rate(s)required shall be attained by successive passes over a measured section of roadway until the proper lime content has been secured. 3. Dry Method a. Dry placing is not allowed unless approved by the Owner and: 1) The lime is distributed by an approved spreader at the specified rate or as directed by the Owner. 2) The lime is distributed at a uniform rate and in such a manner as to reduce the scattering of lime by the wind. b. The material shall be sprinkled as approved by the Owner. c. The distribution of lime at the rate(s) required shall be attained by successive passes over a measured section of roadway until the proper lime content has been secured. d. Lime shall be applied to the roadway and water and mixing shall commence to permit uniform and intimate mixture of soil and cement and it shall not exceed the specified optimum moisture content for the soil-lime mixture. 3.06 Delivery Certification A. Certification of lime quantity and quality shall be provided as required to monitor the application. B. Certification should be in the form of weight tickets which indicate the actual weight of dry hydrated lime. 3.07 Mixing A. General 1. Mixing shall begin within six(6)hours of lime application. 2. During the interval of time between applications and mixing,hydrated lime that has been exposed to the open air for a period of six(6) hours or more or to excessive loss due to washing or blowing will not be accepted for payment. B. Initial Mixing 1. The material and lime shall be thoroughly mixed by approved road mixers or other approved equipment, and the mixing continued until, in the opinion of the Owner, a homogeneous, friable mixture of material and lime is obtained,free from all clods or lumps. 2. Materials containing plastic clays or other material which will not readily mix with lime shall be mixed as thoroughly as possible at the time of the lime application,brought to the proper moisture content and left to cure one(1)to four(4) days as directed by the Owner. 3. During the curing period,the material shall be kept moist as directed. C. Final Mixing 1. After the required curing time,the material shall be uniformly mixed by approved methods. 2. If the soil binder-lime mixture contains clods, they shall be reduced in size by raking, blading, planning,harrowing,scarifying or the use of other approved pulverization methods so that,when all nonslaking aggregates retained on the 3/4"sieve are removed,the remainder of the material shall meet the following requirements in Table 1 when tested in accordance with TxDOT Tex-101-E,Part III: Table 1 Gradation Requirements Sieve Size Minimum Percent(%)Passing 1-3/4" 100 3 4" 85 #4 60 3.08 Compaction A. General 1. Prior to the beginning of compaction,the mixture shall be in a loose condition for its full depth. 2. Compaction of the mixture shall begin immediately after final mixing and in no case later than twenty-four(24)hours after final mixing. 3. Compaction shall continue until the entire depth of mixture is uniformly compacted as hereinafter specified. 4. Bring each layer to the moisture content required. LIME TREATED SUBGRADE 32 11 13.13-4 a. At the start of compaction,the percentage of moisture in the mixture and in unpulverized soil lumps,based on over-dry weights, shall not be below or more than two (2) percentage points above the specified optimum moisture content and shall be less than that quantity which will cause the soil-lime mixture to become unstable during compaction and finishing. b. When necessary,sprinkle the material in accordance with TxDOT Item 204. S. Begin rolling longitudinally at the sides and proceed toward the center,overlapping on successive trips by at least one-half(1/2)the width of the roller unit. 6. On superelevated curves,begin rolling at the low side and progress toward the high side. 7. Offset alternate trips of the roller. 8. Operate rollers at a speed between 2 and 6 MPH,or as directed. 9. When the uncompacted soil-lime mixture is wetted by rain so that the average moisture content exceeds the tolerance given at the time of final compaction,the entire section shall be reconstructed in accordance with this specification at the sole expense of the Contractor. 10. Rework, recompact, and refinish material that fails to meet or that loses required moisture, density,stability,or finish before the next course is placed or the project is accepted. 11. Continue work until specification requirements are met. 12. Use mechanical tamps in areas inaccessible to rollers. 13. If the total thickness of the material to be treated cannot be mixed in one (1) operation, the previously mixed material shall be bladed to a windrow just beyond the area to be treated and the next layer mixed with lime as previously specified. a. The first layer of the material shall be compacted in such a manner that the treated material will not be mixed with the underlying material. 14. In addition to the requirements specified for density, the full depth of the material shown on the Drawings shall be compacted to the extent necessary to remain firm and stable under construction equipment. 15. Throughout this entire operation,the shape of the course shall be maintained by blading, and the surface,upon completion,shall be smooth and in conformity with the typical section shown on the Drawings and to the established lines and grades. 16. After each section is completed,tests as required by the Owner will be made by the Contractor. B. Density Control 1. All testing to ensure density requirements shall be completed by a testing facility that is capable of performing all the required tests and is approved by the Owner. 2. Determine the moisture content in the mixture at the beginning of and during compaction in accordance with TxDOT Tex-103-E. 3. Compact to a minimum ninety-five percent (95%) of the maximum density determined in accordance with Tex-121-E,unless otherwise shown on the Drawings. 4. The Contractor shall determine roadway density at a frequency of one (1) test per one-hundred feet (100') per lane per lift staggered, of completed travel lane sections and under the curb and gutter,unless noted otherwise,or directed by Owner. S. If the material fails to meet the density requirements,it shall be reworked as necessary to meet these requirements and retested. C. Rework 1. General a. Rework,when required to meet pulverization requirements or density. b. Reworking shall include loosening, road mixing as approved by the Owner, compacting, and finishing. c. When a section is reworked,a new optimum moisture content in accordance with TxDOT Tex- 103-E and density in accordance with Tex-121-E will be determined from the reworked material. d. Compact in accordance with Section 3.8 of this specification. e. Throughout this entire operation,the shape of the course shall be maintained by blading,and the surface,upon completion,shall be smooth and in conformity with the typical section shown on the Drawings and to the established lines and grades. 2. Within seventy-two(72)hours of final compaction a. Shall be done until compaction is met. LIME TREATED SUBGRADE 32 11 13.13-5 3. Beyond seventy-two (72)hours of final compaction a. Shall include the addition of additional lime at ten-percent(10%)to fifteen-percent(15%)of the initial application rate or as deemed necessary by the Owner. 3.09 Finishing A. General 1. Immediately after completing compaction the resulting surface shall be thoroughly rolled with a pneumatic tire roller and clipped,skinned,or tight bladed by a maintainer or subgrade trimmer to a depth of approximately quarter-inch(1/4"). 2. The surface shall then be thoroughly compacted with the pneumatic roller, adding small increments of moisture as needed during rolling until a smooth surface is attained. 3. If aggregate larger than No.4 is present in the mixture; one (1) complete coverage of the section with the flat wheel roller shall be made immediately after the clipping operation. 4. When directed by the Owner, surface finishing methods may be varied from this procedure provided a dense,uniform surface,free of surface compaction planes,is produced. S. The moisture content of the surface material must be maintained at its specified optimum during all finishing operations. 6. Surface compaction,rolling,blading and finishing shall proceed in such a manner as to produce a smooth,closely knit surface,free of cracks,ridges or loose material conforming to the crown,grade and line shown on the Drawings,within three (3)hours of initial mixing. 7. After the final layer or course of the treated material has been compacted, it shall be brought to the required lines and grades in accordance with the Drawings or as directed by the Owner. 8. Remove all loosened material from the surface of the section and dispose of it at an approved location. 9. Do not surface patch. B. Finish grade of constructed subgrade in accordance with the following grade tolerances: 1. Staged Construction a. Grade to within one-inch (1") in the cross-section and one-inch (1") in sixteen-feet (16') measured longitudinally. 2. Turnkey Construction a. Grade to within half-inch (1/2") in the cross-section and half-inch (1/2") in sixteen-feet(16') measured longitudinally. 3.10 Curing A. The completed section shall be moist cured or prevented from drying by addition of an asphalt material at the rate of 0.05 to 0.20 gallons per square yard. B. Curing shall continue for two (2) to five (5) days before further courses are added or traffic is permitted,unless otherwise approved by the Owner. C. However,the lime treated material may be covered by other courses,the day following finishing,when approved by the Owner. D. When the Drawings provide for the treated material to be covered by other courses of material,the next course shall be applied within fourteen (14) calendar days after final compaction is completed, unless otherwise approved by the Owner. 3.11 Construction Joints A. At the end of each day's construction,a straight transverse construction joint shall be formed by cutting back into the total width of completed work to form a true vertical face free of loose and shattered material. B. For large and wide areas the subgrade shall be built in a series of parallel lanes of convenient length and width meeting and approval of the Owner. 3.12 Maintenance A. The Contractor is required to maintain the subgrade in good condition until all work has been completed and accepted. B. Maintenance shall include,but not limited to,the immediate remedy of any defects,maintaining moisture content,repairing damages due to construction and/or local traffic. C. Defect Remedies 1. Low areas shall be remedied by replacing the material for the full depth of treatment,rather than adding a thin layer of material to the completed work,or as required by the Owner. LIME TREATED SUBGRADE 32 11 13.13-6 2. Faulty work shall be replaced for the full depth of treatment. 3. All Defect Remedies shall be completed at the Contractors sole expense and at no additional time allowed to the contract. 3.13 Traffic A. Local traffic and construction equipment may be allowed on the completed section if the section has had time to cure or the application of a single course surface treatment has been completed. LIME TREATED SUBGRADE 32 11 13.13-7 SECTION 321113.26 CEMENT TREATED SUBGRADE PART 1-GENERAL 1.01 Description A. This specification shall govern work required for the furnishing,mixing,compacting of Cement Treated Subgrade as required to complete the project. 1.02 References The latest edition of the referenced item below shall be used. A. ASTM C-150-Portland Cement B. Texas Department of Transportation (TxDOT) Standard Specification for Construction and Maintenance of Highways,Streets,and Bridges Item 204"Sprinkling" C. Texas Department of Transportation (TxDOT) Standard Specification for Construction and Maintenance of Highways,Streets,and Bridges Item 210"Rolling" D. Texas Department of Transportation (TxDOT) Test Procedure Tex-101-E Preparing Soil and Flexible Base Materials for Testing E. Texas Department of Transportation (TxDOT) Test Procedure Tex-103-E Determining Moisture Content in Soil Materials F. Texas Department of Transportation (TxDOT) Test Procedure Tex-115-E Field Method for Determining In-Place Density of Soils and Base Materials G. Texas Department of Transportation(TxDOT)Test Procedure Tex-120-E Soil-Cement Testing H. Texas Department of Transportation (TxDOT) Departmental Material Specification DMS-4600, Hydraulic Cement I. TxDOT's Hydraulic Cement Quality Monitoring Program(HCQMP) 1.03 Submittals A. Product Information 1. Clearly indicate within submittal that the product is in compliance with this and related specification(s). 2. Cement information shall include date information on when it was manufactured and a use-by date. B. Test reports 1. Submit within three (3)working days after the test is completed to the following: a. Owner, b. Owner,and c. As directed by the Owner. 2. All test reports shall clearly indicate the following information: a. Location of area tested by the following, 1) Station 2) Distance from Center Line 3) Travel lane. 4) Or as otherwise specified b. Date, c. Company whom performed test, d. Person by who performed test by one of the following: 1) Name, 2) Initials, 3) Employee identification number, e. Material tested, f. Test used, g. Test values obtained, h. Indicate Pass or Fail in accordance with the Specification(s) and Drawing(s) requirements, i. Person with the testing company who has reviewed and approves the test results by all of the following: 1) Printed name 2) Signature 3) License number CEMENT TREATED SUBGRADE 32 11 13.26-1 PART 2-PRODUCTS 2.01 Soil A. Soil shall consist of Owner approved material, free from vegetation or other objectionable matter, encountered in the roadbed section and other acceptable material used in the preparation of the roadbed in accordance with this specification. 2.02 Cement A. Cement shall be Type I Portland cement. B. Cement shall meet the requirements of TxDOT DMS-4600, TxDOT's Hydraulic Cement Quality Monitoring Program (HCQMP),and ASTM C-150 Type I Portland Cement. 1. Sources not on the HCQMP or other sources to be used in combination with an approved source will require approval before use. C. Cement shall be used prior to the expiration date. 2.03 Water A. Water shall be free from deleterious contaminants and other objectionable materials to the hardening of the cement treatment. B. Source of water shall be approved by the Owner. PART 3-EXECUTION 3.01 General A. It is the primary requirement of this specification to secure a completed course of treated material containing a uniform cement treated mixture,free from loose or segregated areas,of uniform density and moisture content,well bound for its full depth and with a smooth surface suitable for placing subsequent courses. B. It shall be the responsibility of the Contractor to regulate the sequence of his work, to use the proper amount of cement,maintain the work and rework the courses as necessary to meet the requirements. C. All Work shall be in accordance with the Contract, Specifications, Drawings, Manufacturer recommendations,and industry standards. 1. In the event that a requirement conflicts with another, the more stringent requirement shall be followed,unless directed otherwise by the Owner. 3.02 Equipment A. General 1. The machinery, tools and equipment necessary for proper execution of the work shall be on the project and approved by the Owner prior to the beginning of construction operations. 2. All machinery, tools, and equipment used shall be maintained in a satisfactory and workmanlike manner. 3. The Contractor shall at all times provide sufficient equipment to enable continuous execution of the work and its completion in the required number of working days. 4. The equipment provided by the Contractor shall be operated by experienced and capable workmen and shall be that necessary to provide a cement treatment meeting the requirements herein specified. B. Transportation Equipment 1. Shall be capable of hauling the material in a method recognized by the industry as being satisfactory for the material being transported. 2. Shall be of type recommended by manufacturer of product(s). 3. Equipment shall be in compliance with local,state,and federal laws and regulations. C. Rollers 1. Shall be in accordance with TxDOT Item 210. D. Storage Facility 1. Material shall be stored and handled in closed weatherproof containers until immediately before distribution. 2. If storage bins are used,they shall be completely enclosed. 3. Material in bags shall be stored in weatherproof buildings with adequate protection from ground CEMENT TREATED SUBGRADE 32 11 13.26-2 dampness. E. Cement Slurry Equipment 1. Slurry tanks shall be equipped with agitation devices to slurry cement on the project or other approved location. F. Pulverization Equipment 1. Provide pulverization equipment that: a. Cuts and pulverizes material uniformly to the proper depth with cutters that will plane to a uniform surface over the entire width of the cut. b. Provides a visible indication of the depth of cut at all times. c. Uniformly mixes the materials. 3.03 Material Transportation A. General 1. All material shall be transported in accordance with local,state,and federal regulations. B. Truck 1. Each truck shall have the weight of cement determined on certified scales. 2. All exit ports are to be sealed at the plant C. Bags 1. Each bag shall bear the manufacturer's certified weight. 2. Bags varying more than five-percent(5%)from that weight maybe rejected and the average weight of bags in any shipment,as shown by weighing ten-percent(10%),with a minimum of five(5),of the bags taken at random from each pallet,shall not be less than the manufacturer's certified weight. 3.04 Preparation of Roadbed A. General 1. Before other construction operations are commenced,the roadbed shall be graded and shaped as required to construct the cement treatment for material in place in conformance with the lines, grades,thickness and typical cross section shown on the Drawings. 2. Unsuitable soil or material shall be removed and replaced with acceptable soil. 3. The subgrade shall be firm and able to support without displacing the construction equipment and the compaction hereinafter specified. 4. Soft or yielding subgrade shall be corrected and made stable before construction proceeds. B. Pulverization 1. The soil shall be pulverized so that 100%of the material passes the two and one-half-inch(2-1/2") sieve when tested from the roadway in the roadway condition by TxDOT Tex-101-E. 3.05 Placement A. General 1. It is the primary requirement of this specification to secure a completed course of treated material containing a uniform cement mixture, free from loose or segregated areas, of uniform density and moisture content, well bound for its full depth and with a smooth surface suitable for placing subsequent courses. 2. It shall be the responsibility of the Contractor to regulate the sequence of his work,to use the proper amount of cement, maintain the work and rework the courses as necessary to meet the requirements. B. Application 1. General a. Cement shall be spread only on that area where the first mixing operations can be completed during the same working day. b. Quantity of cement to be used is to be determined by the Contractor and approved by the Owner if not on the Drawings. 1) Any rates indicated on the Drawings are the result of preliminary tests and shall be verified. 2) Application rate may be varied by the Owner,if conditions warrant. c. Unless otherwise approved by the Owner,the cement operation shall not be started when the air temperature is below 402 F and falling,but may be started when the air temperature is above 352 F and rising. 1) The temperature will betaken in the shade and away from artificial heat. 2) Cement shall not be placed when weather conditions in the opinion of the Owner are CEMENT TREATED SUBGRADE 32 11 13.26-3 unsuitable. C. Method 1. General a. Unless otherwise shown on the Drawings, cement shall be applied at a rate in pounds of dry cement per square yards,in the form of a slurry. 2. Slurry Method a. The cement shall be mixed with water to form a slurry with a solids content approved by the Owner. b. The cement shall be mixed with water in trucks with approved distributors and applied as a slurry. c. The distribution of cement at the rate(s) required shall be attained by successive passes over a measured section of roadway until the proper cement content has been secured. d. Slurry shall be applied within two (2) hours of adding water and when the roadway is at moisture content drier than optimum. 1) The percentage of moisture in the soil,at the time of cement application, shall not exceed the quantity that will permit uniform and intimate mixture of soil and cement and it shall not exceed the specified optimum moisture content for the soil cement mixture. 3. Dry Method a. Dry placing is not allowed unless approved by the Owner and: 1) The cement is distributed by an approved spreader at the specified rate or as directed by the Owner. 2) The cement is distributed at a uniform rate and in such a manner as to reduce the scattering of cement by the wind. b. The material shall be sprinkled as approved by the Owner. c. The distribution of cement at the rate(s) required shall be attained by successive passes over a measured section of roadway until the proper cement content has been secured. d. Cement shall be applied to the roadway and water and mixing shall commence to permit uniform and intimate mixture of soil and cement and it shall not exceed the specified optimum moisture content for the soil-cement mixture. 3.06 Delivery Certification A. Certification of cement quantity and quality shall be provided as required to monitor the application. B. Certification should be in the form of weight tickets which indicate the actual weight of dry cement. 3.07 Mixing A. General 1. Portland cement treatment for materials in place may be constructed with any machine or combination of machines and auxiliary equipment that will produce results as outlined in this specification. 2. Mixing shall begin immediately once cement is applied. 3. The mixer shall in one(1)continuous operation mix the soil and cement full depth,and the required moisture uniformly,thoroughly moist-mix the soil,cement and water,until a homogeneous mixture is obtained 4. The mixer shall spread the completed soil cement mixture evenly over the machine processed width of the subgrade and leave it in a loose condition ready for immediate compaction. S. The soil and cement mixture shall not remain undisturbed,after mixing and before compacting,for more than 30 minutes. B. Moisture 1. The mixture shall be sprinkled in accordance with TxDOT Item 204 to maintain optimum mixing moisture. C. The soil shall be mixed so that,the material will meet the following requirement in Table 1 when tested from the oadway in the roadway condition by TxDOT Tex-101-E. Table 1 Gradation Re uirements Sieve Size Minimum Percent % Passing 1-3 4" 100 3 4" 85 CEMENT TREATED SUBGRADE 32 11 13.26-4 #4 60 3.08 Compaction A. General 1. Prior to the beginning of compaction,the mixture shall be in a loose condition for its full depth. 2. Compaction of the mixture shall begin immediately after mixing and be complete within two (2) hours after the application of cement. 3. Compaction shall continue until the entire depth of mixture is uniformly compacted as hereinafter specified. 4. Bring each layer to the moisture content required. a. At the start of compaction, the percentage of moisture in the mixture and in unpulverized soil lumps,based on over-dry weights, shall not be below or more than two (2) percentage points above the specified optimum moisture content and shall be less than that quantity which will cause the soil-cement mixture to become unstable during compaction and finishing. b. When necessary,sprinkle the material in accordance with TxDOT Item 204. S. Begin rolling longitudinally at the sides and proceed toward the center,overlapping on successive trips by at least one-half(1/2)the width of the roller unit. 6. On superelevated curves,begin rolling at the low side and progress toward the high side. 7. Offset alternate trips of the roller. 8. Operate rollers at a speed between 2 and 6 MPH,or as directed. 9. When the uncompacted soil-cement mixture is wetted by rain so that the average moisture content exceeds the tolerance given at the time of final compaction,the entire section shall be reconstructed in accordance with this specification at the sole expense of the Contractor. 10. Rework, recompact, and refinish material that fails to meet or that loses required moisture, density,stability,or finish before the next course is placed or the project is accepted. 11. Continue work until specification requirements are met. 12. Use mechanical tamps in areas inaccessible to rollers. 13. If the total thickness of the material to be treated cannot be mixed in one (1) operation, the previously mixed material shall be bladed to a windrow just beyond the area to be treated and the next layer mixed with cement as previously specified. a. The first layer of the material shall be compacted in such a manner that the treated material will not be mixed with the underlying material. 14. In addition to the requirements specified for density, the full depth of the material shown on the Drawings shall be compacted to the extent necessary to remain firm and stable under construction equipment. 15. Throughout this entire operation,the shape of the course shall be maintained by blading, and the surface,upon completion,shall be smooth and in conformity with the typical section shown on the Drawings and to the established lines and grades. 16. After each section is completed,tests as necessary will be made by the Contractor. B. Density Control 1. All testing to ensure density requirements shall be completed by a testing facility that is capable of performing all the required tests and is approved by the Owner. 2. Determine the moisture content in the mixture at the beginning of and during compaction in accordance with TxDOT Tex-103-E. 3. Compact to a minimum ninety-five percent (95%) of the maximum density determined in accordance with Tex-121-E,unless otherwise shown on the Drawings. 4. The Contractor shall determine roadway density at a frequency of one (1) test per one-hundred feet (100') per lane per lift staggered, of completed travel lane sections and under the curb and gutter,unless noted otherwise,or directed by Owner. S. If the material fails to meet the density requirements,it shall be it shall be reworked as necessary to meet these requirements and retested. C. Rework 1. General a. Rework,when required to meet pulverization requirements or density. b. Reworking shall include loosening, road mixing as approved by the Owner, compacting, and finishing. CEMENT TREATED SUBGRADE 32 11 13.26-5 c. When a section is reworked,a new optimum moisture content in accordance with TxDOT Tex- 103-E and density in accordance with Tex-121-E will be determined from the reworked material. d. Compact in accordance with Section 3.8 of this specification. e. Throughout this entire operation,the shape of the course shall be maintained by blading,and the surface,upon completion,shall be smooth and in conformity with the typical section shown on the Drawings and to the established lines and grades. f. Shall include the addition of additional cement at the initial application rate or as deemed necessary by the Owner. 3.09 Finishing A. General 1. Immediately after completing compaction the resulting surface shall be thoroughly rolled with a pneumatic tire roller and clipped,skinned,or tight bladed by a maintainer or subgrade trimmer to a depth of approximately quarter-inch(1/4"). 2. The surface shall then be thoroughly compacted with the pneumatic roller, adding small increments of moisture as needed during rolling until a smooth surface is attained. 3. If aggregate larger than No.4 is present in the mixture; one (1) complete coverage of the section with the flat wheel roller shall be made immediately after the clipping operation. 4. When directed by the Owner, surface finishing methods may be varied from this procedure provided a dense,uniform surface,free of surface compaction planes,is produced. S. The moisture content of the surface material must be maintained at its specified optimum during all finishing operations. 6. Surface compaction,rolling,blading and finishing shall proceed in such a manner as to produce a smooth,closely knit surface,free of cracks,ridges or loose material conforming to the crown,grade and line shown on the Drawings,within three (3)hours of initial mixing. 7. After the final layer or course of the treated material has been compacted, it shall be brought to the required lines and grades in accordance with the Drawings or as directed by the Owner. 8. Remove all loosened material from the surface of the section and dispose of it at an approved location. 9. Do not surface patch. B. Finish grade of constructed subgrade in accordance with the following grade tolerances: 1. Staged Construction a. Grade to within one-inch (1") in the cross-section and one-inch (1") in sixteen-feet (16') measured longitudinally. 2. Turnkey Construction a. Grade to within half-inch (1/2") in the cross-section and half-inch (1/2") in sixteen-feet(16') measured longitudinally. 3.10 Curing A. The completed section shall be moist cured or prevented from drying by: 1. Sprinkling in accordance with TxDOT Item 204,and/or 2. Addition of an asphalt material at the rate of O.OS to 0.20 gallons per square yard. B. Moisture content shall be maintained at no lower than 2.S percentage points below optimum. C. Curing shall continue for at least three(3)days before further courses are added or traffic is permitted, unless otherwise approved by the Owner. D. When the Drawings provide for the treated material to be covered by other courses of material,the next course shall be applied within fourteen (14) calendar days after final compaction is completed, unless otherwise approved by the Owner. 3.11 Construction joints A. At the end of each day's construction,a straight transverse construction joint shall be formed by cutting back into the total width of completed work to form a true vertical face free of loose and shattered material. B. For large and wide areas the subgrade shall be built in a series of parallel lanes of convenient length and width meeting and approval of the Owner. 3.12 Maintenance CEMENT TREATED SUBGRADE 32 11 13.26-6 A. The Contractor is required to maintain the subgrade in good condition until all work has been completed and accepted. B. Maintenance shall include,but not limited to,the immediate remedy of any defects,maintaining moisture content,repairing damages due to construction and/or local traffic. C. Defect Remedies 1. Low areas shall be remedied by replacing the material for the full depth of treatment,rather than adding a thin layer of material to the completed work,or as required by the Owner. 2. Faulty work shall be replaced for the full depth of treatment. 3. All Defect Remedies shall be completed at the Contractors sole expense and at no additional time allowed to the contract. 3.13 Traffic A. Local traffic and construction equipment may be allowed on the completed section if the section has had time to cure or the application of a single course surface treatment has been completed. CEMENT TREATED SUBGRADE 32 11 13.26-7 SECTION 321123 FLEXIBLE BASE COURSE PART 1-GENERAL 1.01 Description A. This specification shall govern work required for the furnishing and placing Flexible Base Course as required to complete the project. 1.02 Related Sections A. 32 1100 SUBGRADE AND BASE COURSE B. 32 1113.13 LIME TREATED SUBGRADE C. 32 1113.26 CEMENT TREATED SUBGRADE D. 32 12 13.19 PRIME COAT 1.03 References The latest edition of the referenced item below shall be used. A. AASHTO T193-Standard Method of Test for The California Bearing Ratio B. ASTM C-131-Standard Test Method for Resistance to Degradation of Small-Size Coarse Aggregate by Abrasion and Impact in the Los Angeles Machine C. ASTM C-150-Standard Specification for Portland Cement D. ASTM D-1557 - Standard Test Methods for Laboratory Compaction Characteristics of Soil Using Modified Effort E. Texas Department of Transportation (TxDOT) Standard Specification for Construction and Maintenance of Highways,Streets,and Bridges Item 204"Sprinkling" F. Texas Department of Transportation (TxDOT) Standard Specification for Construction and Maintenance of Highways,Streets,and Bridges Item 210"Rolling" G. Texas Department of Transportation (TxDOT) Standard Specification for Construction and Maintenance of Highways,Streets,and Bridges Item 247"Flexible Base" H. Texas Department of Transportation (TxDOT) Test Procedure Tex-101-E Preparing Soil and Flexible Base Materials for Testing I. Texas Department of Transportation (TxDOT) Test Procedure Tex-103-E Determining Moisture Content in Soil Materials J. Texas Department of Transportation (TxDOT) Test Procedure Tex-104-E Determining Liquid Limits of Soils K. Texas Department of Transportation (TxDOT) Test Procedure Tex-106-E Calculating the Plasticity Index of Soils L. Texas Department of Transportation(TxDOT)Test Procedure Tex-110-E Particle Size Analysis of Soils M. Texas Department of Transportation (TxDOT) Test Procedure Tex-115-E Field Method for Determining In-Place Density of Soils and Base Materials N. Texas Department of Transportation (TxDOT) Test Procedure Tex-406-A Material Finer Than 75 mm (No. 200) Sieve in Mineral Aggregates(Decantation Test For Concrete Aggregates) 0. Texas Department of Transportation (TxDOT) Test Procedure Tex-460-A Determining Crushed Face Particle Count P. Texas Department of Transportation (TxDOT) Departmental Material Specification DMS-4600, Hydraulic Cement Q. Texas Department of Transportation (TxDOT) Departmental Material Specification DMS-6350, Lime and Lime Slurry R. Texas Department of Transportation (TxDOT) Departmental Material Specification DMS-11000, Evaluating and Using Nonhazardous Recyclable Materials Guidelines S. TxDOT's Hydraulic Cement Quality Monitoring Program(HCQMP) 1.04 Submittals A. Product Information 1. Clearly indicate within submittal that the product is in compliance with this and related specification(s). B. Design Mix Information 1. Clearly indicate within submittal the following: a. Gradation b. Admixture Ratio (if admixture is required) FLEXIBLE BASE COURSE 32 11 23-1 C. The Texas Required Base Thickness d. Addition information as directed by Owner C. Test reports 1. Submit within three (3)working days after the test is completed to the following: a. Owner b. Owner,and c. As directed by the Owner 2. All test reports shall clearly indicate the following information: a. Location of area tested by the following, 1) Station 2) Distance from Center Line 3) Travel lane designation 4) Or as otherwise specified b. Date c. Weather 1) Temperature 2) General weather conditions d. Company whom performed test e. Person by who performed test by one of the following: 1) Name 2) Initials 3) Employee identification number f. Material tested g. Test used h. Test values obtained i. Indicate Pass or Fail in accordance with the Specification(s)and Drawing(s) requirements j. Person with the testing company who has reviewed and approves the test results by all of the following: 1) Printed name 2) Signature 3) License number PART 2-PRODUCTS 2.01 Base Material A. Shall be Type A, Grade 1, in accordance with TxDOT Item 247, unless otherwise indicated on the Drawings or by the Owner. 2.02 Water A. Water shall be free from deleterious contaminates and other objectionable materials. B. Source of water shall be approved by the Owner. 2.03 Prime Coat A. Shall be bituminous material in accordance with Section 32 12 13.19 PRIME COAT. PART 3-EXECUTION 3.01 General A. It is the primary requirement of this specification to secure a completed course of treated material containing a uniform mixture free from loose or segregated areas, of uniform density and moisture content,well bound for its full depth and with a smooth surface suitable for placing subsequent courses. B. It shall be the responsibility of the Contractor to regulate the sequence of his work to process a sufficient quantity of material to provide full depth as shown on Drawings,to use the proper amount of chemical stabilization material(if required),maintain the work and rework the courses as necessary to meet the above requirements. C. All Work shall be in accordance with the Contract, Specifications, Drawings, Manufacturer recommendations,and industry standards. FLEXIBLE BASE COURSE 32 11 23-2 1. In the event that a requirement conflicts with another, the more stringent requirement shall be followed,unless directed otherwise by the Owner. 3.02 Equipment A. General 1. The machinery,tools and equipment necessary for the proper construction of the work shall be on the project,and be approved by the Owner. 2. All machinery, tools, and equipment used shall be maintained in a satisfactory and workmanlike manner. 3. The Contractor shall at all times provide sufficient equipment to enable continuous execution of the work and its completion in the required number of working days. 4. The equipment provided by the Contractor shall be operated by experienced and capable workmen and shall be that necessary to provide a cement treatment meeting the requirements herein specified. B. Transportation Equipment 1. Shall be capable of hauling the material in a method recognized by the industry as being satisfactory for the material being transported. 2. Shall be of type recommended by manufacturer of product(s). 3. Equipment shall be in compliance with local,state,and federal laws and regulations. C. Rollers 1. Shall be in accordance with TxDOT Item 210. 3.03 Material Transportation A. General 1. All material shall be transported in accordance with local,state,and federal regulations. B. Truck 1. Each truck shall have the weight/quantity of material determined on certified scales or a Owner approved method. 3.04 Preparation of Roadbed A. Before placing base course, the subgrade shall be graded and shaped in conformance with the lines, grades,thickness and typical cross section as shown on the Drawings,in accordance with Section 32 11 13.13 LIME TREATED SUBGRADE or Section 32 11 13.26 CEMENT TREATED SUBGRADE, and/or as indicated on the Drawings or as directed by the Owner. B. Unsuitable soil or material shall be removed and replaced with acceptable soil. C. The subgrade shall be firm and able to support without displacing the construction equipment and the compaction hereinafter specified. D. Soft or yielding subgrade shall be corrected and made stable before construction proceeds. 3.05 Test Section A. The Contractor shall be required to construct a"Test Section". B. The first section of base shall serve as a test section. C. Its length shall be between 300 and SOO linear feet single lane width. D. Evaluation of the equipment and procedure will be done during this section. E. In case it is found that the work is not satisfactory with respect to the specification requirements, the Contractor shall revise his procedures and augment or replace equipment as necessary to assure work completed in accordance with the specifications. F. Additional test sections may be required as directed by the Owner. G. Test sections not conforming to the requirements of the specifications shall be reconstructed. 3.06 Delivery Certification A. Certification of all materials quantity and quality shall be provided as required to monitor the application. B. Certification should be in the form of weight tickets which indicate the actual weight of material. 3.07 Placing A. Spread and shape the material into a uniform layer with an approved spreader the same day it is delivered unless otherwise approved. B. Construct loose material layers that are a maximum of six-inches(6")in thickness. C. Maintain the shape of the course. D. Sprinkle in accordance with TxDOT Item 204 to control dust. 3.08 Compaction FLEXIBLE BASE COURSE 32 11 23-3 A. General 1. Prior to the beginning of compaction,the mixture shall be in a loose condition for its full depth for a maximum depth of six-inches(6"). 2. Compaction shall continue until the entire depth of mixture is uniformly compacted as hereinafter specified. 3. Bring each layer to the moisture content required. a. At the start of compaction,the percentage of moisture in the mixture and in unpulverized soil lumps,based on over-dry weights, shall not be below or more than two (2) percentage points above the specified optimum moisture content and shall be less than that quantity which will cause the soil cement mixture to become unstable during compaction and finishing. b. Maintain moisture content within three-percent(3%) of optimum on the wet side. 1) When necessary,sprinkle the material in accordance with TxDOT Item 204. 4. Begin rolling longitudinally at the sides and proceed toward the center,overlapping on successive trips by at least one-half(1/2)the width of the roller unit. S. On superelevated curves,begin rolling at the low side and progress toward the high side. 6. Offset alternate trips of the roller. 7. Operate rollers at a speed between 2 and 6 MPH,or as directed. 8. When the uncompacted soil mixture is wetted by rain so that the average moisture content exceeds the tolerance given at the time of final compaction, the entire section shall be reconstructed in accordance with this specification at the sole expense of the Contractor. 9. Rework, recompact, and refinish material that fails to meet or that loses required moisture, density,stability,or finish before the next course is placed or the project is accepted. 10. Continue work until specification requirements are met. 11. Use mechanical tamps in areas inaccessible to rollers. 12. In addition to the requirements specified for density, the full depth of the material shown on the Drawings shall be compacted to the extent necessary to remain firm and stable under construction equipment. 13. Throughout this entire operation,the shape of the course shall be maintained by blading, and the surface,upon completion,shall be smooth and in conformity with the typical section shown on the Drawings and to the established lines and grades. 14. After each section is completed,tests as necessary will be made by the Contractor. 3.02 Density Control A. All testing to ensure density requirements shall be completed by a testing facility that is capable of performing all the required tests and is approved by the Owner. B. Determine the moisture content in the mixture at the beginning of and during compaction in accordance with TxDOT Tex-103-E. C. Compact to a minimum ninety-five percent(95%) of the maximum density determined in accordance with Tex-121-E,unless otherwise shown on the Drawings. D. The Contractor shall determine roadway density at a frequency of one (1) test per one-hundred feet (100') per lane per lift staggered, of completed travel lane sections and under the curb and gutter, unless noted otherwise,or directed by Owner. E. If the material fails to meet the density requirements,it shall be it shall be reworked as necessary to meet these requirements and retested. 3.09 Finishing A. General 1. Immediately after completing compaction the resulting surface shall be thoroughly rolled with a pneumatic tire roller and clipped,skinned,or tight bladed by a maintainer or subgrade trimmer to a depth of approximately quarter-inch(1/4"). 2. The surface shall then be thoroughly compacted with the pneumatic roller,adding small increments of moisture as needed during rolling until a smooth surface is attained. 3. If aggregate larger than No.4 is present in the mixture;one(1)complete coverage of the section with the flat wheel roller shall be made immediately after the clipping operation. 4. When directed by the Owner,surface finishing methods maybe varied from this procedure provided a dense,uniform surface,free of surface compaction planes,is produced. FLEXIBLE BASE COURSE 32 11 23-4 S. The moisture content of the surface material must be maintained at its specified optimum during all finishing operations. 6. Surface compaction, rolling, blading and finishing shall proceed in such a manner as to produce a smooth,closely knit surface,free of cracks,ridges or loose material conforming to the crown,grade and line shown on the Drawings,within three(3)hours of initial mixing. 7. After the final layer or course of the material has been compacted, it shall be brought to the required lines and grades in accordance with the Drawings or as directed. 8. Remove all loosened material from the section and dispose of it at an approved location. 9. Do not surface patch. B. Finish grade of constructed subgrade in accordance with the following grade tolerances: 1. Staged Construction a. Grade to within half-inch (1/2") in the cross-section and half-inch (1/2") in sixteen-feet(16') measured longitudinally. 2. Turnkey Construction a. Grade to within quarter-inch (1/4") in the cross-section and quarter-inch (1/4") in sixteen- feet(16') measured longitudinally. 3.10 Prime Coat A. Shall be in accordance with Section 32 12 13.19 PRIME COAT 3.11 Construction joints A. At the end of each day's construction,a straight transverse construction joint shall be formed by cutting back into the total width of completed work to form a true vertical face free of loose and shattered material. B. For large and wide areas the subgrade shall be built in a series of parallel lanes of convenient length and width meeting and approval of the Owner. 3.12 Maintenance A. The Contractor is required to maintain the base in good condition until all work has been completed and accepted. B. Maintenance shall include,but not limited to,the immediate remedy of any defects,maintaining moisture content,repairing damages due to construction and/or local traffic. C. Defect Remedies 1. Low areas shall be remedied by replacing the material for the full depth of treatment,rather than adding a thin layer of material to the completed work,or as required by the Owner. 2. Faulty work shall be replaced for the full depth of treatment. 3. All Defect Remedies shall be completed at the Contractors sole expense and at no additional time allowed to the contract. 3.13 Traffic A. The Contractor shall not be permitted to drive heavy equipment over completed portions,but pneumatic- tired equipment required for hauling cement,and water may be permitted after the surface has hardened sufficiently to prevent the equipment from marring the surface,provided protection and cover specified herein are not impaired. B. The base may be opened to local traffic as soon as the prime coat has been applied and sanded or cured as necessary to prevent it from being picked up by traffic. C. It may be opened to all traffic after seven(7)calendar days. 1. Surface course shall be applied prior to opening to through traffic. FLEXIBLE BASE COURSE 32 11 23-5 SECTION 32 12 13.19 PRIME COAT PART 1-GENERAL 1.01 Description A. This specification shall govern work required for the application of asphalt material on the completed base course and/or other approved areas as required to complete the project. 1.02 References The latest edition of the referenced item below shall be used. A. Texas Department of Transportation (TxDOT) Standard Specification for Construction and Maintenance of Highways,Streets,and Bridges Item 210"Rollers" B. Texas Department of Transportation (TxDOT) Standard Specification for Construction and Maintenance of Highways,Streets,and Bridges Item 300"Asphalts,Oils,and Emulsions" C. Texas Department of Transportation (TxDOT) Standard Specification for Construction and Maintenance of Highways,Streets,and Bridges Item 310"Prime Coat" D. Texas Department of Transportation (TxDOT) Test Procedure Tex-922-K "Calibrating Asphalt Distribution Equipment" 1.03 Submittals A. Product Information 1. Clearly indicate within submittal that the product is in compliance with this and related specification(s). B. Bituminous material manufacturer information and recommendations. C. Equipment information as required. PART 2-PRODUCTS 2.01 Bituminous Material A. The material used shall be MC-30 in accordance with TxDOT Item 300,unless otherwise specified on the Drawings or directed by the Owner. 2.02 Blotter Material A. Unless otherwise shown on the Drawings or approved,use either: 1. Native sand 2. Base course sweepings obtained from cleaning the base PART 3-EXECUTION 3.01 General Information A. Prime coat shall be applied when the air temperature is 60'F and above,or is above SO'F and is rising. 1. The air temperature being taken in the shade and away from artificial heat. B. Material shall not be placed when general weather conditions, in the opinion of the Owner, are not suitable. C. Do not permit traffic,hauling,or placement of any subsequent courses shall be permitted over the freshly applied prime coat until authorized by the Owner. D. The Contractor shall be responsible for the maintenance of the surface until placement of subsequent courses or the Owner accepts the work. E. All Work shall be in accordance with the Contract, Specifications, Drawings, Manufacturer recommendations,and industry standards. 1. In the event that a requirement conflicts with another, the more stringent requirement shall be followed,unless directed otherwise by the Owner. 3.02 Equipment A. General 1. All storage tanks, piping, retorts, booster tanks and distributors used in storing or handling bituminous material shall be kept clean and in good operating condition at all times,and they shall be operated in such manner that there will be no contamination of the bituminous material with foreign material. PRIME COAT 32 12 13.19-1 2. It shall be the responsibility of the Contractor to provide and maintain in good working order a recording thermometer at the storage-heating unit at all times. 3. The Contractor shall provide all necessary facilities for determining the temperature of the bituminous material in all of the heating equipment and in the distributor,for determining the rate at which it is applied,and for securing uniformity at the junction of two(2)distributor loads. B. Distributor 1. Furnish a distributor that will apply the bituminous material uniformly at the specified rate or as directed. 2. Calibration a. Furnish to the Owner a distributor test report,no more than six(6)months old,documenting that the variation in output for individual nozzles of the same size does not exceed ten percent (10%)when tested at the greatest shot width in accordance with Tex-922-K. b. Include the following documentation on the test report: 1) The serial number of the distributor 2) A method that identifies the actual nozzle set used in the test 3) The fan width of the nozzle set at a twelve-inch(12")bar height 3. Transverse Variance Rate a. When a transverse variance rate is shown on the Drawings,confirm that the nozzles outside the wheel paths will output a predetermined percentage more of bituminous material by volume than the nozzles over the wheel paths. b. When a transverse variance rate is required, perform the test using the type and grade of bituminous material to be used on the project. c. The Owner may verify the transverse rate and distribution at any time. 1) If verification does not meet the requirements,correct deficiencies and furnish anew test report. C. Tank Volume 1. Furnish a volumetric calibration and strap stick for the distributor tank in accordance with Tex- 922-K,"Calibrating Asphalt Distribution Equipment,"Part I. 2. Calibrate the distributor within the previous three(3)years of the date first used on the project. 3. The Owner may verify calibration accuracy in accordance with TxDOT Tex-922-K. D. Computerized Distributor 1. When paying for bituminous material by weight, the Owner may allow use of the computerized distributor display to verify application rates. 2. Verify application rate accuracy at a frequency acceptable to the Owner. E. Broom 1. Furnish rotary,self-propelled brooms. F. Rollers 1. Rollers provided shall meet the requirements for their type as shown in TxDOT Item 210. G. Digital Measuring Instrument 1. Furnish a vehicle with a calibrated digital-measuring instrument accurate to±6 ft.per mile. 3.03 Surface Preparation A. When,in the opinion of the Owner,the base and/or area is satisfactory to receive the prime coat,the surface may be cleaned by sweeping or other approved methods. B. If found necessary by the Owner,the surface shall be lightly sprinkled with water just prior to application of the bituminous material to control dust and ensure absorption. 3.04 Application A. Bituminous 1. The material shall be applied on the clean surface by an approved type of self-propelled pressure distributor so operated as to distribute the material in the quantity specified,evenly and smoothly under a pressure necessary for proper distribution. 2. Shall be applied at a temperature within the recommended range per TxDOT Item 300. a. Apply material within 15'F of the selected temperature. 3. Distribute the material smoothly and evenly at a pressure necessary for proper distribution at an application rate not exceed 0.20 gallon per square yard of surface,unless otherwise specified. 4. After beginning of the work, should the yield on the bituminous material applied appear to be in PRIME COAT 32 12 13.19-2 error,the distributor shall be calibrated in a manner satisfactory to the Owner before proceeding with the work. 5. During the application of the material,the Contractor shall take precautions to prevent splattering of adjacent pavement,curb,gutter,and structures. 6. When directed roll the freshly applied material with a pneumatic-tire roller to ensure penetration. B. Blotter 1. Shall be spread in areas as directed by the Owner before allowing traffic to use the primed surface. 2. Remove blotter material prior to placing subsequent courses. 3.05 Disposal of Materials A. Disposal of all materials shall be in accordance with local,state,and federal regulations,and will be the responsibility of the Contractor. PRIME COAT 32 12 13.19-3 SECTION 32 12 16.13 PLANT-MIX ASPHALT PAVING PART 1-GENERAL 1.01 Description A. This specification shall govern work required for the furnishing and installation of plant-mix asphalt paving as required to complete the project. 1.02 Related Sections A. 32 12 13.19 PRIME COAT 1.03 References The latest edition of the referenced item below shall be used. A. Texas Department of Transportation (TxDOT) Standard Specification for Construction and Maintenance of Highways,Streets,and Bridges Item 210"Rolling" B. Texas Department of Transportation (TxDOT) Standard Specification for Construction and Maintenance of Highways,Streets,and Bridges Item 300"Asphalts,Oils,and Emulsions" C. Texas Department of Transportation (TxDOT) Standard Specification for Construction and Maintenance of Highways,Streets,and Bridges Item 320"Equipment for Asphalt Concrete Pavement" D. Texas Department of Transportation (TxDOT) Standard Specification for Construction and Maintenance of Highways,Streets,and Bridges Item 340"Dense-Graded Hot Mix Asphalt(Method)" E. Texas Department of Transportation (TxDOT) Standard Specification for Construction and Maintenance of Highways,Streets,and Bridges Item 341"Dense-Graded Hot Mix Asphalt(QC/QA)" F. Texas Department of Transportation (TxDOT) Test Procedure Tex-106-E, Calculating the Plasticity Index of Soils G. Texas Department of Transportation(TxDOT) Test Procedure Tex-107-E,Determining the Bar Linear Shrinkage of Soils H. Texas Department of Transportation(TxDOT)Test Procedure Tex-203-F,Sand Equivalent Test 1. Texas Department of Transportation (TxDOT) Test Procedure Tex-207-F, Determining Density of Compacted Bituminous Mixtures J. Texas Department of Transportation (TxDOT) Test Procedure Tex-212-F, Determining Moisture Content of Bituminous Mixtures K. Texas Department of Transportation (TxDOT) Test Procedure Tex-217-17, Determining Deleterious Material and Decantation Test for Coarse Aggregates L. Texas Department of Transportation (TxDOT) Test Procedure Tex-227-F, Theoretical Maximum Specific Gravity of Bituminous Mixtures M. Texas Department of Transportation (TxDOT) Test Procedure Tex-236-F, Determining Asphalt Content from Asphalt Paving Mixtures by the Ignition Method N. Texas Department of Transportation(TxDOT)Test Procedure Tex-243-F,Tack Coat Adhesion 0. Texas Department of Transportation (TxDOT) Test Procedure Tex-408-A, Organic Impurities in Fine Aggregate for Concrete P. Texas Department of Transportation (TxDOT) Test Procedure Tex-410-A, Abrasion of Coarse Aggregate Using the Los Angeles Machine Q. Texas Department of Transportation (TxDOT) Test Procedure Tex-411-A, Soundness of Aggregate Using Sodium Sulfate or Magnesium Sulfate R. Texas Department of Transportation (TxDOT) Test Procedure Tex-460-A, Determining Crushed Face Particle Count S. Texas Department of Transportation (TxDOT) Test Procedure Tex-461-A, Degradation of Coarse Aggregate by Micro-deval Abrasion T. Texas Department of Transportation(TxDOT) Bituminous Rated Source Quality Catalog(BRSQC) 1.04 Submittals A. Product Information 1. Clearly indicate within submittal that the product is in compliance with this and related specification(s). B. Mixture design report C. Quality Control Plan(QCP) D. Truck"Pay Tickets" PLANT-MIX ASPHALT PAVING 32 12 16.13-1 PART 2-PRODUCTS 2.01 General A. All products shall be in accordance with TxDOT Item 340,unless otherwise indicated on the Drawings of by the Owner. B. All sources and materials shall be TxDOT approved. PART 3-EXECUTION 3.01 General A. All Work shall be in accordance with the Contract, Specifications, Drawings, Manufacturer recommendations,TxDOT Item 340,and industry standards. 1. In the event that a requirement conflicts with another, the more stringent requirement shall be followed,unless directed otherwise by the Owner. B. For this specification when a TxDOT Item is indicated the terms within the TxDOT Item shall be adjusted as follows: 1. Department-TxDOT 2. Engineer-Owner 3.02 Mixture Design A. The mixture shall be designed in accordance with TxDOT Item 340 and conform to the requirements of this specification with the following modifications: 1. The Owner(Engineer)will not be able to provide any software. 2. The Contractor shall provide the Owner with a mixture design report that includes the following: a. The combined aggregate gradation,source,specific gravity,and percent of each material used, b. Results of applicable tests, c. The mixing and molding temperatures, d. All applicable correlation and correction factors, e. The signature(s) of the Level lI specialist certified by TxDOT-approved hot-mix asphalt certification program who performed the design, f. The date the mixture design was performed, g. A unique identification number for the design. 3.03 Equipment A. General 1. Provide equipment for Asphaltic Concrete Paving in accordance with TxDOT Item 320. 3.04 Quality Control Plan A. General 1. It shall be the responsibility of the Contractor to design,produce,transport,place and compact the specified paving mixture in accordance with the requirements herein. 2. The Owner will perform verification testing as needed. 3. Provide quality control (QC) testing as needed to meet the requirements of this Item. 4. Provide a certified Level I-A specialist at the plant during production hours. 5. Provide a certified Level I-B specialist to conduct placement tests. 6. The requirements of TxDOT Item 341 shall be adhered to. B. Quality Control Plan(QCP) 1. General a. Unless otherwise shown on the Drawings,the Contractor shall develop and follow a Quality Control Plan(QCP). b. The QCP shall be submitted to the Owner and the on-site Inspector. c. Obtain approval from the Owner for changes to the QCP made during the project d. The Owner may suspend operations if the Contractor fails to comply with the QCP. e. Submit a written QCP to the Owner and receive the Owner's approval of the QCP before beginning production. 2. Include the following items in the QCP: a. Project Personnel 1) Provide: PLANT-MIX ASPHALT PAVING 32 12 16.13-2 a) A list of individuals that will conduct tests as well their associated certifications (i.e. Level IA, 113, and I1 certifications), including when certifications will expire for each individual b) A list of individuals responsible for QC with authority to take corrective action and the contact information for each individual listed b. Material Delivery and Storage 1) Provide: a) The sequence of material processing, delivery, and minimum quantities to assure continuous plant operations b) Aggregate stockpiling procedures to avoid contamination and segregation c) Frequency,type, and timing of aggregate stockpile testing to assure conformance of material requirements before mixture production d) Procedure for monitoring the quality and variability of asphalt binder c. Production 1) Detail: a) Loader operation procedures to avoid contamination in cold bins b) Procedures for calibrating and controlling cold feeds c) Procedures to eliminate debris or oversized material d) Procedures for adding and verifying rates of each applicable mixture component(e.g., aggregate,asphalt binder,RAP,lime,liquid antistrip) e) Procedures for reporting job control and acceptance test results f) Procedures to avoid segregation and drain-down in the silo d. Loading and Transporting 1) Provide: a) The type and application method for release agents b) Truck loading procedures to avoid segregation e. Placement and Compaction 1) Provide: a) The proposed agenda for mandatory pre-paving meeting including date and location b) The type and application method for release agents in the paver and on rollers, shovels,lutes,and other utensils c) Procedures for the transfer of mixture into the paver while avoiding segregation and preventing material spillage d) The process to balance production, delivery, paving, and compaction to achieve continuous placement operations e) The paver operations (e.g., operation of wings, height of mixture in auger chamber) to avoid physical and thermal segregation and other surface irregularities f) Procedures to construct quality longitudinal and transverse joints 3.05 Construction A. Prime Coat 1. If a prime coat is required, it shall be applied in accordance with the requirements of Section 32 12 13.19 PRIME COAT. B. Tack Coat 1. The material shall not be applied on a previously primed base until the primed base has completely cured to the satisfaction of the Owner. 2. The surface upon which the material is to be placed shall be thoroughly cleaned by sweeping or other approved methods to the satisfaction of the Owner. 3. The material shall be applied when the surface temperature is 60' F or higher unless otherwise approved. 4. All contact surfaces of base, curbs,structures,and joints shall be coated with the material. 5. During the application of the material,the Contractor shall take precautions to prevent splattering of adjacent pavement,curb,gutter,and structures. 6. The surface shall be given a uniform application of shall be applied at a rate ranging from 0.05 to 0.10 gallons per square yard and/or as shown on the Drawings. 7. When directed roll the freshly applied material with a pneumatic tire roller to ensure penetration PLANT-MIX ASPHALT PAVING 32 12 16.13-3 as necessary. 8. The Owner may use TxDOT Tex-243-F to verify that the material has adequate adhesive properties. C. Storage and Heating of Asphalt Materials 1. Asphalt cement shall not be heated to a temperature in excess of that recommended by the producer. 2. Asphalt storage equipment shall be maintained in a clean condition and operated in such a manner that there will be no contamination with foreign matter. D. Proportioning 1. All materials shall be handled and proportioned in a manner that yield an acceptable mixture as herein specified and as defined by the job-mix. E. Mixing 1. Weight Batch Plant a. In charging the weigh box and in charging the pugmill from the weigh box, such methods or devices shall be used as necessary to minimize segregation of the mixture. 2. Drum Mix Plant a. The amount of aggregate and asphalt cement entering the mixer and the rate of travel through the mixer shall be coordinated so that a uniform mixture of the desired gradation and asphalt content will be produced. 3. The mixture produced from each type of plant shall not vary from the job-mix by more than the tolerances and restrictions herein specified. 4. The mixture when discharged from the plant shall have a moisture content not greater than one- percent(1%)by weight of total mix when determined by TxDOT Tex-212-F. 5. The mixture produced from each type of plant shall be at a temperature between 250'F and 325' F,or as required. a. After a target mixing temperature has been established, the mixture when discharged from the mixer shall not vary from this temperature by more than 25'F. F. Placing Asphaltic Concrete 1. General a. The material shall not be applied on a previously primed base until the primed base has completely cured to the satisfaction of the Owner. b. The asphalt mixture shall be spread on the approved prepared surface with a paving machine or other approved equipment in such a manner such that when properly compacted, the finished surface will be smooth or uniform density,and meet the requirements of the typical cross sections as shown on the Drawings. 2. Base Surface a. The surface upon which the material is to be placed shall be thoroughly cleaned by sweeping or other approved methods to the satisfaction of the Owner. b. Asphaltic material shall be placed when the surface temperature is 60' F or higher unless otherwise approved. 3. Placement Temperature a. Asphaltic material shall be placed prior to it falling below 200'F. 1) If all or any portion of a load is found to be below the temperature then the load may be rejected and will need to be removed by the Contractor prior to placing any additional material. G. Flush Structures 1. Adjacent to flush curbs,gutters,liners and structures,the surface shall be finished uniformly high so that when compacted,it will be one-quarter inch (1/4") above the edge. H. Construction joints 1. Joints of successive courses of asphaltic material shall be offset at least six-inches (6"). 2. Construction joints on surface courses shall coincide with lane lines,or as directed by the Owner. I. Compacting 1. General a. The asphalt mixture shall be compacted thoroughly and uniformly with the necessary rollers to obtain the required density and surface tolerances herein described and any requirements as shown on the Drawings. PLANT-MIX ASPHALT PAVING 32 12 16.13-4 b. Regardless of the method of compaction control followed,all rolling shall be completed before the mixture temperature drops below 175'F. c. The use of hand tamps shall only occur in areas where rollers are not able to obtain compaction. d. The edges of the pavement along curbs, headers and similar structures, and all places not accessible to the roller, or in such positions as will not allow thorough compaction with the rollers,shall be thoroughly compacted with lightly oiled tamps. e. Rolling with a trench roller will be required on widened areas,in trenches and other limited areas where satisfactory compaction cannot be obtained with the approved rollers. f. Unless otherwise directed,use only water or an approved release agent on rollers,tamps,and other compaction equipment. 1) Keep diesel,gasoline,oil,grease,and other foreign matter off the mixture. 2. In-Place Compaction Control a. Use density control unless ordinary compaction control is specified on the Drawings. b. Use the control strip method given in TxDOT Tex-207-F to establish the rolling pattern for density controlled areas. c. Where specific density or air void requirements are waived,furnish and operate compaction equipment as approved. d. Do not use pneumatic-tire rollers if excessive pickup of fines by roller tires occurs. e. When rolling with the three-wheel,tandem or vibratory rollers,it is recommended that rolling start by first rolling the joint with the adjacent pavement and then continue by rolling longitudinally at the sides and proceed toward the center of the pavement, overlapping on successive trips by at least one-foot(1'). f. Alternate trips of the roller should be slightly different in length. g. On super-elevated curves,rolling should begin at the low side and progress toward the high side. h. When rolling with vibratory steel-wheel rollers, equipment operation shall be in accordance with TxDOT Item 210, and the manufacturer's recommendations, unless otherwise directed by the Owner. i. Vibratory rollers shall not be left vibrating while not rolling or when changing directions. In addition, vibratory rollers shall not be allowed in the vibrating mode on mats with a plan depth of less than one and one-half inches (1-1/2"),unless approved by the Owner. j. The motion of the rollers shall be slow enough to avoid other than usual initial displacement of the mixture. k. If any displacement occurs, it shall be corrected to the satisfaction of the Owner and/or Inspector. 1. Ensure pavement is fully compacted before allowing rollers to stand on the pavement. 3. Rolling Pattern a. Rolling patterns shall be established by the Contractor to achieve the maximum compaction. b. The selected rolling pattern shall be followed unless changes in the mixture or placement conditions occur which affect compaction. c. When changes in the mixture or placement conditions occur, a new rolling pattern shall be established. J. In-Place Density and Air Voids 1. In-place density control is required for all mixtures except for thin,irregular level-up courses. 2. Material should be compacted to between ninety-two percent(92%)and ninety-six percent(96%) of maximum theoretical density or between four-percent(4%)and eight-percent(8%) air voids. 3. Average density shall be greater than ninety-two percent(92%) and no individual determination shall be lower than ninety percent(90%). 4. Density and Air Void Testing Rate a. Whichever is less 1) One (1) set every 500 tons of compacted asphaltic material, 2) One (1) set every 1,000 linear feet. b. Testing shall be in accordance with TxDOT Tex-207-F and TxDOT Tex-227-F. PLANT-MIX ASPHALT PAVING 32 12 16.13-5 c. Pavement specimens, which shall be either cores or sections of the compacted mixture,will be tested as required to determine the percent air voids. d. Other methods, such as nuclear determination of in-place density, which correlate satisfactorily with actual project specimens may be used when approved by the Owner. K. Thickness 1. The total compacted average thickness of the combined HMAC courses shall not be less than the amount specified on the Drawings. 2. No more than ten percent(10%)of the measured thicknesses shall be more than one-quarter inch (1/4")less than the Drawing thickness. 3. If so,the quantity for pay shall be decreased as deemed appropriate by the Owner. 3.06 Ride Quality A. General 1. The pavement surface after compaction, shall be smooth and true to the established lines,grade, and cross-section. B. Equipment 1. Ten foot(10') straight edge. 2. Diamond Grinding Equipment a. Shall be self-propelled powered grinding equipment that is specifically designed to smooth and texture pavements using circular blades. b. Shall have automatic grade control capable of grinding at least a three-foot (3') width longitudinally in each pass without damaging the pavement. C. Testing 1. The Owner, Inspector, and/or Owner may require any of the following tests to be performed to verify the project. a. Straight-Edge 1) The Owner, Inspector, and/or Owner shall have the Contractor to test localized defects (obvious settlements, humps, ridges, etc.) with a ten-foot (10') straightedge placed parallel or perpendicular to the roadway centerline depending on location of defect. 2) The maximum deviation shall not exceed one-eighth inch (1/8") in ten-feet(10'). b. Mays Roughness Meter 1) The surface shall be tested by the Owner with the Mays Roughness Meter. 2) The Mays Roughness Value for each block (intersection to intersection) or 600-foot section,whichever is the less,shall not exceed ninety inches(90")per mile per traffic lane. D. Correction of Deficiencies 1. Areas not meeting criteria shall be corrected to the satisfaction of the Owner. 2. Local defects a. The Contractor shall correct deficiencies by grinding and fog sealing the aggregate exposed. b. All areas that are corrected shall be retested. 3. Mays Roughness Deficiencies a. For each block of 600-foot section not meeting this criteria,the Owner shall have the option of requiring that block or section to be reworked to meet the criteria, or paying an adjusted unit price for the surface course. b. The unit price adjustment shall be made on the following basis: 1) Adjusted Unit Price= (Adjustment Factor)X Surface Course Unit Bid Price 2) The adjustment factor shall be: a) For Residential Streets:Adjustment Factor= 1.999-0.0111 M b) For All Other Class Streets (Non Residential):Adjustment Factor= 1.287-0.0143 M, Where M-Mays Roughness Value c. In no case shall the Contractor be paid more than the unit bid price. d. If the surface course is an inverted penetration(surface treatment)the Mays Roughness Value observed will be reduced by ten inches (10")per mile,prior to applying the above criteria. 3.07 Opening to Traffic A. The pavement shall be opened to traffic when directed by the Owner. B. Traffic shall not be allowed on pavement until the temperature is 150' F or lower unless otherwise directed. PLANT-MIX ASPHALT PAVING 32 12 16.13-6 C. The Contractor's attention is directed to the fact that all construction traffic allowed on pavement open to the public will be subject to the State laws governing traffic on highways. D. If the surface ravels, flushes, ruts, or deteriorates prior to final acceptance it will be the Contractor's responsibility to correct this condition at his expense to the satisfaction of the Owner. PLANT-MIX ASPHALT PAVING 32 12 16.13-7 SECTION 32 13 13 CONCRETE PAVING PART 1-GENERAL 1.01 Description A. This specification shall govern work required for the installation of Concrete Paving as required to complete the project. 1.02 Related Sections A. 03 2111 REINFORCING STEEL B. 03 3111 CONCRETE STRUCTURES 1.03 Submittals A. roduct Information 1. Clearly indicate within submittal that the product is in compliance with this and related specification(s). PART 2-PRODUCTS 2.01 Concrete A. Unless otherwise specified on Drawings, materials and proportions for concrete used in construction under this item shall conform the requirements as specified for Class "A" Concrete under specification, Section 03 3111 CONCRETE STRUCTURES. B. All concrete shall be Class A with a minimum strength of 3,000 psi. 2.02 Reinforcing Steel A. Reinforcing steel,if required,shall conform to the requirements as specified in the specification,Section 03 2111 REINFORCING STEEL. B. All steel shall be grade 60 with a minimum fy of 60,000 psi. 2.03 Expansion Joint Material A. Expansion joint filler shall be in accordance with Section 03 31 11 CONCRETE STRUCTURES and as noted on the Drawings. B. Cap seal shall be Greenstreak#610 or approved equal installed over expansion joint filler. 2.04 Backfill A. Material shall be the same or similar to the surrounding area which is free of stones and debris, or as directed by Owner. PART 3-EXECUTION 3.01 General Information A. All Work shall be in accordance with the Contract, Specifications, Drawings, Manufacturer recommendations,and industry standards. 1. In the event that a requirement conflicts with another, the more stringent requirement shall be followed,unless directed otherwise by the Owner. B. Shall be constructed in sections of the lengths and widths shown on Drawings. 1. Unless otherwise provided by the Drawings,no section shall be a length less than eight-feet(8'). 2. Each section shall be separated by an expansion joint. C. All work per day shall terminate at expansion joints. D. Provide machinery,tools,and equipment necessary for proper execution of the work. 3.02 Excavation and Foundation A. Excavation shall be shaped to line,grade per typical cross section,and hand tamped and sprinkled. B. The subgrade shall be as shown on the Drawings. 3.03 Forms A. Forms shall be of wood or metal, of a section satisfactory to the Owner. B. Be straight,free from warp,and of a depth equal to the thickness of the finished work. C. Shall be securely staked to line and grade and maintained in a true position during the depositing of concrete. D. Shall conform to the specified radius when placed on curves. 3.04 Reinforcing Steel CONCRETE PAVING 32 13 13-1 A. The reinforcing steel,if required,shall be placed in position as shown on the Drawings. B. Care shall be exercised to keep all steel in its proper location. 3.05 Joints A. Expansion Joints 1. Shall be constructed a maximum of 39'-0"on center or as noted on Drawings or as directed by Owner. a. If attached to curb and gutter than the expansion joints shall align with the expansion joints of the curb and gutter,unless noted on the Drawings or directed by the Owner. 2. Joint shall be 3/4"and be filled with expansion joint material placed vertically and at right angles to the longitudinal axis of the sidewalks. 3. Where the paving abuts a retaining wall,sidewalk,curb,or other hard surface expansion joint shall be placed along the entire length. 4. Expansion joint shall be placed around all obstructions protruding through paving. S. Dowels a. The dowel shall be extended across the joint nine inches (9") minimum and be sleeved or greased. b. When adjacent to existing curb and gutter or to existing sidewalk dowels shall be drilled into the existing concrete on eighteen-inch(18")on centers. 3.06 Control Joints 1. Shall be tooled at the time of concrete placement at a maximum of 4'-0"on centers or evenly spaced between expansion joints,or as noted on Drawings or directed by the Owner. 2. Shall be 1/2"depth by 1/8"width or as noted on Drawings or directed by Owner. 3.07 Concrete Placement A. Concrete shall be mixed and placed in a manner satisfactory to the Owner. B. The subgrade and reinforcement shall be slightly moist at the time the concrete is placed. C. Shall be placed in the forms to the depth specified and spaded and tamped until thoroughly compacted and mortar entirely covers the surface. 3.08 Finishing A. The top surface shall be floated with a wooden or metal float to a smooth gritty texture. B. The outer edges and joints shall then be rounded with a one-half inch (1/2") radius with approved tools or as shown on Drawings. C. Surface Finish 1. Shall be broom finish or as noted on the Drawings a. The surface shall be textured with a heavy broom finish perpendicular to the common travel way. 2. Other Finish a. The surface shall be as noted on the Drawings or as directed by the Owner. 3.09 Curing A. Within twenty(20)minutes of the surface being textured the curing compound shall be applied. B. Other methods of curing as outlined in the specification Section 03 3111 CONCRETE STRUCTURES will be acceptable with a required curing period of 72 hours. C. Concrete must be protected from freezing temperatures for at least three (3) days. 3.10 Backfill and Grading A. Material shall be the same or similar to the surrounding area which is free of stones and debris, or as directed by Owner. B. Grading shall promote positive drainage CONCRETE PAVING 32 13 13-2 SECTION 32 16 13.13 CURB&GUTTER PART 1-GENERAL 1.01 Description A. This specification shall govern work required for the installation of Curbs and Gutters as required to complete the project. 1.02 Related Sections A. 03 3111 CONCRETE STRUCTURES B. 03 2111 REINFORCING STEEL 1.03 Submittals A. Product Information 1. Clearly indicate within submittal that the product is in compliance with this and related specification(s). PART 2-PRODUCTS 2.01 Concrete A. Unless otherwise specified on Drawings, materials and proportions for concrete used in construction under this specification shall conform the requirements as specified for Class "A" Concrete under specification,Section 03 3111 CONCRETE STRUCTURES. B. All concrete shall be Class A with a minimum 28-day compressive strength of 3,000 psi. 2.02 Reinforcing Steel and Dowels A. Reinforcing steel and Dowels, if required, shall conform to the requirements as specified in the specification,Section 03 2111 REINFORCING STEEL,or as noted on the Drawings. B. All steel shall be Grade 60 with a minimum fy of 60,000 psi. 2.03 Expansion Joint Material A. Expansion joint material shall be 3/4" thick wood fiber asphalt-impregnated material meeting the requirements specified in Section 03 3111 CONCRETE STRUCTURES or as noted on the Drawings. 2.04 Backfill Material A. Select Backfill Material 1. Shall be native on-site material from excavation,imported material, or a mixture of sand and clay or other suitable granular material free from vegetation,rocks,debris,and material that is in large clumps greater than two-inches(2")meeting the following requirements: a. Liquid limit of thirty-five(35)maximum, b. Plasticity index range from eight(8)to twenty(20), c. Moisture range from-1%to 3%. 2. This material shall not include soils with a Unified Soil Classification System of OL,MH,OH,CH,and PT or soils with an AASHTO classification of A7. B. Topsoil Backfill Material 1. Suitable material chosen from the excavation may be used. 2. The material chosen shall be free of large lumps or clods,which will not readily break down under compaction. 3. This material will be subject to approval by the Owner. 4. Material shall be free of vegetation or other extraneous material. 5. Should be stockpiled separately and used for finish grading. 6. Capable of supporting a good growth of grass when fertilized and seeded or sodded. PART 3-EXECUTION 3.01 General A. All Work shall be in accordance with the Contract, Specifications, Drawings, Manufacturer recommendations,and industry standards. 1. In the event that a requirement conflicts with another, the more stringent requirement shall be followed,unless directed otherwise by the Owner. CURB&GUTTER 32 16 13.13-1 B. Shall be placed in sections of the length indicated on the Drawings. C. Each section shall be separated by an expansion joint of cross section specified for the curb and gutter and of the thickness indicated on the Drawings. D. Provide machinery,tools,and equipment necessary for proper execution of the work. 3.02 Excavation and Subgrade A. Excavation shall be shaped to line,grade per typical cross section,and hand tamped and sprinkled. B. The subgrade shall be as shown on the Drawings. 3.03 Reinforcing Steel and Dowels A. The reinforcing steel and Dowels shall be of type and placed in position as shown on the Drawings. B. Care shall be exercised to keep all steel in its proper location. 3.04 Expansion Joints A. Shall be constructed a maximum of 39'-0"on center or as noted on Drawings or as directed by Owner. 1. If curb and gutter is attached to rigid concrete pavement than the expansion joints shall align with the expansion joints of the rigid concrete pavement,unless noted on the Drawings or directed by the Owner. B. Joint shall be 3/4"and be filled with expansion joint material placed vertically and at right angles to the longitudinal axis of the curb and gutter. C. Expansion material shall be placed around all obstructions protruding through the curb and gutter. D. Dowels 1. When required shall be extended across the joint nine-inches (9") minimum and be sleeved or greased on one(1)end. 3.05 Control Joints A. Shall be tooled at the time of concrete placement at 10'-0"on centers,or as noted on Drawings or directed by the Owner. B. Shall be 1/2"depth by 1/8"width or as noted on Drawings or directed by Owner. 3.06 Concrete Placement A. General 1. Concrete for curb and gutter shall be mixed and placed in a manner satisfactory to the Owner. 2. If dry,the foundation material shall be sprinkled lightly immediately before concrete is deposited thereon. 3. After the concrete has been struck off and after it has become sufficiently set,the exposed surfaces shall be thoroughly worked with a wooden float. 4. The exposed edges shall be rounded by the use of an edging tool to the radius indicated on Drawings. S. All exposed surfaces of curb and gutter,or curb,shall be brushed to a smooth and uniform surface. B. Curing 1. The completed curb and gutter shall be cured with Type 2, white pigmented, curing compound unless shown otherwise on Drawings. 2. Other methods of curing as outlined in the specification,Section 03 31 11 CONCRETE STRUCTURES will be acceptable with a required curing period of 72 hours. 3.07 Formed Concrete A. Forms 1. General a. Forms will be required for all curb and gutter that is not Machine Laid. 2. Outside Forms a. Shall be of wood or metal,of a section satisfactory to the Owner. b. Be straight,free of warp,and a depth equal to the depth of the curb and gutter. c. Shall be securely staked to line and grade, and maintained in a true position during the depositing of concrete. d. Shall conform to the specified radius when placed on curves. 3. Inside Forms a. Shall be of wood or metal. b. Of a section satisfactory to the Owner. c. Be straight,free of warp,and a depth equal to the depth of the curb and gutter. d. Shall be securely staked to line and grade, and maintained in a true position during the depositing of concrete. CURB&GUTTER 32 16 13.13-2 e. Shall be rigidly attached to the outside forms. f. Shall conform to the specified radius when placed on curves. 3.08 Machine Laid A. Can be used when approved by the Owner. B. The machine weight shall be such that the required compaction is obtained without the machine riding above the bed on which curbing is constructed. C. Shall form curb and gutter that are uniform in texture,shape,and density. D. Forming tube of the extrusion machine or the form of the slip form machine must be easily adjustable vertically during the forward motion of the machine to provide variable heights necessary to conform to the established grade line. E. A pointer,gauge,or other Owner approved method shall be attached to the machine so that a continual comparison can be made between the extruded or slip form work and the grade guideline. 3.09 Backfill A. Sidewalk not Attached 1. Material a. 6"Below Top Of Curb 1) Select Backfill Material,unless otherwise noted on the Drawings or directed by the Owner. b. 6"Below Top Of Curb to Top of Curb 1) Topsoil Backfill Material,unless otherwise noted on the Drawings or directed by the Owner. 2. Placement a. Shall be placed in a manner as to not damage any work or existing structures. b. Shall be placed in layers not more than eight-inches (8") in depth (loose measurement) two- feet(2')beyond curb immediately after completion of concrete work. c. The placing of the material shall be done in such a manner so as to be free of all natural soil, rock,or other foreign matter. 3. Compaction a. General 1) Shall be compacted in a manner as to not damage any work or existing structures. b. Select Backfill Material 1) Compacted by use of industry standard equipment at zero to five-percent (0-5%) of optimum moisture content to ninety-percent(90%) of maximum dry density determined according to ASTM D 698,or as required by the Drawings or Owner. c. Topsoil Backfill Material 1) Shall be placed in layers not more than eight-inches (8") in depth (loose measurement) the total width of the trench,or as required by the Drawings or Owner. 2) Compacted by use of industry standard equipment to a firm density,or as required by the Drawings or Owner. B. Sidewalk Attached 1. Material a. To bottom of Sidewalk Structure 1) Select Backfill Material,unless otherwise noted on the Drawings or directed by the Owner. 2. Placement a. Shall be placed in a manner as to not damage any work or existing structures. b. Shall be placed in layers not more than eight-inches (8") in depth (loose measurement) full width of sidewalk immediately after completion of concrete work. c. The placing of the material shall be done in such a manner so as to be free of all natural soil, rock,or other foreign matter. 3. Compaction a. General 1) Shall be compacted in a manner as to not damage any work or existing structures. b. Select Backfill Material 1) Compacted by use of industry standard equipment at zero to five-percent (0-5%) of optimum moisture content to ninety-percent(90%) of maximum dry density determined according to ASTM D 698,or as required by the Drawings or Owner. C. Driveway Attached CURB&GUTTER 32 16 13.13-3 1. Material a. To bottom of Driveway Structure 1) Select Backfill Material,unless otherwise noted on the Drawings or directed by the Owner. 2. Placement a. Shall be placed in a manner as to not damage any work or existing structures. b. Shall be placed in layers not more than eight-inches (8") in depth (loose measurement) full width of driveway or to Right-of-Way line,whichever is greater,immediately after completion of concrete work. c. The placing of the material shall be done in such a manner so as to be free of all natural soil, rock,or other foreign matter. 3. Compaction a. General 1) Shall be compacted in a manner as to not damage any work or existing structures. b. Select Backfill Material 1) Compacted by use of industry standard equipment at zero to five-percent (0-5%) of optimum moisture content to ninety-percent(90%) of maximum dry density determined according to ASTM D 698,or as required by the Drawings or Owner. CURB&GUTTER 32 16 13.13-4 SECTION 32 16 23 SIDEWALKS PART 1-GENERAL 1.01 Description A. This specification shall govern work required for the installation of Sidewalks as required to complete the project. 1.02 Related Sections A. 03 3111 CONCRETE STRUCTURES B. 03 2111 REINFORCING STEEL C. 03 39 11 CONCRETE CURING 1.03 References The latest edition of the referenced item below shall be used. A. Texas Administrative Code,Title 16,Part 4,Chapter 68,Rule§68.10 B. Texas Accessibility Standards C. Department of Justice ADA Standards for Accessible Design 1.04 Submittals A. Product Information 1. Clearly indicate within submittal that the product is in compliance with this and related specification(s). 1.05 Definitions The words defined in this section shall for the purpose of this specification have the meanings ascribed to them. A. ADA Standards-shall mean compliance with the Texas Accessibility Standards and the Department of Justice ADA Standards for Accessible Design PART 2-PRODUCTS 2.01 Concrete A. Unless otherwise specified on Drawings, materials and proportions for concrete used in construction under this item shall conform the requirements as specified for Class "A" Concrete under specification, Section 03 3111 CONCRETE STRUCTURES. B. All concrete shall be Class A with a minimum 28 day strength of 3,000 psi. 2.02 Reinforcing Steel and Dowels A. Reinforcing steel and Dowels,if required, shall conform to the requirements as specified in the Section 03 2111 REINFORCING STEEL,or as noted on the Drawings. B. All steel shall be Grade 60 with a minimum fy of 60,000 psi. 2.03 Concrete Curing A. Shall be in accordance with Section 03 39 11 CONCRETE CURING. 2.04 Expansion Joint Material A. Expansion joint material shall be in accordance with Section 03 3111 CONCRETE STRUCTURES and as noted on the Drawings. 2.05 Detectable Surface A. Unless otherwise stated, shall be in accordance with Texas Accessibility Standards for Detectable Warnings, Department of Justice ADA Standards for Accessible Design for Detectable Warnings, and the Drawings,otherwise specified by the Owner. 2.06 Pavement Markings A. All stripping shall be in accordance with the standard details and specifications of the local governing entity. 2.07 Backfill Material A. Select Backfill Material 1. Shall be native on-site material from excavation,imported material, or a mixture of sand and clay or other suitable granular material free from vegetation,rocks,debris,and material that is in large clumps greater than two-inches(2")meeting the following requirements: a. Liquid limit of thirty-five(35)maximum, b. Plasticity index range from eight(8)to twenty(20), c. Moisture range from-1%to 3%. SIDEWALKS 32 16 23-1 2. This material shall not include soils with a Unified Soil Classification System of OL,MH,OH,CH,and PT or soils with an AASHTO classification of A7. B. Topsoil Backfill Material 1. Suitable material chosen from the excavation may be used. 2. The material chosen shall be free of large lumps or clods,which will not readily break down under compaction. 3. This material will be subject to approval by the Owner. 4. Material shall be free of vegetation or other extraneous material. 5. Should be stockpiled separately and used for finish grading. 6. Capable of supporting a good growth of grass when fertilized and seeded or sodded. PART 3-EXECUTION 3.01 General A. All Work shall be in accordance with the Contract, Specifications, Drawings, Manufacturer recommendations,and industry standards. 1. In the event that a requirement conflicts with another, the more stringent requirement shall be followed,unless directed otherwise by the Owner. B. Shall be constructed in sections of the lengths and widths shown on Drawings. 1. Unless otherwise provided by the Drawings,no section shall be a length less than eight-feet(8'). 2. Each section shall be separated by an expansion joint. C. All work per day shall terminate at expansion joints. D. Provide machinery,tools,and equipment necessary for proper execution of the work. 3.02 Excavation and Subgrade A. Excavation shall be shaped to line,grade per typical cross section,and hand tamped and sprinkled. B. The subgrade shall be compacted to 95%Standard Proctor or as shown on the Drawings. 3.03 Forms A. General 1. Shall be in accordance with Section 03 1113.11 CONCRETE FORMS 2. Opening in forms shall be provided,if needed,for the removal of laitance of foreign matter of any kind. 3. All forms shall be wetted thoroughly before the concrete is placed therein. 4. If,at any stage of the work,the forms show signs of bulging or sagging,the portion of the concrete causing such condition shall be removed immediately, if necessary, and the forms shall be reset and securely braced against further movement. 3.04 Reinforcing Steel and Dowels A. The reinforcing steel and Dowels shall be of type and placed in position as shown on the Drawings. B. Care shall be exercised to keep all steel in its proper location. 3.05 Expansion Joints 1. Shall be constructed a maximum of 39'-0"on center or as noted on Drawings or as directed by Owner. a. If attached to curb and gutter than the expansion joints shall align with the expansion joints of the curb and gutter,unless noted on the Drawings or directed by the Owner. 2. Joint shall be 3/4"and be filled with expansion joint material placed vertically and at right angles to the longitudinal axis of the curb and gutter. 3. Where the sidewalk abuts a retaining wall, driveway, curb,or other hard surface expansion joint shall be placed along the entire length. 4. Expansion material shall be placed around all obstructions protruding through the sidewalk. 5. Dowels a. When required shall be extended across the joint nine-inch (9") minimum and be sleeved or greased on one(1)end. b. When adjacent to existing curb and gutter or to existing sidewalk dowels shall be drilled into the existing concrete on eighteen-inch(18")on centers. 3.06 Control Joints 1. Shall be tooled at the time of concrete placement at a maximum of 4'-0"on centers or evenly spaced between expansion joints,or as noted on Drawings or directed by the Owner. SIDEWALKS 32 16 23-2 2. Shall be 1/2"depth by 1/8"width or as noted on Drawings or directed by Owner. 3.07 Concrete Placement A. Shall be in accordance with Section 03 3111 CONCRETE STRUCTURES B. The subgrade and reinforcement shall be moist at the time the concrete is placed. C. Shall be placed in the forms to the depth specified and spaded and tamped until thoroughly compacted and mortar entirely covers the surface. D. Subgrade shall be slightly moist at the time the concrete is placed. 3.08 Finishing A. The top surface shall be floated with a float to a smooth gritty texture. B. The outer edges and joints shall then be rounded with a one-half inch (1/2") radius with approved tools or as shown on Drawings. C. Surface Finish 1. Shall be broom finish or as noted on the Drawings a. The surface shall be textured with a heavy broom finish perpendicular to the common travel way. 2. Other Finish a. The surface shall be as noted on the Drawings or as directed by the Owner. 3.09 Curb Ramp with Detectable Surface A. General 1. Shall be installed in accordance with the Drawings and recommendations of the manufacturer. 2. Properly constructed curb ramp shall be true to line, section, grade and shall be free of loose surfacing and irregularities. 3. The subgrade shall be shaped to line, grade, cross section, and shall be of uniform density and moisture,when concrete is placed. 4. The subgrade shall be hand tamped and sprinkled to achieve the desired consistency and uniform support. S. Unless shown otherwise on the Drawings, ramps shall have a minimum concrete thickness in excess of four-inches (4"),prior to application of textured surface. B. Slope 1. Slopes,S,shall be as shown in Table 1 unless shown otherwise on the Drawings: Table 1 Required Slopes for Curb Ramps and Sidewalks Ramp Sloe S i Ramp in direction of travel S< 1:12 Side slope of ramp (flare) S< 1:10 Cross Slope 1:100<S< 1:50 Sidewalks Sloe S Landings adjacent to ramp S< 1:20 Driveways abutting tied sidewalk S< 1:10 1 In all cases the slope shall be in accordance with ADA Standards C. Width of ramp 1. Shall be as shown on the Drawings. D. Obstructions 1. Shall be removed or relocated, as appropriate, or the location of the ramp may be shifted, if authorized. E. Detectable Warning 1. Surfacing shall be flush with abutting areas and placed using a template as required to achieve an esthetic well-defined edge. 2. Perpendicular Curb Ramps a. Within the public right of way,detectable warnings complying with TAS 705 at a minimum of 24" in depth (in the direction of pedestrian travel) and extending the full width of the curb ramp shall be provided where the pedestrian access route enters a crosswalk or other hazardous vehicular area. SIDEWALKS 32 16 23-3 3. Parallel Curb Ramps a. Within the public right-of-way,detectable warnings complying with TAS 705 at a minimum of 24"in depth(in the direction of pedestrian travel) and extending the full width of the landing shall be provided where the pedestrian access route enters a crosswalk or other hazardous vehicular area. 4. Diagonal Curb Ramps a. Within the public right-of-way,detectable warnings complying with TAS 705 at a minimum of 24" in depth (in the direction of pedestrian travel) and extending the full width of the curb ramp or landing, shall be provided where the pedestrian access route enters a crosswalk or other hazardous vehicular area. b. The detectable warning shall be curved with the radius of the corner. S. The detectable warning shall be located so that the edge nearest the curb line is 6"minimum and 10"maximum from the curb line. 6. Abutting curbs,sidewalks,gutters,driveways,etc.shall not receive textured surfacing. F. Pavement Markings for Street Crossings 1. Shall be placed such that the crosswalk is properly aligned with respect to the Curb Ramp. Curb ramp must be wholly contained within cross walk markings. 2. Proper alignment of striping with respect to intersection and curb ramp shall be done in accordance with ADA Standards,and the Drawings. 3. All stripping shall be in accordance with the standard details and specifications of the local governing entity. 3.10 Curing A. Within twenty(20)minutes of the surface being textured the curing compound shall be applied. B. Shall be as outlined in the Section 03 39 11 CONCRETE CURING will be acceptable with a required curing period of seventy-two (72) hours,unless shown otherwise on the Drawings. C. Concrete must be protected from freezing temperatures for at least three (3) days. 3.11 Backfill and Grading A. Material shall be the same or similar to the surrounding area which is free of stones and debris, or as directed by Owner. B. Grading shall promote positive drainage. SIDEWALKS 32 16 23-4 SECTION 32 16 33 DRIVEWAYS PART 1-GENERAL 1.01 Description A. This specification shall govern work required for the installation of Driveways as required to complete the project. 1.02 Related Sections A. 03 2111 REINFORCING STEEL B. 03 3111 CONCRETE STRUCTURES 1.03 Submittals A. roduct Information 1. Clearly indicate within submittal that the product is in compliance with this and related specification(s). PART 2-PRODUCTS 2.01 Concrete A. Unless otherwise specified on Drawings, materials and proportions for concrete used in construction under this item shall conform the requirements as specified for Class "A" Concrete under specification, Section 03 3111 CONCRETE STRUCTURES. B. All concrete shall be Class A with a minimum strength of 3,000 psi. 2.02 Reinforcing Steel A. Reinforcing steel,if required,shall conform to the requirements as specified in the specification,Section 03 2111 REINFORCING STEEL. B. All steel shall be grade 60 with a minimum fy of 60,000 psi. 2.03 Expansion Joint Material A. Expansion joint filler shall be in accordance with Section 03 31 11 CONCRETE STRUCTURES and as noted on the Drawings. B. Cap seal shall be Greenstreak#610 or approved equal installed over expansion joint filler. 2.04 Backfill A. Material shall be the same or similar to the surrounding area which is free of stones and debris, or as directed by Owner. PART 3-EXECUTION 3.01 General Information A. All Work shall be in accordance with the Contract, Specifications, Drawings, Manufacturer recommendations,and industry standards. 1. In the event that a requirement conflicts with another, the more stringent requirement shall be followed,unless directed otherwise by the Owner. B. Shall be constructed in sections of the lengths and widths shown on Drawings. 1. Unless otherwise provided by the Drawings,no section shall be a length less than eight-feet(8'). 2. Each section shall be separated by an expansion joint. C. All work per day shall terminate at expansion joints. D. Provide machinery,tools,and equipment necessary for proper execution of the work. 3.02 Excavation and Foundation A. Excavation shall be shaped to line,grade per typical cross section,and hand tamped and sprinkled. B. The subgrade shall be as shown on the Drawings. 3.03 Forms A. Forms shall be of wood or metal, of a section satisfactory to the Owner. B. Be straight,free from warp,and of a depth equal to the thickness of the finished work. C. Shall be securely staked to line and grade and maintained in a true position during the depositing of concrete. D. Shall conform to the specified radius when placed on curves. 3.04 Reinforcing Steel DRIVEWAYS 32 16 33-1 A. The reinforcing steel,if required,shall be placed in position as shown on the Drawings. B. Care shall be exercised to keep all steel in its proper location. 3.05 Joints A. Expansion Joints 1. Shall be constructed a maximum of 39'-0"on center or as noted on Drawings or as directed by Owner. a. If attached to curb and gutter than the expansion joints shall align with the expansion joints of the curb and gutter,unless noted on the Drawings or directed by the Owner. 2. Joint shall be 3/4"and be filled with expansion joint material placed vertically and at right angles to the longitudinal axis of the sidewalks. 3. Where the driveway abuts a retaining wall,sidewalk, curb,or other hard surface expansion joint shall be placed along the entire length. 4. Expansion joint shall be placed around all obstructions protruding through driveways. S. Dowels a. The dowel shall be extended across the joint nine inches (9") minimum and be sleeved or greased. b. When adjacent to existing curb and gutter or to existing sidewalk dowels shall be drilled into the existing concrete on eighteen-inch(18")on centers. 3.06 Control Joints 1. Shall be tooled at the time of concrete placement at a maximum of 4'-0"on centers or evenly spaced between expansion joints,or as noted on Drawings or directed by the Owner. 2. Shall be 1/2"depth by 1/8"width or as noted on Drawings or directed by Owner. 3.07 Concrete Placement A. Concrete shall be mixed and placed in a manner satisfactory to the Owner. B. The subgrade and reinforcement shall be slightly moist at the time the concrete is placed. C. Shall be placed in the forms to the depth specified and spaded and tamped until thoroughly compacted and mortar entirely covers the surface. 3.08 Finishing A. The top surface shall be floated with a wooden or metal float to a smooth gritty texture. B. The outer edges and joints shall then be rounded with a one-half inch (1/2") radius with approved tools or as shown on Drawings. C. Surface Finish 1. Shall be broom finish or as noted on the Drawings a. The surface shall be textured with a heavy broom finish perpendicular to the common travel way. 2. Other Finish a. The surface shall be as noted on the Drawings or as directed by the Owner. 3.09 Curing A. Within twenty(20)minutes of the surface being textured the curing compound shall be applied. B. Other methods of curing as outlined in the specification Section 03 3111 CONCRETE STRUCTURES will be acceptable with a required curing period of 72 hours. C. Concrete must be protected from freezing temperatures for at least three (3) days. 3.10 Backfill and Grading A. Material shall be the same or similar to the surrounding area which is free of stones and debris, or as directed by Owner. B. Grading shall promote positive drainage DRIVEWAYS 32 16 33-2 SECTION 32 17 23.13 PAINTED PAVEMENT MARKINGS PART 1-GENERAL 1.01 Description A. This specification shall govern work required for the furnishing, installation, and removal of painted pavement markings as required to complete the project. 1.02 References The latest edition of the referenced item below shall be used. A. Texas Manual on Uniform Traffic Control Devices(TMUTCD) B. Texas Department of Transportation (TxDOT) Standard Specification for Construction and Maintenance of Highways,Streets,and Bridges Item 666"Reflectorized Pavement Markings" C. Texas Department of Transportation (TxDOT) Standard Specification for Construction and Maintenance of Highways,Streets,and Bridges Item 678"Pavement Surface Preparation for Markings" D. Texas Department of Transportation(TxDOT)Departmental Materials Specification DMS-8200,Traffic Paint E. Texas Department of Transportation (TxDOT) Departmental Materials Specification DMS-8220, Hot Applied Thermoplastic F. Texas Department of Transportation (TxDOT) Departmental Materials Specification DMS-8290, Glass Traffic Beads G. Texas Department of Transportation(TxDOT)Test Procedure Tex-828-B H. National Board of Fire Underwriters I. Texas Railroad Commission 1.03 Submittals A. The Contractor shall furnish a certified report on the quality of materials ordered for the work. 1. This report shall not be interpreted as a basis for final acceptance. PART 2-PRODUCTS 2.01 Type I and Type II Marking Materials A. Shall be thermoplastic in accordance with TxDOT Item 666. B. Containers shall be clearly marked with the following information: 1. Color 2. Mass 3. Material Type 4. Manufacturer S. Manufacturing Date 6. Batch Number 2.02 Glass Traffic Beads A. Shall be in accordance with TxDOT Item 666. B. Containers shall be clearly marked with the following information: 1. Color 2. Mass 3. Material Type 4. Manufacturer S. Manufacturing Date 6. Batch Number 2.03 Abrasive-blasting Medium A. Shall be of commercial quality and capable of producing the specified surface cleanliness. PART 3-EXECUTION 3.01 General A. All Work shall be in accordance with the Contract, Specifications, Drawings, TMUTCD, manufacturer recommendations,and industry standards. 1. In the event that one requirement conflicts with another the more stringent requirement shall be followed,unless directed otherwise by the Owner. PAINTED PAVEMENT MARKINGS 32 17 23.13-1 B. The Contractor shall obtain approval of the sequencing of the work and estimate the daily production. C. If roadway is currently open to traffic, the placement of markings shall minimally interfere with the operations of the roadway. 1. Use traffic control as shown on the Drawings and/or as directed by the Owner. D. The Contractor shall furnish all materials and equipment and perform work or services necessary for complete and proper construction of the completed system of pavement markings. E. Unless otherwise approved by the Owner, permanent pavement markings on newly constructed pavements surfaced with asphaltic concrete or bituminous seals shall not be applied for a minimum of fourteen(14) days or a maximum thirty-five(35)days. 1. Temporary pavement marking shall be provided during the fourteen (14) to thirty-five (35) day period. 3.02 Storage of Materials A. All materials shall be stored in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations. B. Materials shall be stored within a weatherproof enclosure and protected from damage. 3.03 Surface Preparation A. Equipment 1. Furnish and maintain equipment in good working condition. 2. Equipment shall be able to prepare concrete and asphaltic surfaces in such a manner that the pavement surface will not be damaged. 3. Air Blasting Equipment a. Use moisture and oil traps to remove all contaminants from blasting air and prevent disposition of moisture,oil,or other contaminants on the roadway surface. B. Construction 1. Prepare pavement surface of sufficient area for the pavement marking as recommended by the manufacturer,TxDOT Item 678,shown on the Drawings,and/or as directed by the Owner. 2. Immediately before application of the paint marking material,the existing surface shall be dry and entirely free from dirt, grease, oil, acids,laitance, or other foreign matter which would reduce the bond between the marking and the pavement 3. Remove all contamination and loose material from pavement surface by sweeping,air blasting,flail milling,blast cleaning,or as recommended by the manufacturer,directed on the Drawings or by the Owner. a. Contaminates up to 0.5 square inch may remain if they are not removed by the following test which is preformed just prior to applying marking material: 1) Air-blast the surface to simulate blasting during application, 2) Firmly press a ten-inch(10")by two-inch(2")wide strip of monofilament tape onto surface, leaving two-inch(2")end free, 3) Firmly grasp the two-inch(2")free end and remove with a quick pull. 4. When existing marking material is present all loose and flaking material shall be removed by approved method(s). C. Pavement Sealer for Type I Marking Material 1. Pavements less than three(3)years old a. No sealer required unless recommended by manufacturer or noted on Drawings. 2. Pavements greater than three(3)years old a. Pavement shall be sealed as recommended by the manufacturer or in accordance with the following: 1) Seal pavement with Type 11 marking or an acrylic or epoxy sealer. 2) Sealer shall be of same configuration and color as the Type I marking unless noted on the Drawings. D. Dryness Test 1. Prior to marking placement the pavement shall be tested for dryness by the following method: a. Type I Marking Material 1) Place a sample of marking material on a piece of tarpaper on the pavement. 2) Allow material to cool to ambient air temperature, and then inspect the underside of the tarpaper in contact with pavement. 3) Pavement is considered dry if there is no condensation on the tarpaper. PAINTED PAVEMENT MARKINGS 32 17 23.13-2 b. Type II Marking Material 1) Place a one(1)square foot piece of clear plastic on the pavement during a sunny day. 2) The pavement is considered dry if after fifteen(15)minutes no condensation has occurred on the underside of the plastic. 3.04 Marking Equipment A. General 1. Equipment shall be maintained in satisfactory condition. 2. Equipment shall meet or exceed the requirements of the National Board of Fire Underwriters and the Texas Railroad Commission. 3. All equipment for the work shall be approved by the Owner and shall include the apparatus necessary to clean the existing surface, mechanical marking machine, and such auxiliary hand marking equipment as may be necessary to satisfactorily complete the job. 4. The mechanical marker shall be an approved atomizing spray-type marking machine. S. It shall produce an even and uniform film thickness at the required coverage and shall be designed to apply markings of uniform cross sections and clear-out edges without running of spattering and within the limits for straightness set forth herein up to a width of eight-inches(8"). 6. Suitable adjustments shall be provided on the sprayer(s) of a single machine or by furnishing additional equipment for marking the width required. 7. For Type I a hand-held thermometer capable of measuring the temperature of the marking material when applied. 3.05 Layouts and Alignments A. Suitable layouts and lines of proposed stripes shall be spotted in advance of the marking application. B. Control points shall be spaced at such intervals as will insure accurate location of all markings. C. The Contractor shall provide an experience technician to supervise the location, alignment, layout, dimensions,and application of the marking. 3.06 Weather A. The suitability of the weather shall be in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendation and by the Owner. B. If the Contractor decides to place markings when inclement weather is impending then all markings damaged due to weather shall be replaced at the Contractors sole expense. 3.07 Application A. General 1. Marking shall be applied at the locations and to the dimensions and spacing indicated on the Drawings or as specified. 2. Marking shall not be applied until the layouts,indicated alignment,and the condition of the existing surface have been approved by the Owner. 3. All marking shall be performed to the satisfaction of the Owner. 4. The Owner shall be notified upon arrival of shipment or inspecting and sampling of the materials. B. Straightness and Width Tolerances 1. In the application of straight stripes,any deviation of the edges exceeding one-inch(1") in fifty-feet (50')shall be obliterated and the marking corrected at the Contractors sole expense. 2. The width of the markings shall be as designated within a tolerance of five-percent(5%). C. Type I Markings 1. Place Type I sealer in accordance with the following and allow to cure: a. Type II paint shall be in accordance with Type 11 application requirements of this specification. b. Acrylic sealer shall be in accordance with manufacturers recommendations. c. Epoxy sealer shall be in accordance with manufacturers recommendations. 2. Apply within the temperature recommendations of the manufacturer. 3. If during application, the operation ceases for five (5) minutes or longer the spray head shall be flushed until the material returns to recommended temperatures. 4. Apply only to pavement surface which is clean and passes the Dryness Test of this specification. 5. For concrete pavement,the surface shall be air-blasted just prior to placing the marking material. a. Air compressor shall be able to generate compressed air at a minimum of 150 cfm and 100 psi using 5/16-inch(5/16") or larger hose. PAINTED PAVEMENT MARKINGS 32 17 23.13-3 6. The marking shall be applied only when the existing surface is dry and clean, when the surface temperature is above 50' F or as recommended by the manufacture, and when the weather is not excessively windy,dusty,or foggy. 7. Thickness a. Minimum 1) New Markings and Retracing water-based markings on surface treatments a) 0.100-inch(100 mils) 2) Retracing on thermoplastic markings a) 0.060-inch(60 mils) 3) All other Type I markings a) 0.90-inch(90 mils) b. Maximum 1) All markings a) 0.180-inch(180 mils) D. Type II Markings 1. Paint shall be applied uniformly by suitable equipment at a rate as recommended by the manufacture and which will result in the required thickness to cover the pavement surface of width and length as required by the Drawings or as directed by the Owner. 2. Apply within the temperature recommendations of the manufacturer. 3. If during application, the operation ceases for five (5) minutes or longer the spray head shall be flushed until the material returns to recommended consistency. 4. Apply only to pavement surface which is clean and passes the Dryness Test of this specification. S. For concrete pavement,the surface shall be air-blasted just prior to placing the marking material. a. Air compressor shall be able to generate compressed air at a minimum of 150 cfm and 100 psi using 5/16-inch(5/16") or larger hose. 6. The marking shall be applied only when the existing surface is dry and clean, when the surface temperature is above 50' F or as recommended by the manufacture, and when the weather is not excessively windy,dusty,or foggy. E. Glass Traffic Beads 1. Apply beads on top of all Type I and Type II marking material almost instantly after placing the marking material. 2. Provide a uniform distribution of beads across the surface of the stripe with a forty-percent(40%) to sixty-percent(60%) embedment. 3.08 Protection of Markings A. After application,all markings shall be protected while curing. B. The fresh markings shall be protected from damage of any kind. C. The Contractor shall be directly responsible for the protection of markings and shall erect or place suitable warning signs,flags or barricades,protective screens,or coverings as required. D. All surfaces shall be protected from disfiguration by spatter,splashes,spillage,drippings of paint or other materials. E. If markings are damaged or disfigured due to traffic, construction equipment, or construction method the Contractor shall replace the marking at his expense. 3.09 Eliminating Pavement Markings A. Equipment 1. Furnish and maintain equipment in good working condition. 2. Equipment shall be able to eliminate markings on concrete and asphaltic surfaces in such a manner that the color and texture of the pavement surface will be held to a minimum. 3. Air Blasting Equipment a. Use moisture and oil traps to remove all contaminants from blasting air and prevent disposition of moisture,oil,or other contaminants on the roadway surface. B. Marking Removal 1. Asphaltic Surface a. Method of removal may be completed by any of the following: 1) Surface Treatment Method PAINTED PAVEMENT MARKINGS 32 17 23.13-4 a) Apply surface treatment material at a rate shown on the Drawings or as directed by the Owner. b) Place a surface treatment a minimum of two-foot (2') wide to cover the existing marking. c) Place a surface treatment thin overlay,or microsurfacing a minimum of one(1)lane in width in areas where directional changes of traffic occur or as directed by the Owner. d) All excess material and residue shall be removed completely and disposed of properly in accordance with local,state,and federal regulations. 2) Burn Method a) Use an approved burning method. b) For thermoplastic pavement markings or prefabricated pavement markings,heat may be applied to remove the bulk of the material prior to blast cleaning. When using heat, avoid spalling pavement surface. c) Sweeping or light blast cleaning may be used to remove minor residue. d) All excess material and residue shall be removed completely and disposed of properly in accordance with local,state,and federal regulations. 3) Blasting Method a) Use an approved blasting method such as water blasting, abrasive blasting, water abrasive blasting, shot blasting, slurry blasting, water-injected abrasive blasting, or brush blasting as approved. b) All excess material and residue shall be removed completely and disposed of properly in accordance with local,state,and federal regulations. 4) Mechanical Method a) Use any mechanical method except grinding. b) Flail milling is acceptable in the removal of markings. c) All excess material and residue shall be removed completely and disposed of properly in accordance with local,state,and federal regulations. 2. Concrete Surface a. Method of removal may be completed by any of the following: 1) Blasting Method a) Use an approved blasting method such as water blasting, abrasive blasting, water abrasive blasting, shot blasting, slurry blasting, water-injected abrasive blasting, or brush blasting as approved. b) All excess material and residue shall be removed completely and disposed of properly in accordance with local,state,and federal regulations. 2) Mechanical Method a) Use any mechanical method except grinding. b) Flail milling is acceptable in the removal of markings. c) All excess material and residue shall be removed completely and disposed of properly in accordance with local,state,and federal regulations. 3.10 Marking Material Containers A. When required,all emptied containers shall be returned to the paint material storage or made available for tallying by the Owner. B. The containers shall not be removed from the job site or destroyed without permission. C. The Contractor shall make an accurate accounting of the paint materials used in the accepted work. D. All containers shall be disposed of in accordance with local,state,and federal regulations 3.11 Clean Up A. At all times,the project site shall be kept free of all unnecessary traffic hazards. B. Upon completion of the work, the Contractor shall remove all rubbish from the work site, and shall clean and restore the area to a manner acceptable to the Owner. C. Also,all damage done by the Contractor during the prosecution of the work must be repaired. D. Before acceptance,the work site must be neat and in a presentable condition throughout. E. Disposal of materials shall be the responsibility of the Contractor and completed in accordance with local,state,and federal regulations. 3.12 Defective Workmanship or Material PAINTED PAVEMENT MARKINGS 32 17 23.13-5 A. When any material not conforming to the requirement of the specifications or Drawings has been delivered to the project or incorporated in the work or any work performed is of inferior quality,such material or work shall be corrected as directed by the Owner,at the expense of the Contractor. 3.13 Performance Requirements A. Adhesion 1. Installed pavement markings shall adhere to the pavement sufficiently to prevent lifting,shifting, smearing,spreading,flowing or tearing by traffic. B. Appearance 1. In addition to complying with all requirements listed herein,pavement markings shall present a neat, uniform appearance, and shall be free of unsightly conditions caused by spread of excess adhesive. C. Visibility 1. The pavement marking material,in place on the roadway,shall have uniform and distinctive retro reflectance when observed in accordance with TxDOT Tex-828-13. D. Observation Period 1. All material, workmanship and labor furnished shall be covered by manufacturers guarantee and/or warranty for a period of twelve (12) months commencing on final delivery date of materials. 3.14 Performance Period A. All markings and replacement markings that fail to meet all requirements of this specification and Tex- 828-B for a minimum of thirty(30)calendar days after installation shall be replaced by the Contractor at his expense. B. Markings and replacement markings failing to meet the performance requirements shall be removed and replaced by the Contractor within thirty(30) calendar days after notification at his expense. 1. All replacement pavement markings shall also meet all requirements of this specification for the same warranty period after installation. PAINTED PAVEMENT MARKINGS 32 17 23.13-6 SECTION 32 18 16.13 - PLAYGROUND PROTECTIVE SURFACING PART 1-GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Protective surfacing for playground area. B. Subbase under resilient surfacing. C. Containment curbs (Mow strips as indicated on Drawings). 1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A. Section 32 1100-Subbase and Aggregate Base Courses. 1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. ASTM D2047-Standard Test Method for Static Coefficient of Friction of Polish-Coated Flooring Surfaces as Measured by the James Machine; 2017. B. ASTM F1292 - Standard Specification for Impact Attenuation of Surfacing Materials Within the Use Zone of Playground Equipment; 2022. C. ASTM F1487-Standard Consumer Safety Performance Specification for Playground Equipment for Public Use; 2021. D. CPSC Pub. No. 325 - Public Playground Safety Handbook; 2015. 1.04 DEFINITIONS A. Use Zone: The area beneath and immediately adjacent to a play structure or equipment (play event) that is designated for unrestricted circulation around equipment, and on whose surface it is predicted that a user would land when falling from or exiting the equipment. B. Critical Fall Height: The maximum fall height at which the protective surfacing meets the requirements of ASTM F1292. C. Fall Height: The vertical distance between the finished elevation of the designated play surface and the finished elevation of the protective surfacing beneath it as defined by ASTM F1487. D. Protective Surfacing: Resilient ground surfacing. The characteristics of the protective surfacing are based on the fall height of the playground equipment. Changes in either the surfacing or the fall height, particularly reducing the resilience of the protective surfacing or increasing the fall height, will reduce safety-related performance. E. Subbase: A layer under the resilient layer of the protective surfacing but over the subgrade; may be rigid, as in concrete or bituminous, or aggregate. F. Subgrade: The surface of the ground on which the protective surfacing is installed. PLAYGROUND PROTECTIVE SURFACING 32 18 16.13- 1/5 Commodore Park Improvements-Phase 1 -#23173 July 3, 2025 1.05 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For all manufactured surfacing products, provide manufacturer's product data showing materials of construction, compliance with specified standards, installation procedures, and safety limitations. 1. Include IPEMA certifications where required. B. Samples: For each product for which color must be selected provide actual samples showing full range of colors. C. Manufacturer's Field Report. 1.06 DELIVERY,STORAGE,AND HANDLING A. Deliver, handle,and store protective surfacing to project site in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations. B. Store materials in a dry, covered area, elevated above grade. 1.07 WARRANTY A. See Section 01 78 00 - Closeout Submittals - Closeout Submittals, for additional warranty requirements. B. Surfacing shall maintain required impact attenuation characteristics for a period of three (3) years and guaranteed against defects in workmanship and material for a period of no less than five (5)years. PART 2- PRODUCTS 2.01 PERFORMANCE CRITERIA A. Because the safety of the playground depends on strict compliance with the performance criteria,this information is provided for Contractor's information. 1. The top elevation of the protective surfacing is intended to be flush with adjacent grades. 2. Use Zone: The protective surfacing has been designed to provide acceptable impact attenuation as defined in ASTM F1292 for Critical Height of 9 feet (2.74 m). 2.02 MATERIALS A. Poured-In-Place Membrane Surfacing: Weather-resistant wear layer over impact attenuating substrate over aggregate subbase. 1. Wear Layer: Ethylene propylene diene monomer (EPDM) particles adhered with a ultraviolet-stabilized polyurethane binder to produce an even, uniformly colored surface. 2. Wear Layer Thickness: 3/8 inch (10 mm), minimum. PLAYGROUND PROTECTIVE SURFACING 32 18 16.13-2/5 Commodore Park Improvements-Phase 1 -#23173 July 3, 2025 3. Coefficient of Friction, when wet: 0.8, minimum, when tested in accordance with ASTM D2047. 4. Wear Layer Color(s)/Pattern: As indicated on drawings. 5. Impact Attenuating Substrate: 100 percent recycled shredded styrene butadiene rubber (SBR) shreds or granules with 100 percent solids polyurethane binder to form a resilient material; do not use foam rubber. 6. Resilient Depth: 4.5 inches (114 mm). 7. Certification: Provide IPEMA certification of ASTM F1292 Critical Fall Height at thickness specified. 8. Manufacturers: a. DuraPlay, Inc: www.duraplay.com b. GameTime, Inc: www.gametime.com/sales. c. No Fault Sport Group; No Fault Safety Surface for Playgrounds: www.nofault.com/. d. Play Safe Surfacing, Inc: www.playsafesurfacing.com/#sle. e. Hanover Specialties Inc: www.vitriturf.com/#sle. f. Substitutions: See Section 0160 00- Product Requirements. 9. Accessories: Provide manufacturer's standard containment curbs and tapered transition elements to support surfacing between changes of surface grade. B. Geotextile: Nonwoven polypropylene sheet. C. Containment Curbs(Mow Strips as indicated on Drawings): Cast-in-place concrete;free of sharp vertical edges, protruding elements, and trip hazards. 1. Size(s): As indicated on drawings. 2. Minimum Edge Radius: 1/2 inch (13 mm). PART 3- EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Playground equipment installer will perform playground layout prior to installation of footings; verify correctness of layout before starting this work. B. Verify that playground equipment and site furnishings and irrigation system located within playground area are complete. C. Verify location of underground utilities and facilities in the playground area. Damage to underground utilities and facilities will be repaired at Contractor's expense. D. Verify that subgrades are at proper elevations and that smooth grading is complete. E. Verify that proper depth of surfacing is marked on base supports of playground equipment. PLAYGROUND PROTECTIVE SURFACING 32 18 16.13-3/5 Commodore Park Improvements-Phase 1 -#23173 July 3, 2025 3.02 PREPARATION A. Correct subgrade irregularities to ensure that required depth of protective surfacing can be installed, and subgrade elevation is in accordance with manufacturer's requirements. B. Inside Use Zones remove all obstructions that would extend into the resilient protective surfacing. C. Remove rocks, debris, and other similar items. D. Install containment curbs with top surface flush with intended elevation of top surface of protective surfacing. 3.03 SUBBASE A. Install aggregate subbase as indicated on drawings. Compact aggregate to maximum 95 percent, in accordance with ASTM D1557. B. Install with top surface of subbase no higher than grades and levels indicated and not more than 1/4 inch (6 mm) lower than grades and levels indicated. C. Install in true, even plane, sloped to provide positive drainage. D. Flatness Tolerance: 1/4 inch in 10 feet (6 mm in 3 m ), maximum. 3.04 RESILIENT SURFACING LAYER A. Install in accordance with CPSC Pub. No. 325, ASTM F1487, manufacturer's instructions, and requirements of authorities having jurisdiction (AHJ). B. Install proper thickness throughout Use Zone(s). C. Clean and dry surface of subbase. D. Cover aggregate subbase with geotextile: 1. Verify that aggregate is free of ruts or protruding objects. 2. Lap minimum 4 inches (100 mm) width at seams. Adhere seams in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations. 3. Install smooth, and free of tensile stresses, folds, or wrinkles. 4. Protect from clogging,tears, or other damage during surfacing installation. 5. Repair or replace damaged geotextile in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations. E. Poured In Place Surfacing: 1. Mix components mechanically on-site in accordance with manufacturer's directions; do not mix by hand. 2. Install seamlessly; ensure complete bond to subbase. 3. Cover footings and foundations and adhere tightly around penetrating elements. PLAYGROUND PROTECTIVE SURFACING 32 18 16.13-4/5 Commodore Park Improvements-Phase 1 -#23173 July 3, 2025 4. Maintain full thickness of resilient layers within Use Zone;cover or abut containment curbs as indicated on drawings; completely cover tapered transition edges. 5. Hand trowel exposed surface to smooth, even finish. 6. Impact Attenuation Layer: Install entire layer in one continuous pour on the same day. 7. Wear Surface: Bond wear surface to substrate with adhesive. Apply adhesive in small quantities so that wear surface can be applied before adhesive dries. a. Install surfacing seamlessly. When wear surface is composed of different color patterns, pour surface continuously and seamlessly. b. When seams are required due to color change or field conditions, place adjacent wear surface as soon as possible,before initial pour has cured. Coat edge of initial pour with adhesive and apply wear surface mixture immediately. c. Add a minimum of 1/16 inch (2 mm) depth to specified surfacing depth to ensure required impact attenuation performance is met. d. Install wear surface to cover foundations and adhere tightly around elements penetrating the surface. 3.05 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Obtain the services of the equipment manufacturer's field representative to review the finished installation for compliance with specified requirements and with design criteria to the extent known to the Contractor; submit report of field review. B. Owner or Owner's representative will inspect playground surfacing after installation to verify that surfacing is of proper type and depth and that playground meets specified design safety and accessibility requirements. C. Repair or replace rejected work until compliance is achieved. 3.06 CLEANING AND PROTECTION A. Restore adjacent existing areas that have been damaged from the construction. B. Clean playground equipment of construction materials, dirt, stains, filings, and blemishes due to shipment or installation.Clean in accordance with manufacturer's instructions,using cleaning agents as recommended by manufacturer. C. Clean playground area of excess construction materials, debris, and waste. D. Remove excess and waste material and dispose of off-site in accordance with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction. E. Protect installed products until Date of Substantial Completion. F. Replace damaged products before Date of Substantial Completion. END OF SECTION 32 18 16.13 PLAYGROUND PROTECTIVE SURFACING 32 18 16.13-5/5 Commodore Park Improvements-Phase 1 -#23173 July 3, 2025 SECTION 32 18 18 -ACRYLIC TENNIS & RECREATIONAL SPORT SURFACES PART 1-GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Acrylic surfacing for tennis and pickleball courts. 1.02 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. ASTM F1869 -Standard Test Method for Measuring Moisture Vapor Emission Rate of Concrete Subfloor Using Anhydrous Calcium Chloride; 2023. B. ASTM F2170-Standard Test Method for Determining Relative Humidity in Concrete Floor Slabs Using in situ Probes; 2019a. C. ISO 9001 -Quality Management Systems — Requirements; 2015, with Amendment (2024). 1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. All work shall be done in accordance with American Sports Builders Association (ASBA) guidelines. B. The contractor shall record the batch number of each product used on the site and maintain it through the warranty period. C. The contractor shall provide the inspector, upon request, an estimate of the volume of each product to be used on the site. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. Submit one set of manufacturer's system specifications. B. Submit system components Technical Data Sheets (TDS) and manufacturer's Color Chart of manufacturer's full range of colors. C. Submit current Safety Data Sheets. D. Submit current ISO Quality Management System Certification certificate. E. Submit current ITF surface classification. 1.05 WORKING CONDITIONS& LIMITATIONS A. Concrete substrates shall be allowed to cure a minimum of 30 days before application of any coatings. If time sensitive and/or high RH level is present, Laykold Epoxy VTB Primer can be applied to 5-day old (minimum) concrete substrates according to coatings manufacturer guidelines. RH testing is required. ACRYLIC TENNIS& RECREATIONAL SPORT SURFACES 32 18 18- 1/6 Commodore Park Improvements-Phase 1 -#23173 July 3, 2025 B. The substrate shall be CLEAN and DRY before coatings are applied.The surface of the substrate shall be inspected and made sure to be free of grease, oil, dust, dirt and other foreign matter before any coatings are applied. C. Water used in all mixtures shall be fresh and potable. D. No part of the surfacing system shall be applied during a rainfall, or when rainfall is imminent. E. Do not apply coatings to a cold surface. Surface and air temperatures must be a minimum of 50°F (10°C) and rising. F. Do not apply coatings if extremely high humidity prevents drying. G. No coatings are to be applied if surface temperature exceeds 130°F (54°C). H. All materials shall be delivered to the job site in sealed containers with the manufacturer's label affixed. I. Color(s)of acrylic color coating system are to be selected by owner from manufacturer's product color card. J. If all the above conditions are met, surfacing materials shall have a one-year limited warranty as supplied by the manufacturer. 1.06 WARRANTY A. See Section 0178 00—Closeout Submittals for additional warranty requirements. B. Sport surfaces shall be warranted against defects in workmanship and material for a period of one year from the date of substantial completion. PART 2- PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. BASIS OF DESIGN PRODUCT: Laykold Tennis court surfacing materials manufactured by Advanced Polymer Technology(APT)of Harmony, PA,an ISO 9001 certified manufacturer.APT may be contacted via telephone 888-266-4221, fax 724-452-1703, or web site www.laykold.com B. Substitutions: See Section 0160 00—Product Requirements. 2.02 LAYKOLD COLORCOAT SYSTEM MATERIALS A. All components of Laykold ColorCoat system shall be supplied by Advanced Polymer Technology, an ISO 9001 certified manufacturer. ColorCoat system components shall not contain ANY lead, mercury, nor any heavy metals, PCB, or formaldehyde. B. Laykold Poly Primer/Laykold Epoxy VTB Primer (concrete courts only). Shall be a two- component, 100% solids, solvent-free primer. If approved, Laykold Acrylic Concrete Primer ACRYLIC TENNIS& RECREATIONAL SPORT SURFACES 32 18 18-2/6 Commodore Park Improvements-Phase 1 -#23173 July 3, 2025 (adhesion promoter) may be substituted where concrete's relative humidity, hydrostatic pressure, efflorescence, and staining are not a concern. 1. Percent Solids by Weight 98% (minimum) 2. Weight 9.01 lbs./gallon C. Laykold Acrylic Resurfacer. Acrylic-based emulsion used for smoothing rough pavements. 1 to 2-coats as required by the manufacturer. 1. Percent Solids by Weight 52% (minimum) 2. Weight 10.68 Ibs/gallon D. Laykold ColorCoat Concentrate textured batch mixture. Pigmented wear-resistant acrylic emulsion. 2-coats required. Advantage Laykold factory textured color or Laykold Colorflex textured batch mixture are acceptable substitutes. 1. Percent Solids by Weight 49% (minimum) 2. Weight: 12.9 (+/-3) Ibs/gallon E. Laykold ColorCoat Concentrate finish batch mixture. Pigmented wear-resistant acrylic emulsion. 1-coat. Laykold Colorflex finish batch mixture is an acceptable substitute. 1. Percent Solids by Weight 49% (minimum) 2. Weight: 9.47-9.52 lbs/gallon F. Laykold Line Prime. Clear drying acrylic emulsion line primer. 1-coat required. 1. Percent Solids by Weight 29% 2. Weight: 8.9 lbs/gallon G. Laykold Textured White Line Paint. Factory textured, wear-resistant acrylic emulsion line marking paint. 1-2 coats as required. 1. Percent Solids by Weight 67% (minimum) a. Weight: 11.4 lbs/gallon PART 3- EXECUTION 3.01 INSPECTION A. Concrete substrates shall be installed with a vapor barrier according to ASBA guidelines and be finished with a CSP 3 profile. B. Inspect concrete or asphalt substrate for dryness. Concrete substrates are to be tested according to coatings manufacturer guidelines using ASTM F2170 (Relative Humidity testing via probe) or ASTM F1869-98 (Anhydrous Calcium Chloride test)). Report any discrepancies to general contractor. C. Surface of substrate shall be cleaned by general contractor as required. ACRYLIC TENNIS& RECREATIONAL SPORT SURFACES 32 18 18-3/6 Commodore Park Improvements-Phase 1 -#23173 July 3, 2025 D. Surfacing contractor to approve site and surface conditions prior to proceeding with application of any coatings. 3.02 INSTALLATION A. Primer (for concrete substrates only): When installing the Laykold ColorCoat system over concrete, Laykold Poly Primer must be applied as the first layer of the system. After RH tests less than 75%, Laykold Poly Primer can be applied. Laykold Poly Primer is mixed by pouring the "B" component into the "A" component and mixing using a low speed jiffy mixer (400 to 600 rpm) for 2 minutes. Scrape down the sides of the bucket and mix for an additional minute. Do not incorporate air when mixing.Spread the mixed primer on the substrate using a high-quality, medium nap roller to achieve a total coverage of approximately 0.030 gal/yd2 (0.15 kg/m2 - 3002 feet(91500.96 cm)/gal).The working time for the Primer is approximately 50 minutes and is reduced in high temperatures. Lightly broadcast 40 to 60 mesh silica sand onto the wet primer at the rate of 5 pounds per 100 sq.ft. (0.24 kg/m2)to create a rough texture.Allow 5 to 6 hours drying time before proceeding. If the concrete substrate tests with RH of 75% or greater or a MVER (Anhydrous Calcium Chloride)of greater than 3 Ibs/1000 sqf/24 hours, more cure time is required or Laykold Epoxy VTB Primer can be used (see Laykold Epoxy VTB Primer TDS for application guidelines). Acrylic Concrete Primer may be substituted under certain conditions when approved by owner and/or design professional. If approved for use, see Acrylic Concrete Primer technical data sheet for application details. B. Patching: Once the surface has been thoroughly cleaned and is free of all loose material, dirt,or dust,the court shall be flooded and allowed to drain a minimum of 30 minutes and a maximum of 1 hour. Any area that holds water (birdbaths) in a depth greater than 1/16 inch (1.59 mm) shall be outlined and patched. 1. Surface Leveling: Birdbaths shall be leveled using a Laykold Acrylic Deep Patch court patch binder slurry. Prime area to be patched with a 50/50 mixture of Laykold Acrylic Deep Patch and water. Primer shall be brushed into place and allowed to dry prior to patching. Patch mix shall consist of Laykold Acrylic Deep Patch,50-mesh sand and Type 1 Portland Cement. Mix as per manufacturer directions. 2. Crack Filling: Cracks shall be cleaned, primed, and filled using Laykold Acrylic Resurfacer if cracks are 1/16 inch(1.59 mm)or less. If greater than 1/16 inch, Laykold Acrylic Deep Patch court patch binder slurry should be used to fill cracks.Mix as per manufacturer's directions. 3. All areas that are repaired/leveled/corrected using a court patch binder mixture shall be allowed to fully cure and then ground smooth and level with the substrate by stone or an acceptable mechanical method. C. Filler Coat(s): Apply one coat of Laykold Acrylic Resurfacer using a 24", 30" or 36" wide 70 Durometer flexible rubber squeegee. Batch mix shall consist of 55 gallons (260 kg) of Laykold Acrylic Resurfacer, 30 to 40 gallons(115-130 kg)of potable water, and 600 to 900 pounds (270- 400 kg) of clean, bagged silica sand (60 to 80 mesh). The application rate shall be 0.05-0.07 gal/yd2 (0.29-0.40 kg/m2 - 129- 1802 feet (54924.96 cm) /gal) of undiluted Laykold Acrylic Resurfacer per coat. Laykold Nusurf is an acceptable substitute for Laykold Acrylic. ACRYLIC TENNIS& RECREATIONAL SPORT SURFACES 32 18 18-4/6 Commodore Park Improvements-Phase 1 -#23173 July 3, 2025 D. Textured Color Coats: 1. Laykold MS2 — ITF Classification 2 2. Apply two coats of Laykold ColorCoat Concentrate textured batch mixture using a 24",30" or 36" 50 Durometer flexible rubber squeegee. Batch mix shall consist of 55 gallons (260 kg) of Laykold ColorCoat Concentrate, 25 to 35 gallons (95-115 kg) of potable water and 300 to 450 pounds (135-203 kg) of clean, bagged silica sand (60 to 80 mesh). The application rate shall be 0.05-0.07 gal/yd2 (0.29-0.40 kg/m2 - 129- 1802 feet (54924.96 cm) /gal) of undiluted Laykold ColorCoat Concentrate per coat. Each coat should be completely dry before applying subsequent coats. 3. Each coat should be completely dry before applying subsequent coats. Allow topcoat to cure a minimum of 24 hours before applying game lines. E. Finish Color Coat:Apply one coat of Laykold ColorCoat Concentrate finish batch mixture using a 24", 30" or 36" 50 Durometer flexible rubber squeegee. Batch mix shall consist of 55 gallons (260 kg)of ColorCoat Concentrate and 55 gallons(210 kg)of potable water.The application rate shall be 0.03-0.04 gal/yd2 (0.17-0.23 kg/m2 - 225- 3002 feet (91500.96 cm) /gal) of undiluted ColorCoat Concentrate per coat. Each coat should be completely dry before applying subsequent coats. Allow topcoat to cure a minimum of 24 hours before applying game lines. F. Game Lines: 1. Wait a minimum of 24 hours after final color coat before applying line paint. 2. All lines are to be applied by painting between masking tape with a paintbrush or roller according to U.S.T.A. and A.S.B.A. specifications. 3. Prime masked lines with Laykold Line Prime and allow a minimum drying time of 1-hour. 4. Apply 1 to 2 coats as needed of Laykold Textured White Line Paint with a brush or roller. 5. Remove masking tape immediately after lines are dry. 6. Allow lines to dry a minimum of 24 hours before allowing play on court. G. Remove all excess and waste materials from the area of work. Dispose of empty containers in accordance with federal and local statutes. 3.03 PROTECTION A. Cure Time. No traffic or other trades shall be allowed on the surface for a period of one week following completion to allow for complete and proper cure of the finish. B. Other Trades. It is the responsibility of the general contractor to protect the surface from damage by other trades before acceptance by the owner or the owner's authorized agent. C. Do not allow surrounding sprinkler systems to spray water on the newly applied court surface for a period of one week after completion. D. Do not place any benches, chairs, ball baskets, or any other type of court equipment on the newly applied court surface for a period of one week after completion. ACRYLIC TENNIS& RECREATIONAL SPORT SURFACES 32 18 18-5/6 Commodore Park Improvements-Phase 1 -#23173 July 3, 2025 E. Do not allow black soled shoes,bicycles,rollerblades,etc.on the court surface. Black scuff marks cannot be removed. END OF SECTION 32 18 18 ACRYLIC TENNIS& RECREATIONAL SPORT SURFACES 32 18 18-6/6 Commodore Park Improvements-Phase 1 -#23173 July 3, 2025 SECTION 32 3113 - CHAIN LINK FENCES AND GATES PART 1-GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Posts, rails, and frames. B. Wire fabric. C. Concrete. D. Manual gates with related hardware. E. Accessories. 1.02 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. ASTM A123/A123M -Standard Specification for Zinc(Hot-Dip Galvanized) Coatings on Iron and Steel Products; 2017. B. ASTM A153/A153M - Standard Specification for Zinc Coating (Hot-Dip) on Iron and Steel Hardware; 2023. C. ASTM A392 - Standard Specification for Zinc-Coated Steel Chain-Link Fence Fabric; 2011a (Reapproved 2022). D. ASTM C94/C94M -Standard Specification for Ready-Mixed Concrete; 2024. E. ASTM F567 -Standard Practice for Installation of Chain-Link Fence; 2023. F. FS RR-F-191/1D - Fencing,Wire and Post Metal (Chain-Link Fence Fabric); 1990. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. See Section 0130 00-Administrative Requirements,for submittal procedures. B. Product Data: Provide data on fabric, posts, accessories, fittings and hardware. 1.04 WARRANTY A. See Section 0178 00-Closeout Submittals, for additional warranty requirements. B. Correct defective Work within a five year period after Date of Substantial Completion. PART 2- PRODUCTS 2.01 COMPONENTS A. Line Posts: 1.9 inch (48 mm) diameter. B. Corner and Terminal Posts: 2.38 inch (60 mm) diameter. C. Gate Posts: 3-1/2 inch (89 mm) diameter. CHAIN LINK FENCES AND GATES 32 31 13- 1/4 Commodore Park Improvements-Phase 1 -#23173 July 3, 2025 D. Top and Brace Rail: 1.66 inch (42 mm) diameter, plain end, sleeve coupled. E. Bottom Rail: 1.66 inch (42 mm) diameter, plain end, sleeve coupled. F. Gate Frame: 1.66 inch (42 mm) diameter for welded fabrication. G. Fabric: 2 inch (51 mm) diamond mesh interwoven wire, 9 gauge, 0.1920 inch (4.9 mm) thick, top selvage knuckle end closed, bottom selvage knuckle end closed. H. Tension Wire: 6 gauge, 0.1920 inch (4.9 mm)thick steel, single strand. I. Tie Wire: Aluminum alloy steel wire. 2.02 MATERIALS A. Posts, Rails, and Frames: 1. Line Posts: Type I round in accordance with FS RR-F-191/1D. 2. Terminal, Corner, Rail, Brace, and Gate Posts: Type I round in accordance with FS RR-F- 191/1D. B. Wire Fabric: 1. ASTM A392 zinc coated steel chain link fabric. C. Concrete: 1. Ready-mixed, complying with ASTM C94/C94M; normal Portland cement; 3,000 psi strength at 28 days, 3 inch (75 mm) slump. 2.03 MANUAL GATES AND RELATED HARDWARE A. Hardware for Single Swinging Gates: 180 degree hinges, 2 for gates up to 60 inches (1,525 mm) high, 3 for taller gates;fork latch with gravity drop and padlock hasp; keeper to hold gate in fully open position. B. Hinges: Finished to match fence components. C. Latches: Finished to match fence components. 2.04 ACCESSORIES A. Caps: Cast steel galvanized; sized to post diameter, set screw retainer. B. Fittings: Sleeves, bands, clips, rail ends,tension bars,fasteners and fittings; steel. 2.05 FINISHES A. Components (Other than Fabric): Galvanized in accordance with ASTM A123/A123M, at 1.7 ounces per square foot(530 g/sq m). B. Hardware: Hot-dip galvanized to weight required by ASTM A153/A153M. C. Accessories: Same finish as framing. CHAIN LINK FENCES AND GATES 32 31 13-2/4 Commodore Park Improvements-Phase 1 -#23173 July 3, 2025 PART 3- EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Install framework,fabric, accessories and gates in accordance with ASTM F567. B. Place fabric on outside of posts and rails. C. Set intermediate posts plumb, in concrete footings, integral with continuous concrete mow strip,with top of footing 4 inches(100 mm) above finish grade. Slope top of concrete for water runoff. D. Line Post Footing Depth Below Finish Grade: As indicated on Drawings. E. Corner, Gate and Terminal Post Footing Depth Below Finish Grade: As indicated on Drawings. 3.02 TOLERANCES A. Maximum Variation From Plumb: 1/4 inch (6 mm). B. Maximum Offset From True Position: 1 inch (25 mm). 3.03 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. See Section 0140 00-Quality Requirements,for additional requirements. B. Layout: Verify that fence installation markings are accurate to design, paying attention to gate locations, underground utilities, and property lines. C. Fence Height: Randomly measure fence height at three locations or at areas that appear out of compliance with design. D. Gates: Inspect for level, plumb, and alignment. 3.04 CLEANING A. Leave immediate work area neat at end of each work day. B. Clean jobsite of excess materials; scatter excess material from post hole excavations uniformly away from posts. Remove excess material if required. C. Clean fence with mild household detergent and clean water rinse well. D. Remove mortar from exposed posts and other fencing material using a 10 percent solution of muriatic acid followed immediately by several rinses with clean water. END OF SECTION 32 3113 CHAIN LINK FENCES AND GATES 32 31 13-3/4 Commodore Park Improvements-Phase 1 -#23173 July 3, 2025 SECTION 32 92 19 SEEDING PART 1-GENERAL 1.01 Description A. This specification shall govern work required for the placement and maintaining seeding as required to complete the project. 1.02 References The latest edition of the referenced item below shall be used. A. Texas Agriculture Code-Chapter 63 Commercial Fertilizer B. Texas Seed Law C. US Department of Agriculture D. Federal Seed Act PART 2-PRODUCTS 2.01 Topsoil A. Shall be easily cultivated,fertile soil that is free from objectionable material which is able to support the required vegetation. B. On-Site Material 1. The Contractor shall obtain topsoil from on-site during Clearing and Grubbing operations and shall stockpile this material at a location shown on the Drawings or approved by the Owner. 2. Material to be used from on-site shall be free of subsoil, clay lumps, non-soil materials, litter, contamination, and roots, stumps, woody material, and stones larger than two-inches (2"), and materials that the Owner deems inappropriate. C. Off-Site Material 1. The Contractor shall obtain topsoil from Owner approved off-site source(s). 2. Material to be used from off-site shall be free of subsoil, clay lumps, non-soil materials, litter, contamination, and roots, stumps, woody material, and stones larger than two-inches (2"), and materials that the Owner deems inappropriate. 2.02 Fertilizer A. All fertilizer used shall be delivered in bags or containers with clearly marked analysis, manufacturer, trademark,and all inert materials. B. Shall be a granulated or pellet fertilizer. C. Shall have an analysis containing nitrogen (N), phosphoric acid (P), and potash (K) nutrients unless otherwise specified on the Drawings. 1. The analysis shall be 12(N)-12(P)-12(K)or as recommended by the Seed provider. a. These figures represent the percent of nitrogen, phosphoric acid, and potash nutrients respectively,as determined by the methods of the Association of Official Agricultural Chemists. b. At least fifty-percent(50%) of the nitrogen component must be of a slow-release formulation such as urea-based and plastic resin-coated fertilizers. D. The rate of application shall be not less than recommended by the manufacturer. E. In the event that it is necessary to substitute a fertilizer with a different analysis,it shall be with a lower analysis. F. The total nutrients applied per unit area shall not be less that the specified amount of each nutrient. G. Fertilizer is subject to testing by the Texas A&M Feed and Fertilizer Control Service in accordance with the Texas Agriculture Code-Chapter 63. 2.03 Seed A. Seed shall be labeled and conform to the requirements of the US Department of Agriculture,Federal Seed Act,and Texas Seed Law. B. Labels shall indicate purity,germination,name and type of seed. C. Seed furnished shall be of the previous season's crop and the date of analysis shown on each bag shall be within twelve(12)months of delivery to the project. D. The quantity of"Commercial Seed"required to equal the quantity of"Pure Live Seed"shall be computed by the following formula: 1. Commercial Seed=Pure Live Seed x 10.000 %Purity x%Germination SEEDING 3292 19-1 E. The quantity of pure live seed(PLS)and type required are indicated below in Table 1 and Table 2,or as shown on the Drawings for mixture. Table 1 Clay Soil Seed Mix March I to September 30 October 1 to March 1 Common Name lb.PLS acre lb.PLS acre Green Sprangletop 0.3 -- Sideoats Grama 3.6 3.6 Haskell Common Bermuda grass 40.0 40.0 (Hulled) Common Bermuda grass Unhulled -- 40.0 Buffalo grass T 1.6 1.6 exoma Annual Rye grass -- 30.0 Foxtail Millet 34.0 -- Table 2 Sandy Soil Seed Mix March 1 to September 30 October 1 to March 1 Common Name lb.PLS acre lb.PLS acre Green Sprangletop 0.3 0.3 Common Bermuda grass 40.0 40.0 Hulled Common Bermuda grass Unhulled -- 40.0 Buffalo grass 1.6 1.6 Texoma Annual Rye grass -- 30.0 Foxtail Millet 34.0 -- 2.04 Mulch A. Wood/Cellulose Blend Fiber Mulch 1. Shall consist of: a. Seventy-percent(70%)long wood grain fibers produced from grinding clean,whole wood chips, and thirty percent (30%) cellulose fiber produced from ground newsprint, unless otherwise noted on the Drawings or indicated by the Owner. 2. Mulch shall have no growth inhibiting ingredients. 3. Shall be dried with a moisture content less that 10%by weight. 4. Fibers shall be dyed an appropriate color to facilitate visual metering and application of mulch. S. The cellulose fiber shall be manufactured so that after addition and agitation in slurry tank with fertilizers, seeds, and other approved additives, the fibers in the material will become uniformly suspended to forms a homogeneous slurry 6. When sprayed on the ground,the material shall form a uniform cover impregnated with seeds and the cover shall allow added water to percolate to the underlying soil. 7. The fiber material shall be supplied in packages of not more than 100 pound gross weight and shall be suitable for outdoor storage for up to six(6)months. a. Package is to be marked by the manufacturer to indicate the manufacturer name, address, customer telephone number,the dry weight content,and material content analysis. B. Hay SEEDING 3292 19-2 1. Hay shall be locally available and free of deleterious material,non-native grasses and material. a. If non-native grasses and material shall be apparent the Contractor will be required to remove this material by an Owner approved method. 2. The Owner and/or Owner shall approve the hay prior to placement. a. This approval does not relive the Contractor from any responsibilities of the removal of non- native grasses and materials. 2.05 Water A. Water shall be free from oils, acids, alkali's, salts, industrial wastes, and other substances, which may inhibit vegetation growth. B. Unless indicated otherwise on the Drawings, water shall be provided by the Contractor and shall be transported and applied by the Contractor with approved equipment and machinery,which is in good working order. PART 3-EXECUTION 3.01 General A. All Work shall be in accordance with the Contract, Specifications, Drawings, manufacturer recommendations,and industry standards. In the event that a requirement conflicts with another the more stringent requirement shall be followed,unless directed otherwise by the Owner. 3.02 Topsoil A. The Contractor shall remove and dispose of objectionable material in accordance with local,state,and federal regulations. B. Prior to placing topsoil the existing soil shall be cultivated to a depth of four-inches(4"). C. The approved topsoil shall be spread across the cultivated area to a uniform loose depth of four-inches (4")minimum or as specified on the Drawings or by the Owner. D. The area shall be watered and lightly compacted by means of a light roller or other suitable equipment. 1. Compaction shall be minimal and should not inhibit vegetative growth. E. If the topsoil settles below the established grade or will not allow for positive run-off, the area shall have additional topsoil added and sprinkled with water and rolled as directed by the Owner. F. The topsoil shall be protected from erosion from wind and water until protected by vegetation or other Owner approved method(s). 3.03 Equipment A. The fertilizing, seeding and/or mulching operations shall be accomplished with equipment suitable to the required function. B. It shall be of current design and in good operating condition. C. Hydro Seeding Equipment 1. Special seeding and mulching equipment must also meet the following requirements: a. Seeder 1) Equipment for applying a seed-fertilizer mix shall be a hydraulic seeder designed to pump and discharge a waterborne,homogeneous slurry of seed and fertilizer. 2) The seeder shall be equipped with a power driven agitator, and capable of pressure discharge. b. Wood/Cellulose Fiber Mulch Spreader 1) Equipment used for this application of fertilizer, seeds, wood pulp, water and other additives shall have a built-in agitation system with sufficient capacity to agitate,suspend and homogeneously mix a slurry containing up to 40 lbs.of fiber plus the required fertilizer solids for each 100 gallons of water. 2) It shall have sufficient agitation and pump capacity to spray a slurry in a uniform coat over the area to be mulched. 3.04 Mulch A. Wood Cellulose Blend Fiber Mulch with Seeds 1. After tilling,mulch shall be applied. 2. Wood cellulose fibers shall be added to the hydraulic seeder after the proportionate amounts of seeds,fertilizer,water and other approved materials are added. 3. Application shall be 1500 lb/acre on flats, 2000 lb/acre on 3:1 slopes,and 2500 lb/acre on 2:1 or SEEDING 3292 19-3 greater,or as recommended by the manufacturer and directed by the Owner. 4. The mulch shall provide a uniform cover over the soil surface. 5. Placement shall be in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations and as directed by the Owner. B. Hay 1. Seed shall be applied to the surface at the appropriate rate as recommended by the manufacturer and/or directed by the Owner. 2. Hay shall be spread lightly across the area as directed by the Owner. 3. The area shall be lightly rolled and watered. 3.05 Maintenance A. The Contractor will water,repair and reseed areas as required for a period of 45 days. B. This includes erosion damage. C. If at any time the seeded area becomes gullied or otherwise damaged, or the seedlings have been damaged or destroyed, the affected portion shall be re-established to the specified condition prior to acceptance of the work. 3.06 Guarantee A. The Contractor shall assure ninety-five percent(95%)of the seeded area has established growth at forty- five(45)calendar days after seeding,unless indicated otherwise on the Drawings. B. Where established,growth is defined as at least one(1)plant per square foot. 3.07 Watering A. Sod shall be thoroughly watered immediately after planting and subsequently at such intervals to promote growth or as directed by the Owner. 1. 0 to 21 days a. Every two days with a minimum of 1/2 inch(1/2")water,unless a comparable amount of rain has occurred. 2. 22 to 42 days a. Twice a week with a minimum of 1/2 inch(1/2")water,unless a comparable amount of rain has occurred. 3. Water shall be applied in late afternoon or at night to enable absorption of the water with minimum evaporation. 4. During drought conditions,contact the Owner on any special requirements or provisions. B. The Contractor shall furnish and operate equipment to distribute water at a uniform and controllable rate. C. Ensure that watering does not erode soil or plantings. 3.08 Fertilizer A. Fertilizing and seeding shall be done concurrently. B. Fertilizer shall be applied uniformly over the area and in a manner in accordance with the manufacturers' recommendations or as directed by the Owner. C. Shall be dry and in good physical condition with any fertilizer being in powder or cake form being rejected. D. Fertilizer shall be uniformly applied at a rate of 400 lb/acre,after tilling. E. If seeds and fertilizer are distributed in a water slurry. F. The mixture shall be applied to the area to be seeded within thirty(30)minutes after all the components have come into contact. 3.09 Mowing and Maintenance A. Mow at intervals to keep the grass height from exceeding 3-1/2 inches(3-1/2"). B. Mower shall be set at a minimum height of 2-1/2 inches(2-1/2")or at a height that will not remove more than one-half of the grass leaf surface. C. Mow areas when dry and not in a saturated or soft condition. D. Treat areas of heavy weed and insect infestation as recommended by treatment manufacturer. E. Restrict all vehicular and pedestrian traffic from area(s)until sod is established or for minimum 30 days during growing season. F. Maintain area(s)for a minimum of ninety(90)days,or as required to establish an acceptable lawn. 1. For area(s)seeded in the fall,continue maintenance the following spring until an acceptable lawn is established. SEEDING 3292 19-4 SECTION 33 OS 10 EXCAVATION AND BACKFILL FOR UTILITIES PART 1-GENERAL 1.01 Description A. This specification shall govern all work required for the excavation and Backfill of water utilities, wastewater utilities,and storm drainage utilities,as required to complete the project. 1.02 Related Sections A. 03 3111.13 CONCRETE STRUCTURES B. 3123 16.13 TRENCHING C. 3124 13.10 EMBANKMENT D. 33 05 07 TRENCHLESS UTILITY INSTALLATION E. 33 14 13 WATER UTILITY DISTRIBUTION PIPING F. 33 3113.13 WASTEWATER UTILITY PIPING 1.03 References The latest edition of the referenced item below shall be used and obtained by the Contractor A. ASTM C 150-Specification for Portland Cement B. ASTM D 558 - Standard Test Methods for Moisture-Density (Unit Weight) Relations of Soil-Cement Mixtures C. ASTM D 698-Standard Test Methods for Laboratory Compaction Characteristics of Soil Using Standard Effort(12 400 ft-lbf/ft3(600 kN-m/m3)) D. ASTM D 2487 - Standard Practice for Classification of Soils for Engineering Purposes (Unified Soil Classification System) E. ASTM D 2922 - Standard Test Methods for Density of Soil and Soil-Aggregate in Place By Nuclear Methods (Shallow Depth) F. Part 1926, Subpart P - Excavations, Trenching, and Shoring of the Occupational Safety and Health Administration (OSHA) Standards and Interpretations G. Texas Code Chapter 756 Subchapter C-Trench Safety H. Texas Department of Transportation (TxDOT) Standard Specification for Construction and Maintenance of Highways,Streets,and Bridges Item 421,Hydraulic Cement Concrete I. Texas Department of Transportation(TxDOT)Departmental Material Specification DMS-4610,F1yAsh J. Texas Department of Transportation(TxDOT)Test Procedure Tex-106-E 1.04 Definitions The words defined in this section shall for the purpose of the specification have the meanings ascribed to them. A. Final Backfill-Material located from the top of the Initial Backfill to a specified height and is horizontal from trench sidewall to opposite trench sidewall B. Pipe Bedding-Material located from the top of the foundation to the bottom level line of the pipe and is horizontal from trench sidewall to opposite trench sidewall. C. Initial Backfill- Material placed from the Pipe Bedding up to a determined level line above the top of pipe and is horizontal from trench sidewall to opposite trench sidewall. D. Pipe Embedment-Backfill Material consisting of Pipe Bedding and Initial Backfill. E. Pipe Foundation-Material located at the bottom of the trench and is horizontal from trench sidewall to opposite trench sidewall. PART 2-PRODUCTS 2.01 Class I Backfill Materials A. Material shall be well-graded gravels, sands, gravel-sand mixture, with all meet the following requirements: 1. Meet the requirements of ASTM D2487 for:GW,SW. 2. Gradation a. GW 1) D60/D10-greater than four-percent(4%) 2) 1-1/2"(37.5 mm) Sieve-one-hundred percent 100%passing 3) No.4(4.75 mm)Sieve-less than 50%of coarse fraction passing 4) No.200 (0.075 mm) Sieve-less than or equal to five-percent(5%)passing EXCAVATION AND BACKFILL FOR UTILITIES 33 05 10-1 b. SW 1) D60/Dlo-greater than six-percent(6%) 2) 1-1/2"(37.5 mm) Sieve-one-hundred percent 100%passing 3) No.4(4.75 mm)Sieve-more than 50%of coarse fraction passing 4) No.200 (0.075 mm) Sieve-less than or equal to five-percent(5%)passing 3. Plasticity Index a. GW 1) Non-plastic b. SW 1) Non-plastic 2.02 Class II Backfill Materials A. Material shall meet the following requirements: 1. Meet the requirements of ASTM D2487 for:GM,GP,SM,SP,SP-SM,SW-SM,GP-GM,GW-GM. 2. Gradation a. GP 1) No.4(4.75 mm)Sieve-minimum 30%passing 2) No.200 (0.075 mm) Sieve-less than five-percent(5%)passing b. SP 1) No.4(4.75 mm)Sieve-minimum 30%passing 2) No.200 (0.075 mm) Sieve-less than five-percent(5%)passing c. GP-GM,GW-GM,SP-SM,SW-SM 1) No.4(4.75 mm)Sieve-minimum 30%passing 2) No.200 (0.075 mm) Sieve-between five-percent(5%)and twelve-percent(12%)passing 3. Plasticity Index a. GP 1) Non-plastic to 4 b. SP 1) Non-plastic to 4 c. GP-GM,GW-GM,SP-SM,SW-SM 1) Non-plastic to 4 2.03 Coarse Aggregate Backfill Material A. Material shall be in accordance with TxDOT Item 421,Aggregate Grade 4 or 5. 2.04 Crushed Stone Backfill Material A. Material shall be in accordance with TxDOT Item 421,Aggregate Grade 2,3,or 4. 2.05 Flowable Fill Backfill Material A. Cement 1. Shall be Cement Portland cement in accordance with ASTM C 150,Type I. B. Fly Ash 1. Fly ash shall conform to the requirements of TxDOT DMS-4610. C. Filler Aggregate 1. Shall consist of sand, stone screenings, other granular material that is compatible with the other components. 2. Shall be fine enough to stay in suspension to the extent required for proper flow without segregation and for minimal settlement. 3. Shall have a Plasticity Index(TxDOT Test Method Tex-106-E) less than 15 and shall conform to the following gradation: a. Percent passing Sieve No.200 shall be 0%-10% D. Mixing Water 1. Shall be in accordance with Section 03 3111 CONCRETE STRUCTURES. E. Additives 1. Darafill®or approved other. F. Strength 1. Shall be 100-300 psi minimum compressive strength at 28 days 2.06 Select Backfill Material A. Shall be native on-site material from excavation, imported material, or a mixture of sand and clay or EXCAVATION AND BACKFILL FOR UTILITIES 33 05 10-2 other suitable granular material free from vegetation,rocks,debris,and material that is in large clumps greater than two-inches(2")meeting the following requirements: 1. Liquid limit of thirty-five(35)maximum, 2. Plasticity index range from eight(S)to twenty(20), 3. Moisture range from-1%to 3%. B. This material shall not include soils with a Unified Soil Classification System of OL,MH,OH,CH,and PT or soils with an AASHTO classification of A7. 2.07 Sand Backfill Material A. Sand 1. Gradation shall be as follows: a. Percent passing #4 sieve-55- 100 b. Percent passing #10 sieve-40- 100 c. Percent passing #40 sieve-25- 100 d. Percent passing#200 sieve- 10- 20 e. Plasticity Index-Non-plastic to 4 2.08 Cement Stabilized Sand Backfill Material A. Shall be a mixture of cement-stabilized sand containing a minimum of two (2) sacks of standard Type I Portland cement per cubic yard of sand. B. Sand 1. Gradation shall be as follows: a. Percent passing #4 sieve-55- 100 b. Percent passing #10 sieve-40- 100 c. Percent passing #40 sieve-25- 100 d. Percent passing#200 sieve- 10- 20 e. Plasticity Index-NP- 10 2.09 Native Backfill Material A. Suitable material chosen from on-site excavation or imported may be used. 1. This material will be subject to approval by the Owner. B. The material chosen shall be free of large lumps or clods, which will not readily break down under compaction. C. This material will be subject to approval by the Owner. D. Material shall be free of vegetation or other extraneous material. 2.10 Topsoil Backfill Material A. Suitable material chosen from on-site excavation or imported may be used. 1. This material will be subject to approval by the Owner. B. The material chosen shall be free of large lumps or clods, which will not readily break down under compaction. C. Material shall be free of vegetation or other extraneous material. D. Should be stockpiled separately and used for finish grading. E. Capable of supporting a good growth of grass when fertilized and seeded or sodded. 2.11 Other Backfill Materials A. Other material of comparable featured and equal quality may be substituted for the above items with approval of the Owner. PART 3-EXECUTION 3.01 General Information A. All Work shall be in accordance with the Contract, Specifications, Drawings, manufacturer recommendations,and industry standards. 1. In the event that a requirement conflicts with another, the more stringent requirement shall be followed,unless directed otherwise by the Owner. B. All surplus materials shall become the Contractors and disposal shall be in accordance with local,state, and federal regulations and will be the responsibility of the Contractor, unless otherwise noted on the Drawings or directed by the Owner. C. All damages by excavating,either to surface or subsurface structures,shall be repaired or replaced by the EXCAVATION AND BACKFILL FOR UTILITIES 33 05 10-3 Constructor at his own cost and expense to the requirements of the damaged items owner. 3.02 Safety Requirements A. It is the responsibility of the Contractor to adhere to all safety procedures and requirements of local,state, and federal regulations. B. If at any time a trench shall be required to perform the work then the requirements of Section 3123 16.13 TRENCHING shall be required. C. Any excavation that remains open after working hours shall be covered with a steel plate of sufficient thickness to support traffic. 3.03 Excavation A. General 1. Trenching a. Excavation shall be constructed in open cut trenches with vertical sides in accordance with Section 3123 16.13 TRENCHING. b. The Contractor shall pile excavated material in a manner that will not endanger the work and will avoid obstructing sidewalks,driveways,power pole,drainage,streets,etc. c. The Contractor shall not have more the 200 feet of open trench left behind the trenching operation and no more than 500 feet of ditch behind the ditching machine that is not compacted as required by the Drawings and specification. 1) No trench or excavation shall remain open after working hours, without prior authorization from the Owner. d. If,for whatever reason,the trench width at the top of pipe must exceed that width indicated in the bedding details, the Contractor shall modify bedding as required by the Owner to accommodate the additional load on the pipe. 1) Excavation width shall not exceed the right-of-way width,easement width,or as indicated on the Drawings or by Owner. e. If quicksand, muck, or similar unstable material develop or is encountered during the excavation,the following procedure shall be used unless other methods are called for on the Drawings. 1) If the unstable condition is a result of ground water, the Contractor, prior to additional excavation shall control it. 2) After stable conditions have been achieved,unstable soil shall be removed or stabilized to a depth of: a) Two-feet(2')below the bottom of pipe for pipes two-feet(2') or more in height. b) To a depth equal to the height of pipe, twelve-inches (12") minimum, for pipe less than two-feet(2') in height. c) Such excavation shall be carried at least one-foot(1') beyond the horizontal limits of the structure on all sides. 3) All unstable soil removed shall be replaced with Coarse Aggregate Backfill Material, or approved suitable stable material,placed in uniform layers of suitable depth as directed by the Owner,and each layer shall be wetted,if necessary,and compacted by mechanical tamping as required to provide a stable condition. 4) For unstable trench conditions requiring outside forms,seals,sheathing,and bracing,any additional excavation and backfill required shall be done at the Contractor's expense. a) The limit of excavation may be modified to allow for placing and removing forms, installing sheeting,shoring,bracing,etc. 2. Trenchless a. Shall be done in accordance with Section 33 05 07 TRENCHLESS UTILITY INSTALLATION 3. For all utilities to be constructed in fill above natural ground, the embankment shall first be constructed to an elevation not less than one-foot (1') above the top of the pipe or conduit in accordance with Section 31 24 13.10 EMBANKMENT, after which excavation for the pipe or conduit shall be made. B. Pipes 1. General a. The limit of excavation shall allow for all work to be performed in a safe manner,for placing and removing forms,installing sheeting,shoring,bracing,etc. EXCAVATION AND BACKFILL FOR UTILITIES 33 05 10-4 b. Trenches shall have a maximum width as required to one-foot(1') above the outside surface of the pipe and parallel thereto on each side unless otherwise specified on the Drawings or by the Owner. 2. Vertical Side a. The limit shall not exceed three-feet (3') outside the Pipe Embedment on a vertical plane parallel to the Pipe Embedment except where specifically approved otherwise by the Owner. b. The Contractor shall provide and install any sheeting, shoring, and bracing as necessary to provide a safe work area as required to protect workmen, structures, equipment, other improvements and utilities,etc. c. The Contractor shall be solely responsible for all trench protection. d. The sheeting, shoring, and bracing shall be removed,as the excavation is backfilled in a safe manner. 3. Sloping Sides a. In unimproved areas, where sufficient space is available, the Contractor shall be allowed to back slope the sides of the excavation as long as it is completed in a safe manner in accordance with all Local,State,and Federal regulations. 1) Backfill material will be required to be in accordance with the backfill for the pipe installed. 4. Unauthorized Over Excavation a. In the event the excavation is carried on below the indicated elevation,the Contractor at his expense shall bring the grade back to requirements by filling with Pipe Embedment Backfill material as required,unless otherwise noted on the Drawings or directed by the Owner. C. Manholes and Inlets 1. General a. The limit of excavation shall allow for all work to be performed in a safe manner,for placing and removing forms,installing sheeting,shoring,bracing,etc. 2. Vertical Side a. The limit shall not exceed three-feet(3') outside the footing on a vertical plane parallel to the footing except where specifically approved otherwise by the Owner. b. The Contractor shall provide and install any sheeting, shoring, and bracing as necessary to provide a safe work area as required to protect workmen, structures, equipment, other improvements and utilities,etc. c. The Contractor shall be solely responsible for all trench protection. d. The sheeting, shoring, and bracing shall be removed,as the excavation is backfilled in a safe manner. 3. Sloping Sides a. In unimproved areas, where sufficient space is available, the Contractor shall be allowed to back slope the sides of the excavation as long as it is completed in a safe manner in accordance with all Local,State,and Federal regulations. 1) Backfill material will be required to be in accordance with the backfill for the pipe installed. 4. Unauthorized Over Excavation a. Excavation for slabs,footings,etc.,that rest on earth,shall not be carried below the elevation shown on the Drawings. 1) In the event the excavation is carried on below the indicated elevation,the Contractor at his expense shall bring the slab,footing,etc.,to the required grade by filling with concrete with a minimum compressive strength of 4,000 psi, unless otherwise noted on the Drawings or directed by the Owner. D. Shaping of Trench Bottom 1. The trench bottom shall be undercut a minimum depth sufficient to accommodate the class of bedding indicated in the Drawings and Specifications. E. De-watering 1. The Contractor shall keep the excavation free from water by use of cofferdams,bailing,pumping well pointing,or any combination as the particular situation may warrant. a. Removal of well-points shall be at rate of 1/3 per 24 hours (every third well-point). EXCAVATION AND BACKFILL FOR UTILITIES 33 05 10-5 2. All de-watering devices shall be installed in such a manner as to provide clearance for construction,removal of forms,and inspection of exterior of formwork. 3. It is the intent of these specifications that the foundation be placed on a firm dry bed. 4. The foundation bed shall be kept in a de-watered condition for a sufficient period of time to insure the safety of the structure,but in no case shall de-watering be terminated sooner than seven (7) days after placing concrete. S. All de-watering methods and procedures are subject to the approval of the Owner. 6. The excavation shall be inspected and approved by the Owner before work on the structure is started. 7. The Contractor shall provide a relatively smooth,firm foundation bed for footings and slabs that bear directly on the undisturbed earth without additional cost to the Owner,regardless of the soil conditions encountered. a. The Owner will be the sole judge as to whether these conditions have been met. F. Excavation in Streets 1. Excavation in streets,together with the maintenance of traffic where specified,and the restoration of the pavement riding surface shall be in accordance with Drawing detail,or as required by other applicable specifications. G. Removing Abandoned Structures 1. When abandoned masonry structures or foundations are encountered in the excavation, such obstructions shall be removed for the full width of the trench and to a depth of one foot(1')below the bottom of the trench. 2. When abandoned inlets or manholes are encountered and no Drawing provision is made for adjustment or connection to the new utility,such manholes and inlets shall be removed completely to a depth one-foot(1')below the bottom of the trench. 3. In each instance,the bottom to the trench shall be restored to grade by backfilling and compacting by the methods provided hereinafter for backfill. 4. Where the trench cuts through utility lines which are known to be abandoned,these sewers shall be cut flush with sides of the trench and blocked with a concrete plug in a manner satisfactory to the Owner. H. Protection of Utilities 1. The Contractor shall inform utility owners sufficiently in advance of the Contractor's operations to enable such utility owners to reroute,provide temporary detours,or to make other adjustments to utility lines in order that the Contractor may proceed with his work with a minimum of delay. 2. The Contractor shall conduct his work such that a reasonable minimum of disturbance to existing utilities will result. 3. If a utility is damaged it shall be restored promptly by the Contractor at his expense in accordance with the utility owners requirements. 4. The Contractor shall not hold the Owner liable for any expense due to delay or additional work because of utility adjustments or conflicts. I. Excess Excavated Material 1. All materials from excavation not required for backfilling the trench shall be removed, by the Contractor,from the job site promptly following the completion of work involved,or incorporated into the project. 3.04 Water Utilities Backfill A. Main Piping and Accessories 1. Pipe Foundation a. Shall be firm and undisturbed native material,or as required by the Drawings or Owner. b. If disturbed it shall be compacted to same density as the native surrounding material. 2. Pipe Embedment Backfill a. General 1) All pipe and fittings that are not enclosed in concrete valve boxes,laid in encasement pipe, shall be completely embedded as specified. a) This embedment includes the bottom, sides and top of pipe and fittings including bells,so that all portions will be encased to insulate the pipe from the natural ground and from the backfill. EXCAVATION AND BACKFILL FOR UTILITIES 33 05 10-6 2) All trenches and excavation shall be backfilled as soon as is practical after the pipes and accessories are properly placed. 3) The placing of the embedment material shall be done in such a manner so as to be free of all natural soil,rock,or other foreign matter. 4) Flooding or jetting of backfill is not allowed. 5) Care shall be taken to not damage the tracer wire or cause wire to come off of pipe. b. Pipes 6"to 14" 1) Material a) Shall be Sand Backfill Material,or as required by the Drawings or Owner. 2) Pipe Bedding a) Eight-inches (8") below the bottom of pipe and the total width of the trench, or as required by the Drawings or Owner. b) In order to reduce the amount of material required, the trench bottom may be excavated in a rounded manner so as to maintain at least a minimum of twelve-inches (12") of embedment material between the excavation sides and the pipe. 3) Initial Backfill a) Twelve-inches (12") above the top of pipe and the total width of the trench, or as required by the Drawings or Owner. c. Pipes 16"and Larger 1) Material a) Shall be Sand Backfill Material,or as required by the Drawings or Owner. 2) Pipe Bedding a) Twelve-inches (12")below the bottom of pipe and the total width of the trench,or as required by the Drawings or Owner. b) In order to reduce the amount of material required, the trench bottom may be excavated in a rounded manner so as to maintain at least a minimum of twelve-inches (12") of embedment material between the excavation sides and the pipe. 3) Initial Backfill a) Twelve-inches (12") above the top of pipe and the total width of the trench, or as required by the Drawings or Owner. d. Placement 1) Shall be placed in a manner as to not damage any utility or improvements. 2) Shall be placed in layers not more than eight-inches (8") in depth (loose measurement) the total width of the trench. 3) The placing of the embedment material shall be done in such a manner so as to be free of all natural soil,rock,or other foreign matter. e. Compaction 1) General a) Shall be compacted in a manner as to not damage any utility or improvements. 2) Sand Backfill Material a) Hand tamp with tamping plate or other approved method at a moisture content determined by the Contractor for effective compaction without softening the soil of foundation or trench walls,or as required by the Drawings or Owner. 3. Warning Tape a. Shall be placed as required in Section 33 14 13 WATER UTILITY DISTRIBUTION PIPING 4. Final Backfill a. General 1) All trenches and excavation shall be backfilled as soon as is practical after the embedment and accessories have been properly placed. 2) The placing of the material shall be done in such a manner so as to be free of all foreign matter. 3) Flooding or jetting of backfill is not allowed. b. Material 1) Paved Areas a) Top of Pipe Embedment Material to the bottom of road subgrade material EXCAVATION AND BACKFILL FOR UTILITIES 33 05 10-7 (1) Select Backfill Material,or as required by the Drawings or Owner. 2) Non-Paved Areas a) Top of Pipe Embedment Material to six-inches (6")below finished grade (1) Native Backfill Material,or as required by the Drawings or Owner. b) Top six-inches (6") (1) Topsoil Backfill Material,or as required by the Drawings or Owner. c. Placement 1) Shall be placed in a manner as to not damage any utility or improvements. 2) Shall be placed in layers not more than eight-inches (8") in depth (loose measurement) the total width of the trench. 3) The placing of the embedment material shall be done in such a manner so as to be free of all natural soil,rock,or other foreign matter. d. Compaction 1) General a) Shall be compacted in a manner as to not damage any utility or improvements. 2) Select Backfill Material a) Compacted by use of industry standard equipment at zero to five-percent(0-5%) of optimum moisture content to ninety-five percent (95%) of maximum dry density determined according to ASTM D 698,or as required by the Drawings or Owner. 3) Native Backfill Material a) Compacted by use of industry standard equipment to ninety-percent(90%)Standard Proctor,or as required by the Drawings or Owner. 4) Topsoil Backfill Material a) Shall be placed in layers not more than eight-inches (8") in depth (loose measurement)the total width of the trench,or as required by the Drawings or Owner. b) Compacted by use of industry standard equipment to a firm density, or as required by the Drawings or Owner. S. Utility Crossings a. Outside of the pipes are within two-feet(2') of each other 1) Material a) Cement Stabilized Sand Backfill Material,or as required by the Drawings or Owner. 2) Encasement Requirement a) Below Pipe (1) As required in previous parts of this section, or as required by the Drawings or Owner. b) Sides of Pipe (1) As required in previous parts of this section, or as required by the Drawings or Owner. c) Above Pipe (1) As required in previous parts of this section, or as required by the Drawings or Owner. d) Distance beyond crossing (1) Three-feet(3') or as required by the Drawings,owner of utility(ies),or Owner. 3) Placement a) Shall be placed in a manner as to not damage any utility or improvements. b) Shall be placed in layers not more than eight-inches (8") in depth (loose measurement)the total width of the trench. c) The placing of the embedment material shall be done in such a manner so as to be free of all natural soil,rock,or other foreign matter. 4) Compaction a) Shall be compacted in a manner as to not damage any utility or improvements. b) Material shall be placed and be compacted under, around the side, and over the utility(ies) in a manner that will reduce damage and settlement to a minimum or as approved by the Owner. EXCAVATION AND BACKFILL FOR UTILITIES 33 05 10-8 c) Hand tamp with tamping plate or other approved method on the dry side of optimum moisture content to ninety-five percent(95%) of maximum dry density determined according to ASTM D 558 but sufficient for effective hydration of the cement without softening the soil of foundation or trench walls, or as required by the Drawings or Owner. b. Outside of the pipes are beyond two-feet(2') of each other 1) Shall be as required for Main Piping and Accessories, or as required by the Drawings, owner of utility(ies),or Owner. 6. Compaction Testing a. Frequency of tests shall not be less than one(1)for any pipe section between main line valves and every one-hundred linear feet (100') of main pipe per two-feet (2') vertical of backfill material to top of Final Backfill,not including Topsoil Backfill Material,starting at two feet(2') above top of pipe,in accordance with ASTM D 2922. b. Failure 1) If compaction of the fill material does not meet or exceed the requirements that portion of fill material is to be further compacted and retested at the sole expense of the Contractor. B. Service Lines 1. Pipe Foundation a. Shall be firm and undisturbed native material,or as required by the Drawings or Owner. b. If disturbed it shall be compacted to same density as the native surrounding material. 2. Pipe Embedment Backfill a. General 1) All pipe and fittings that are not laid in encasement pipe, shall be completely embedded as specified. a) This embedment includes the bottom, sides and top of pipe and fittings including bells,so that all portions will be encased to insulate the pipe from the natural ground and from the backfill. 2) All trenches and excavation shall be backfilled as soon as is practical after the pipes and accessories are properly placed. 3) The placing of the embedment material shall be done in such a manner so as to be free of all natural soil,rock,or other foreign matter. 4) Flooding or jetting of backfill is not allowed. b. Pipes up to 2" 1) Material a) Shall be Select Backfill Material,or as required by the Drawings or Owner. 2) Pipe Bedding a) Six-inches (6") below the bottom of pipe and the total width of the trench, or as required by the Drawings or Owner. b) In order to reduce the amount of material required, the trench bottom may be excavated in a rounded manner so as to maintain at least a minimum of six-inches (6") of embedment material between the excavation sides and the pipe. 3) Initial Backfill a) Six-inches (6") above the top of pipe and the total width of the trench,or as required by the Drawings or Owner. c. Pipes Larger Than 2" a) Shall be considered Main Piping and be in accordance with Section A of the Water Utilities Backfill in this specification. d. Placement 1) Shall be placed in a manner as to not damage any utility or improvements. 2) Shall be placed in layers not more than eight-inches (8") in depth (loose measurement) the total width of the trench. 3) The placing of the embedment material shall be done in such a manner so as to be free of all natural soil,rock,or other foreign matter. e. Compaction EXCAVATION AND BACKFILL FOR UTILITIES 33 05 10-9 1) General a) Shall be compacted in a manner as to not damage any utility or improvements. 2) Sand Backfill Material a) Hand tamp with tamping plate or other approved method at a moisture content determined by the Contractor for effective compaction without softening the soil of foundation or trench walls,or as required by the Drawings or Owner. 3. Final Backfill a. General 1) All trenches and excavation shall be backfilled as soon as is practical after the embedment and accessories have been properly placed. 2) The placing of the material shall be done in such a manner so as to be free of all foreign matter. 3) Flooding or jetting of backfill is not allowed. b. Material 1) Shall be Native Backfill Material,or as required by the Drawings or Owner. c. Placement 1) Shall be placed in a manner as to not damage any utility or improvements. 2) Shall be placed in layers not more than eight-inches (8") in depth (loose measurement) the total width of the trench. 3) The placing of the embedment material shall be done in such a manner so as to be free of all natural soil,rock,or other foreign matter. d. Compaction 1) General a) Shall be compacted in a manner as to not damage any utility or improvements. 2) Native Backfill Material a) Compacted by use of industry standard equipment to ninety-percent(90%)Standard Proctor,or as required by the Drawings or Owner. 3) Topsoil Backfill Material a) Shall be placed in layers not more than eight-inches (8") in depth (loose measurement)the total width of the trench,or as required by the Drawings or Owner. b) Compacted by use of industry standard equipment to a firm density, or as required by the Drawings or Owner. 4. Compaction Testing a. Are to be tested at a rate of one(1)for every six(6)services staggered or every three-hundred linear feet(300') of water service installed. 3.05 Wastewater Utilities Backfill A. Main Piping and Accessories 1. Pipe Foundation a. Shall be firm and undisturbed native material,or as required by the Drawings or Owner. b. If disturbed it shall be compacted to same density as the native surrounding material. 2. Pipe Embedment Backfill a. General 1) All pipe and fittings that are not laid in encasement pipe, shall be completely embedded as specified. a) This embedment includes the bottom, sides and top of pipe and fittings including bells,so that all portions will be encased to insulate the pipe from the natural ground and from the backfill. 2) All trenches and excavation shall be backfilled as soon as is practical after the pipes and accessories are properly placed. 3) The placing of the embedment material shall be done in such a manner so as to be free of all natural soil,rock,or other foreign matter. 4) Flooding or jetting of backfill is not allowed. b. Pipes 6"to 14" 1) Material a) Excavation less than twenty-feet(<20')in depth and above groundwater table: EXCAVATION AND BACKFILL FOR UTILITIES 33 05 10-10 (1) Shall be Class I Backfill Material,Class II Backfill Material,Cement Stabilized Sand Backfill Material,or as required by the Drawings or Owner. b) Excavation greater than twenty-feet(>20')in depth and below groundwater table: (1) Shall be Coarse Aggregate Backfill Material, or as required by the Drawings or Owner. 2) Pipe Bedding a) Six-inches (6") below the bottom of pipe and the total width of the trench, or as required by the Drawings or Owner. b) In order to reduce the amount of material required, the trench bottom may be excavated in a rounded manner so as to maintain at least a minimum of twelve-inches (12") of embedment material between the excavation sides and the pipe. 3) Initial Backfill a) Twelve-inches (12") above the top of pipe and the total width of the trench, or as required by the Drawings or Owner. c. Pipes 16"and Larger 1) Material a) Excavation less than twenty-feet(<20')in depth and above groundwater table: (1) Shall be Class I Backfill Material,Class II Backfill Material,Cement Stabilized Sand Backfill Material,or as required by the Drawings or Owner. b) Excavation greater than twenty-feet(>20')in depth and below groundwater table: (1) Shall be Coarse Aggregate Backfill Material, or as required by the Drawings or Owner. 2) Pipe Bedding a) Twelve-inches (12")below the bottom of pipe and the total width of the trench,or as required by the Drawings or Owner. b) In order to reduce the amount of material required, the trench bottom may be excavated in a rounded manner so as to maintain at least a minimum of twelve-inches (12") of embedment material between the excavation sides and the pipe. 3) Initial Backfill a) Twelve-inches (12") above the top of pipe and the total width of the trench, or as required by the Drawings or Owner. d. Placement 1) Shall be placed in a manner as to not damage any utility or improvements. 2) Shall be placed in layers not more than eight-inches (8") in depth (loose measurement) the total width of the trench. 3) The placing of the embedment material shall be done in such a manner so as to be free of all natural soil,rock,or other foreign matter. e. Compaction 1) General a) Shall be compacted in a manner as to not damage any utility or improvements. 2) Class I Backfill Material a) Hand tamp with tamping plate or other approved method at a moisture content determined by the Contractor for effective compaction without softening the soil of foundation or trench walls,or as required by the Drawings or Owner. 3) Class I1 Backfill Material a) Hand tamp with tamping plate or other approved method at three-percent (3%) of optimum moisture content to ninety-five percent (95%) of maximum dry density determined according to ASTM D 698 without softening the soil of foundation or trench walls,or as required by the Drawings or Owner. 4) Cement Stabilized Sand Backfill Material a) Hand tamp with tamping plate or other approved method on the dry side of optimum moisture content to ninety-five percent(95%) of maximum dry density determined according to ASTM D 558 but sufficient for effective hydration of the cement without softening the soil of foundation or trench walls, or as required by the Drawings or Owner. EXCAVATION AND BACKFILL FOR UTILITIES 33 05 10-11 5) Coarse Aggregate Backfill Material a) Hand tamp with tamping plate or other approved method for effective compaction, or as required by the Drawings or Owner. 3. Warning Tape a. Ductile Iron Pipe 1) Shall be placed as required in Section 33 14 13 WATER UTILITY DISTRIBUTION PIPING b. Plastic Pipe 1) Shall be placed as required in Section 33 3113.13 WASTEWATER UTILITY PIPING 4. Final Backfill a. General 1) All trenches and excavation shall be backfilled as soon as is practical after the embedment and accessories have been properly placed. 2) The placing of the material shall be done in such a manner so as to be free of all foreign matter. 3) Flooding or jetting of backfill is not allowed. b. Material 1) Paved Areas a) Top of Embedment Material to three-feet (3') below the bottom of road subgrade material (1) Select Backfill Material,or as required by the Drawings or Owner. b) Three-feet (3') below the bottom of road base material to the bottom of the road subgrade material (1) Cement Stabilized Sand Backfill Material. 2) Non-Paved Areas a) Top of Embedment Material to six-inches (6")below finished grade (1) Native Backfill Material,or as required by the Drawings or Owner. b) Top six-inches (6") (1) Topsoil Backfill Material,or as required by the Drawings or Owner. c. Placement 1) Shall be placed in a manner as to not damage any utility or improvements. 2) Shall be placed in layers not more than eight-inches (8") in depth (loose measurement) the total width of the trench. 3) The placing of the embedment material shall be done in such a manner so as to be free of all natural soil,rock,or other foreign matter. d. Compaction 1) General a) Shall be compacted in a manner as to not damage any utility or improvements. 2) Select Backfill Material a) Compacted by use of industry standard equipment at zero to five-percent(0-5%) of optimum moisture content to ninety-five percent (95%) of maximum dry density determined according to ASTM D 698,or as required by the Drawings or Owner. 3) Cement Stabilized Sand Backfill Material a) Hand tamp with tamping plate or other approved method on the dry side of optimum moisture content to ninety-five percent(95%) of maximum dry density determined according to ASTM D 558 but sufficient for effective hydration of the cement without softening the soil of foundation or trench walls, or as required by the Drawings or Owner. 4) Native Backfill Material a) Compacted by use of industry standard equipment to ninety-percent(90%)Standard Proctor,or as required by the Drawings or Owner. 5) Topsoil Backfill Material a) Shall be placed in layers not more than eight-inches (8") in depth (loose measurement)the total width of the trench,or as required by the Drawings or Owner. b) Compacted by use of industry standard equipment to a firm density, or as required by the Drawings or Owner. EXCAVATION AND BACKFILL FOR UTILITIES 33 05 10-12 S. Utility Crossings a. Outside of the pipes are within two-feet(2') of each other 1) Material a) Cement Stabilized Sand Backfill Material,or as required by the Drawings or Owner. 2) Encasement Requirement a) Below Pipe (1) As required in previous parts of this section, or as required by the Drawings or Owner. b) Sides of Pipe (1) As required in previous parts of this section, or as required by the Drawings or Owner. c) Above Pipe (1) As required in previous parts of this section, or as required by the Drawings or Owner. d) Distance beyond crossing (1) Three-feet(3') or as required by the Drawings,owner of utility(ies),or Owner. 3) Placement a) Shall be placed in a manner as to not damage any utility. b) Shall be placed in layers not more than eight-inches (8") in depth (loose measurement)the total width of the trench. c) The placing of the embedment material shall be done in such a manner so as to be free of all natural soil,rock,or other foreign matter. 4) Compaction a) Shall be compacted in a manner as to not damage any utility. b) Material shall be placed and be compacted under, around the side, and over the utility(ies) in a manner that will reduce damage and settlement to a minimum or as approved by the Owner. c) Hand tamp with tamping plate or other approved method on the dry side of optimum moisture content to ninety-five percent(95%) of maximum dry density determined according to ASTM D 558 but sufficient for effective hydration of the cement without softening the soil of foundation or trench walls, or as required by the Drawings or Owner. b. Outside of the pipes are beyond two-feet(2') of each other 1) Shall be as required for Main Piping and Accessories, or as required by the Drawings, owner of utility(ies),or Owner. 6. Compaction Testing a. Frequency of tests shall not be less than one (1) for any pipe section between manholes and every one-hundred linear feet(100')of main pipe per two-feet(2')vertical of backfill material to top of Final Backfill,not including Topsoil Backfill Material, starting at two feet(2') above top of pipe,in accordance with ASTM D 2922. b. Failure 1) If compaction of the fill material does not meet or exceed the requirements that portion of fill material is to be further compacted and retested at the sole expense of the Contractor. B. Service Lines 1. Pipe Foundation a. Shall be firm and undisturbed native material,or as required by the Drawings or Owner. b. If disturbed it shall be compacted to same density as the native surrounding material. 2. Pipe Embedment Backfill a. General 1) All pipe and fittings that are not laid in encasement pipe, shall be completely embedded as specified. a) This embedment includes the bottom, sides and top of pipe and fittings including bells,so that all portions will be encased to insulate the pipe from the natural ground and from the backfill. EXCAVATION AND BACKFILL FOR UTILITIES 33 05 10-13 2) All trenches and excavation shall be backfilled as soon as is practical after the pipes and accessories are properly placed. 3) The placing of the embedment material shall be done in such a manner so as to be free of all natural soil,rock,or other foreign matter. 4) Flooding or jetting of backfill is not allowed. b. Pipes 4"to 6" 1) Material a) Excavation less than twenty-feet(<20')in depth and above groundwater table: (1) Shall be Sand Backfill Material,or as required by the Drawings or Owner. b) Excavation greater than twenty-feet(>20')in depth and below groundwater table: (1) Shall be Coarse Aggregate Backfill Material, or as required by the Drawings or Owner. 2) Pipe Bedding a) Six-inches (6") below the bottom of pipe and the total width of the trench, or as required by the Drawings or Owner. b) In order to reduce the amount of material required, the trench bottom may be excavated in a rounded manner so as to maintain at least a minimum of six-inches (6") of embedment material between the excavation sides and the pipe. 3) Initial Backfill a) Six-inches (6") above the top of pipe and the total width of the trench,or as required by the Drawings or Owner. c. Pipes Larger Than 6" a) Shall be considered Main Piping and be in accordance with Section A of the Wastewater Utilities Backfill in this specification. d. Placement 1) Shall be placed in a manner as to not damage any utility or improvements. 2) Shall be placed in layers not more than eight-inches (8") in depth (loose measurement) the total width of the trench. 3) The placing of the embedment material shall be done in such a manner so as to be free of all natural soil,rock,or other foreign matter. e. Compaction 1) General a) Shall be compacted in a manner as to not damage any utility or improvements. 2) Sand Backfill Material a) Hand tamp with tamping plate or other approved method at a moisture content determined by the Contractor for effective compaction without softening the soil of foundation or trench walls,or as required by the Drawings or Owner. 3) Coarse Aggregate Backfill Material a) Hand tamp with tamping plate or other approved method for effective compaction, or as required by the Drawings or Owner. 3. Final Backfill a. General 1) All trenches and excavation shall be backfilled as soon as is practical after the embedment and accessories have been properly placed. 2) The placing of the material shall be done in such a manner so as to be free of all foreign matter. 3) Flooding or jetting of backfill is not allowed. b. Material 1) Shall be Native Backfill Material,or as required by the Drawings or Owner. c. Placement 1) Shall be placed in a manner as to not damage any utility. 2) Shall be placed in layers not more than eight-inches (8") in depth (loose measurement) the total width of the trench. 3) The placing of the embedment material shall be done in such a manner so as to be free of all natural soil,rock,or other foreign matter. EXCAVATION AND BACKFILL FOR UTILITIES 33 05 10-14 d. Compaction 1) General a) Shall be compacted in a manner as to not damage any utility. 2) Native Backfill Material a) Compacted by use of industry standard equipment to ninety-percent(90%)Standard Proctor,or as required by the Drawings or Owner. 4. Utility Crossings a. Outside of the pipes are within two-feet(2') of each other 1) Material a) Cement Stabilized Sand Backfill Material,or as required by the Drawings or Owner. 2) Encasement Requirement a) Below Pipe (1) As required in previous parts of this section, or as required by the Drawings or Owner. b) Sides of Pipe (1) As required in previous parts of this section, or as required by the Drawings or Owner. c) Above Pipe (1) As required in previous parts of this section, or as required by the Drawings or Owner. d) Distance beyond crossing (1) Three-feet(3') or as required by the Drawings,owner of utility(ies),or Owner. 3) Placement a) Shall be placed in a manner as to not damage any utility or improvements. b) Shall be placed in layers not more than eight-inches (8") in depth (loose measurement)the total width of the trench. c) The placing of the embedment material shall be done in such a manner so as to be free of all natural soil,rock,or other foreign matter. 4) Compaction a) Shall be compacted in a manner as to not damage any utility or improvements. b) Material shall be placed and be compacted under, around the side, and over the utility(ies) in a manner that will reduce damage and settlement to a minimum or as approved by the Owner. c) Hand tamp with tamping plate or other approved method on the dry side of optimum moisture content to ninety-five percent(95%) of maximum dry density determined according to ASTM D 558 but sufficient for effective hydration of the cement without softening the soil of foundation or trench walls, or as required by the Drawings or Owner. b. Outside of the pipes are beyond two-feet(2') of each other 1) Shall be as required for Main Piping and Accessories, or as required by the Drawings, owner of utility(ies),or Owner. S. Compaction Testing 6. Are to be tested at a rate of one (1) for every six (6) services staggered or every three-hundred linear feet(300') of wastewater service installed in accordance with ASTM D 2922. C. Manhole A. Schedule of Backfilling 1. Backfilling around the manholes shall commence as soon as concrete or masonry has been allowed to cure the required time and forms and shoring have been removed. B. Subgrade 1. Shall be undisturbed native material,or as required by the Drawings or Owner. 2. Compact top six-inches (6")to 95%Standard Proctor Density. C. Bedding 1. General a. The placing of the backfill material shall be done in such a manner so as to be free of all natural soil or other foreign matter and prevent damage to any other work. EXCAVATION AND BACKFILL FOR UTILITIES 33 05 10-15 2. Material a. Crushed Stone Backfill Material,or as required by the Drawings or Owner. 3. Requirement a. Below Foundation (1) Eight-inches (8"),or as required by the Drawings or Owner b. Width (1) Foundation width plus two-feet(2') or to edge of excavation whichever is greater. 4. Placement a. Compact to form a stable surface to place foundation upon,or as required by the Drawings or Owner. D. Initial Backfill 1. General a. The placing of the material shall be done in such a manner so as to be free of all natural soil,rock,or other foreign matter and prevent damage to any other work. 2. Material a. Excavation less than twenty-feet(<20')in depth and above groundwater table: (1) Shall be Cement Stabilized Sand Backfill Material, or as required by the Drawings or Owner. b. Excavation greater than twenty-feet(>20')in depth and below groundwater table: (1) Shall be Flowable Fill Backfill Material,or as required by the Drawings or Owner. (2) Allow to cure prior to placement of Final Backfill 3. Requirement a. Above Bedding (1) Five-feet(5'),or as required by the Drawings or Owner b. Width (1) To extent of excavation. 4. Placement a. Shall be placed in a manner as to not damage any utility. b. Shall be placed in layers not more than eight-inches(8")in depth(loose measurement)the total width of the trench. C. The placing of the embedment material shall be done in such a manner so as to be free of all natural soil,rock,or other foreign matter. 5. Compaction a. General (1) Shall be compacted in a manner as to not damage any utility. b. Crushed Stone Backfill Material (1) Hand tamp with tamping plate or other approved method for effective compaction,or as required by the Drawings or Owner. E. Final Backfill 1. General a. All trenches and excavation shall be backfilled as soon as is practical after the embedment and accessories have been properly placed. b. The placing of the material shall be done in such a manner so as to be free of all foreign matter. C. Flooding or jetting of backfill is not allowed. 2. Material a. Paved Areas (1) Top of Initial Backfill to the bottom of road subgrade material (a) Cement Stabilized Backfill Material,or as required by the Drawings or Owner. b. Non-Paved Areas (1) Top of Embedment Material to six-inches (6")below finished grade (a) Select Backfill Material,or as required by the Drawings or Owner. (2) Top six-inches (6") (a) Topsoil Backfill Material,or as required by the Drawings or Owner. 3. Placement EXCAVATION AND BACKFILL FOR UTILITIES 33 05 10-16 a. Shall be placed in a manner as to not damage any utility or improvements. b. Shall be placed in layers not more than eight-inches(8")in depth(loose measurement)the total width of the trench. C. The placing of the embedment material shall be done in such a manner so as to be free of all natural soil,rock,or other foreign matter. 4. Compaction a. General (1) Shall be compacted in a manner as to not damage any utility or improvements. b. Select Backfill Material (1) Compacted by use of industry standard equipment at zero to five-percent (0-5%) of optimum moisture content to ninety-five percent (95%) of maximum dry density determined according to ASTM D 698,or as required by the Drawings or Owner. C. Cement Stabilized Sand Backfill Material (1) Hand tamp with tamping plate or other approved method on the dry side of optimum moisture content to ninety-five percent (95%) of maximum dry density determined according to ASTM D 558 but sufficient for effective hydration of the cement without softening the soil of foundation or trench walls, or as required by the Drawings or Owner. d. Topsoil Backfill Material (1) Shall be placed in layers not more than eight-inches(8")in depth(loose measurement) the total width of the trench,or as required by the Drawings or Owner. (2) Compacted by use of industry standard equipment to a firm density,or as required by the Drawings or Owner. F. Compaction Testing 1. Frequency of tests shall not be less than one (1) per two-feet(2') vertical of backfill material to top of Final Backfill,not including Topsoil Backfill Material, starting at two feet(2') above top of Initial Backfill,in accordance with ASTM D 2922. 2. Failure a. If compaction of the fill material does not meet or exceed the requirements that portion of fill material is to be further compacted and retested at the sole expense of the Contractor. 3.06 Storm Water Utilities Backfill A. Main Piping and Accessories 1. Pipe Foundation a. Shall be firm and undisturbed native material,or as required by the Drawings or Owner.. b. If disturbed it shall be compacted to same density as the native surrounding material. 2. Pipe Embedment Backfill a. General 1) All pipe and fittings that are not laid in encasement pipe, shall be completely embedded as specified. a) This embedment includes the bottom, sides and top of pipe and fittings including bells,so that all portions will be encased to insulate the pipe from the natural ground and from the backfill. 2) All trenches and excavation shall be backfilled as soon as is practical after the pipes and accessories are properly placed. 3) The placing of the embedment material shall be done in such a manner so as to be free of all natural soil,rock,or other foreign matter. 4) Flooding or jetting of backfill is not allowed. b. All Pipes 1) Material a) Excavation less than twenty-feet(<20')in depth and above groundwater table: (1) Shall be Class I Backfill Material,Class II Backfill Material,Cement Stabilized Sand Backfill Material,or as required by the Drawings or Owner. b) Excavation greater than twenty-feet(>20')in depth and below groundwater table: (1) Shall be Coarse Aggregate Backfill Material, or as required by the Drawings or Owner. EXCAVATION AND BACKFILL FOR UTILITIES 33 05 10-17 2) Pipe Bedding a) Six-inches (6") below the bottom of pipe and the total width of the trench, or as required by the Drawings or Owner. b) In order to reduce the amount of material required, the trench bottom may be excavated in a rounded manner so as to maintain at least a minimum of twelve-inches (12") of embedment material between the excavation sides and the pipe. 3) Initial Backfill a) Twelve-inches (12") above the top of pipe and the total width of the trench, or as required by the Drawings or Owner. c. Placement 1) Shall be placed in a manner as to not damage any utility or improvements. 2) Shall be placed in layers not more than eight-inches (8") in depth (loose measurement) the total width of the trench. 3) The placing of the embedment material shall be done in such a manner so as to be free of all natural soil,rock,or other foreign matter. d. Compaction 1) General a) Shall be compacted in a manner as to not damage any utility or improvements. 2) Class I Backfill Material a) Hand tamp with tamping plate or other approved method at a moisture content determined by the Contractor for effective compaction without softening the soil of foundation or trench walls,or as required by the Drawings or Owner. 3) Class 11 Backfill Material a) Hand tamp with tamping plate or other approved method at three-percent (3%) of optimum moisture content to ninety-five percent (95%) of maximum dry density determined according to ASTM D 698 without softening the soil of foundation or trench walls,or as required by the Drawings or Owner. 4) Cement Stabilized Sand Backfill Material a) Hand tamp with tamping plate or other approved method on the dry side of optimum moisture content to ninety-five percent(95%) of maximum dry density determined according to ASTM D 558 but sufficient for effective hydration of the cement without softening the soil of foundation or trench walls, or as required by the Drawings or Owner. 5) Coarse Aggregate Backfill Material a) Hand tamp with tamping plate or other approved method for effective compaction, or as required by the Drawings or Owner. 3. Final Backfill a. General 1) All trenches and excavation shall be backfilled as soon as is practical after the embedment and accessories have been properly placed. 2) The placing of the material shall be done in such a manner so as to be free of all foreign matter. 3) Flooding or jetting of backfill is not allowed. b. Material 1) Paved Areas a) Top of Embedment Material to three-feet (Y) below the bottom of road subgrade material (1) Select Backfill Material,or as required by the Drawings or Owner. b) Three-feet (Y) below the bottom of road base material to the bottom of the road subgrade material (1) Cement Stabilized Sand Backfill Material. 2) Non-Paved Areas a) Top of Embedment Material to six-inches (6")below finished grade (1) Native Backfill Material,or as required by the Drawings or Owner. b) Top six-inches (6") EXCAVATION AND BACKFILL FOR UTILITIES 33 05 10-18 (1) Topsoil Backfill Material,or as required by the Drawings or Owner. c. Placement 1) Shall be placed in a manner as to not damage any utility or improvements. 2) Shall be placed in layers not more than eight-inches (8") in depth (loose measurement) the total width of the trench. 3) The placing of the embedment material shall be done in such a manner so as to be free of all natural soil,rock,or other foreign matter. d. Compaction 1) General a) Shall be compacted in a manner as to not damage any utility or improvements. 2) Select Backfill Material a) Compacted by use of industry standard equipment at zero to five-percent(0-5%) of optimum moisture content to ninety-five percent (95%) of maximum dry density determined according to ASTM D 698,or as required by the Drawings or Owner. 3) Cement Stabilized Sand Backfill Material a) Hand tamp with tamping plate or other approved method on the dry side of optimum moisture content to ninety-five percent(95%) of maximum dry density determined according to ASTM D 558 but sufficient for effective hydration of the cement without softening the soil of foundation or trench walls, or as required by the Drawings or Owner. 4) Native Backfill Material a) Compacted by use of industry standard equipment to ninety-percent(90%)Standard Proctor,or as required by the Drawings or Owner. 5) Topsoil Backfill Material a) Shall be placed in layers not more than eight-inches (8") in depth (loose measurement)the total width of the trench,or as required by the Drawings or Owner. b) Compacted by use of industry standard equipment to a firm density, or as required by the Drawings or Owner. 4. Utility Crossings a. Outside of the pipes are within two-feet(2') of each other 1) Material a) Cement Stabilized Sand Backfill Material,or as required by the Drawings or Owner. 2) Encasement Requirement a) Below Pipe (1) As required in previous parts of this section, or as required by the Drawings or Owner. b) Sides of Pipe (1) As required in previous parts of this section, or as required by the Drawings or Owner. c) Above Pipe (1) As required in previous parts of this section, or as required by the Drawings or Owner. d) Distance beyond crossing (1) Three-feet(3') or as required by the Drawings,owner of utility(ies),or Owner. 3) Placement a) Shall be placed in a manner as to not damage any utility or improvements. b) Shall be placed in layers not more than eight-inches (8") in depth (loose measurement)the total width of the trench. c) The placing of the embedment material shall be done in such a manner so as to be free of all natural soil,rock,or other foreign matter. 4) Compaction a) Shall be compacted in a manner as to not damage any utility or improvements. b) Material shall be placed and be compacted under, around the side, and over the utility(ies) in a manner that will reduce damage and settlement to a minimum or as approved by the Owner. EXCAVATION AND BACKFILL FOR UTILITIES 33 05 10-19 c) Hand tamp with tamping plate or other approved method on the dry side of optimum moisture content to ninety-five percent(95%) of maximum dry density determined according to ASTM D 558 but sufficient for effective hydration of the cement without softening the soil of foundation or trench walls, or as required by the Drawings or Owner. b. Outside of the pipes are beyond two-feet(2') of each other 1) Shall be as required for Main Piping and Accessories, or as required by the Drawings, owner of utility(ies),or Owner. 5. Compaction Testing a. Frequency of tests shall not be less than one (1) for any pipe section between manholes, junction boxes,inlets,and every one-hundred linear feet(100') of main pipe per two-feet(2') vertical of backfill material to top of Final Backfill, not including Topsoil Backfill Material, starting at two feet(2') above top of pipe,in accordance with ASTM D 2922. b. Failure 1) If compaction of the fill material does not meet or exceed the requirements that portion of fill material is to be further compacted and retested at the sole expense of the Contractor. B. Manhole A. Schedule of Backfilling 1. Backfilling around the manholes shall commence as soon as concrete or masonry has been allowed to cure the required time and forms and shoring have been removed. B. Subgrade 1. Shall be undisturbed native material,or as required by the Drawings or Owner. 2. Compact top six-inches (6")to 95%Standard Proctor Density. C. Bedding 1. General a. The placing of the backfill material shall be done in such a manner so as to be free of all natural soil or other foreign matter and prevent damage to any other work. 2. Material a. Crushed Stone Backfill Material,or as required by the Drawings or Owner. 3. Requirement a. Below Foundation (1) Eight-inches (8"),or as required by the Drawings or Owner b. Width (1) Foundation width plus two-feet(2') or to edge of excavation whichever is greater. 4. Placement a. Shall be placed in a manner as to not damage any utility or improvements. b. Shall be placed in layers not more than eight-inches(8")in depth(loose measurement)the total width of the trench. C. The placing of the embedment material shall be done in such a manner so as to be free of all natural soil,rock,or other foreign matter. 5. Compaction a. General (1) Shall be compacted in a manner as to not damage any utility or improvements. b. Class I Backfill Material (1) Hand tamp with tamping plate or other approved method at a moisture content determined by the Contractor for effective compaction without softening the soil of foundation or trench walls,or as required by the Drawings or Owner. C. Class II Backfill Material (1) Hand tamp with tamping plate or other approved method at three-percent (3%) of optimum moisture content to ninety-five percent (95%) of maximum dry density determined according to ASTM D 698 without softening the soil of foundation or trench walls,or as required by the Drawings or Owner. d. Crushed Stone Backfill Material EXCAVATION AND BACKFILL FOR UTILITIES 33 05 10-20 (1) Hand tamp with tamping plate or other approved method for effective compaction,or as required by the Drawings or Owner. D. Initial Backfill 1. General a. The placing of the material shall be done in such a manner so as to be free of all natural soil,rock,or other foreign matter and prevent damage to any other work. 2. Material a. Excavation less than twenty-feet(<20')in depth and above groundwater table: (1) Shall be Cement Stabilized Sand Backfill Material, or as required by the Drawings or Owner. b. Excavation greater than twenty-feet(>20')in depth and below groundwater table: (1) Shall be Flowable Fill Backfill Material,or as required by the Drawings or Owner. (2) Allow to cure prior to placement of Final Backfill 3. Requirement a. Above Bedding (1) Five-feet (5') or to the bottom of the bottom of road subgrade material,whichever is less,or as required by the Drawings or Owner b. Width (1) To extent of excavation. 4. Placement a. Shall be placed in a manner as to not damage any utility or improvements. b. Shall be placed in layers not more than eight-inches(8")in depth(loose measurement)the total width of the trench. C. The placing of the embedment material shall be done in such a manner so as to be free of all natural soil,rock,or other foreign matter. 5. Compaction a. General (1) Shall be compacted in a manner as to not damage any utility or improvements. b. Cement Stabilized Sand Backfill Material (1) Hand tamp with tamping plate or other approved method on the dry side of optimum moisture content to ninety-five percent (95%) of maximum dry density determined according to ASTM D 558 but sufficient for effective hydration of the cement without softening the soil of foundation or trench walls, or as required by the Drawings or Owner. E. Final Backfill 1. General a. All trenches and excavation shall be backfilled as soon as is practical after the embedment and accessories have been properly placed. b. The placing of the material shall be done in such a manner so as to be free of all foreign matter. C. Flooding or jetting of backfill is not allowed. 2. Material a. Paved Areas (1) Top of Initial Backfill to the bottom of road subgrade material (a) Cement Stabilized Backfill Material,or as required by the Drawings or Owner. b. Non-Paved Areas (1) Top of Initial Backfill to six-inches (6")below finished grade (a) Native Backfill Material,or as required by the Drawings or Owner. (2) Top six-inches (6") (a) Topsoil Backfill Material,or as required by the Drawings or Owner. 3. Placement 1) Shall be placed in a manner as to not damage any utility or improvements. 2) Shall be placed in layers not more than eight-inches (8") in depth (loose measurement) the total width of the trench. EXCAVATION AND BACKFILL FOR UTILITIES 33 05 10-21 3) The placing of the embedment material shall be done in such a manner so as to be free of all natural soil,rock,or other foreign matter. 4. Compaction a. General (1) Shall be compacted in a manner as to not damage any utility or improvements. b. Cement Stabilized Sand Backfill Material (1) Hand tamp with tamping plate or other approved method on the dry side of optimum moisture content to ninety-five percent (95%) of maximum dry density determined according to ASTM D 558 but sufficient for effective hydration of the cement without softening the soil of foundation or trench walls, or as required by the Drawings or Owner. C. Native Backfill Material (1) Compacted by use of industry standard equipment to ninety-percent(90%) Standard Proctor,or as required by the Drawings or Owner. d. Topsoil Backfill Material (1) Shall be placed in layers not more than eight-inches(8")in depth(loose measurement) the total width of the trench,or as required by the Drawings or Owner. (2) Compacted by use of industry standard equipment to a firm density,or as required by the Drawings or Owner. 5. Compaction Testing a. Frequency of tests shall not be less than one (1) per two-feet (2') vertical of backfill material to top of Final Backfill,not including Topsoil Backfill Material,starting at two feet (2') above top of Initial Backfill,in accordance with ASTM D 2922. b. Failure (1) If compaction of the fill material does not meet or exceed the requirements that portion of fill material is to be further compacted and retested at the sole expense of the Contractor. C. Inlet A. Schedule of Backfilling 1. Backfilling shall commence as soon as concrete or masonry has been allowed to cure the required time and forms and shoring have been removed. B. Subgrade 1. Shall be undisturbed native material,or as required by the Drawings or Owner. 2. Compact top six-inches (6")to 95%Standard Proctor Density. C. Bedding 1. General a. The placing of the backfill material shall be done in such a manner so as to be free of all natural soil or other foreign matter and prevent damage to any other work. 2. Material a. Crushed Stone Backfill Material,or as required by the Drawings or Owner. 3. Requirement a. Below Foundation (1) Eight-inches (8"),or as required by the Drawings or Owner b. Width (1) Foundation width plus two-feet(2') or to edge of excavation whichever is greater. 4. Placement a. Shall be placed in a manner as to not damage any utility or improvements. b. Shall be placed in layers not more than eight-inches(8")in depth(loose measurement)the total width of the trench. C. The placing of the embedment material shall be done in such a manner so as to be free of all natural soil,rock,or other foreign matter. 5. Compaction a. General (1) Shall be compacted in a manner as to not damage any utility or improvements. b. Crushed Stone Backfill Material EXCAVATION AND BACKFILL FOR UTILITIES 33 05 10-22 (1) Hand tamp with tamping plate or other approved method for effective compaction,or as required by the Drawings or Owner. D. Initial Backfill 1. General a. The placing of the material shall be done in such a manner so as to be free of all natural soil,rock,or other foreign matter and prevent damage to any other work. 2. Material a. Paved Side (1) Shall be Cement Stabilized Sand Backfill Material, or as required by the Drawings or Owner. (2) Requirement (a) Above Bedding i. Five-feet (5') or to the bottom of the bottom of road subgrade material, whichever is less,or as required by the Drawings or Owner (b) Width i. To extent of excavation. b. Non Paved Side (1) Shall be Cement Stabilized Sand Backfill Material, or as required by the Drawings or Owner. (2) Requirement (a) Above Bedding i. Five-feet (5') or eight-inches (8") below final grade, or as required by the Drawings or Owner (b) Width i. To extent of excavation. 3. Placement a. Shall be placed in a manner as to not damage any utility or improvements. b. Shall be placed in layers not more than eight-inches(8")in depth(loose measurement)the total width of the trench. C. The placing of the embedment material shall be done in such a manner so as to be free of all natural soil,rock,or other foreign matter. 4. Compaction a. Shall be compacted in a manner as to not damage any utility or improvements. b. Cement Stabilized Sand Backfill Material (1) Shall be hand tamp with tamping plate or other approved method on the dry side of optimum moisture content to ninety-five percent (95%) of maximum dry density determined according to ASTM D 558 but sufficient for effective hydration of the cement without softening the soil of foundation or trench walls, or as required by the Drawings or Owner. E. Final Backfill 1. General a. All trenches and excavation shall be backfilled as soon as is practical after the embedment and accessories have been properly placed. b. The placing of the material shall be done in such a manner so as to be free of all foreign matter. C. Flooding or jetting of Backfill is not allowed. 2. Material a. Paved Side (1) Top of Initial Backfill to the bottom of road subgrade material (a) Cement Stabilized Backfill Material,or as required by the Drawings or Owner. b. Non-Paved Side (1) Top of Initial Backfill Material to six-inches(6")below finished grade (a) Native Backfill Material,or as required by the Drawings or Owner. (2) Top six-inches (6") (a) Topsoil Backfill Material,or as required by the Drawings or Owner. EXCAVATION AND BACKFILL FOR UTILITIES 33 05 10-23 3. Placement a. Shall be placed in a manner as to not damage any utility or improvements. b. Shall be placed in layers not more than eight-inches(8")in depth(loose measurement)the total width of the trench. C. The placing of the embedment material shall be done in such a manner so as to be free of all natural soil,rock,or other foreign matter. 4. Compaction a. General (1) Shall be compacted in a manner as to not damage any utility or improvements. b. Cement Stabilized Sand Backfill Material (1) Hand tamp with tamping plate or other approved method on the dry side of optimum moisture content to ninety-five percent (95%) of maximum dry density determined according to ASTM D 558 but sufficient for effective hydration of the cement without softening the soil of foundation or trench walls, or as required by the Drawings or Owner. C. Native Backfill Material (1) Compacted by use of industry standard equipment to ninety-percent(90%) Standard Proctor,or as required by the Drawings or Owner. d. Topsoil Backfill Material (1) Shall be placed in layers not more than eight-inches(8")in depth(loose measurement) the total width of the trench,or as required by the Drawings or Owner. (2) Compacted by use of industry standard equipment to a firm density,or as required by the Drawings or Owner. F. Compaction Testing 1. Frequency of tests shall not be less than one (1) per two-feet(2') vertical of backfill material to top of Final Backfill,not including Topsoil Backfill Material, starting at two feet(2') above top of Initial Backfill,in accordance with ASTM D 2922. 2. Failure a. If compaction of the fill material does not meet or exceed the requirements that portion of fill material is to be further compacted and retested at the sole expense of the Contractor. EXCAVATION AND BACKFILL FOR UTILITIES 33 05 10-24 SECTION 33 42 11 STORMWATER GRAVITY PIPING PART 1-GENERAL 1.01 Description A. This specification shall govern work required for the furnishing and placing of stormwater pipe and the material and incidental construction requirements for stormwater pipe as required to complete the project. 1.02 Related Sections A. 03 2111 REINFORCING STEEL B. 03 3111 CONCRETE STRUCTURES C. 3123 16.13 TRENCHING D. 33 05 10 EXCAVATION AND BACKFILL FOR UTILITIES E. 33 05 07 TRENCHLESS UTILITY INSTALLATION 1.03 References The latest edition of the referenced item below shall be used. A. AASHTO M 198 - Standard Specification for Joints for Concrete Pipe, Manholes, and Precast Box Sections Using Preformed Flexible Joint Sealants B. AASHTO M 259-Precast Reinforced Concrete Box Sections for Culverts,Storm Drains,and Sewers C. AASHTO M 273-Standard Specification for Precast Reinforced Concrete Box Sections for Culverts, Storm Drains,and Sewers with Less Than 2 ft of Cover Subjected to Highway Loadings D. AASHTO M 288-Standard Specification for Geotextile Specification for Highway Applications E. ASTM C 76-Standard Specification for Reinforced Concrete Culvert,Storm Drain,Sewer Pipe F. ASTM C 443-Standard Specification for Joints for Circular Concrete Sewer and Culvert Pipe using Rubber Gaskets. G. ASTM C 497-Standard Test Method for Concrete Pipe,Manhole Sections,or Tile. H. ASTM C 506-Standard Specification for Reinforced Concrete Arch Culvert,Storm Drain,Sewer Pipe. 1. ASTM C 507-Standard Specification for Reinforced Concrete Elliptical Culvert,Storm Drain,Sewer Pipe. j. ASTM C 655-Standard Specification for Reinforced Concrete D-Load Culvert,Storm Drain,Sewer Pipe. K ASTM C 990 - Standard Specification for Joints for Concrete Pipe, Manholes, and Precast Box Sections Using Preformed Flexible Joint Sealants L. ASTM C 1433-Standard Specification for Precast Reinforced Concrete Box Sections for Culverts,Storm Drains,and Sewers. M. ASTM D 2487 - Standard Practice for Classification of Soils for Engineering Purposes (Unified Soil Classification System) N. Texas Department of Transportation(TxDOT)Standard Specification for Construction and Maintenance of Highways,Streets,and Bridges Item 462-Concrete Box Culverts and Storm Drains 0. American Association of State Highway and Transportation Officials(AASHTO) P. American Welding Society Specifications Q. American Concrete Pipe Association(ACPA) R. National Precast Concrete Association(NCPA) 1.04 Submittals A. Pipe information noting compliance with this specification. B. Gasket information noting compliance with this specification. PART 2-PRODUCTS 2.01 General A. All pipe shall be manufactured at an American Concrete Pipe Association (ACPA) Certified Plant or a National Precast Concrete Association(NCPA) Certified Plant. B. To substitute a material or equipment it will be the responsibility of the Contractor to provide all required information to determine that the material or equipment is equal or better to the Owner for approval prior to incorporation into the Project. C. All products shall be in accordance with this specification unless otherwise noted on the Drawings. STORMWATER GRAVITY PIPING 3342 11-1 2.02 Concrete Pipe A. General 1. All pipe shall be bell and spigot,unless otherwise noted on the Drawings or indicated by the Owner. 2. Bell and spigot shall be formed for the acceptance of gasket material B. Workmanship and Finish 1. Pipe shall be substantially free from fractures,large or deep cracks and surface roughness. 2. The ends of the pipe shall be normal to the walls and centerline of the pipe within the limits of variations allowed under the applicable ASTM specification. 3. Shall be in accordance with the industry standards. a. In the event that one requirement conflicts with another the more stringent requirement shall be followed,unless directed otherwise by the Owner. C. Fabrication 1. Pipe shall conform to ASTM Designation C 76 for Circular Pipe;ASTM Designation C 506 for Arch Pipe, or ASTM Designation C 507 for Elliptical Pipe. 2. All precast concrete pipe shall be machine made or cast by a process that will provide for uniform placement of the concrete in the form and compaction by mechanical devices that will assure a dense concrete. 3. Concrete shall be mixed in a central batch plant or other approved hatching facility from which the quality and uniformity of the concrete can be assured. 4. Transit mixed concrete will not be acceptable for use in precast concrete pipe. D. Lifting Holes 1. Do not place more than two(2)holes for lifting and placing in the top section of precast pipe 2. Cast,cut,or drill the lifting holes in the wall of the pipe. a. The holes shall be neat and without spalling of the concrete. 3. The maximum hole diameter is three-inch(K)at the inside surface of the pipe wall and four-inch(4") at the outside surface. 4. Do not cut more than one (1) longitudinal wire or two (2) circumferential wires per layer of reinforcing steel when locating lift holes. E. Design 1. All pipe shall be Class III(Wall"B")unless otherwise specified on the Drawings. 2. The shell thickness,the amount of circumferential reinforcement and the strength of the pipe shall conform to the specified Class as summarized in ASTM Designation C 76 for Circular Pipe; C 506 for Arch Pipe;C 507 for Elliptical pipe. 3. Minimum cover for all pipes shall be one foot(1'). F. Physical Test Requirements 1. The acceptability of the pipe shall be determined by the results of the following tests: a. Material tests required in ASTM C 76,C 655,C 506,or C 507 b. Absorption tests in accordance with ASTM C 497 c. Three-edge bearing test in accordance with ASTM C 497 1) Shall be performed on one(1)pipe for each 300 pipes,or faction thereof,for each type,size class,or D-Load produced within 30 calendar days. 2) Test for the load to produce a 0.01-inch crack or fifteen-percent (15%) in excess of the required D-Load,whichever is less. 3) Test the pipe to ultimate load when directed. d. As an alternate to the three-edge bearing test, concrete pipe fifty-four inches (54") in diameter and larger may be accepted, at the option of the manufacturer, on the basis of compressive strength of cores cut from the wall of the pipe. e. The manufacturer must determine the compressive strength of the samples. Obtain, cure, prepare,and test the cores in accordance with ASTM C 496. f. The manufacturer must plug and seal the core holes in the pipe wall after testing. g. Inspect the finished pipe to determine its conformance with the design prescribed in these specifications and its freedom from defects. G. Marking 1. The following information shall be clearly marked on each section of pipe: a. The class of pipe, STORMWATER GRAVITY PIPING 3342 11-2 b. ASTM designation, c. The date of manufacture, d. The name of trade mark of the manufacturer, e. All markings shall be indented on the pipe section or painted thereon with waterproof paint. f. Elliptical Pipe 1) One (1) end of each section of pipe with elliptical reinforcement shall be clearly marked during the process of manufacture or immediately thereafter on the inside and the outside of opposite walls to show the location of the "top" or "bottom" of the pipe as it should be installed,unless the external shape of the pipe is such that the correct position of the top and bottom is obvious. H. Inspection 1. The quality of materials, the process of manufacture, and the finished pipe shall be subject to inspection and approval by the Engineer at the pipe manufacturing Plant. 2. In addition,the finished pipe shall be subject to further inspection by the Owner at the project site prior to and during installation. I. Curing 1. Pipe shall be cured in accordance with the applicable ASTM Specification for each type of pipe. J. Minimum Age for Shipment 1. Pipe shall be considered ready for shipment when it conforms to the requirements of the tests specified herein and has cured. K Causes for Rejection 1. Pipe shall be subject to rejection on account of failure to conform to any of the specification requirements. 2. Individual sections of pipe may be rejected because of any of the following: a. Fractures or cracks passing through the shell,except for a single end crack that does not exceed the depth of the joint, b. Defects that indicate imperfect proportioning,mixing and molding, c. Surface defects indicating honeycombed or open texture, d. Damaged ends,where such damage would prevent making a satisfactory joint, e. Any continuous crack having a surface width of 0.01 inch or more and extending for a length of twelve-inch(12")or more. f. Circular pipe which is"out-of-round". L. Repairs 1. Pipe may be repaired if necessary,because of occasional imperfections in manufacture or accidental injury during the handling in accordance with manufacturer recommendations,and will be acceptable if,in the opinion of the Owner,the repairs are sound and properly finished and cured and the repaired pipe conforms to the requirements of the specifications. M. Rejections 1. All rejected pipes shall be plainly marked by the Owner and shall be replaced by the Contractor with pipe that meets the requirements of these specifications. 2. Such rejected pipe shall be removed immediately from the worksite. 2.03 Concrete Box Culvert A. General 1. The Contractor shall have the option of furnishing cast-in-place and/or precast boxes unless a specific type is called for on the Drawings or in the special provisions. B. Cast-in Place 1. When cast-in-place boxes are used,they shall conform to the details of the culvert designs shown in the Drawings. C. Precast 1. General a. All pipe shall be manufactured at an American Concrete Pipe Association (ACPA) Certified Plant or a National Precast Concrete Association(NCPA) Certified Plant. b. All box culvert shall be bell and spigot,unless otherwise noted on the Drawings or indicated by the Owner. c. Bell and spigot shall be formed for the acceptance of gasket material STORMWATER GRAVITY PIPING 3342 11-3 2. Workmanship and Finish a. Box culvert shall be substantially free from fractures,large or deep cracks and surface roughness. b. The ends of the box culvert shall be normal to the walls and centerline of the box culvert within the limits of variations allowed under the applicable ASTM specification. c. Shall be in accordance with the industry standards. 1) In the event that one requirement conflicts with another the more stringent requirement shall be followed,unless directed otherwise by the Owner. 3. Fabrication a. Box culvert shall conform to AASHTO M 259,AASHTO M 273,ASTM C 1433,and be rated for AASHTO HS-20 loading. b. All precast concrete box culvert shall be machine made or cast by a process that will provide for uniform placement of the concrete in the form and compaction by mechanical devices that will assure a dense concrete. c. Concrete shall be mixed in a central batch plant or other approved hatching facility from which the quality and uniformity of the concrete can be assured. d. Transit mixed concrete will not be acceptable for use in precast concrete box culvert 4. Lifting Holes a. Do not place more than four (4) holes for lifting and placing in the top section of precast box culvert b. Cast,cut,or drill the lifting holes in the wall of the box culvert. 1) The holes shall be neat and without spalling of the concrete. c. The maximum hole diameter is three-inch (3") at the inside surface of the box culvert wall and four(4)inch at the outside surface. d. Do not cut more than one (1) longitudinal wire or two (2) circumferential wires per layer of reinforcing steel when locating lift holes. S. Design a. All box culvert shall be Class III(Wall"B")unless otherwise specified on the Drawings. b. The shell thickness, the amount of circumferential reinforcement and the strength of the box culvert shall conform to ASTM C 1433. c. Minimum cover for all box culverts shall be two-foot(2'). 6. Physical Test Requirements a. The acceptability of the box culvert shall be determined by the results of the following tests: 1) Material tests required in ASTM C 1433. 2) The manufacturer must plug and seal the core holes in the box culvert wall after testing. 3) Inspect the finished box culvert to determine its conformance with the design prescribed in these specifications and its freedom from defects. 7. Marking a. The following information shall be clearly marked on each section of box culvert: 1) The class of box culvert, 2) ASTM designation, 3) The date of manufacture, 4) The name of trade mark of the manufacturer, 5) All markings shall be indented on the box culvert section or painted thereon with waterproof paint. 8. Inspection a. The quality of materials,the process of manufacture,and the finished box culvert shall be subject to inspection and approval by the Engineer at the box culvert manufacturing Plant b. In addition,the finished box culvert shall be subject to further inspection by the Owner at the project site prior to and during installation. 9. Curing a. Box culvert shall be cured in accordance with the applicable ASTM Specification for each type of box culvert 10. Minimum Age for Shipment a. Box culvert shall be considered ready for shipment when it conforms to the requirements of the tests specified herein and has cured. STORMWATER GRAVITY PIPING 33 42 11-4 11. Causes for Rejection a. Box culvert shall be subject to rejection on account of failure to conform to any of the specification requirements. b. Individual sections of box culvert may be rejected because of any of the following: 1) Fractures or cracks passing through the shell, except for a single end crack that does not exceed the depth of the joint, 2) Defects that indicate imperfect proportioning,mixing and molding, 3) Surface defects indicating honeycombed or open texture, 4) Damaged ends,where such damage would prevent making a satisfactory joint, 5) Any continuous crack having a surface width of 0.01 inch or more and extending for a length of twelve-inch(12") or more. 6) Box culvert which is'but-of-square". 12. Repairs a. Box culvert may be repaired if necessary,because of occasional imperfections in manufacture or accidental injury during the handling in accordance with manufacturer recommendations, and will be acceptable if,in the opinion of the Owner,the repairs are sound and properly finished and cured and the repaired box culvert conforms to the requirements of the specifications. 13. Rejections a. All rejected box culverts shall be plainly marked by the Owner and shall be replaced by the Contractor with box culvert that meets the requirements of these specifications. 1) Such rejected box culvert shall be removed immediately from the worksite. 14. Alternate designs of precast boxes will be considered for approval upon submission of shop drawings detailing the box and certifications that the box,as designed,is structurally comparable to or better than the box shown in the contract drawings and is designed to support HS-20 loading per AASHTO M 273 and ASTM C 1433. a. The shop drawings and certifications shall be signed and sealed by a Texas Registered Professional Engineer. D. Concrete 1. Unless otherwise shown on the Drawings, Class "A" concrete shall be used for cast-in-place and precast (formed) boxes, conforming to the requirements of Section 03 31 11 CONCRETE STRUCTURES. 2. Class"C"concrete will be required for direct traffic boxes for cast-in-place and precast boxes. 3. Concrete for precast(machine-made) boxes shall meet the requirements of ASTM C 76,Sections: Cement,Aggregates and Mixture, and shall have a minimum twenty-eight (28) day compressive strength of 4,000 psi. 2.04 Corrugated Polyethylene Pipe A. General 1. The product supplied under this specification shall be high density polyethylene corrugated exterior/smooth interior pipe. Twelve to 36 inch diameters shall conform to AASHTO M294 Type S; 8- and 10-inch diameters shall meet the strength requirements of AASHTO M252 with the addition that the pipe have a smooth interior liner. Material shall conform to ASTM D3350. Minimum conveyance factors shall be as shown in Table 1. B. Rejection of Polyethylene Pipe 1. All rejected pipe shall be plainly marked by the Engineer and shall be replaced by the Contractor with pipe which meets the requirements of these specifications. Such rejected pipe shall be removed immediately from the site of work Pipe shall be subject to rejection on account of failure to conform to any of the specification requirements. Individual sections of pipe may be rejected because of any of the following: a. Fractures or cracks passing through the shell, except for a single end crack that does not exceed the depth of the joint. b. Defects that indicate imperfect proportioning,mixing and molding. c. Damaged ends,where such damage would prevent making a satisfactory joint. d. Careless dumping of pipe from truck.The Engineer shall be judge of aforesaid items. STORMWATER GRAVITY PIPING 3342 11-5 2.05 Jointing Materials A. Concrete Pipe 1. Cold Applied Preformed Plastic Gaskets a. Shall conform to AASHTO M 198 and ASTM C 990. b. Joint material and primer shall be supplied for use on pipe as recommended by the manufacturer. 2. Geotextile for wrapping joints shall be Class 1 geotextile for subsurface drainage with an average opening size,AOS,of.22 mm.and two-feet(2)wide in accordance AASHTO M 288. B. Polyethylene Pipe 1. Pipe joints and fittings shall conform to AASHTO M252 or AASHTO M294 2. All coupling bands shall conform to ASTM D3212 (10.8 psi watertight)and meet or exceed the soil- tightness requirements of the AASHTO Standard Specifications for Highway Bridges, Section 23, paragraph 23.3.1.5.4(e). a. Coupling bands shall cover at least one full corrugation on each section of pipe. b. When gasketed coupling bands are required,the gasket shall be made of closed-cell synthetic expanded rubber meeting the requirements of ASTM D1056,Grade RE42. 1) All gaskets shall be installed on the coupler by the pipe manufacturer prior to delivery to the job site. 3. Fittings shall conform to the requirements of AASHTO M294. 2.06 Lift Hole Plug A. Concrete Plug 1. Shall be tapered,or as recommended by the manufacturer of the pipe. 2. Shall be used for mechanically and man-made lift holes B. Polyethylene Plug 1. Shall resist internal pressure within the pipe of a minimum of 7 psi. 2. Shall be used for mechanically made lift holes 2.07 Cement Mortar A. Shall be composed of one(1)part Portland Cement and(2)parts sand. 2.08 Backfill Materials A. Shall be in accordance with Section 33 05 10 EXCAVATION AND BACKFILL FOR UTILITIES unless otherwise indicated on the Drawings. PART 3-EXECUTION 3.01 General A. All Work shall be in accordance with the Contract, Specifications, Drawings, manufacturer recommendations,and industry standards. 1. In the event that one requirement conflicts with another the more stringent requirement shall be followed,unless directed otherwise by the Owner. B. Cast-in Place 1. The requirement of Section 03 31 11.13 CONCRETE STRUCTURES shall govern for cast-in-place concrete culverts and for precast(formed)boxes except where otherwise specified herein. 2. Concrete boxes shall be given an ordinary surface finish. 3. Forms a. Forms for precast(machine-made)boxes shall be made of steel. b. Forms for cast-in-place boxes and precast(formed)boxes may be either wood or steel. c. Forms shall be mortar-tight and of sufficient strength to prevent excessive bulging or misalignment of adjacent boxes. d. They shall be constructed to permit their removal without damage to the concrete. e. Offsets at form joints shall not exceed one-eighth inch(1/8"). f. Forms shall be clean and free of extraneous matter when concrete is placed. 4. Positive means of supporting steel cages in place throughout forming and concrete placement shall be required and subject to the approval of the Owner. S. Welding of reinforcing steel will be permitted only where shown on the Drawings. a. Welding shall be done by a qualified welder and shall conform to the requirements of the applicable section of the American Welding Society specifications. STORMWATER GRAVITY PIPING 3342 11-6 C. Precast(machine-made)boxes shall be cast by a process,which will provide for uniform placement of the concrete in the forms and compaction by mechanical devices that will assure dense concrete. D. Concrete shall be mixed in a central batch Plant or other approved batching facility from which the quality and uniformity of the concrete can be assured. E. Transit mixed concrete shall not be acceptable for use in precast(machine-made)boxes. 3.02 Testing and Certification A. Physical Requirements 1. Precast boxes shall meet the requirement of TxDOT Tex 704-I. B. Testing 1. Testing shall be done by a Materials Engineering Laboratory which meets the requirements for membership in the American Council of Independent Laboratories. C. Certification 1. Certification of quality shall be provided with each delivery of materials to the job site by the manufacturer. 2. Certification shall be a written report by the Materials Engineering Testing Laboratory. 3.03 Fabrication Tolerances A. Precast boxes shall conform to the following tolerances: 1. When two (2) box sections are fitted together on a flat surface, in proper alignment and in the position they will be installed,the longitudinal opening at any point shall not exceed one-inch(1"). 2. When fine cracks or hairline cracks on the surface indicate poor curing practices, further production of precast boxes shall be discontinued until corrections are made and proper curing provided. 3.04 Defects and Repairs A. Fine cracks or checks on the surface 1. If it does not extend to the plane of the nearest reinforcement will not because for rejection unless they are numerous and extensive. 2. Cracks that extend into the plane of the reinforcing steel but are acceptable otherwise, shall be repaired in an approved manner. B. Small damaged or honeycombed areas 1. Purely surface in nature may be repaired. 2. Excessive damage,honeycomb or cracking will be subject to structural review. 3. Repairs shall be sound, properly finished and cured in conformance with the pertinent specifications. 3.05 Excavation A. As per Section 33 05 10 EXCAVATION AND BACKFILL FOR UTILITIES. 3.06 Laying Pipe A. Unless otherwise authorized by the Owner,the laying of pipe on the prepared foundation shall be started at the outlet end with the spigot or tongue end pointing downstream and shall proceed upstream with the abutting sections properly matched,true to the established lines and grades. B. Lifting holes shall be at the 12:00 position(on the top)of the pipe when pipe is in final place. C. Where bell and spigot pipe are used,cross trenches shall be cut in the foundation to allow the barrel of the pipe to rest firmly upon the prepared bed. 1. These cross trenches shall be not more than two-inches(2")larger than the bell ends of the pipe. D. Proper facilities shall be provided for hoisting and lowering the sections of pipe into the trench without disturbing the prepared foundation and the sides of the trench. E. The ends of the pipe shall be carefully cleaned before the pipe is placed. F. As each length of pipe is laid,the mouth of the pipe shall be protected to prevent the entrance of earth or bedding material. G. The pipe shall be fitted and matched so that when laid in the bed,it shall form a smooth,uniform conduit H. When elliptical pipe with circular reinforcing or circular pipe with elliptical reinforcing is used,the pipe shall be laid in the trench in such position that the markings"Top"or'Bottom",shall not be more than five (5)degrees from the vertical plane through the longitudinal axis of the pipe. 1. Multiple installations of reinforced concrete pipe shall be laid with the centerlines of individual barrels parallel. When not otherwise indicated on Drawings,the Table 1 clear distances between outer surfaces of adjacent pipe shall be used. STORMWATER GRAVITY PIPING 3342 11-7 Table 1 Minimum Clear Distance Between Multiple Pipes Diameter of Pipe(inch) Clear Distance Between Pipes 18" 0'-9" 24" 0'-11" 30" 1'- V. 36" 1'-3" 42" 1'-5" 48" 1'-7" 54" 1'-111, 60"to 84" 2'-0" 3.07 Jointing A. Joints using Cold Applied Preformed Plastic Gaskets: 1. Primer a. Shall be installed as per manufacturer recommendations. b. No primer shall be applied over mud,sand,dirt,or sharp cement protrusions. c. The surface to be primed must be clean and dry when primer is applied. 2. Gasket a. Before laying the pipe in the trench,the plastic gasket sealer shall be attached around the tapered tongue or tapered groove near the shoulder or hub of each pipe joint. b. Gasket shall be installed as per manufacturer recommendations. c. The paper wrapper shall be removed from one side only of the two-piece wrapper on the gasket and pressed firmly to the clean,dry pipe joint surface. d. When the atmospheric temperature is below 60 degrees F,plastic joint seal gaskets shall either be stored in an area warmed to above 70 degrees F,or artificially warmed to this temperature in a manner satisfactory to the Owner. 1) Gaskets shall be applied to pipe joints immediately prior to placing pipe in trench,followed by connection to previously laid pipe. e. The outside wrapper shall not be removed until immediately before pushing the pipe into its final position. f. Additional gasket material may be required if,in the opinion of the Owner,a proper joint is not secured, and additional gasket material shall be required for non-circular concrete pipe as required by the Owner. 3. Joining a. When the tongue is correctly aligned with the flare of the groove, the outside wrapper on the gasket shall be removed and the pipe shall be pulled or pushed home with sufficient force and power to cause the evidence of squeeze-out of the gasket material on the inside or outside around the complete pipe joint circumference. b. Any joint material pushed out into the interior of the pipe that would tend to obstruct the flow shall be removed. c. Pipe shall be pulled or pushed home in a straight line with all parts of the pipe on line and grade at all times. 4. All pipe joints shall be wrapped with Geotextile. a. The wrap shall be centered on each join" b. The wrap does not remove the requirements of the use of gasket. B. Mortar Joints 1. Is prohibited from jointing pipe except at manholes,pipe junction,etc.,or where specifically approved by the Owner. 2. Pipe shall be pulled or pushed home in a straight line with all parts of the pipe on line and grade at all times. STORMWATER GRAVITY PIPING 33 42 11-8 3. Shall be placed as to forma durable watertight joint. 4. The installation shall be as required by the Owner. 3.08 Lifting Holes A. When used by the Contractor to handle the pipe shall be used in accordance with manufacturer recommendations. B. Filling of Hole 1. Concrete Plug a. Plug shall be used in conjunction with a Cold Applied Preformed Plastic Gasket to form a seal that will not allow soil to migrate through the opening, or required on the Drawings or by the Owner. b. Shall be used for mechanically and man-made lift holes c. The pipe at the location of the plug shall be wrapped with Geotextile. 1) Care shall be taken to not allow the Geotextile to move or allow backfill material to be under Geotextile 2. Polyethylene Plug a. Plug shall be installed as recommended by Manufacturer b. Shall be covered with mortar and allowed to set to firm prior to installation of backfill c. Shall be used only for mechanically made lift holes. 3.09 Backfill A. Shall be in accordance with Section 33 05 10 EXCAVATION AND BACKFILL FOR UTILITIES unless otherwise indicated on the Drawings. STORMWATER GRAVITY PIPING 3342 11-9 SECTION 33 42 30 STORMWATER STRUCTURES PART 1-GENERAL 1.01 Description A. This specification shall govern work required for the furnishing and installing of storm water utility manholes,inlets,frames,grates,and covers as required to complete the project. 1.02 Related Sections A. 03 2111 REINFORCING STEEL B. 03 3111 CONCRETE STRUCTURES C. 33 05 10 EXCAVATION AND BACKFILL FOR UTILITIES D. 33 42 11 STORMWATER GRAVITY PIPING 1.03 References The latest edition of the referenced item below shall be used. A. AASHTO M 105-Standard Specification for Gray Iron Castings B. AASHTO M 288-Standard Specification for Geotextile Specification for Highway Applications C. AASHTO M 306-Standard Specification for Drainage,Sewer,Utility,and Related Castings D. ASTM A 27-Standard Specification for Steel Castings,Carbon,for General Application E. ASTM A 36-Standard Specification for Carbon Structural Steel F. ASTM A 48-Standard Specification for Gray Iron Castings G. ASTM A 536-Standard Specification for Ductile Iron Castings H. ASTM C 76-Standard Specification for Reinforced Concrete Culvert,Storm Drain,and Sewer Pipe. I. ASTM C 443-Standard Specification for Joints for Concrete Pipe and Manholes,Using Rubber Gaskets J. ASTM C 478-Standard Specification for Precast Reinforced Concrete Manhole Sections K. ASTM C 581-Practice for determining chemical resistance of thermosetting resins used in glass-fiber reinforced Structures Intended for Liquid Service L. ASTM C 923-Standard Specification for Resilient manhole connectors M. ASTM D 695-Test method for compressive properties of rigid plastics N. ASTM D 790 - Test methods for flexural properties of unreinforced and reinforced plastics and electrical insulating materials. 0. ASTM D 2412-Test Method for external loading properties of plastic pipe by parallel-plate loading. P. ASTM D 2583-Test method for indentation hardness of rigid plastics by means of a barcol impresser. Q. ASTM D 2584-Test method for ignition loss of cured reinforced resins R. ASTM D 3753-Glass Fiber Reinforced Polyester Manholes S. American Association of State Highway and Transportation Officials (AASHTO) T. Texas Administrative Code Title 30,Part 1,Chapter 217,Subchapter C,Rule§217.55 U. Texas Accessibility Standards(TAS) V. Texas Department of Transportation (TxDOT) Departmental Material Specification DMS 7340 - Qualification Procedure for Multi-Project Fabrication Plants of Precast Concrete Junction Boxes and Inlets W. American Welding Society 1.04 Submittals A. Submit manufacturer's data, details, and shop drawings for the following items showing compliance with specifications: 1. Manhole a. Design b. Fabrication c. Fiberglass components d. Installation instruction e. Pipe Connector f. Base g. Inflow Inhibitor 2. Grade Adjustment Rings 3. Frames and Covers STORMWATER STRUCTURES 33 42 30-1 PART 2-PRODUCTS 2.01 General A. To substitute a material or equipment it will be the responsibility of the Contractor to provide all required information to determine that the material or equipment is equal or better to the Owner for approval prior to incorporation into the Project. B. All products shall be in accordance with this specification unless otherwise noted on the Drawings. 2.02 Manholes A. General 1. Manholes may be made from cast in place Class "A" Concrete, precast concrete, fiberglass, or a combination of these materials when indicated by the Owner. 2. Reinforcing steel,if required,shall be as shown on Drawings. a. Reinforcing Steel shall conform to the requirements of the specification Section 03 21 11 REINFORCING STEEL. 3. The bottom of manholes shall be carefully formed and inverted smoothly when finished, with pipes cut to fit inside surface of walls. 4. Mortar for masonry or plastering shall be: a. One (1) part Portland Cement to three (3) parts clean hard and sharp mortar sand,free of all foreign substances or injurious alkalis. b. Water shall be clean potable water free of foreign substances or injurious alkalis. B. Concrete 1. Formed in Place a. Shall be in accordance with Section 03 31 11 CONCRETE STRUCTURES b. Concrete shall be Class "A" conforming to Section 03 31 11 CONCRETE STRUCTURES. 2. Precast a. Precast manholes shall allow unobstructed view of all pipes connected to the manhole. b. Precast manholes shall be designed in accordance with ASTM C 478,and AASHTO M 306. 1) Must be designed and sealed by a Texas Licensed Engineer. c. Either concentric or eccentric cones may be required. 1) Where not specified,the eccentric cones shall be used. d. Manhole designs shall be submitted for approval. e. Shall be monolithic when possible. 1) If non-monolithic then joint shall be tongue and groove. f. The following information shall be clearly marked on each manhole: 1) The class of pipe, 2) ASTM designation, 3) The date of manufacture, 4) The name of trade mark of the manufacturer, 5) Marking shall be indented on the pipe section or painted thereon with waterproof paint. g. Shall be constructed with base of not less than twelve-inches (12")thick below lowest invert. C. Fiberglass 1. Fiberglass manholes shall be fabricated in accordance with ASTM D 3753 and the referenced design criteria as follows: a. ASTM C 581 - Practice for determining chemical resistance of thermosetting resins used in glass-fiber reinforced Structures Intended for Liquid Service b. ASTM D 695-Test method for compressive properties of rigid plastics c. ASTM D 790 - Test methods for flexural properties of unreinforced and reinforced plastics and electrical insulating materials. d. ASTM D 2412 -Test Method for external loading properties of plastic pipe by parallel-plate loading. e. ASTM D 2583 -Test method for indentation hardness of rigid plastics by means of a barcol impresser. f. ASTM D 2584-Test method for ignition loss of cured reinforced resins 2. The minimum wall thickness for all fiberglass manholes at all depths shall be one-half inch(1/2"). 3. The inside diameter of the manhole barrel shall be either forty-eight inches (48") or one and one- half(1.5)times the nominal pipe diameter of the largest pipe,which ever is larger. STORMWATER STRUCTURES 33 42 30-2 4. A concentric reducer over the barrel shall have a minimum inside diameter in accordance with the Drawings. 5. Shall be able to withstand AASHTO M 306 HS-20 Traffic Loading. 6. Markings and Identifications a. Shall be placed on the inside and/or outside as required. b. Inside required Markings and Identifications shall be placed immediately below the upper factory bond joint or approximately one foot(1')below the corbel,whichever is less. 1) Manufacturers Name 2) Manufacturers Trademark 3) Manufacturers Serial Number 4) Manhole Length 5) ASTM Designation D. Manhole Diameter 1. Shall be as noted on the Drawings a. In all cases shall be in accordance with Texas Administrative Code Title 30,Part 1,Chapter 217, Subchapter C,Rule§217.55 E. Manhole Pipe Connectors 1. Fiberglass a. Gasket Material 1) Shall be in accordance with ASTM C 923 2. Concrete a. Shall provide a watertight connection and be in accordance with ASTM C 923 b. Mortar shall be used when indicated on the Drawings or by the Owner. F. Geotextile Wrap 1. Shall be Class A Subsurface Drainage Geotextile,AASHTO M 288. G. Manhole Base 1. Concrete shall be Class A in accordance with Section 03 3111 CONCRETE STRUCTURES. 2. Precast Reinforced Concrete Manhole Base shall be in accordance with requirements of ASTM C 478 as shown on construction Drawings and detail Drawings. 3. Reinforcing Steel a. Reinforcing Steel shall conform to the requirements of the specification Section 03 21 11 REINFORCING STEEL. 2.03 Grade Adjustment Rings A. All rings to adjust the height of the manhole shall be made from HDPE and withstand ASSHTO M 306 HS- 20 Traffic Loading. B. The internal diameter of the ring shall not be less than thirty inches(30"). 2.04 Inlets A. General 1. Concrete a. Concrete for inlets shall be Class "A" concrete conforming to the requirements of the specification,Section 03 3111 CONCRETE STRUCTURES,except as otherwise provided on the Drawings. b. Mortar 1) Mortar shall be composed of one (1) part Portland cement and two (2) parts clean,sharp mortar sand suitable graded for the purpose by conforming in other respects to the provisions of the section 03 3111 CONCRETE STRUCTURES for fine aggregate. 2) Hydrated lime or lime putty may be added to the mix but in no case shall it exceed ten- percent(10%)by weight of the total dry mix. c. Reinforcing Steel 1) Reinforcing Steel shall conform to the requirements of the specification Section 03 21 11 REINFORCING STEEL. B. Precast Inlet 1. Submit shop drawings which indicate size of the inlet and is sealed by a Licensed Texas Professional Engineer. 2. Inlet top shall be interlocking to the base and be grouted in which will construct a one-piece unit. STORMWATER STRUCTURES 33 42 30-3 C. Inlet Pipe Connectors 1. Gasket Material a. Shall be in accordance with Section 33 42 11 STORMWATER GRAVITY PIPING 1) Rubber gaskets are not allowed. 2. Geotextile Wrap a. Shall be Class A Subsurface Drainage Geotextile,AASHTO M 288. 2.05 Grade Adjustment Rings A. All rings to adjust the height of the manhole shall be made from 100%HDPE and withstand ASSHTO M 306 HS-20 Traffic Loading. B. The internal diameter of the ring shall not be less than thirty inches(30"). 2.06 Frames,Grates and Covers A. General 1. Manhole frame&cover shall be designated for street application designed to meet AASHTO M306 HS-20 Traffic Loading. a. Shall be rated for traffic service withstanding an application of 40,000 pound proof load in accordance with AASHTO M 306. b. Within the Right-of-Way and in Pavements,Sidewalks,Driveways 1) Shall be heavy duty traffic rated meeting AASHTO M 306 c. Within the Right-of-Way and in Pavements,Sidewalks,Driveways within School Zones 1) Shall be heavy duty traffic rated and able to be bolted meeting AASHTO M 306 2. All products shall be domestically made in the United States of America. 3. Shall be in accordance with the details shown in the Drawings. a. Other patterns for frames,grates,and covers may be submitted for approval by the Owner 4. Cover shall be permeable with openings that meet the requirements of Texas Accessibility Standards (TAS) S. Shall be true to pattern,form,and dimensions. 6. Shall be free from cracks,sponginess,and blowholes. 7. Shall be machined to yield a fit which will not rattle with passing traffic load. 8. Each casting shall be identifiable and show,at a minimum,the following: a. Name of the producing foundry b. Country of manufacture c. ASTM material designation d. Recycle symbol e. Individual part number f. Cast or heat date B. Coatings 1. Shall be dipped in coal tar or asphalt unless the Drawings or Owner requires a different treatment. C. Welded Steel Frames and Grates 1. Shall conform to the member size, dimensions and details shown on the Drawings and shall be welded into an assembly in accordance with those details. 2. Welding shall be in accordance with American Welding Society 3. Steel shall conform to the requirements of ASTM A 36. D. Castings 1. Whether Carbon-Steel, Gray Cast Iron or Ductile Iron shall conform to the shape and dimensions shown in the Drawings and shall be clean substantial castings,free from burnt-on sand and shall be reasonable smooth. a. Runners,risers,fins,and other cast-on pieces shall be removed from the castings and such areas ground smooth. 2. Bearing surfaces between manhole rings and covers or grades and frames shall be cast or machined with such precision that uniform bearing shall be provided throughout the facilitate subsequent identification at installation. 3. Steel Castings a. Shall conform to the requirements of specifications for"Mild to Medium Strength Carbon Steel Castings for General Application",ASTM A 27. b. Grade 70-36 shall be furnished unless otherwise specified. STORMWATER STRUCTURES 33 42 30-4 4. Cast Iron Castings a. Shall conform to the requirements of"Gray Iron Castings",ASTM A 48,Class 30,and AASHTO M 105. 5. Ductile Iron Castings a. Shall conform to the requirements of"Ductile Iron Castings",ASTM A 536. b. Grade 70-50-05 shall be used otherwise specified. E. Openings 1. Shall be in accordance with Texas Administrative Code Title 30, Part 1, Chapter 217, Subchapter C,Rule§217.55 F. Manufacturing Facilities 1. Manufacturing facilities shall be domestic in compliance with Local,State,and Federal workplace and environmental regulations. G. Bolts when required 1. Commercial grade 316 stainless steel bolts and nuts shall be used when indicated on the Drawings or required by the Owner. 2.07 Concrete A. All concrete and accessories shall be in accordance with Section 03 31 11 CONCRETE STRUCTURES and in accordance with this specification. B. All concrete and accessories shall be rated for use in high sulfur dioxide conditions. 2.08 Non-Shrink Grout A. Shall be prepackaged and meet the requirements of ASTM C1107,be flowable,Nonmetallic,Inorganic, Non-gas liberating, Cement based, have a compressive strength of 7000 psi, and requires only the addition of water. 2.09 Concrete Coatings A. Provide as indicated on the Drawings or approved equal. 2.10 Backfill Materials A. Shall be in accordance with Section 33 05 10 EXCAVATION AND BACKFILL FOR UTILITIES unless otherwise indicated on the Drawings. PART 3-EXECUTION 3.01 General A. All Work shall be in accordance with the Contract, Specifications, Drawings, manufacturer recommendations,and industry standards. 1. In the event that one requirement conflicts with another the more stringent requirement shall be followed,unless directed otherwise by the Owner. 3.02 Manholes A. General 1. All concrete work shall be performed in accordance with the requirements of the Section 03 3111 CONCRETE STRUCTURES,unless otherwise specified. 2. Refer to the Details within the Drawings for additional information regarding execution. 3. Installation Assist Marks a. Shall be vertical lines 90 degrees apart at the base of the manhole and at other locations to assist in construction. b. Can be applied by Manufacturer and/or by Contractor. c. Marks shall be in a color and visible so that the Contractor and Owner can easily determine the use and determine when requirements are met. d. Required Marks 1) Continuous mark around manhole a) Minimum embedment into base b) Maximum embedment into base c) Minimum initial backfill height 2) Location of dowels (if required) 3) Location and size of pipe penetrations prior to cut. B. Excavation 1. Asper Section 33 05 10 EXCAVATION AND BACKFILL FOR UTILITIES. STORMWATER STRUCTURES 33 42 30-5 C. Non-monolithic 1. The tongue and groove joint shall have a gasket material placed between prior to joining and exterior of joint wrapped with geotextile. D. Wall Preparation for Pipe Penetrations 1. Cut shall be equal to the outside diameter of pipe to pass through it, plus two-inches (2"), plus gasket to form a non-leak seal. 2. Cuts are to be made using electric or gasoline powered circular saw with proper blade. 3. Impact type tools shall not be used. 4. Where multiple pipe connections occur, maximum wall cutout shall not exceed manufacturer's recommendations, nor shall be cut leaving less than twelve-inches (12") between pipes, unless otherwise noted on the Drawings or approved by Owner. E. Pipe Penetrations 1. Pipe connection shall be made with gasket material installed in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations and the exterior portion shall have geotextile placed across it, unless otherwise noted on the Drawings or approved by the Owner. F. Pipe Stub outs for Future Connections 1. Shall be installed where noted on the Drawings and in accordance with the details. 2. Shall have an approved gasket placed between pipe and manhole. 3. Gasket shall be installed in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations. 4. A watertight plug shall be installed in the pipe at the end of the pipe and remain until the pipe is connected for future service. G. Handling 1. Shall be handled and stored in a safe manner as necessary to prevent damaging either the item or the surroundings. 2. Manholes shall be lifted as specified by the manufacturer. a. If manhole must be moved by rolling, the ground which it transverses shall be smooth and free of rocks,debris,etc. H. Installation 1. Shall be installed as specified by the manufacturer and in accordance with this specification and the details. 2. Field verify all existing elevations and conditions prior to ordering new manholes. I. Inverts 1. The inverts passing out or through the manhole shall be shaped and routed across the floor of manhole as shown on the Drawings. 2. This shaping may be accomplished by adding and shaping mortar or concrete after the base is cast or by placing the required additional material with the base. J. Concrete and Grout 1. Concrete a. All concrete work shall be completed in accordance with Section 03 31 11 CONCRETE STRUCTURES. b. All concrete shall be placed within forms. 2. Grout a. Grout shall be placed in a manner which will not allow for separation of materials. b. All exposed grout inside the manhole shall have an approved concrete coating applied to the surface in accordance with the manufacturers'recommendations. K. Backfill 1. Shall be in accordance with Section 33 05 10 EXCAVATION AND BACKFILL FOR UTILITIES unless otherwise indicated on the Drawings. L. Grade Adjustment Rings 1. A minimum of twelve-inches(12") of rings are allowed. 2. A maximum of eighteen-inches(18") of rings are allowed. M. Concrete Collar 1. Shall be circular or square of size indicated on the Drawings. 2. Concrete shall be in accordance with Section 03 3111 CONCRETE STRUCTURES. 3. Traffic shall be restricted from the traversing across for thirty-six (36) hours after placement of STORMWATER STRUCTURES 33 42 30-6 frame and concrete. 3.03 Inlets A. General 1. Shall be constructed from concrete with all concrete work in accordance with the requirements of the Section 03 3111 CONCRETE STRUCTURES,unless otherwise specified. 2. Forms will be required for all concrete walls,except where the nature of the surrounding material is such that it can be trimmed to a smooth vertical face. 3. Inlets for Precast Concrete Pipe Sewers. a. The construction of inlets for precast concrete pipe sewers shall be done as soon as is practicable after storm lines into or through inlet locations are completed. b. All sewers shall be cut neatly at the inside face of the walls of inlet and cleaned up with mortar. B. Excavation 1. Asper Section 33 05 10 EXCAVATION AND BACKFILL FOR UTILITIES. C. Wall Preparation for Pipe Penetrations 1. Cut shall be equal to the outside diameter of pipe to pass through it, plus two-inches (2"), plus gasket to form a non-leak seal. 2. Cuts are to be made using electric or gasoline powered circular saw with proper blade. 3. Impact type tools shall not be used. 4. Where multiple pipe connections occur, maximum wall cutout shall not exceed manufacturer's recommendations, nor shall be cut leaving less than twelve-inches (12") between pipes, unless otherwise noted on the Drawings or approved by Owner. D. Pipe Penetrations 1. Pipe connection shall be made with gasket material installed in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations and the exterior portion shall have geotextile placed across it, unless otherwise noted on the Drawings or approved by the Owner. E. Pipe Stub outs for Future Connections 1. Shall be installed where noted on the Drawings and in accordance with the details. 2. Shall have an approved gasket placed between pipe and manhole. 3. Gasket shall be installed in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations. 4. A watertight plug shall be installed in the pipe at the end of the pipe and remain until the pipe is connected for future service. F. Handling 1. Shall be handled and stored in a safe manner as necessary to prevent damaging either the item or the surroundings. 2. Manholes shall be lifted as specified by the manufacturer. a. If manhole must be moved by rolling, the ground which it transverses shall be smooth and free of rocks,debris,etc. G. Installation 1. Shall be installed as specified by the manufacturer and in accordance with this specification and the details. 2. Field verify all existing elevations and conditions prior to ordering new manholes. H. Inverts 1. The inverts passing out or through the inlet shall be shaped and routed across the floor of inlet as shown on the Drawings. 2. This shaping may be accomplished by adding and shaping mortar or concrete after the base is cast or by placing the required additional material with the base. I. Concrete and Grout 1. Concrete a. All concrete work shall be completed in accordance with Section 03 31 11 CONCRETE STRUCTURES. b. All concrete shall be placed within forms. 2. Grout a. Grout shall be placed in a manner which will not allow for separation of materials. b. All exposed grout inside the manhole shall have an approved concrete coating applied to the surface in accordance with the manufacturers'recommendations. STORMWATER STRUCTURES 33 42 30-7 J. Backfill 1. Shall be in accordance with Section 33 05 10 EXCAVATION AND BACKFILL FOR UTILITIES unless otherwise indicated on the Drawings. 3.04 Frames,Grates and Covers A. Frames,grates,and covers shall be constructed of the materials as specified and in accordance with the details shown on the Drawings and shall be placed carefully to the lines or grades indicated on the Drawings or as directed by the Owner. B. All welding shall conform to the requirements of the applicable section of the latest American Welding Society Specifications. C. Apply non-seize graphite or approved equal around all the frame, grate, and/or cover prior to installation. 3.05 Grade Adjustment of Existing Fiberglass Manhole A. Adjustment by Rings 1. The adjustment of the frame and cover is to be achieved by removal or addition of HDPE grade adjustment rings that rest above the fiberglass corbel. 2. Butyl Sealant shall be placed between each ring in a manner to form a continuous seal between each ring. 3. Butyl Sealant shall be placed between the ring and manhole to form a continuous seal. B. Adjustment by Lowering Top of Manhole 1. If the frame and cover must be lowered to the extent that the new elevation cannot be achieved by removal of grade adjustment rings and it is necessary to remove a section of the fiberglass manhole,this work shall be done as described below: a. All work shall be in accordance with manufacturer recommendations. b. Remove the appropriately sized section of the existing manhole from the vertical manhole wall at least six inches (6")below the seam where the corbel meets the vertical wall. c. Excavate evenly around the manhole as required. d. Mark,cut and remove the required section of the manhole. 1) Make a square cut as necessary for a good butt splice. e. Grind and clean ends of fiberglass that are to be re-united. f. Replace and align the top. g. Apply new Fiberglass in accordance with Manhole Manufacturer recommendations and the recommendations of the repair kit. 1) Repair kit shall be of type as required by Manhole Manufacturer. h. After curing,backfill in accordance with the backfill requirements for Manholes,the Drawings, and/or as directed by the Owner. C. Concrete Collar 1. Shall be circular or square of size indicated on the Drawings. 2. Concrete shall be in accordance with Section 03 3111 CONCRETE STRUCTURES. 3. Traffic shall be restricted from the traversing across for thirty-six (36) hours after placement of frame and concrete. 3.06 Grade Adjustment of Existing Concrete Manhole A. Shall be in accordance with the Drawings. STORMWATER STRUCTURES 33 42 30-8 GEOTECHNICAL ENGINEERING REPORT PROPOSED COMMODORE PARK IMPROVEMENTS Commodores Drive Corpus Christi, Texas LIES Project No. G124344 October 4, 2024 Prepared for: Turner Ramirez Architects 3751 South Almeda Street Corpus Christi,Texas, 78411 Attention: Ms. Kira Bonesteel Ir V/0 Prepared by: TM UES 16817 Leopard St., Corpus Christi, TX 78409 1 office: 361.883.4555 1 fax: 361.883.4711 Environmental Geotechnical Engineering UES Materials Testing V`0Field Inspections&Code Compliance Geophysical Technologies October 4, 2024 Turner Ramirez Architects 3751 South Almeda Street Corpus Christi, Texas, 78411 Attention: Ms. Kira Bonesteel Re: Geotechnical Engineering Report PROPOSED COMMODORE PARK IMPROVMENTS Commodores Drive Corpus Christi, Texas UES Report No. G124344 Dear Ms. Bonesteel: UES Professional Solutions 45, LLC (hereinafter "UES") has performed a geotechnical exploration for the project referenced above. This study was authorized by Mr. Jay Porterfield, AIA, representing Turner Ramirez Architects, by signing our proposal on September 3, 2024.The scope of the project was performed in accordance with UES Proposal No. CGP032924A, dated April 2, 2024. The results of this exploration, together with our recommendations, are presented in the accompanying report, an electronic copy of which is being transmitted herewith. UES appreciates the opportunity to be of service on this project. If we can be of further assistance, such as providing materials testing services during construction, please contact our office. Sincerely, UES Professional Solutions 45, LLC. TEXAS PROFESSIONAL ENGINEERING FIRM NO. 2101 *f.. .:.. .. / AHMED K.NEAMAH ...... ......' 133380 0i </ pig �sS�OtVAI E��\� Ahmed Neamah, P.E. James Bauer, P.E. Senior Geotechnical Engineer Gulf Coast/South Texas Area Manager UES 16817 Leopard St.,Corpus Christi,TX 78409 1 office:361.883.4555 1 fax:361.883.4711 TABLE OF CONTENTS INTRODUCTION ..........................................................................................................................................1 Purposeand Scope.............................................................................................................................................. 1 General................................................................................................................................................................ 1 SITEDESCRIPTION.......................................................................................................................................2 FIELDEXPLORATION ...................................................................................................................................2 Scope................................................................................................................................................................... 2 Drilling and Sampling Procedures........................................................................................................................3 FieldObservations...............................................................................................................................................3 LABORATORY TESTING PROGRAM...............................................................................................................4 SUBSURFACE CONDITIONS..........................................................................................................................4 General................................................................................................................................................................4 SoilConditions.....................................................................................................................................................4 GroundwaterObservations.................................................................................................................................5 SeismicSite Classification....................................................................................................................................5 OSHASoil Type Classification ..............................................................................................................................5 GEOTECHNICAL DISCUSSION .......................................................................................................................6 ProjectDescription.............................................................................................................................................. 6 Potential Vertical Rise (PVR) Discussion.............................................................................................................. 6 Foundation Types Considered............................................................................................................................. 7 FOUNDATION RECOMMENDATIONS ...........................................................................................................7 Stiffened Slab-on-Grade Foundation Recommendations ...................................................................................7 Straight-Sided Drilled Shaft Foundation Recommendations...............................................................................8 LateralPier Analysis.............................................................................................................................................9 Floor Slabs used with Straight Sided Drilled Shaft ..............................................................................................9 Pool Design and Construction Recommendation:.........................................................................................9 Earth Pressure Design Parameters for Design of Permanent Below-Ground Structures ...................................9 Pool Foundation Discussion: ............................................................................................................................. 11 PAVEMENT RECOMMENDATIONS............................................................................................................. 11 Pavement Thickness Design Recommendations............................................................................................... 11 Flexible Pavement Recommendations.............................................................................................................. 12 Rigid Pavement Recommendations .................................................................................................................. 12 Routine Maintenance of Rigid and Flexible Pavement Systems....................................................................... 14 SITE IMPROVEMENT METHODS................................................................................................................. 14 Drainage and Flatwork Construction Considerations........................................................................................ 14 CONSTRUCTION CONSIDERATIONS............................................................................................................ 15 GroundwaterControl ........................................................................................................................................ 15 SitePreparation—Building Area ....................................................................................................................... 16 SelectFill............................................................................................................................................................ 17 Drilled Straight-Sided Shaft Construction Considerations ................................................................................ 17 Earthwork and Foundation Acceptance............................................................................................................ 17 VaporRetarder.................................................................................................................................................. 18 Utilities............................................................................................................................................................... 19 GENERALCOMMENTS............................................................................................................................... 19 APPENDIX Site Vicinity Map Boring Location Plan Boring Logs Key to Soil Classifications and Symbols Geotechnical Engineering Report UES Project No.G124344 Proposed Commodore Park Improvements October I 2024 INTRODUCTION This report presents the results of a subsurface exploration, laboratory testing program, and geotechnical analysis for the proposed Commodore Park located at Commodores Drive in Corpus Christi, Texas. This report contains foundation recommendations and construction considerations for the proposed construction. Purpose and Scope The purpose of this exploration was to evaluate the subsurface soil and groundwater conditions at the site and to provide geotechnical recommendations suitable for the proposed project. The scope of the exploration and analysis included the subsurface exploration, field and laboratory testing, engineering analysis and evaluation of the subsurface conditions, provision of foundation recommendations, and preparation of this report. The scope of services did not include an environmental assessment. Any statements in this report or on the boring log regarding odors, colors, unusual or suspicious items or conditions are strictly for the information of the client. General The exploration and analysis of the subsurface conditions reported herein are considered sufficient in detail and scope to provide geotechnical recommendations for the proposed project. The recommendations submitted herein are based on project details provided by the client and the soil information obtained at the boring locations. If the designers require additional soil parameters to complete the design of the foundation, and this information can be obtained from the soil data and laboratory tests performed within the scope of work included in our proposal for this project, LIES will provide the additional recommendations requested as a supplement to this report. The Geotechnical Engineer states that the findings, recommendations, specifications, or professional advice contained herein have been presented after being prepared in a manner consistent with that level of care and skill ordinarily exercised by reputable members of the Geotechnical Engineer's profession practicing contemporaneously under similar conditions in the locality of the project. UES operates in general accordance with "Standard Practice for Minimum Requirements for Agencies Engaged in the Testing and/or Inspection of Soil and Rock as Used in Engineering Design and Construction" (ASTM D3740). No other representations are expressed or implied, and no warranty or guarantee is included or intended. This report has been prepared for the exclusive use of Turner Ramirez Architects for the specific application for the proposed Commodore Park Improvements project, which is planned for a site located on Commodores Drive in Corpus Christi,Texas. Page 1 of 18 Geotechnical Engineering Report UES Project No.G124344 Proposed Commodore Park Improvements October I 2024 SITE DESCRIPTION The project site is located approximately 500 feet north of the intersection of Commodores Drive and Aquarius Street in Corpus Christi,Texas. The location of the project site can be found on the Site Vicinity Map in the Appendix. At the time of our field exploration, we observed that the surface material at the site mainly consisted of grass and scattered bushes. The site has varying elevations and rough terrain, with some mounds reaching up to 10 feet in height. According to information obtained from Google Earth Pro imagery, the site's elevation ranges from 6 to 15 feet. The ground surface was soft and wet during our field operation, making it difficult for the drill rig to access the boring locations. It should be noted that the supporting capability of the site soils may be different at the time of construction, particularly after rain events. With this in mind, we recommend that the contractor verifies the ground conditions before construction starts and be prepared to use adequate equipment and vehicles capable of accessing and traversing the site. FIELD EXPLORATION Scope The field exploration performed to evaluate the engineering characteristics of the subsurface materials included reconnaissance of the project site, performing the boring operations, and obtaining disturbed split spoon samples and relatively undisturbed Shelby tube samples. During the sample recovery operations, the soils encountered were classified and recorded on the boring logs in accordance with the "Standard Guide for Field Logging of Subsurface Exploration of Soil and Rock", (ASTM D5434). Three (3) borings were performed at the site for the purpose of providing geotechnical information. The table below provides the boring identification, location, boring depths, and approximate Global Positioning System (GPS) coordinates at the boring locations. Summary of Boring Information Boring Identification Location Depth(feet) GPS Coordinates B-1 Proposed Covered Pavilion 20 N 27.62129°,W 97.22666° Proposed Covered Shade and B 2 40 N 27.62077°,W 97.22642° Community Pool B-3 Proposed Community Center 40 N 27.62012°,W 97.22603° Approximate GPS coordinates were obtained at the boring locations using a recreational grade device and are provided in this report and on the boring logs. The client determined the number and depth of the borings, and UES performed the drilling and logging operations. Upon completion of the drilling operations and obtaining the groundwater observations,the boreholes were backfilled with excavated soil. A Boring Locations Plan is provided in the Appendix. Page 2 of 18 Geotechnical Engineering Report UES Project No.G124344 Proposed Commodore Park Improvements October I 2024 The borings performed for this project were used to determine the classification and strengths of the subsurface soils. The information provided on the boring logs includes the boring locations, depths, soil classifications, soil strengths, and laboratory test results. The boring logs are included in the Appendix. Drilling and Sampling Procedures The test borings were performed using a drilling rig equipped with a rotary head turning hollow stem augers to advance the boreholes. Disturbed soil samples were obtained employing split-barrel sampling procedures in general accordance with the procedures for "Penetration Test and Split-Barrel Sampling of Soils, (ASTM D1586)." The samples were classified, placed in plastic bags, marked according to boring number, depths and any other pertinent field data, stored in special containers and delivered to the laboratory for testing. Field Observations Standard Penetration Tests (SPTs) — During the sampling procedures, SPTs were performed to obtain the standard penetration value of the soil at selected intervals. The standard penetration value (N) is defined as the number of blows of a 140-pound hammer, falling 30 inches, required to advance the split-barrel sampler 1 foot into the soil. The sampler is lowered to the bottom of the previously cleaned drill hole and advanced by blows from the hammer. The number of blows is recorded for each of three successive 6-inch penetrations. The "N" value is obtained by adding the second and third 6-inch increment number of blows. The drill rig utilized an automatic hammer when performing SPTs. An automatic hammer is usually taken as having an efficiency of one, indicating minimum energy loss. The results of standard penetration tests indicate the relative density of cohesionless soils and comparative consistency of cohesive soils, thereby providing a basis for estimating the relative strength and compressibility of the soil profile components. Water Level Observations — Water level observations were made during the test boring operations. Water level observations are noted on the boring logs provided in the Appendix. In relatively pervious soils, such as sands,the indicated depth is usually a reliable groundwater level. In relatively impervious soils, such as clayey soils, a suitable estimate of the groundwater depth may not be possible, even after several days of observation. Seasonal variations, temperature, land-use, proximity to water bodies, and recent rainfall conditions may influence the depth to the groundwater depth. The amount of water in an open borehole largely depends on the permeability of the soils encountered at the boring location. Ground Surface Elevations—The ground surface elevations at the boring locations were not provided at the time of this report. Therefore, the depths referred to in this report are measured from the existing ground surface at the boring locations during the time of our field investigation (further referenced in this report as the "existing grade") unless specified otherwise. Page 3 of 18 Geotechnical Engineering Report UES Project No.G124344 Proposed Commodore Park Improvements October I 2024 LABORATORY TESTING PROGRAM In addition to the field investigation, a laboratory testing program was conducted to determine additional pertinent engineering characteristics of the subsurface materials necessary in analyzing the behavior of the foundation system for the proposed project. The laboratory testing program included supplementary visual classification (ASTM D2487) and water content tests (ASTM D2216) on the samples. In addition, selected samples were subjected to Atterberg limits tests (ASTM D4318) and percent material finer than the#200 sieve tests (ASTM D1140). The laboratory testing program was conducted in general accordance with applicable ASTM Specifications. The results of these tests are to be found on the accompanying boring logs provided in the Appendix. SUBSURFACE CONDITIONS General The types of soil materials encountered in the test borings have been visually classified and are described in detail on the boring logs. The results of water level observations, field strength tests and laboratory tests are also presented on the boring logs. Representative samples of the soils were placed in sealed polyethylene bags and are now stored in the laboratory for further analysis, if desired. Unless notified to the contrary, the samples will be disposed of three months after issuance of this report. The stratification of the soil, as shown on the boring logs, represents the soil conditions at the actual boring locations. Variations may occur and should be expected between and beyond the boring locations. Lines of demarcation represent the approximate boundary between different soil types, but the transition may be gradual, or not clearly defined. It should be noted that, whereas the test borings were drilled and sampled by experienced drillers, it is sometimes difficult to record changes in stratification within narrow limits. In the absence of foreign substances, it is also difficult to distinguish between discolored soils and clean soil fill. Soil Conditions The generalized soil conditions encountered at the project site have been summarized and soil properties including soil classification, strength, and plasticity are provided in the following table. Summary of Subsurface Profile D Description ILL PI Ye 4200 N 0-10 Poorly Graded SAND NP NP 29 55 0-1 3-13 10-40 Poorly Graded SAND, Poorly Graded NP NP 31 60 2-10 7-21 SAND with Silt,Silty SAND Where: D=Depth in feet below existing grade ILL= Liquid limit(%) PI = Plasticity index �=Angle of Internal Friction,deg. Ye= Effective soil unit weight, pcf NP= Non-Plastic -#200=Material passing#200 sieve, % N =SPT Value, blows per foot Page 4 of 18 Geotechnical Engineering Report UES Project No.G124344 Proposed Commodore Park Improvements October I 2024 Detailed descriptions of the soils encountered at the boring locations are provided on the boring logs included in the Appendix. Groundwater Observations Groundwater observations are provided in the following table. Groundwater(GW)Observations Boring During Drilling Upon Completion B-1 At the existing grade At the existing grade B-2 4 feet 10 feet B-3 3 feet 7.5 feet It should be noted that groundwater levels or zones of seepage may be present within the depths explored at different times as they are subject to seasonal conditions, land-use, proximity to water bodies, recent rainfall conditions, drought or temperature effects. Seismic Site Classification In accordance with the International Building Code (IBC), "When the soil properties are not known in sufficient detail to determine the site class, Site Class D shall be used unless it is determined that Site Class E or F soil is likely to be present at the site." Since our field investigation has not included a 100- foot-deep boring, by definition, the soil properties are not known in sufficient detail. Additionally, Table 20.3-1-Site Classification provides that the soil undrained shear strength for Site Class E soils should have a Standard Penetration Resistance of less than 15, and an undrained shear strength less than 1,000 psf. These soils are present within significant portions of the depths explored at this site. Therefore, the seismic site class in accordance with the ASCE/SEI 7 should be assumed to be Site Class E. OSHA Soil Type Classification The following table provides a summary of the OSHA Soil Type Classification based on the soils encountered at the boring locations. OSHA Soil Type Classification Depth Description OSHA Soil Type feet Classification 0-20 Non-Cohesive Soil (Sand)and/or Soil Below the Water Table Type C It should be noted that the contractor's "competent person" shall make the final determination of the OSHA Soil Type during the excavation of the soils at the site. Slope protection for excavations greater than 20 feet needs to be designed and sealed by a professional engineer registered in the State of Page 5 of 18 Geotechnical Engineering Report UES Project No.G124344 Proposed Commodore Park Improvements October I 2024 - lot AEW Texas. The maximum allowable slopes during construction for soil OSHA soil types are provided in the following table. Guidelines for Maximum Allowable Slopes Soil or Rock Type Max.Allow.Slopes for Excavations<Than 20'Deep Type C 1% Horizontal : 1 Vertical Guidelines for maximum allowable slopes were obtained from OSHA documents but do not take into account any recent revisions or the stability of long-term unprotected slopes, which will likely require much flatter slopes. The guidelines presented herein for slopes do not imply UES is taking responsibility for construction site safety; this responsibility falls entirely upon the contractor and his responsible person. The contractor shall comply with all rules, ordinances, and other requirements to comply with safe construction practices. GEOTECHNICAL DISCUSSION Project Description Based on the information provided to UES,the project includes the construction of multiple structures. This includes the following structures as summarized in Table below: Proposed Development Area (ft ) Pump House Structure 500 Community Swimming Pool 6,000 Bath House structure 3,000 Gymnasium Structure 8,600 Community Center Building 9,500 Pavilion Structure 3,800 Parking Lot 60,000 It should be noted that grading plans, nor structural plans were provided to UES at the time of this study. Therefore, cuts and fills were assumed to be on the order of less than 1 foot, and structural loading was anticipated to be on the order of that of similar type facilities in the area. Potential Vertical Rise (PVR) Discussion Differential vertical movements associated with the shrinking and swelling of clayey soils is often a concern that needs to be addressed during the design and construction process. However, due to the relatively shallow seasonally active depth at this site, as well as the non-plastic nature of the soils encountered, the site can be considered as non-expansive. The expansive potential of the soils at this site are considered to be negligible and are not a controlling factor in the design. Page 6 of 18 Geotechnical Engineering Report UES Project No.G124344 Proposed Commodore Park Improvements October I 2024 Foundation Types Considered No structural information regarding the maximum of column loads or wall load has been provided to LIES at the time of this report. Our recommendations are based on the lab testing and limited information provided; if any structural information becomes available, UES should be contacted to revise the recommendations as necessary. A shallow foundation system consisting of a stiffened slab-on-grade or a deep foundation system consisting of drilled straight-sided shaft were considered to support the proposed structure. These foundation systems are briefly described below. Stiffened Slab-on-Grade Foundation —A stiffened grid type beam and slab foundation (waffle slab) is used to support relatively light structures where the soil conditions are relatively uniform, and where uplift and settlement can be tolerated. The intent of a waffle slab is to allow the structure and foundation to move up and down freely with soil movements while providing sufficient stiffness to limit differential movements within the superstructure. Straight-Sided Drilled Shafts — Straight-sided drilled shafts were considered for use to support the proposed structures and are a feasible option. Temporary steel casing, the slurry displacement method, or a combination of both will be required during the straight sided drilled shaft installation process. FOUNDATION RECOMMENDATIONS Stiffened Slab-on-Grade Foundation Recommendations We understand that a shallow foundation system consisting of a stiffened slab-on-grade is being considered to support the proposed structures. It should be noted that rigid exterior walls and interior partitions are subject to distress with the slightest soil-related foundation movements, even differential movements as small as % inch. Interior and exterior grade beams should be founded within properly compacted select fill, or natural soil at a minimum depth of 2 or 2%feet, respectively, below the finished floor slab elevation. Perimeter grade beams should be founded at least 2 feet below the final exterior grade and can be designed for a net allowable unit soil bearing pressure of 1,100 psf. The net allowable unit soil bearing pressure provided utilizes an approximate design safety factor of 3. The beams should be a minimum of 12 inches wide to reduce the potential for localized shear failure and the beams should be spaced at a maximum distance of 20 feet, in both directions. The Structural Engineer may vary beam depths and spacing based on experience designing and constructing similar type structures on sites with similar subsurface soil conditions. The "Design of Slab-On-Ground Foundations," published by the Wire Reinforcement Institute, Inc. (Aug., 1981), utilizes the design criteria provided in the table below: Page 7 of 18 Geotechnical Engineering Report UES Project No.G124344 Proposed Commodore Park Improvements October I 2024 WRI Design Criteria Climatic Rating(Cw) 17 Effective Plasticity Index, % 15 Soil/Climatic Rating Factor(1-C) 0.05 Maximum Beam Spacing, Both Directions(ft) 20 WRI slab design criteria provided above consider that the operations discussed in the "Potential Vertical Rise (PVR) Discussion" and "Site Preparation — Building Area" sections of the report are performed. A soil supported floor slab is subject to vertical movements as discussed earlier in this report. Even slight differential movements on the order of 1 inch can cause distress to interior wall partitions and rigid exterior walls or facades supported by a shallow waffle slab foundation, resulting in cosmetic damage. This amount of movement should be understood and addressed during the design phase of the proposed structure planned for construction at this site. Straight-Sided Drilled Shaft Foundation Recommendations A straight-sided drilled shaft can be utilized to support the proposed structure. The pier installation procedure may require steel casing/slurry to properly install the piers. The allowable unit skin friction for the straight-sided drilled shaft can be utilized from the table below: Depth Below Existing Grade Allowable Unit Skin Friction (ft) (psf) 0-5 Neglect 5-10 55 10-20 115 20-35 210 The allowable unit skin friction value provided above are based on the strengths of the in-situ soils and utilize a design safety factor of 2 against shear failure. The minimum pier depth shall be determined by the structural engineer based on axial and lateral loading conditions, including uplift, as well as compliance with all regulatory requirements. The maximum pier depth is 35 feet. The upper 5 feet of the shaft should be neglected for skin friction and uplift force consideration. Settlement of a properly designed and constructed straight-sided drilled shaft is estimated to be on the order of 1 inch. And the differential settlements on the order of% inch. Straight-sided drilled shaft should be spaced no closer than four pier diameters apart, measured center to center (diameter of larger shaft), to avoid capacity reductions for closely spaced piers. If groups of Page 8 of 18 Geotechnical Engineering Report UES Project No.G124344 Proposed Commodore Park Improvements October I 2024 piers are required to support concentrated loads, UES should be contacted to calculate the reduction in bearing capacity. Lateral Pier Analysis Drilled straight-sided shaft foundations may be subjected to lateral loads. Lateral resistance analysis programs such as L-pile will require the following soil parameters for this site: D L-Pile Design Parameters—Drilled Straight-Sided Shaft Soil Type C K(Static) Eso 0-5 SAND -- Neglect 5-10 SAND -- 29 55 20 -- 10-20 SAND -- 31 55 60 -- Where: D=depth (ft) y�=effective unit weight, pcf C=shear strength, psf K=modulus of subgrade reaction (pci) �=angle of internal friction,deg. Eso=50%strain value K and Eso values were estimated from publicly published correlations. Floor Slabs used with Straight Sided Drilled Shaft If drilled shafts are used to support the proposed building, a structurally suspended floor slab is recommended in conjunction with the drilled shafts. All beams spanning between shafts shall be structurally connected to the shafts. Pool Design and Construction Recommendation: UES understands that a community swimming pool will be part of the park development at this site. At the time of this report, the specific maximum depth of the pool has not been provided. It is assumed that the maximum depth will not exceed 6 feet. For excavation purposes, the OSHA soil type section of this report should be followed. Furthermore, recommendations for the design and construction of the swimming pool are outlined in the subsequent section. Earth Pressure Design Parameters for Design of Permanent Below-Ground Structures The pool wall should be designed to withstand the lateral earth pressures from the soil retain. The amount of pressure on the pool wall depends on the backfill placement, the type of backfill soil, drainage, and the type of wall used. The design should take into account the equivalent fluid pressures and associated lateral earth pressure coefficients. The tables below show the active and at-rest pressure coefficients and the equivalent fluid pressure for active and at-rest conditions for horizontal backfill. The active earth pressure condition applies when horizontal movement can occur along the height of the structure, while the at-rest earth pressure condition applies when the structures are restrained at the top. The equivalent fluid pressures provided do not include a factor of safety. Page 9 of 18 Geotechnical Engineering Report UES Project No.G124344 Proposed Commodore Park Improvements October I 2024 Equivalent Fluid Pressures (Pound Per Square Foot per Foot of Wall Height) Active Condition At Rest Condition Type of Soil Behind the Retaining (Horizontal Backfill) (Horizontal Backfill) System. Above Water Below Water Above Water Below Water Table Table Table Table On-Site Poorly Graded Sand Soil: 40 19 60 28 `Lt=115 pcf, (c')=0, (fl=29 On-Site Poorly Graded Sand Soil: 37 17 55 26 Xt=115 pcf, (c')=0, (fl=31 Properly Compacted Select Fill: 42 21 62 31 Xt=125 pcf, (c')=0, (fl=30 Where: (Xt)=Wet unit weight pcf (c')=Cohesion,psf (0'J=Effective Friction Angle, Note: a) Values provided assume that the materials are compacted to at least 95 percent of the Standard Proctor maximum dry density(ASTM D 698)within 2 percentage points of the optimum moisture content. b) If granular soils are used, a minimum of 2 feet of clay should be placed over the granular soils. c) Buoyant lateral earth equivalent fluid pressures:for below water table does not include the hydrostatic fluid weight effect of 62.4 pcf Lateral Earth Pressure Coefficients Type of Soil Behind the Retaining System. Active Condition At Rest Condition (Horizontal Backfill) (Horizontal Backfill) On-Site Poorly Graded Sand Soil: 0.35 0.52 Xt=115 pcf, (c')=0, (fl=29 On-Site Poorly Graded Sand Soil: 0.32 0.48 Xt=115 pcf, (c')=0, (fl=31 Properly Compacted Select Fill: 0.33 0.50 Xt=125 pcf, (c')=0, (fl=30 Where: (Xt)=Wet unit weight pcf (c')=Cohesion,psf (0)=Effective Friction Angle, It is important to have drainage systems in place to collect and remove water in order to prevent hydrostatic pressure on the walls. If there are no measures to prevent water accumulation behind the walls, the walls must be designed to withstand both the hydrostatic pressure and the lateral earth pressures. The design should account for the full height of the wall. The effects of surcharge loading must also be considered. The surcharge load should be multiplied by the applicable coefficient of earth pressure from the Table above, and the result should be applied as Page 10 of 18 Geotechnical Engineering Report UES Project No.G124344 Proposed Commodore Park Improvements October I 2024 a uniform lateral pressure over the full height of the wall. A uniform surcharge pressure should be included in the design for the pavement, traffic loads, and any other load. Lightweight, hand-controlled vibrating plate compactors are recommended for compaction of backfill adjacent to walls to reduce the possibility of increases in lateral pressures due to over-compaction. Heavy compaction equipment should not be operated within a distance equal to the height of the wall or at least 10 feet from the wall or whichever is greater. Also, compaction of backfill soils behind walls should not exceed 100 percent standard Proctor maximum dry density (ASTM D 698) to further limit lateral earth pressures against walls. Pool Foundation Discussion: Considering the net contact pressures at the bottom of the planned pool, it is expected that there will be minimal to no increase in soil pressure after removing about 6 feet of overburden weight.As a result, the proposed structure should be protected against bearing capacity failure, and any settlements should be limited to the effects of excavation disturbance and rebound. Boring B-1 has been conducted in close proximity to the proposed pool location. As per the findings of this investigation, it is anticipated that the soil at the bottom of the pool excavation will consist of medium-dense, dense, poorly graded sand. The identified bearing soils are particularly sensitive to disturbance, especially when wet. Depending on the soil and groundwater conditions during construction, it may be necessary to stabilize the bottom of the excavation using a woven geotextile, geogrid, and a layer of well-graded crushed concrete or coarse aggregate. The decision regarding the utilization of geotextile, geogrid, as well as the specific thickness and gradation requirements of the crushed aggregate layer, should be made during subgrade preparation. This decision should take into account the condition of the exposed subgrade at the time of construction and the dewatering effort undertaken. It is imperative that the subgrade is stable or stabilized before the aggregate is placed. UES recommends that the pool should be designed to accommodate a fluctuating water table, which may affect the buoyancy of the underground base. It should be assumed that the groundwater table is at the existing grade. Uplift forces will be at their maximum when the pool is empty. These uplift forces can be counteracted by the mass of the pool structure, or by properly keying the base to the soil. PAVEMENT RECOMMENDATIONS Pavement Thickness Design Recommendations Recommendations for rigid and flexible pavement and preparation of the pavement subgrade are provided in the following sections. A traffic study indicating the number and type of vehicles on which to base the pavement design was not provided. Therefore, our recommendations are based upon our experience with similar projects assuming normal vehicular loading. Any unusual loading conditions Page 11 of 18 Geotechnical Engineering Report UES Project No.G124344 Proposed Commodore Park Improvements October I 2024 AEW should be brought to our attention prior to finalizing the pavement design so that we may assess and modify our recommendations as necessary. Civil and Drainage Consideration. Pavement design is the responsibility of the project Civil Engineer. We have recommended preliminary pavement sections based on geotechnical information and assumed traffic information in accordance with the American Association of State Highway and Transportation Officials (AASHTO) Guidelines for Design of Pavement Structures dated 1993. According to AASHTO design methodology, the pavement design thickness considers pavement performance, traffic, subgrade soils, pavement materials, environment, drainage and reliability. The applicability of our assumptions should be reviewed and approved by the project Civil Engineer before the pavement section is finalized. The recommended pavement sections assume good drainage quality prevails over the life of the pavement and that the pavement subgrade is exposed to moisture levels approaching saturation less than 25 percent of the time. Good drainage is defined by AASHTO as "the ability to remove water from the pavement within one (1) day". Therefore, it is critical that the project Civil Engineer provide appropriate pavement drainage design to assure validity of the assumed drainage conditions.The final design thickness should be adjusted by project Civil Engineer based on the actual ESALs calculated Flexible Pavement Recommendations The recommended light and medium-duty flexible pavement sections, using locally available materials, are provided in the following table. If a heavier duty pavement is required, our office should be contacted to reevaluate our recommendations. Flexible Pavement Design Thickness Light-Duty Medium-Duty Flexible Pavement (Driveways) (Passenger Cars&Parking) Hot Mix Asphaltic Concrete 2 inches 3.0 Item 340.TXDOT-Type D Crushed Limestone Base Material 6 inches 9 (TxDOT Item 247 Type-A;Grade 1-2 Subgrade As mentioned in Pavement Subgrade Preparation Section Crushed limestone base materials in flexible pavement areas should meet the requirements set forth in Texas Standard Specifications 2014; Item 247, Type A, Grade 1-2 and should be placed in maximum 8 inch-thick loose lifts and compacted to a minimum density of 98 percent of the maximum dry density as determined by the modified Proctor test (ASTM D1557) and within ± 1% percent of the optimum moisture content. Rigid Pavement Recommendations The use of concrete for paving has become more prevalent in recent years due to the long-term maintenance cost benefits of concrete pavement compared to asphaltic pavements. The Page 12 of 18 Geotechnical Engineering Report UES Project No.G124344 Proposed Commodore Park Improvements October I 2024 recommended light and medium duty pavement sections are provided in the following table. Medium- duty rigid concrete pavements are recommended for pavements that will be exposed to medium truck traffic. If a heavier duty pavement is required, our office should be contacted to reevaluate our recommendations. Rigid Pavement Design Thickness Rigid Pavement Light-Duty Medium-Duty (Passenger Cars&Parking) (Driveways) Reinforced Concrete 6 inches 7 inches Bond Breaker(Type D) 1-inch 1-inch Stabilized Subgrade As mentioned in the Pavement Subgrade Preparation Section- Concrete pavement should be properly reinforced and jointed, as per ACI, and should have a minimum 28 day compressive strength of 4,000 psi. Expansion joints should be sealed with an appropriate sealant so that moisture infiltration into the subgrade soils and resultant concrete deterioration at the joints is minimized. The joints should be thoroughly cleaned, and sealant should be installed without overfilling before pavement is opened to traffic. Concrete pavement at least 8 inches thick is recommended for the trash dump approach areas and loading ramps due to the high wheel and impact loads that these areas receive. The concrete pads at the location of the trash dumpsters should be large enough to accommodate both the front and rear wheels of the vehicles used to pickup the trash dumpsters. Maintenance or operations managers need to stress the importance of placing the trash dumpsters in their proper locations to reduce the distress trash pickup operations place on the pavement. Pavement Subgrade Preparation: The existing subgrade should be stripped to a minimum of 6 inches to remove any roots, organic and vegetation. It should then be proof rolled using a dump truck weighing 20 tons. Any soft or loose soil should be removed and replaced with select fill, removed and dried, and compacted back in place, or stabilized with the appropriate chemical agent. We recommended that at least the upper eight inches of the soil would require cement stabilization of about 4% cement, expressed as a percent of the dry weight of the soil to be treated. This percentage is for estimation purposes. In order to determine the exact percentage of cement addition, lab testing should be performed during construction. Cement stabilization should be performed in accordance with the applicable provisions of Item 275 of the TxDOT Specification. Cement stabilized subgrade should be compacted to at least 95 percent of standard Proctor maximum dry density as determined by ASTM D 698 within zero to three percentage points above the optimum moisture content. Subgrade stabilization should extend a minimum of 2 feet behind the curb. Page 13 of 18 Geotechnical Engineering Report UES Project No.G124344 Proposed Commodore Park Improvements October I 2024 If at least 12 inches of compacted select fill materials are provided beneath the pavement, subgrade stabilization is not necessary. All other select fill requirements should be followed as mentioned in this report. Routine Maintenance of Rigid and Flexible Pavement Systems The pavement sections provided in this report are designed based on pavement sections constructed on similar subgrade soils and for facilities similar to those planned for construction at this site. The pavements will require routine maintenance such as crack sealing and seal coats for flexible pavements and joint maintenance for rigid pavement sections to achieve a desirable life of pavement. Without proper maintenance, moisture infiltration into the base materials and/or subgrade will result in rapid deterioration of the pavement system. LIES recommends that the owner protect their investment by incorporating an aggressive maintenance program. SITE IMPROVEMENT METHODS Drainage and Flatwork Construction Considerations The change in moisture content of the soil is the primary mechanism resulting in the volumetric changes of the supporting soils. Provisions in the site development should be made in order to maintain relatively uniform moisture contents of the supporting soils. A number of measures may be used to attain a reduction in subsoil moisture content variations. Some of these measures are outlined below: • During construction, positive drainage schemes should be implemented to prevent ponding of water on the subgrade. • Positive drainage should be maintained around the structures and site flatwork through roof/gutter systems connected to piping or directed to paved surfaces, transmitting water away from the foundation perimeters and site flatwork. In addition, positive grades sloping away from the foundations and site flatwork should be designed and implemented. • We recommend that an effective site drainage plan be devised by others prior to commencement of construction to provide positive drainage away from the site improvements and off the site, both during, and after construction. • Vegetation placed in landscape beds that are adjacent to the structure and site flatwork should be limited to plants and shrubs that will not exceed a mature height of 3 feet. Large bushes and trees should be planted away from the foundation and flatwork at a distance that will exceed their full mature height and canopy width. Page 14 of 18 Geotechnical Engineering Report UES Project No.G124344 Proposed Commodore Park Improvements October I 2024 • Individual concrete panels of site flatwork should be dowelled together to minimize trip hazards as a result of differential movements within the flatwork. • Site flatwork should be designed to drain quickly with a minimum positive slope of 1 percent. • In areas where non-movement sensitive flatwork is planned for construction, and extending 5 feet outside the plan area of the flatwork, all surface organics and deleterious materials shall be removed, the upper 12 inches of exposed subgrade soils should be scarified, moisture conditioned to a minimum of 2 percent above the optimum moisture content and compacted to at least 90 percent and not more than 95 percent of the maximum dry density as determined by the standard Proctor test (ASTM D698). All project features beyond the scope of those discussed above should be planned and designed similarly to attain a region of relatively uniform moisture content within the improvement areas. Poor drainage schemes are generally the primary cause of foundation and flatwork problems in South Texas. CONSTRUCTION CONSIDERATIONS Groundwater Control Groundwater was encountered at depths ranging from at the existing grade to about 10 feet below the existing grade at this site. This groundwater could be encountered in excavations required for building pad preparation, pool and any other excavation. We, therefore, recommend the Contractor provide a line item for dewatering in the bid package in case dewatering is required. Significant rainfall events will result in groundwater close to the ground surface and may warrant alternative construction means and methods in order to proceed with construction. Therefore, it should be made the responsibility of the contractor to verify depths to groundwater and appropriate construction methods. Subsurface water that flows in an upward direction into an excavation area that is being dewatered imparts a seepage force that tends to loosen the soil, reducing the soil strength. The change in strength should be considered in designing excavation bracing and foundations. Where excavations are to extend more than a few feet below groundwater level, open ditches or pits may not be practical, and more advanced methods may be required. Typically, the Contractor is responsible for designing, installing and maintaining a dewatering system for groundwater control and taking precautions to avoid distress to nearby existing structures, as a result of dewatering. Dewatering systems should be designed, installed and monitored by personnel qualified and experienced with dewatering soils. We recommend the Contractor consider retaining a Page 15 of 18 Geotechnical Engineering Report UES Project No.G124344 Proposed Commodore Park Improvements October I 2024 dewatering expert to assist in identifying, implementing and monitoring the most suitable and cost- effective method to control groundwater. Generally, the groundwater depth should be lowered to a depth of at least 3 ft below the planned excavation bottom to provide a firm working surface. Extended and/or extensive dewatering can result in settlement of existing structures in the vicinity; the Contractor is to take necessary precautions to monitor and minimize the effects on these structures. Site Preparation—Building Area The soils at this site contain open graded sand and the groundwater table is relatively shallow. Following periods of heavy rainfall or extended wet weather, groundwater can be present near the surface as the open graded sand soils become filled with water. Accordingly, for all site preparation and earthwork activities, the contractor should mobilize and use equipment that is capable of traversing these types of loose and potentially saturated sand soils. Additionally, dewatering may be required in order to perform site earthwork, foundation and utility Where the building structure will utilize a structurally suspended floor slab system supported by straight sided drilled shafts foundations, site preparation to with select fill is not necessary. Therefore, site preparation may only consist of stripping and minor excavation, proper proofrolling and ordinary compaction as necessary to provide proper support for formwork and/or carton forms. Where a soil supported floor slab will be used, the building area should be prepared by stripping the exposed soil to minimum of 6-inches depth or as necessary to remove any roots, organic and vegetation for a minimum distance of 5 feet beyond the proposed building perimeter and any appurtenances (including porches, attached sidewalks, stoops, etc.). Once the operations in the building area are performed, the upper 1 foot of exposed subgrade soils shall be compacted to a minimum density of 95 percent of the maximum dry density as determined by the standard Proctor test (ASTM D698) and the moisture content shall be maintained at, or above,the optimum moisture content. If any soft areas are identified, the soils should be removed and recompacted in place. The poorly graded sand onsite could be used to raise the building pad elevation. However, any excavation within the sandy soil will be subject to sloughing and difficulty in forming an open trench. Although not required, it may be beneficial to over-excavate the existing soils in the building areas to enable the placement of an additional thickness of "Select Fill" soil, thereby facilitating grade beam excavations through a more cohesive building pad material. By constructing the building pad in this manner, neat beam excavations can be performed without sloughing of the sand soil into the grade- beam excavations, which could result in potential necessity for additional labor, forming of grade- beams and/or concrete overages. Upon completion of the subgrade preparations as described above, "Select Fill" soils should be placed as required to achieve the desired final concrete elevation,which we recommend to be at least 1%feet Page 16 of 18 Geotechnical Engineering Report UES Project No.G124344 Proposed Commodore Park Improvements October I 2024 above the average surrounding grade elevations. The "Select Fill" pad shall be constructed to achieve uniform select fill thickness beneath all slab and flatwork areas. Excavation of grade beams, where applicable, may proceed after placement of the "Select Fill" is complete. Properly compacted "Select Fill" soils shall be placed in no greater than 8 inch thick loose lifts and compacted to a minimum density of 98 percent of the maximum dry density, as determined by the standard Proctor test (ASTM D698), and at, or above, the optimum moisture content. Select Fill Imported select fill material used at this site should be homogenous, free from organics and other deleterious materials and should have a maximum liquid limit of 40 percent and a plasticity index (PI) between 7 and 18. The select fill soils shall have a minimum of 35 percent passing the #200 sieve and no soil particles exceeding 1% inches will be permitted. The select fill should be placed in no greater than 8-inch-thick loose lifts and then compacted to a minimum density of 98 percent of the maximum dry density, as determined by the standard Proctor test (ASTM D698) and at or above the optimum moisture content. Drilled Straight-Sided Shaft Construction Considerations For deep drilled straight sided shafts, temporary steel casing, the slurry displacement method of pier installation, or a combination of temporary steel casing and slurry displacement method will be required. The appropriate method or combination of methods should be determined by the pier installation contractor. Proper installation methods will also depend on the final foundation design depths and the site and groundwater conditions at the time of construction. . The drilled shafts should be installed in accordance with Item 416 of TxDOT specifications or ACI 336.1 specifications or in accordance with the guidelines provided in FHWA-NHI-18-024. A relatively high slump concrete mix (6 to 7-inches) is suggested to minimize problems related to the concrete adhering to the casing as the casing is removed and to minimize aggregate segregation caused by the reinforcing steel. The successful placement of a pier foundation is dependent on the expertise of the drilled pier foundation contractor. It is recommended that a test pier excavation be performed at the site to verify groundwater conditions and hole stability at the specific location and time, and to ensure that the proper method of pier installation is being performed. The Geotechnical Engineer, or his designated representative, should be present to witness the test pier operations as well as all of the production pier installation activities. Earthwork and Foundation Acceptance Exposure to the environment may weaken the soils at bearing levels if excavations remain open for long periods of time. Therefore, it is recommended that the excavations be extended to final subgrade elevations and that construction commence as soon as possible to minimize potential damage to the Page 17 of 18 Geotechnical Engineering Report UES Project No.G124344 Proposed Commodore Park Improvements October I 2024 AMW bearing soils. The excavations should be free of loose soil, ponded water or debris, and should be observed prior to concreting by the Geotechnical Engineer or his designated representative. Concrete and flatwork constituents should not be placed on soils that have been disturbed by rainfall or seepage. If the subgrade soils are softened by surface water intrusion or by desiccation, the unsuitable soils must be removed and be replaced with properly compacted soils or select fill material as directed by the Geotechnical Engineer. The Geotechnical Engineer or his designated representative should monitor subgrade preparation. As a guideline, density tests should be performed on the exposed subgrade soils and each subsequent lift of compacted select fill soils at a rate of one test per 2,000 square feet or a minimum of three in-place nuclear tests per testing interval,whichever is greater. Any areas not meeting the required compaction should be recompacted and retested until compliance is met. Vapor Retarder A vapor retarder, with a permeance of less than 0.3 US perms (ASTM E96), should be placed under the concrete floor slab on the properly prepared building pad to reduce the transmission of water vapor from the supporting soil through the concrete slab and to function as a slip sheet to reduce subgrade drag friction. Polyethylene film, or polyolefin, with a minimum thickness of 10-mils (0.25 mm) is typically used for reduced vapor transmission and durability during and after its installation. The vapor retarder should be installed according to ASTM E1643, "Standard Practice for Installation of Water Vapor Retarders Used in Contact with Earth or Granular Fill Under Concrete Slabs". All penetrations through the vapor retarder should be sealed to ensure its integrity. The vapor retarder should be taped around all openings to ensure the effectiveness of the barrier. Grade stakes should not be driven through the barrier and care should be taken to avoid punctures during reinforcement and concrete placement. Placement of slab concrete directly on the vapor retarder increases the risks of surface dusting, blistering and slab curling making good concrete practice critical. A low water to cement ratio concrete mix design, combined with proper and adequate curing procedures, will help ensure a good quality slab. Where vapor transmission is not a concern, elimination of the vapor retarder may provide improvements in finishing characteristics and reductions in the risks of surface dusting, blistering and slab curling. However, exposure of portions of the subgrade or granular layer, such as at blockouts for columns or utility penetrations to inclement weather during construction may create excessive or deficient moisture conditions beneath portions of the slab that have already been placed. Blockouts for slab penetrations should be protected if a vapor retarder is omitted. ACI 302.111-96 "Guide for Concrete Floor and Slab Construction," recommends that a vapor retarder or vapor barrier be used only when required by the specific application. Page 18 of 18 Geotechnical Engineering Report UES Project No.G124344 Proposed Commodore Park Improvements October I 2024 Utilities Utilities that project through a slab-on-grade floor or walls should be designed with either some degree off lexibi I ity,or with sleeves, in order to prevent damage to these lines should vertical movement occur. GENERAL COMMENTS If significant changes are made in the character or location of the proposed Commodore Park Improvements, a consultation should be arranged to review any changes with respect to the prevailing soil conditions. At that time, it may be necessary to submit supplementary recommendations. It is recommended that the services of UES be engaged to test and evaluate the soils in the foundation excavations prior to concreting in order to verify that the bearing soils are consistent with those encountered in the boring. UES cannot accept any responsibility for any conditions that deviate from those described in this report, nor for the performance of the foundation if not engaged to also provide construction observation and testing for this project. If it is required for UES to accept any liability, then UES must review and agree with the plans and perform such observation during construction as we recommend. All dewatering, sheeting, shoring, and bracing of trenches, pits and excavations should be made the responsibility of the contractor and should comply with all current and applicable local, state and federal safety codes, regulations and practices, including the Occupational Safety and Health Administration. Page 19 of 18 APPENDIX ai U c .Q E O rn U N c � 0 0 U 75 0) L w c c N N c u o c L g O Q w •5 O U O > O w 0 F ii 0 O t 0 U a E o O � Uu uj U I= 000 O 000 y X w O Ln Y. 0 Ln W 00 d a 00 a ID ID C a m G ai � o rn 00 .Y W F- M` U V/ N O_ O U N a � m O_ i O O a Q J v � 00 t i M N :�- w a1 N D C rl �ao C7 � C 0 w O r- � Z R O U O 3 d O Vn y U a/ w W o0 Z) 2 O Q U O J W F -_ a) U o O -- O � U m c � � U _O O .c_ O> c u •�r-- �' w r j �. O N O H MV a, ro f LU c a) O N a0i L .a fJ, f1� a , IO _ .. > O .y mWPet d E (> i N V - E O I OWC m 00 00 rn o - �,. v ,„ Z �•, o Ln a W ` N m O 00 J `• a o0 ID ro rn 00 •t // 7 MO ary'^.��- � ., ♦fit ,�/.� '� U Ole ' 2(6 0 L o �00 ►� Q ) ' ~a cr o tiff ry) w a1 N c rl bA l7 N W O O — Z r-4 U a -tF c a1 � O CI- L. U a/ W O 0 Z) Z i c i t ( t • N� �"l�i• ,,��y �', S,, M y �sy p "►i.r� �' �';�5��.6 r_� rya •r`i�, LOG OF BORING B-1 SHEET 1 of 1 CLIENT: Turner Ramirez Architects %0 V E S UES Professional Solutions 45, LLC PROJECT: Commodore Park 6817 Leopard Street Corpus Christi,Texas 78409 LOCATION: Commodores Drive, Corpus Christi, Texas Telephone: (361)-883-4555 NUMBER: G124344 Fax: (361)-883-4711 DATE(S) DRILLED: 9/12/2024 FIELD DATA LABORATORY DATA DRILLING METHOD(S): ATTERBERG Hollow Stem Augers LIMITS x w GROUNDWATER INFORMATION: Z wp > Groundwater(GW)encountered at natural ground elevation during drilling. Of Z w Lu Z g in J H F LL O J H } O O D F�LL� U U U _ ~L N 3 <n') > > Q ¢ w0 0ZLu - Z a o 0 0 L 7i ii ii r D 2 � z SURFACE ELEVATION: N/A ° o ai uai z a�0 LL PL PI o ° ° ° DESCRIPTION OF STRATUM SS N=6 23 NP NP NP 0 S-1 POORLY GRADED SAND (SP), brown, moist, loose. SS N=7 25 5 S-2 Same as above. SS N=6 24 1 s ss 10 S-4 N=10 27 Same as above,with shell, gray, medium dense. SS N=17 22 S-5 Same as above. ----- ---- ---- -- -- -- ------------------------------ SS 15 S-6 N=7 24 NP NP NP 8 POORLY GRADED SAND WITH SILT(SP-SM),with shell, gray, moist, loose. ss 20 S-7 N=17 23 Same as above,without shell, medium dense. Boring terminated at 20 feet. N M O_ H J Lu Y U O a O Y CC a K O 0 O 0 O U v M V N_ Z o N - STANDARD PENETRATION TEST RESISTANCE REMARKS: mi Qc- STATIC CONE PENETROMETER TEST INDEX Drilling operations performed by Evirocore Drilling at GPS coordinates p N 27.62129 W 97.22666 P- POCKET PENETROMETER RESISTANCE O J LOG OF BORING B-2 SHEET 1 of 1 CLIENT: Turner Ramirez Architects %0 V E S UES Professional Solutions 45, LLC PROJECT: Commodore Park 6817 Leopard Street Corpus Christi,Texas 78409 LOCATION: Commodores Drive, Corpus Christi, Texas Telephone: (361)-883-4555 NUMBER: G124344 Fax: (361)-883-4711 DATE(S) DRILLED: 9/12/2024 FIELD DATA LABORATORY DATA DRILLING METHOD(S): ATTERBERG Hollow Stem Augers LIMITS x w GROUNDWATER INFORMATION: Z wLu p > Groundwater(GW)encountered at 4 feet during drilling. Of ? w Lu in GW at 10 feet after completion. Z g J H F LL O J H } O O D F�LL� U U t� ~L N 3 <n') > > Q ¢ w0 0ZLu - Z a 2 o 0 0 Ln o a a r D 2 � z SURFACE ELEVATION: N/A ° o ai uai z a 0 LL PL PI o ° ° ° DESCRIPTION OF STRATUM SS N=3 22 NP NP NP 1 S-1 POORLY GRADED SAND (SP), brown, moist,very loose. SS N=6 25 5 S-2 Same as above, loose. SS N=11 23 s SS N=9 26 NP NP NP 1 10 S-4 Same as above, loose. (SIP) SS N=14 23 S-5 Same as above, medium dense. SS N=10 24 15 S-6 Same as above, gray. SS N=10 25 2 20 S-7 Same as above. SS N=12 25 25 S-8 Same as above. N . SS F 30 S 9 Same as above. Lu O a -1 N=13 22 NP NP NP 10 POORLY GRADED SAND WITH SILT SP-SM ,gray, moist, a 35 S 10 ( ) 9 Y W medium dense. 0 . . 0 O 0.. . SS M S-11 N=18 26 Same as above. 40 N Boring terminated at 40 feet. c� o N - STANDARD PENETRATION TEST RESISTANCE REMARKS: mi Qc- STATIC CONE PENETROMETER TEST INDEX Drilling operations performed by Evirocore Drilling at GPS coordinates p N 27.62077 W 97.22642 d0 P- POCKET PENETROMETER RESISTANCE J LOG OF BORING B-3 SHEET 1 of 1 CLIENT: Turner Ramirez Architects %0 V E S UES Professional Solutions 45, LLC PROJECT: Commodore Park 6817 Leopard Street Corpus Christi,Texas 78409 LOCATION: Commodores Drive, Corpus Christi, Texas Telephone: (361)-883-4555 NUMBER: G124344 Fax: (361)-883-4711 DATE(S) DRILLED: 9/12/2024 FIELD DATA LABORATORY DATA DRILLING METHOD(S): ATTERBERG Hollow Stem Augers LIMITS x w GROUNDWATER INFORMATION: Z wLu p > Groundwater(GW)encountered at 3 feet during drilling. Of ? w Lu in GW at 7.5 feet after completion. Z g J H F LL O J H } O O D F�LL� U U t� ~L N 3 <n') > > Q ¢ w0 0ZLu - Z a 2 o 0 0 Ln o a a r D 2 � z SURFACE ELEVATION: N/A ° o ai uai z a 0 LL PL PI o ° ° ° DESCRIPTION OF STRATUM SS N=7 26 S-1 POORLY GRADED SAND, brown, moist, loose. SS N=9 22 NP NP NP 1 5 8-2 Same as above. (SP) SS N=4 24 S-3 Same as above, gray, loose. Ss 10 S-4 N=13 25 Same as above, medium dense. ————— ———— ———— -- -- -- —————————————————————————————— s 5 N=21 24 NP NP NP 7 POORLY GRADED SAND WITH SILT(SP-SM),with shell, gray, moist, medium dense. SS N=15 24 15 S-6 Same as above,without shell. ss 20 S-7 N=11 23 Same as above,with shell. ————— ———— ———— -- -- -- ------------------------------ SS N=20 25 3 25 S-8 POORLY GRADED SAND, gray, moist, medium dense. O H ss N=17 21 SILTY SAND, blueish gray, moist, medium dense. LU 30 S-9 9 Y, `1 O SS N=14 24 Same as above, brown. a 35 S 10 Lu:,: K: O ' O O � SS 40 S-11 N=21 26 Same as above. N Boring terminated at 40 feet. cD Er o N - STANDARD PENETRATION TEST RESISTANCE REMARKS: mi Qc- STATIC CONE PENETROMETER TEST INDEX Drilling operations performed by Evirocore Drilling at GPS coordinates p N 27.62012 W 97.22603 0 P- POCKET PENETROMETER RESISTANCE O J LIES Professional Solutions 45,LLC Wo TM Leopard Street Corpus Christi,TX 78409-1703 Telephone: 361-883-4555 Fax: 361-883-4711 KEY TO SOIL CLASSIFICATION AND SYMBOLS UNIFIED SOIL CLASSIFICATION SYSTEM TERMS CHARACTERIZING SOIL MAJOR DIVISIONS SYMBOL NAME STRUCTURE GW .'0 Well Graded Gravels or Gravel-Sand mixtures, SLICKENSIDED-having inclined planes of little or no fines weakness that are slick and glossy in appearance GRAVEL GP °�° Poorly Graded Gravels or Gravel-Sand mixtures, AND o p little or no fines FISSURED-containing shrinkage cracks, GRAVELLY frequently filled with fine sand or silt; usually SOILS GM ° more or less vertical Silty Gravels, Gravel-Sand-Silt mixtures LAMINATED(VARVED)-composed of thin layers of varying color and texture, usually grading from COARSE GC WE Clayey Gravels, Gravel-Sand-Clay Mixtures sand or silt at the bottom to clay at the top GRAINED CRUMBLY-cohesive soils which break into small SOILS Well Graded Sands or Gravelly Sands,little or no SW fines blocks or crumbs on drying Poorly Graded Sands or Gravelly Sands,little or CALCAREOUS-containing appreciable quantities of calcium carbonate,generally nodular SAND SP no fines AND SANDY WELL GRADED-having wide range in grain sizes SOILS SM Silty Sands, Sand-Silt Mixtures and substantial amounts of all intermediate particle sizes SC Clayey Sands,Sand-Clay mixtures POORLY GRADED-predominantly of one grain size uniformly graded)or having a range of sizes with some intermediate size missing(gap or skip ML Inorganic Silts and very fine Sands, Rock Flour, graded) Silty or Clayey fine Sands or Clayey Silts SILTS AND Inorganic Clays of low to medium plasticity, SYMBOLS FOR TEST DATA CLAYS CL Gravelly Clays,Sandy Clays,Silty Clays, Lean ILL<50 Clays — Groundwater Level Organic Silts and Organic Silt-Clays of low - (Initial Reading) FINE �L plasticity GRAINED 1 — Groundwater Level SOILS MH Inorganic Silts, Micaceous or Diatomaceous fine (Final Reading) SILTS Sandy or Silty soils, Elastic Silts ' — Shelby Tube Sample AND CLAYS CH Inorganic Clays of high plasticity, Fat Clays ILL>50 — SPT Samples OH Organic Clays of medium to high plasticity, Organic Silts m — Auger Sample HIGHLY ORGANIC PT „ Peat and other Highly Organic soils — Rock Core SOILS TERMS DESCRIBING CONSISTENCY OF SOIL COARSE GRAINED SOILS FINE GRAINED SOILS DESCRIPTIVE NO. BLOWS/FT. DESCRIPTIVE NO. BLOWS/FT. UNCONFINED STANDARD PEN. STANDARD PEN. COMPRESSION TERM TEST TERM TEST TONS PER SQ. FT. Very Loose 0-4 Very Soft <2 <0.25 Loose 4-10 Soft 2-4 0.25-0.50 Medium 10-30 Firm 4-8 0.50-1.00 Dense 30-50 Stiff 8-15 1.00-2.00 Very Dense over 50 Very Stiff 15-30 2.00-4.00 Hard over 30 over 4.00 Field Classification for"Consistency"is determined with a 0.25"diameter penetrometer saD!maS buiaaauibu3;o luamPed< a3noo c� *Sy c z s.1,D,3,1Ha, SVX31 0 m ? m o Z3211WVa 1213Naf11 IlSIliHO Sf1da00 iol� e e uaexi Iism' easnauoo aas3uoaawnoazozr 01 36VHd o U �3n 5 S1N3W3AObdNl Ni ]Vd 3a000WW00 - NOI1dIWJ530 AB 31tl0 'ON NOISIM13il NdidIHOS30 AA 31VO 'ON NOISI— c T— ¢ -a c�o =KLL d� O aka ^p w36 „wE ¢ oe¢ o �� - o� N N m Z_ _z V a p _p W em s"-J W a z z r po me ��� Q W K R' ran W ME , �� 3 U —o� w z z o - w w W z C7 (� z Q 7 W gc�im W z z d mg_ Y -------------- ui W x H U) _ - �,/ L Z U - 00 00 n 00%14 co U �)n� U LU = o o a � ��/ ''WAAo o o v LL v! N LU o di sa OP LLJ LL rn y�b� / \ Q 0 Q o Z 3 � Zo m / bNnJy 0 a� m a a WLL d a � = O W z a co �— N >- cr J cl W z U 0 o O a LLI Z O Q v�i �o F o m W a � Net U Z Z U_ U Q -'......... Z U � 2 Q r U K d saoinaag 6upaaui6u3 yo wamueda4 SNOLVIA3?190V 0NV Sl08AAS 1-0 ns s.l�,3,i_I.H. „a. SVX31 0 o Z3NINVH I IlMm i liSIUHO SndHOD io Ally e eaexi'lisiaeasnauoo aas3uoaawnoazozr N 3SVHd N o U `tau S1N3W3AObANI MVd 3a000AAOO ¢ - NOI1dIWJ53O A9 31H0 'DN NOISIM13il NOid1- AA 31V4 'ON NOISI�3l1 z Q U _- F � 00 _ s _ s J m � I�IIII U �oI aLJ 8y �� w5p § �mm z�z —, �e—MAV--f 7-M-IT _—oh__ _ � _ ___ _ off; - Q 3w ®�3s saainJa 6uIJaa016u o uaw ede o s 3� i a 6310N 1VAN30I 2J3AOO MID ..S i a a i„,H a n d SVX31 ch G <v �" �raa� Z3211Wd71183NeflL� USIlH0Sndd0Ol0Al1O a�ca�xiiisiaHosndaoo'aas3aoaowwoozoaa� i a RJR 6 3SHHd a SA3W3ffi JdW1 A2JHd 32JOOOWWOO N U Noudiaosea Nouaiaosaa we eiw oN Nois�3a Z z a x co =w aw oil � 3 - o o 1 a =d _"ax="NIP F a8 C os F� :8o htEQ � > oil Q 9 € o < � ao"Bo - S d " & e3oN o p3„`'•2 wKp wa a �a� _ 14 - lob His 1o� €8 €�= AN WE 1-2 - E� - - _ - - IR��e SpYo _8E§ _ �€ =30� '_ " a - - - 3 x �-�� Inn ogo� �pw6m _ - - - _ _ �3 ��o��p" od S a - - - 3'=m�'Sz w'I�^ n m3 Mao - - �S§o� - - MW w 6�6o am aN o oNN �o - '" 4=w�a�"=w =`s=�§a�go�w sw"�r�m� as aR121y says; HE - _ WIN£a€ '�"s€€` _�!Y g'o�wo�M, - --o4 w.m ea - ��Rao odmaE�=o �i=o 3j 9��0 ?B�< � - _ "J do•„� `� �V``� _ __ -=��£as Mum - ���a��&m s�FJ=-em�a3o -o�N �o -��E§oo oaQ6 B��Q a w§g o€b - woIIB� So gh mdaQ<m£q. o�oL.oa§< "�<� w ==grow=" ow z ww. oab=<"w 0 RUNS - Ill ¢e� - _ `,aa o§y�€<= dC= ,".,moo a=�` o§o wb - 3w=yz:zwoY¢o8o 3w�C ai b£ o€r ¢m�eW6§LL¢ - -a5o� 3�m �w - ok.=.�o �d�o L. `•y�b"Fo§ - ��3 _ad� �Y"� _ _ �§� ^e c�w'tl wm� - - `w'L0 "e=_ -�E€ ¢'6`0�= oar - Y=€d `-£4�yaa�2<a€£msb`=-'p 5 _ izapaGo _ - i'�� - lYsiizr�a��"i��F - �3�NER - - pb„ <�� o �o�F�amo2 `=WFo - - - - `•-- �ba<o�Gom�w -03 ¢0 Mops a€ory a€ .��§�opo o��' oga�=a � �=aaw o�a¢�<>=§s - �a o�aQ 01 aap� aa=p s=so�a awwa�="�= a aaa=oa ova= _'�- �`ma waapw o=o„ aw w _ _ " " §�oHIN - pa`w ¢-�I U _ =d='" �gF�"z'"w.<_ _ ���``=e a."=a�m6 � � F�a�� sa�pLLp�F _ _ &� ¢�a"�eg=wopsw„ba=1 =g IRS _ _ �<,.�w'==-a=w,.No - �_ oea _ €�`=IM aHa Sao N o ?�o����=���u nwah�"l�=_ =§a`�w=tea` _ a�awFo�mdoo m N3"a �w€ w'ao�n =<=me = - _- a�=a=a F am<p�o€oy = aw� a - z€��aama" ee�=a"ymma�=b� smsa�a�pg`<p - - - ,8£ w� pSa::Caaaj000¢a�a�==p - Rp ww - �3ggam��ogw�pw � = - - - ------- NU - - - _ =dyp6=5m - ��Nm 'M �a„S p"aa ¢aa a.=i�¢ac+ --- E"€" 3wEo<w m�`= 8� ��o€op�000N000 0000� oo.o¢o�€�§w�`= Fw i"s ¢ `6^a®ooFm�aBa sa?oo"aapYp o 6am`ao .... .. �p=N�,.�.. N po.� = �z _ � wBaaa�aaa¢aa��aaaa`^.^'€�m��koYJ�mo ¢o3 zzz owdnwEp z+3¢w ox�w�Nm�NB�<Ea4=wE`-11111101 -G=�o�`,W 88��a€=BpE�`>oy`�o €§ p=€b 3o<EbboEEE SEEEe£Ebbb E8E=Ez¢`w _� �6�00"�¢ =.,S o"b„g �" Wadpaop�d w &zn"d::��a�.s d<��,.�. d <p _ "`w< '¢'o `��=y�..�. �.�..��_.�..�o��..�.�.���._�."_. 3=S"e�o¢ RF8�¢¢p�8��� K W rwE, € "¢y wy S"b5" & ate' wF�w" w €< m o� a a a€ =F < «�<__"< d a�1111�61���£<3s �d�a��a � �€�' a € �€ � y -€� 3=8 ado gaa < NM .z_".,. J< o ode s I_"Nit 1a all 12 O - - i _ mG8 S8 a Amy >-h������ ®�3s S&OIAJBS 6uIAOUIBu3jo 4uaw eda(] o'r— NVId NOISN3WIa IV J3N30 p o A� s 1 o Eli I�H a a v SVX31 CO �r4alz3blWvsInNaru liSIHHO SndH OOl0AlI0 9lcLxilislaHosndaoo'aas38000wwoozoaa� i w LIE6 3SVHd S o a SA3W3ffi JdWI MVd 32JOOOWWOO N Noudlaosea ee eivaoN Nasn3a Noualaosaa we eiwoN Nols�3a CM _ W 5LU a b� W eotz e Q On � Z z gl.mg W J W Z'ZO 133HS 33S :3NIIH01VW Ii `l" %L� III I II I �I I I o I I II ,rmw � I II II +rcw I I I - I I I I d I I w I .ozuv I 1 o � I II� I I IeI I I I. I I � c I II � II I Iw II II 1 I � I I I -- -- - -- <x A m - ,/ � -- o � tW n—..�M�-Q- ��Mi— _gym.✓. II m r M� s��. *�-�:cai '�.s �— mom+ ��� ... n° s tt � ��➢-'�tya� Ji, S&OIAJBS 6uuaaul,6u3 jo 4uawyeda4 iy o� �u NV]d NOISN3WIa]Vd J3N30 N N o I� ..$,i a 3 i„I,Hand SVX31 Ch G N m 1 liSIHHOSndHOO10AilO 9ltLXilislaHDsndaoo'da S3aoaowwM MZal i w =v m 4ig' z3aiWvs I nNsni LIE6 3SHHd r' a SA3n3ffi JdWI MVd 32J000WWOO N U Noudlaosea ee eivaoN Nasn3a Noualaosaa we eiwoN Nols�3a CM W5 W LU u p d Z €otz Q On gl.mg W J W P� 110 133HS 13S :3NIlHD1VW I III � I m3 m h - �I I I I I III I I Q I ° A I yew _� vP c I B I 41 I I I .� •;a-. II � li I III � II III II III � I raw I II � I I I Y� ti II 1 P lttztl CaM I � a 173 133HS 33S :3NIlH3iVW Ji, SaoinJaS 6uuaaw,6u3 jo 4uawyeda4 iy o� �u NVId NOISN3WIa 1V2J3N30 I� $.i a 3,i„,Hand SVX31 ch G N m 1 liSIHHOSndHOO10AilO 9ltLXilislaHDsndaoo'daS3aoaowwMMZal i w =v m 4ig' z3aiWvs I nNsniLIE 6 3SHHd a SA3n3ffi JdWI MVd 32J000WWOO N U Noudiaosea ee eivaoN Nasn3a Nouaiaosaa we eiw oN Nois�3a CM W5 W u p d Z LU €otz Q On �g W J W P� d a� 9. el Z'ZD 133HS 33S :3NIIHO1VW saoin ag suuaaulsu3jo uawyeda° inakvi iNI0f'R N0U33S 1N3W3AVd 'Cj oo C:) s i o 3 i°`IH a a v SVX31 o Q co�� wP USIlHOSndHOO10AJJ0 9ltLXilisldHosnddoo'da 83doaoNNMMZaLLIE i w ���ES z3aiWva I a3Naru 6 3SHHdSH ` SA3n3A0?JdWI MVd 3b040WW00 N U Noudiaosea ee eiva oN Nasn3a Houma— we aiva INNIIIVII CM LU Lu z 8 8 8� a lJ cm Z Nil o� J 8 8 S fy v W he h a kkqS 4 � Bp �'�aans gHIM g PER 970 133HS 33S :3NIIHO1VW I I Vt I I r I I III � II� 1 I I I i f I � I I ' I I o I I II I I I I a I I I I I I II I I I I I I I I� I L_ L ' � I I I III i I. I I III I I I I I II I II I� 1 I - I Iwll I I I I I o II II �w I � I � I I I I of m -- -- - ------------------------------ PI I sa3inJag suuaaulsu3 jo uawyeda° inakvi iNI0f'R N0U33S 1N3W3AVd 'Cj oo C:) s i o 3 i°`IH a a v SVX31 o Q co�� wP USIlHHOSndHOO10AJJ0 9ltLXilisldHosnddoo'da S3doaoNNMMZaL i w ���ES z3aiWva I a3Naru co LIE6 3SHHdSH SA3n3A0?JdWI MVd 3b040WW00 N U Noudiaosea ee eiva oN Nasn3a Houma— we aiva INNIIIVII CM i' w a < d H Mists C `- ��p cO L •• i 0 z011 Z W -� J S S S INN I. w J gp HIPER M 110 11111 33S :3NIIHD1VW mm"7. . . . . . n� , EJ r I m r ^I =r I v r I r. I I _ I I I m I I \' I J m EJ�" I I I E I � I I I V I I I I r3 C I I \ I � II I I I I � f3 I I I I II f� I �,a I c �I I / I I bZO 133HS 33S :3NIIHO1VW saoin ag suuaawsu3jo uawyeda° inakvi iNI0f'R N0U33S 1N3W3AVd 'Cj oo C:) sia3iH3H SVX31 o Qm �� wP USIlHOSndHOO10AJJ0 9ltLXi�isldHosnddoo'da 83doaoNNMMZaLLIE i w ���ES z3aiWva I a3Naru 6 3SHHdSH SA3n3A0?JdWI MVd 3b040WW00 N U Noudiaosea ee eiva oN Nasn3a Houma— we aiva INNoisV3a CM Lu Lu cm W -� Nil he o� wPER gp HIM 1 i 970 133HS 33S :3NIIHO1VW J3s saainJa 6uuaauIBU3 jo 4uawyeda4 iy o� pu s NVId ONIGVd J0 =O h r s i o 3 i°`I°°H 3 H m v SVX31 o Q USIlHOSndHOO10AiI9 9ltLXilisldHOsnddo0'daS3doaowwMMZo L =v jai' z3aiWvs I nNsm &, a £ � LIE 3SVHd a SA3n3ffi JdWl MVd 32J000WW00 N U Noudiaosea ee eiva 'oN Nasn3a Nouaiaosaa we eiw 'oN Nois�3a CM LU 16 �O z 2b cm W g w e - o w8 K �� m, JU g^ 970 133HS 33S :3NIIHO1VW I Y I v i o - I \Oo fig a Iwi , '.. 'I it - ---- ----- T - ---— --------- - n ug. — — J Na z - -.. di, 6uuaaui6u3 jo 4uawyedad o iy � saainaa s NVId ONIGVd J0 ' _O n m �� ..$,i a 3 i„,H.j n v SVX31 o Q Ch NN � z3aiwva I aaNaru liSIHHOSndHOO10AlIO 9I,tLXilislaHDSnaaoo'aa9380(101 MZal� =v m _p 6 3SVHd a IMIIIM SA3W3ffi JdWl Ai JHd 3KOOMOO N U NOUI osea ee eiva ou lvaanaa rvoI ea eiw oN Noisv\ea CM j S E L ep Lu W zo 3 Z U 13 (7 R IN R g v 5 8 6 z z a' L J 5 Ree J l E W 673 133HS 33S :3NIIHO1VW — I zll // h I a � E. _ ^ / \ .6_ I 1. \ /- •" Sty —00'6 � / / � l: I / L'ZO 133HS 33S :3NIIHO1VW J3s Saainaa 6uuaaui6u3 jo 4uawyedad iy o� e s NVId ONIGVd J0 ' _O n MIME 1 83Nvni liSIHH0 S d L HOO 10 AlIO 9lt Xilisla aa a HDSnoD'aS3aoaOVgNM MZal c i o Ci o =4 6 3SVHd a SA3W3ffi JdWl Ai JVd 32JOOOWWOO N U NOUI osea ee eiva ou Naan3a NOAH saa we eiw oN Noisv\ea Z z f S j s W � p f sue" e d a `g LY z (' w R 6 v g v 5 S 6 cm Z o wm W 5 Roo W d. a a p wBK �� Y g da g / `s� s ism a �i� i --------�i+� d moo oll l 273 133HS 33S :3NIIH01VW J3s Saain�a 6uuaaui6u3 jo 4uawyeda4 iy o� p. s NVId ONIQV2J0 =O , .< SVX31 as S1fi31„ HaaV ¢Ch zN IJSIaH�sndao�>o ul� 9�tLXiiisi3aja� zaaiWva a�Naru aHosnoo'd daa S3aoaowwoozoaa� ¢U 6 3SVHd a S1N3W3A021dWl AdVd 32JOQOWW00 N U Noudiaos3a ee 3ill Nasn3a Noueiaos33 ne 3iw oN NoisN3a Z z S p b W o p w R B v g v B S 6 Z a >- W a w bg J w Eq K O U ix� Q � u8§o P� 1173 133HS 33S :3NIlHOiVW r i -F w � I el 7/1 11� 111A / 0 0 / A � LZO 133HS 33S 3NIlH31VW ®�3s SaainJa 6uuaaui6u3 jo 4uawyeda4 iy o s NVId ONIOV2J0 c =C y � z CO$i a 3iiHa a SVX31 IJSIaHo snaoo Jo uIo a�caxiiisiaHosndaoo' as3aoaowwooaa� r1 z3aiWva a3Naru o a s� 6 3SVHd S1N3W3A021dWl AdVd 32J000WW00 N U Noudiaosea ee sill Nasn3a Nouaia— ne eiw oN NoisN3a CM W o e p o m b b 8 o S Q wm w R 6 A v g v `S S 6 Z — WheI fi 10 � P / 0173 133HS 33S :3NIIHOiVW ^ - E }:S&OIAJ eam!� , ao�\ O _ �mam�GAG ��:„z §ate gl l HOndSmmUg ,« s �z�n� a LIE3ad U Q3A3mdRAq£mOVMo / )UE A m; cm k, d t; Ala: e« § Ui LO � }}! , , \ \ ,« ����� ® ■ } tj \\ ■ � | } saoin ag suuaaulsu3 jo uawyeda° NVId N0ISN3WI(1'80NlGnE)31VNd3iW cNo 'Cr).. i a 3 i„ H'a a v � SVX31 0 Ch raga z3NiWVa I nNaru o a ca xiiisiaHosndaoo'aas3aoaowwoozoza o a o ��a liSIlHO SndHOO 1 ul� 3SVHd N S o - S1N3W3A0?1dWI AdVd 3b040WW00 Noudiaos3a ee 3ivo oN Nasn3a Noueiaos33 we 3iw oNN.iWN3 CM S b W OU LU � p � "m b b $ o S Q Z w R B v g v ESS 6 Z2 co >- W a be wBK �� _ 0 i �00 oo �- w z_ "ZI 4 �e e / CZ0 133HS ]IS 3NllH31VW saoin ag suuaawsu3jo uawyeda° NV' d d3M3S Mp. O1S 31MJ3ilV cNo �� �O R s i a 3,i„,H.s a v SVX31 a ch r ig' z321iWvs I nNaru o a ca xiiisiaHosndaoo'aas3aoaowwoozoza o a o liSIlHO SndHOO 1 ul� �— ¢� E LIE6 3SHHd N C) - S1N3n3ffi?JdWI MVd 3b040WW0O Noudiaos3a ee 3ill Nasn3a Houma— ON NW A3a gud CM LU 0LU u p Es 63 W a =° LLJ e� / .� j ®�3s S&3I a 6uuaaui6u3 jo 4uawyeda4 Cj o �� s NVId 3SVNIV'dG =O o � SVX31 - g s 5 1 9 3 1., H.3 H V Q co zN ihc' z�1WVS I a3Naru o a�ca�xiilsiaHosndaoo'das3aoaowwoozoaa� � I1sIaH�sndao�> ul� o ¢ULIE 3SVHd a SA3W3ffi?JdWI MVd 3b040WW0O N U Noudiaosea ee eivaoN Nasn3a Nouaiaosaa we eiwoN Nois�3a cm o Whe o p Uj i if 2 yy i N -xx8�8 N6x .0000 22 :E n - - w M m aom o t ; 9 rc'E 6�� Emn J 5 8 E E Elf a d 161 oatiti D E Eat o mx mw mho lo �► / >1 (� //�/ T s� -` � �a �� s�8�o� III � a 1► s qw= _<Y � $i ���" �Hfig HE FiF saainJag 6uuaaui6u3 jo 4uawyeda4 Nb'ld Cj SVX31 NOUN3A321d NOiin7Od a31VM M101S O Z3211wvs 183N8fl1 I1 NHO SndHOO l0 AJJO a ca xiiisiaHosndaoo'aas3aoaowwo zoza rn o a o a� eg 6 3SVHd g �£,Mfl U a��s�p, SA3W3ffi?JdWI MVd 3b000WWOO N NUIMI sea ee eiva oN Nasn3a Nouaiaosaa we eiw oN Nois�3a Z z LU 77 @ � ON .MUNK ; b mpg„; _ .firma - __' _ _— M d € € 3 € atl.E saoinaa buuaaui6u3 jo juowueda4 0 s S1IV13G E)NIAVd g��® s i 3 i H s a tl,. SVX31 0 �O� �cC) <a�; Z3aIWva a3Naru 13WHOSndHOOPAiIO sos xiusiaH snaao 'aas3aoaoNiwoozoza i w 3SVHd S1N3W3AObdWI MVd 32i040WW0O N011dla�s3a 19 7— 'ONWM7d Ndidld—a 11 1111 IN N1111A Wro 111N-1 now szozzo ea �o cm a 3 Z F �a=o ma< z C7 z ua g Z= z qua V a- "V u�3aan a�a 3dd tiw �n it - o�.N ao......a u� o c =a 06 r® as 3 o a 3 e I 1 *pj g �s n ngi gg MM Is a� a<NEN a 1!mo I � o mlo 9a8y���� �g` $3n®eaa �p a 9 f5 S�IV13O O IVONV1S SaainJa 6uuaauIBU3 jo luowyeda4 iy o� 5 1N3W3AVd H3KN00 co O n „qJ USIa Hn Sndaon Ho ulo .5 i,�.3 al,,,H- _a,�< SVX31 a CO <v76 raa� Z3NIWVS 183NN11L o a�ca�xiiisiaHosndaoo'aas3aoaowwoozoaa� o way`° ilsiaH�sndao� ui� 6 3SVHd SA3W3ffi?JdWI MVd 3b000WW0O N U Noudiaosea ee eiva oNNasn3a Nouaiaosaa we eiw oN Noisvv3a Z t3 a W W o INIIIAII w — ..ro/�— 7, s'3NrsiHi LLJ .oit o. I> 2 > ap 3 OJ o d- m3N � LL3 m sw� -- m a W a"oQo - �a > Q) Q Vi LLJ uais o Q) m"s M u t tu LIA WWo v �y cQi 2 ti --A v W — — abA -- p saainaaSsuuaauisu3jo4uawyeda4 S�IV13(l 42JVONV1S )NM3AR14 $ IlSldHH snddoo HO uIS CO z O n s 1 a 3 iH,3 a v SVX31 CM I1SIHHO S1dHOO to Ally a ca xiiisiaHosndaoo'aas3aoaowwoozoza C� i <v m � $E z3aiWva a3Nani LIE6 3SHHd N a SA3W3ffi?JdWI MVd 3b040WW0O N U Noudiaosea 1e 7— ON Nasa3a Noiidiaosaa we eiw oN Noisv\ea �y C9 o>_ W o e p o v LiJ .tea. Z > LU a R' 00 � a 00 Q Q Uo-e $p oQz_ mpw= m Wd Eta 3w =ko a�o o�aaW Z~ opm N o�?� zv N n < n io n m F O s CB) 53I B) (1tln5n) NNM3015 5 0) ( ()n (5)S iN � a0i OD3a Sv p — � (a3alno3a A44 s 3ai Ova 'NIw Hill 4e p W Q� O CZ Wh s i �N 44 W? ' t4 Ll I I I-13 of VA 2Joz ®� saainJaSbuuaauibu3jo4uawyedao S�Ni3O (18VONV1S ),VM3AI80 o cj Q r IlSR1HO Sf1d2J0o j0:.Llo z s 1 3 31..,H a N O' \ SVX31 0 Cy.) U Z3211WVS 83Na11L I1SIbHO SfldaOO to Ally a tL Xi iglaHD sn&iog d(I S38000MM zoza o i w =v n Q IE 6 3SVHd " a lYl�V1 S1N31A3A0?1dWI MVd 3b040WW00 N U Noudiaosaa ee aiea oN Nasn3a NOUINDsaa we aira oN Nois�3a Z z W o _ W VLLA 0 p he tq - / a Q 0 > Rgc V W W W�� Y 0 sZ Q W W III. 0 Zo W Q ° TI V V s � o IIII Z 0 y o cdw Q o � 9 9 3 6w 3owZ �_ 1 0 IT^ 3--Odd x a _ V Q W 0 - � otk 0 \ C y W Z - -LLL IN--- - - -- ® IR J w - =kaao �o o � G;� , gm« / 3 El m&m ` u/v z\a g (yg �s1 � H�\ ,«z_« ams wR +�Q+omUo ° � \�LIE- rlad \ }U � & Q3A3 mdVll Aq£mOVM o cm - LU � � - -� �LU 2 r;, z - -:, ` - \\-- - - - ten !!!\ \a a 44 \: 2 44 « _ ? % - o r $_ - - K W _ � ) _ � - ° \ - 4 y � \ .A—,IINI < _ : R � _ ®�£4 SlIV134 GaVGNV1S z saainJas 6upaaw6u3 4o yuawpedap c'V o 1iIVM341S ONV a311f10 `8bflo CoM o ' 4 ra �.i..,H a e SVX31 usiaHo sndaoo so ua z O v m F Ta a z3alWtla l a3Naf1L IlSNHO Sf1dd0010 idlO CO a aazxilislaHosnaaoo'aasaaoaowwoozozr N 1 3SVHd a a S1N3N3AObdNIAdVd3b040NNOO N U NoiidiWs30 ns 3iVa oNNoia— Noiidiaas30 ns 3ieaoN NoisiN3a - - w Z z - LLJ LU N z8� A— 5 cn LU W LU W o "" LU o& o x� In a si s3iavn um I.t F k 2g 3a Lu `�� N� � za Z � co o o m a mw o to � d a - V LLI m m y y LU a W ��� LU op xF� a - W J W LLI cFi G d z nh — 40 sn W z Q - F 8 y3easayB1 x W �3 ass j r W o� V FLLI W aim pZJ P di J O e O H co ��----yy Q _ � u x ��� N t� t7 W J O dz ao/ z OQ v QO Z — ~� a *'XI .11 -��- Q - 0 s-. LU LLI W en W g 6 z 19 r a co a w 7c co CL a co J 7 W s� F M J Q t9 W \ F <li WQ J ~ Ci C1 t7 dS d a W _ d z - 7 gp SaoinJas 6uuaaui6u3 jo 4uawyeda4 SI IVE U y aVGNHIS dWHb 8?m NVNiS343d s 1 a `� _ " n 3 H i a's v SVX31 o a Cr) USIHHOSndHOO10AAO 9ltLXiislaHDsndao dJS3aoaowMMMZbl i w MUMS I H3NIML� 3SHHd "9 S1N3W3A0?1dWI AdVd 3b040WW0O N U Noudiaos3a ee 31v9oN Nasn3a Nouaiaos3a we 31w oN NoisN3a Z z W o 'gip Z � � a Z W a z J �Be Y >1.dV '.dWtla 9an9 G e ,a?vas e„_.aa�,.a�3�o�awuo`o Z 59aV9NII 11V 11 § SVX31 _ Vr S3a3d usaHo sndaoo 3o uio B i SVX31 _ Nvmis3a3d 1saH9> aoa-- I151aHO snaaoJ I1SIaHda00 1 30 ADD \TJ N 100 AlIJSl1 "Yy �a - a. m&� m b " �°b g�yas E cg gp ba e .. A a s a E•F "pga5 a� NOemg Y 8 5 _ cccc cc¢ 42�� FFF ,d§ N d g?g2yg� �n � & ggab jL d£g I i a g _I w p g°' 1p SaoinJaS6uuaaui6u3joluawyada4 SIIVEa y r `o _o aVGNVIS dWVd am NVNiS343d$1 a a v COSVX31 USIHHOSndHOO>o AAO " a tL xiiisiaHosndoo'aas3aoaowooza MUMS S3Nau =4 6 3SVHd N ._a U S1N3W3A0?JdWI AbVd 3b040WW00 N NUIMI 3a ee 3ibo oN Nasn3a Nouaiaos3a we 31w oN Noisin3a Z W o 'gip Z Z W n Q J �Be 0 U o-p - "iB" - > SatlbaNblS drvtlH Bilfl� , ....� SVX31 Ntl N15303d 15 i1H�Sf1dY0�JO All a m I1s1aH., I151aH0 Snda00 j0 A110 �?Eg H p7 8 �� It w d m it Mli z ! oq� � 9pc & !� 5 •� t 3 Jo L �p saainaaS6uuaaui6u3jo4uawyedaa STVi30 (h]VONViS a31VM WbOlS c j usiauo sndaoo do iio 1 O m s i a 3'i i H°3 a v SVX31 0 CO ;yap; Z3 IMS I H3NVn1� USIHHO SndHOO 10 AiIO awaZxiusiaHOsndd0r)dUS3aoa0NIAMzWda co CV =4 6 3SVHd U U SA3W3ffi?JdWI Ai JVd 3b000WW00 N rvoudiass3a ne 3iaaory rvaa,�a rvoudia:,s3a ne 3iyaory rvoisvaa cm Z WLU e p Z LZ 5 -_ A NI om "� - o ly >' g =§p 411, IS �p N arv.9®.ON.fd F�7L- m _ LL- - mN�Nm=" W� - p ottco - og 44 � LIQ m oa o V\N koz ma zQ wp o-4 o LL y = � a = £A0 Z �p SaainaaS6uuaaui6u3jo4uawyedaa STV130 (1dVONV1S a31VM WbOlS c j o 2 $VX31 aao sndaoo do uio C4 2 Q 76 1 9 3 1 hH 3 H V Q <v raH Z3NIWVS I83NN11L o a)ca�xlilsiaHosndaoo'aas3aoaowwoozoaa) a iiSIHHO SndHOO ,w� £ $ LIE 3SVHd SA3W3ffi?JdWI MVd 3b000WW0O N U NOLLdIa0930 AA Sill 'oN Naa43a NOI1dItlDs30 AA 31b0 'oN N0191A3a Z z age a o � 71CS 4E -. �44 ®g s z Qo �v ('x -zi) �Qo oaKo6 - seiavn. „s - - - meow�mgwJ Qya� ® a�g3oN Zo 124 �g ON - a U o O _ V z � <K��=o AE wo .a sN Go LNIA o � o 44 14 w - Q u� L or =a is � - - �� C Jo£ �p Sa011 Bull jo4uawyedaa SIIV13O ObVONV1S 831VM N80iS c j usiaHo sndaoo Ho uio � O o s i a 3'i H�a v SVX31 C`7 Z3 IMS I MNan1 0 8168LXiUSIaHDSndaOJ'aa33a0a0Ww07) oWal, o a � I1sIaH�sndao�> ul� o a ,vea U U 3SdHd SJ.N3W3ffi?JdWI AWd 3b0O0WW0O N rvoudiass3a ne 3iaaory rvaa,�a rvoudia:,s3a ne 3iyaory rvoisvaa LU Z U W 5 _ 54 �m o m s g � a go W F� mm g� ogm m a "'aaoarysm x14 §o Z sw a wok 2 omm�oo www o19s 4 �W 44 eaoo�o 0 �ZG 0 n ¢�oN� 0 Q i\ d ao ` h� J 4 VV Cl- 14 �0 3ae35,�� R e �>?> IR ——IA -oz 9 y A A womw so _az � 4-4 j�, �m 0 Q Q y _ O It14 W .c—.a £AO C ®�gp saainag6uuaaui6u3jo uawyedaa STV13G OaHONV1S N o� NO1N3A32Jd N011f1-nOd 2J31VM WbO1S co O n SVX31 o LSII Ho sndaoo Ho u sioaiiHaaV �Ch Z3111WVS I 83N81u awa�xiiisiaHosndaoo'aas3aoaowwoozoaa� ilsiaH�sndao�>0 ui� 6 3SVHd SA3W3ffi?JdWI MVd 3b000VMOO U NUIMI sea ee 7— oNNasa3a Nouaiaosaa we eiw oN Nois�3a cm Z _ Z z ¢ 4w o W _ O 6 Rgo ka G Imo. §o u ti =o V o off&p �€ n€ o -- - w y <m o00 0� - ea Lu �W cc o �W y z�3 _ _ - °�a° � ccO �=Lu S _ I VI dIN CL p< z E. � - 2 ti -M 2 4 w m J ; o p saainaas suuaauisu3jojuawpedaa 1 3SVHd-NV]d NOliVGNf103 311SOdW00 _ m o 331H]av I SHX31 0 c si o Z3NI1 I83NUM 11SIUHOsndHOOlOh O KtRZ LMHasndBooHosi2oaomnozozYL m ? o m 6 3SHHd p U S1N3W3A02dhl)idVd 3dOGOVINOO NOI1dIa0s30 ea 31tl0 'ON NJI11M N011dlUDS30 A9 3 0 ON NOIS13a o \ m w A'69 A',£I w \ 0 m L— L �I —— —— L L L \I I I I L 11 L LI L L ii L �I \ LL—L = L—LL II II I I L L L II a - I I II II II II I I z L —L L—_ L -I L L z __ __ O LL L L LL �I 4 LL—L — Lt L � L ------------ L L _LL I L ° ° p� I II II II II I ILI II II II II I I II II II II I II LI II II LI I I ®Fg I LL L L — L— = IF L= L -IF =L LL—LL F _ II II —_LL LL—_LL FT —� LL—_LL F_� � II II II II I I I II II I I LL LL LL L L. L LL LL L— I -IF -IF LL LL LT L Lr LL L I I II II II II I I I I II II I I I LL LL T __ LL LL _ L LI L LI L L LI LI L L L �I LLL LL LL L L LL LL L— =�L LL LL L =L Lr Lr L II II — II I,— 1 II — II —�—� I I II L L L L L II II II I I I I II II I I I L L LL—LL L— I � L IL LI IL LI IL LI L L IL LI IL LI IL LL =-IF—LL—LL—LLT -IF---]L—-IL—LL—� I I I II II II II I I L—LL—LL—LL— L II_LL—LL—LL—LL—L � o � m o � m A,b9 A',69 z :o-sz i saainaag suuaauisu3 jo juawpedaa 13SVHd-NV]d NOliV(]Nn03 NOIIIAVd Cj _ � m z� o S 13 3 1 1 H]H v \ I SVX31 o s C F MI UM 1 8311481111 I1SIIHHO sndHOO to uWO KtRZ 'I1SIeH snda0o HosiaoaomnoozozYI M w 6 3SVHd M S1N3W3A02dW1)idVd 3dOGOVINOO p U NOI1dIa0s30 Aa 31tl0 'ON NMIR NOl lo53Q A9 3 0 ON NOINUa A I9 4 -- —�r--- —�r— -- r— --- N O gLU zz- H Q o dao LU B51 P�51 ASI .951 I z < ,.. u�i z \ � IIII IIII IIII / � -- — ————— ———— Z! _s Ido N E3 d� —__ -__`� �' III -11 MPH A,9 _ \ /§/ IIII IIII III III, — IIII IIII O m saainaag suuaauisu3 jo juawpedaa 13SVHd-NVld NOUVONf103 Sldf100 SINN31 � _ m o IWtl21 i e a a v I SHX31 0 S 1 I1SIaHO SUM31 MIO M o nd 183NUAL O ewa�xi'usiaeesnaaooaasaaoaowwoazosb� I.3SHHd d CDS1N3W3A0ddWl)4dVd 3dOGOVINOO p NMI.— AB 31tl0 'ON NMIR NOLLdl8— AB 31V0 'ON NOIS1 tl R mail 951 3® - sago 'i ��� mo ——————————————————————————————Ej w 0 m _w ------ L------------------ --- ---�---- ---�-- -J I II a II II I I I II - II II a II I 1 I I I I 1 ----J=----==m---=L----==---1 1 =L---J=----=L— ---- 1 H W I N ---- — -- --- ---- Illy— J--=-1 Ir----I I- — F----� - 1 I II - " I I I j ---- r- -- r --- r---- ---r �rt--- ----Ir----IF--- F----� I I I I I 1 III II °_ II III 1 I I I II "� II H II II I 1 II 1 I I I II II I I I ---- r- --IF --IF----I�---i ----1 ----Ir--- IF---- ----� Q I II II II II 1 I I I II II I I I � - I I H I I I I - ° z O § --——LL- ---IF— --IF---- r---1 j———L — ---- --- C) I I II II ° II II I I I II II H I I I � I I II II II II I I I N I II II I I I � j ---- r- --IF --Ir---- F---� �J -- ---_Ir----IF---- ----� N_ O I I ° II I I I I II II ° I I I v II N° jJL—_ --JLN---JL---- L--- — —L ---JL----JL---- L---- j w� ® T�IL xz ---- — -- g-- ---- ---j �j--- ---�r---- --- �----� _ I I I II I I I II - II II ° II I I I I II II II II I I I II II II II I I JL----JL —JL----JL-- L J---JL---JL----JL---- L---- � 1 1 1 II II II II I 1 II o _ I II II II 4 II I I I I II II II II - I II II II II I I I l .7b9 .049 A 921 _z o si saainaag buuaaui6u3 jo juawpedap 13SVHd N o wv�I a3ri Ndld NOIlH4NflOd S1Hf10�11H83 SHX11 1A01d `� o 21 UM 11SIHHO sndHOO to A110 KtRZ '�1s�aHasndBoo Ho M w z3ai 6 3SHHd co S1N3W3AOddIA1)4dVd 3d000WWOO p U NOI1dIa0s30 Aa 31tl0 'ON NMI— NOII A9 3 0 ON NOINUa spaµ�_ao�`5 Gom o _ ag eu _ -------------------- 0 0 m A,b9 I - I ———— —— :6 —— b b I ° I I I Z § r----�r----rt----7Ir b � — --�--- ----�---� OLL- a II I I ~ I II � II II II II III "� �' II I I p m U —m --LF ---1 ---- -- r— J " m H Wa J� vOL- o -- —L I 1 B---�I -- --- 1 I1 1 L I - I - I - I I I I I N I I I I I II a II I I _ I NI I I II -„ II II m II I I ----- ------- �---� -- —J I a II I I I I ---I -1F----JF----JF- L---- I ------------------------------- UJ l I m ®/� ��& �mgomGz_ : gAd a : � E, S< \ ^ z/^\ @. agl -m2e$AGao:9AmHmNamAd ma� ' | AmmUo = : =wm�=z ® ! � » IgAd * [ � 2 QgmnKwAd 3dmoaw0 : ) UE \§(� / m § \ � , GNIXw 9 Pi I j3 CO , \ wmw'j 6 \ ` \ 92 (; - § 5§§ ! /( )ft2 ) - § \ (/\(\(}/\}\\ ; \ : _ . \} \\ ! (; :\ �:( z o s i , saainaaS buuaauibu]joluawpeda0 13SVHd-SNHld 9NIAV2H N o w d SHX31 dNV NOIldONnoi AdI01HA213S80(189 `� o cn I o a in Z38IMB 183NUM I1SIUHO SfldHOO lO AlIO KtRZxi IiMHasndBoo Hosi2oaowwoozozYL m d o 6 3SHHd p U S1N3W3A02dWI)idVd 3dOGOANOO NOI1dIa0s30 ea 31tl0 'ON NMIR NOIAUDS30 AB 31V0 'ON NOISI3a s E-5 Eo9 1 W 1 `a 0 ozo� 1Co2 �P w - o� W �NLs3` 1 p§ - I r m � m ®�6 3 9� b� C� Z_ 1 I I I p I I IL 1 - } I I � 0 Q � 1 W 1 � ®�s 3 z N w w Q w w 0 O ea p I _ I p oe W T) <w 2 g I L - I _ y w - I 12 saainaag 6uuaaui6u3 jo juawpedap Sllb'13a N011'dONf10d N w SHX31 m Ilsla HJ sndaoJ to hll� KtRZXi IeHasndeoo LID siPoaowwoo ZOLYI CC) , m Z3NIW B 183NUni _ 6 3SHHd M S1N3W3A02dhl)idVd 3dOGOVINOO p U NOI1dIa0530 ea 31tl0 'ON NgsI/da NOlI 19 31V0 'ON N0MUN tz O 1 JII i T HI :� •..�':aP� R ".i °�Ir 1• F I d HIa .� I;Iu17 � � O 23 N A-E tc m 8a - w 3 G' awWwL m I Y N „� b U z a �il �2 lllillll III I Z N A,2 O o F W 3 02 IaTEF H � N � Y jf g O mgiE w II I g b O `3w =� o 92 In W '1 Wi �lk CID QFA u U D In Ic j 8 o C z III IaIEF m g a3BwY 's tR ry oLn � Q SaOIAMS »juaw : gI ±V2No»UmiCj \ z 33 1H0M agl \R / »2 :, �a,�! lmgosamgm Uo _.: =wm�_ n IgAd 7 [ � 7 QgmnKwAd 3dmoaw0 : ) UE \\/ > ( /§q®q - � y«t/ gf & \( ,§ / 5a // \!§) \ ^ \ - )/ 3:. § } w§y e � © N \ § / d ,re = 2e® §r§ k \ \# Ln saOIAMS buuaauibu3 jo juawpedap Sllb'1340N1 Wt/d3 N 1 33 IHaa C 11v SHX31 s co g ? Z3N 1213N21fSl 11SIUHOSfldHOOlOA11O ewaZxi'lislaeesnaaooaas3aoaowwoazozrol o m 6 3SHHd p U S1N3VA]AOddW1)4dVd 32i040WW00 NOI1dIa0s30 ea 31tl0 'ON NMIR NOIAUD530 AB 31V0 'ONN015— s 10 u��'i<y U "..µPS•" 'NIW.Z11 I NIW DUI I 6 0� � d 35alaino a 3 tl19NJI VCHMM 5 S o W 8 03NN193d'Stl NL9N�I WNWINIW I I I I lY ,1 I 1 I I j e �.y-T. III-I � I t rt a 1 j � 1 I Z 1 1 z U I I I I W CV �" } K r� m s I/ a� Ln ,I 1 1 =5 ca o� I � s s Z3 ohs saainaaS buuaauibu3 jo juawpedap S310N 1b^d3N30 N o s SHX31 11Wtl21 i e a a v co �� m Z3N 213N21fSl MHO Sfldij03 W MM ewa�xi'usiaeesnaaoo aasaaoaowwoazosro� w 6 3SHHd S1N3W3A02dW1)4dVd 32i040WW00 U NOI1dIa0s30 ea 31tl0 'ON WWR NOLLdl ll AB 3 0 ON NOIS13a 00 w w !Nit f4 in 09 UP �Z HE I'M 1 MRNO- sm -22 P fill 3 r r r r r - - Pm _ - - _ - LLE _ aN _w 5 o� 2' — At - -- - - _ll if y�_ -- il v8rnq - _ 11, - _ m€� &m u a � l - �e -� as on a ?it sa VIA 22 ze d8 �dsd Poo 102 o p Baas ao�� LLa o_ _ E iEaa a aaa €8m _ 'LU to ➢H��= ➢l -- _ _ ESA 9�L HUSH 1 HIMs 8P 9 d & 2' _- _ - _ WHIM _ - = asum -- 82 all a: a dd�'e de �� _ 2� 8 n�Zen a - W S T OTH 2 _ _ A aSH $ t� �9 j so a== �LL may= Vo_ma �-�� a �N V R V =._ Q w_._a e _ -Yg m its 8q 88_ �c fb �o_ o 5A_- - - - de10. aeE =11 = UH lit sd El a a.111 $ �e E€ tita P &- aa6 U. "u" - _ _ _ _ _ --- - - Elio - ---' < - - _- a SaOIAMS »_ : SM NnA»§e \ z 33 1H0M agl \R / :, �a,�! lmgosamgm Uo _.: =wm�_ n IgAd » [ � 7 QgmnKwAd 3dmoaw0 : ) UE \§(� ^ -.66 iE / \ 2 d Q \ 0 _ \ £ e sao!maS buiaaeuibu3;o luamPeda4 b NOLMV430 3AS _ s s.„��.� �,. „a.�, SVX31 o Z3NINVH I IlMm i liSlaH3 SndHOO io ul� e eaexi'lislaeasnauoo aas3uoaawnoazozr o e� J¢ 6 3SVHd 0- & `tau S1N3W3AObdWl MVd 3a000AAOO - NOI1dIWJ53O A9 31H0 'DN NOISIM13il NOid1- AA 31V4 'ON NOISI�3l1 LU IV LU uI- Z 3 w3 a3a \ LLu uI u i o r � ..i M ehmI p I v Q l -- Y l l i I lti1/ k, � c 1 w LU 0 — — saDinaag 6upaaui6u3 yo juamueda4 418 3SVS-NVId 311S 7V?J3A0 1-0 h o SVX31ST S s „3. .H „. I1I ap 6LX1131uH30du0�uus3uuN900ZDh1 YaZi ° awva aaNan i J � o 6 3SHHd o U & `s�3a s S1N3W3AMMINI MVd 32J000AA00 — NOI1dIWJS3D AE 31H0 'DN 4019— N011d121 a AA 31VO 'ONNOIS1— Z'ONUON300V szmu L W o w W w goo _ W - d W O uz w�prcd Woti o� rcsoo a i °zo Q W 0 -000 W ,. Z rm o.5rc r5o_ W In I Y .� u53 53 3 n w Jq W a9go 3N LL�d> Q� N W w Q m ------------- rl �\ x� q 1 1 o � _ m 1 - 0 ------------ 1 l' e �6 mk wiw r a fi; a °o J v M saoinaag 6upaaui6u3 yo juamueda4 SW311 013 31VNb31IV-NVId 31lS IIVN3A0 CT 4 Sco b _ 5.1,33,i..-i.H. IlSIaH�Snd oil u1� z o o o Z3211Wtla 1 a3Naf11 _ _ e�ea�xi'lislaHasnauooaas3uoaowivooaozrr u� S 6'H 1 6 3SVHd S1N3W3AObANI MVd 3a000WW00 U NOI1dIWJ53O A9 31H0 'DN NOISIM13il NOid1- AA 31V4 'ON NOISI�3l1 0 �FL w Q c NN �ao co w rc W w W 5 wLU V w Z Z W z w w = i o�� Q b w ® F W J O r \ W �J ti r N I W a w w Q w a \ w \ \\ L W� dO y\y � j/ s t a c z o I F 1.� e i �rB�oP�wp I LL _. rj �. 0 1 J I f a I � r o 0 1 0 M saoinaag 6upaaui6u3 yo wamueda4 019 3SVO-NVId 311S 03JNVlN3 ns s.„3 3.1 �,. „a.�, SVX31 1-0 TZ a "o Z3NINVH 1213114mm IlSIUHO SndHOD 10 uIO e�eae xi'Iislaea snauoo as s3uoaowivooaozrr co g 6 0 3SVHd 6d 'M 1W N o `tau S1N3W3AObANI MVd 3a000WW00 - NOI1dIWJ53O A9 31H0 'DN NOISIM13il NdidI AA 31V4 'ON NOISI�3l1 F Z Z�ci W W co w w3 �pz o3Y W cl NZ U7 J ~ TFFF a w F m F J lullir 0 W Q � O � 7 F J m a YO W U_U � J J a Q III- Z fO II a w LU III � d Y J J U O a9 w s z, YO z=LU y U WN— a M r 4 F U u7 Z W f R' Q EL O xo V 0 W- Z Z aw W Z,a, ~ W ti N WmaS bupaaui6u3 yo luawPeda4 SN311 019 31t/N?OiW-NHId 311S 019?]/ N3 ssvul� b O "e'i o"3`11 N 7 ` 0 IlSIaH�Sf1da0�1 ALIT c? Z3NINVH 1 H3Nmni. _ _ e�eae xi'1islaeo snduoo as s3uoaowwooaozrr r� 6 3SVHd S1Nlh]AM AI MVd 3b000WW00 U NOI1dIWJ530 19 31H0 'ON N019,- Ndid1i1 a AA 31tld 'ON NOISIA3l1 Z = ED W � Y op - g �p rya _ W Y � i m W Z W YO U U a � U m W J J Y J U Q� a m iE � z J� �YO U_ a a o cW7 =' Jw Z W% r eiano���ve�n�a a z .o zs .o� W H ' � W Q "S Z W J Q N U Z � Z O Z - U F N Z Z Z Q W J r a wN N SBD!AJaS bupaeu!bu3;o yuewpeda4 SlIVAG MIS N o oN °ss s .1,3,31,IH. „a. SVX31 zaaiwda I Mimi Snda0D l0 u10 31t,Lxi UI9HO SndHOD'aa 33bOODINNOO Z0Zh1 o , 6 3SVHd o U S1N3W3A0bdWI MVd 3a000WW00 - NOI1dIWJ53O NOII A9 31VD 'ON N0151�3i1 Z'ON NnON300V SZ/LZ/8 L R. _ 5 = z= - W LL n pq p � Y Z 'I Z � O J O K , J ' IIIIII Q C - x I III � U z = a s U a 6 l o G IIII w a c9 Y zT LLz III Z Z - J Q w - = (IIIIII W 00 J'.III r I IMA I III III I I OH. — H "h c -a w O — U J F ' U Z r W o =W cl I ILL ^III III O J o CC J9 — O' = ag sash � gg �'� 11 y � _ -Z � I o W z I II I� III IIII I I' c� _ y 1 �IIII III—III— Y 1 Q — _ - z aLa L � - Qw - ¢w J.'. ¢� I1 III—III U t0 N - _ �4 d m m 6. J e - C9 €y W Ye �9W — ¢ C9 d � III - u 3 Z r l 11 t9 _m IIIIIIIIII II 111> —III III III- Z o z°N QN UN � III SaopdaS buiaaauibu3;o luamPeda4 Z#h311018 31VNd31IV 0 _ -NVId JOMJi 8 NVId dOOI1 NOIIIAVd z a a P+o z3aiwva I a3rianl IlSIHHB Snd oo to u1�It 8 6s X saH s�dtio�'aa53 oaov•o ZOZe v 3SVHd o U S1Nlh]AObdW1 MWI 3b000NNOO - NdidIWJ534 AA 31H0 'ON NOISIM13H NdidI- AA 31tld 'ON NOISIA3l1 NLU W �poko_ a - _ a3 z y � { n G . 41f ? p W F k r $ Z W J Q � J 9 a O O LL O_ V aN 11' T LU w LU m Q z LU w w� a O O K z9 O' J m aN N sao!maS buiaaeuibu3;o luamPed< Z# ci o °se SVX31 W311 418 31VM311V SNOIlVA3l3 NOIIIAVd `o = p hNo S10311H atl \ I cn 11s1aHo sndaoo�o u10 MU Xi LSIbHOsndb00 doS3b0001N1+100ZRZh O o 1 z¢ a o e zaaiwva I aaNanl T g 0- 6 36VHd N o U S1N3W3AObANI MVd 3a000WW00 - N011dlig534 A9 31H0 'DN NOISIM13b NOI1d1— AA 31V4 'ON NOISI�3l1 WLU — o LL Y _ Q %3o wmti�wa Q Sazgaz Q a Y O H w J, W Sa 2 w Z o 0 0 0 I Z Z I J J a > a a Z Z o jI.o > ; W. wo J� J- W W, I Z ° e a a Z O I H a w w x-� F �w W. CV l ; 0 saopdaS bunauibu3;o juamPed< Z#h31l 019 CT4yb SVX31 31VM311V-SlIV130'2SNOIlO3SN01lIAVd `0 = o "S 1 3 3`11 H a a' IlSIaHO Sf1da001 lLl� 0 Mee Xi'LL3�aHOsnduoD do 33aoaowwoOZRz Z3NINVH I a3Nanl _ �, 3SVHd U SAIIAIAObdW1 MVd 3b000NNOO NOI1dIWJ534 AA 31H0 'ON NOISIM13H NOl AA 31tlO 'ON NOISIA3l1 �z 99 gI �rc a �a5tw �z� 'oojrc _ O f \/ w \\\ >o \/\ W r /wvi/vvi/vvi� o U N Lu (9 j I = =1 III N - -- m w LU z It z J_ Q �N F W a w �y J Q O J �w Q m c H �� Y saopdaS buiaaeuibu3;o juamPed< SNOUVA3l3 Mal '8 NVId 21001d AdOiVAd3S80(188 D p � _o ° r sio3iiH�av s z CV cT r■ IiSIHHo sndaoo jo ulo 9l6 X1'11SINHOsndbo D'dn3e000WW0'JZOZ6 (v o �j m Q o =a zaaiwva I aaNanl ` CL 2 3SVHd $U S�� 5 S1N3W3AObdWl MVd 3b000WNOO - NOI1dIig530 1B 31tl0 'ON N0131M13N NOI1dI-co A3 31tlD 'ON NOISIA3il \`z � 3 z _ z EN a.- J J _ a. LU Y O ww� o aw o o.y '.po' rcmrcm J mLEH Q Q w w mo mo �a Of' mN m o Ic o Q W U ,a s,e W W IL 03 m y m O W O K a ❑ m O z z o Q O Q h w j w 03 W W'v Jq m J w O — � ❑z tnw Kw Q WN ZN _ - W op a Lu LU e o c ❑ of � m LU m -gip Z NI z o� 0 0 = y O_ — J � H Q L! ® W W- J ❑. Jv W° g OW w_ =o U- yw 7w z w w< of W a 0= - CO Fin M saoinaag 6upaaui6u3 yo wamueda4 SlIV130 a SNOLOIS A?JOlVA?JIS80 089 co ns s.13,3,i_I.H. „a. SVX31 0 � � CV m Y d r ■ IlSIIiH�Sf1da0�io Ally MU Xi'I1sIa HO sndHoD as s3bOOONNOO ZRzh o) o �1 z¢ o y6� W Z3211Wtla 1213Naf11 _= 6 3SVHd 1 0- S1NINIAMMINI MVd]2J000WAOO �, U NOI1dIWJ53O A9 31H0 'DN NOISIM13il NdidI AA 31V4 'ON NDISI�3a 3 Z w Oap w� a w w3 — K i#�po�p a=Fopa m MIT MK4VH F _ W �_ 3 ja Q —_z s _ w rc_ _ -� v o - m —O — J J o Al a - a 'w 3 3 - w I I 0 0 1II1I1 0 w, y v v y q m Ory g O O im s It r .. IIIIIIIII � III -r J W 'I in w N N 3 z o arc Z w o � c p � LU z - 3 In � � =IIIIIIIII- � O o 0 p g > — > [ > z yLU � s o a LU w O" 011 w C w I — mS s�a�nnv.xaoao � � — N El J F O oo IIIIIIIII. 3�S 35Y 2 W 3 $ M Z 2 0 5 C7 Z U m — W 2 _-to �III O O '=O _ =III=w _ �= m4 € m4F1 — 1I P m swi E M I = saoinaag 6upaaui6u3 yo tuamueda4 0NnO0 19),Vld-Wd 31lS 039dVlN3 1-0 ns ho o Q�s b+Y e s.13,3,i_I.H. „a. SVX31 0 �"' m Y d r ■ IlSIIiH�Sf1da0�io�lll� MU Xi'1s�a HO sndHoD as s3bOOONNOO ZRzh , o �j z¢ o y6� W Z3211Wtla 1213Naf11 _= 6 3SVHd 0 S1N3W3AObANI MVd 3a000WW00 �, U NOIidIWJ53O A9 31H0 'DN NOISIM13il NOidI- AA 31V4 'ON NDISI�3l1 w y _z ¢ z F o W c.o�o 0 _ 3ea // .�___ 7 LU z - -pp w --; a6 a oo - LU - �o z - C9 y $ ` P i i x e�i C i i x 6`6` d FF# ; &43 6fia ${ti{ll 0 rd d NLLJ i�fif a, It T j$[[;fyffi a Efi�fiF at°gg f!$ifl$ $ LL a a e#$lie3 U of; c[ ##B Qua[ "l IMI Jilt fp d4t$ dtF# 9$3 � a�f=ff i 1 [1 3i �tftff af$dif±! [l#$ a fa#�fill 'O [ifiti[ o #$ti'•i�l 3 �ii$ ff t$i$}` 8 f�FaFa$�a�ag a �$fg$t$xtf fy9i•#i1# $ saoinaag 6uiaaaui6u3;o;uamueda4 1N3VIM03 ONnodoAVId ns 1�0 s.„��.� ��1 SVX31 _ O h�1i m Y d r ■ IlSIIiHO Sf1da00 io AlIO MU Xi'1s�a HO sndHoD as s3bOOONNOO ZRzh Z3NINVH 121314mm _= 6 3SVHd S1NINIAM INI MVd 3�J000AA00 �, U NOIidIWJ53O A9 31H0 'DN NOISIM13il NdidI- AA 31V4 'ON NDISI�3l1 =w� N�c p i wpd <ow� _� 3fi�ffiY N i'i� 2. ie 1100, o a. a SEES Bid i f i �ggii i yjY j y Y 2 ke B� f9i���3 � �a�m �➢� � g B 3 fi m ra o z" gg 9 9 JJ 5 "0 0 © '� E 9 3 t�i��iid a ® 4 zzo b g a Ye°i1i1i3 a Z {141 e ` {it i� ;{ =rc i iiaifi *�S f� • 4 *aS � • i e 3 list lsf, fE iiifi }�10 Y dt f' f73ftip 9'ffY r "a'�i IL 11ji��i ;'! � �dY y i�gfied( saairuaS 6uuaauIBU3 jo juawliedap SNOUVIAM188`d IVORJ10313 c i _ yF 0 wm $ ......................-, l `w�SVX31 ° a � S1J311 H 3atl w Z3HlHV 1 uni � I IISIHHD sndHOD to All9 OMMuroxasnoo aas3Waowwoozozn (Y 6 Q w e a-3SVHd S1NNOANdVil AlVd 3040WW00 R xouauasao a wo ox xusran r aasm we airs ox xo�a V 9ci 44 ii...... 2 ��°o a a��Ia g �i■W , w o ddo M >pp R5 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 �sz �aF86aaswFEwaaggS �wt3 �qW=. .b "� a� ts� H e Kczzzz x >>? p 56 4 � QY a J � �a Z ga. o0a a a s 8LU 5go@ ad a�aaa=a m Q 6 � w ° � � a $ LJJsue __ a ss�: ewS� � pass €sos 1N= wwwwwwwwww°wwwww LL aR E � Q o $ �a =ii � a. lea m sw°U ° wg$ $ go€ daQ egw $ S.Q.a z z z z. aoo 0000o asoas���i:€a SGOIMaS 6UI OUIBU3 jo juawliedap SIMMS IVOIHI0313 N w m Q r N N S ,..,..,.1 1 .........-. � I St1X31 0 3 R $ S 1 J 3 1 1 H a tl F w �e i Z32lIWtl2! 12l3NLIf11 IISIHHO sndHOD to A119 elreexi usroNasnaaoo aasanoaowwoozozol Q I ISVHd S1NNUANdWI AlVd 32i000WW00 w U rauaipsao .�e ura ox xusran rxrao we airs ox nasu3a V 9ci 00co � W p RLLag h s r �s a s w s co O 4 Z ` 8 _a p U) z wg oa apy a a a a a a �� 3 s g $ i <e€ mg U 0 b pq ® n 0 ® ® o ® ® ® e o W ❑ w r w si Q a q s s a�g�H o 9 s a 4 g� �� . � 4 w � S s w Y 4 a W p3=4 W w R s o B — IS 3 _d Zs 30 uY a g ws 0 z zp a Q 'soy€ s 3 gsgoog <� 3 5g g o cQ $ s a a s p �MP4Fp r U g H a s s F e e s a € atl w U III a U emm,, m ® 0 I [215 R. oq w F SaairuaS 6uuaauIBU3 jo juawliedap O19 3SH8-Ndld 311S]VOIN10313 cm O Now I SVX31 3 R m 0 m $ S 1 J 3 1 1 H a tl 0 w i Z3HlHVd Mum IISIIiHO sndHOO to AIIO 9MLXI'USrdH3Sndtloa HOS3Waowwoozozn 00 o l 3SVHd S1NNUANdW1 AlVd 32i000WWOO w $ U rauauasao .le uraoH xusran Howaxrao7F77Tairsox Hasu3a 1epOY �" p S o �3 z WN „ o p / fir, ■r Zip � < € S�Is'�"a �i■W --4 st I � 5 i o;------------- o . 4, E I - Ir 'II o H tu a5EE $ 0 Nm of x w p .p I of 0 gs 1S HSI=IaMOMS SGOW9S 6waaui6u3 jo juawliedap 018 31VNH311V-NH1d 311S IVORIlO313 F�¢ I SUR $ O S 1 3 3 1 1 H a tl 3 i Z32lIWtl21 1213NLIf11 11SIHH0 sndU0010 A110 elreezl'usroHasndaoo"aas3noaowwoozozol w w l 3SVHd SANUAOHMI>QJVd 3WOOVIW00T. w U rauaipsao ,1e ana "ox xus�aa na�x>sao Ae 31ra oa nasin3a S1K9V1r1'JA110-ZDVMN3Wtl SZOZIL7/80 L Way J HY N a 0 () 9a a Rib A 0 ° � cd 10g ESS _ p o> < € 4� o i fit, ■�ZIN an 30 Ala �°�i■W g O=Wo wQ P 3 LL � �w�. d q w �<. " gum W d m d d O -------------- 0 I pE €„ s / 1 sp 6 3W a 62 \ p &$ FWD In 80 /. Vl Q '1S HSHONOMS m' SGOl ag Bull jo juawpedap N 31M1311V o w I NOI11AVd-SVd HOOI1 WMU0313SVX31 p 513311 H . (Y) i Z32lIWtl21 1213NLIf11 IISIHHO sndHOD to AII� elreezl'1lsroeasndaoo aasanoaowwoozozol w w l 3SVHd SANBAOUMI NbVd 3MIOVINOO w U rauauasao a Una 'oa xus�aa nal�x>sao Ae 31ra oa naslnaa SLIEWWO'JUq-la WfgNa I s=Lzw l �t2 do op w 444 4 m_ o H,2 v q i ss y = rl■��a p 85 Ug n m m m n m 1 dM M Qm it I III m I s U m W I m m m m I I I i I I I I a a ° SGOIM9S 6uuaauIBU3 jo juawpedap Z# w I SVX31 31VNH311V-vmjovIO 3N11-3NO IVOIN1O313 0 3 p �" $ S 1 3 3 1 1 H�atl CO < i z38INVa um IISI)JHO sndHOD 10 AIIO l w Up$ tl O N O Nw 3SVHd S1NNOAOUMI� dd 3000WWOO rauaipsao .1e ana ox xus�an Houdiax3o Ae 3Lra oarbAin3a SLIEWWO'JALp'la VMN3Wtl G=LZW l n ri .44 O mAp3AA$ U g�aaaaaaaaaaaaa� u g $ . . . . . . . . . . . . . � ST o < yg 3 �< C o d 4 � 5@Yff3P 3a iY a ua g- &AAFA 8H mo � Rg Sa I 35 O 8�� = F SGOIMaS 6uuaauIBU3 jo juawliedap Z#31VNb3ilV-SllV130 IVOIW313 � Q w I SVX31 0 3 C) m $ S 1 J 3 1 1 H 3 a tl C? <(+I i z3a1 wva I MumIISHJHO sndHOO 10 AIIO elreezi usroNasnaaoo aasanoaowwoozozol N o 1 w - l 3S`dHd SINNUAOWN AlVd 3WOONW0O $ a- raualpsao .le alra ox xusran rxrao we airs ox nasu3a 2 � � � o �u 08 ss 3 orb a os w } mks e o ON w §; r uw ; 4 Qwno W O gpog OUR! 0 0 0o 0 N th a b 3 a W u fi w z a 5 co ® Y z s z ® g�g 7 g N Y O LL r > W a w a 5